TDS5000B Series Digital Phosphor Oscilloscopes PHP023910

TDS5000B Series Digital Phosphor Oscilloscopes PHP023910
Online Programmer Guide
TDS5000B Series
Digital Phosphor Oscilloscopes
PHP023910
Adapted from the TDS5000B Series Online Programmer Guide
Version 1.0, February 10, 2004.
www.tektronix.com
.
Table of Contents
Copyright and Version Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1
Getting Started
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting Up Remote Communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2
3
6
Command Syntax
Syntax Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Command and Query Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Clearing the Instrument . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Command Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Constructed Mnemonics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Argument Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7
7
9
9
11
13
Command Groups
Acquisition Command Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Alias Command Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Calibration Command Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cursor Command Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Diagnostic Command Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Display Control Command Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
E--mail Command Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
File System Command Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hard Copy Command Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Histogram Command Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Horizontal Command Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Limit Test Command Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Mask Command Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Math Command Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Measurement Command Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Miscellaneous Command Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Save and Recall Command Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Status and Error Command Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Trigger Command Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Vertical Command Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Waveform Transfer Command Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Zoom Command Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- i --
15
16
17
17
19
21
23
24
25
26
27
29
31
36
37
41
42
43
44
50
51
56
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
*CAL? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
*CLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
*DDT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
*ESE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
*ESR? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
*IDN? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
*LRN? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
*OPC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
*OPT? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
*PSC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
*PUD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
*RCL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
*RST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
*SAV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
*SDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
*SRE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
*STB? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
*TRG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
*TST? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
*WAI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ACQuire:MODe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ACQuire:NUMACq? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ACQuire:NUMAVg . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ACQuire:NUMEnv . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ACQuire:NUMSAMples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ACQuire:SAMPlingmode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ACQuire:STATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ACQuire:STOPAfter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ACQuire? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ALIas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ALIas:CATalog? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ALIas:DEFine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ALIas:DELEte . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ALIas:DELEte:ALL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ALIas:DELEte:NAMe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ALIas:STATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ALLEV? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AUTOSet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AUXout:SOUrce . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AUXout? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
BELI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
BUSY? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CAL? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CALibrate:CALProbe:CH<x>? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- ii --
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
79
80
81
82
83
85
87
88
89
90
91
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
100
101
102
103
104
CALibrate:INTERNal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CALibrate:INTERNal:STARt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CALibrate:INTERNal:STATus? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CALibrate:PROBEstate:CH<x>? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CALibrate:RESults:SPC? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CALibrate:RESults? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CH<x>? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CH<x>:BANdwidth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CH<x>:COUPling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CH<x>:DESKew . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CH<x>:INVert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CH<x>:LABel:NAMe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CH<x>:LABel:XPOS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CH<x>:LABel:YPOS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CH<x>:OFFSet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CH<x>:POSition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CH<x>:PROBECal? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CH<x>:PRObe:GAIN? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CH<x>:PRObe:ID:SERnumber? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CH<x>:PRObe:ID:TYPe? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CH<x>:PRObe:ID? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CH<x>:PRObe:RESistance? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CH<x>:PRObe:UNIts? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CH<x>:PROBEFunc:EXTAtten . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CH<x>:PROBEFunc:EXTDBatten . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CH<x>:PROBEFunc:EXTUnits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CH<x>:PRObe? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CH<x>:SCAle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CH<x>:TERmination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CMDBatch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CURSor:FUNCtion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CURSor:HBArs? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CURSor:HBArs:DELTa? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CURSor:HBArs:POSITION<x> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CURSor:HBArs:UNIts? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CURSor:LINESTyle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CURSor:MODe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CURSor:SCREEN:STYle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CURSor:SOUrce<x> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CURSor:STATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CURSor:VBArs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CURSor:VBArs:DELTa? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CURSor:VBArs:POSITION<x> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CURSor:VBArs:UNIts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CURSor:WAVEform:HDELTA? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CURSor:WAVEform:HPOS<x>? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- iii --
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
122
123
124
125
126
127
128
129
130
132
133
134
135
137
138
139
141
142
143
144
145
146
147
148
150
151
152
153
154
155
156
CURSor:WAVEform:POSition<x> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CURSor:WAVEform:SOUrce<x> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CURSor:WAVEform:STYle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CURSor:WAVEform:UNIts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CURSor:WAVEform:VDELTA? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CURSor:WAVEform . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CURSor:XY:PRODDELta? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CURSor:XY:PRODUCT<x>? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CURSor:XY:RADIUS<x>? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CURSor:XY:RATDELta? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CURSor:XY:RATIO<x>? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CURSor:XY:RDELta? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CURSor:XY:READOUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CURSor:XY:RECTX<x> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CURSor:XY:RECTY<x> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CURSor:XY:THDELta? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CURSor:XY:THETA<x>? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CURSor:XY:XDELta? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CURSor:XY:YDELta? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CURSor:XY? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CURSor? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CURVe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DATa . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DATa:DESTination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DATa:ENCdg . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DATa:SOUrce . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DATa:STARt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DATa:STOP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DELEte:SETUp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DELEte:WAVEform . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DESE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DIAg:CONTROL:HALT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DIAg:CONTROL:LOOP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DIAg:EXECUTE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DIAg:ITEM? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DIAg:ITEM:FAILURES? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DIAg:ITEM:NAMe? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DIAg:ITEM:RESULT? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DIAg:ITEM:SUBITEMS? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DIAg:LEVEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DIAg:LOOPS? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DIAg:NAMe? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DIAg:NAMe:AREA? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DIAg:NAMe:SUBSYS? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DIAg:NAMe:TEST? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- iv --
157
158
159
160
161
162
163
164
165
166
167
168
169
170
171
172
173
174
175
176
177
178
180
181
182
185
186
187
189
190
191
192
193
194
195
196
197
198
199
200
201
202
203
204
205
206
DIAg:NUMITEMS? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DIAg:RESULts? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DIAg:RESULts:VERBose? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DIAg:SELect:ALL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DIAg:SELect:AREA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DIAg:SELect:LAST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DIAg:SELect:SUBSYS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DIAg:SELect:TEST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DIAg:STATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DIAg:STOP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DISplay:CLOCk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DISplay:COLOr:MATHCOLOr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DISplay:COLOr:PALEtte:IMAGEView . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DISplay:COLOr:PALEtte:RECORDView . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DISplay:COLOR:PALEtte:USEr:CARet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DISplay:COLOr:PALEtte:USEr:CH<x> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DISplay:COLOr:PALEtte:USEr:GRAticule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DISplay:COLOr:PALEtte:USEr:HIStogram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DISplay:COLOr:PALEtte:USEr:MASK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DISplay:COLOr:PALEtte:USEr:MASKHighlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DISplay:COLOr:PALEtte:USEr:MATH<x> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DISplay:COLOr:PALEtte:USEr:REF<x> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DISplay:COLOR:PALEtte:USEr? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DISplay:COLOr:REFCOLOr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DISplay:COLOr? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DISplay:FILTer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DISplay:FORMat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DISplay:GRATicule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DISplay:INTENSITy:AUTOBright . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DISplay:INTENSITy:SCREENSAVER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DISplay:INTENSITy:SCREENSAVERDELAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DISplay:INTENSITy:WAVEform:IMAGEView . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DISplay:INTENSITy:WAVEform:RECORDView . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DISplay:INTENSITy? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DISplay:PERSistence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DISplay:PERSistence:RESET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DISplay:SCREENTExt:LABel<x>:NAMe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DISplay:SCREENTExt:LABel<x>:XPOS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DISplay:SCREENTExt:LABel<x>:YPOS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DISplay:SCREENTExt:LABel<x>? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DISplay:SCREENTExt:STATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DISplay:SCREENTExt? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DISplay:SHOWREmote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DISplay:STYle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DISplay:TRIGBar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DISplay:VARpersist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- v --
207
208
209
210
211
212
213
214
215
216
217
218
219
221
223
224
225
226
227
228
229
230
231
232
233
234
235
237
239
241
242
243
244
245
246
247
248
249
250
251
252
253
254
255
256
257
DISplay? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
EMail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
EMail:ATTempts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
EMail:AUTHLogin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
EMail:AUTHPassword . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
EMail:COUnt? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
EMail:FRom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
EMail:HOSTwanted . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
EMail:IMage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
EMail:LIMit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
EMail:MASk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
EMail:MAXsize . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
EMail:MEASurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
EMail:NUMemails . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
EMail:SMTPPort . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
EMail:SMTPServer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
EMail:STATus? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
EMail:TIMEout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
EMail:TO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
EMail:TRIgger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
EMail:WAVEform . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
EVENT? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
EVMsg? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
EVQty? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
EXPort . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
EXPort:FILEName . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
EXPort:FORMat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
EXPort:IMAGe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
EXPort:PALEtte . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
EXPort:VIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FACtory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FASTAcq:STATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FASTAcq? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FILESystem:COPy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FILESystem:CWD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FILESystem:DELEte . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FILESystem:DIR? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FILESystem:MKDir . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FILESystem:PRInt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FILESystem:READFile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FILESystem:REName . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FILESystem:RMDir . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FILESystem:WRITEFile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FILESystem? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HARDCopy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HARDCopy:FILEName . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- vi --
258
260
261
262
263
264
265
266
267
268
269
270
271
272
273
274
275
276
277
278
279
280
281
282
283
284
285
286
287
288
289
290
291
292
293
294
295
296
297
298
299
300
301
303
304
305
HARDCopy:IMAGe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HARDCopy:LAYout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HARDCopy:PALEtte . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HARDCopy:PORT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HARDCopy:VIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HDR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HEADer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HIStogram? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HIStogram:Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HIStogram:BOXPcnt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HIStogram:COUNt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HIStogram:DATa? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HIStogram:DISplay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HIStogram:FUNCtion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HIStogram:MODe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HIStogram:SIZe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HIStogram:SOUrce . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HIStogram:STATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HORizontal:DIVisions? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HORizontal:FASTframe:COUNt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HORizontal:FASTframe:LENgth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HORizontal:FASTframe:MULtipleframes:
FRAMESTart:<wfm> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HORizontal:FASTframe:MULtipleframes:MODe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HORizontal:FASTframe:MULtipleframes:
NUMFRames:<wfm> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HORizontal:FASTframe:REF:FRAMe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HORizontal:FASTframe:REF:SOUrce . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HORizontal:FASTframe:SELECTED:<wfm> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HORizontal:FASTframe:STATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HORizontal:FASTframe:SUMFrame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HORizontal:FASTframe:TIMEStamp:ALL:<wfm>? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HORizontal:FASTframe:TIMEStamp:BETWeen:<wfm>? . . . . . . . . . .
HORizontal:FASTframe:TIMEStamp:DELTa:<wfm>? . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HORizontal:FASTframe:TIMEStamp:FRAMe:<wfm>? . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HORizontal:FASTframe:TIMEStamp:REF? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HORizontal:FASTframe:TIMEStamp:
SELECTED:<wfm>? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HORizontal:FASTframe:TRACk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HORizontal:FASTframe? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HORizontal[:MAIn]:DELay:MODe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HORizontal[:MAIn]:DELay:POSition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HORizontal[:MAIn]:DELay:TIMe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HORizontal:MAIn:INTERPRatio? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HORizontal[:MAIn]:POSition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HORizontal:MAIn:SAMPLERate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HORizontal[:MAIn]:SCAle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- vii --
307
308
309
310
311
312
313
315
316
318
320
321
322
324
325
327
328
330
331
332
333
334
335
336
338
339
340
341
342
343
344
345
346
347
348
349
351
352
353
354
355
356
357
358
HORizontal:MAIn:UNIts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HORizontal:MAIn:UNIts:STRing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HORizontal:MAIn? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HORizontal:POSition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HORizontal:RECOrdlength . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HORizontal:RESOlution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HORizontal:ROLL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HORizontal:SCAle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HORizontal:TRIGger:POSition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HORizontal? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ID? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LIMit:Beep . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LIMit:COMpare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LIMit:COMpare:CH<x> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LIMit:COMpare:MATH<x> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LIMit:COMpare:REF<x> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LIMit:EMail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LIMit:HARDCopy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LIMit:HIGHLIGHTHits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LIMit:LOCk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LIMit:LOG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LIMit:SAVEWFM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LIMit:SAVWFM:FILEName . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LIMit:SRQ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LIMit:STATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LIMit:STOPOnviolation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LIMit:TEMPlate:STORe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LIMit:TEMPLate:TOLerance:HORizontal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LIMit:TEMPLate:TOLerance:VERTical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LIMit? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LOCk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MASK? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MASK:AUTOAdjust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MASK:AUTOAdjust:HDELTA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MASK:AUTOAdjust:VDELTA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MASK:AUTOSet:AUTOAdjust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MASK:AUTOSet:HPOS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MASK:AUTOSet:HSCAle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MASK:AUTOSet:MODe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MASK:AUTOSet:OFFSETAdj . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MASK:AUTOSet:STANdard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MASK:AUTOSet:TRIGger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MASK:AUTOSet:VPOS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MASK:AUTOSet:VSCAle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MASK:COPy:USER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MASK:COUNt RESET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- viii --
359
360
361
362
363
364
365
366
367
368
369
370
371
372
373
374
375
376
377
378
379
380
381
382
383
384
385
386
387
388
389
390
391
392
393
394
395
396
397
398
399
407
408
409
410
411
MASK:COUNt:FAILURES? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MASK:COUNt:HITS? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MASK:COUNt:SEG<m>:HITS? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MASK:COUNt:STATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MASK:COUNt:TESTS? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MASK:COUNt:TOTal? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MASK:COUNt:VIOLATIONS? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MASK:COUNt:WAVEFORMS? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MASK:DISplay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MASK:FILTer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MASK:HIGHLIGHTHits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MASK:INVert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MASK:LOCk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MASK:MARgin:PERCent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MASK:MARgin:STATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MASK:MASKPRE:AMPlitude . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MASK:MASKPRE:HSCAle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MASK:MASKPRE:HTRIGPOS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MASK:MASKPRE:PATTERNBITS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MASK:MASKPRE:PRESAMPBITS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MASK:MASKPRE:RECOrdlength . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MASK:MASKPRE:SERIALTRIG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MASK:MASKPRE:TRIGTOSAMP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MASK:MASKPRE:VOFFSet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MASK:MASKPRE:VPOS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MASK:MASKPRE:VSCAle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MASK:MASKPRE:WIDth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MASK:POLarity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MASK:SEG<m> DELEte . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MASK:SEG<m>:NR_Pt? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MASK:SEG<m>:POINTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MASK:SOUrce . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MASK:STANdard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MASK:STOPOnviolation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MASK:TESt:AUX:COMPLetion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MASK:TESt:AUX:FAILure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MASK:TESt:BEEP:COMPLetion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MASK:TESt:BEEP:FAILure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MASK:TESt:DELay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MASK:TESt:HARDCopy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MASK:TESt:LOG:FAILure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MASK:TESt:REPeat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MASK:TESt:SAMple . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MASK:TESt:SAMple:THReshold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MASK:TESt:SAVEWFM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MASK:TESt:SAVEWFM:FILEName . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- ix --
412
413
414
415
416
417
418
419
420
421
422
423
424
425
426
427
428
429
430
431
432
433
434
435
436
437
438
439
440
441
442
443
444
453
454
455
456
457
458
459
460
461
462
463
464
465
MASK:TESt:SRQ:COMPLetion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MASK:TESt:SRQ:FAILure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MASK:TESt:STATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MASK:TESt:STATUS? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MASK:TESt:STOP:FAILure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MASK:TESt:THReshold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MASK:TESt:WAVEform . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MASK:USER:AMPlitude . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MASK:USER:BITRate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MASK:USER:HSCAle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MASK:USER:HTRIGPOS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MASK:USER:LABel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MASK:USER:PATTERNBITS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MASK:USER:PRESAMPBITS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MASK:USER:RECOrdlength . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MASK:USER:SEG<m> DELEte . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MASK:USER:SEG<m>:NR_Pt? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MASK:USER:SEG<m>:POINTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MASK:USER:TRIGTOSAMP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MASK:USER:VOFFSet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MASK:USER:VPOS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MASK:USER:VSCAle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MASK:USER:WIDth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MATH<x>:DEFIne . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MATH<x>:LABel:NAMe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MATH<x>:LABel:XPOS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MATH<x>:LABel:YPOS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MATH<x>:NUMAVg . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MATH<x>:SPECTral? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MATH<x>:SPECTral:CENTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MATH<x>:SPECTral:GATEPOS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MATH<x>:SPECTral:GATEWIDTH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MATH<x>:SPECTral:LOCk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MATH<x>:SPECTral:MAG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MATH<x>:SPECTral:PHASE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MATH<x>:SPECTral:REFLevel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MATH<x>:SPECTral:REFLEVELOffset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MATH<x>:SPECTral:RESBw . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MATH<x>:SPECTral:SPAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MATH<x>:SPECTral:SUPPress . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MATH<x>:SPECTral:UNWRap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MATH<x>:SPECTral:WINdow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MATH<x>:UNITString . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MATH<x>:VERTical:POSition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MATH<x>:VERTical:SCAle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MATHVAR:VAR<x> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- x --
466
467
468
469
470
471
472
473
474
475
476
477
478
479
480
481
482
483
484
485
486
487
488
489
491
492
493
494
495
496
497
498
499
501
502
503
504
506
507
509
510
511
513
514
516
518
MATH<x>? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MEASUrement:GATing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MEASUrement:IMMed? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MEASUrement:IMMed:DELay? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MEASUrement:IMMed:DELay:DIREction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MEASUrement:IMMed:DELay:EDGE[1] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MEASUrement:IMMed:DELay:EDGE2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MEASUrement:IMMed:NOISe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MEASUrement:IMMed:REFLevel:ABSolute:HIGH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MEASUrement:IMMed:REFLevel:ABSolute:LOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MEASUrement:IMMed:REFLevel:ABSolute:MID[1] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MEASUrement:IMMed:REFLevel:ABSolute:MID2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MEASUrement:IMMed:REFLevel:METhod . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MEASUrement:IMMed:REFLevel:PERCent:HIGH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MEASUrement:IMMed:REFLevel:PERCent:LOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MEASUrement:IMMed:REFLevel:PERCent:MID[1] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MEASUrement:IMMed:REFLevel:PERCent:MID2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MEASUrement:IMMed:REFLevel? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MEASUrement:SOURCE<x>:SIGType . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MEASUrement:IMMed:SOURCE[1] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MEASUrement:IMMed:SOURCE2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MEASurement:IMMed:SOUrce<x>:SIGType . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MEASUrement:IMMed:TYPe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MEASUrement:IMMed:UNIts? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MEASUrement:IMMed:VALue? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:COUNt? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:MAXimum? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:MEAN? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:MINImum? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MEASURement:MEAS<x>:NOISe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:STDdev? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:DELay:DIREction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:DELay:EDGE[1] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:DELay:EDGE2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:DELay? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:REFLevel:ABSolute:HIGH . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:REFLevel:ABSolute:LOW . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:REFLevel:ABSolute:MID[1] . . . . . . . . . . . .
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:REFLevel:ABSolute:MID2 . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:REFLevel:METHod . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:REFLevel:PERCent:HIGH . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:REFLevel:PERCent:LOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:REFLevel:PERCent:MID[1] . . . . . . . . . . . .
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:REFLevel:PERCent:MID2 . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:REFLevel? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:SOURCE[1] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- xi --
519
520
521
522
523
524
525
526
527
528
529
530
531
532
533
534
535
536
537
538
540
542
543
550
551
552
553
554
555
556
557
558
559
560
561
562
563
564
565
566
567
568
569
570
571
572
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:SOURCE2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MEASurement:MEAS<x>:SOUrce<x>:SIGType . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:STATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:TYPe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:UNIts? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:VALue? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MEASUrement:METHod . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MEASUrement:NOISe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MEASUrement:REFLevel:ABSolute:HIGH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MEASUrement:REFLevel:ABSolute:LOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MEASUrement:REFLevel:ABSolute:MID[1] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MEASUrement:REFLevel:ABSolute:MID2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MEASUrement:REFLevel:METHod . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MEASUrement:REFLevel:PERCent:HIGH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MEASUrement:REFLevel:PERCent:LOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MEASUrement:REFLevel:PERCent:MID[1] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MEASUrement:REFLevel:PERCent:MID2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MEASUrement:REFLevel? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MEASUrement:STATIstics:COUNt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MEASUrement:STATIstics:MODe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MEASUrement:STATIstics:WEIghting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MEASUrement? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
NEWpass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PASSWord . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RECAll:MASK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RECAll:SETUp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RECAll:WAVEform . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
REF<x>:LABel? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
REF<x>:LABel:NAMe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
REF<x>:LABel:XPOS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
REF<x>:LABel:YPOS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
REF<x>:HORizontal:POSition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
REF<x>:VERTical:POSition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
REF<x>:VERTical:SCAle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
REM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ROSc:SOUrce . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ROSc:STATE? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SAVe:MASK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SAVe:SETUp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SAVe:WAVEform . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SAVe:WAVEform:FILEFormat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SELect:<wfm> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SELect:CONTRol <wfm> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SELect? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SETUp:NAMe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- xii --
574
576
577
579
586
587
588
589
591
592
593
594
595
596
597
598
599
600
601
602
603
604
605
606
607
608
609
611
612
613
614
615
616
617
619
621
622
623
624
625
626
627
629
630
631
632
SET? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TEKSecure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TEST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TEST:RESults? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TEST:RESults:VERBose? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TEST:STOP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TIME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TRIGger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TRIGger:A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TRIGger:A:COMMunication:AMI...PULSEForm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TRIGger:A:COMMunication:AMI...THReshold:HIGH . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TRIGger:A:COMMunication:AMI...THReshold:LOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TRIGger:A:COMMunication:BITRate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TRIGger:A:COMMunication:CLOCk:POLarity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TRIGger:A:COMMunication:CMI:PULSEForm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TRIGger:A:COMMunication:CODe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TRIGger:A:COMMunication:SOUrce . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TRIGger:A:COMMunication:SOUrce:TYPe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TRIGger:A:COMMunication:STANdard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TRIGger:A:EDGE:COUPling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TRIGger:A:EDGE:SLOpe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TRIGger:A:EDGE:SOUrce . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TRIGger:A:EDGE? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TRIGger:A:HOLDoff:ACTUal? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TRIGger:A:HOLDoff:BY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TRIGger:A:HOLDoff:TIMe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TRIGger:A:HOLDoff? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TRIGger:A:LEVel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:CLAss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:FUNCtion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:INPut:CH<x> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:INPut? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:PATtern:INPut:CH2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:PATtern:INPut:CH4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:PATtern:WHEn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:PATtern:WHEn:LESSLimit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:PATtern:WHEn:MORELimit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:PATtern? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:SETHold:CLOCk:EDGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:SETHold:CLOCk:SOUrce . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:SETHold:CLOCk:THReshold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:SETHold:CLOCk? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:SETHold:DATa:SOUrce . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:SETHold:DATa:THReshold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:SETHold:DATa? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:SETHold:HOLDTime . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- xiii --
633
634
635
636
637
638
639
640
642
644
645
646
647
648
649
650
651
652
653
658
660
661
662
663
664
665
666
667
668
670
671
673
674
675
676
678
679
680
681
682
683
684
685
686
687
688
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:SETHold:SETTime . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:SETHold? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:STATE:INPut:CH2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:STATE:INPut:CH4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:STATE:WHEn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:STATE? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:THReshold:CH<x> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:THReshold? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TRIGger:A:LOGIc? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TRIGger:A:MODe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TRIGger:A:PULse:CLAss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TRIGger:A:PULse:GLItch:POLarity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TRIGger:A:PULse:GLItch:TRIGIF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TRIGger:A:PULse:GLItch:WIDth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TRIGger:A:PULse:GLItch? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TRIGger:A:PULse:RUNT:LOGIc:INPUT:CH<x> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TRIgger:A:PULse:RUNT:LOGIc:INPUT? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TRIGger:A:PULse:RUNT:LOGIc:THReshold:CH<x> . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TRIGger:A:PULse:RUNT:LOGIc? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TRIGger:A:PULse:RUNT:POLarity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TRIGger:A:PULse:RUNT:THReshold:BOTh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TRIGger:A:PULse:RUNT:THReshold:HIGH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TRIGger:A:PULse:RUNT:THReshold:LOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TRIGger:A:PULse:RUNT:THReshold? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TRIGger:A:PULse:RUNT:WHEn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TRIGger:A:PULse:RUNT:WIDth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TRIGger:A:PULse:RUNT? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TRIGger:A:PULse:SOUrce . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TRIGger:A:PULse:TIMEOut:POLarity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TRIGger:A:PULse:TIMEOut:TIMe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TRIGger:A:PULse:TIMEOut? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TRIGger:A:PULse:TRANsition:DELTATime . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TRIGger:A:PULse:TRANsition:POLarity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TRIGger:A:PULse:TRANsition:THReshold:BOTh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TRIGger:A:PULse:TRANsition:THReshold:HIGH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TRIGger:A:PULse:TRANsition:THReshold:LOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TRIGger:A:PULse:TRANsition:THReshold? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TRIGger:A:PULse:TRANsition:WHEn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TRIGger:A:PULse:TRANsition? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TRIGger:A:PULse:WIDth:HIGHLimit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TRIGger:A:PULse:WIDth:LOWLimit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TRIGger:A:PULse:WIDth:POLarity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TRIGger:A:PULse:WIDth:WHEn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TRIGger:A:PULse:WIDth? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TRIGger:A:PULse:WINdow:LOGIc:INPUT:CH<x> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TRIGger:A:PULse:WINdow:LOGIc:INPUT? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- xiv --
689
690
691
692
693
694
695
696
697
698
699
701
702
703
704
705
706
707
708
709
710
711
712
713
714
716
717
718
719
720
721
722
723
724
725
726
727
728
729
730
731
732
733
735
736
737
TRIgger:A:PULse:WINdow:LOGIc:THReshold:CH<x> . . . . . . . . . . . .
TRIGger:A:PULse:WINdow:LOGIc? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TRIGger:A:PULse:WINdow:THReshold:BOTh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TRIGger:A:PULse:WINdow:THReshold:HIGH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TRIGger:A:PULse:WINdow:THReshold:LOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TRIGger:A:PULse:WINdow:THReshold? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TRIGger:A:PULse:WINdow:TYPe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TRIGger:A:PULse:WINdow:WHEn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TRIgger:A:PULse:WINdow:WIDTH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TRIGger:A:PULse:WINdow? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TRIGger:A:PULse? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TRIGger:A:TYPe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TRIGger:A:VIDeo:CUSTom:FORMat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TRIGger:A:VIDeo:CUSTom:SCAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TRIGger:A:VIDeo:CUSTom? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TRIGger:A:VIDeo:FIELD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TRIGger:A:VIDeo:HOLdoff:FIELD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TRIGger:A:VIDeo:LINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TRIGger:A:VIDeo:POLarity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TRIGger:A:VIDeo:SCAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TRIGger:A:VIDeo:SOUrce . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TRIGger:A:VIDeo:STANdard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TRIGger:A:VIDeo? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TRIGger:B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TRIGger:B:BY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TRIGger:B:EDGE:COUPling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TRIGger:B:EDGE:SLOpe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TRIGger:B:EDGE:SOUrce . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TRIGger:B:EDGE? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TRIGger:B:EVENTS:COUNt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TRIGger:B:EVENTS? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TRIGger:B:LEVel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TRIGger:B:STATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TRIGger:B:TIMe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TRIGger:B:TYPe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TRIGger:STATE? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
UNLock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
VERBose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
WFMInpre? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
WFMInpre:BIT_Nr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
WFMInpre:BN_Fmt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
WFMInpre:BYT_Nr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
WFMInpre:BYT_Or . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
WFMInpre:ENCdg . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
WFMInpre:NR_FR? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
WFMInpre:NR_Pt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- xv --
738
739
740
741
742
743
744
745
746
747
748
749
751
752
754
755
757
758
760
761
763
764
766
767
768
770
771
772
773
774
775
776
777
778
779
780
782
783
784
785
786
787
788
789
790
791
WFMInpre:PT_Fmt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
WFMInpre:PT_Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
WFMInpre:WFId . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
WFMInpre:XINcr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
WFMInpre:XUNit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
WFMInpre:XZEro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
WFMInpre:YMUlt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
WFMInpre:YOFf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
WFMInpre:YUNit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
WFMInpre:YZEro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
WFMOutpre? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
WFMOutpre:BIT_Nr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
WFMOutpre:BN_Fmt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
WFMOutpre:BYT_Nr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
WFMOutpre:BYT_Or . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
WFMOutpre:ENCdg . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
WFMOutpre:NR_FR? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
WFMOutpre:NR_Pt? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
WFMOutpre:PT_Fmt? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
WFMOutpre:PT_Off? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
WFMOutpre:PT_OR? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
WFMOutpre:WFId? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
WFMOutpre:XINcr? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
WFMOutpre:XUNit? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
WFMOutpre:XZEro? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
WFMOutpre:YMUlt? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
WFMOutpre:YOFf? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
WFMOutpre:YUNit? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
WFMOutpre:YZEro? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
WFMPre:NR_FR? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
WAVFrm? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ZOOm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ZOOm:GRAticule:SIZE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ZOOm:MODe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ZOOm:SCROLL:DIREction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ZOOm:SCROLL:LOCk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ZOOm:SCROLL:SPEED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ZOOm:GRAticule:SPLit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ZOOm:ZOOM<x> . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ZOOm:ZOOM<x>:<wfm>:HORizontal:POSition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ZOOm:ZOOM<x>:<wfm>:HORizontal:SCAle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ZOOm:ZOOM<x>:<wfm>:VERTical:POSition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ZOOm:ZOOM<x>:<wfm>:VERTical:SCAle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ZOOm:ZOOM<x>:SCROLLLock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ZOOm:ZOOM<x>:STATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- xvi --
792
794
795
796
797
798
799
800
801
802
803
804
805
806
807
808
809
810
811
812
813
814
816
817
818
819
820
821
822
823
824
826
828
829
830
831
832
833
834
835
836
837
838
839
840
Status and Events
Registers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Queues . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Event Handling Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Synchronization Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
841
845
845
846
853
Programming Examples
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Compiling GPIB Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Visual C++ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
858
859
859
Miscellaneous
Character Charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reserved Words . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Factory Default Setup Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GPIB Interface Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- xvii --
861
862
866
885
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- xviii --
Copyright and Version Information
Copyright  Tektronix, Inc. All rights reserved. Licensed software
products are owned by Tektronix or its suppliers and are protected by
United States copyright laws and international treaty provisions.
Copyright  Tektronix, Inc. All rights reserved. Licensed software
products are owned by Tektronix or its suppliers and are protected by
United States copyright laws and international treaty provisions.
Use, duplication or disclosure by the Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in subparagraph (c)(1)(ii) of the Rights in Technical
Data and Computer Software clause at DFARS 252.227--7013, or subparagraphs (c)(1) and (2) of the Commercial Computer SoftwareRestricted Rights clause at FAR 52.227--19, as applicable.
Tektronix products are covered by U.S. and foreign patents, issued and
pending. Information in this documentation supercedes that in all previously published material. Specifications and price change privileges
reserved.
Tektronix, Inc. P.O. Box 500, Beaverton, OR 97077
TEKTRONIX, TEK, and TEKPROBE are registered trademarks of
Tektronix, Inc.
FrameScan is a trademark of Tektronix, Inc.
TDS5000B Series Programmer Online Guide
OLH0239, Version 1.00 o(February 10, 2004
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 1 --
Getting Started
Introduction
This online programmer guide provides you with the information required to use GPIB commands for remotely controlling your instrument. With this information, you can write computer programs that will
perform functions such as setting the front--panel controls, taking measurements, performing statistical calculations, and exporting data for
use in other programs, such as spreadsheets.
Besides the traditional GPIB electronic interface (referred to as the
physical GPIB interface), your instrument is provided with a TekVISA
GPIB--compatible interface (referred to as the virtual GPIB interface).
This is a software Application Programming Interface (API) which enables you to communicate with the instrument in a variety of ways, including via the internet. With the following two exceptions, these interfaces are completely independent:
H
HEADER. Command headers enabled or disabled on one interface
are correspondingly enabled or disabled on the other interface.
Refer to the command descriptions for more detailed information.
H
VERBOSE. Verbosity enabled or disabled on one interface is
correspondingly enabled or disabled on the other interface. Refer to
the command description for more detailed information.
Refer to Documentation for information on related manuals and documents.
The programmer guide is divided into the following major topics
(books):
H
Getting Started. This topic introduces you to the online help and
provides basic information about setting up your instrument for
remote control.
H
Command Syntax. This topic provides an overview of the
command syntax that you will use to communicate with the
instrument and other general information about commands, such as
how commands and queries are constructed, how to enter
commands, constructed mnemonics, and argument types.
H
Command Groups. This topic contains all the commands listed in
functional groups. Each group consists of an overview of the
commands in that group and a table that lists all the commands and
queries for that group. You can click a command in the listing to
display a detailed description of the command.
H
Status and Events. This topic discusses the status and event
reporting system for the GPIB interfaces. This system informs you
of certain significant events that occur within the instrument.
Topics that are discussed include registers, queues, event handling
sequences, synchronization methods, and messages that the
instrument may return, including error messages.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 2 --
H
Miscellaneous. This topic contains miscellaneous information,
such as a list of reserved words, a table of the factory initialization
(default) settings, and GPIB interface specifications that may be
helpful when using GPIB commands to remotely control the
instrument.
Setting Up Remote Communications
Before setting up the instrument for remote communications using the
electronic (physical) GPIB interface, you should familiarize yourself
with the following GPIB requirements:
H
A unique device address must be assigned to each device on the
bus. No two devices can share the same device address.
H
No more than 15 devices can be connected to any one line.
H
One device should be connected for every 6 feet (2 meters) of
cable used.
H
No more than 65 feet (20 meters) of cable should be used to
connect devices to a bus.
H
At least two--thirds of the devices on the network should be
powered on while using the network.
H
Connect the devices on the network in a star or linear configuration. Do not use loop or parallel configurations.
Connecting to the Instrument
Your instrument has a 24--pin GPIB connector on its rear (side) panel.
This connector has a D--type shell and conforms to IEEE Std
488.11987. Attach an IEEE Std 488.11987 GPIB cable to this
connector and to your controller as shown in the following figure.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 3 --
If necessary, the GPIB connectors can be stacked as shown in the figure
below.
Setting the GPIB Address
To function correctly, your instrument must have a unique device address. The default settings for the GPIB configuration are:
H
GPIB Address
1
H
GPIB ModeGPIB
Talk/Listen
To change either of the GPIB settings, do the following:
1.
Select GPIB Configuration… from the Utilities menu.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 4 --
2.
Click the Configuration Talk/Listen button.
3.
Change the GPIB Address to a unique address.
4.
Click the Close button.
The instrument is now set up for bidirectional communication with
your controller.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 5 --
Documentation
TDS5000B Series Digital Phosphor Oscilloscopes
Quick Start User Manual. The user manual has information about installing and operating the instrument. It also provides concepts and theories about
using the instrument that are not covered in the online
help.
TDS5000B Series Online Help. This is an online
help system that is integrated with the User Interface
application that ships with this product. The online
help provides in--depth operation and user interface
help.
Getting Started with OpenChoicet Solutions
Manual. A book that explores some options for getting data from your instrument into any one of several
available analysis tools.
TDS5000B Series Digital Phosphor Oscilloscopes
Specifications and Performance Verification. Instrument specifications and a performance verification
procedure is available as a printable PDF file on the
TDS5000B Series Product Software CD--ROM.
TekVISA Programmer Manual. This manual is
available as a printable PDF file on the TDS5000B
Series Product Software CD--ROM. The manual describes TekVISA, the Tektronix implementation of
the VISA Application Programming Interface (API).
TekVISA is industry--compliant software for writing
interoperable instrument drivers in a variety of Application Development Environments (ADEs).
Optional Applications Software for Tektronix Windows- Based Instruments (CD--ROM). This CD-ROM contains trial versions of application--specific
programs that you can install and run five times per
application. To purchase an application, contact your
local Tektronix representative.
Other Included Documentation. Installation booklets are included in the TDS5000B Series Product
Software and TDS5000B Series Operating System
Restore Software CD--ROM packages.
TDS5000B Series Digital Phosphor Oscilloscopes
Service Manual. A printed service manual is available as an optional accessory. The service manual
includes procedures to service the instrument to module levels. This manual is also available as a printable
PDF file on the TDS5000B Series Product Software
CD--ROM.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 6 --
Command Syntax
Syntax Overview
You can control the operations and functions of the instrument through
the GPIB interface using commands and queries. The related topics
listed below describe the syntax of these commands and queries. The
topics also describe the conventions that the instrument uses to process
them. See the Command Groups topic in the table of contents for a listing of the commands by command group, or use the index to locate a
specific command.
Backus-- Naur Form Notation
This documentation describes the commands and queries using Backus--Naur Form (BNF) notation. Refer to the following table for the
symbols that are used.
Symbols for Backus--Naur Form
Symbol
Meaning
<>
Defined element
::=
Is defined as
|
Exclusive OR
{}
Group; one element is required
[]
Optional; can be omitted
...
Previous element(s) may be repeated
()
Comment
Command and Query Structure
Overview
Commands consist of set commands and query commands (usually
called commands and queries). Commands modify instrument settings
or tell the instrument to perform a specific action. Queries cause the
instrument to return data and status information.
Most commands have both a set form and a query form. The query
form of the command differs from the set form by its question mark on
the end. For example, the set command ACQuire:MODe has a query
form ACQuire:MODe?. Not all commands have both a set and a query
form. Some commands have set only and some have query only.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 7 --
Messages
A command message is a command or query name followed by any
information the instrument needs to execute the command or query.
Command messages may contain five element types, defined in the
following table.
Command Message Elements
Symbol
Meaning
<Header>
This is the basic command name. If the
header ends with a question mark, the
command is a query. The header may begin
with a colon (:) character. If the command is
concatenated with other commands, the
beginning colon is required. Never use the
beginning colon with command headers
beginning with a star (*).
<Mnemonic>
This is a headersubfunction. Some
command headers have only one mnemonic.
If a command header has multiple
mnemonics, a colon (:) character always
separates them from each other.
<Argument>
This is a quantity, quality, restriction, or limit
associated with the header. Some
commands have no arguments while others
have multiple arguments. A <space>
separates arguments from the header. A
<comma> separates arguments from each
other.
<Comma>
A single comma is used between arguments
of multiple--argument commands. Optionally,
there may be white space characters before
and after the comma.
<Space>
A white space character is used between a
command header and the related argument.
Optionally, a white space may consist of
multiple white space characters.
Commands
Commands cause the instrument to perform a specific function or
change one of the settings. Commands have the structure:
[:]<Header>[<Space><Argument>[<Comma>
<Argument>]...]
A command header consists of one or more mnemonics arranged in a
hierarchical or tree structure. The first mnemonic is the base or root of
the tree and each subsequent mnemonic is a level or branch off the previous one. Commands at a higher level in the tree may affect those at a
lower level. The leading colon (:) always returns you to the base of the
command tree.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 8 --
Queries
Queries cause the instrument to return status or setting information.
Queries have the structure:
• [:]<Header>?
• [:]<Header>?[<Space><Argument>
[<Coma><Argument>]...]
You can specify a query command at any level within the command
tree unless otherwise noted. These branch queries return information
about all the mnemonics below the specified branch or level. For example, HIStogram:STATistics:STDdev? returns the standard deviation of
the histogram, while HIStogram:STATistics? returns all the histogram
statistics, and HIStogram? returns all the histogram parameters.
Headers
You can control whether the instrument returns headers as part of the
query response. Use the HEADer command to control this feature. If
header is on, the query response returns command headers, then formats itself as a valid set command. When header is off, the response
includes only the values. This may make it easier to parse and extract
the information from the response. The table below shows the difference in responses.
Comparison of Header Off and Header On Responses
Query
Header Off
Header On
TIME?
”14:30:00”
:TIME ”14:30:00”
ACQuire:NUMAVg?
100
:ACQUIRE:NUMAVG 100
Clearing the Instrument
You can clear the Output Queue and reset the instrument to accept a
new command or query by using the selected Device Clear (DCL)
GPIB function. Refer to your GPIB library documentation for further
details about the selected Device Clear operation.
Command Entry
Rules
The following rules apply when entering commands:
H
You can enter commands in upper or lower case.
H
You can precede any command with white space characters. White
space characters include any combination of the ASCII control
characters 00 through 09 and 0B through 20 hexadecimal (0
through 9 and 11 through 32 decimal).
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 9 --
H
The instrument ignores commands consisting of any combination
of white space characters and line feeds.
Abbreviating
You can abbreviate many instrument commands. Each command in this
documentation shows the abbreviations in capitals. For example, you
can enter the command ACQuire:NUMAvg simply as ACQ:NUMA or
acq:numa.
Abbreviation rules may change over time as new instrument models are
introduced. Thus, for the most robust code, use the full spelling.
If you use the HEADer command to have command headers included
as part of query responses, you can further control whether the returned
headers are abbreviated or are full--length with the VERBose command.
Concatenating
You can concatenate any combination of set commands and queries
using a semicolon (;). The instrument executes concatenated commands
in the order received.
When concatenating commands and queries, you must follow these
rules:
1.
Separate completely different headers by a semicolon and by the
beginning colon on all commands except the first one. For
example, the commands TRIGger:MODe NORMal and ACQuire:NUMAVg 10, can be concatenated into the following single
command:
TRIGger:MODe NORMal;:ACQuire:NUMAVg 10
2.
If concatenated commands have headers that differ by only the last
mnemonic, you can abbreviate the second command and eliminate
the beginning colon. For example, you can concatenate the
commands ACQuire:MODe ENVelope and ACQuire:NUMAVg 10
into a single command:
ACQuire:MODe ENVelope; NUMAVg 10
The longer version works equally well:
ACQuire:MODe ENVelope;:ACQuire:NUMAVg 10
3.
Never precede a star (*) command with a colon:
ACQuire:MODe ENVelope;*OPC
Any commands that follow will be processed as if the star command was not there so the commands, ACQuire:MODe ENVelope;*OPC;NUMAVg 10 will set the acquisition mode to envelope and set the number of acquisitions for averaging to 10.
4.
When you concatenate queries, the responses to all the queries are
concatenated into a single response message. For example, if the
display background color is white and the display foreground color
is black, the concatenated query DISplay:COLor:BACKGround?;FOREGround? will return the following.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 10 --
If the header is on:
:DISPLAY:COLOR:BACKGROUND 7;
:DISPLAY:COLOR:FOREGROUND 0
If the header is off:
7;0
5.
Set commands and queries may be concatenated in the same
message. For example,
ACQuire:MODe SAMple;NUMAVg?;STATE?
is a valid message that sets the acquisition mode to sample. The
message then queries the number of acquisitions for averaging
and the acquisition state. Concatenated commands and queries
are executed in the order received.
Here are some invalid concatenations:
H
DISPlay:STYle:NORMal;ACQuire:NUMAVg 10
(no colon before ACQuire)
H
DISPlay:COLor:CURSor1
1;:CURSor2 5
(extra colon before CURSor2; use DISPlay:COLor:CURSor1
1:CURSor2 5 instead)
H
DISPlay:STYle:NORMal;:*OPC
(colon before a star (*) command)
H
DISPlay:COLor:CURSor1
1;COLor:CURSor2 5
(levels of the mnemonics are different; either remove the second
use of COLor or place :DISPlay: in front of COLor:CURSor2 5)
Terminating
This documentation uses <EOM> (End of message) to represent a message terminator.
End of Message Terminator
Symbol
Meaning
<EOM>
Message terminator
The end--of--message terminator must be the END message (EOI asserted concurrently with the last data byte). The last data byte may be
an ASCII linefeed (LF) character.
This instrument does not support ASCII LF only message termination.
The instrument always terminates outgoing messages with LF and EOI.
Constructed Mnemonics
Some header mnemonics specify one of a range of mnemonics. For
example, a channel mnemonic can be CH1, CH2, CH3, or CH4 for
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 11 --
four--channel instruments or CH1 or CH2 for two--channel instruments.
You use these mnemonics in the command just as you do any other
mnemonic. For example, there is a CH1:POSition command, and there
is also a CH2:POSition command. In the command descriptions, this
list of choices is abbreviated as CH<x>.
Cursor Position Mnemonics
When cursors are displayed, commands may specify which cursor of
the pair to use.
Cursor Mnemonics
Symbol
Meaning
CURSOR<x>
A cursor selector; <x> is either 1 or 2.
POSITION<x>
A cursor selector; <x> is either 1 or 2.
HPOS<x>
A cursor selector; <x> is either 1 or 2.
Math Specifier Mnemonics
Commands can specify the mathematical waveform to use as a mnemonic in the header.
Math Specifier Mnemonics
Symbol
Meaning
MATH<x>
A math waveform specifier; <x> is 1 through 4 for
four--channel instruments or 1 through 2 for two-channel instruments.
Measurement Specifier Mnemonics
Commands can specify which measurement to set or query as a mnemonic in the header. Up to eight automated measurements may be displayed on a four--channel instrument or four automated measurements
on a two--channel instrument.
Measurement Specifier Mnemonics
Symbol
Meaning
MEAS<x>
A measurement specifier; <x> is 1 through 8 for
four--channel instruments or 1 through 4 for two-channel instruments.
Channel Mnemonics
Commands specify the channel to use as a mnemonic in the header.
Channel Mnemonics
Symbol
Meaning
CH<x>
A channel specifier; <x> is 1 through 4 for four-channel instruments and 1 through 2 for two-channel instruments.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 12 --
Reference Waveform Mnemonics
Commands can specify the reference waveform to use as a mnemonic
in the header.
Reference Waveform Mnemonics
Symbol
Meaning
REF<x>
A reference waveform specifier; <x> is 1 through 4
for four--channel instruments or 1 through 2 for two-channel instruments.
Argument Types
Numeric
Many instrument commands require numeric arguments. The syntax
shows the format that the instrument returns in response to a query.
This is also the preferred format when sending the command to the instrument though any of the formats will be accepted. This documentation represents these arguments as follows:
Numeric Arguments
Symbol
Meaning
<NR1>
Signed integer value
<NR2>
Floating point value without an exponent
<NR3>
Floating point value with an exponent
Most numeric arguments will be automatically forced to a valid setting,
either by rounding or truncating, when an invalid number is input unless otherwise noted in the command description.
Quoted String
Some commands accept or return data in the form of a quoted string,
which is simply a group of ASCII characters enclosed by a single quote
(’) or double quote (”). The following is an example of a quoted string:
”This is a quoted string”. This documentation represents these arguments as follows:
Quoted String Argument
Symbol
Meaning
<QString>
Quoted string of ASCII text
A quoted string can include any character defined in the 7--bit ASCII
character set. Follow these rules when you use quoted strings:
1.
Use the same type of quote character to open and close the string.
For example: ”this is a valid string”.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 13 --
2.
You can mix quotation marks within a string as long as you follow
the previous rule. For example, ”this is an ’acceptable’ string”.
3.
You can include a quote character within a string by repeating the
quote. For example: ”here is a ”” mark”.
4.
Strings can have upper or lower case characters.
5.
If you use a GPIB network, you cannot terminate a quoted string
with the END message before the closing delimiter.
6.
A carriage return or line feed embedded in a quoted string does not
terminate the string, but is treated as just another character in the
string.
7.
The maximum length of a quoted string returned from a query is
1000 characters.
Here are some invalid strings:
H
”Invalid string argument’ (quotes are not of the same type)
H
”test<EOI>” (termination character is embedded in the string)
Block
Several instrument commands use a block argument form (see the following table).
Block Arguments
Symbol
Meaning
<NZDig>
A nonzero digit character in the range of 1–9
<Dig>
A digit character, in the range of 0–9
<DChar>
A character with the hexadecimal equivalent of 00
through FF (0 through 255 decimal)
<Block>
A block of data bytes defined as:
<Block> ::=
{#<NZDig><Dig>[<Dig>...][<DChar>...]
|#0[<DChar>...]<terminator>}
<NZDig> specifies the number of <Dig> elements that follow. Taken
together, the <NZDig> and <Dig> elements form a decimal integer that
specifies how many <DChar> elements follow.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 14 --
Command Groups
Acquisition Command Group
Use the commands in the Acquisition Command Group to set up the
modes and functions that control how the instrument acquires the signals you input to the channels and processes them into waveforms.
Using these commands for acquiring waveforms, you can do the following:
H
Start and stop acquisitions.
H
Control whether each waveform is simply acquired, averaged, or
enveloped over successive acquisitions of that waveform.
H
Set the controls or conditions that start and stop acquisitions.
H
Determine the action the system takes upon completing an
acquisition, such as saving all waveforms and taking a measurement when the acquisition is stopped.
H
Control acquisition of acquired channel waveforms.
H
Set acquisition parameters.
Command
Description
ACQuire:MODe
Sets or returns acquisition mode
ACQuire:NUMACq?
Returns the number of acquisitions that have occurred
ACQuire:NUMAVg
Sets or returns number of acquisitions for an averaged waveform
ACQuire:NUMEnv
Sets or returns number of acquisitions for envelope waveform
ACQuire:NUMSAMples
Sets or returns the number of
samples that make up a WfmDB
for single sequence mode and
Mask Pass/Fail Completion Test
ACQuire:SAMPlingmode
This command sets or queries the
sampling mode
ACQuire:STATE
Starts, stops, or returns acquisition state
ACQuire:STOPAfter
Sets or returns whether the acquisition is continuous or single
sequence
ACQuire?
Returns acquisition parameters
FASTAcq:STATE
Enables, disables, or returns state
of Fast Acquisition mode
FASTAcq?
Returns the Fast Acquisition state
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 15 --
Alias Command Group
Alias commands allow you to define new commands as a sequence of
standard commands. You may find this useful when repeatedly using
the same commands to perform certain tasks like setting up measurements.
Aliases are similar to macros but do not include the capability to substitute parameters into alias bodies. The alias mechanism obeys the following rules:
H
The alias name must consist of a valid IEEE 488.2 message unit,
which may not appear in a message preceded by a colon, comma,
or a command or query program header.
H
The alias name may not appear in a message followed by program
date, a colon, comma, or question mark.
H
An alias name must be distinct from any keyword or keyword short
form.
H
An alias name cannot be redefined without first being deleted using
one of the alias deletion functions.
H
Alias names do not appear in response messages.
H
The Alias commands are defined in Tektronix Standard Codes and
Formats. Deviations between that standard and what is specified
here will be considered TDS5000 series errors unless specifically
noted in the command description in this document.
Command
Description
ALIas
Sets or returns the alias state
ALIas:CATalog?
Returns a list of the currently defined alias labels
ALIas:DEFine
Assigns a sequence of program
messages to an alias label
ALIas:DELEte
Removes a specified alias
ALIas:DELEte:ALL
Deletes all existing aliases
ALIas:DELEte:NAMe
Removes a specified alias
ALIas:STATE
Sets or returns the alias state
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 16 --
Calibration Command Group
The calibration commands provide information about the current state
of instrument calibration and allow you to initiate internal signal path
calibration (SPC). Commands that are specific to factory calibration are
not described in this manual; however, they are described in the service
manual (located on your TDS5000B Product Software CD--ROM in
PDF format). You can also order a printed copy (see Recommended
Accessories in the online help for the instrument).
Command
Description
*CAL?
Instructs the instrument to perform self-calibration
CAL?
Returns the internal and factory calibration status and the calibration due date
CALibrate:CALProbe:CH<x>?
Performs a probe calibration for the selected channel and returns the calibration status
CALibrate:INTERNal
Starts the internal signal path calibration
CALibrate:INTERNal:STARt
Starts the internal signal path calibration
CALibrate:INTERNal:STATus?
Returns the current status of the internal siganl path calibration.
CALibrate:PROBEstate:CH<x>?
Returns the probe calibration status for
the probe of the selected channel
CALibrate:RESults?
Returns the status of all calibration subsystems without performing an SPC operation
CALibrate:RESults SPC?
Returns the results of the last SPC operation
Cursor Command Group
Use the commands in the Cursor Command Group to control the cursor
display and readout. You can use these commands to control the setups
for cursor 1 and cursor 2, such as waveform source, cursor position, and
cursor color.
You can also use the commands to select one of the following cursor functions:
H
Off. Shuts off the display of all cursors.
H
Vertical Bars. Displays vertical bar cursors, which provide
traditional horizontal unit readouts for Cursor 1 (bar1), Cursor 2
(bar2), the delta between them, and 1/delta (results in frequency
when the horizontal unit is time).
H
Horizontal Bars. Displays horizontal bar cursors, which provide
traditional vertical unit readouts for Cursor 1 (bar1), Cursor 2
(bar2), and the delta between them.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 17 --
H
Waveform Cursors. Consists of two cursors you can independently assign to a waveform. These cursors provide the same readouts
that the vertical and horizontal bar cursors provide. Waveform
cursors enable you to conveniently measure waveform amplitude
and time. In XY or XYZ format, waveform cursors indicate the
amplitude position of an XY pair (Ch1 vs Ch2 voltage, where Ch1
is the X axis and Ch2 is the Y axis) relative to the trigger.
H
Screen Cursors. Consists of two pairs of independent horizontal
and vertical cursors. You can use these cursors to indicate an
arbitrary position within the waveform display area. Screen
cursors, depending on the style selected, consist of the intersection
of a vertical and horizontal line, an X, or a vertical line with an X.
These cursors have no association with any waveform, other than
they inherit the color of the waveform they are assigned too.
Command
Description
CURSor?
Returns all cursor settings
CURSor:FUNCtion
Sets or returns the cursor type
CURSor:HBArs?
Returns hbar cursor settings
CURSor:HBArs:DELTa?
Returns hbars cursors vertical difference
CURSor:HBArs:POSITION<x>
Sets or returns the hbar cursor<x> vertical position
CURSor:HBArs:UNIts?
Returns hbar cursor units
CURSor:LINESTyle
Sets or returns the cursor line style
CURSor:MODe
Sets or returns whether cursors move in
unison or separately
CURSor:SCREEN:STYle
Sets or returns the cursor type for
screen mode
CURSor:SOUrce<x>
Sets or returns the source for cursor
<x>
CURSor:STATE
Turns cursors on or off or returns their
state
CURSor:VBArs
Sets or returns the position of vertical
bar cursors
CURSor:VBArs:DELTa?
Returns the difference between vbar
cursors
CURSor:VBArs:POSITION<x>
Sets or returns the vbar cursor<x> horizontal position
CURSor:VBArs:UNIts
Sets or returns the units for vbar cursors
CURSor:WAVEform:HDELTA?
Returns the horizontal difference between waveform cursors
CURSor:WAVEform:HPOS<x>?
Returns the position of waveform cursor
<x>
CURSor:WAVEform:POSition<x>
Sets or returns the position of waveform
cursor <x>
CURSor:WAVEform:SOUrce<x>
Sets or returns the source for waveform
cursor <x>
CURSor:WAVEform:STYle
Sets or returns the cursor type for waveform mode
CURSor:WAVEform:UNIts
Sets or returns the units for waveform
cursors
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 18 --
CURSor:WAVEform:VDELTA?
Returns the vertical difference between
waveform cursors
CURSor:WAVEform
Sets or returns the current settings for
waveform cursors
CURSor:XY:PRODDELta?
Returns the product of the difference
between the cursors X positions and Y
positions
CURSor:XY:PRODUCT<x>?
Returns the product of the X and Y
positions for the specified cursor
CURSor:XY:RADIUS<x>
Returns the radius of the specified cursor
CURSor:XY:RATDELta?
Returns ratio of the difference between
the cursors X position and Y position
CURSor:XY:RATIO<x>
Returns ratio of the X (horizontal) and Y
(vertical) position for the specified cursor
CURSor:XY:RDELta?
Returns the ∆r value
CURSor:XY:READOUT
Sets or returns the XY cursor readout
mode.
CURSor:XY:RECTX<x>
Sets or returns the X cursor position in
rectangular coordinates
CURSor:XY:RECTY<x>
Sets or returns the Y cursor position in
rectangular coordinates
CURSor:XY:THDELta?
Returns the XY cursor angle delta in
polar coordinates
CURSor:XY:THETA<x>?
Returns the XY cursor angle in polar
coordinates
CURSor:XY:XDELta?
Returns the XY cursor ∆X value in rectangular coordinates
CURSor:XY:YDELta?
Returns the XY cursor ∆Y value in rectangular coordinates
CURSor:XY?
Returns the current settings for XY cursors
Diagnostic Command Group
The diagnostic commands control the selection and execution of diagnostic tests.
Command
Description
DIAg:CONTROL:HALT
Enables or disables halting on first diagnostic failure
DIAg:CONTROL:LOOP
Enables or disables looping of diagnostics
DIAg:EXECUTE
Executes currently selected set of diagnostics
DIAg:ITEM?
Returns all data associated with a selected menu item
DIAg:ITEM:FAILURES?
Returns the total number of failures that
occurred
DIAg:ITEM:NAMe?
Returns the name of the selected menu
item
DIAg:ITEM:RESULT?
Returns the results of the last test executed on this item
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 19 --
DIAg:ITEM:SUBITEMS?
Returns the number of subitems associated with this item
DIAg:LEVEL
Sets the current level of diagnostic test
hierarchy
DIAg:LOOPS?
Returns the number fo times the diagnostics were completed during the last
execution
DIAg:NAMe?
Returns the subsystem name, area,
and test name of the current diagnostic
test
DIAg:NAMe:AREA?
Returns the selected area of the current
diagnostic test
DIAg:NAMe:SUBSYS?
Returns the subsystem of the current
diagnostic test
DIAg:NAMe:TEST?
Returns the name of the current diagnostic test
DIAg:NUMITEMS?
Returns the number of items on the currently selected level of test hierarchy
DIAg:RESults?
Returns a brief pass or fail status of the
last test execution
DIAg:RESults:VERBose?
Returns a more explanatory message
about the results of the last diagnostic
execution
DIAg:SELect:ALL
Selects all available diagnostics
DIAg:SELect:AREA
Selects one of the available diagnostic
areas
DIAg:SELect:LAST
Sets the last item of a group of items
from the same level of test hierarchy
DIAg:SELect:SUBSYS
Selects one of the available diagnostic
subsystems
DIAg:SELect:TEST
Selects one of the available diagnostic
tests
DIAg:STATE
Sets the instrument operating state
DIAg:STOP
Terminates the execution of diagnostics
TEST
Selects and executes any item at any
level of the test hierarchy
TEST:RESults?
Returns a brief pass or fail status of the
last test execution
TEST:RESults:VERBose?
Returns a more explanatory message
about the results of the last test execution
TEST:STOP
Terminates the execution of the test
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 20 --
Display Control Command Group
Use the commands in the Display Control Command Group to change
the graticule style, the displayed intensities, and to set the characteristics of the waveform display.
You can set the display of date and time; cursor, histogram, mask, and
measurement readouts; measurement annotations, and the mode in
which waveforms are displayed.
There are six color palettes from which you can select:
H
Normal displays hues and lightness levels for best overall viewing.
H
Temp displays areas of the waveform with the highest sample
density in warmer colors (red shades) while the areas of lowest
sample density appear in cooler colors (blue shades).
H
Spectral displays areas of the waveform with the highest sample
density in blue shades while the areas of lowest sample density
appear in red shades.
H
Green displays waveforms in shades of green. Areas of the
waveform with the highest sample density appear in lighter green
shades while the areas of lowest sample density appear in darker
green shades.
H
Gray displays waveforms in shades of gray. Areas of the
waveform with the highest sample density appear in lighter gray
shades while the areas of lowest sample density appear in darker
gray shades.
H
User allows you to create a customized color palette.
Use the commands to set the style that best displays your waveforms
and graticule display properties. Note that the mode you choose globally affects all displayed waveforms.
Command
Description
DISplay:CLOCk
Sets or returns the display of the
date/time stamp
DISplay:COLOr:MATHCOLOr
Sets or returns the color to be
used for math traces
DISplay:COLOr:PALEtte:
IMAGEView
Sets or returns the color palette
for imageview waveforms
DISplay:COLOr:PALEtte:
RECORDView
Sets or returns the color palette
for recordview waveforms
DISplay:COLOr:PALEtte:USEr:
CARet
Sets or returns the user caret color
DISplay:COLOr:PALEtte:USEr:
CH<x>
Sets or returns the user palette
channel colors
DISplay:COLOr:PALEtte:USEr:
GRAticule
Sets or returns the user palette
graticule
DISplay:COLOr:PALEtte:USEr:
HIStogram
Sets or returns the user palette
histogram color
DISplay:COLOr:PALEtte:USEr:
MASK
Sets or returns the user palette
mask color
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 21 --
DISplay:COLOr:PALEtte:USEr:
MASK:Highlight
Sets or returns the user palette
mask hits color
DISplay:COLOr:PALEtte:USEr:
MATH<x>
Sets or returns the user palette
math colors
DISplay:COLOr:PALEtte:USEr:
REF<x>
Sets or returns the user palette
reference colors
DISplay:COLOr:PALEtte:USEr?
Returns the user palette group
settings
DISplay:COLOr:REFCOLOr
Sets or returns the color to be
used for reference traces
DISplay:COLOr?
Returns color group settings
DISplay:FILTer
Sets or returns the type of interpolation to use for the display
DISplay:FORMat
Sets or returns the display format
DISplay:GRAticule
Sets or returns the type of graticule that is displayed
DISplay:INTENSITy:AUTOBright
Sets or returns whether automatic
adjustment of waveform intensity
is enabled
DISplay:INTENSITy:SCREENSAVER
Sets or returns automatic display
protection features
DISplay:INTENSITy:SCREENSAVER
DELAY
Sets or returns the display protection timeout state
DISplay:INTENSITy:WAVEform:
IMAGEView
Sets or returns the waveform saturation level for imageview waveforms
DISplay:INTENSITy:WAVEform:
RECORDView
Sets or returns the waveform saturation level for recordview waveforms
DISplay:INTENSITy?
Returns the waveform saturation
level, autobright state and screensaver settings
DISplay:PERSistence
Sets or returns display persistence setting
DISplay:PERSistence:RESET
Sets or returns the clearing of persistence data
DISplay:SCREENTExt:LABel<x>:
NAMe
Sets or returns the text to be displayed for a given label
DISplay:SCREENTExt:LABel<x>:
XPOS
Sets or returns the horizontal position of a given label
DISplay:SCREENTExt:LABel<x>:
YPOS
Sets or returns the vertical position of a given label
DISplay:SCREENTExt:LABel<x>?
Return screen text setting for a
given label
DISplay:SCREENTExt:STATE
Sets or returns the state of the
display of screen text
DISplay:SCREENTExt?
Return all screen text settings
DISplay:SHOWREmote
Sets or returns the state of the remote display feature
DISplay:STYle
Sets or returns data display style
DISplay:TRIGBar
Sets or returns the display setting
of the trigger level indicator bar(s)
DISplay:VARpersist
Sets or returns the persistence
decay time
DISplay?
Returns current display settings
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 22 --
E- mail Command Group
Commands in the E--mail group allow you to send e--mail to one or
more designated recipients whenever a selected event, such as a trigger,
mask test failure (Option SM only), or a limit test failure occurs in the
instrument.
Using this feature, you do not have to continually monitor the instrument for the event.
When an event occurs, the instrument will send an SMTP mail message
to one or more designated recipients through the specified mail server.
The message can include any of the following:
H
Screen image
H
Waveform data
H
Measurement data at the time of the event
NOTE: Your instrument must be connected to the Local Area Network
(LAN) using Transfer C Protocol/Internet Protocol (TCP/IP). The recipient must also have an SMTP mail server. To send e--mail for a mask
test failure, you must have Mask Testing (Option SM) installed.
Command Description
EMail
Sends a test e--mail message or sets the current
e--mail sent count to zero.
EMail:ATTempts
Sets or queries the number of times that an attempt will be made to send e--mail to the SMTP
e--mail server
EMail:AUTHLogin
Sets or queries the login name that will be used if
the SMTP e--mail server requires one for authentication
EMail:AUTHPassword
Sets the password that will be used if the SMTP
e--mail server requires one for authentication
EMail:COUnt?
Returns the number of e--mails that have been
sent since Email on Event was armed
EMail:FRom
Sets or queries the From line in the e--mail
EMail:HOSTwanted
Sets or queries the hostname that will be used
when e--mail is sent to the SMTP e--mail server
EMail:IMage
Sets or queries whether image data is included in
the e--mail
EMail:LIMit
Sets or queries whether e--mail is sent when a limit
test failure occurs
EMail:MASk
Sets or queries whether e--mail is sent when a
mask test failure occurs
EMail:MAXsize
Sets or queries the maximum size (in megabytes)
of e--mail that can be sent to the SMTP server
EMail:MEASurement
Sets or queries whether measurement data is included in the e--mail
EMail:NUMemails
Sets or queries the number e--mails that can be
sent when Email onEvent is armed
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 23 --
EMail:SMTPPort
Sets or queries the SMTP port number that the
e--mail server uses
EMail:SMTPServer
Sets or queries the address of the SMTP mail
server.
EMail:STATus?
Queries the status of e--mail.
EMail:TIMEout
Sets or queries the global timeout in seconds.
EMail:TO
Sets or queries the address of the recipient(s) of
an e--mail. Multiple addresses are separated with
a semicolon (;)
EMail:TRIgger
Sets or queries whether e--mail is sent when a trigger occurs
EMail:WAVEform
sets or queries whether waveform data is included
in the e--mail.
File System Command Group
Use the commands in the File System Command Group to help you use
the built--in hard disk drive and floppy disk drive. You can use the commands to do the following:
H
List the contents of the default directory
H
Create and delete directories
H
Create, copy, read, rename, or delete a file
When using these commands, keep the following points in mind:
H
File arguments are always enclosed within double quotes:
”C:\MYDIR\TEK00001.SET”
H
File names follow the MSDOS format: [DRIVE:][\PATH\]filename
H
Path separators may be either forward slashes (/) or back slashes (\)
NOTE: Using back slash as a path separator may produce some
unexpected results, depending on how your GPIB controller application treats escaped characters. Many applications recognize
the sequence of back slash followed by an alphabetic character as
an escaped character, and, as such, interpret that alphabetic character as a control character. For example, the sequence ”\n” may
be interpreted as a newline character; ”\t” may be interpreted as a
tab character. To ensure that this interpretation does not occur,
you can use double back slashes. For example, ”C:\\testfile.txt”.
H
Some FILESystem commands may fail because a file has
read--only attributes. You will not be able to delete or replace such
files until this attribute is removed. Refer to the operating system
help on file properties for further information.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 24 --
Command
Description
FILESystem?
Returns the file system state
FILESystem:COPy
Copies one or more files to a new file
FILESystem:CWD
Sets or returns the current working directory for
FILESystem GPIB commands.
FILESystem:DELEte
Deletes a named file or directory
FILESystem:DIR?
Returns a list of directory contents
FILESystem:MKDir
Makes a new directory
FILESystem:PRInt
Prints a named file to the named port
FILESystem:READFile
Copies the named file to the GPIB port
FILESystem:REName
Assigns a new name to an existing file
FILESystem:RMDir
Deletes the named directory
FILESystem:WRITEFile
Copies the GPIB port block data to a named file
Hard Copy Command Group
Hard copy commands enable you to make hard copies of data files or
send the data to a specified file. In addition, these commands provide
you with information about (and the ability to set) file path settings.
Command
Description
EXPort
Copies a waveform to a specified file or returns
formatting and file information
EXPort:FILEName
Sets or returns the export file path
EXPort:FORMat
Sets or returns the export image format
EXPort:IMAGe
Sets or returns the export inksaver mode
EXPort:PALEtte
Sets or returns the export color palette
EXPort:VIEW
Sets or returns the export screen capture area
HARDCopy
Sends a screen copy to the selected port or returns the selected port and file path
HARDCopy:FILEName
Sets or returns the hardcopy file path
HARDCopy:IMAGe
Sets or returns the inksaver mode for hardcopy
printing
HARDCopy:LAYout
Sets or returns the page orientation for hardcopy
HARDCopy:PALEtte
Sets or returns the hardcopy color palette
HARDCopy:PORT
Sets or returns whether the data will be sent to a
file or printed on the next hardcopy
HARDCopy:VIEW
Sets or returns the area of the screen to be hardcopied
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 25 --
Histogram Command Group
Histogram commands let you select the type of histogram, what part of
the waveform should go into the histogram, and histogram statistics.
Use commands from this group to do the following:
H
Create a histogram of vertical or horizontal values for a channel,
math, or reference waveform
H
Adjust the limits of the waveform area from which the histogram
data is obtained
H
Clear histogram count and restart
H
Retrieve the histogram data
Command
Description
HIStogram?
Return all histogram parameters
HIStogram:BOX
Sets or returns the left, top, right, and bottom
positions of the histogram box, in source waveform coordinates
HIStogram:BOXPcnt
Sets or returns same as HIStogram:BOX, but in
percentage coordinates, with 0,0 upper left and
100,100 lower right
HIStogram:COUNt
Clears histogram count source data and restarts
counting
HIStogram:DATa?
Returns a comma--separated list of histogram
data numbers
HIStogram:DISplay
Sets or returns whether histogram data is displayed and the current display type setting
HIStogram:FUNCtion
Sets the type of histogram to create
Or returns the current histogram type
HIStogram:MODe
Sets type of histogram to create or turns histograms off
Or returns the current histogram type or that
histogram display is disabled
HIStogram:SIZe
Sets or returns the width (or height) of the histogram on the screen in divisions
HIStogram:SOUrce
Sets or returns which source waveform will be
compared against the histogram box when the
histogram testing is enabled
HIStogram:STATE
Sets or returns whether histogram calculations
are enabled
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 26 --
Horizontal Command Group
Horizontal commands control the time bases of the instrument. You can
set the time per division (or time per point) of the main time base. You
•
can use the Horizontal commands to do the following:
H
Set the scale, horizontal position and reference, and units of the
time base
H
Get the screen resolution, time of first point and time of last point,
or get all the horizontal settings
H
Enable or disable the display of the time base
You may substitute SECdiv for SCAle in the horizontal commands.
This provides program compatibility with earlier models of Tektronix
instruments.
Command
Description
HORizontal:DIVisions?
Returns the number of graticule divisions over which the waveform is
displayed
HORizontal:FASTframe:COUNt
Sets or returns FastFrame frame
count
HORizontal:FASTframe:LENgth
Sets or returns the horizontal record
length to the number of sample
points per frame
HORizontal:FASTframe:
MULtipleframes:FRAMESTart:
<wfm>
Sets or returns the start frame number on the specified waveform for
the FastFrames’ multiple frames
feature
HORizontal:FASTframe:
MULtipleframes:MODe
Sets or returns the multiple frames
mode for the FastFrames’ multiple
frames feature
HORizontal:FASTframe:
MULtipleframes:NUMFRames:
<wfm>
Sets or returns the number of
frames on the specified waveform
for the FastFrames’ multiple frames
feature
HORizontal:FASTframe:REF:FRAMe
Sets or returns the FastFrame reference frame number
HORizontal:FASTframe:REF:SOUrce
Sets or returns the FastFrame reference waveform source
HORizontal:FASTframe:SELECTED:
<wfm>
Sets or returns the FastFrame selected frame number on the specified waveform
HORizontal:FASTframe:STATE
Sets or returns the state of the
FastFrame acquisition
HORizontal:FASTframe:SUMFrame
This command sets or queries the
summary frame mode.
HORizontal:FASTframe:TIMEStamp:
ALL:<wfm>?
Returns the frame number and time
stamp for each frame between requested frames within the specified
waveform
HORizontal:FASTframe:TIMEStamp:
BETWeen:<wfm>?
Returns the relative trigger for the
delta time between the specified
frames
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 27 --
HORizontal:FASTframe:TIMEStamp:
DELTa:<wfm>?
Returns the relative time between
the triggers of the FastFrame Selected and the FastFrame Reference, within the specified waveform
HORizontal:FASTframe:TIMEStamp:
FRAMe:<wfm>?
Returns the absolute trigger date
and time for the specified frame
and waveform
HORizontal:FASTframe:TIMEStamp:
REF?
Returns the absolute trigger date
and time for FastFrame reference
HORizontal:FASTframe:TIMEStamp:
SELECTED:<wfm>?
This query--only command returns
the absolute trigger date and time
for the FastFrame Selected, within
the specified waveform
HORizontal:FASTframe:TRACk
Sets or returns the state of the
FastFrame tracking feature
HORizontal:FASTframe?
Returns the horizontal FastFrame
settings
HORizontal[:MAIn]:DELay:MODe
Sets or returns the main time base
trigger delay mode
HORizontal[:MAIn]:DELay:POSition
Sets or returns the main time base
position when Horizontal Delay
Mode is turned off
HORizontal[:MAIn]:DELay:TIMe
Sets or returns the main time base
trigger delay time
HORizontal:MAIn:INTERPRatio
Returns the main horizontal time
base interpolation ratio
HORizontal[:MAIn]:POSition
Sets or returns the waveform horizontal position on the display
HORizontal:MAIn:SAMPLERate
Sets the horizontal sample rate to
the desired number of samples per
second
Or returns the current horizontal
sample rate
HORizontal[:MAIn]:SCAle
Sets time per division for the main
time base
Or returns the main time base horizontal scale
HORizontal:MAIn:UNIts
Sets or returns the units for the horizontal main time base
HORizontal:MAIn:UNIts:STRing
Sets or returns the units string for
the horizontal main time base trigger delay
HORizontal:MAIn?
Returns the time per division of the
main time base
HORizontal:POSition
Sets or returns the waveform’s horizontal position on the display
HORizontal:RECOrdlength
Sets the horizontal record length to
the number of data points in each
frame
Or returns the current horizontal record length
HORizontal:RESOlution
Sets the horizontal record length to
the number of data points in each
frame and simultaneously adjusts
the sample rate to maintain a
constant time/division
Or returns the current horizontal record length
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 28 --
HORizontal:ROLL
Sets or returns the horizontal roll
mode status
HORizontal:SCAle
Sets or returns the time per division
for the main time base
HORizontal:TRIGger:POSition
Sets or returns the position of the
horizontal trigger
HORizontal?
Returns all learnable settings for
the horizontal commands
Limit Test Command Group
Use the commands in the Limit Test Command Group to perform limit
testing by selecting channel, math, or reference waveforms and comparing them against a template waveform.
Using the limit commands, you can:
H
Select a source waveform to compare against the selected template
during a limit test. The source waveform can be a Ch1–Ch4
waveform, a Math1–Math4 waveform, or a Ref1–Ref4 waveform.
(For two--channel instruments, the choices are limited to Ch1–Ch2,
Math1–Math2, or Ref1–Ref2 waveforms.)
H
Select a template from the following choices: None and Ref1–Ref4
(only Ref1–Ref2 are available on two--channel instruments).
H
Set the limits around a template waveform.
H
Reset the instrument to the original limit test default settings. The
default setting for Source is Channel 1 and for Template is None.
H
Set up test failure notification, lock the template to a waveform,
and highlight hits.
H
Sound a beep when a limit test fails.
H
Send a screen print to the default printer when a limit test fails.
H
Save waveform data to either a default directory or to a directory
of your choice when a limit test fails.
H
Record the date and time for each failed limit test in a date log file.
H
Send an e--mail to specified recipients when a limit test fails.
H
Highlight hits so that any points on the source waveform that fall
outside of the template are highlighted in a different color from the
rest of the waveform.
H
Reset the highlighted hits.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 29 --
Command
Description
LIMit:BEEP
Sounds beep when limit exceeded
LIMit:COMpare
Resets the Limit test comparison
template
LIMit:COMpare:CH<x>
Sets or returns the waveform template to which the specified waveform is compared
LIMit:COMpare:MATH<x>
Sets or returns the waveform template to which the specified math waveform is compared
LIMit:COMpare:REF<x>
Sets or returns the waveform template to which the specified reference
waveform is compared
LIMit:EMail
Sets or queries whether an e--mail is
generated when the source waveform data exceeds test limits
LIMit:HARDCopy
Sets or returns whether a hardcopy
operation is executed on the waveform when any waveform data exceeds the limit set in the limit test
LIMit:HIGHLIGHTHits
Sets or queries whether violation
highlighting occurs when limit testing
is active; also, clears any highlighted
hits in the mask display
LIMit:LOCk
Sets or queries whether vertical scaling and positioning affect both the
source and template for template
comparison pairs
LIMit:LOG
Sets or queries whether a log file is
saved when the source waveform
data exceeds the test limits
LIMit:SAVEWFM
Sets or queries whether the source
waveform is saved when the source
waveform data exceeds the test limits
LIMit:SAVEWFM:FILEName
Sets or queries the path where waveforms or log files will be saved when
the waveform data exceeds the limits
set by the limit test
LIMit:SRQ
Sets or queries whether an SRQ is
sent when the waveform data exceeds the test limits
LIMit:STATE
Sets or returns whether limit testing
is on or off
LIMit:STOPOnviolation
Sets or queries whether acquisitions
are stopped when the waveform data
exceeds the test limits
LIMit:TEMPlate:STORe
Saves the specified source waveform
to a specified file or reference
LIMit:TEMPlate:TOLerance:HORizontal
Sets or queries the amount, in units
of horizontal divisions, by which the
source waveform is varied horizontally when creating the destination waveform
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 30 --
LIMit:TEMPlate:TOLerance:VERTical
Sets or queries the amount, in units
of vertical divisions, by which the
source waveform is varied vertically
when creating the destination waveform
Returns all settings for the Limit commands
Limit?
Mask Command Group
Use the commands in the Mask Command Group to compare incoming
waveforms against standard or user--defined telecommunications
masks. Standard masks are only available when option SM is installed.
Without option SM, you need to define your masks. When the instrument detects waveforms that fall inside or outside of the mask limits, it
can perform tasks such as generating hard copy, saving the waveform,
emitting a beep or an SRQ, stopping and waiting for your input, sending an email message with specified data, logging the time/date of the
acquired waveform, or some combination of these actions.
A mask is a set of polygonal regions on the screen. Every vertical line
of the screen intersects the polygon in zero, one, or two places, but never in more than two places. (A vertical line that intersects a vertical
mask border is counted.) You have to break up more complicated polygons into two separate segments. Unlike limit testing, the inside of a
mask is the region where waveform data would not normally fall. A
telecommunications standard requires up to eight of these masks. Pulse
standards always have two masks. Standards with eye patterns usually
have three masks, but some have four.
You use the commands in the Mask Command Group to do the following:
H
Specify the waveform source to test and the mask to use
H
Specify whether to use, and the size of, mask margins, which allow
you to shrink or expand an existing set of polygons by a specified
percentage.
H
Specify whether to display a readout of hits and the mask on
screen. Options also exist for auto fitting the incoming waveforms
to match the mask you choose.
H
Select industry--standard masks that support a variety of electrical
and optical communication standards (available only with option
SM).
H
Define and edit your own custom mask; create an entirely new
mask, or use a standard mask (option SM only) as a starting
reference, and edit it to meet your needs.
H
Enable, disable, or reset the mask counts. Once you turn on mask
counting, it remains on until you explicitly turn it off.
Option SM also provides communication trigger commands that you
can use in conjunction with the mask commands, such as TRIGger:A:TYPe Communication. Refer to the Trigger Command Group
and
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 31 --
Command
Description
MASK?
Returns the states of all settable mask
parameters
MASK:AUTOAdjust
Optimizes signal position within the
mask to minimize hits
MASK:AUTOAdjust:HDELTA
Sets or returns how far autofit
searches horizontally
MASK:AUTOAdjust:VDELTA
Sets or returns how far autofit
searches vertically
MASK:AUTOSet:AUTOAdjust
Controls what happens at the end of a
mask autoset. If ON, the horz/vert auto
adjustment is run ONCE to potentially
improve the result of mask autoset
MASK:AUTOSet:HPOS
Controls whether the autoset algorithm
will attempt to change the horizontal
position of the signal while attempting
to autoset
MASK:AUTOSet:HSCAle
Controls whether the autoset algorithm
will attempt to change the horizontal
scale while attempting to autoset
MASK:AUTOSet:MODe
Controls whether or not an autoset will
be automatically done after a standard
mask is selected
MASK:AUTOSet:OFFSETAdj
Sets autoset to not enforce the rule
that, for pulse standards, requires 0V
to be in a certain place in the mask.
Instead, autoset will attempt to measure the DC offset in the signal and
use scope offset or position controls to
compensate for the DC offset in the
signal
MASK:AUTOSet:STANdard Selects the standard mask in autoset
MASK:AUTOSet:TRIGger
Controls if a MASK:AUTOSet affects
the trigger level
MASK:AUTOSet:VPOS
Controls whether the autoset algorithm
will affect the vertical position (or offset) of the signal while attempting to
autoset
MASK:AUTOSet:VSCAle
Controls whether the autoset algorithm
will attempt to change the vertical
scale while attempting to autoset
MASK:COPy:USER
Copies the currently displayed mask to
the User mask
MASK:COUNt:FAILURES?
Returns the number of pass/fail tests
that have failed
MASK:COUNt:HITS?
Returns the total number of mask hits
on all mask segments
MASK:COUNt RESET
Resets to zero the number of hits for
all mask segments on the specified
source
MASK:COUNt:SEG<m>:HI
TS?
Returns the number of hits in mask
segment <m>
MASK:COUNt:STATE
Sets or returns the mask hits count
state
MASK:COUNt:TESTS?
Returns the number of pass/fail tests
that have occurred
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 32 --
MASK:COUNt:TOTal?
Returns the sum of all hits in all mask
segments
MASK:COUNt:VIOLATIONS?
Returns the number of test violations
that have occurred in the current pass/
fail test
MASK:COUNt:WAVEFORMS?
Returns the number of waveforms that
have been acquired and processed
during pass/fail testing
MASK:DISplay
Sets or returns whether or not defined
masks are displayed on the screen
MASK:FILTer
Sets or returns whether the selected
optical reference receiver mask filter is
enabled
MASK:HIGHLIGHTHits
Sets or returns whether or not hits in a
mask are highlighted in different colors
than other waveform data
MASK:INVert
Controls whether the mask is drawn
inverted
MASK:LOCk
Sets or returns the mask lock to waveform mode
MASK:MARgin:PERCent
Sets or queries the mask margin percentage
MASK:MARgin:STATE
Sets or returns the state of the mask
margins
MASK:MASKPRE:AMPlitude
Sets or returns the current mask’s
nominal pulse amplitude in volts.
MASK:MASKPRE:HSCAle
Sets or returns the nominal timing resolution used to draw the current mask,
in time/division
MASK:MASKPRE:HTRIGPOS
Sets or returns the nominal tripper
position.(pulse leading edge) used to
draw the current mask as a fraction of
the display width
MASK:MASKPRE:PATTERNBITS
Sets or returns the number of bits used
for serial trigger for the current mask
standard
MASK:MASKPRE:PRESAMPBITS
Sets or returns the number of bits before the (isolated one) pulse leading
edge in the serial trigger pass/fail testing
MASK:MASKPRE:RECOrdlength
Sets or returns the nominal record
length for pulse mask testing
MASK:MASKPRE:SERIAL- Sets or returns the type of triggering
used in pass/fail testing of the current
TRIG
mask
MASK:MASKPRE:TRIGTOSAMP
Sets or returns the time, in seconds,
from the (leading edge) trigger position
to the pulse bit sampling position
MASK:MASKPRE:VOFFSet
Sets or returns the nominal vertical offset, in volts, used to vertically offset the
input channels
MASK:MASKPRE:VPOS
Sets or returns the nominal vertical
position, in divisions, used to vertically
position the input channels
MASK:MASKPRE:VSCAle
Sets or returns the nominal vertical
scale, in volts per division, used to vertically scale the input channels
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 33 --
MASK:MASKPRE:WIDth
Sets or returns the nominal bit width in
seconds
MASK:POLarity
Sets or returns the input waveform polarity for the pass/fail test
MASK:SEG<m> DELEte
Deletes the specified mask segment
from the Current mask
MASK:SEG<m>:NR_Pt?
Returns the number of points that
make up the specified mask segment
of the Current mask
MASK:SEG<m>:POINTS
Sets or returns the X--Y user coordinates of all points in the Current mask
segment
MASK:SOUrce
Sets or reports which source will be
compared against the mask(s) when
counting is turned on
MASK:STANdard
Deletes the existing mask and sets the
selected standard mask
MASK:STOPOnviolation
Sets or returns the stop on violation
setting
MASK:TESt:AUX:COMPLe- Sets or returns the test:aux on pass/fail
test completion mode
tion
MASK:TESt:AUX:FAILure
Sets or returns the test:aux status on
pass/fail test failure mode
MASK:TESt:BEEP:COMPL Sets or returns the beep on pass/fail
test completion mode
etion
MASK:TESt:BEEP:FAILure Sets or returns the beep status on
pass/fail test failure mode
MASK:TESt:DELay
Sets or returns the amount of time, in
seconds, to wait after starting pass/fail
testing to evaluate waveforms
MASK:TESt:HARDCopy
Sets or returns the hard copy in pass/
fail failure mode
MASK:TESt:LOG:FAILure
Sets or returns the log status on pass/
fail test failure mode
MASK:TESt:REPeat
Sets or returns the repeat pass/fail test
on completion mode
MASK:TESt:SAMple
Sets or returns the minimum number of
waveform database (WfmDB) points
the oscilloscope can acquire before it
stops a single sequence acquisition or
stops running a mask test
MASK:TESt:SAMple:THReshold
Sets or returns the minimum number of
hits in mask regions needed to cause
the pass/fail status to change from
PASSING to FAILING
MASK:TESt:SAVEWFM
Sets or returns the save waveform to
file on failure setting
MASK:TESt:SAVEWFM:FILEName
Sets or returns the name of the directory and file to use with the
MASK:TESt:SAVEWFM command
MASK:TESt:SRQ:COMPLe- Sets or returns an SRQ on pass/fail
test completion mode
tion
MASK:TESt:SRQ:FAILure
Sets or returns the SRQ status on
pass/fail test failure mode
MASK:TESt:STATE
Sets or returns the state of mask pass/
fail testing
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 34 --
MASK:TESt:STATUS?
Returns the pass/fail test status
MASK:TESt:STOP:FAILure Sets or returns the stop status on
pass/fail test failure mode
MASK:TESt:THReshold
Sets or returns the number of failed
tested waveforms needed in each
pass/fail test to cause the pass/fail status to change from PASSING to FAILING
MASK:TESt:WAVEform
Sets or returns the number of waveforms to test during pass/fail testing
MASK:USER:AMPlitude
Sets or returns the current mask’s
nominal pulse amplitude in volts
MASK:USER:BITRate
Sets or returns the user mask’s bit rate
MASK:USER:HSCAle
Sets or returns the nominal timing resolution used to draw the mask, in time/
division
MASK:USER:HTRIGPOS
Sets or returns the nominal tripper
position.(pulse leading edge) used to
draw the mask as a fraction of the display width
MASK:USER:LABel
Sets or returns the label assigned to a
user mask
MASK:USER:PATTERNBITS
Sets or returns the number of bits used
for serial trigger for the User mask
standard
MASK:USER:PRESAMPBITS
Sets or returns the number of bits before the (isolated one) pulse leading
edge in the serial trigger pass/fail testing
MASK:USER:RECOrdlength
Sets or returns the nominal record
length for pulse mask testing
MASK:USER:SEG<m> DE- Deletes the specified mask segment
from the User mask
LEte
MASK:USER:SEG<m>:NR
_Pt?
Returns the number of points that
make up the specified User mask segment
MASK:USER:SEG<m>:POI Sets or returns the X--Y user coordinates of all points in the specified User
NTS
mask segment
MASK:USER:TRIGTOSAMP
Sets or returns the time, in seconds,
from the (leading edge) trigger position
to the pulse bit sampling position
MASK:USER:VOFFSet
Sets or returns the nominal vertical offset, in volts, used to vertically offset the
input channels
MASK:USER:VPOS
Sets or returns the nominal vertical
position, in divisions, used to vertically
position the input channels
MASK:USER:VSCAle
Sets or returns the nominal vertical
scale, in volts per division, used to vertically scale the input channels
MASK:USER:WIDth
Sets or returns the nominal bit width in
seconds
RECAll:MASK
Recalls a stored mask as the User
mask.
SAVe:MASK
Saves the User mask to a mass storage file
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 35 --
Math Command Group
Use the commands in the Math Command Group to create and define
math waveforms. You can define and display up to four math waveforms simultaneously on four channel models and up to two on two
channel models. Use the available math functions to define your math
waveform.
The math waveform you create depends on sources listed in the math
expression. If you change these sources, the math waveforms you previously defined will be affected.
Math expressions can be simple, containing no mathematical computation, such as CH1, which specifies that a waveform shows the signal
source of channel 1. Math expressions can also be complex, consisting
of 100 plus characters and comprising many sources, functions, and
operands.
The acquisition of a live waveform can stop for several reasons: You
can turn off the channel, stop the waveform (via Run/Stop from the
Horiz/Acq menu), or stop the trigger (via Run/Stop from the Trig
menu). When you turn off the channel, math continues and data is acquired but is not displayed. When you stop either the waveform or the
trigger, the math calculation stops, and the last math calculation performed is displayed.
When a live waveform update or reference waveform is altered, math
waveforms containing those waveforms as sources are also updated to
reflect the changes. Also, sources must exist but do not need to be displayed to be used in and to update math waveforms.
Command
Description
MATH<x>?
Returns the specified math waveform settings
MATH<x>:DEFine
Sets or returns the math<x> waveform definition for the specified waveform
MATH<x>:LABel:NAMe
Sets or returns the label string used for annotating the displayed math waveform
MATH<x>:LABel:XPOS
Sets or returns the X screen offset where the
math waveform label is displayed
MATH<x>:LABel:YPOS
Sets or returns the Y screen offset where the
math waveform label is displayed
MATH<x>:NUMAVg
Sets or returns the acquisition number at
which the averaging algorithm will begin exponential averaging
MATH<x>:SPECTral?
Returns the specified math waveform spectral
setups
MATH<x>:SPECTral:CENTER
Sets or returns the center frequency of the
spectral analyzer output data span
MATH<x>:SPECTral:GATEPOS
Sets or returns the position of the center of the
gate
MATH<x>:SPECTral:GATEWIDTH
Sets or returns the gate width input to the
spectral analyzer
MATH<x>:SPECTral:LOCk
Sets or returns the state of the spectral locking
for the specified math waveform
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 36 --
MATH<x>:SPECTral:MAG
Sets or returns the units of the SpectralMag
function in the specified math string
MATH<x>:SPECTral:PHASE
Sets or returns the units of the SpectralPhase
function in the specified math string
MATH<x>:SPECTral:REFLevel
Sets or returns the vertical position of the output data from the spectral analyzer
MATH<x>:SPECTral
:REFLEVELOffset
Sets or returns the spectral reference level
offset used for calculating the dB value
MATH<x>:SPECTral:RESBw
Sets or returns the resolution bandwidth of the
spectral analyzer
MATH<x>:SPECTral:SPAN
Sets the top of the span to a value that is closest to the specified value
Or returns the specified math waveform’s current span value
MATH<x>:SPECTral:SUPPress
Sets or returns the phase suppression threshold
MATH<x>:SPECTral:UNWRap
Enables or disables or returns the state of the
phase unwrap of the spectral analyzer output
data
MATH<x>:SPECTral:WINdow
Sets or returns the window function used to
multiply the input data to the spectral analyzer
MATH<x>:UNITString
Sets or returns the units used for the math waveform; command overrides the default unit
string
MATH<x>:VERTical:POSition
Sets or returns the specified math waveform
vertical position
MATH<x>:VERTical:SCAle
Sets or returns the specified math waveform
vertical scale (per div)
MATHVAR:VAR<x>
Sets or returns numerical values you can use
within math expressions
Measurement Command Group
Use the commands in the Measurement Command Group to control the
automated measurement system.
Up to eight automated measurements can be displayed on the screen. In
the commands, these measurement readouts are named MEAS<x>,
where <x> can be 1 through 8.
In addition to the eight displayed measurements, the measurement commands let you specify an additional measurement, IMMed. The immediate measurement has no front--panel equivalent. Immediate measurements are never displayed. Because they are computed only when
needed, immediate measurements slow the waveform update rate less
than displayed measurements.
Whether you use displayed or immediate measurements, use the VALue? query to obtain measurement results.
Measurement commands can set and query measurement parameters.
You can assign some parameters, such as waveform sources, differently
for each measurement. Other parameters, such as reference levels, have
only one value, which applies to all measurements.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 37 --
Command
Description
MEASUrement:GATing
Sets or returns the measurement
gating
MEASUrement:IMMed?
Returns all immediate measurement setup parameters
MEASUrement:IMMed:DElay?
Returns information about the
immediate delay measurement
MEASUrement:IMMed:DELay:DIREction
Sets or returns the search direction to use for immediate delay
measurements
MEASUrement:IMMed:DElay:EDGE[1]
Sets or returns the slope of the
edge used for immediate delay
”from” waveform measurements
MEASUrement:IMMed:DElay:EDGE2
Sets or returns the slope of the
edge used for immediate delay
”to” waveform measurements
MEASUrement:IMMed:NOISe
Sets or returns the location of
the noise measurement on the
eye waveform
MEASUrement:IMMed:REFLevel:
ABSolute:HIGH
Sets or returns the high reference level
MEASUrement:IMMed:REFLevel:
ABSolute:LOW
Sets or returns the low reference
level
MEASUrement:IMMed:REFLevel:
ABSolute:MID[1]
Sets or returns the middle reference level
MEASUrement:IMMed:REFLevel:
ABSolute:MID2
Sets or returns the middle reference level for delay measurements
MEASUrement:IMMed:REFLevel:
METhod
Sets or returns the method used
to calculate measurements
MEASUrement:IMMed:REFLevel:
PERCent:HIGH
Sets or returns the top level for
rise time (90% level)
MEASUrement:IMMed:REFLevel:
PERCent:LOW
Sets or returns the low level for
rise time (10% level)
MEASUrement:IMMed:REFLevel:
PERCent:MID[1]
Sets or returns the mid level for
measurements
MEASUrement:IMMed:REFLevel:
PERCent:MID2
Sets or returns the mid level for
delay measurements
MEASUrement:IMMed:REFLevel?
Returns the reference levels
MEASUrement:IMMed:SOURCE[1]
Sets or returns the ”from” source
for all single channel immediate
measurements
MEASUrement:IMMed:SOURCE2
Sets or returns the source to
measure ”to” for phase or delay
immediate measurements
MEASurement:IMMed:SOUrce<x>:
SIGType
Sets or returns the type of input
signal used for the specified
measurement source
MEASUrement:IMMed:TYPe
Sets or returns the type of the
immediate measurement
MEASUrement:IMMed:UNIts?
Returns the units of the immediate measurement
MEASUrement:IMMed:VALue?
Returns the value of the immediate measurement
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 38 --
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:COUNt?
Returns the number of values
accumulated since the last statistical reset
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:DELay:
DIREction
Sets or returns the search direction to use for delay measurements
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:DELay:EDGE[1]
Sets or returns the slope of the
edge to use for delay ”from” waveform measurements
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:DELay:EDGE2
Sets or returns the slope of the
edge to use for delay ”to” waveform measurements
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:DELay?
Returns the delay measurement
parameters for specified measurement
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:MAXimum?
Returns the maximum value
found since the last statistical reset
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:MEAN?
Returns the mean value accumulated since the last statistical
reset
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:MINImum?
Returns the minimum value
found since the last statistical reset
MEASURement:MEAS<x>:NOISe
Sets or returns the location of
the noise measurement on the
eye waveform for MEAS<x>
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:REFLevel:
ABSolute:HIGH
Sets or returns the top level for
rise time (90% level)
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:REFLevel:
ABSolute:LOW
Sets or returns the low level for
rise time (10%)
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:REFLevel:
ABSolute:MID[1]
Sets or returns the mid level for
measurements
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:REFLevel:
ABSolute:MID2
Sets or returns the mid level for
delay measurements
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:REFLevel:
METHod
Sets or returns the HIGH and
LOW levels to either % or units
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:REFLevel:
PERCent:HIGH
Sets or returns the top level for
rise time (90% level)
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:REFLevel:
PERCent:LOW
Sets or returns the low level for
rise time (10% level)
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:REFLevel:
PERCent:MID[1]
Sets or returns the mid level for
measurements
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:REFLevel:
PERCent:MID2
Sets or returns the mid level for
delay measurements
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:REFLevel?
Returns the reference levels
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:SOURCE[1]
Sets or returns the channel from
which measurements are taken
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:SOURCE[2]
Sets or returns the channel to
which measurements are sent
MEASurement:MEAS<x>:SOUrce<x>:
SIGType
Sets or returns the type of input
signal used for the specified
measurement source for the
specified measurement slot
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:STATE
Sets or returns whether the specified measurement slot is computed and displayed
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 39 --
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:STDdev?
Returns the standard deviation
of values accumulated since the
last statistical reset
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:TYPe
Sets or returns the measurement<x> type
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:UNIts?
Returns measurement<x> units
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:VALue?
Returns the value of measurement<x>
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>?
Returns all measurement parameters for the displayed measurement
MEASUrement:METHod
Sets or returns the method used
for calculating reference levels
MEASUrement:NOISe
Sets or returns the location of
the noise measurement on the
eye waveform
MEASUrement:REFLevel:ABSolute:HIGH
Sets or returns the top reference
level for rise time
MEASUrement:REFLevel:ABSolute:LOW
Sets or returns the low reference
level for rise time
MEASUrement:REFLevel:ABSolute:MID[1]
Sets or returns the mid reference
level for measurements
MEASUrement:REFLevel:ABSolute:MID2
Sets or returns the mid reference
level for delay ”to” measurements
MEASUrement:REFLevel:METHod
Sets or returns the method for
assigning high and low reference
levels
MEASUrement:REFLevel:PERCent:HIGH
Sets or returns the top reference
percent level for rise time
MEASUrement:REFLevel:PERCent:LOW
Sets or returns the low reference
percent level for rise time
MEASUrement:REFLevel:PERCent:MID[1]
Sets or returns the mid reference
percent level for waveform measurements
MEASUrement:REFLevel:PERCent:MID2
Sets or returns the mid reference
percent level for second waveform measurements
MEASUrement:REFLevel?
Returns reference level parameters
MEASUrement:SOURCE<x>:SIGType
Sets or returns the type of input
signal used for the specified
measurement source
MEASUrement:STATIstics:COUNt
Clears existing measurement
statistics from memory
MEASUrement:STATIstics:MODe
Turns management statistics on
or off and sets or returns which
pair of statistical accumulations
is displayed
MEASUrement:STATIstics:WEIghting
Sets or returns the ’time
constant’ for mean and standard
deviation statistical accumulations
MEASUrement?
Returns all measurement parameters
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 40 --
Miscellaneous Command Group
Miscellaneous commands do not fit into other categories.
Several commands and queries are common to all 488.2--1987 devices
on the GPIB bus. The 488.2--1987 standard defines these commands.
The common commands begin with an asterisk (*) character.
Command
Description
*DDT
Sets or returns the commands that will be executed by
the group execute trigger
*IDN?
Returns the instrument identification code
*LRN?
Returns a listing of instrument settings
*TRG
Performs the group execute trigger (GET)
*TST?
Tests the GPIB interface and returns status
AUTOSet
Sets the vertical, horizontal and trigger controls to provide a stable display of the selected waveform
AUXout?
Returns the auxiliary out setup
AUXout:SOUrce
Sets or returns the trigger source at the BNC connection
BELI
In previous TDS models, this command sounded the
audio indicator. Provided for backward compatibility.
CMDBatch
Turns command batching on or off
Or returns the state of command batching
DATE
Sets or returns the date that the instrument can display
HDR
Sets or returns the Response Header Enable State
HEADer
Sets or returns the Response Header Enable State
ID?
Returns identifying information about the instrument
and its firmware
LOCk
Sets or returns the front panel lock state
NEWpass
Changes the password for user protected data
PASSWord
Provides access for changing user protected data
REM
Specifies a comment, which is ignored by the instrument
ROSc:SOUrce
Sets or returns the source for the 10 MHz time base
ROSc:STATE?
Returns the state of the 10 MHz time base
SET?
Returns a listing of instrument settings
TEKSecure
Initializes both waveform and setup memories
TIME
Sets or returns the time displayed by the instrument
UNLock
Unlocks front panel
VERBose
Sets or returns the verbose state
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 41 --
Save and Recall Command Group
Use the commands in the Save and Recall Command Group to store
and retrieve internal waveforms and settings. When you save a setup,
you save all the settings of the instrument. When you recall a setup, the
instrument restores itself to the state that it was in when you originally
saved that setting.
Command
Description
*RCL
Restores the state of the instrument from
a copy of the setting stored in memory
*SAV
Stores the current instrument state to a
specified memory location
*SDS
Changes the specified setup to reference
the factory setup instead of the user setup
DELEte:SETUp
Removes stored setups from memory and
initializes the location with the factory default setups
DELEte:WAVEform
Deletes (one or all of) the stored reference
waveforms from memory
FACtory
Resets the instrument to factory default
settings
RECAll:SETUp
Recalls saved instrument settings
RECAll:WAVEform
Recalls a stored waveform to a reference
location
SAVe:SETUp
Saves the current front--panel setup to a
specified memory location or file
SAVe:WAVEform
Saves a waveform to one of four reference
memory locations or a mass storage file
SAVe:WAVEform:FILEFormat
Sets or returns the format for saved waveforms
SETUp:NAMe
Sets or returns the user--defined setup label
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 42 --
Status and Error Command Group
Use the commands in the Status and Error command Group to determine the status of the instrument and control events.
Several commands and queries used with the instrument are common to
all devices on the GPIB bus. The IEEE Std 488.2--1987 defines these
commands and queries. The common commands begin with an asterisk
(*) character.
Command
Description
*CLS
Clears status
*ESE
Sets or returns the bits in the Event Status Enable Register
*ESR?
Returns the contents of the Standard Event Status Register
*OPC
Generates the operation complete message in the standard event status register when all pending operations
are finished
Or returns ”1” when all current operations are finished
*OPT?
Returns a list of options installed in the instrument
*PSC
Sets or returns the power on status flag
*PUD
Sets or returns a string of protected user data
*RST
Resets the instrument to factory default settings
*SRE
Sets or returns the bits in the Service Request Enable
Register
*STB?
Returns the contents of the Status Byte Register
*WAI
Prevents the instrument from executing further commands until all pending operations finish
ALLEv?
Returns all events and their messages
BUSY?
Returns instrument status
DESE
Sets or returns the bits in the Device Event Status Enable Register
EVENT?
Returns event code from the event queue
EVMsg?
Returns event code, message from the event queue
EVQty?
Return number of events in the event queue
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 43 --
Trigger Command Group
Use the commands in the Trigger Command Group to control all aspects of triggering for the instrument.
There are two triggers: A and B. Where appropriate, the command set
has parallel constructions for each trigger.
You can set the A or B triggers to edge mode. Edge triggering lets you
display a waveform at or near the point where the signal passes through
a voltage level of your choosing.
You can also set A triggers to pulse, logic or video modes. With pulse
triggering, the instrument triggers whenever it detects a pulse of a certain width or height. Logic triggering lets you logically combine the
signals on one or more channels. The instrument then triggers when it
detects a certain combination of signal levels. Video triggering enables
you to trigger on the most common Standard Definition, High Definition, and custom video standards. You can trigger on all fields, all lines,
or individual video lines.
If you have Option SM (Mask Testing) installed, you also have access
to a communication mode. When this mode is selected, several communication trigger commands are available that work in conjunction with
the mask commands. Refer to Mask Command Group and
Command
Description
TRIGger
Forces a trigger event to occur or returns current trigger
parameters for the instrument
TRIGger:A
Sets A trigger level to 50% or
returns current A trigger parameters
TRIGger:A:COMMunication:AMI. . .
PULSEForm
Sets the AMI pulse form
TRIGger:A:COMMunication:AMI. . .
THReshold:HIGH
Sets the AMI threshold high
level
TRIGger:A:COMMunication:AMI. . .
THReshold:LOW
Sets the AMI threshold low
level
TRIGger:A:COMMunication:BITRate
Sets and returns the bit rate
TRIGger:A:COMMunication:CLOCk:
POLarity
Sets or returns the polarity of
the clock signal
TRIGger:A:COMMunication:CMI:
PULSEForm
Selects the CMI pulse form
TRIGger:A:COMMunication:CODe
Sets the signal code
TRIGger:A:COMMunication:SOUrce
Sets the source channel
TRIGger:A:COMMunication:SOUrce:
TYPe
Sets the type of source
channel
TRIGger:A:COMMunication:STANdard
Selects the standard that
identifies the code and bit
rate
TRIGger:A:EDGE:COUPling
Sets or returns the type of
coupling for the A edge trigger
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 44 --
TRIGger:A:EDGE:SLOpe
Sets or returns the slope for
the A edge trigger
TRIGger:A:EDGE:SOUrce
Sets or returns the source for
the A edge trigger
TRIGger:A:EDGE?
Returns the source, coupling
and source for the A edge
trigger
TRIGger:A:HOLDoff:ACTUal?
Returns the holdoff time actually used by the A trigger
TRIGger:A:HOLDoff:BY
Sets or returns the type of
holdoff for the A trigger
TRIGger:A:HOLDoff:TIMe
Sets or returns the A trigger
holdoff time
TRIGger:A:HOLDoff?
Returns the A trigger holdoff
parameters
TRIGger:A:LEVel
Sets or returns the level for
the A trigger
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:CLAss
Sets or returns the type of A
trigger logic
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:FUNCtion
Sets or returns the logical
combination of the input
channels for the A logic trigger
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:INPut:CH<x>
Specifies or returns the input
settings for the specified logic trigger channel
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:INPut?
Returns the A logic trigger input for channels 1--3.
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:PATtern:INPut:CH2
Sets or returns the A logic
trigger input for channel 2
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:PATtern:INPut:CH4
Sets or returns the A logic
trigger input for channel 4
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:PATtern:WHEn
Sets or returns the condition
for generating the A logic
pattern trigger
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:PATtern:WHEn
:LESSLimit
Sets or returns the maximum
time that the selected pattern
may be true and still generate an A logic pattern trigger
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:PATtern:WHEn
:MORELimit
Sets or returns the minimum
time that the selected pattern
may be true and still generate an A logic pattern trigger
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:PATtern?
Returns the conditions for
generating an A logic pattern
trigger
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:SETHold:CLOCk:EDGE
Sets or returns the clock
edge polarity for setup and
hold triggering
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:SETHold:CLOCk:SOUrce
Sets or returns the clock
source for the A logic trigger
setup and hold input
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:SETHold:CLOCk
:THReshold
Sets or returns the clock voltage threshold for setup and
hold trigger
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:SETHold:CLOCk?
Returns clock edge polarity,
voltage threshold and source
input for setup/hold triggering
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 45 --
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:SETHold:DATa:SOUrce
Sets or returns the data
source for the setup and hold
trigger
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:SETHold:DATa
:THReshold
Sets or returns the data voltage threshold for setup and
hold trigger
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:SETHold:DATa?
Returns the voltage threshold and data source for the
setup/hold trigger
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:SETHold:HOLDTime
Sets or returns the hold time
for the setup and hold violation triggering
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:SETHold:SETTime
Sets or returns the setup
time for setup and hold violation triggering
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:SETHold?
Returns clock edge polarity,
voltage threshold and
source; data voltage threshold and source; and setup/
hold times for violation triggering
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:STATE:INPut:CH2
Sets or returns the slope for
channel 2 of the A logic state
trigger
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:STATE:INPut:CH4
Sets or returns the slope for
channel 4 of the A logic state
trigger
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:STATE:WHEn
Sets or returns the condition
for generating an A logic
state trigger
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:STATE?
Returns the data input and
trigger criteria for the A logic
trigger
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:THReshold:CH<x>
Sets or returns the A logic
trigger threshold voltage for
the specified channel
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:THReshold?
Returns the threshold voltage for all channels in A logic trigger
TRIGger:A:LOGIc?
Returns all of the A trigger
logic parameters
TRIGger:A:MODe
Sets or returns the A trigger
mode
TRIGger:A:PULse:CLAss
Sets or returns the type of
pulse on which to trigger
TRIGger:A:PULse:GLItch:POLarity
Sets or returns the polarity
for the A pulse glitch trigger
TRIGger:A:PULse:GLItch:TRIGIF
Sets or returns the acceptance or rejection of pulse
glitch trigger, based on width.
TRIGger:A:PULse:GLItch:WIDth
Sets or returns the width of
the A pulse glitch trigger
TRIGger:A:PULse:GLItch?
Returns the current A glitch
pulse trigger parameters
TRIGger:A:PULse:RUNT:LOGIc:INPUT
:CH<x>
Sets or returns the input setting for the logic condition
with runt for channel 1
through channel 4
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 46 --
TRIGger:A:PULse:RUNT:LOGIc:INPUT?
Returns the current A runt
pulse trigger logic input parameters
TRIGger:A:PULse:RUNT:LOGIc:THReshold
:CH<x>
Sets or returns logic threshold channels with runt for
channel 1 through channel 4
TRIGger:A:PULse:RUNT:LOGIc?
Returns the current A runt
pulse trigger logic parameters
TRIGger:A:PULse:RUNT:POLarity
Sets or returns the polarity
for the A pulse runt trigger
TRIGger:A:PULse:RUNT:THReshold:BOTh
Sets the upper and lower
switching thresholds for the
A pulse runt trigger
TRIGger:A:PULse:RUNT:THReshold:HIGH
Sets or returns the upper limit for the A pulse runt trigger
TRIGger:A:PULse:RUNT:THReshold:LOW
Sets or returns the lower limit
for the A pulse runt trigger
TRIGger:A:PULse:RUNT:THReshold?
Returns the upper and lower
thresholds for the A pulse
runt trigger
TRIGger:A:PULse:RUNT:WHEn
Sets or returns the type of
pulse width the trigger
checks for when it uncovers
a runt
TRIGger:A:PULse:RUNT:WIDth
Sets or returns the minimum
width for A pulse runt trigger
TRIGger:A:PULse:RUNT?
Returns the current A runt
pulse trigger parameters
TRIGger:A:PULse:SOUrce
Sets or returns the source for
the A pulse trigger
TRIGger:A:PULse:TIMEOut:POLarity
Sets or returns the polarity
for the A pulse timeout trigger
TRIGger:A:PULse:TIMEOut:TIMe
Sets or returns the pulse
timeout trigger time
TRIGger:A:PULse:TIMEOut?
Returns the parameters for
the A pulse timeout trigger
TRIGger:A:PULse:TRANsition:DELTATime
Sets or returns the delta time
used in calculating the transition value
TRIGger:A:PULse:TRANsition:POLarity
Sets or returns the polarity
for the A pulse transition trigger
TRIGger:A:PULse:TRANsition:THReshold
:BOTh
Sets the upper and lower
thresholds for the transition
trigger
TRIGger:A:PULse:TRANsition:THReshold
:HIGH
Sets or returns the upper
transition trigger threshold
TRIGger:A:PULse:TRANsition:THReshold
:LOW
Sets or returns the lower
transition trigger threshold
TRIGger:A:PULse:TRANsition:THReshold?
Returns the upper and lower
threshold limits for the transition time trigger
TRIGger:A:PULse:TRANsition:WHEn
Sets or returns the relationship of delta time to transitioning signal
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 47 --
TRIGger:A:PULse:TRANsition?
Returns the delta time, polarity, and both upper and lower
threshold limits for the transition time trigger
TRIGger:A:PULse:WIDth:HIGHLimit
Sets or returns the upper limit for the A pulse width trigger
TRIGger:A:PULse:WIDth:LOWLimit
Sets or returns the lower limit
for the A pulse width trigger
TRIGger:A:PULse:WIDth:POLarity
Sets or returns the polarity
for the A pulse width trigger
TRIGger:A:PULse:WIDth:WHEn
Sets or returns the criteria for
width specification of pulse
width trigger events
TRIGger:A:PULse:WIDth?
Returns the trigger A pulse
width parameters
TRIGger:A:PULse:WINdow:LOGIc
:INPUT:CH<x>
Sets or returns input setting
for logic condition with window for channel 1 through
channel 4
TRIGger:A:PULse:WINdow:LOGIc:INPUT?
Returns the current A window pulse trigger logic input
parameters
TRIGger:A:PULse:WINdow:LOGIc
:THReshold:CH<x>
Sets or returns logic threshold channels with window for
channel 1 through channel 4
TRIGger:A:PULse:WINdow:LOGIc?
Returns the current A window pulse trigger logic parameters
TRIGger:A:PULse:WINdow:THReshold:BOTh
Sets both window thresholds
TRIGger:A:PULse:WINdow:THReshold:HIGH
Sets or returns high window
threshold
TRIGger:A:PULse:WINdow:THReshold:LOW
Sets or returns low window
threshold
TRIGger:A:PULse:WINdow:Threshold?
Returns the upper and lower
thresholds for the A pulse
window trigger.
TRIGger:A:PULse:WINdow:TYPe
Sets or returns type of window trigger
TRIGger:A:PULse:WINdow:WHEn
Sets or returns condition for
use of window violation
TRIGger:A:PULse:WINdow:WIDTH
Sets or returns minimum
width of violation
TRIGger:A:PULse:WINdow?
Returns the current A window pulse trigger parameters
TRIGger:A:PULse?
Returns the A pulse trigger
parameters
TRIGger:A:TYPe
Sets or returns the type of A
trigger
TRIGger:A:VIDeo:CUSTom:FORMat
Sets or returns the video
scan format when the video
standard is set to Custom
TRIGger:A:VIDeo:CUSTom:SCAN
Sets or returns the video
scan rate
TRIGger:A:VIDeo:CUSTom?
Returns the custom video
parameters for the A trigger
TRIGger:A:VIDeo:FIELD
Sets or returns the video
field trigger
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 48 --
TRIGger:A:VIDeo:HOLdoff:FIELD
Sets or returns the trigger
holdoff in video field units
TRIGger:A:VIDeo:LINE
Sets or returns the trigger
delay as a number of video
lines
TRIGger:A:VIDeo:POLarity
Sets or returns the polarity of
the video trigger
TRIGger:A:VIDeo:SCAN
Sets or returns the video
scan rate
TRIGger:A:VIDeo:SOUrce
Sets or returns the video trigger source
TRIGger:A:VIDeo:STANdard
Sets or returns the video
standard
TRIGger:A:VIDeo?
Returns the video parameters for the A trigger
TRIGger:B
Sets the B trigger level to
50% or returns the B trigger
parameters
TRIGger:B:BY
Sets or returns B trigger time
or event qualifiers
TRIGger:B:EDGE:COUPling
Sets or returns the type of B
trigger coupling
TRIGger:B:EDGE:SLOpe
Sets or returns the B edge
trigger slope
TRIGger:B:EDGE:SOUrce
Sets or returns the B edge
trigger source
TRIGger:B:EDGE?
Returns B trigger edge type
parameters
TRIGger:B:EVENTS:COUNt
Sets or returns the number
of events that must occur before the B trigger occurs
TRIGger:B:EVENTS?
Returns the current B trigger
events parameter
TRIGger:B:LEVel
Sets or returns the level for
the B trigger
TRIGger:B:STATE
Sets or returns the state of
the B trigger
TRIGger:B:TIMe
Sets or returns the B trigger
delay time
TRIGger:B:TYPe
Sets or returns the type of B
trigger
TRIGger:STATE?
Returns the current state of
the triggering system
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 49 --
Vertical Command Group
Use the commands in the Vertical Command Group to control the vertical setup of all live (channel) waveforms for acquisition and to control
the display of channel, reference, and math waveforms.
You may replace VOLts with SCAle in the vertical commands. This
provides program compatibility with earlier models of Tektronix instruments.
Command
Description
CH<x>?
Returns vertical parameters for the specified channel
CH<x>:BANdwidth
Sets or returns the bandwidth of the specified channel
CH<x>:COUPling
Sets or returns the coupling setting for
the specified channel
CH<x>:DESKew
Sets or returns the deskew time for the
specified channel
CH<x>:INVert
Sets or returns the invert function for the
specified channel
CH<x>:LABel:NAMe
Defines or returns the label for the channel waveform
CH<x>:LABel:XPOS
Sets or returns the X display coordinate
for the channel waveform label
CH<x>:LABel:YPOS
Sets or returns the Y display coordinate
for the channel waveform label
CH<x>:OFFSet
Sets or returns the channel offset
CH<x>:POSition
Sets or returns the channel vertical position
CH<x>:PRObe?
Returns the gain, resistance, units, and
ID of the probe that is attached to the
specified channel
CH<x>:PROBECal?
Returns the probe calibration status
CH<x>:PRObe:GAIN?
Returns the gain of the probe that is attached to the specified channel
CH<x>:PRObe:ID?
Returns the type and serial number of the
probe that is attached to the specified
channel
CH<x>:PRObe:ID:TYPe
Returns the type of probe that is attached
to the specified channel
CH<x>:PRObe:ID:SERnumber?
Returns the serial number of the probe
that is attached to the specified channel
CH<x>PRObe:RESistance?
Returns the resistance of the probe that
is attached to the specified channel
CH<x>:PRObe:UNits?
Returns the units of the probe that is attached to the specified channel
CH<x>:PROBEFunc:EXTAtten
Sets the attenuation value for the specified channel to the specified scale factor
Or returns the user--specified attenuation
CH<x>PROBEFunc:EXTDBatten
Sets the attenuation value for the specified channel to the specified value, in
decibels
Or returns the user--specified attenuation,
in decibels
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 50 --
CH<x>PROBEFunc:EXTUnits
Sets the unit of measurement for the external attenuator of the specified channel
Or returns the user--specified unit of
measurement for the external attenuator
CH<x>:SCAle
Sets or returns the vertical scale of the
specified channel
CH<x>:TERmination
Sets channel input termination
MATH<x>:POSition
Sets or returns the vertical position for
math display
MATH<x>:SCAle
Sets or returns the vertical scale (per div)
for math display
REF<x>:HORizontal:POSition
Sets or returns the horizontal position of
the specified reference waveform in percent of the waveform that is displayed to
the right of the center vertical graticule
REF<x>:LABel?
Returns a branch query containing the
waveform label name and the coordinates at which the label is displayed
REF<x>:LABel:NAMe
Sets or returns the label of the designated waveform
REF<x>:LABel:XPOS
Sets or returns the position of the reference waveform label on the X axis
REF<x>:LABel:YPOS
Sets or returns the position of the reference waveform label on the Y axis
REF<x>:VERTical:POSition
Sets or returns the vertical position of the
specified reference waveform
REF<x>:VERTical:SCAle
Sets or returns the reference waveform
vertical scale in vertical units/div
SELect?
Returns information on which waveforms
are on or off and which waveform is selected.
SELect:<wfm>
Turns on the specified waveform
Or returns whether the specified channel
is on or off
SELect:CONTRol <wfm>
Sets or returns the waveform controlled
by the front panel
Waveform Transfer Command Group
Use the commands in the Waveform Transfer Command Group to
transfer waveform data points to and from the instrument. Waveform
data points are a collection of values that define a waveform. One data
value usually represents one data point in the waveform record. When
working with envelope waveforms, each data value is either the minimum or maximum of a min/max pair.
Before you transfer waveform data, you must specify the data format,
record length, and waveform source.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 51 --
Data Formats
Acquired waveform data uses eight or more bits to represent each data
point. The number of bits used depends on the acquisition mode specified when you acquired the data. Data acquired in SAMple or ENVelope mode uses eight bits per waveform data point. Data acquired in
AVERage mode uses up to 14 bits per point.
The instrument can transfer waveform data in either ASCII or binary
format. You specify the format with the DATa:ENCdg command. The
instrument uses signed, 4 byte integers and floating point values; it does
not support unsigned floating point values.
ASCII data is represented by signed integer or floating point values.
An example ASCII waveform data string may look like this:
CURVE<space>-110,-109,-110,-110,-109,-107,
-109,-107,-106,-105,-103,-100,-97,-90,-84,-80
Use ASCII to obtain more readable and easier to format output than
binary. However, ASCII may require more bytes to send the same values than it does with binary. This may reduce transmission speeds.
Binary data can be represented by signed integer or floating point values. The range of the values depends on the byte width specified. When
the byte width is one, signed integer data ranges from --128 to 127, and
positive integer values range from 0 to 255. When the byte width is
two, the values range from --32768 to 32767. When a MATH (or REF
that came with a MATH) is used, 32 bit floating point values are used
that are four bytes in width.
The defined binary formats specify the order in which the bytes are
transferred. The following are the four binary formats:
H
RIBinary specifies signed integer data--point representation with
the most significant byte transferred first.
H
SRIBinary is the same as RIBinary except that the byte order is
swapped, meaning that the least significant byte is transferred first.
This format is useful when transferring data to PCs.
H
RFBinary specifies floating point data--point representation with
the most significant byte transferred first.
H
SRFBinary is the same as RFBinary except that the byte order is
swapped, meaning that the least significant byte is transferred first.
This format is useful when transferring data to PCs.
Waveform Data and Record Lengths
You can transfer multiple points for each waveform record. You can
transfer a portion of the waveform or you can transfer the entire record.
You can use the DATa:STARt and DATa:STOP commands to specify
the first and last data points of the waveform record.
When transferring data into the instrument, you must first specify the
record length of the destination waveform record. You do this with the
WFMInopre:NR_Pt command. Next, specify the first data point within
the waveform record. For example, when you set DATa:STARt to 1,
data points will be stored starting with the first point in the record. The
instrument will ignore the value set by DATa:STOP when reading in
data. It will stop reading data when there is no more data to read or
when it has reached the specified record length.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 52 --
When transferring data from the instrument, you must specify the first
and last data points in the waveform record. Setting DATa:STARt to 1
and DATa:STOP to the record length will always return the entire waveform.
Waveform Data Locations and Memory Allocation
The DATa:SOUrce command specifies the waveform source when
transferring a waveform from the instrument. You can only transfer one
waveform at a time. Waveforms sent to the instrument are always
stored in one of the four reference memory locations. Use the
DATa:DESTination command to specify a reference memory location.
Waveform Preamble
Each waveform that you transfer has an associated waveform preamble
that contains information such as the horizontal scale, the vertical scale,
and other settings in effect when the waveform was created. Refer to
the individual WFMInpre and WFMOutpre commands for more information.
Scaling Waveform Data
Once you transfer the waveform data to the controller, you can convert
the data points into voltage values for analysis using information from
the waveform preamble.
Transferring Waveform Data from the Instrument
You can transfer waveforms from the instrument to an external controller using the following sequence:
1.
Select the waveform source(s) using DATa:SOUrce.
2.
Specify the waveform data format using DATa:ENCdg.
3.
Specify the number of bytes per data point using
WFMOutpre:BYT_Nr.
Note: MATH waveforms (and REF waveforms that came from a
MATH) are always set to four bytes.
4.
Specify the portion of the waveform that you want to transfer using
DATa:STARt and DATa:STOP.
5.
Transfer waveform preamble information using WFMOutpre?.
6.
Transfer waveform data from the instrument using CURVe?.
Transferring Waveform Data to the Instrument
1.
Specify waveform reference memory using DATa:DESTination.
2.
Set WFMInpre:NR_Pt to equal the number of data points to be
sent.
3.
Specify the waveform data format using WFMInpre:ENCdg.
4.
Specify the number of bytes per data point using
WFMInpre:BYT_Nr.
5.
Specify first data point in the waveform record using DATa:STARt.
6.
Transfer waveform preamble information using WFMInpre.
Note: FastAcq waveforms cannot be returned to the instrument via the
CURVe command.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 53 --
Command
CURVe
Description
The command format transfers waveform data
to the instrument (reference memory location
specified by DATa:DESTination)
The query format transfers waveform data
from instrument specified by the DATa:SOUrce
command
DATa
Sets the format and location of the waveform
data that is transferred with the CURVe? Command
Or returns the format and location of the waveform data that is transferred with the CURVe?
command
DATa:DESTination
Sets or returns the reference memory location
for storing waveform data sent to the instrument
DATa:ENCdg
Sets or returns the format of outgoing waveform data
DATa:SOUrce
Sets or returns the location of waveform data
transferred from the instrument
DATa:STARt
Sets or returns the starting point in waveform
transfer
DATa:STOP
Sets or returns the ending data point in waveform transfer
WAVFrm?
Returns a branch query containing waveform
data in either binary or ASCII format, waveform formatting data, and the location of the
waveform data source
WFMInpre?
Returns the waveform formatting specification
to be applied to the next incoming CURVE
command data
WFMInpre:BIT_Nr
Sets or returns the number of bits per binary
waveform point
WFMInpre:BN_Fmt
Sets or returns the format of binary data for
the incoming waveform
WFMInpre:BYT_Nr
Sets or returns the binary field data width for
the first ordered waveform
WFMInpre:BYT_Or
Sets or returns the byte order of waveform
points
WFMInpre:ENCdg
Sets or returns the type of encoding for incoming waveform data
WFMInpre:NR_FR?
Returns one frame, indicating the number of
frames in the transmitted waveform record
WFMInpre:NR_Pt
Sets or returns the number of points in the
transmitted waveform record
WFMInpre:PT_Fmt
Sets or returns the point format of incoming
waveform data
WFMInpre:PT_Off
Sets or returns the trigger point within the incoming waveform data
WFMInpre:WFId
Provided to allow a waveform extracted from
the instrument to be more easily sent back
WFMInpre:XINcr
Sets or returns the horizontal sampling interval
between incoming waveform points
WFMInpre:XUNit
Sets or returns the horizontal units of the incoming waveform
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 54 --
WFMInpre:XZEro
Sets or returns the (sub--sample) time between the trigger sample and the occurrence
of the actual incoming waveform trigger
WFMInpre:YMUlt
Sets or returns the vertical scale factor, per
digitizing level, of the incoming waveform
points
WFMInpre:YOFf
Sets or returns the vertical position of the incoming waveform in digitizing levels
WFMInpre:YUNit
Sets or returns the vertical units of the incoming waveform
WFMInpre:YZEro
Sets or returns the offset of the incoming waveform
WFMOutpre?
Returns the waveform formatting data for the
waveform specified by the DATA:SOURCE
command
WFMOutpre:BIT_Nr
Sets or returns the number of bits per waveform point that outgoing waveforms contain
WFMOutpre:BN_Fmt
Sets or returns the format of binary data for
the waveform
WFMOutpre:BYT_Nr
Sets or returns the data width for the waveform
WFMOutpre:BYT_Or
Sets or returns the byte order of waveform
points
WFMOutpre:ENCdg
Sets or returns the type of encoding for outgoing waveforms
WFMOutpre:NR_FR?
Returns the number of frames for the
DATa:SOUrce waveform transmitted in response to a CURVe? query
WFMOutpre:NR_Pt?
Returns the number of points for the waveform
transmitted in response to a CURVe? query
WFMOutpre:PT_Fmt?
Returns the point format for the waveform
WFMOutpre:PT_Off?
Returns the trigger point relative to
DATA:START for the waveform
WFMOutpre:PT_OR?
Returns whether the source waveform is DPO
WFMOutpre:WFId?
Returns a string describing the acquisition parameters for the waveform
WFMOutpre:XINcr?
Returns the horizontal sampling interval
WFMOutpre:XUNit?
Returns the horizontal units for the waveform
WFMOutpre:XZEro?
Returns the (sub--sample) time between the
trigger sample and the occurrence of the actual waveform trigger
WFMOutpre:YMUlt?
Returns the vertical scale factor per digitizing
level for the waveform
WFMOutpre:YOFf?
Returns the vertical offset in digitizing levels
for the waveform
WFMOutpre:YUNit?
Returns the vertical units for the waveform
WFMOutpre:YZEro?
Returns the vertical offset for the waveform
WFMPre:NR_FR?
Returns the number of frames for the waveform transmitted in response to a CURVe?
query
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 55 --
Zoom Command Group
Zoom commands let you expand and position the waveform display
horizontally and vertically, without changing the time base or vertical
settings.
You can specify up to four zoom areas. You can also specify a zoomed
waveform as a zoom source, which enables you to zoom in on a
zoomed waveform.
Command
ZOOm
Description
Sets the zoom transforms to
default values for either live
traces or all traces
Or returns the current vertical
and horizontal positioning
and scaling of the display
ZOOm:GRAticule:SIZE
Sets or returns the size of the
zoom graticule
ZOOm:GRAticule:SPLit
Sets or returns the sizes of
the acquisition and zoom
windows when Zoom is selected.
ZOOm:MODe
Sets or returns the zoom
mode
ZOOm:SCROLL:DIREction
Sets or returns the direction
of AutoScroll for zoomed waveforms
ZOOm:SCROLL:LOCk
Sets or returns the state of
Scroll Lock, on or off
ZOOm:SCROLL:SPEED
Sets or returns the speed of
AutoScroll for zoomed waveforms
ZOOm:ZOOM<x>
Sets or returns zoom factors
for the specified zoom
ZOOm:ZOOM<x>:<wfm>:HORizontal
:POSition
Sets or returns the horizontal
zoom position for the specified waveform in the specified zoom
ZOOm:ZOOM<x>:<wfm>:HORizontal:SCAle
Sets or returns the horizontal
zoom scale of the specified
waveform in the specified
zoom
ZOOm:ZOOM<x>:<wfm>:VERTical:POSition
Sets or returns the vertical
zoom position for the specified waveform in the specified zoom
ZOOm:ZOOM<x>:<wfm>:VERTical:SCAle
Sets or returns the vertical
zoom scale for the specified
waveform in the specified
zoom
ZOOm:ZOOM<x>:SCROLLLock
Sets or returns Scroll Lock
for the specified zoom
ZOOm:ZOOM<x>:STATE
Specifies or returns a trace
as zoomed, on or off
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 56 --
Commands Listed in Alphabetical Order
*CAL?
Description
This query--only command instructs the digitizing oscilloscope to perform signal path compensation and return its calibration status. This
command is equivalent to selecting Instrument Calibration from the
Utilities menu and then clicking the Calibrate button.
Note: The self--calibration can take several minutes to respond. No
other commands will be executed until calibration is complete.
Group
Calibration
Related Commands
CALibrate:RESults:SPC?
Syntax
*CAL?
Returns
H 0
<NR1>
Means the calibration did not complete successfully.
H 1 (or any non zero value)
<NR1>
Means the calibration completed without errors.
Example
*CAL?
This query might return
1
This indicates that the calibration was successful.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 57 --
*CLS
Description
This command (no query form) clears the following:
H
Event Queue
H
Standard Event Status Register
H
Status Byte Register (except the MAV bit)
If the *CLS command immediately follows an <EOI>, the Output
Queue and MAV bit (Status Byte Register bit 4) are also cleared. MAV
indicates that information is in the output queue. The device clear
(DCL) GPIB control message will clear the output queue and thus
MAV. *CLS does not clear the output queue or MAV.
*CLS can suppress a Service Request that is to be generated by an
*OPC. This will happen if a single sequence acquisition operation is
still being processed when the *CLS command is executed.
Group
Status and Error
Related Commands
DESE, *ESE, *ESR?, EVENT?, EVMsg?, *SRE, *STB?
Syntax
*CLS
Example
*CLS
This command clears the instrument status data structures.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 58 --
*DDT
Description
This command allows you to specify a command or a list of commands
that are executed when the instrument receives a *TRG command or
the GET GPIB interface message. Define Device Trigger (*DDT) is a
special alias that the *TRG command uses.
Group
Miscellaneous
Related Commands
ALIas, *TRG
Syntax 1
*DDT {<Block>|<Qstring>}
Syntax 2
*DDT?
Arguments
H <Block>
This is a complete sequence of program messages. The messages can
contain only valid commands that must be separated by semicolons
and must follow all rules for concatenating commands. The sequence
must be less than or equal to 80 characters. The format of this argument is always returned as a query.
H <QString>
This is a complete sequence of program messages. The messages can
contain only valid commands that must be separated by semicolons
and must follow all rules for concatenating commands. The sequence
must be less than or equal to 80 characters.
Example
*DDT #OACQUIRE:STATE RUN
This command specifies that the acquisition system will be started each
time a *TRG command is sent.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 59 --
*ESE
Description
This command sets and queries the bits in the Event Status Enable Register (ESER). The ESER prevents events from being reported to the
Status Byte Register (STB). For a more detailed discussion of the use of
these registers, see Registers.
Group
Status and Error
Related Commands
*CLS, DESE, *ESR?, EVENT?, EVMsg?, *SRE, *STB?
Syntax 1
*ESE <NR1>
Syntax 2
*ESE?
Argument
H <NR1>
This specifies the binary bits of the ESER according to this value,
which ranges from 0 through 255.
The power--on default for the ESER is 0 if *PSC is 1. If *PSC is 0,
the ESER maintains the previous power cycle value through the current power cycle.
Note: Setting the DESER and the ESER to the same values allows
only those codes to be entered into the Event Queue and summarized
on the ESB bit (bit 5) of the Status Byte Register. Use the DESE command to set the DESER.
Example 1
*ESE 209
This command sets the ESER to binary 11010001, which enables the
PON, URQ, EXE, and OPC bits.
Example 2
*ESE?
This query form of this command returns 186, showing that the ESER
contains the binary value 10111010.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 60 --
*ESR?
Description
This query--only command returns the contents of the Standard Event
Status Register (SESR). *ESR? also clears the SESR (since reading the
SESR clears it). For a more detailed discussion of the use of these registers, see Registers.
Group
Status and Error
Related Commands
ALLEv?, *CLS, DESE, *ESE, EVENT?, EVMsg?, *SRE, *STB?
Syntax
*ESR?
Example
*ESR?
This query might return 213, showing that the SESR contains the
binary value 11010101.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 61 --
*IDN?
Description
This query--only command returns the instrument identification code.
Group
Miscellaneous
Related Commands
ID?
Syntax
IDN?
Example
*IDN?
This query might return
:TEKTRONIX,TDS5054B,10000001,CF:91.1CT
FV:01.00.912,
indicating the instrument model number, serial number, configured
number, and firmware version number.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 62 --
*LRN?
Description
This query--only command returns the commands that list the instrument settings (except for configuration information for the calibration
values), allowing you to record or ”learn” the current instrument settings. You can use these commands to return the instrument to the state
it was in when you made the *LRN? query. This command is identical
to the SET? Command.
Group
Miscellaneous
Related Commands
SET?
Syntax
*LRN?
Example
*LRN?
This query might return the following response:
:ACQUIRE:STOPAFTER RUNSTOP;STATE 1;MODE SAMPLE;NUMENV 10;NUMAVG 16;NUMSAMPLES 16000;SAMPLINGMODE IT;:FASTACQ:STATE 0;:APPLICATION:GPKNOB1:ACTIVE
0;:APPLICATION:GPKNOB2:ACTIVE 0;:APPLICATION:WINDOW:HEIGHT 236;WIDTH 640;:APPLICATION:SCOPEAPP:STATE RUNNING;WINDOW FULLSCREEN;:APPLICATION:EXTAPP:STATE
NOTRUNNING;:VARIABLE:EVENT:REPORT BOTH;:AUXOUT:SOURCE ATRIGGER;EDGE FALLING;:CMDBATCH
1;:HEADER 1;:LOCK NONE;:ROSC:SOURCE INTERNAL;:VERBOSE 1;:ALIAS:STATE 0;:DISPLAY:CLOCK
1;COLOR:PALETTE:IMAGEVIEW TEMPERATURE;RECORDVIEW NORMAL;USER:GRATICULE 165,50,15;CH1
180,50,100;CH2 300,50,100;CH3 60,50,100;CH4
240,50,100;REF1 0,90,0;REF2 0,90,100;REF3
60,90,100;REF4 240,90,100;MATH1
160,50,100;MATH2 40,60,100;MATH3
120,60,100;MATH4 195,50,100;HISTOGRAM
320,50,100;CARET 150,50,100;MASK 0,25,75;MASKHIGHLIGHT 140,50,100;:DISPLAY:COLOR:MATHCOLOR
DEFAULT..
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 63 --
*OPC
Description
This command generates the operation complete message in the Standard Event Status Register (SESR) when all pending commands that
generate an OPC message are complete. The *OPC? query places the
ASCII character ”1” into the output queue when all such OPC commands are complete. The *OPC? response is not available to read until
all pending operations finish. For a complete discussion of the use of
these registers and the output queue, see Registers and Queues.
The *OPC command allows you to synchronize the operation of the
instrument with your application program. For more information, see
Synchronization Methods.
Commands that generate an OPC Message
Operation
Command
Single sequence
acquisition
ACQuire:STATE ON or
ACQuire:STATE RUN or
ACQuire:STATE 1
(when ACQuire:STOPAfter is set to
SEQuence).
Calibration step
Refer to the optional TDS5000 Series Digital
Phosphor Oscilloscopes Service Manual
Group
Status and Error
Related Commands
BUSY?, *WAI
Syntax 1
*OPC
Syntax 2
*OPC?
Example 1
*OPC
Upon completion of all pending OPC operations, this command generates the operation complete message in the SESR.
Example 2
*OPC?
This query might return 1 to indicate that all pending OPC operations
are finished.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 64 --
*OPT?
Description
This query--only command returns a list of the options installed in your
instrument.
Group
Status and Error
Syntax
*OPT?
Example
*OPT?
This query might return
:3M:16 Meg Max 4M/CH
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 65 --
*PSC
Description
This command sets and queries the power--on status flag that controls
the automatic power--on handling of the DESER, SRER, and ESER
registers. When *PSC is true, the DESER register is set to 255 and the
SRER and ESER registers are set to 0 at power--on. When *PSC is
false, the current values in the DESER, SRER, and ESER registers are
preserved in nonvolatile memory when power is shut off and are restored at power--on.
Group
Status and Error
Related Commands
DESE, *ESE, FACtory, *RST, *SRE
Syntax 1
*PSC <NR1>
Syntax 2
*PSC?
Argument
H <NR1>
A 0 sets the power--on status clear flag to false, disables the power--on
clear and allows the instrument to possibly assert SRQ after power-on; any other value sets the power--on status clear flag to true, enabling the power--on status clear and prevents any SRQ assertion after
power on.
Example 1
*PSC 0
This command sets the power--on status clear flag to false.
Example 2
*PSC?
The query form of this command might return 1 to indicate that the
power--on status clear flag is set to true.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 66 --
*PUD
Description
This command sets or queries a string of Protected User Data. This data
is protected by the PASSWord command. You can modify it only by
first entering the correct password. This password is not necessary to
query the data.
Group
Status and Error
Related Commands
PASSWord
Syntax 1
*PUD {<Block>|<String>}
Syntax 2
*PUD?
Argument
H <Block>
This is a block containing up to 100 characters.
H <String>
This is a string containing up to 100 characters.
Example 1
*PUD #229This instrument belongs to me
This command stores the string ”This oscilloscope belongs to me” in
the user protected data area.
Example 2
*PUD?
This query might return #221Property of Company X
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 67 --
*RCL
Description
This command (no query form) restores the state of the instrument from
a copy of the settings stored in memory (The settings are stored using
the *SAV command). If ’factory’ is referenced (by specifying ’0’), the
factory default values will be restored.
This command is equivalent to RECAll:SETup and performs the same
function as selecting Recall from the File menu, and then pressing the
Setup button.
Group
Save and Recall
Related Commands
DELEte:SETUp, FACtory, *LRN?, RECAll:SETUp, *RST, *SAV,
SAVe:SETUp
Syntax
*RCL <NR1>
Argument
H <NR1>
This specifies a setup storage location value ranging from 0 through
10. Using an out--of--range value causes an execution error.
Example
*RCL 3
This command restores the instrument from a copy of the settings
stored in memory location 3.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 68 --
*RST
Description
This command (no query form) resets the instrument to the factory default settings. The *RST command does not alter the following:
H
The state of the IEEE Std 488.1--1987 interface
H
The selected IEEE Std 488.1--1987 address of the instrument
H
Calibration data that affect device specifications
H
The Output Queue
H
The Service Request Enable Register setting
H
The Power--on status clear flag setting
H
Alias definitions
H
Stored settings
H
The *PUD? Response
H
Any of the values associated with the DATA command.
This command is equivalent to pressing the DEFAULT SETUP button
on the front panel.
Group
Status and Error
Related Commands
FACtory, RECAll:SETUp, SAVe:SETUp
Syntax
*RST
Argument
None
Example
*RST
This command resets the instrument settings to factory defaults.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 69 --
*SAV
Description
This command (no query form) stores the state of the instrument to a
specified memory location. You can later use the *RCL command to
restore the instrument to this saved state. \
This command is equivalent to selecting Save As from the File menu,
and then pressing the Setup button.
Group
Save and Recall
Related Commands
*RCL, RECAll:SETUp, SAVe:SETUp
Syntax
*SAV <NR1>
Argument
H <NR1>
This specifies a location in which to save the state of the instrument.
Location values range from 1 through 10. Using an out--of--range
location value causes an execution error. Any settings that have been
stored previously at this location will be overwritten.
Example
*SAV 2
This command saves the current instrument state in memory location 2.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 70 --
*SDS
Description
This command (no query form) changes the specified setup to reference
the factory setup instead of the specific user setup slot. The content of
the setup slot is unchanged, but the data will no longer be accessible to
you.
This command is equivalent to selecting Delete from the File menu,
and then choosing the All Setups.
Group
Save and Recall
Related Commands
DELEte:SETUp
Syntax
*SDS <NR1>
Argument
H <NR1>
This specifies a user setup location to delete. Setup storage location
values range from 1 through 10; using an out--of--range value causes
an error.
Example
*SDS 2
This command changes setup slot 2 to reference the factory setup.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 71 --
*SRE
Description
The *SRE (Service Request Enable) command sets and queries the bits
in the Service Request Enable Register. For more information, refer to
Registers.
Group
Status and Error
Related Commands
*CLS, DESE, *ESE, *ESR?, EVENT?, EVMSg?, FACtory, *STB?
Syntax 1
*SRE <NR1>
Syntax 2
*SRE?
Argument
H <NR1>
This is a value in the range from 0 through 255. The binary bits of the
SRER are set according to this value. Using an out--of--range value
causes an execution error. The power--on default for SRER is 0 if
*PSC is 1. If *PSC is 0, the SRER maintains the previous power cycle
value through the current power cycle.
Example 1
*SRE 48
This command sets the bits in the SRER to binary 00110000.
Example 2
*SRE?
This query might return 32, showing that the bits in the SRER have the
binary value of 00100000.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 72 --
*STB?
Description
The *STB? (Read Status Byte) query returns the contents of the Status
Byte Register (SBR) using the Master Summary Status (MSS) bit. For
more information, refer to Registers.
Group
Status and Error
Related Commands
*CLS, DESE, *ESE, *ESR?, EVENT?, EVMSg?, FACtory, *SRE?
Syntax
*STB?
Returns
<NR1>
Example
*STB?
This query might return 96, showing that the SBR contains the binary
value 01100000.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 73 --
*TRG
Description
This command (no query form) performs the group execute trigger on
commands defined by *DDT.
Group
Miscellaneous
Related Commands
*DDT
Syntax
*TRG
Example
*TRG
This command immediately executes all commands that have been defined by *DDT.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 74 --
*TST?
Description
This query--only command tests (self--test) the GPIB interface and returns a 0.
Group
Miscellaneous
Syntax
*TST?
Example
*TST?
This query always returns 0.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 75 --
*WAI
Description
The *WAI (Wait) command (no query form) prevents the instrument
from executing further commands or queries until all pending commands that generate an OPC message are complete. This command allows you to synchronize the operation of the instrument with your application program. For more information, refer to Synchronization
Methods.
Group
Status and Error
Related Commands
BUSY?, *OPC
Syntax
*WAI
Example
*WAI
This command prevents the instrument from executing any further
commands or queries until all pending commands that generate an OPC
message are complete.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 76 --
ACQuire:MODe
Description
This command sets or queries the acquisition mode of the instrument.
This affects all live waveforms. This command is equivalent to selecting Horizontal/Acquisition from the Horiz/Acq menu, and then choosing the desired mode from the Acquisition Mode group box.
Waveforms are the displayed data point values taken from acquisition
intervals. Each acquisition interval represents a time duration set by the
horizontal scale (time per division). The instrument sampling system
always samples at the maximum rate and so an acquisition interval may
include more than one sample.
The acquisition mode (which you set using this ACQuire:MODe command) determines how the final value of the acquisition interval is generated from the many data samples.
Group
Acquisition
Related Commands
ACQuire:NUMAVg, ACQuire:NUMenv, CURVe?
Syntax 1
ACQuire:MODe{SAMple|PEAKdetect|HIRes|AVErage|ENVelope}
Syntax 2
ACQuire:MODe?
Arguments
H SAMple
Specifies that the displayed data point value is the first sampled value
that is taken during the acquisition interval. In sample mode, all waveform data has 8 bits of precision. You can request 16 bit data with a
CURVe? query but the lower--order 8 bits of data will be zero. SAMple
is the default mode.
H PEAKdetect
Specifies the display of high--low range of the samples taken from a
single waveform acquisition. The high--low range is displayed as a
vertical column that extends from the highest to the lowest value
sampled during the acquisition interval. PEAKdetect mode can reveal
the presence of aliasing or narrow spikes.
H HIRes
Specifies Hi Res mode where the displayed data point value is the
average of all the samples taken during the acquisition interval. This
is a form of averaging, where the average comes from a single wave-
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 77 --
form acquisition. The number of samples taken during the acquisition
interval determines the number of data values that compose the average.
H AVErage
Specifies averaging mode, in which the resulting waveform shows an
average of SAMple data points from several separate waveform acquisitions. The instrument processes the number of waveforms you
specify into the acquired waveform, creating a running exponential
average of the input signal. The number of waveform acquisitions that
go into making up the average waveform is set or queried using the
ACQuire:NUMAVg command.
H ENVelope
Specifies envelope mode, where the resulting waveform shows the
PEAKdetect range of data points from several separate waveform
acquisitions. The number of waveform acquisitions that go into making up the envelope waveform is set or queried using the ACQuire:NUMENv command.
H WFMDB
WfmDB (Waveform Database) mode acquires and displays a waveform pixmap. A pixmap is the accumulation of one or more acquisitions.
The oscilloscope acquires data after each trigger event using Sample
mode; it then determines the pix map location of each sample point
and accumulates it with stored data from previous acquisitions.
A Pix map is a two dimensional array. The value at each point in the
array is a counter that reflects the hit intensity. Infinite and noninfinite
persist display modes affect how pix maps are accumulated. Zoom,
Math, FastAcq, FastFrame, XY, XYZ, Roll, and Interpolated Time
(IT) Sampling Mode are conflicting features to WFMDB acqMode.
Turning on one of them generally turns the other one off. Selection of
some standard masks (for example, eye masks, which require option
SM) changes the acquisition mode to WFMDB.
Example 1
ACQuire:MODe ENVelope
Sets the acquisition mode to display a waveform that is an envelope of
many individual waveform acquisitions.
Example 2
ACQuire:MODe?
This command might return
:ACQuire:MODe AVERAGE
indicating that the displayed waveform is the average of the specified
number of waveform acquisitions.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 78 --
ACQuire:NUMACq?
Description
This query--only command returns the number of waveform acquisitions that have occurred since starting acquisition with the ACQuire:STATE RUN command. This value is reset to zero when any
acquisition, horizontal, or vertical arguments that affect the waveform
are changed. The maximum number of acquisitions that can be counted
is
. The instrument stops counting when this number is reached.
This is the same value that displays in the upper center of the screen
when the acquisition system is stopped.
Group
Acquisition
Related Commands
ACQuire:STATE
Syntax
ACQuire:NUMACq?
Example
ACQuire:NUMACq?
This command might return
:ACQUIRE:NUMACQ 350
indicating that 350 acquisitions have occurred since executing an ACQuire:STATE RUN command.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 79 --
ACQuire:NUMAVg
Description
This command sets or queries the number of waveform acquisitions
that make up an averaged waveform. Use the ACQuire:MODe command to enable the Average mode. Sending this command is equivalent
to selecting Horizontal/Acquisition Setup from the Horiz/Acq menu,
selecting the Acquisition tab, and choosing Average from the Acquisition Mode group box. Then enter the desired number of waveforms that
will be used to make up an averaged waveform in the # of Wfms box.
Group
Acquisition
Related Commands
ACQuire:MODe
Syntax 1
ACQuire:NUMAVg <NR1>
Syntax 2
ACQuire:NUMAVg?
Arguments
H NR1
This is the number of waveform acquisitions to average.
Example 1
ACQuire:NUMAVg 10
This command specifies that 10 waveform averages will be performed
before exponential averaging starts.
Example 2
ACQuire:NUMAVg?
This command might return
:ACQUIRE:NUMAVG 75
indicating that there are 75 acquisitions specified for averaging.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 80 --
ACQuire:NUMEnv
Description
This command sets or queries the number of waveform acquisitions
that make up an envelope waveform. Sending this command is equivalent to setting the # of Wfms in the Acquisition Setup menu when Envelope Acquisition mode is selected.
Group
Acquisition
Syntax 1
ACQuire:NUMEnv {<NR1>|INFInite}
Syntax 2
ACQuire:NUMEnv?
Arguments
H NR1
This is the number of waveform acquisitions to be enveloped.
Example 1
ACQuire:NUMenv 10
This command specifies that an enveloped waveform will show the
result of combining 10 separately acquired waveforms.
Example 2
ACQuire:NUMenv?
This command might return
:ACQUIRE:NUMENV 0
indicating that acquisitions are acquired infinitely for enveloped waveforms.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 81 --
ACQuire:NUMSAMples
Description
This command sets or queries the minimum number of acquired samples that make up a waveform database (WfmDB) waveform for single
sequence mode and Mask Pass/Fail Completion Test. This is equivalent
to setting the Waverform Database Samples in the Acquisition Mode
side menu.
Group
Acquisition
Syntax 1
ACQuire:NUMSAMples {<NR1>}
Syntax 2
ACQuire:NUMSAMples?
Arguments
H NR1
This is the minimum number of acquired samples that make up a waveform database (WfmDB) waveform for single sequence mode and
Mask Pass/Fail Completion Test. The default value is 16,000 samples.
The range is 5,000 to 2,147,400,000 samples.
In real time mode, if the entire trace is displayed, one triggered acquisition should acquire 5000 samples for a record length of 5000. If
you want 5001 samples, the instrument will need to make two acquisitions (10,000 samples). If you request fewer samples than the record
length, the number of samples will be the same as the record length.
Example 1
ACQuire:NUMSAMples 5000
This command specifies that 5000 samples will be acquired in WfmDB
mode for single sequence mode and Mask Pass/Fail Completion Test.
Example 2
ACQuire:NUMSAMples?
This command might return
:ACQUIRE:NUMSAMples 10000
indicating that there are 10,000 samples to be acquired in WfmDB
mode for single sequence and Mask Pass/Fail Completion Test.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 82 --
ACQuire:SAMPlingmode
Description
This command sets or queries the sampling mode.
Group
Acquisition
Syntax 1
ACQuire:SAMPlingmode{RT|IT|ET}
Syntax 2
ACQuire:SAMPlingmode?
Arguments
H RT
This argument sets the sampling mode to real time only.
H IT
This argument sets the sampling mode to interpolation allowed.
H ET
This argument sets the sampling mode to equivalent time allowed.
The number of channels selected and the sampling speed affects the
mode that the instrument uses to acquire data. At slow sampling speeds
the instrument uses real time sampling. At fast sampling speeds, the
instrument uses equivalent time sampling or interpolation. For speeds
between these extremes, the instrument creates waveform records differently, depending on the number of input channels selected. Refer to
the following table, which assumes 500--point records when indicatimg
the mode.
Time
Base
One
Channel
T wo
Channel
Three or
Four Channel
≥40 ns/div
RT
RT
RT
20 ns/div
RT
RT
ET or IT
10 ns/div
RT
ET or IT
ET or IT
≤4 ns/div
ET or IT
ET or IT
ET or IT
≥ means slower than; ≤ means faster than
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 83 --
Example 1
ACQuire:NUMSAMples 5000
This command specifies that 5000 samples will be acquired in WfmDB
mode for single sequence mode and Mask Pass/Fail Completion Test.
Example 2
ACQuire:NUMSAMples?
This command might return
:ACQUIRE:NUMSAMples 10000
indicating that there are 10,000 samples to be acquired in WfmDB
mode for single sequence and Mask Pass/Fail Completion Test.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 84 --
ACQuire:STATE
Description
This command starts or stops acquisitions. When state is set to ON or
RUN, a new acquisition will be started. If the last acquisition was a
single acquisition sequence, a new single sequence acquisition will be
started. If the last acquisition was continuous, a new continuous acquisition will be started.
If RUN is issued in the middle of completing a single sequence acquisition (for example, averaging or enveloping), the acquisition sequence is
restarted, and any accumulated data is discarded. Also, the instrument
resets the number of acquisitions. If the RUN argument is issued while
in continuous mode, a reset occurs and acquired data continues to acquire.
Sending this command is equivalent to pressing the front--panel RUN/
STOP button.
Group
Acquisition
Related Commands
ACQuire:STOPAfter
Syntax 1
ACQuire:STATE{OFF|ON|RUN|STOP|<NR1>}
Syntax 2
ACQuire:STATE?
Arguments
H OFF
This argument stops acquisitions.
H STOP
This argument stops acquisitions.
H ON
This argument starts acquisitions.
H RUN
This argument starts acquisitions.
H NR1
0 stops acquisitions; any other value starts acquisitions.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 85 --
Example 1
ACQuire:STATE RUN
This command starts the acquisition of waveform data and resets the
count of the number of acquisitions.
Example 2
ACQuire:STATE?
This query might return
:ACQUIRE:STATE
0
indicating that the acquisition is stopped.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 86 --
ACQuire:STOPAfter
Description
This command sets or queries whether the instrument continually acquires acquisitions or acquires a single sequence. This command is
equivalent to pressing SINGLE from the front panel.
Group
Acquisition
Related Commands
ACQuire:STATE
Syntax 1
ACQuire:STOPAfter
{RUNSTop|SEQuence}
Syntax 2
ACQuire:STOPAfter?
Arguments
H
RUNSTop
Specifies that the instrument will continually acquire data, if ACQuire:STATE is turned on.
H
SEQuence
Specifies that the next acquisition will be a single--sequence acquisition.
Example 1
ACQuire:STOPAfter RUNSTOP
This command sets the instrument to continually acquire data.
Example 2
ACQuire:STOPAfter?
This query might return
:ACQUIRE:STOPAFTER SEQUENCE
indicating that the next acquisition the instrument makes will be of the
single--sequence type.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 87 --
ACQuire?
Description
This query--only command returns the following current acquisition
parameters:
H
Stop after
H
Acquisition state
H
Mode
H
Number of envelopes
H
Number of averages
H
Repetitive signals
Group
Acquisition
Related Commands
ACQuire:MODe, ACQuire:NUMACq, ACQuire:NUMAVg, ACQuire:NUMenv, ACQuire:STOPAfter
Syntax
ACQuire?
Example
ACQuire?
This query might return the following string for the current acquisition
parameters:
:ACQUIRE:STOPAFTER RUNSTOP;STATE 1;MODE SAMPLE;NUMENV 10;NUMAVG 16;NUMSAMPLES 16000;SAMPLINGMODE IT
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 88 --
ALIas
Description
This command sets or queries the state of alias functionality.
Group
Alias
Related Commands
ALIas:STATE
Syntax 1
ALIas {OFF|ON|<NR1>}
Syntax 2
ALIas?
Arguments
H OFF
This turns Alias expansion off. If a defined alias is sent when
ALIas:STATE is off, a command error (102) will be generated.
H ON
This turns Alias expansion on. When a defined alias is received, the
specified command sequence is substituted for the alias and executed.
H NR1
A 0 disables Alias mode; any other value enables Alias mode.
Example 1
ALIas ON
This command turns the alias feature on. When a defined alias is received, the specified command sequence is substituted for the alias and
executed.
Example 2
ALIas?
This query might return
:ALIAS:STATE 1
indicating that the alias feature is on.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 89 --
ALIas:CATalog?
Description
This query--only command returns a list of the currently defined alias
labels, separated by commas. If no aliases are defined, the query returns
the string ””.
Group
Alias
Syntax
ALIas:CATalog?
Example
ALIas:CATalog?
This query might return the string
:ALIAS:CATALOG ”SETUP1”,”TESTMENU1”,”DEFAULT”
showing that there are three aliases named SETUP1, TESTMENU1,
and DEFAULT.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 90 --
ALIas:DEFine
Description
This command assigns a sequence of program messages to an alias label. These messages are then substituted for the alias whenever it is
received as a command or query, provided that ALIas:STATE has been
turned on. The query form of this command returns the definitions of a
selected alias.
Note: Attempting to give two aliases the same name causes an error.
To give a new alias the name of an existing alias, the existing alias
must first be deleted.
Group
Alias
Related Commands
ALIas:STATE
Syntax 1
ALIas:DEFine <Qstring><,>{<Qstring>|<Block>}
Syntax 2
ALIas:DEFine?
Arguments
H The first
<Qstring>
is the alias label.
This label cannot be a command name. Labels must start with a letter
and can contain only letters, numbers, and underscores; other characters are not allowed. The label must be less than or equal to 12 characters.
H The second <Qstring> or <Block> is a complete
sequence of program messages.
The messages can contain only valid commands that must be separated by semicolons and must follow all rules for concatenating commands. The sequence must be less than or equal to 256 characters.
Example 1
ALIas:DEFine ”ST1”,”:RECALL:SETUP 5;:AUTOSET
EXECUTE;:SELECT:CH1 ON”
This command defines an alias named ”ST1” that sets up the instrument.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 91 --
Example 2
ALIas:DEFine? ”ST1”
This command returns
:ALIAS:DEFINE ”ST1”,#246
:RECALL:SETUP 5;:AUTOSET EXECUTE;:SELECT:CH1
ON
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 92 --
ALIas:DELEte
Description
This command removes a specified alias and is identical to ALIas:DELEte:NAMe. An error message is generated if the named alias does not
exist.
Group
Alias
Related Commands
*ESR?, ALIas:DELEte:ALL
Syntax
ALIas:DELEte <Qstring>
Argument
H <Qstring>
This is the name of the alias to be removed. Using ALIas:DELEte
without specifying an alias causes an execution error. <Qstring> must
be a previously defined value.
Example
ALIas:DELEte ”SETUP1”
This command deletes the alias named SETUP1.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 93 --
ALIas:DELEte:ALL
Description
This command deletes all existing aliases.
Group
Alias
Related Commands
ALIas:DELEte, ALIas:DELEte:NAMe
Syntax
ALIas:DELEte:ALL
Example
ALIas:DELEte:ALL
This command deletes all existing aliases.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 94 --
ALIas:DELEte:NAMe
Description
This command removes a specified alias. An error message is generated
if the named alias does not exist. This command is identical to
ALIas:DELEte.
Group
Alias
Syntax
ALIas:DELEte:NAMe <Qstring>
Argument
H <Qstring>
This is the name of the alias to remove. Using ALIas:DELEte:NAMe
without specifying an alias causes an exception error. <Qstring>
must be a previously defined alias.
Example
ALIas:DELEte:NAMe ”STARTUP”
This command deletes the alias named STARTUP.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 95 --
ALIas:STATE
Description
This command turns aliases on or off and is identical to the ALIas command. The query form of this command returns the state of the aliases.
Group
Alias
Syntax 1
ALIas:STATE {OFF|ON|<NR1>}
Syntax 2
ALIas:STATE?
Arguments
H OFF
This turns alias expansion off. If a defined alias is sent when
ALIas:STATE is OFF, the instrument generates a command error
(102).
H ON
This turns alias expansion on. When a defined alias is received, the
specified command sequence is substituted for the alias and executed.
H <NR1>
A 0 turns off aliases; any other value turns on aliases.
Example 1
ALIas:STATE OFF
This command turns off the alias feature.
Example 2
ALIas:STATE?
This query might return
:ALIAS:STATE ON
indicating that alias expansion is currently turned on.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 96 --
ALLEV?
Description
This query--only command prompts the instrument to return all events
and their messages (delimited by commas), and removes the returned
events from the Event Queue. Use the *ESR? query to enable the
events to be returned. This command is similar to repeatedly sending
*EVMsg? queries to the instrument.
Group
Status and Error
Related Commands
*ESR?, *EVMsg?
Syntax
ALLev?
Example
ALLev?
This query might return
:ALLEV 2225,”Measurement error, No waveform to
measure; ”420,”Query UNTERMINATED;”
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 97 --
AUTOSet
Description
This command (no query format) sets the vertical, horizontal, and trigger controls of the instrument to automatically acquire and display the
selected waveform. (To autoset a video waveform, the video trigger
must be set to video standard, not custom.) This is equivalent to pressing the front--panel AUTOSET button. For a detailed description of
autoset functionality, see Autoset in the index of the online help for
your instrument.
Group
Miscellaneous
Related Command
DISplay:GRATicule
Syntax
AUTOSet {EXECute|UNDo|VIDeo|VLines|VFields}
Arguments
H EXECute
This argument autosets the displayed waveform; this is equivalent to
pressing the front--panel AUTOSET button. If the display is set to a
PAL, MV, or IRE graticule, this argument forces the graticule display
to full mode (frame, grid, and cross hair).
H UNDo
This argument returns the instrument to the setting prior to executing
an autoset.
H VIDeo
This autosets the displayed waveform.
H VLines
This autosets the displayed waveform.
H VFields
This autosets the displayed waveform.
Example
AUTOSet VFields
This command sets the instrument to trigger on all video fields.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 98 --
AUXout:SOUrce
Description
This command sets or queries the trigger source at the BNC connection.
This command is equivalent to selecting AUX OUT Configuration
from the Utilities menu and then selecting the desired Configuration
setting.
Group
Miscellaneous
Related Commands
AUXout?
Syntax 1
AUXout:SOUrce {ATRIGger|BTRIGger}
Syntax 2
AUXout:SOUrce?
Arguments
H ATRIGger
This sets the source at the BNC connector to the main trigger.
H BTRIGger
This sets the source at the BNC connector to the delayed trigger.
Example
AUXout:SOUrce?
This query might return :AUXOUT:SOURCE ATRIGGER, indicating that the
source at the BNC connector is set to the A trigger.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 99 --
AUXout?
Description
This query--only command returns the auxiliary output setup and is
equivalent to selecting External Signals… from the Utilities menu, and
then viewing the current settings for the AUX OUT Configuration.
Group
Miscellaneous
Related Commands
AUXout:SOUrce
Syntax
AUXout?
Example
AUXout?
This query might return
:AUXOUT:SOURCE ATRIGGER;EDGE RISING
indicating that the source at the BNC connector is set to the A trigger
and the polarity is set to the rising edge of the trigger output signal.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 100 --
BELI
Description
This command was previously used to beep an audio indicator and is
provided for backward compatibility.
Group
Miscellaneous
Syntax
BEL1
Example
BEL1
This command is accepted but does nothing.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 101 --
BUSY?
Description
This query--only command returns the status of the instrument. This
command allows you to synchronize the operation of the instrument
with your application program.
Group
Status and Error
Related Commands
*OPC, *WAI
Syntax
BUSY?
Returns
<NR1>
If 0 is returned, it means that the instrument is not busy processing a
command whose execution time is extensive. If 1 is returned, it means
that the instrument is busy processing one of the commands listed in the
table below.
Commands that Affect BUSY? Response
Operation
Command
Single sequence
acquisition
ACQuire:STATE ON or
ACQuire:STATE RUN or
ACQuire:STATE 1
(when ACQuire:STOPAfter is set to
SEQuence).
Hardcopy
operation
HARDCopy STArt
Calibration step
Refer to the optional TDS5000 Series Digital
Phosphor Oscilloscopes Service Manual
Example
BUSY?
This query might return
:BUSY 1
This indicates that the instrument is currently busy.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 102 --
CAL?
Description
This query--only command returns the status of instrument calibration,
including internal signal path calibration, factory calibration, and probe
calibration. This query also returns the time until notification when the
next factory calibration is due. Refer to the service manual for factory
calibration command descriptions.
Group
Calibration
Related Commands
CALibrate:RESults:SPC?
Syntax
CAL?
Example
CAL?
This query might return
:CALIBRATE:INTERNAL:STATUS PASS;:CALIBRATE:TEMPERATURE 32;FACTORY:FANCONTROL 2;STATUS PASS;STEPSTATUS FAIL;STEPSTIMULUS
”0.0,0,0,0,END”;NOTIFY:HOURS 10500;YEARS
5.5000;DUE DUE;:CALIBRATE:RESULTS:SPC
PASS;FACTORY PASS;FACTORY:VOLTAGE PASS;FREQUENCY PASS;TRIGGER PASS;:CALIBRATE:PROBESTATE:CH1 1;CH2 1;CH3 1;CH4 1
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 103 --
CALibrate:CALProbe:CH<x>?
Description
This query--only command instructs the instrument to perform a probe
calibration for the selected channel and returns the calibration status.
The Channel <x> range is 1 through 4. This command is equivalent to
selecting Probe Cal from the Vertical menu. You must warm up the instrument for at least 20 minutes before running this command.
Note: A probe query takes approximately 30 seconds to complete. No
other commands will be executed until calibration is complete.
Group
Calibration
Related Commands
CALibrate:PRObestate:CH<x>?, CH<x>:PROBECal?
Syntax
CALibrate:CALProbe:CH<x>?
Returns
H -1
Indicating the probe calibration failed for the selected channel.
H 0
Indicating the probe calibration passed for the selected channel.
H 1
Indicating the probe calibration is initialized for the selected channel.
Example
CALibrate:CALProbe:CH2?
This query might return
:CALIBRATE:CALPROBE:CH2 0
indicating the probe calibration passed for Channel 2.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 104 --
CALibrate:INTERNal
Description
This command (no query form) starts the internal signal path calibration (SPC) of the instrument. You can use the CALibrate:INTERNal:STATus? query to return the current status of the internal signal
path calibration of the instrument.
Group
Calibration
Related Commands
CALibrate:RESults:SPC?
Syntax
CALibrate:INTERNal
Example
CALibrate:INTERNal
This command starts the internal signal path calibration of the instrument.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 105 --
CALibrate:INTERNal:STARt
Description
This command (no query form) starts the internal signal path calibration (SPC) of the instrument. This command is the same as the CALibrate:INTERNal command. You can use the CALibrate:INTERNal:STATus? query to return the current status of the internal signal
path calibration of the instrument.
Group
Calibration
Related Commands
CALibrate:RESults:SPC?
Syntax
CALibrate:INTERNal:STARt
Example
CALibrate:INTERNal:STARt
This command starts the internal signal path calibration of the instrument.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 106 --
CALibrate:INTERNal:STATus?
Description
This query--only command returns the current status of the instrument
internal signal path calibration for the last SPC operation.
Group
Calibration
Related Commands
*CAL?
Syntax
CALibrate:INTERNal:STATus?
Returns
This query will return one of the following:
H INIT
Indicatesthe instrument has not had internal signal path calibration
run.
H WARMUP
Indicates the instrument has not warmed up for the required time to
perform signal path calibration.
H PASS
Indicates that the signal path calibration completed successfully.
H FAIL
Indicates that the signal path calibration did not complete successfully.
H TEMPDRIFT
Indicates that the instrument has not reached a state of stable temperature adequate for performing signal path calibration.
H RUNNING
Indicates that the signal path calibration is currently running.
Example
CALibrate:INTERNal:STATus?
This query might return
:CALIBRATE:INTERNAL:STATUS INIT
indicating that the current status of the internal signal path calibration is
that it has not been run.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 107 --
CALibrate:PROBEstate:CH<x>?
Description
This query--only command returns the probe calibration status for the
probe of the selected channel, 1 through 4.
Group
Calibration
Related Commands
CH<x>:PROBECal?
Syntax
CALibrate:PROBEstate:CH<x>?
Returns
H -1
Indicating the probe calibration failed for the selected channel.
H 0
Indicating the probe calibration passed for the selected channel.
H 1
Indicating the probe calibration is initialized for the selected channel.
H 2
Indicating that the probe calibration for the selected channel is running.
Example
CALibrate:PROBEstate:CH1?
This query might return
:CALIBRATE:PROBESTATE:CH1 0
Indicating that the probe calibration for Channel 1 passed.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 108 --
CALibrate:RESults:SPC?
Description
This query--only command returns the results of the last SPC operation.
However, this query does not cause an SPC to be run. This command is
equivalent to selecting Instrument Calibration from the Utilities menu.
Group
Calibration
Related Commands
*CAL?
Syntax
CALibrate:RESults:SPC?
Example
CALibrate:RESults:SPC?
This query returns the results of the last SPC operation: either PASS or
FAIL.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 109 --
CALibrate:RESults?
Description
This query--only command returns the status of internal and factory
calibrations, without performing any calibration operations. The results
returned do not include the calibration status of attached probes. The
CALibration:RESults? query is intended to support GO/NoGO testing
of the oscilloscope calibration readiness: all returned results should indicate PASS status if the instrument is ”fit for duty”. It is quite common, however, to use uncalibrated probes (particularly when the instrumentt inputs are connected into a test system with coaxial cables).
This command is equivalent to selecting Instrument Calibration from
the Utilities menu and then viewing the contents of the Status field.
Group
Calibration
Related Commands
*CAL?
Syntax
CALibrate:RESults?
Example
CALibrate:RESults?
This query returns the status of all the calibration subsystems. The
query might return :
:CALIBRATE:RESULTS:SPC PASS;FACTORY PASS;FACTORY:VOLTAGE PASS;FREQUENCY PASS;TRIGGER PASS
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 110 --
CH<x>?
Description
This query--only command returns the vertical parameters for the specified channel. The channel is specified by x. The value of x can range
from 1 through 4 for four--channel instruments or 1 through 2 for two-channel instruments. This command is similar to selecting Vertical Setup from the Vertical menu.
Group
Vertical
Syntax
CH<x>?
Example
CH1?
This query might return the following vertical parameters for channel 1:
:CH1:BANDWIDTH 1.0000E+09;COUPLING DC;DESKEW0.0000E+00;OFFSET 0.0000E+00;POSITION
0.0000E+00;SCALE 5.0000E-01;TERMINATION
1.0000E+06;PROBCAL INIT;PROBE:GAIN
1.0000E+00;RESISTANCE 1.0000E+06;UNITS
”V”;ID:TYPE ”1X”;SERNUMBER ”N/A”;:CH1:PROBEFUNC:EXTATTEN 1.0000E+00;EXTUNITS
”None”;:CH1:LABEL:NAME ””;XPOS 5;YPOS 5
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 111 --
CH<x>:BANdwidth
Description
This command sets or queries the selectable low--pass bandwidth limit
filter of the specified channel. The channel is specified by x. The value
of x can range from 1 through 4 for four--channel instruments or 1
through 2 for two--channel instruments. This is equivalent to selecting
Bandwidth from the Vertical menu.
The query form of this command always returns the maximum bandwidth of the channel.
Group
Vertical
Syntax 1
CH<x>:BANdwidth {TWEnty|ONEfifty|FIVe|FULl|<NR3>}
Syntax 2
CH<x>:BANdwidth?
Arguments
H TWEnty
This sets the upper bandwidth limit to 20 MHz.
H ONEfifty
This sets the upper bandwidth limit to 150 MHz.
H FIVe
This argument sets the upper bandwidth limit to 500 MHz.
H FULl
This disables any optional bandwidth limiting. The specified channel
operates at its maximum attainable bandwidth.
H <NR3>
This argument is a double--precision ASCII string. The instrument
rounds this value to an available bandwidth using geometric rounding
and then uses this value set the upper bandwidth.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 112 --
Example 1
CH1:BANdwidth TWEnty
This command sets the bandwidth of channel 1 to 20 MHz.
Example 2
CH2:BANdwidth?
For TDS5052B and TDS5054B instruments, this query might return
:CH2:BANDWIDTH 500.0000E+06
indicating that there is no bandwidth limiting on channel 2.
For TDS5104 instruments, this query might return
:CH2:BANDWIDTH 1.0000E+09
indicating that there is no bandwidth limiting on channel 2.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 113 --
CH<x>:COUPling
Description
This command sets or queries the input attenuator coupling setting for
the specified channel. The channel is specified by x. The value of x can
range from 1 through 4 for four--channel instruments or 1 through 2 for
two--channel instruments. This command is equivalent to selecting
Coupling from the Vertical menu.
Group
Vertical
Syntax 1
CH<x>:COUPling {AC|DC|GND}
Syntax 2
CH<x>:COUPling?
Arguments
H AC
This sets the specified channel to AC coupling.
H DC
This sets the specified channel to DC coupling.
H GND
This sets the specified channel to ground. Only a flat, ground--level
waveform will be displayed.
Example 1
CH2:COUPling GND
This command sets channel 2 to ground.
Example 2
CH3:COUPling?
This query might return
:CH3:COUPling DC
indicating that channel 3 is set to DC coupling.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 114 --
CH<x>:DESKew
Description
This command sets or queries the deskew time for the specified channel. The channel is specified by x. The value of x can range from 1
through 4 for four--channel instruments or 1 through 2 for two--channel
instruments. This command is equivalent to selecting Deskew from the
Vertical Setup menu.
You can adjust the deskew time to add an independent, channel--based
delay time to the delay (set by the horizontal position control and common to all channels) from the common trigger point to first sample taken for each channel. This lets you compensate individual channels for
different delays introduced by their individual input hook ups.
Group
Vertical
Syntax 1
CH<x>:DESKew <NR3>
Syntax 2
CH<x>:DESKew?
Argument
H <NR3>
This is the deskew time for this channel, ranging from --25 ns to +25
ns with a resolution of 1 ps. Out--of--range values are clipped.
Example 1
CH4:DESKew 5.0E-9
This command sets the deskew time for channel 4 to 5 ns.
Example 2
CH2:DESKew?
This query might return
:CH2:DESKEW 2.0000E-09
indicating that the deskew time for channel 2 is set to 2 ns.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 115 --
CH<x>:INVert
Description
This command sets or queries the invert function for the specified channel. The channel is specified by x. The value of x can range from 1
through 4 for four--channel instruments or 1 through 2 for two--channel
instruments. When on, the invert function inverts the waveform for the
specified channel. This command is equivalent to selecting On or Off
for the Invert function in the Vertical Setup control window.
Note: This command inverts the waveform for display purposes only.
The instrument does not use an inverted waveform for triggers or trigger logic inputs.
Group
Vertical
Syntax 1
CH<x>:INVert {ON|OFF|NR1}
Syntax 2
CH<x>:INVert?
Argument
H OFF
This argument turns off the invert function for the specified channel.
H ON
This argument turns on the invert function for the specified channel.
H <NR1>
A 0 turns off the invert function; any other value turns on the invert
function.
Example 1
CH4:INVert ON
This command inverts the waveform on channel 4.
Example 2
CH2:INVert?
This query might return
:CH2:INVERT 0
indicating that the invert function for channel 2 is off.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 116 --
CH<x>:LABel:NAMe
Description
This command sets or queries the label attached to the displayed waveform for the specified channel. The channel is specified by x. The value
of x can range from 1 through 4 for four--channel instruments or 1
through 2 for two--channel instruments. This command is equivalent to
selecting Label from the Vertical menu.
Group
Vertical
Syntax 1
CH<x>:LABel:NAMe <str>
Syntax 2
CH<x>:LABel:NAMe?
Argument
H <str>
This is an alphanumeric character string, ranging from 1 through 32
characters in length.
Example 1
CH2:LABel:NAMe ”Pressure”
This command changes the waveform label for the CH2 waveform to
”Pressure”.
Example 2
CH3:LABel:NAMe?
This query might return
:CH3:LABEL:NAME ”CH3”
indicating that the waveform label for the CH 3 waveform is ”CH3”.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 117 --
CH<x>:LABel:XPOS
Description
This command sets or queries the X screen offset at which the label
(attached to the displayed waveform of the specified channel) is displayed, relative to the left edge of the screen. The channel is specified
by x. The value of x can range from 1 through 4 for four--channel instruments or 1 through 2 for two--channel instruments. This command
is equivalent to selecting Label from the Vertical menu and either viewing or setting X Pos.
Group
Vertical
Syntax 1
CH<x>:LABel:XPOS <NR1>
Syntax 2
CH<x>:LABel:XPOS?
Argument
H <NR1>
This is the location (in pixels) where the waveform label for the selected channel is displayed, relative to the left edge of the screen. Arguments should be integers ranging from 0 through 500.
Example 1
CH3:LABel:XPOS 50
This command moves the waveform label for the CH3 waveform so
that it begins 50 pixels to the right of the left edge of the screen.
Example 2
CH2:LABel:XPOS?
This query might return
:CH2:LABEL:XPOS 50
indicating that the waveform label for the CH2 waveform is currently
50 pixels to the right of the left edge of the screen.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 118 --
CH<x>:LABel:YPOS
Description
This command sets or queries the Y screen offset at which the label
(attached to the displayed waveform of the specified channel) is displayed, relative to the top edge of the screen. The channel is specified
by x. The value of x can range from 1 through 4 for four--channel instruments or 1 through 2 for two--channel instruments. This command
is equivalent to selecting Label from the Vertical menu and either viewing or setting Y Pos.
Group
Vertical
Syntax 1
CH<x>:LABel:YPOS <NR1>
Syntax 2
CH<x>:LABel:YPOS?
Argument
H <NR1>
This is the location (in pixels) where the waveform label for the selected channel is displayed, relative to the top edge of the screen. Arguments should be integers ranging from 0 to 385.
Example 1
CH3:LABel:YPOS -25
This command moves the waveform label for the CH3 waveform to just
beneath (25 pixels below) the top of the screen.
Example 2
CH2:LABel:YPOS?
This query might return
:CH2:LABEL:YPOS 0
indicating that the waveform label for the CH2 waveform is currently
located just beneath the top of the screen.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 119 --
CH<x>:OFFSet
Description
This command sets or queries the vertical offset for the specified channel. The channel is specified by x. The value of x can range from 1
through 4 for four--channel instruments or 1 through 2 for two--channel
instruments. This command is equivalent to selecting Offset from the
Vertical menu.
This command offsets the vertical acquisition window (moves the level
at the vertical center of the acquisition window) for the selected channel. Visualize offset as scrolling the acquisition window towards the top
of a large signal for increased offset values, and scrolling towards the
bottom for decreased offset values. The resolution of the vertical window sets the offset increment for this control.
Offset adjusts only the vertical center of the acquisition window for
channel waveforms to help determine what data is acquired. The instrument always displays the input signal minus the offset value. The channel reference marker will move to the vertical graticule position given
by the negative of the offset value divided by the scale factor, unless
that position is off--screen. If the computed coordinate for the reference
mark is off--screen, the mark moves to the nearest screen limit and
changes from a right--pointing arrow (→) to an arrow pointing in the
appropriate off--screen direction.
The settable range of a channel offset is either ±100 V, ±10 V or ±1.0 V,
depending on the vertical scale factor.
Vertical Scale Adjust Factors
When vertical scale is:
Product of Offset range, probe gain and
transducer gain is:
From 0.001
to 0.1
±1.0 V
From 0.101
to 1.0
±10.0 V
From 1.01
to 100.0
±100.0 V
Note: The above table describes instrument behavior only when no
probe is attached, and when the external attenuation factor is 1.0.
Group
Vertical
Related Commands
CH<x>POSition
Syntax 1
CH<x>:OFFSet <NR3>
Syntax 2
CH<x>:OFFSet?
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 120 --
Argument
H <NR3>
This is the offset value for the specified channel.
Example 1
CH3:OFFSet 2.0E-3
This command sets the offset for channel 3 to 2 mV.
Example 2
CH4:OFFSet?
This query might return
:CH4:OFFSET 1.0000E-03
indicating that the offset for channel 4 is set to 1 mV.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 121 --
CH<x>:POSition
Description
This command sets or queries the vertical position of the specified
channel. The channel is specified by x. The value of x can range from 1
through 4 for four--channel instruments or 1 through 2 for two--channel
instruments. The position value is applied to the signal before it is digitized. This command is equivalent to selecting Position/Scale from the
Vertical menu and either viewing or setting Position.
Increasing the position value of a waveform causes the waveform to
move up, and decreasing the position value causes the waveform to
move down. Position adjusts only the display position of a waveform,
whether it is a channel, math, or reference waveform. The position value determines the vertical graticule coordinate at which input signal
values, minus the present offset setting for that channel, are displayed.
For example, if the position for Channel 3 is set to 2.0 and the offset is
set to 3.0, then input signals equal to 3.0 units are displayed 2.0 divisions above the center of the screen.
Group
Vertical
Related Commands
CH<x>:OFFSet, REF<x>:VERTical:POSition, MATH<x>:VERTical:POSition
Syntax 1
CH<x>:POSition <NR3>
Syntax 2
CH<x>:POSition?
Argument
H <NR3>
This is the position value, in divisions from the center graticule, ranging from 8 to --8 divisions.
Example 1
CH2:POSition 1.3E+00
This command positions the Channel 2 input signal 1.3 divisions above
the center graticule.
Example 2
CH1:POSition?
This query might return
:CH1:POSITION -1.3000E+00
indicating that the current position of Channel 1 is 1.3 divisions below
the center graticule.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 122 --
CH<x>:PROBECal?
Description
This query--only command returns the probe calibration state for the
selected channel. The channel is specified by x. The value of x can
range from 1 through 4 for four--channel instruments or 1 through 2 for
two--channel instruments. This command is equivalent to selecting
Probe Cal from the Vertical menu.
Group
Vertical
Related Commands
Syntax
CH<x>:PROBECal?
Outputs
H FAIl
This signifies that the probe calibration has failed for the selected
channel.
H INIT
This signifies that the probe calibration has not yet been run for the
selected channel.
H PASS
This signifies the probe calibration has passed for the selected channel.
Example
CH2:PROBECal?
This query might return
:CH2:PROBECAL PASS
indicating that the probe calibration has passed for channel 2.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 123 --
CH<x>:PRObe:GAIN?
Description
This query--only command returns the gain factor of the probe that is
attached to the specified channel. The channel is specified by x. The
value of x can range from 1 through 4 for four--channel instruments or
1 through 2 for two--channel instruments. The ”gain” of a probe is the
output divided by the input transfer ratio. For example, a common 10x
probe has a gain of 0.1.
Group
Vertical
Related Commands
CH<x>:SCAle
Syntax
CH<x>:PRObe:GAIN?
Example
CH2:PRObe:GAIN?
This query might return
:CH2:PROBE:GAIN 0.1000E+00
indicating that the attached 10x probe delivers 0.1 V to the channel 2
BNC for every 10 V applied to the probe input.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 124 --
CH<x>:PRObe:ID:SERnumber?
Description
This query--only command returns the serial number of the probe that is
attached to the specified channel. The channel is specified by x. The
value of x can range from 1 through 4 for four--channel instruments or
1 through 2 for two--channel instruments.
Note: For Level 0 and 1 probes, the serial number will be ”N/A”.
Group
Vertical
Syntax
CH<x>:PRObe:ID:SERnumber?
Example
CH1:PRObe:ID:SERnumber?
This query might return
:CH1:PROBE:ID:SERNUMBER ”B010289”
indicating that the serial number of the probe attached to channel 1 is
B010289.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 125 --
CH<x>:PRObe:ID:TYPe?
Description
This query--only command returns the type of probe that is attached to
the specified channel. The channel is specified by x. The value of x can
range from 1 through 4 for four--channel instruments or 1 through 2 for
two--channel instruments. Level 2 (or higher) probes supply their exact
product nomenclature; for Level 0 or 1 probes, a generic ’type string’ of
”nnX” is returned.
Group
Vertical
Syntax
CH<x>:PRObe:ID:TYPe?
Example
CH1:PRObe:ID:TYPe?
This query might return
:CH1:PROBE:ID:TYPE ”P6203”
indicating that P6203--type probe is attached to channel 1.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 126 --
CH<x>:PRObe:ID?
Description
This query--only command returns the type and serial of the probe that
is attached to the specified channel. The channel is specified by x. The
value of x can range from 1 through 4 for four--channel instruments or
1 through 2 for two--channel instruments.
Group
Vertical
Syntax
CH<x>:PRObe:ID?
Example
CH2:PRObe:ID?
This query might return
:CH2:PROBE:ID:TYPE ”10X”;SERNUMBER ”N/A”
indicating that a passive 10x probe of unknown serial number is attached to channel 2.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 127 --
CH<x>:PRObe:RESistance?
Description
This query--only command returns the resistance factor of the probe
that is attached to the specified channel. The channel is specified by x.
The value of x can range from 1 through 4 for four--channel instruments
or 1 through 2 for two--channel instruments.
Group
Vertical
Syntax
CH<x>:PRObe:RESistance?
Example
CH2:PRObe:RESistance?
This query might return
:CH2:PROBE:RESISTANCE 10.0000E+06
indicating that the input resistance of the probe attached to Channel 2 is
10.0 MÙ.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 128 --
CH<x>:PRObe:UNIts?
Description
This query--only command returns a string describing the units of measure for the probe attached to the specified channel. The channel is specified by x. The value of x can range from 1 through 4 for four--channel
instruments or 1 through 2 for two--channel instruments.
Group
Vertical
Related Commands
CH<x>:PROBEFunc:EXTUnits
Syntax
CH<x>:PRObe:UNIts?
Example
CH4:PRObe:UNIts?
This query might return
:CH4:PROBE:UNITS ”V”
indicating that the units of measure for the probe attached to channel 4
are volts.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 129 --
CH<x>:PROBEFunc:EXTAtten
Description
This command is used to specify the input--output ratio, of external attenuation or gain, between the signal and the instrument input channels.
The channel is specified by x. The value of x can range from 1 through
4 for four--channel instruments, or 1 through 2 for two--channel instruments.
The query form of this command returns the user--specified attenuation.
Note that this command deals with an attenuation factor, not a gain factor, unlike CH<x>:PRObe? (This command returns a value independent
of the external attenuation). For example, if you specify a 20x attenuation factor for channel 1, the commands return the following values
(assuming that a 1x probe is presently attached, since the external attenuation is used in combination with the probe attenuation):
CH1:PRObe:EXTA?
20.00E+0
CH1:PRObe?
1.0E+0
This command is equivalent to selecting Attenuation from the Vertical
menu, and then either viewing or setting Ext Atten.
Group
Vertical
Related Commands
CH<x>:PROBEFunc:EXTDBatten
Syntax 1
CH<x>:PROBEFunc:EXTAtten <NR3>
Syntax 2
CH<x>:PROBEFunc:EXTAtten?
Argument
H <NR3>
This is the attenuation value, which is specified as a multiplier in the
range from 1.00E--10 to 1.00E+10.
Example 1
CH1:PROBEFunc:EXTAtten 167.00E-3
This command specifies an external attenuation, which is connected
between the user’s input signal and the input of the probe attached to
channel 1.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 130 --
Example 2
CH2:PROBEFunc:EXTAtten?
This query might return
:CH2:PROBEFUNC:EXTATTEN 1.0000E+00
indicating that the probe attached to channel 2 is connected directly to
the user’s signal.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 131 --
CH<x>:PROBEFunc:EXTDBatten
Description
Use this command to specify the input--output ratio (expressed in decibel units) of external attenuation or gain between the signal and the
instrument input channels.
The channel is specified by x. The value of x can range from 1 through
4 for four--channel instruments, or 1 through 2 for two--channel instruments.
The query form of this command returns the user--specified attenuation
in decibels: 1X = 0 dB, 10X = 20 dB, 100X = 40 dB, etc.
This command is equivalent to selecting Attenuation from the Vertical
menu, and then either viewing or setting Ext Att(dB).
Group
Vertical
Related Commands
CH<x>:PROBEFunc:EXTAtten
Syntax 1
CH<x>:PROBEFunc:EXTDBatten <NR3>
Syntax 2
CH<x>:PROBEFunc:EXTDBatten?
Argument
H <NR3>
This is the attenuation value, which is specified in the range from
--200.00 to 200.00 dB.
Example 1
CH3:PROBEFunc:EXTDBatten 2.5
This command specifies an external 2.5 dB attenuator on channel 3.
Example 2
CH1:PROBEFunc:EXTDBatten?
This query might return
:CH1:PROBEFUNC:EXTDBATTEEN 2.5000E+00
indicating that the attenuation for channel 1 is 2.5 dB.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 132 --
CH<x>:PROBEFunc:EXTUnits
Description
This command sets the unit of measurement for the external attenuator
of the specified channel. The channel is specified by x. The value of x
can range from 1 through 4 for four--channel instruments or 1 through 2
for two--channel instruments. There is also a corresponding query that
returns the user--specified unit of measurement for the external attenuator. Unless these units are set to the factory default string value of
”None”, they become the attenuated units of measurement for that
channel. It is assumed that the probe connected to the specified channel
is of the correct type to receive the output of the user’s external transducer or network.
Group
Vertical
Related Commands
CH<x>:PRObe:UNITS
Syntax 1
CH<x>:PROBEFunc:EXTUnits <str>
Syntax 2
CH<x>:PROBEFunc:EXTUnits?
Argument
H <str>
This can contain a string of up to eight characters to indicate the attenuation unit of measurement for the specified channel. However, most
instrument attenuators only display the first two characters.
Example 1
CH4:PROBEFunc:EXTUnits ”Pa”
This command sets the unit of measurement for the Channel 4 external
attenuator.
Example 2
CH2:PROBEFunc:EXTUnits?
This query might return
:CH2:PROBEFUNC:EXTUNITS ”Pa”
indicating that the Channel 2 external attenuator units of measurement
are Pascals.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 133 --
CH<x>:PRObe?
Description
This query--only command returns all information concerning the probe
that is attached to the specified channel. The channel is specified by x.
The value of x can range from 1 through 4 for four--channel instruments
or 1 through 2 for two--channel instruments.
Group
Vertical
Related Commands
CH<x>:PROBECal?
Syntax
CH<x>:PROBE?
Example
CH2:PROBE?
This query might return
:CH2:PROBE:GAIN 1.0000E-01; RESISTANCE
1.0000E+07;UNITS ”V”;ID:TYPE ”10X”’SERNUMBER
”N/A”
for a 10x probe, indicating that (among other parameters) the attenuation factor for the probe attached to channel 2 is 100.0 mV (assuming
that probe units are set to volts).
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 134 --
CH<x>:SCAle
Description
This command sets or queries the vertical scale of the specified channel. The channel is specified by x. The value of x can range from 1
through 4 for four--channel instruments or 1 through 2 for two--channel
instruments. Sending this command is equivalent to selecting Vertical
Setup from the Vertical menu and then viewing or setting the Scale.
Each waveform has a vertical scale parameter. For a signal with
constant amplitude, increasing the Scale causes the waveform to be
displayed smaller. Decreasing the scale causes the waveform to be displayed larger.
Scale affects all waveforms, but affects channel waveforms differently
from other waveforms:
H
For channel waveforms, this setting controls the vertical size of the
acquisition window as well as the display scale. The range and
resolution of scale values depends on the probe attached and any
other external factors you have specified.
H
For reference and math waveforms, this setting controls the display
only, graphically scaling these waveforms and having no affect on
the acquisition hardware.
Group
Vertical
Related Commands
CH<x>OFFSet, CH<x>:POSition, REF<x>:VERTical:SCAle,
MATH<x>:VERTical:SCAle
Syntax 1
CH<x>:SCAle <NR3>
Syntax 2
CH<x>:SCAle?
Argument
H <NR3>
This is the vertical channel scale in units per division.
Example 1
CH4:SCAle 100E-03
This command sets the channel 4 scale to 100 mV per division.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 135 --
Example 2
CH2:SCAle?
This query might return
:CH2:SCALE 1.0000E+00
indicating that the current scale setting of channel 2 is 1 V per division.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 136 --
CH<x>:TERmination
Description
This command sets the connected/disconnected status of a 50 Ù resistor, which may be connected between the specified channel’s coupled
input and instrument ground. The channel is specified by x. The value
of x can range from 1 through 4 for four--channel instruments or 1
through 2 for two--channel instruments. There is also a corresponding
query that requests the termination parameter and translates this enumeration into one of the two float values. This command is equivalent
to selecting Termination from the Vertical menu or toggling between
termination values from the VERTICAL area of the front panel.
Group
Vertical
Syntax 1
CH<x>:TERmination <NR3>
Syntax 2
CH<x>:TERmination?
Argument
H <NR3>
This specifies the channel input resistance, which can be specified as
50 or 1,000,000 Ù.
Example 1
CH4:TERmination 50.0E+0
This command establishes 50 Ù impedance on channel 1.
Example 2
CH2:TERmination?
This query might return
:CH2:TERMINATION 50.0E+0
indicating that channel 2 is set to 50 Ù impedance.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 137 --
CMDBatch
Description
This command sets or queries the state of command batching. By
batching commands, database transactions can be optimized, increasing
command throughput. Also, batching allows for ALL commands in an
individual batch to be order independent and accomplish the same result as if the commands were coupled.
The Batch state is persistent and will be saved across power cycles, but
will not be saved and recalled as part of a setup. In a setup scenario, the
factory initial value is enabled.
Group
Miscellaneous
Syntax 1
CMDBatch {OFF|ON|<NR1>}
Syntax 2
CMDBatch?
Arguments
H OFF
This turns command batching off.
H ON
This turns command batching on.
H <NR1>
A 0 turns command batching off; any other value turns command
batching on.
Example 1
CMDBatch OFF
This command disables command batching.
Example 2
CMDBatch?
This query might return
:CMDBATCH 1
indicating that command batching is turned on.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 138 --
CURSor:FUNCtion
Description
This command sets or queries the cursor type. Sending this command is
equivalent to selecting Cursor Type from the Cursors menu, and then
choosing from the drop--down list.
Group
Cursor
Related Commands
CURSor:STAte
Syntax 1
CURSor:FUNCtion {OFF|HBArs|VBArs|SCREEN|WAVEform}
Syntax 2
CURSor:FUNCtion?
Arguments
H OFF
Removes the cursors from the display but does not change the cursor
type.
H HBArs
Specifies horizontal bar cursors, which measure in vertical units.
H VBArs
Specifies vertical bar cursors, which measure in horizontal units.
H SCREEN
Specifies both horizontal and vertical bar cursors, which measure in
horizontal and vertical units specified by the Cursor 1 and Cursor 2
Sources. Use these cursors to measure anywhere in the waveform display area.
H WAVEform
Specifies paired or split cursors in YT display format for measuring
waveform amplitude and time. In XY and XYZ format, these cursors
indicate the amplitude positions of an XY pair (Ch1 vs Ch2 voltage,
where Ch1 is the X axis and Ch2 is the Y axis) relative to the trigger.
Example 1
CURSOR:FUNCtion VBArs
This command selects the vertical bar cursors type
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 139 --
Example 2
CURSOR:FUNCtion?
This query might return
:CURSor:FUNCtion HBArs
indicating that the horizontal bar cursors are currently selected.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 140 --
CURSor:HBArs?
Description
This query--only command returns the current settings for the horizontal
bar cursors.
Group
Cursor
Syntax
CURSor:HBArs?
Example
CURSor:HBArs?
This command might return the horizontal bar setting as
:CURSOR:HBARS:POSITION1 320.0000E-03;POSITION2-320.0000E-03;UNITS BASE
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 141 --
CURSor:HBArs:DELTa?
Description
This query--only command returns the vertical difference between the
two horizontal bar cursors.
Group
Cursor
Related Command
CURSor:HBArs:UNIts?
Syntax
CURSor:HBArs:DELTa?
Returns
A floating point value with an exponent.
Example
CURSOR:HBArs:DELTa?
This command might return
:CURSOR:HBARS:DELTA 5.0800E+00
indicating that the voltage difference between the two cursors is 5.08 V.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 142 --
CURSor:HBArs:POSITION<x>
Description
This command sets or queries the horizontal bar cursor position relative
to ground, which is expressed in vertical units (usually volts). The cursor is specified by x, which can be 1 or 2. This command is the equivalent to selecting Cursor Position from the Cursors menu, selecting the H
Bars Cursor Type, and then viewing or editing the desired cursor position.
Group
Cursor
Related Commands
CURSor:FUNCtion
Syntax 1
CURSor:HBArs:POSITION<x> <NR3>
Syntax 2
CURSor:HBArs:POSITION<x>?
Argument
H <NR3>
Specifies the cursor position relative to ground.
Example 1
CURSOR:HBARS:POSITION1 25.0E-3
This command positions Cursor 1 of the horizontal cursors at 25 mV.
Example 2
CURSOR:HBARS:POSITION2?
This query might return
:CURSOR:HBARS:POSITION2 -64.0000E-03
indicating that Cursor 2 of the horizontal bar cursors is at --64 mV.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 143 --
CURSor:HBArs:UNIts?
Description
This query--only command returns the units for the horizontal bar cursors.
This query always returns BASE, indicating that the units for the horizontal bar cursors are those of the base waveform to which they were
assigned.
Group
Cursor
Syntax
CURSor:HBArs:UNIts?
Example
CURSor:HBArs:UNIts?
This query always returns
:CURSOR:HBARS:UNITS BASE
indicating that the units for the horizontal bar cursors are base.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 144 --
CURSor:LINESTyle
Description
This command sets or queries the cursors line style used when cursors
are displayed.
Group
Cursor
Syntax 1
CURSor:LINESTyle {SOLID|DASHed}
Syntax 2
CURSor:LINESTyle?
Arguments
H SOLID
Displays the cursors as solid lines.
H DASHed
Displays the cursors as dashed lines.
Example 1
CURsor:LINESTyle SOLID
This command displays the cursors as solid lines.
Example 2
CURSor:LINESTyle?
This query might return
:CURSOR:LINESTYLE DASHED
indicating that the cursors are displayed as dashed lines.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 145 --
CURSor:MODe
Description
This command sets or queries whether the two cursors move together in
unison or separately. This command is the equivalent of selecting Cursor Mode from the Cursors menu, and then choosing from the drop-down list.
Group
Cursor
Syntax 1
CURSor:MODe {TRACk|INDependent}
Syntax 2
CURSor:MODe?
Arguments
H TRACk
Ties the navigational functionality of the two cursors together.
For cursor 1 adjustments, this ties the movement of the two cursors
together; however, cursor 2 continues to move independently of cursor 1.
H INDependent
Allows independent adjustment of the two cursors.
Example 1
CURsor:MODe TRACk
This command specifies that the cursor positions move in unison.
Example 2
CURSor:MODe?
This query might return
:CURSOR:MODE TRACK
indicating that the two cursors move in unison.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 146 --
CURSor:SCREEN:STYle
Description
This command sets or queries the cursor type for Screen mode.
Group
Cursor
Syntax 1
CURSor:SCREEN:STYle {LINE_X|LINES|X}
Syntax 2
CURSor:SCREEN:STYle?
Arguments
H LINE_X
Specifies the cursor style to be a line with superimposed X.
H LINES
Specifies the cursor style to be a line.
H X
Specifies the cursor style to be an X.
Example 1
CURSor:SCREEN:STYle LINES
This command sets the cursor style to lines.
Example 2
CURSor:SCREEN:STYle?
This query might return
:CURSOR:SCREEN:STYLE X
Indicating that the style for screen cursors is X.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 147 --
CURSor:SOUrce<x>
Description
This command sets or queries the source(s) for the currently selected
cursor type (H Bars, V Bars, Waveform, or Screen). The cursor is specified by x, which can be 1 or 2. If the cursor is not specified, it defaults
to cursor 1.
This command is equivalent to selecting Cursor Setup from the Cursors
menu, and then choosing the desired cursor source.
Group
Cursor
Syntax 1
CURSor:SOUrce {CH<x>|MATH<x>|REF<x>}
Syntax 2
CURSor:SOUrce?
Arguments
H CH<x>
Sets an input channel waveform as the cursor source. The valid channel waveform range is from 1 through 4 for four--channel instruments
or 1 through 2 for two channel--instruments.
H MATH<x>
Sets a math waveform as the cursor source. The valid math waveform
range is from 1 through 4 for four--channel instruments or 1 through 2
for two channel--instruments.
H REF<x>
Sets a reference waveform as the cursor source. The valid reference
waveform range is from 1 through 4 for four--channel instruments or 1
through 2 for two channel--instruments.
Returns
Any valid waveform.
Example 1
CURSor:SOUrce1 CH2
This command sets the Cursor1 source to channel 2.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 148 --
Example 2
CURSor:SOUrce1?
This query might return
:CURSOR:SOURCE1 CH2
indicating that the Cursor1 source is channel 2.
Example 3
CURSor:SOUrce?
This query might return
:CURSOR:SOURCE1 CH2
indicating that the Cursor1 source is channel 2. If you do not specify
the cursor, cursor 1 is returned as the source.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 149 --
CURSor:STATE
Description
This command sets or queries the state of cursors. Note that setting the
cursor state does not modify the cursor type.
This command is equivalent to pressing the CURSOR button on the
front panel.
Group
Cursor
Related Commands
CURSor:FUNCtion OFF
Syntax 1
CURSor:STATE {ON|OFF|<NR1>}
Syntax 2
CURsor:STATE?
Arguments
H ON
Displays the cursors.
H OFF
Removes cursors from the display.
H <NR1>
A 0 disables the display cursors; any other value enables the display
cursors.
Example 1
CURSor:STATE ON
This command displays the cursors.
Example 2
CURSor:STATE?
This query might return
:CURSOR:STATE 1
indicating that the cursors are active on the display.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 150 --
CURSor:VBArs
Description
This command returns the current settings for the vertical bar cursors or
forces them to snap to positions specified by the DATA:START and
DATA:STOP commands.
Group
Cursor
Related Commands
DATA:START, DATA:STOP
Syntax 1
CURSor:VBArs?
Returns the units and positions of the vertical bar cursors.
Syntax 2
CURSor:VBArs SNAp
Argument
H SNAp
Forces the position of vertical bar cursor 1 and 2 to snap to the waveform record points specified by the DATA:START and DATA:STOP
commands, respectively.
Example 1
CURSor:VBArs?
This query might return the following vertical bar settings
:CURSOR:VBARS:UNITS SECONDS;POSITION1
1.0000E-06;POSITION2 9.0000E-06
Example 1
CURSor:VBArs SNAp
This command forces vertical bar cursor1 to the DATA:START position
and vertical bar cursor2 to the DATA:STOP position.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 151 --
CURSor:VBArs:DELTa?
Description
This query--only command returns the horizontal difference between
the two vertical bar cursors. The units are specified by the CURSor:VBArs:UNIts command. The position can appear in units of Base
or 1/Base.
Group
Cursor
Related Commands
CURSor:VBArs:UNIts
Syntax
CURSor:VBArs:DELTa?
Returns
A floating point value with an exponent.
Example
CURSor:VBArs:DELTa?
This command might return
:CURSOR:VBARS:DELTA 1.0640E+00
indicating that the time between the vertical bar cursors is 1.064 s.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 152 --
CURSor:VBArs:POSITION<x>
Description
This command sets or queries the horizontal position for vertical bar
cursors. The cursor is specified by x, which can be 1 or 2. Values are
with respect to trigger position or the zero reference point for the designated waveform (if horizontal units are not set to time). Use the CURSor:VBArs:UNIts command to specify units. The position can appear
in units of base or 1/base.
This command is the equivalent of selecting Cursor Setup from the
Cursors menu, selecting V Bars Cursor Type, and then viewing or editing the desired cursor position.
Group
Cursor
Related Commands
CURSor:VBArs:UNIts
Syntax 1
CURSor:VBArs:POSITION<x> {<NR3>}
Syntax 2
CURSor:VBArs:POSITION<x>?
Argument
H <NR3>
Specifies the cursor position.
Returns
A floating point value with an exponent.
Example 1
CURSor:VBArs:POSITION2 9.00E-6
Positions the cursor2 vertical bar cursor at 9 ms.
Example 2
CURSor:VBArs:POSITION1?
This command might return
:CURSOR:VBARS:POSITION1 1.0000E-06
indicating that the cursor1 vertical bar is positioned at 1 ms.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 153 --
CURSor:VBArs:UNIts
Description
This command sets or queries the units for the vertical bar cursors.
Group
Cursor
Syntax 1
CURSor:VBArs:UNIts {SEConds|HERtz}
Syntax 2
CURSor:VBArs:UNIts?
Arguments
H SECOnds
Sets the units of the vertical bar cursors for the time domain (seconds).
H HERtz
Sets the units of the vertical bar cursors for the frequency domain
(hertz).
Returns
A string for SECOnds or HERtz, depending on the current vertical bar
cursor units.
Example 1
CURSor:VBArs:UNIts HERtz
Sets the units of the VBArs cursors to 1/seconds.
Example 2
CURSor:VBArs:UNIts?
This command might return
:CURSOR:VBARS:UNITS SECONDS
indicating that the units for the vertical bar cursor are currently set to
seconds.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 154 --
CURSor:WAVEform:HDELTA?
Description
This query--only command returns the horizontal difference between
the waveform cursors. This is the absolute value of the horizontal position of the first cursor minus the horizontal position of the second cursor. This is equivalent to the waveform delta--time readout value.
Group
Cursor
Syntax
CURSor:WAVEform:HDELTa?
Example
CURSor:WAVEform:HDELTa?
This query might return
:CURSOR:WAVEFORM:HDELTA 1.03E–9
indicating that the time between the waveform cursors is 1.03 ns.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 155 --
CURSor:WAVEform:HPOS<x>?
Description
This query--only command returns the position of the specified waveform cursor. The cursor is specified by x, which can be 1 or 2. This corresponds to the v1 or v2 (cursor 1 or cursor 2) cursor readout.
Group
Cursor
Syntax
CURSor:WAVEform:HPOS<x>?
Example
CURSor:WAVEform:HPOS1?
This query might return
:CURSOR:WAVEFORM:HPOS2 0.247344970703
indicating that cursor 2 is at 247.3 mV with respect to ground on the
source waveform.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 156 --
CURSor:WAVEform:POSition<x>
Description
This command sets or queries the position of a waveform cursor, which
is constrained to be visible in the selected time base. (Use the CURSor:FUNCtion command to set the cursor function to Waveform.) The
cursor is specified by x, which can be 1 or 2. This is equivalent to setting a value in the Position control in the Cursor1 or Cursor2 sections of
the Cursor Setup dialog box (when Waveform is selected in the Function section).
Group
Cursor
Related Commands
CURSor:FUNCtion
Syntax 1
CURSor:WAVEform:POSition<x>
{<NR3>}
Syntax 2
CURSor:WAVEform:POSition<x>?
Arguments
H <NR3>
Specifies the cursor position measured relative to the time of the trigger point of the source waveform.
Example 1
CURSor:WAVEform:POSition2 9.00E-6
Example 2
CURSor:WAVEform:POSition2?
This query might return
:CURSOR:WAVEFORM:POSITION2 51.0701402806E-009
indicating waveform cursor 1 is at 51.1 ns.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 157 --
CURSor:WAVEform:SOUrce<x>
Description
This command sets or queries the source for a waveform cursor. The
cursor is specified by x, which can be 1 or 2.
Group
Cursor
Syntax 1
CURSor:WAVEform:SOUrce
{CH<x>|MATH<x>|REF<x>}
Syntax 2
CURSor:SOUrce?
Arguments
H CH<x>
Sets an input channel waveform as the cursor source. The valid channel waveform range is from 1 through 4 for four--channel instruments
or 1 through 2 for two channel--instruments.
H MATH<x>
Sets a math waveform as the cursor source. The valid math waveform
range is from 1 through 4 for four--channel instruments or 1 through 2
for two channel--instruments.
H REF<x>
Sets a reference waveform as the cursor source. The valid reference
waveform range is from 1 through 4 for four--channel instruments or 1
through 2 for two channel--instruments.
Example 1
CURSor:WAVEform:SOUrce CH2
This command sets the Cursor1 source to channel 2.
Example 2
CURSor:WAVEform:SOUrce?
This query might return
:CURSOR:WAVEFORM:SOURCE1 CH2
indicating that the Cursor1 source is channel 2.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 158 --
CURSor:WAVEform:STYle
Description
This command sets or queries the cursor type for Waveform mode.
Group
Cursor
Syntax 1
CURSor:WAVEform:STYle {LINE_X|LINES|X}
Syntax 2
CURSor:WAVEform:STYle?
Arguments
H LINE_X
Specifies the cursor style to be a line with superimposed X.
H LINES
Specifies the cursor style to be a line.
H X
Specifies the cursor style to be an X.
Example 1
CURSor:WAVEform:STYle LINES
This command sets the cursor style to lines.
Example 2
CURSor:WAVEform:STYle?
This query might return
:CURSOR:WAVEFORM:STYLE X
indicating that the style for waveform cursors is X.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 159 --
CURSor:WAVEform:UNIts
Description
This command sets or queries the units for waveform cursors.
Group
Cursor
Syntax 1
CURSor:WAVEform:UNIts BASe
Syntax 2
CURSor:WAVEform:UNIts?
Arguments
H BASe
Sets cursor units to base.
Example 1
CURSor:WAVEform:UNIts BASe
This command sets the waveform cursor units to base.
Example 2
CURSor:WAVEform:UNIts?
This query might return
:CURSOR:WAVEFORM:UNITS BASE
indicating that the units for waveform cursors are base.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 160 --
CURSor:WAVEform:VDELTA?
Description
This query--only command returns the vertical difference between the
waveform cursors. This is the absolute value of the vertical position of
the first cursor minus the vertical position of the second cursor. This is
equivalent to the waveform delta--voltage readout value.
Group
Cursor
Syntax
CURSor:WAVEform:VDELTa?
Example
CURSor:WAVEform:VDELTa?
This command might return
CURSOR:WAVEFORM:VDELTA 1.06E–3
indicating that the voltage between the waveform cursors is 1.06 mV.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 161 --
CURSor:WAVEform
Description
This command returns the current settings for the waveform cursors or
forces them to snap to positions specified by the DATA:START and
DATA:STOP commands.
Group
Cursor
Related Commands
DATA:START, DATA:STOP
Syntax 1
CURSor:WAVEform?
Returns the units and positions of the waveform cursors.
Syntax 2
CURSor:WAVEform SNAp
Argument
H SNAp
Forces the position of waveform cursor 1 and 2 to snap to the waveform record points specified by the DATA:START and DATA:STOP
commands, respectively.
Example 1
CURSor:WAVEform?
This query might return the following waveform cursor settings
:CURSOR:WAVEFORM:UNITS SECONDS;POSITION1
1.0000E-06;POSITION2 9.0000E-06
Example 2
CURSor:WAVEform SNAp
This command forces waveform cursor1 to the DATA:START position
and waveform cursor2 to the DATA:STOP position.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 162 --
CURSor:XY:PRODDELta?
Description
This query--only command returns the product of the difference between the cursors X positions and Y positions when the CURSor:XY:READOUT is set to PRODuct. The ∆X x ∆Y value is calculated as (Cursor 2 X – Cursor 1 X) X (Cursor 2 Y – Cursor 1 Y).
Note: This query is only valid when the CURSor:XY:READOUT is
set to PRODuct. If the readout is set other than product, the IEEE representation of NAN (Not a Number) is returned: 99.1000E+36.
Group
Cursor
Syntax
CURSor:XY:PRODDELta?
Example
CURSor:XY:PRODDELta?
This query might return
:CURSOR:XY:PRODDELTA -24.9856
indicating that the ∆X x ∆Y value is –24.9856 VV.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 163 --
CURSor:XY:PRODUCT<x>?
Description
This query--only command returns the product of the X and Y positions
for the specified cursor when the CURSor:XY:READOUT is set to
PRODuct. The cursor is specified by x, which can be 1 or 2.
Note: This query is only valid when the CURSor:XY:READOUT is
set to PRODuct. If the readout is set other than product, the IEEE representation of NAN (Not a Number) is returned: 99.1000E+36.
Group
Cursor
Syntax
CURSor:XY:PRODUCT<x>?
Example
CURSor:XY:PRODUCT1?
This query might return
:CURSOR:XY:PRODUCT1 806.4004E-3
indicating that the product of the X position times the Y position for
Cursor 1 is 806.4004 mVV.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 164 --
CURSor:XY:RADIUS<x>?
Description
This query--only command returns the radius of the specified cursor
when the CURSor:XY:READOUT is set to POLARCoord. The cursor
is specified by x, which can be 1 or 2.
Note: This query is only valid when the CURSor:XY:READOUT is
set to POLARCoord. If the readout is set other than polar coordinates,
the IEEE representation of NAN (Not a Number) is returned:
99.1000E+36.
Group
Cursor
Syntax
CURSor:XY:RADIUS<x>?
Example
CURSor:XY:RADIUS2?
This query might return
:CURSOR:XY:RADIUS2 4.9600
indicating that the Cursor 2 radius is 4.9600 V.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 165 --
CURSor:XY:RATDELta?
Description
This query--only command returns ratio of the difference between the
cursors X position and Y position (∆Y ÷ ∆X) when the CURSor:XY:READOUT is set to RATio. The ratio is calculated as (Cursor 2
Y – Cursor 1 Y) ÷ (Cursor 2 X – Cursor 1 X).
Note: This query is only valid when the CURSor:XY:READOUT is
set to RATio. If the readout is set other than ratio, the IEEE representation of NAN (Not a Number) is returned: 99.1000E+36.
Group
Cursor
Syntax
CURSor:XY:RATDELta?
Example
CURSor:XY:RATDELta?
This query might return
:CURSOR:XY:RATDELTA -1.0167
indicating that the ∆Y ÷ ∆X ratio is --1.0167.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 166 --
CURSor:XY:RATIO<x>?
Description
This query--only command returns ratio the of the X (horizontal) and Y
(vertical) position for the specified cursor when the CURSor:XY:READOUT is set to RATio. The cursor is specified by x, which
can be 1 or 2. The ratio is calculated as Y ÷ X.
Note: This query is only valid when the CURSor:XY:READOUT is
set to RATio. If the readout is set other than ratio, the IEEE representation of NAN (Not a Number) is returned: 99.1000E+36.
Group
Cursor
Syntax
CURSor:XY:RATIO<x>?
Example
CURSor:XY:RATIO1?
This query might return
:CURSOR:XY:RATIO1 15.8730E-3
indicating that the ratio of the X and Y positions for Cursor 1 is
15.8730E–3.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 167 --
CURSor:XY:RDELta?
Description
This query--only command returns the delta radius (∆r) value when the
CURSor:XY:READOUT is set to POLARCoord.
Note: This query is only valid when the CURSor:XY:READOUT is
set to POLARCoord. If the readout is set other than polar coordinates,
the IEEE representation of NAN (Not a Number) is returned:
99.1000E+36.
Group
Cursor
Syntax
CURSor:XY:RDELta?
Example
CURSor:XY:RDELta?
This query might return
:CURSOR:XY:RDELTA 6.9600
indicating that the difference between the cursors radius is 6.9600 V.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 168 --
CURSor:XY:READOUT
Description
This command sets or queries the XY cursor readout (available when
DISplay:FORMat is set to XY).
Group
Cursor
Related Commands
DISplay:FORMat
Syntax 1
CURSor:XY:READOUT {RECTangular|POLARCoord|PRODuct|RATio}
Syntax 2
CURSor:XY:READOUT?
Arguments
H RECTangular
Displays the following values: X1, X2, ∆X, Y1, Y2, ∆Y, t1, t2, ∆t.
H POLARCoord
Displays the following values: r1, r2, ∆r, θ1, θ2, ∆θ, t1, t2, ∆t.
H PRODuct
Displays the following values: X1 x Y1, X2 xY2, ∆X x ∆Y, t1, t2, ∆t.
H RATio
Displays the following values: Y1 ÷ X1, Y2 ÷ X2, ∆Y ÷ x ∆X, t1, t2,
∆t.
Example 1
CURsor:XY:READOUT RECTangular
This command sets the XY cursor readout to rectangular.
Example 2
CURSor:XY:READOUT?
This query might return
:CURSOR:XY:READOUT RECTANGULAR
indicating that the XY cursor readout is set to rectangular mode.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 169 --
CURSor:XY:RECTX<x>
Description
This command sets or queries the X cursor position in rectangular coordinates. The cursor is specified by x, which can be 1 or 2.
Note: This query is only valid when the CURSor:XY:READOUT is
set to RECTangular. If the readout is set other than rectangular coordinates, the IEEE representation of NAN (Not a Number) is returned:
99.1000E+36.
Group
Cursor
Syntax 1
CURSor:XY:RECTX<x> {<NR3>}
Syntax 2
CURSor:XY:RECTX<x>?
Arguments
H <NR3>
This is the X position of the specified cursor in rectangular coordinates.
Example 1
CURSor:XY:RECTX2 5.04
This command sets the X position of Cursor 2 to 5.04 V in rectangular
coordinates.
Example 2
CURSor:XY:RECTX1?
This query might return
:CURSOR:XY:RECTX1 5.1200
indicating that the X postion of Cursor 1 is set to 5.1200 in rectangular
coordinates.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 170 --
CURSor:XY:RECTY<x>
Description
This command sets or queries the Y cursor position in rectangular coordinates. The cursor is specified by x, which can be 1 or 2.
Note: This query is only valid when the CURSor:XY:READOUT is
set to RECTangular. If the readout is set to other than rectangular
coordinates, the IEEE representation of NAN (Not a Number) is returned: 99.1000E+36.
Group
Cursor
Syntax 1
CURSor:XY:RECTY<x> {<NR3>}
Syntax 2
CURSor:XY:RECTY<x>?
Arguments
H <NR3>
This is the Y position of the specified cursor in rectangular coordinates.
Example 1
CURSor:XY:RECTY1 2.5
This command sets the Y position of Cursor 1 to 2.5 V.
Example 2
CURSor:XY:RECTY2?
This query might return
:CURSOR:XY:RECTY2 4.8800
indicating that the position of Cursor 2 in rectangular coordinates is
4.88 V.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 171 --
CURSor:XY:THDELta?
Description
This query--only command returns the XY cursor angle delta in polar
coordinates.
Note: This query is only valid when the CURSor:XY:READOUT is
set to POLARCoord. If the readout is set other than polar coordinates,
the IEEE representation of NAN (Not a Number) is returned:
99.1000E+36.
Group
Cursor
Syntax
CURSor:XY:THDELta?
Example
CURSor:XY:THDELta?
This query might return
:CURSOR:XY:THDELTA 136.3748
indicating that the ∆θ XY cursor angle is 136.3748 degrees.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 172 --
CURSor:XY:THETA<x>?
Description
This query--only command returns the XY cursor angle in polar coordinates. The cursor is specified by x, which can be 1 or 2.
Note: This query is only valid when the CURSor:XY:READOUT is
set to POLARCoord. If the readout is set other than polar coordinates,
the IEEE representation of NAN (Not a Number) is returned:
99.1000E+36.
Group
Cursor
Syntax
CURSor:XY:THETA<x>?
Example
CURSor:XY:THETA2?
This query might return
:CURSOR:XY:THETA2 -89.0906
indicating that the Channel 2 XY cursor angle in polar coordinates is
–89.0906 degrees.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 173 --
CURSor:XY:XDELta?
Description
This query--only command returns the XY cursor X delta value in rectangular coordinates.
Note: This query is only valid when the CURSor:XY:READOUT is
set to RECTangular. If the readout is set to other than rectangular
coordinates, the IEEE representation of NAN (Not a Number) is returned: 99.1000E+36.
Group
Cursor
Syntax
CURSor:XY:XDELta?
Example
CURSor:XY:XDELta?
This query might return
:CURSOR:XY:XDELTA 40.0000E-3
indicating that the ∆X value is 40 mV.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 174 --
CURSor:XY:YDELta?
Description
This query--only command returns the XY cursor Y delta value in rectangular coordinates.
Note: This query is only valid when the CURSor:XY:READOUT is
set to RECTangular. If the readout is set to other than rectangular
coordinates, the IEEE representation of NAN (Not a Number) is returned: 99.1000E+36.
Group
Cursor
Syntax
CURSor:XY:YDELta?
Example
CURSor:XY:YDELta?
This query might return
:CURSOR:XY:YDELTA 40.0000E-6
indicating that the ∆Y value is 40 microvolts.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 175 --
CURSor:XY?
Description
This query--only command returns all of the XY cursor parameters.
Note: The values returned for all XY cursor readouts, that do not pertain to the current CURSor:XY:READOUT setting, are returned as
the IEEE representation of NAN (Not a Number): 99.1000E+36.
Group
Cursor
Syntax
CURSor:XY?
Example
CURSor:XY?
This query might return
:CURSOR:XY:PRODDELTA 99.1000E+36;PRODUCT1
99.1000E+36;PRODUCT2 99.1000E+36;READOUT RECTANGULAR;RADIUS1 99.1000E+36;RADIUS2
99.1000E+36;RATDELTA 99.1000E+36;
RATIO 199.1000E+36;RATIO2 99.1000E+36;RDELTA
99.1000E+36;RECTX1 1.0000;RECTX2 1.0200;RECTY1
360.0001E-6;RECTY2360.0001E-6;
THDELTA 99.1000E+36;THETA1 99.1000E+36;THETA2
99.1000E+36;XDELTA 20.0000E-3;YDELTA 0.0000
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 176 --
CURSor?
Description
This query--only command returns all of the current cursor settings.
Group
Cursor
Syntax
CURSor?
Example:
CURSOR?
This query might return the following as the current cursor settings:
:CURSOR:STATE 1;FUNCTION VBARS;LINESTYLE SOLID;MODE INDEPENDENT;SOURCE1 CH1;
SOURCE2 CH1;SCREEN:STYLE LINES;
:CURSOR:VBARS:UNITS SECONDS;POSITION1
-1.6000E-6;POSITION2 1.6000E-6;
:CURSOR:HBARS:POSITION1 300.0000E-3;
POSITION2 -300.0000E-3;UNITS BASE;
:CURSOR:WAVEFORM:POSITION1 -1.6000E-6;POSITION2 1.6000E-6;
SOURCE2 CH1;UNITS BASE;STYLE LINE_X;:CURSOR:XY
:PRODDELTA 99.1000E+36;PRODUCT1
99.1000E+36;PRODUCT2 99.1000E+36;
READOUT RECTANGULAR;RADIUS1 99.1000E+36;RADIUS2 99.1000E+36;
RATDELTA 99.1000E+36;RATIO1 99.1000E+36;RATIO2
99.1000E+36;
RDELTA 99.1000E+36;RECTX1 0.0000;RECTX2
0.0000;RECTY1 0.0000;
RECTY2 0.0000;THDELTA 99.1000E+36;THETA1
99.1000E+36;
THETA2 99.1000E+36;XDELTA 0.0000;YDELTA 0.0000
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 177 --
CURVe
Description
This command transfers waveform data to and from the instrument.
Each waveform that is transferred has an associated waveform
preamble that contains information such as data format and scale.
The CURVe? query transfers data from the instrument. The data source
is specified by the DATa:SOUrce command. The first and last data
points are specified by the DATa:STARt and DATa:STOP commands.
The CURVe command transfers waveform data to the instrument. The
data is stored in the reference memory location specified by
DATa:DESTination, starting with the data point specified by
DATa:STARt. Only one waveform can be transferred at a time. The
waveform will only be displayed if the reference is displayed.
Group
Waveform Transfer
Related Commands
DATa:DESTination, DATa:SOUrce, DATa:STARt, DATa:STOP,
SAVe:WAVEform, SAVe:WAVEform:FILEFormat, WFMInpre,
WFMInpre:BYT_Nr, WFMOutpre, WFMInpre:NR_FR?,
WFMOutpre:NR_FR?
Syntax 1
CURVe {<Block>|<asc curve>}
Syntax 2
CURVe?
Arguments
H <Block>
This is the waveform data in binary format. The waveform is formatted as: #<x><yyy><data><newline>, where
<x> is the number of y bytes. For example, if <yyy>=500, then
<x>=3)
<yyy> is the number of bytes to transfer. If width is 1, then all bytes
on the bus are single data points. If width is 2, then all bytes on the
bus are 2--byte pairs. If width is 4, then all bytes on the bus are 4--byte
pairs. Use the WFMInpre:BYT_Nr command to set the width.
<data> is the curve data.
<newline> is a single byte new line character at the end of the data.
H <asc curve>
This is the waveform data in ASCII format. The format for ASCII
data is <NR1>[,<NR1>…], where each <NR1> represents a data
point.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 178 --
Example 1
CURVe?
This query with ASCII encoding, start and stop of 1 and 10 respectively, and a width set to 1 might return
:CURVE 61,62,61,60,60,--59,--59,--58,--58,--59
Note: Curve data is transferred from the instrument asynchronously
and, dependent upon the length of the curve record, such transfers can
require several seconds to complete. During this time, the instrument
will not respond to user controls. You can interrupt these asynchronous data transfers by sending a device clear message to the instrument or by interrupting the query with another command or query. In
order to verify that curve data has been completely transferred, it is
recommended that you follow such queries with an *ESR? Query and
verify that the error bit returned and, if set, check the event queue to
ascertain the reason for the error. If the error was caused by an interrupted query, then the asynchronous data transfer had not completed
when the *ESR? query was sent. In this case, you may need increase
your program’s timeout value in order to ensure that all data is transferred and read.
Example 2
CURVe <Block>
This command sets the format of the waveform data, transferred to and
from the instrument, to binary format.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 179 --
DATa
Description
This command sets or queries the format and location of the waveform
data that is transferred with the CURVe command.
Group
Waveform Transfer
Related Commands
CURVe, DATa:STARt, DATa:STOP, DATa:ENCdg SAVe:WAVEform,
SAVe:WAVEform:FILEFormat, WFMInpre:NR_FR?,
WFMInpre:NR_Pt, WFMOutpre:NR_FR?, WFMOutpre:NR_Pt?
Syntax 1
DATa {INIT|SNAp}
Syntax 2
DATa?
Argument
H INIT
This initializes the waveform data parameters to their factory defaults.
H SNAp
This sets DATa:STARt and DATa:STOP to match the current V Bar/
Paired/Split cursor positions.
Example 1
DATa?
This query might return
:DATA:DESTINATION REF1:ENCDG RIBINARY;SOURCE
CH1;START 1;STOP 500
Example 2
DATa INIT
This command initializes the waveform data parameters to their factory
defaults.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 180 --
DATa:DESTination
Description
This command sets or queries the reference memory location for storing waveform data that is transferred into the instrument by the CURVe
command.
Group
Waveform Transfer
Related Commands
CURVe
Syntax 1
DATa:DESTination REF<x>
Syntax 2
DATa:DESTination?
Argument
H REF<x>
This is the reference where the waveform will be stored. The reference number is specified by x, which ranges from 1 through 4.
Example 1
DATa:DESTination?
This query might return
:DATA:DESTINATION REF3
indicating that reference 3 is the currently selected reference memory
location for waveform data.
Example 2
DATa:DESTination REF1
This command indicates that incoming waveform data be stored in reference 1.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 181 --
DATa:ENCdg
Description
This command sets or queries the format of outgoing waveform data.
This command is equivalent to setting WFMOutpre:ENCdg,
WFMOutpre:BN_Fmt, and WFMOutpre:BYT_Or. Setting the
DATa:ENGdg value causes the corresponding WFMOutpre values to be
updated and visa versa.
Note: Values are constrained (for outbound data) to the format of the
data specified by DATa:SOUrce.
Group
Waveform Transfer
Related Commands
WFMOutpre:ENCdg, WFMOutpre:BN_Fmt, WFMOutpre:BYT_Or
Syntax 1
DATa:ENCdg {ASCIi|FAStest|RIBinary|RPBinary|FPBinary|SRIbinary
|SRPbinary|SFPbinary}
Syntax 2
DATa:ENCdg?
Argument
H•ASCIi
This specifies the ASCII representation of signed INT, FLOAT. If
ASCII is the value, then :BN_Fmt and :BYT_Or are ignored.
H•FAStest
This specifies that the data be sent in the fastest possible manner consistent with maintaining accuracy and is interpreted with respect to the
first waveform specified in the DATA:SOUrce list.
:ENCdg will always be BIN, :BYT_Or will always be LSB, but
:BN_Fmt and :BYT_Nr will depend on the first DATa:SOUrce waveform. :BN_Fmt will be RI unless the waveform is internally stored as
a floating point number, in which case the FP format will be used.
H•RIBinary
This specifies signed integer data point representation with the most
significant byte transferred first.
When :BYT_Nr is 1, the range is from --128 through 127. When
:BYT_Nr is 2, the range is from --32,768 through 32,767. When
:BYT_Nr is 8, then the waveform being queried has been set to Fast
Acquisition mode. Center screen is 0 (zero). The upper limit is one
division above the top of the screen and the lower limit is one division
below the bottom of the screen. This is the default argument.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 182 --
H•RPBinary
This specifies the positive integer data--point representation, with the
most significant byte transferred first.
When :BYT_Nr is 1, the range from 0 through 255. When :BYT_Nr
is 2, the range is from 0 to 65,535. When :BYT_Nr is 8, then the waveform being queried has been set to Fast Acquisition mode. The center of the screen is 127. The upper limit is one division above the top
of the screen and the lower limit is one division below the bottom of
the screen.
H•FPBinary
This specifies the floating point (width = 4) data.
The range is from --3.4 × 1038 to 3.4 × 1038. The center of the screen
is 0. The upper limit is one division above the top of the screen and
the lower limit is one division below the bottom of the screen.
The FPBinary argument is only applicable to math waveforms or ref
waveforms saved from math waveforms.
H•SRIbinary
This is the same as RIBinary except that the byte order is swapped,
meaning that the least significant byte is transferred first. This format
is useful when transferring data to IBM compatible PCs.
H•SRPbinary
This is the same as RPBinary except that the byte order is swapped,
meaning that the least significant byte is transferred first. This format
is useful when transferring data to PCs.
H•SFPbinary
This specifies floating point data in IBM PC format.
The SFPbinary argument only works on math waveforms or ref waveforms saved from math waveforms
DATa and WFMOUTPRE
Parameter Settings
DATa:ENCdg Setting
ASCii
FAStext
RIBinary
RPBinary
FPBinary
SRIbinary
SRPbinary
SFPbinary
WFMOUTPRE Settings
:BN_Fmt
:BYT_Or
N/A
N/A
RI/FP
MSB
RI
MSB
RP
MSB
FP
MSB
RI
LSB
RP
LSB
FP
LSB
:ENCdg
ASC
BIN
BIN
BIN
BIN
BIN
BIN
BIN
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 183 --
:BYT_NR
1, 2, 4, 8
1, 2, 4
1, 2, 8
1, 2, 8
4
1, 2, 8
1, 2, 8
4
Example 1
DATa:ENCdg?
This query might return
:DATa:ENCDG SRPBINARY
for the format of the outgoing waveform data.
Example 2
DATa:ENGdg RPBinary
This command sets the data encoding format to be a positive integer
where the most significant byte is transferred first.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 184 --
DATa:SOUrce
Description
This command sets or queries the location of waveform data that is
transferred from the instrument by the CURVe? Query.
Group
Waveform Transfer
Related Commands
CURVe?
Syntax 1
DATa:SOUrce <wfm>[<,><wfm>]
Syntax 2
DATa:SOUrce?
Argument
H•<wfm>
This is the location of the waveform data that will be transferred from
the instrument to the controller.
Example 1
DATa:SOUrce?
This query might return
:DATA:SOURCE REF3
indicating that the source for the waveform data which is transferred
using a CURVe? Query sis reference 3.
Example 2
DATa:SOUrce CH1
This command specifies that the CH1 waveforms will be transferred in
the next CURVe? query.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 185 --
DATa:STARt
Description
This command sets or queries the starting data point for waveform
transfer. This command allows for the transfer of partial waveforms to
and from the instrument.
Group
Waveform Transfer
Related Commands
CURVe, DATa, DATa:STOP, SAVe:WAVEform, SAVe:WAVEform:FILEFormat, WFMInpre:NR_Pt, WFMOutpre:NR_Pt,
WFMInpre:NR_FR?, WFMOutpre:NR_FR?
Syntax 1
DATa:STARt <NR1>
Syntax 2
DATa:STARt?
Argument
H <NR1>
This is the first data point that will be transferred, which ranges from
1 to the record length. Data will be transferred from <NR1> to
DATa:STOP or the record length, whichever is less. If <NR1> is
greater than the record length, the last data point in the record is transferred.
DATa:STARt and DATa:STOP are order independent. When
DATa:STOP is greater than DATa:STARt, the values will be swapped
internally for the CURVE? query.
Example 1
DATa:STARt?
This query might return
:DATA:START 214
indicating that data point 214 is the first waveform data point that will
be transferred.
Example 2
DATa:STARt 10
This command specifies that the waveform transfer will begin with data
point 10.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 186 --
DATa:STOP
Description
This command sets or queries the last data point that will be transferred
when using the CURVe? query. This command allows for the transfer of
partial waveforms to the controller.
Changes to the record length value are not automatically reflected in the
data:stop value. As record length is varied, the data:stop value must be
explicitly changed to ensure the entire record is transmitted. In other
words, curve results will not automatically and correctly reflect increases in record length if the distance from data:start to data:stop stays
smaller than the increased record length.
Note: When using the CURVe command, DATa:STOP is ignored and
WFMInpre:NR_Pt is used.
Group
Waveform Transfer
Related Commands
CURVe, DATa, DATa:STARt, SAVe:WAVEform, SAVe:WAVEform:FILEFormat, WFMInpre:NR_Pt, WFMOutpre:NR_Pt,
WFMInpre:NR_FR?, WFMOutpre:NR_FR?
Syntax 1
DATa:STOP <NR1>
Syntax 2
DATa:STOP?
Argument
H <NR1>
This is the last data point that will be transferred, which ranges from 1
to the record length. If <NR1> is greater than the record length, then
data will be transferred up to the record length. If both DATa:STARt
and DATa:STOP are greater than the record length, the last data point
in the record is returned.
DATa:STARt and DATa:STOP are order independent. When
DATa:STOP is less than DATa:STARt, the values will be swapped
internally for the CURVE? query.
If you always want to transfer complete waveforms, set DATa:STARt
to 1 and DATa:STOP to the maximum record length, or larger.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 187 --
Example 1
DATa:STOP?
This query might return
:DATA:STOP 14900
indicating that 14900 is the last waveform data point that will be transferred.
Example 2
DATa:STOP 15000
This command specifies that the waveform transfer will stop at data
point 15000.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 188 --
DATE
Description
This command sets or queries the date that the instrument can display.
This command is equivalent to selecting Set Date & Time from the Utilities menu and then setting the fields in the Date group box.
Group
Miscellaneous
Related Commands
TIME
Syntax 1
DATE <Qstring>
Syntax 2
DATE?
Argument
H <QString>
This is a date in the form ”yyyy--mm--dd” where yyyy refers to a
four--digit year number, mm refers to a two--digit month number from
01 to 12, and dd refers to a two--digit day number in the month.
Example 1
DATE ”2000-01-24”
This command specifies that the date is set to January 24, 2000.
Example 2
DATE?
This query might return
:DATE 2000-01-24
indicating the current date is set to January 24, 2000.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 189 --
DELEte:SETUp
Description
This command (no query form) changes the setup to reference the factory setup instead of the specific user setup slot. The content of the setup slot is unchanged, but the data will no longer be accessible to you.
This command is equivalent to selecting Delete from the File menu,
and then clicking the specific setup you want to delete (user setups are
shown as Setup--User and are ordered in the list from 1 through 10, if
defined) or All Setups.
Note: The setup information cannot be recovered once it has been
deleted.
Group
Save and Recall
Related Commands
*RCL?, RECall:SETUp, *RST, *SAV, SAVe:SETUp, *SDS
Syntax
DELEte:SETUp {ALL|<NR1>}
Arguments
H ALL
This argument deletes all the stored setups.
H <NR1>
This argument specifies a setup storage location to delete. Setup storage location values range from 1 through 10; using an out--of--range
value causes an error.
Example
DELEte:SETUp ALL
This command deletes all stored setups. All ten storage locations are
initialized to the factory default setup.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 190 --
DELEte:WAVEform
Description
This command (no query form) deletes one or all stored reference waveforms from memory.
This command is equivalent to selecting Delete from the File menu,
and then choosing the reference waveform you want to delete; choosing
All Refs deletes all of the reference waveforms.
Group
Save and Recall
Related Commands
RECAll:WAVEform, Save:WAVEform
Syntax
DELEte:WAVEform {ALL|REF<x>}
Arguments
H ALL
This specifies to delete all the stored reference waveforms.
H REF<x>
This specifies to delete one of the reference memory locations. Reference memory location values range from 1 through 4.
Example 1
DELEte:WAVEform ALL
This command removes all waveforms stored in reference memory.
Example 2
DELEte:WAVEform REF2
This command removes the waveform stored at REF2.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 191 --
DESE
Description
This command sets and queries the bits in the Device Event Status Enable Register (DESER). The DESER is the mask that determines
whether events are reported to the Standard Event Status Register
(SESR), and entered into the Event Queue. For a more detailed discussion of the use of these registers, see Registers.
Group
Status and Error
Related Commands
*CLS, *ESE, *ESR?, *EVENT?, EVMsg?, *SRE, *STB?
Syntax 1
DESE <NR1>
Syntax 2
DESE?
Argument
H <NR1>
The binary bits of the DESER are set according to this value, which
ranges from 1 through 255. For example, DESE 209 sets the DESER
to the binary value 11010001 (that is, the most significant bit in the
register is set to 1, the next most significant bit to 1, the next bit to 0,
etc.).
The power--on default for DESER is all bits set if *PSC is 1. If *PSC
is 0, the DESER maintains the previous power cycle value through
the current power cycle.
Note: Setting the DESER and ESER to the same value allows only
those codes to be entered into the Event Queue and summarized on
the ESB bit (bit 5) of the Status Byte Register. Use the *ESE command to set the ESER.
Example 1
DESE 209
This sets the DESER to binary 11010001, which enables the PON,
URQ, EXE and OPC bits.
Example 2
DESE?
This query might return :DESE 186, showing that the DESER contains the binary value 10111010.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 192 --
DIAg:CONTROL:HALT
Description
This command (no query form) determines whether the next execution
of diagnostics will stop on the first diagnostic failure that occurs or will
execute the selected set of diagnostic functions. This command is
equivalent to selecting Instrument Diagnostics from the Utilities menu
and then enabling Halt on Fail.
Group
Diagnostics
Related Commands
DIAg:CONTROL:LOOP
Syntax
DIAg:CONTROL:HALT (ON|OFF|<NR1>}
Arguments
H ON
This enables the halt function, causing the execution of diagnostics to
halt at the first diagnostic failure that occurs.
H OFF
This disables the halt function, allowing the oscilloscope to execute
the entire set of diagnostics before halting, even if diagnostic failure
occurs.
H <NR1>
A 0 enables the halt function; any other value disables the halt function.
Example
DIAg:CONTROL:HALT ON
This command enables the halt function, causing the execution of diagnostics to halt at the first diagnostic failure that occurs.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 193 --
DIAg:CONTROL:LOOP
Description
This command (no query form) determines whether the next execution
of diagnostics executes once or continuously loops on the selected set
of diagnostics (assuming the halt control is set to off using the
DIAg:CONTROL:HALT command or that the halt control is set to ON
but no failures occur). This command is equivalent to selecting Instrument Diagnostics from the Utilities menu and then enabling Loop Control.
Group
Diagnostics
Related Commands
DIAg:CONTROL:HALT, DIAg:STOP
Syntax
DIAg:CONTROL:LOOP {ON|OFF|<NR1>}
Arguments
H ON
This enables the loop function, causing the execution of diagnostics to
continuously loop.
H OFF
This disables the loop function, causing the oscilloscope to execute
the entire set of diagnostics once and then halt.
H <NR1>
A 0 enables the loop function; any other value disables the loop function.
Example
DIAg:CONTROL:LOOP ON
This command enables the loop function.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 194 --
DIAg:EXECUTE
Description
This command (no query form) starts the execution of the currently
selected set of diagnostics. This command is equivalent to selecting
Instrument Diagnostics from the Utilities menu and then pressing Run.
Group
Diagnostics
Related Commands
DIAg:STATE
Syntax
DIAg:EXECUTE
Example
DIAg:EXECUTE
This command starts the execution of the entire set of diagnostics.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 195 --
DIAg:ITEM?
Description
This query--only command returns the diagnostics settings. This command is equivalent to selecting Instrument Diagnostics from the Utilities menu, and then reviewing the diagnostics settings.
This query--only command can be issued while diagnostics are still in
progress.
Group
Diagnostics
Related Commands
DIAg:ITEM:FAILURES?, DIAg:ITEM:NAME?, DIAg:ITEM:RESULT?, DIAg:ITEM:SUBITEMS?
Syntax
DIAg:ITEM? <NR1>
Arguments
H <NR1>
This sets the index item about which data will be returned, which
ranges from 0 through 15.
Example
DIAg:ITEM? 2
This query might return:
:DIAG:ITEM 2,”Acquisition”,”Pass”,0,8
This indicates that the acquisition test passed and that there were 0 failures of the 8 subitems for that test.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 196 --
DIAg:ITEM:FAILURES?
Description
This query--only command returns the total number of failures. This
command is equivalent to selecting Instrument Diagnostics from the
Utilities menu and then reviewing the Diagnostic Status.
This query--only command can be issued while diagnostics are still in
progress.
Group
Diagnostics
Related Commands
DIAg:ITEM?, DIAg:ITEM:NAME?, DIAg:ITEM:RESULT?,
DIAg:ITEM:SUBITEMS?
Syntax
DIAg:ITEM:FAILURES? <NR1>
Arguments
H <NR1>
This sets the index item about which data will be returned, which
ranges from 0 through 15.
Example
DIAg:ITEM:FAILURES? 2
This query might return:
:DIAG:ITEM:FAILURES 2,0
This indicates that there were 0 failures for item 2.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 197 --
DIAg:ITEM:NAMe?
Description
This query--only command returns the name of the selected menu item.
This command is equivalent to selecting Instrument Diagnostics from
the Utilities menu and then reviewing the Subsystem, Area and Test
settings.
This query--only command can be issued while diagnostics are still in
progress.
Group
Diagnostics
Related Commands
DIAg:ITEM?, DIAg:ITEM:FAILURES?, DIAg:ITEM:RESULT?,
DIAg:ITEM:SUBITEMS?
Syntax
DIAg:ITEM:NAMe? <NR1>
Arguments
H <NR1>
This sets the index item about which data will be returned, which
ranges from 0 through 15.
Example
DIAg:ITEM:NAMe? 2
This query might return
:DIAG:ITEM:NAME 2,”Acquisition”
This indicates that the selected menu item (2) is Acquisition.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 198 --
DIAg:ITEM:RESULT?
Description
This query--only command returns the result from the last execution of
the item. This command is equivalent to selecting Instrument Diagnostics from the Utilities menu and then reviewing the Diagnostic Status.
This query--only command can be issued while diagnostics are still in
progress.
Group
Diagnostics
Related Commands
DIAg:ITEM?, DIAg:ITEM:NAMe?, DIAg:ITEM:FAILURES?,
DIAg:ITEM:SUBITEMS?
Syntax
DIAg:ITEM:RESULT? <NR1>
Arguments
H <NR1>
This sets the index item about which data will be returned, which
ranges from 0 through 15.
Example 1
DIAg:ITEM:RESULT? 2
This query might return
:DIAG:ITEM:RESULT 2,”Pass”
This indicates that the item passed during the last execution.
Example 2
DIAg:ITEM:RESULT? 2
This query might return
:DIAG:ITEM:RESULT 2,”Fail”
This indicates that the item failed during the last execution.
Example 3
DIAg:ITEM:RESULT? 2
This query might return
:DIAG:ITEM:RESULT 2,” ”
This indicates that the item was not run.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 199 --
DIAg:ITEM:SUBITEMS?
Description
This query--only command returns the number of sub--items associated
with the item. This command is equivalent to selecting Instrument
Diagnostics from the Utilities menu, choosing the Subsystem, Area or
Test setting and then reviewing the resulting sub--items.
This query--only command can be issued while diagnostics are still in
progress.
Group
Diagnostics
Related Commands
DIAg:ITEM?, DIAg:ITEM:NAME?, DIAg:ITEM:FAILURES?,
DIAg:ITEM:RESULT?
Syntax
DIAg:ITEM:SUBITEMS? <NR1>
Arguments
H <NR1>
This sets the index item about which data will be returned, which
ranges from 0 through 15.
Example
DIAg:ITEM:SUBITEMS? 2
This query might return:
:DIAG:ITEM:SUBITEMS 2,8
This indicates that there are 8 subitems associated with the selected
item.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 200 --
DIAg:LEVEL
Description
This command sets or returns the currently selected level of diagnostic
test hierarchy. This command is equivalent to selecting Instrument
Diagnostics from the Utilities menu and then reviewing the Diagnostic
Status.
Group
Diagnostics
Syntax 1
DIAg:LEVEL (SUBSYS|AREA|TEST}
Syntax 2
DIAg:LEVEL?
Arguments
H SUBSYS
This sets diagnostic testing to the subsystem level.
H AREA
This sets diagnostic testing to the area level.
H TEST
This sets diagnostic testing to the test level.
Example 1
DIAg:LEVEL AREA
This command sets the level of diagnostic test hierarchy to Area.
Example 2
DIAg:LEVEL?
This query might return:
:DIAG:LEVEL SUBSYSI
This indicates that the current level of diagnostic test hierarchy is Subsys.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 201 --
DIAg:LOOPS?
Description
This query--only command returns the number of times that the selected
diagnostics set was completed during the last diagnostic execution. This
command is equivalent to selecting Instrument Diagnostics from the
Utilities menu and then reviewing the Elapsed Loops.
This query--only command can be issued while diagnostics are still in
progress.
Group
Diagnostics
Syntax
DIAg:LOOPS?
Example
DIAg:LOOPS?
This query might return
:DIAG:LOOPS 5
This indicates that the selected set of diagnostics was completed five
times during the last diagnostic execution.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 202 --
DIAg:NAMe?
Description
This query--only command returns the names of the subsystem, area,
and test of the current diagnostic test. This command can be issued
while diagnostics are still in progress.
Group
Diagnostics
Related Commands
DIAg:NAMe:AREA?, DIAg:NAMe:SUBSYS?, DIAg:NAMe:TEST?
Syntax
DIAg:NAMe?
Example
DIAg:NAMe?
This query might return
:DIAG:NAME:SUBSYS ”Processor”;AREA
”Memory”;TEST”DRAMWalk1”
This indicates the subsystem name, area name, and test name of the
currently selected diagnostic test.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 203 --
DIAg:NAMe:AREA?
Description
This query--only command returns the selected area of the current diagnostic test. There are three levels of diagnostic test hierarchy: subsystem, area and test. This command is equivalent to selecting Instrument
Diagnostics from the Utilities menu and then reviewing the Diagnostic
Status.
This query--only command can be issued while diagnostics are still in
progress.
Group
Diagnostics
Related Commands
DIAg:NAMe?, DIAg:NAMe:SUBSYS?, DIAg:NAMe:TEST?
Syntax
DIAg:NAMe:AREA?
Example
DIAg:NAMe:AREA?
This query might return
:DIAG:NAME:AREA ”Memory”
This indicates the selected area name of the current diagnostic test.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 204 --
DIAg:NAMe:SUBSYS?
Description
This query--only command returns the subsystem of the current diagnostic test. This command is equivalent to selecting Instrument Diagnostics from the Utilities menu and then reviewing the Diagnostic Status.
This query--only command can be issued while diagnostics are still in
progress.
Group
Diagnostics
Related Commands
DIAg:NAMe?, DIAg:NAMe:AREA?, DIAg:NAMe:TEST?
Syntax
DIAg:NAMe:SUBSYS?
Example
DIAg:NAMe:SUBSYS?
This query might return
:DIAG:NAME:SUBSYS ”Acquisition”
This indicates the subsystem name of the current diagnostic test.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 205 --
DIAg:NAMe:TEST?
Description
This query--only command returns the name of the current diagnostic
test. This command is equivalent to selecting Instrument Diagnostics
from the Utilities menu and then reviewing the Diagnostic Status.
This query--only command can be issued while diagnostics are still in
progress.
Group
Diagnostics
Related Commands
DIAg:NAMe?, DIAg:NAMe:AREA?, DIAg:NAMe:SUBSYS?
Syntax
DIAg:NAMe:TEST?
Example
DIAg:NAMe:TEST?
This query might return:
:DIAG:NAME:TEST ”diagDataFormatConf”
This indicates the test name of the current diagnostic test.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 206 --
DIAg:NUMITEMS?
Description
This query--only command returns the number of items on the currently
selected level of test hierarchy, which ranges from 1 through 15. This
command is equivalent to selecting Instrument Diagnostics from the
Utilities menu and then reviewing the Diagnostic Status.
This query--only command can be issued while diagnostics are still in
progress.
Group
Diagnostics
Syntax
DIAg:NUMITEMS?
Example
DIAg:NUMITEMS?
This query might return
:DIAG:NUMITEMS 7
This indicates the number of items on the currently selected level of test
hierarchy.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 207 --
DIAg:RESULts?
Description
This query--only command returns an abbreviated status about the results of the last diagnostic (or test) execution. For a more explanatory
status message, use the DIAg:RESULts:VERBose? query. This command is equivalent to selecting Instrument Diagnostics from the Utilities menu and then reviewing the Diagnostic Status.
This query--only command can be issued while diagnostics are still in
progress.
Group
Diagnostics
Related Commands
DIAg:RESULts:VERBose?
Syntax
DIAg:RESUlts?
Example 1
DIAg:RESULts?
This query might return
:DIAG:RESULTS ”135”
indicating the specific failure code of the first test failure that occurred.
Example 2
DIAg:RESULts?
This query might return
:DIAG:RESULTS ”Pass”
indicating that the last diagnostic test passed.
Example 3
DIAg:RESULts?
This query might return
:DIAG:RESULTS ”*****”
This indicates that the diagnostic test was not run.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 208 --
DIAg:RESULts:VERBose?
Description
This query--only command returns a more explanatory message about
the results of the last diagnostic (or test) execution than the DIAg:RESUlts? query. This command is equivalent to selecting Instrument
Diagnostics from the Utilities menu and then reviewing the Diagnostic
Status.
This query--only command can be issued while diagnostics are still in
progress.
Group
Diagnostics
Related Commands
DIAg:RESUlts?
Syntax
DIAg:RESUlts:VERBose?
Example
DIAg:RESUlts:VERBose?
This query might return:
:DIAG:RESULTS:VERBOSE ”DIAG ABORTED, ERROR 15
in A2D-Dmux 1 interconnects”
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 209 --
DIAg:SELect:ALL
Description
This command (no query form) selects all available diagnostics. This
command is equivalent to selecting Instrument Diagnostics from the
Utilities menu and then choosing ALL from the Subsystem, Area and
Test pull--down lists.
Group
Diagnostics
Related Commands
DIAg:NAMe:AREA?, DIAg:NAMe:SUBSYS?, DIAg:NAMe:TEST?,
DIAg:EXECUTE
Syntax
DIAg:SELect:ALL ALL
Example
DIAg:SELect:ALL ALL
This command selects all available diagnostics.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 210 --
DIAg:SELect:AREA
Description
This command (no query form) selects one of the available areas. This
command is equivalent to selecting Instrument Diagnostics from the
Utilities menu and then selecting an Area from the pull--down list.
Note: This command should be executed only if DIAg:LEVEL is
currently set to AREA.
Group
Diagnostics
Related Commands
DIAg:SELect:SUBSYS, DIAg:SELect:TEST, DIAg:SELect:LAST
Syntax
DIAg:SELect:AREA <NR1>
Argument
H <NR1>
This selects an area by number, which can range from 0 (zero selects
all) through 15 (as specified by DIAg:NUMITEMS).
Example
DIAg:SELect:AREA 1
This command selects Area 1 as the area to be diagnosed.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 211 --
DIAg:SELect:LAST
Description
This command (no query form) selects one or more diagnostic menu
items to be executed via the DIAg:EXECUTE command. If you specify
DIAg:LEVEL SUBSYS, then menu items come from this diagnostic
level and are limited to the value returned by the DIAg:NUMITEMS?
query. For example, specifying DIAg:SELECT:SUBSYS 2 and
DIAg:NUMITEMS 5 indicates that diagnostics will start from subsystem 2 and that you can specify a range from 2 through 5 for DIAg:SELect:LAST.
If you enter:
DIAg:SELect:LAST 2, only subsystem 2 will be executed.
DIAg:SELect:LAST 4, subsystems 2 through 4 will be executed.
Group
Diagnostics
Related Commands
DIAg:EXECUTE, DIAg:LEVEL, DIAg:NAMe:AREA?,
DIAg:NAMe:SUBSYS?, DIAg:NAMe:TEST?, DIAg:NUMITEMS?,
DIAg:SELect:SUBSYS
Syntax
DIAg:SELect:LAST <NR1>
Arguments
H <NR1>
This selects an integer that identifies the number of the last item that
will be executed when the DIAg:EXECUTE command is run.
Example
DIAg:SELect:LAST 2
This command specifies that (based on the previous example) only subsystem 2 will be executed.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 212 --
DIAg:SELect:SUBSYS
Description
This command (no query form) selects one of the available subsystems.
This command is equivalent to selecting Instrument Diagnostics from
the Utilities menu and then choosing a Subsystem from the drop--down
list.
Note: This command should be executed only if DIAg:LEVEL is
currently set to SUBSYS.
Group
Diagnostics
Related Commands
DIAg:SELect:AREA, DIAg:SELect:LAST, DIAg:SELect:TEST
Syntax
DIAg:SELect:SUBSYS <NR1>
Argument
H <NR1>
This selects a subsystem by number, which can range from 0 (zero
selects ALL) through 15 (as specified by DIAg:NUMITEMS).
Example
DIAg:SELect:SUBSYS
This command selects Subsystem 1 as the subsystem to be diagnosed.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 213 --
DIAg:SELect:TEST
Description
This command (no query form) selects one of the available tests. This
command is equivalent to selecting Instrument Diagnostics from the
Utilities menu and then choosing a Test from the drop--down list.
Note: This command should be executed only if DIAg:LEVEL is
currently set to TEST.
Group
Diagnostics
Related Commands
DIAg:SELect:AREA, DIAg:SELect:LAST, DIAg:SELect:SUBSYS
Syntax
DIAg:SELect:TEST <NR1>
Arguments
H <NR1>
This selects a test by number, which can range from 0 (zero selects
ALL) through 15 (as specified by DIAg:NUMITEMS).
Example
DIAg:SELect:TEST 1
This command selects Test 1 as the test to be executed.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 214 --
DIAg:STATE
Description
This command (no query form) changes the oscilloscope operating
state. Depending on the argument, diagnostics capabilities are either
turned on or off. This command is equivalent to opening the
DIAg:STATE dialog (ON) or closing it (OFF).
Group
Diagnostics
Related Commands
TEST:STOP
Syntax
DIAg:STATE {ON|OFF}
Arguments
H ON
This puts the instrument into the state in which diagnostics can be run.
This argument is thrown automatically if either the DIAg:EXECUTE
or DIAg:TEST commands are executed.
H OFF
This disables diagnostics capabilities and returns the oscilloscope to a
normal operating state.
Example
DIAg:STATE OFF
This command turns off diagnostics capabilities and returns the instrument to a normal operating state.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 215 --
DIAg:STOP
Description
This command (no query form) causes diagnostics (or test) execution to
terminate at the end of the next low--level test. This command is equivalent to selecting Instrument Diagnostics from the Utilities menu and
then clicking Abort.
Group
Diagnostics
Related Commands
TEST:STOP
Syntax
DIAg:STOP
Example
DIAg:STOP
This command terminates diagnostics (or test) execution at the end of
the next low--level test.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 216 --
DISplay:CLOCk
Description
This command sets or queries the display of the date and time. This is
equivalent to selecting Display Date & Time from the Display menu.
The query form of this command returns an ON (1) or an OFF (0).
Group
Display Control
Related Commands
DATe, TIMe
Syntax 1
DISplay:CLOCk {ON|OFF|<NR1>}
Syntax 2
DISplay:CLOCk?
Arguments
H ON
This enables display of date and time.
H OFF
This disables display of date and time.
H <NR1>
A 0 disables display of date and time; any other value enables display
of date and time.
Example 1
DISplay:CLOCk ON
This command enables display of date and time.
Example 2
DISplay:CLOCk?
This query might return
:DISPLAY:CLOCK 1
This indicates that the display of date and time is currently enabled.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 217 --
DISplay:COLOr:MATHCOLOr
Description
This command sets or queries the color to be used for math traces, either in the standard palette’s nominal Math color, or according to the
color of the source waveform. This command is equivalent to selecting
Display Setup from the Display menu and then choosing the Colors tab.
Group
Display Control
Related Commands
DISplay:COLOr:PALETTE:IMAGEView, DISplay:COLOr:PALETTE:RECORDView
Syntax 1
DISplay:COLOr:MATHCOLOr {DEFAULT|INHERIT}
Syntax 2
DISplay:COLOr:MATHCOLOr?
Arguments
H DEFAULT
This sets color math traces in nominal palette math color, which is
red.
H INHERIT
This sets color math traces in the source waveform color. Math waveforms are drawn in the same color as their primary source waveform.
Example 1
DISplay:COLOr:MATHCOLOr DEFAULT
This command sets the color math traces in the nominal palette math
color.
Example 2
DISplay:COLOr:MATHCOLOr?
This query might return:
:DISPLAY:COLOR:MATHCOLOR INHERIT
This indicates that the primary source waveform color is used for each
math trace.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 218 --
DISplay:COLOr:PALEtte:IMAGEView
Description
This command sets or queries the color palette for all image view (DPO
and WfmDB) traces.
Group
Display Control
Syntax 1
DISplay:COLOr:PALEtte:IMAGEView {NORMal|MONOGREEN|MONOGRAY|TEMPErature|SPECTral|USEr}
Syntax 2
DISplay:COLOr:PALEtte:IMAGEView?
Arguments
H NORMal
This colors traces according to their channel. This is the default color
palette.
H MONOGREEN
This colors traces green, emulating a traditional oscilloscope color
palette.
H MONOGRAY
This colors traces gray, emulating a monochrome TDS instrument.
H TEMPErature
All traces share a multicolored palette, where ”intensity” is represented by hue; blue for least frequently hit, red for most frequently
hit.
H SPECTral
All traces share a multicolored palette, where ”intensity” is represented by hue; red for least frequently hit, blue for most frequentlyhit.
H USEr
All traces share a user--defined palette.
Example 1
DISplay:COLOr:PALEtte:IMAGEView MONOGRAY
This command sets the palette for all display types.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 219 --
Example 2
DISplay:COLOr:PALEtte:IMAGEView?
This query might return
:DISPLAY:COLOR:PALETTE:IMAGEVIEW NORMAL
indicating that the Normal color palette is currently selected, which
colors traces according to their channel.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 220 --
DISplay:COLOr:PALEtte:RECORDView
Description
This command sets or queries the color palette for all record view (non
image view) waveforms.
Group
Display Control
Syntax 1
DISplay:COLOr:PALEtte:RECORDView {NORMal|MONOGREEN|MONOGRAY|TEMPerature|SPECTral|USEr}
Syntax 2
DISplay:COLOr:PALEtte:RECORDView?
Arguments
H NORMal
This colors traces according to their channel. This is the default color
palette.
H MONOGREEN
This colors traces green, emulating a traditional oscilloscope color
palette.
H MONOGRAY
This colors traces gray, emulating a monochrome TDS instrument.
H TEMPErature
All traces share a multi--colored palette, where ”intensity” is represented by hue; blue for least frequently hit, red for most frequently
hit.
H SPECTral
All traces share a multi--colored palette, where ”intensity” is represented by hue; red for least frequently hit, blue for most frequently
hit.
H USEr
All traces share a user--defined palette.
Example 1
DISplay:COLOr:PALEtte:RECORDView MONOGRAY
This command sets the palette for all display types.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 221 --
Example 2
DISplay:COLOr:PALEtte:RECORDView?
This query might return
:DISPLAY:COLOR:PALETTE:RECORDVIEW NORMAL
indicating that the Normal color palette is currently selected, which
colors traces according to their channel.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 222 --
DISplay:COLOR:PALEtte:USEr:CARet
Description
This command sets or queries the caret color for the user palette. It assigns the HUE, light, Saturation (HLS) triplet used for the caret color.
The caret is the solid, inverted delta positioned on the top graticule line,
which indicates the trigger position within the waveform record.
Group
Display Control
Syntax 1
DISplay:COLOr:PALEtte:USEr:CARet
<NR1>,<NR1>,<NR1>
Syntax 2
DISplay:COLOr:PALEtte:USEr:CARet?
Arguments
H <NR1>
Hue. Range of 0 to 360.
H <NR1>
Lightness. Range of 0 to 100.
H <NR1>
Saturation. Range of 0 to 100.
Example 1
DISplay:COLOr:PALEtte:USEr:CARet 330,75,100
This command sets the caret color hue to 330, the lightness to 75, and
the saturation to 100.
Example 2
DISplay:COLOr:PALEtte:USEr:CARet?
This query might return
:DISPLAY:COLOR:PALETTE:USER:CARET 250, 85, 90
indicating that the color hue is set at 250, the lightness is set to 85, and
the saturation is set to 90.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 223 --
DISplay:COLOr:PALEtte:USEr:CH<x>
Description
This command sets or queries the hue--lightness--saturation (HLS) triplet to be used for the specified channel color for the user palette. The
channel is specified by x. The value of x can range from 1 through 4 for
four--channel instruments or 1 through 2 for two--channel instruments.
Group
Display Control
Syntax 1
DISplay:COLOr:PALEtte:USEr:CH{1|2|3|4}
<NR1>,<NR1>,<NR1>
Syntax 2
DISplay:COLOr:PALEtte:USEr:CH{1|2|3|4}?
Arguments
H <NR1>
Hue. Range of 0 to 360.
H <NR1>
Lightness. Range of 0 to 100.
H <NR1>
Saturation. Range of 0 to 100.
Example 1
DISplay:COLOr:PALEtte:USEr:CH1 330,75,100
This command sets the channel 1 color for the user palette to 330, 75,
or 100.
Example 2
DISplay:COLOr:PALEtte:USEr:CH2?
This query might return
:DISPLAY:COLOR:PALETTE:USER:CH2 325,65,100
indicating that channel 2 color for the user palette is set at 325 for hue,
the set to 65 for lightness, and 100 for saturation.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 224 --
DISplay:COLOr:PALEtte:USEr:GRAticule
Description
This command sets or queries the user palette graticule color. It assigns
the hue--lightness--saturation triplet to be used for the graticule color for
the user palette.
Group
Display Control
Syntax 1
DISplay:COLOr:PALEtte:USEr:GRAticule
<NR1>,<NR1>,<NR1>
Syntax 2
DISplay:COLOr:PALEtte:USEr:GRAticule?
Arguments
H <NR1>
Hue. Range of 0 to 360.
H <NR1>
Lightness. Range of 0 to 100.
H <NR1>
Saturation. Range of 0 to 100.
Example 1
DISplay:COLOr:PALEtte:USEr:GRAticule
330,75,100
This command sets the graticule color for the user palette.
Example 2
DISplay:COLOr:PALEtte:USEr:GRAticule?
This query might return
:DISPLAY:COLOR:PALETTE:USEr:GRATICULE
300,60,85
indicating that the user palette graticule color is assigned a hue of 300,
a lightness of 60, and a saturation of 85.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 225 --
DISplay:COLOr:PALEtte:USEr:HIStogram
Description
This command sets or queries the user palette histogram color. It assigns the hue--saturation--lightness (HLS) triplet to be used for the histogram color for the user palette.
Group
Display Control
Syntax 1
DISplay:COLOr:PALEtte:USEr:HIStogram
<NR1>,<NR1>,<NR1>
Syntax 2
DISplay:COLOr:PALEtte:USEr:HIStogram?
Arguments
H <NR1>
Hue. Range of 0 to 360.
H <NR1>
Lightness. Range of 0 to 100.
H <NR1>
Saturation. Range of 0 to 100.
Example 1
DISplay:COLOr:PALEtte:USEr:HIStogram
330,75,100
This command sets the histogram color for the user palette.
Example 2
DISplay:COLOr:PALEtte:USEr:HIStogram?
This query might return
:DISPLAY:COLOR:PALETTE:USEr:HISTOGRAM
330,50,90
indicating that the user palette histogram color is assigned a hue of 330,
a lightness of 50, and a saturation of 90.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 226 --
DISplay:COLOr:PALEtte:USEr:MASK
Description
This command sets or queries the user palette mask color. It assigns the
hue--lightness--saturation (HLS) color for the mask color for the user
palette.
Group
Display Control
Syntax 1
DISplay:COLOr:PALEtte:USEr:MASK
<NR1>,<NR1>,<NR1>
Syntax 2
DISplay:COLOr:PALEtte:USEr:MASK?
Arguments
H <NR1>
Hue. Range of 0 to 360.
H <NR1>
Lightness. Range of 0 to 100.
H <NR1>
Saturation. Range of 0 to 100.
Example 1
DISplay:COLOr:PALEtte:USEr:MASK 330,75,100
This command sets the mask color for the user palette.
Example 2
DISplay:COLOr:PALEtte:USEr:MASK?
This query might return
:DISPLAY:COLOR:PALETTE:USEr:MASK 330,50,90
indicating that the user palette mask color is assigned a hue of 330, a
lightness of 50, and a saturation of 90.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 227 --
DISplay:COLOr:PALEtte:USEr:MASKHighlight
Description
This command sets or queries the user palette mask hits color. It assigns
the hue--lightness--saturation (HLS) triplet to be used for the mask highlight (mask hits) color for the user palette.
Group
Display Control
Syntax 1
DISplay:COLOr:PALEtte:USEr:MASKHighlight
<NR1>,<NR1>,<NR1>
Syntax 2
DISplay:COLOr:PALEtte:USEr:MASK:Highlight?
Arguments
H <NR1>
Hue. Range of 0 to 360.
H <NR1>
Lightness. Range of 0 to 100.
H <NR1>
Saturation. Range of 0 to 100.
Example 1
DISplay:COLOr:PALEtte:USEr:MASK:Highlight
330,75,100
This command sets the mask highlight (mask hits) color for the user
palette.
Example 2
DISplay:COLOr:PALEtte:USEr:MASK:Highlight?
This query might return
:DISPLAY:COLOR:PALETTE:USEr:MASK:HIGHLIGHT
325,65,100
indicating that the user palette mask highlight color is assigned a hue of
325, a lightness of 65, and a saturation of 100.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 228 --
DISplay:COLOr:PALEtte:USEr:MATH<x>
Description
This command sets or queries the user palette math colors. It assigns
the hue--lightness--saturation (HLS) triplet to be used for the specified
math waveform for the user palette. The math waveform is specified by
x. The value of x can range from 1 through 4 for four--channel instruments or 1 through 2 for two--channel instruments.
Group
Display Control
Syntax 1
DISplay:COLOr:PALEtte:USEr:MATH<x>
<NR1>,<NR1>,<NR1>
Syntax 2
DISplay:COLOr:PALEtte:USEr:MATH<x>?
Arguments
H <NR1>
Hue. Range of 0 to 360.
H <NR1>
Lightness. Range of 0 to 100.
H <NR1>
Saturation. Range of 0 to 100.
Example 1
DISplay:COLOr:PALEtte:USEr:MATH2 330,75,100
This command sets the color of the specified math 2 waveform for the
user palette.
Example 2
DISplay:COLOr:PALEtte:USEr:MATH2?
This query might return
:DISPLAY:COLOR:PALETTE:USEr:MATH2 345,75,98
indicating that the user palette color of the math 2 waveform is set to a
hue of 345, a lightness of 75, and a saturation of 98.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 229 --
DISplay:COLOr:PALEtte:USEr:REF<x>
Description
This command sets or queries the user palette reference colors assigned
to reference waveforms. It assigns the hue--lightness--saturation (HLS)
triplet to be used for the specified reference waveform color for the user
palette. The reference waveform is specified by x. The value of x can
range from 1 through 4 for four--channel instruments or 1 through 2 for
two--channel instruments.
Group
Display Control
Syntax 1
DISplay:COLOr:PALEtte:USEr:REF<x>
<NR1>,<NR1>,<NR1>
Syntax 2
DISplay:COLOr:PALEtte:USEr:REF<x>?
Arguments
H <NR1>
Hue. Range of 0 to 360.
H <NR1>
Lightness. Range of 0 to 100.
H <NR1>
Saturation. Range of 0 to 100.
Example 1
DISplay:COLOr:PALEtte:USEr:REF1 330,75,100
This command sets the reference waveform 1 color for the user palette.
Example 2
DISplay:COLOr:PALEtte:USEr:REF2?
This query might return
:DISPLAY:COLOR:PALETTE:USEr:REF2 300,90,100
indicating that the user palette color for reference waveform 2 is assigned a hue of 300, and lightness of 90, and a saturation of 100.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 230 --
DISplay:COLOR:PALEtte:USEr?
Description
This command queries the color palette for group settings. It outputs
settings from the DISPlay CARET, CH<x>, GRATICULE, HISTOGRAM, MASK, MASKHIGHLIGHT, MATH<x>, and REF<x> commands.
Group
Display Control
Syntax
DISplay:COLOr:PALEtte:USEr?
Example 1
DISplay:COLOR:PALETTE:USEr?
This query might return
:DISPLAY:COLOR:PALETTE:USER:GRATICULE
165,50,15;CH1 180,50,100;CH2 300 50,100;CH3
60,50,100;CH4 240,50,100;REF1 0,90,0;REF2
0,90,100;REF3 60,90,100;REF4 240,90,100;MATH1
160,50,100;MATH2 40,60,100;MATH3
120,60,100;MATH4 195,50,100;HISTOGRAM
320,50,100;CARET 150,50,100;MASK 0,25,75;MASKHIGHLIGHT 140,50,100
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 231 --
DISplay:COLOr:REFCOLOr
Description
This command sets or queries the color to be used for reference traces,
either in the standard palette’s nominal REF color or according to the
color of the source waveform. This command is equivalent to selecting
Display Setup from the Display menu and then choosing the Colors tab.
Group
Display Control
Related Commands
DISplay:INTENSITy:WAVEform:IMAGEView, DISplay:
INTENSITy:WAVEform:RECORDView
Syntax 1
DISplay:COLOr:REFCOLOr {DEFAULT|INHERIT}
Syntax 2
DISplay:COLOr:REFCOLOr?
Arguments
H DEFAULT
This assigns color reference traces in nominal palette reference color,
which is off--white.
H INHERIT
This assigns color reference traces in the source waveform color.
Example 1
DISplay:COLOr:REFCOLOr DEFAULT
This command assigns color reference traces in nominal palette reference color, which is off--white.
Example 2
DISplay:COLOr:REFCOLOr?
This query might return:
:DISPLAY:COLOR:REFCOLOR INHERIT
This indicates that source waveform color is used for reference traces.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 232 --
DISplay:COLOr?
Description
This query--only command returns the settings from the PALETTE,
MATHCOLOR and REFCOLOR commands. This is equivalent to selecting Colors from the Display menu.
Group
Display Control
Syntax
DISplay:COLOr?
Arguments
None
Example
DISplay:COLOr?
This query might return:
:DISPLAY:COLOR:PALETTE:IMAGEVIEW TEMPERATURE;RECORDVIEW NORMAL;USER:GRATICULE
165,50,15;CH1 180,50,100;CH2 300,50,100;CH3
60,50,100;CH4 240,50,100;REF1 0,90,0;REF2
0,90,100;REF3 60,90,100;REF4 240,90,100;MATH1
160,50,100;MATH2 40,60,100;MATH3
120,60,100;MATH4 195,50,100;HISTOGRAM
320,50,100;CARET 150,50,100;MASK 0,25,75;MASKHIGHLIGHT 140,50,100;:DISPLAY:COLOR:MATHCOLOR
DEFAULT;REFCOLOR DEFAULT
indicating that the primary source waveform color is used for each math
trace.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 233 --
DISplay:FILTer
Description
This command sets or queries the type of interpolation to use for the
display. Filtering only applies to normal--mode acquisition. The DISplay:FILTer command also provides selection for acquisition interpolation type. This command is equivalent to selecting Waveform Interpolation from the Display menu.
Group
Display Control
Syntax 1
DISplay:FILTer {LINEAr|SINX}
Syntax 2
DISplay:FILTer?
Arguments
H LINEAr
This specifies linear interpolation, where acquired points are connected with straight lines.
H SINX
This specifies sin(x)/x interpolation, where acquired points are fit to a
curve.
Example 1
DISplay:FILTer SINX
This command specifies sine--curve interpolation, when magnifying
waveforms.
Example 2
DISplay:FILTer?
This query might return:
:DISPLAY:FILTER LINEAR
This indicates that straight--line interpolation is specified for magnifying waveforms.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 234 --
DISplay:FORMat
Description
This command sets or queries the display format. This command is
equivalent to selecting Format from the Display menu.
Group
Display Control
Syntax 1 (Two--channel instruments)
DISplay:FORMat {YT|XY}
Syntax 2 (Four--channel instruments)
DISplay:FORMat {YT|XY|XYZ}
Syntax 3
DISplay:FORMat?
Arguments
H YT
This sets the display to a voltage versus time format and is the default
mode.
H XY
This argument displays one waveform against another. The source
pairs that make up an XY trace are predefined and are listed in the
following table. Selecting one source causes its corresponding source
to be implicitly selected, producing a single trace from the two input
waveforms.
XY Format Pairs
X--Axis Source
Y--Axis Source
Ch 1
Ch 2
Ch 3
(Four--channel models only)
Ch 4
(Four--channel models only)
Ref 1
Ref 2
Ref 3
(Four--channel models only)
Ref 4
(Four--channel models only)
H XYZ
This argument is available only for four--channel instruments. The
argument combines channel 1 and channel 2 for X and Y coordinates
and uses channel 3 to provide the intensity value for the sample. XYZ
groups channels 1, 2 and 3 to form a single trace. Other channel,
math, and reference waveforms are turned off.
Note: Selecting XY or XYZ forces a switch to FASTAcq mode.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 235 --
Example 1
DISplay:FORMat YT
This command selects a voltage versus time format for the display.
Example 2
DISplay:FORMat?
This query might return:
:DISPLAY:FORMAT XYZ
This is for the display format, indicating that the display is in the XYZ
mode.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 236 --
DISplay:GRATicule
Description
This command selects or queries the type of graticule that is displayed.
This command is equivalent to selecting Graticule Style from the Display menu.
Group
Display Control
Syntax 1
DISplay:GRAticule {CROSSHair|FRAme|FULl|GRId|IRE|NTSC|MV|PAL}
Syntax 2
DISplay:GRAticule?
Arguments
H CROSSHair
This specifies a frame and cross hairs.
H FRAme
This specifies a frame only.
H FULl
This specifies a frame, a grid and cross hairs.
H GRId
This specifies a frame and grid only.
H IRE
This specifies an IRE video graticule, and sets the vertical scale to
143 mV per division.
H NTSC
This specifies an INTSC video graticule (same as the IRE graticule),
and sets the vertical scale to 143 mV per division.
H MV
This specifies an mV video graticule and sets the vertical scale to 143
mV per division. This graticule is used to measure PAL standard video signals.
H PAL
This specifies a PAL video graticule (same as the mV graticule) and
sets the vertical scale to 143 mV per division. This graticule is used
to measure PAL standard video signals.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 237 --
Example 1
DISplay:GRAticule FRAme
This command sets the graticule type to display the frame only.
Example 2
DISplay:GRAticule?
This query might return:
:DISPLAY:GRATICULE FULL
This indicates that all graticule elements are selected.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 238 --
DISplay:INTENSITy:AUTOBright
Description
This command enables automatic, ongoing adjustment of the intensity
to display images. The query form returns a 1 (ON) or a 0 (OFF). This
command is equivalent to selecting Display Setup from the Display
menu and choosing the Appearance tab.
Group
Display Control
Related Commands
DISplay:INTENSITy:WAVEform:IMAGEView, DISplay:INTENSITy:WAVEform:RECORDView
Syntax 1
DISplay:INTENSITy:AUTOBright {OFF|ON|<NR1>}
Syntax 2
DISplay:INTENSITy:AUTOBright?
Arguments
H OFF
This argument allows the system to use the manually set waveform
intensity value against an absolute scale. The display simulates the
appearance of signals on an analog oscilloscope. Waveforms that trigger more frequently appear brighter than waveforms that trigger less
frequently.
H ON
This argument allows the system to adjust the settings automatically
to provide a visible waveform.
H <NR1>
A 0 allows the system to use the manually--set waveform intensity
value against an absolute scale; any other value allows the system to
adjust settings.
Example 1
DISplay:INTENSITy:AUTOBright ON
This command allows the system to adjust settings using the waveform
intensity value and the pixel intensity found in the acquired waveform.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 239 --
Example 2
DISplay:INTENSITy:AUTOBright?
This query might return:
:DISPLAY:INTENSITY:AUTOBRIGHT 1
This indicates that system adjustment of waveform intensity is enabled.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 240 --
DISplay:INTENSITy:SCREENSAVER
Description
This command sets and queries the screen saver features of the MS
Windows operating system. When enabled, a delay timer (set in seconds by the DISplay:INTENSITy:SCREENSAVERDELAY command)
begins counting down. When this screen saver delay times out, the
screen low--power mode engages. This causes the LCD backlight to
switch off and clears both waveform and text displays. Any control
(front panel, mouse or keyboard) or touch screen activity resets the
delay timer and restores normal instrument display. This command is
equivalent to selecting LCD Save Enabled from the Display menu.
Group
Display Control
Related Commands
DISplay:INTENSITy:SCREENSAVERDELAY
Syntax 1
DISplay:INTENSITy:SCREENSAVER {OFF|ON|<NR1>}
Syntax 2
DISplay:INTENSITy:SCREENSAVER?
Arguments
H OFF
This disables the screen saver feature.
H ON
This enables the screen saver feature after the specified screen saver
delay seconds of control activity have passed.
H <NR1>
A 0 disables the screen saver feature; a 1 enables the screen saver
protection features.
Example 1
DISplay:INTENSITy:SCREENSAVER OFF
This command disables the screen saver feature.
Example 2
DISplay:INTENSITy:SCREENSAVER?
This query might return
:DISPLAY:INTENSITY:SCREENSAVER 0
This indicates that the screen saver feature is disabled.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 241 --
DISplay:INTENSITy:SCREENSAVERDELAY
Description
This command sets or queries the timeout of the screen saver features
of the display system. When enabled (after the specified screen saver
delay seconds of control activity and when the screen saver feature is
enabled) the instrument activates the screen saver feature. Normal instrument displays are restored and the delay timer is reset upon any
control activity. The instrument continues to acquire and process data
normally while in screen saver mode; only the display is disabled. This
command is equivalent to selecting Objects from the Display menu and
entering a time in the Delay field of the LCD Backlight Timeout control.
Group
Display Control
Related Commands
DISplay:INTENSITy:SCREENSAVER
Syntax 1
DISplay:INTENSITy:SCREENSAVERDELAY {<NR1>}
Syntax 2
DISplay:INTENSITy:SCREENSAVERDELAY?
Arguments
H <NR1>
This sets the screen saver timeout, which ranges from 30 through
28800 seconds.
Example 1
DISplay:INTENSITy:SCREENSAVERDELAY 120
This command sets the screen saver delay feature to activate after 120
seconds of control inactivity.
Example 2
DISplay:INTENSITy:SCREENSAVERDELAY?
This query might return:
:DISPLAY:INTENSITY:SCREENSAVERDELAY 300
This indicates that the screen saver delay feature is set to 300 seconds
of control inactivity.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 242 --
DISplay:INTENSITy:WAVEform:IMAGEView
Description
This command sets or queries the saturation level for image view waveforms.
Group
Display Control
Related Commands
DISplay:INTENSITY:WAVEform:RECORDView, DISplay:INTENSITy:AUTOBright
Syntax 1
DISplay:INTENSITy:WAVEform:IMAGEView <NR1>
Syntax 2
DISplay:INTENSITy:WAVEform:IMAGEView?
Arguments
H <NR1>
This is the waveform saturation and ranges from 10 to 100 percent.
Example 1
DISplay:INTENSITy:WAVEform:IMAGEView 100
This command sets the image view waveform saturation to 100 percent.
Example 2
DISplay:INTENSITy:WAVEform:IMAGEView?
This query might return
:DISPLAY:INTENSITY:WAVEFORM:IMAGEVIEW 60.0000
indicating that the saturation level of the image view waveforms is currently set to 60 percent.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 243 --
DISplay:INTENSITy:WAVEform:RECORDView
Description
This command sets or queries the saturation level for record view waveforms.
Group
Display Control
Related Commands
DISplay:INTENSITY:WAVEform:IMAGEView, DISplay:INTENSITy:AUTOBright
Syntax 1
DISplay:INTENSITy:WAVEform:RECORDView <NR1>
Syntax 2
DISplay:INTENSITy:WAVEform:RECORDView?
Arguments
H <NR1>
This is the waveform saturation and ranges from 10 to 100 percent.
Example 1
DISplay:INTENSITy:WAVEform:RECORDView 100
This command sets the record view waveform saturation to 100 percent.
Example 2
DISplay:INTENSITy:WAVEform:RECORDView?
This query might return
:DISPLAY:INTENSITY:WAVEFORM:RECORDVIEW 60.0000
indicating that the saturation of the record view waveforms is currently
set to 60 percent.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 244 --
DISplay:INTENSITy?
Description
This query--only command returns the waveform saturation level, autobright state, and screen saver settings. This command is equivalent to
selecting Display Setup from the Display menu and choosing the Appearance tab.
Group
Display Control
Related Commands
DISplay:INTENSITy:AUTPBright, DISplay:INTENSITy:WAVEform:IMAGEView, DISplay:INTENSITy:WAVEform:RECORDView,
DISplay:INTENSITy:SCREENSAVER, DISplay:INTENSITy:SCREENSAVERDELAY
Syntax
DISplay:INTENSITy?
Arguments
None
Example
DISplay:INTENSITy?
This query might return:
:DISPLAY:INTENSITY:WAVEFORM:IMAGEVIEW
75.0000;RECORDVIEW 10.0000;:DISPLAY:INTENSITY:AUTOBRIGHT 1;SCREENSAVER 1;SCREENSAVERDELAY
28800
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 245 --
DISplay:PERSistence
Description
This command sets or queries the persistence aspect of the display. This
affects the display only and is equivalent to selecting Display Persistence from the Display menu.
Group
Display Control
Related Commands
DISplay:VARPersist
Syntax 1
DISplay:PERSistence {OFF|INFPersist|VARPersist}
Syntax 2
DISplay:PERSistence?
Arguments
H OFF
This disables the persistence aspect of the display.
H INFPersist
This sets a display mode where any pixels, once touched by samples,
remain set until cleared by a mode change.
VARPersist
This sets a display mode where set pixels are gradually dimmed.
Example 1
DISplay:PERSistence VARPersist
This command sets the persistence aspect of the display to fade set pixels according to the time set in the DISplay:VARPersist command.
Example 2
DISplay:PERSistence?
This query might return:
:DISPLAY:PERSISTENCE OFF
This indicates that the persistence aspect of the display is disabled.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 246 --
DISplay:PERSistence:RESET
Description
This command controls the clearing of persistence data.
Group
Display Control
Related Commands
DISplay:PERSistence, DISplay:VARPersist
Syntax
DISplay:PERSistence:RESET
Example
DISplay:PERSistence:RESET
This command clears the display of persistence data.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 247 --
DISplay:SCREENTExt:LABel<x>:NAMe
Description
This command sets the text to be displayed for a given label. The label
is specified by <x>. The value of <x> can range from 1 through 8.
Group
Display Control
Related Commands
DISplay:SCREENTExt?, DISplay:SCREENTExt:STATE, DISplay:SCREENTExt:LABel<x>?, DISplay:SCREENTExt:LABel<x>:XPOS, DISplay:SCREENTExt:LABel<x>:YPOS
Syntax
DISplay:SCREENTExt:LABel<x>:NAMe <String>
Arguments
H <String>
This argument is the text to be displayed for a given label.
Example 1
:DISplay:SCREENTExt:LABel2:NAMe ”THIS IS
SCREEN TEXT”
This command sets the screen text for label 2 to THIS IS SCREEN
TEXT.
Example 2
:DISplay:SCREENTExt:LABel2:NAMe?
This query might return
:DISPLAY:SCREENTEXT:LABEL2:NAME ”MyWaveform”
indicating that the label 2 screen text is set to MyWaveform.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 248 --
DISplay:SCREENTExt:LABel<x>:XPOS
Description
This command sets the horizontal position of a given screen text label.
The label is specified by x. The value of x can range from 1 through 8.
Group
Display Control
Related Commands
DISplay:SCREENTExt?, DISplay:SCREENTExt:STATE, DISplay:SCREENTExt:LABel<x>?, DISplay:SCREENTExt:LABel<x>:NAMe, DISplay:SCREENTExt:LABel<x>:YPOS
Syntax
<NR1>
Arguments
H <NR1>
This argument sets the horizontal position of the screen text label. The
value can range from 0 to 500.
Example 1
DISplay:SCREENTExt:LABel3:XPOS 100
This command sets the horizontal position of label 3 to 100.
Example 2
DISplay:SCREENTExt:LABel3:XPOS?
This query might return.
:DISPLAY:SCREENTEXT:LABEL3:XPOS 250
indicating that screen label 3 is horizontally positioned to 250 (midscreen horizontally).
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 249 --
DISplay:SCREENTExt:LABel<x>:YPOS
Description
This command sets the vertical position of a given label. The label is
specified by x. The value of x can range from 1 through 8.
Group
Display Control
Related Commands
DISplay:SCREENTExt?, DISplay:SCREENTExt:STATE, DISplay:SCREENTExt:LABel<x>?,
DISplay:SCREENTExt:LABel<x>:NAMe, DISplay:SCREENTExt:LABel<x>:XPOS
Syntax
<NR1>
Argument
H <NR1>
This argument sets the vertical position of the screen text label. The
value can range from 0 to 385.
Example 1
DISplay:SCREENTExt:LABel3:YPOS 100
This command sets the vertical position of label 3 to 100.
Example 2
DISPLAY:SCREENTEXT:LABEL3:YPOS?
This query might return
:DISPLAY:SCREENTEXT:LABEL3:YPOS 192
indicating that screen label 3 is vertically positioned to 192 (midscreen
vertically).
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 250 --
DISplay:SCREENTExt:LABel<x>?
Description
This command returns the screen text setting for a given label. Specifically, it provides the name, horizontal position (XPOS), and vertical
position (YPOS).
Group
Display Control
Related Commands
DISplay:SCREENTExt?, DISplay:SCREENTExt:STATE, DISplay:SCREENTExt:LABel<x>:NAMe, DISplay:SCREENTExt:LABel<x>:XPOS, DISplay:SCREENTExt:LABel<x>:YPOS
Syntax
DISplay:SCREENTExt:LABel<x>?
Example
DISplay:SCREENTExt:LABel3??
This query might return
:DISPLAY:SCREENTEXT:LABEL3:NAME ”THIS IS
SCREEN TEXT”; :XPOS 100; :YPOS 35
indicating that the name of label 3 is THIS IS SCREEN TEXT, and the
label is position at 100 horizontally and at 35 vertically.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 251 --
DISplay:SCREENTExt:STATE
Description
This command controls the display of screen text.
Group
Display Control
Related Commands
DISplay:SCREENTExt?, DISplay:SCREENTExt:LABel<x>?, DISplay:SCREENTExt:LABel<x>:NAMe, DISplay:SCREENTExt:LABel<x>:XPOS, DISplay:SCREENTExt:LABel<x>:YPOS
Syntax
DISplay:SCREENTExt:STATE {ON|OFF|<NR1>}
Arguments
H ON
This turns on the display of screen text.
H OFF
This turns off the display of screen text.
H <NR1>
A 0 disables screen text; any other value enables screen text.
Example 1
DISplay:SCREENTExt:STATE ON
This command turns the screen text display on.
Example 2
DISplay:SCREENTExt:STATE?
This query might return
:DISPLAY:SCREENTEXT:STATE 1
indicating that the screen text is displayed.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 252 --
DISplay:SCREENTExt?
Description
This command returns all screen text settings.
Group
Display Control
Related Commands
DISplay:SCREENTExt:STATE, DISplay:SCREENTExt:LABel<x>?,
DISplay:SCREENTExt:LABel<x>:NAMe, DISplay:SCREENTExt:LABel<x>:XPOS, DISplay:SCREENTExt:LABel<x>:YPOS
Syntax
DISplay:SCREENTExt?
Example 1
DISPLAY:SCREENTEXT?
This command might reply:
:DISPLAY:SCREENTEXT:STATE 0;LABEL1:NAME
””;XPOS 100;YPOS 5;:DISPLAY:SCREENTEXT:LABEL2:NAME ””;XPOS 100;YPOS 20;:DISPLAY:SCREENTEXT:LABEL3:NAME ””;;XPOS 100;YPOS 35;:DISPLAY:SCREENTEXT:LABEL4:NAME ””;XPOS 100;YPOS
50;:DISPLAY:SCREENTEXT:LABEL5:NAME ””;XPOS
100;YPOS 65;:DISPLAY:SCREENTEXT:LABEL6:NAME
””;XPOS 100;YPOS 80;:DISPLAY:SCREENTEXT:LABEL7:NAME ””;XPOS 100;YPOS 95;:DISPLAY:SCREENTEXT:LABEL8:NAME ””;XPOS 100;YPOS 110
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 253 --
DISplay:SHOWREmote
Description
This command sets or queries the state of the remote display feature
and is equivalent to selecting Display Remote from the Display menu.
The query form of this command returns ON (1) or OFF (0).
This feature allows you to view waveforms and other graticule data on
a remote display using remote control software like VNC (Virtual Network Computing) or Symantec pcAnywhere.
Group
Display Control
Syntax 1
DISplay:SHOWREmote {ON|OFF|NR1}
Syntax 2
DISplay:SHOWREmote?
Arguments
H ON
This enables the remote display of waveform and other graticule data.
H OFF
This disables the remote display of waveform and other graticule data.
H NR1
A 0 disables remote display of waveform and other graticule data; any
other value enables remote display of waveform and other graticule
data.
Example 1
DISplay:SHOWREmote ON
This command enables remote display of waveform and other graticule
data.
Example 2
DISplay:SHOWREmote?
This query might return:
:DISPLAY:SHOWREMOTE 1
This indicates that the remote display of waveform and other graticule
data is currently enabled.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 254 --
DISplay:STYle
Description
This command sets or queries how the data is displayed for normal and
FastAcq modes. This command is equivalent to selecting Display Style
from the Display menu and choosing a style.
Group
Display Control
Syntax 1
DISplay:STYle {VECtors|DOTs|INTENSIFied}
Syntax 2
DISplay:STYle?
Arguments
H VECtors
This connects adjacent data points. New points immediately replace
old ones.
H DOTs
This displays individual data points. New points immediately replace
old ones.
H INTENSIFied
This causes the display to show interpolated samples with dark spaces
(Only the ”real” samples are displayed).
When FastAcq mode is enabled, intensified samples display as dots.
However, turning off FastAcq mode causes the display style to snap
back to its previous setting.
Example 1
DISplay:STYle VECtors
This command sets the display to connect adjacent data points.
Example 2
DISplay:STYle?
This query might return:
:DISPLAY:STYLE INTENSIFIED
This indicates that interpolated samples are not displayed.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 255 --
DISplay:TRIGBar
Description
This command controls or queries the display of the trigger--level indicator bar/s. Indicator bars show where the trigger voltage level is set.
The instrument will only display the bar if the associated trigger source
is also displayed. If both a main and a delayed trigger are displayed,
then two bars will appear. One will accompany each source. If a logic
trigger is selected, then multiple bars may appear. One will show the
upper threshold and one will show the lower threshold. This command
is equivalent to selecting Display Setup from the Display menu and
then choosing the Objects tab.
Group
Display Control
Syntax 1
DISplay:TRIGBar {OFF|SHORt|LONG}
Syntax 2
DISplay:TRIGBar?
Arguments
H OFF
This removes the trigger indicator bar from the display.
H SHORt
This displays, as the indicator, a short arrow at the right side of the
graticule for each displayed trigger signal.
H LONG
This displays, as the indicator, a horizontal line across the width of the
graticule for each displayed trigger signal.
Example 1
DISplay:TRIGBar LONG
This command sets the display to show a long trigger indicator bar (or
bars).
Example 2
DISplay:TRIGBar?
This query might return:
:DISPLAY:TRIGBAR OFF,
This indicates that the indicator bar is removed from the display.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 256 --
DISplay:VARpersist
Description
This command sets or queries persistence decay time, which is the
approximate decay time for a freshly struck persistence sample. This
command is equivalent to selecting Display Setup from the Display
menu, selecting the Appearance tab, and then entering the desired Persist Time.
Group
Display Control
Related Commands
DISplay:PERSistence
Syntax 1
DISplay:VARpersist <NR3>
Syntax 2
DISplay:VARpersist?
Arguments
H <NR3>
This indicates the persistence decay time setting in numeric seconds.
The persistence time ranges from 32 ms to 10 s.
Example 1
DISplay:VARpersist 5E-1
This command sets the persistence decay time to 500 ms.
Example 2
DISplay:VARpersist?
This query might return:
:DISPLAY:VARPERSIST 5.0000E-01
This indicates that persistence decay time is currently set to 500 ms.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 257 --
DISplay?
Description
This query--only command returns the current Display settings. This
command is equivalent to selecting Display Setup from the Display
menu and then viewing the contents of each tab.
Group
Display Control
Syntax
DISplay?
Example
DISplay?
This query might return
:DISPLAY:CLOCK 1;COLOR:PALETTE:IMAGEVIEW MONOGREEN;
RECORDVIEW TEMPERATURE;USER:GRATICULE
165,50,15;CH1 180,50,100;
CH2 300,50,100;CH3 60,50,100;CH4
240,50,100;REF1 0,90,0;
REF2 0,90,100;REF3 60,90,100;REF4
240,90,100;MATH1 160,50,100;
MATH2 40,60,100;MATH3 120,60,100;MATH4
195,50,100;
HISTOGRAM 320,50,100;CARET 150,50,100;MASK
0,25,75;MASKHIGHLIGHT 140,50,100;:DISPLAY:COLOR:MATHCOLOR DEFAULT;REFCOLOR DEFAULT;
:DISPLAY:FILTER SINX;FORMAT YT;GRATICULE
IRE;INTENSITY
:WAVEFORM:IMAGEVIEW 81.0000;RECORDVIEW
81.0000;:DISPLAY
:INTENSITY:AUTOBRIGHT 0;SCREENSAVER 1;SCREENSAVERDELAY 28800;
:DISPLAY:PERSISTENCE OFF;STYLE DOTS;TRIGBAR
OFF;TRIGT 1;
CURSORTICK LONG;VARPERSIST 2.6000;SCREENTEXT:STATE 1;
LABEL1:NAME ””;XPOS 100;YPOS 5;:DISPLAY:SCREENTEXT
:LABEL2:NAME ”THIS IS SCREEN TEXT”;XPOS
100;YPOS 20;
:DISPLAY:SCREENTEXT:LABEL3:NAME ””;XPOS
100;YPOS 35;
:DISPLAY:SCREENTEXT:LABEL4:NAME ””;XPOS
100;YPOS 50;
:DISPLAY:SCREENTEXT:LABEL5:NAME ””;XPOS
100;YPOS 343;
:DISPLAY:SCREENTEXT:LABEL6:NAME ””;XPOS
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 258 --
100;YPOS 80;
:DISPLAY:SCREENTEXT:LABEL7:NAME ””;XPOS
100;YPOS 95;
:DISPLAY:SCREENTEXT:LABEL8:NAME ””;XPOS
100;YPOS 110;
:DISPLAY:WAVEFORM 1
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 259 --
EMail
Description
This command (no query form) sends a test e--mail message or sets the
current e--mail sent count to zero.
Group
Email
Syntax 1
EMail {TEst|RESet}
Arguments
H TEst
This argument sends a test e--mail message.
H RESet
This argument sets the e--mail sent count to zero.
Example 1
EMail TEst
This command sends a test e--mail.
Example 2
EMail RESet
This command resets the sent mail count to zero.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 260 --
EMail:ATTempts
Description
This command sets or queries the number of times that an attempt will
be made to send e--mail to the SMTP e--mail server. The default is 1.
Group
Email
Syntax 1
EMail: ATTempts <NR1>
Syntax 2
EMail:ATTempts?
Argument
H NR1
The value for NR1 can be 1 through 20. This number is the specified
number of attempts that will be made to send e--mail to the SMTP
server.
Example 1
EMail:ATTempts 15
This command specifies that 15 attempts will be made to send the e-mail to the SMTP e--mail server.
Example 2
EMail:ATTempts?
This query might return
:email:ATTEMPTS 10
This indicates that 10 attempts will be made to send the e--mail to the
SMTP e--mail server.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 261 --
EMail:AUTHLogin
Description
This command sets or queries the login name that will be used if the
SMTP e--mail server requires one for authentication.
Group
Email
Syntax 1
EMail:AUTHLogin {<String>}
Syntax 2
EMail:AUTHLogin?
Argument
H <String>
This argument is a string that specifies the login name to be used with
the SMTP e--mail server.
Example 1
EMail:AUTHLogin kentb
This command specifies that kentb will be used as the login name with
the SMTP e--mail server.
Example 2
EMail:AUTHLogin?
This query might return
:EMAIL:AUTHLOGIN ”bobk”
This indicates that bobk will be used as the login name used with the
SMTP e--mail server.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 262 --
EMail:AUTHPassword
Description
This command (no query form) sets the password that will be used if
the SMTP e--mail server requires one for authentication.
Group
Email
Syntax
EMail:AUTHPassword {<String>}
Argument
H <String>
This argument is a string that specifies the password to be used with
the SMTP e--mail server.
Example
EMail:AUTHPassword ”123xyz”
This command specifies that 123xyz will be used as the password with
the SMTP e--mail server.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 263 --
EMail:COUnt?
Description
This query only command returns the number of e--mails that have been
sent since E--mail on Event was armed. The range of values returned
can be from 0 to 50.
Group
Email
Syntax
EMail:COUnt?
Example
EMail:COUnt?
This query might return
:email:COUNT 15
This indicates that 15 e--mails have been sent since e--mail on event was
armed.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 264 --
EMail:FRom
Description
This command sets or queries the From line in the e--mail. The default
for the From line is the instrument model and serial number.
Group
Email
Syntax 1
EMail:FRom {<String>}
Syntax 2
EMail:FRom?
Argument
H <String>
This argument is a string that is placed in the From line of the e--mail.
An example is ”johnz”.
Example 1
EMail:FRom ”kentb”
This command specifies that kentb will be placed in the From line of
the e--mail.
Example 2
EMail:FRom?
This query might return
:email:FROM ”BOBK”
This indicates that bobk will appear in the From line of the e--mail.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 265 --
EMail:HOSTwanted
Description
This command sets or queries the hostname that will be used when e-mail is sent to the SMTP e--mail server if the TDS hostname will not
work.
Group
Email
Syntax 1
EMail:HOSTwanted {<String>}
Syntax 2
EMail:HOSTwanted?
Argument
H <String>
This argument is a string that specifies the host name to be used with
the SMTP e--mail server if the default TDS host name will not work.
Example 1
EMail:HOSTwanted ”LazyEight”
This command specifies that LazyEight will be used as the hostname
when sending e--mail to the SMTP e--mail server.
Example 2
EMail:HOSTwanted?
This query might return
:EMAIL:HOSTWANTED ”LazyEight”
This indicates that LazyEight is the hostname used with the SMTP e-mail server.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 266 --
EMail:IMage
Description
This command sets or queries whether a screen image is included in
e--mail. If this command is set to ON, the format and content of the
screen image included is specified using the EXPort commands within
the Hard Copy Command group.
Group
Email
Related Commands
EXPort
Syntax 1
EMail:Image {ON|OFF|NR1}
Syntax 2
EMail:Image?
Arguments
H ON
This argument enables the inclusion of a screen image in e--mail.
H OFF
This argument disables the inclusion of a screen image in e--mail.
H <NR1>
A 0 disables the inclusion of a screen image in e--mail; any other value enables the inclusion of a screen image in e--mail.
Example 1
EMail:Image 1
This command enables the inclusion of a screen image in e--mail.
Example 2
EMail:Image?
This query might return
:EMAIL:IMAGE 0
This indicates that a screen image is not included in the e--mail.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 267 --
EMail:LIMit
Description
This command sets or queries whether e--mail is sent when a limit test
failure occurs. This command is the same as the LIMit:EMail command.
Group
Email
Related Commands
LIMit:EMail
Syntax 1
EMail:LIMit {ON|OFF|NR1}
Syntax 2
EMail:LIMit?
Arguments
H ON
This argument enables sending e--mail when a limit test failure occurs.
H OFF
This disables sending e--mail when a limit test failure occurs.
H <NR1>
A 0 disables sending e--mail when a limit test failure occurs; any other
value enables sending e--mail when a limit test failure occurs.
Example 1
EMail:LIMit 1
This command enables sending e--mail when a limit test failure occurs.
Example 2
EMail:LIMit?
This query might return
:EMAIL:LIMIT 0
This indicates that e--mail will not be sent when a limit test failure occurs.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 268 --
EMail:MASk
Description
This command sets or queries whether e--mail is sent when a mask test
failure occurs.
Group
Email
Syntax 1
EMail:MASk {ON|OFF|NR1}
Syntax 2
EMail:MASk?
Arguments
H ON
This argument enables sending e--mail when a mask test failure occurs.
H OFF
This disables sending e--mail when a mask test faulure occurs.
H <NR1>
A 0 disables sending e--mail when a mask test failure occurs; any other value enables sending e--mail when a mask test failure occurs.
Example 1
EMail:MASk 1
This command enables sending e--mail when a mask test failure occurs.
Example 2
EMail:MASk?
This query might return
:EMAIL:MASK 0
This indicates that e--mail will not be sent when a mask test failure occurs.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 269 --
EMail:MAXsize
Description
This command sets or queries the maximum size (in megabytes) of e-mail that can be sent to the SMTP server.
Group
Email
Syntax 1
EMail:MAXsize {<NR1>}
Syntax 2
EMail:MAXsize?
Argument
H <NR1>
The value for NR1 can be 0 through 2000 megabytes. This is the
maximum size of each e--mail that can be sent to the SMTP server.
Example 1
EMail:MAXsize 5
This command sets the maximum size of each e--mail enclosure to 5
megabytes of data.
Example 2
EMail:MAXsize?
This query might return
:EMAIL:MAXSIZE 10
This indicates that each e--mail sent to the SMTP server can contain up
to 10 megabytes of data.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 270 --
EMail:MEASurement
Description
This command sets or queries whether measurement data is included as
an attachment to e--mail. You must specify the saved measurement
selection (for all displayed measurements, measurement snapshots, or
histogram data) and the measurement format using the Email on Event
setup menu. There are no remote commands for this purpose.
Group
Email
Syntax 1
EMail:MEASurement {ON|OFF|NR1}
Syntax 2
EMail:MEASurement?
Arguments
H ON
This enables the inclusion of measurement data in e--mail.
H OFF
This disables the inclusion of measurement data in e--mail.
H <NR1>
A 0 disables the inclusion of measurement data in the e--mail; any
other value enables including measurement data in the e--mail.
Example 1
EMail:MEASurement 1
This command enables the inclusion of measurement data in e--mail.
Example 2
EMail:MEASurement?
This query might return
:EMAIL:MEASUREMENT 0
This indicates that measurement data is not included in the e--mail.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 271 --
EMail:NUMemails
Description
This command sets or queries the number of e--mails you can send
when Email onEvent is armed, from 1 to 50. This limit is to restrict
e--mail floods.
Group
Email
Related Commands
EMail RESet
Syntax 1
EMail:NUMemails {<NR1>}
Syntax 2
EMail:NUMemails?
Argument
H <NR1>
The value of NR1 is 1 through 50. This is the number of e--mails you
can send before the number of sent e--mails must be reset with the
EMail RESet command.
Example 1
EMail:NUMemails 10
This command sets the number of e--mails that can be sent to 10.
Example 2
EMail:NUMemails?
This query might return
:EMAIL:NUMEMAILS 5
This indicates that five e--mails can be sent.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 272 --
EMail:SMTPPort
Description
This command sets or queries the SMTP port number that the e--mail
server uses if other than the default of 25.
Group
Email
Syntax 1
EMail: SMTPPort {<NR1>}
Syntax 2
EMail:SMTPPort?
Argument
H <NR1>
The value for NR1 can be 1 through 65535. This number specifies the
TCPIP port number.
Example 1
EMail:SMTPPort 55
This command specifies that the SMTP e--mail server will communicate on TCPIP port 55.
Example 2
EMail:SMTPPort?
This query might return
:EMAIL:SMTPPORT 10
This indicates that TCPIP port 10 will be used to communicate with the
SMTP e--mail server.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 273 --
EMail:SMTPServer
Description
This command sets or queries the address of the SMTP mail server.
Group
Email
Syntax 1
Email:SMTPServer <string>
Syntax 2
Email:SMTPServer?
Argument
H <string>
This argument is the address of the SMTP mail server that will handle
the mail service request. For example, ”smtp.tek.com”.
Example 1
Email:SMTPServer ”smtp.tek.com”
This command sets the SMTP amil server to smtp.tek.com. This will be
the mail server used for mail service requests.
Example 2
Email:SMTPServer?
This query might return:
:EMAIL:SMTPSERVER ”SMTP.TEK.COM”
This indicates that the SMTP mail sever is set to SMTP.tek.com.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 274 --
EMail:STATus?
Description
This query only command returns the status of the last e--mail you attempted to send. The status might be one of the following strings:
H
PASS – indicates that the last e--mail message sent was successful
or that no email message was attempted.
H
FAIL – indicates that the last e--mail message attempted was not
sent.
H
SEND – indicates that an e--mail message is currently being sent.
H
HOST_FAIL – indicates that the instrument failed to connect to the
SMTP server.
H
CONNECTION_FAIL – indicates that the SMTP server refused
the connection.
Group
Email
Syntax
Email:STATus?
Example 1
Email:STATus?
This query might return
:EMAIL:STATUS FAIL
indicating that the e--mail failed to be sent.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 275 --
EMail:TIMEout
Description
This command sets or queries the global timeout in seconds. The default is 30 seconds. You use this timeout for socket connections and
may need to change it from the default on some networks.
Group
Email
Syntax 1
EMail:TIMEout <NR1>
Syntax 2
EMail:TIMEout?
Argument
H <NR1>
This argument is the global timeout in seconds. The value for NR1
can be 0 through 500.
Example 1
EMail:TIMEout 60
This command specifies that 60 seconds will be used for network connection timeouts.
Example 2
EMail:TIMEout?
This query might return
:EMAIL:TIMEOUT 30
This indicates that the default of 30 seconds is set for network connection timeouts.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 276 --
EMail:TO
Description
This command sets or queries the address of the recipient(s) of an e-mail.
Group
Email
Syntax 1
Email:TO <string>
Syntax 2
Email:TO?
Argument
H <string>
This argument is the e--mail address of the recipient (or recipients).
Multiple addresses are separated with semicolons (;). For example,
”[email protected];[email protected]” specifies that both johndoe
and billsmith at tek.com will receive e--mail when the event occurs.
The length of this string is limited to 252 characters.
Example 1
Email:TO ”[email protected]”
This command will send e--mail to [email protected] when the event
occurs.
Example 2
Email:TO?
This query might return:
:EMAIL:TO ”[email protected]”
This indicates that the [email protected] will receive e--mail when the
event occurs.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 277 --
EMail:TRIgger
Description
This command sets or queries whether e--mail is sent when a trigger
occurs. The e--mail is sent after the acquisition is complete.
Group
Email
Syntax 1
EMail:TRIgger {ON|OFF|NR1}
Syntax 2
EMail:TRIgger?
Arguments
H ON
This argument enables sending e--mail when a trigger occurs.
H OFF
This disables sending e--mail when a trigger occurs.
H <NR1>
A 0 disables sending e--mail when a trigger occurs; any other value
enables sending e--mail when a trigger occurs.
Example 1
EMail:TRIgger 1
This command enables sending e--mail when a trigger occurs.
Example 2
EMail:TRIgger?
This query might return
:EMAIL:TRIGGER 0
This indicates that e--mail will not be sent when a trigger occurs.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 278 --
EMail:WAVEform
Description
This command sets or queries whether waveform data is included in
e--mail. The waveforms to be included, the start and stop points (and,
or, frames for Fast Frame mode), and the data formats are specified by
the DATA: and WFMOutpre: commands within the Waveform Transfer
Command group.
Group
Email
Syntax 1
EMail:WAVEform {ON|OFF|NR1}
Syntax 2
EMail:WAVEform?
Arguments
H ON
This enables the inclusion of waveform data in e--mail.
H OFF
This disables the inclusion of waveform data in e--mail.
H <NR1>
A 0 disables the inclusion of waveform data in the e--mail; any other
value enables including waveform data in the e--mail.
Example 1
EMail:WAVEform 1
This command enables the inclusion of waveform data in e--mail.
Example 2
EMail:WAVEform?
This query might return
:EMAIL:WAVEFORM 0
This indicates that waveform data is not included in the e--mail.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 279 --
EVENT?
Description
This query--only command returns an event code from the Event Queue
that provides information about the results of the last *ESR? read.
EVENT? also removes the returned value from the Event Queue.
Group
Status and Error
Related Commands
ALLEv?, *CLS, DESE, *ESE, *ESR?, EVMsg?, *SRE, *STB?
Syntax
EVENT?
Example
EVENT?
This query might return :EVENT 110, showing that there was an error in
a command header.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 280 --
EVMsg?
Description
This query--only command removes a single event code from the Event
Queue that is associated with the results of the last *ESR? read and returns the event code along with an explanatory message. For more information, see Event Handling.
Group
Status and Error
Related Commands
ALLEv?
*CLS, DESE, *ESE, *ESR?, EVENT?, *SRE, *STB?
Syntax
EVMsg?
Returns
The event code and message in the following format:
<Event Code><Comma><Qstring>[<Event Code><Comma><Qstring>…]<Qstring>::= <Message>;[<Command>]
where <Command> is the command that caused the error and may be
returned when a command error is detected by the instrument. As much
of the command will be returned as possible without exceeding the 60
character limit of the <Message> and <Command> string combined.
The command string is right--justified.
Example
EVMsg?
This query might return :EVMSG 110, ”Command header
error”.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 281 --
EVQty?
Description
This query--only command returns the number of event codes that are in
the Event Queue. This is useful when using the ALLEv? query, since it
lets you know exactly how may events will be returned.
Group
Status and Error
Related Commands
ALLEv?, EVENT?, EVMsg?
Syntax
EVQty?
Example
EVQty?
This query might return:EVQTY 3, indicating the number of event
codes in the Event Queue.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 282 --
EXPort
Description
This command sends a copy of the waveform to the file path specified
by EXPort:FILEName. The EXPort query returns image format and file
information.
Group
Export
Syntax 1
EXPort STArt
Syntax 2
Export?
Arguments
H STARt
Initiates export.
Example 1
EXPort STARt
This command initiates export to the file specified file by EXPort:FILEName.
Example 2
EXPort?
This query returns the export formatting and file path. The query might
return:
:EXPORT:FILENAME ”untitled”;
FORMAT BMP;IMAGE NORMAL;
PALETTE COLOR;VIEW FULLSCREEN
”C\TekScope\Images\hcFILE.BMP”
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 283 --
EXPort:FILEName
Description
This command sets or returns the file/path that will be sent export data
on the next EXPort command.
Group
Export
Related Commands
HARDCopy
Syntax 1
EXPort:FILEName <file path>
Syntax 2
EXPort:FILEName?
Argument
H <file path>
This specifies that the hard copy is sent to the named file. <file
path> is a quoted string that defines the file name and path. Input
the file path using the form <drive>:<dir>/<filename>.<drive> and one or more <dir>s are optional. The file
path cannot exceed 128 characters. If you don’t specify the path with
<drive>: and one or more <dir>s, the default location is ”C:\TekScope\Images”. While filename extensions are not required, they are
highly recommended.
Example 1
EXPort:FILEName ”TEK.BMP”
This command sets TEK.IBM as the selected file name. The next export will be sent to this file in the default hard copy directory.
Example 2
EXPort:FILEName?
This query might return
EXPORT:FILENAME ”C:\TekScope\Images\TEK.BMP”
as the selected file.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 284 --
EXPort:FORMat
Description
This command sets or returns the image format for exporting waveforms to a file.
Group
Export
Syntax 1
EXPort:FORMat {BMP|JPEG|PNG|PCX|TIFF}
Syntax 2
EXPort:FORMat?
Arguments
H BMP
Specifies BMP image format.
H JPEG
Specifies JPEG image format.
H PNG
Specifies PNG image format.
H PCX
Specifies PCX image format.
H TIFF
Specifies TIFF image format.
Example 1
EXPort:FORMat BMP
This command sets the export format to BMP.
Example 2
EXPort:FORMat?
This query might return
:EXPORT:FORMAT JPEG
indicating that waveforms will be exported in the JPEG format.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 285 --
EXPort:IMAGe
Description
This command sets or returns the inksaver mode for exporting waveforms (File > Export Setup > Images > Image).
Group
Export
Syntax 1
EXPort:IMAGe {NORMal|INKSaver|ENHANcedwfm}
Syntax 2
EXPort:IMAGe?
Arguments
H MORMal
Preserves the screen background when printing waveforms.
H INKSaver
Changes the screen background to white. This saves ink when printing waveforms.
H ENHANcedwfm
Prints (color) screen images with colors designed to print on a white
background.
Example 1
EXPort:IMAGe NORMal
This command sets the export mode to Normal.
Example 2
EXPort:IMAGe?
This query might return
:EXPORT:IMAGE NORMAL
indicating that the screen background will be printed when printing
waveforms.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 286 --
EXPort:PALEtte
Description
This command sets or returns the export color palette.
Group
Export
Syntax 1
EXPort:PALEtte {COLOr|GRAYscale|BLACKANDWhite}
Syntax 2
EXPort:PALEtte?
Arguments
H COLOr
Hardcopy output is color.
H GRAYscale
Hardcopy output is gray.
H BLACKANDwhite
Hardcopy output is black and white.
Example 1
EXPort:PALEtte
This command sets the export color palette to Color.
Example 2
EXPort:PALEtte
This query might return
:EXPORT PALETTE COLOR
indicating the hardcopy output will be in color.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 287 --
EXPort:VIEW
Description
This command sets or returns the area of the screen to be exported.
Group
Export
Syntax 1
EXPort:VIEW {FULLSCREEN|GRAticule|FULLNOmenu}
Syntax 2
EXPort:VIEW?
Arguments
H FULLSCREEN
Displays both the graticule and menu areas of the screen.
H GRAticule
Displays only the graticule area of the screen.
H FULLNOmenu
Displays the full screen but hides any menus or toolbars.
Example 1
EXPort:VIEW FULLSCREEN
This command sets the exported view area to Full Screen.
Example 2
EXPort:VIEW?
This query might return
:EXPORT:VIEW GRATICULE
indicating that only the graticule area of the screen will be exported.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 288 --
FACtory
Description
This command (no query form) resets the instrument to its factory default settings.
This command is equivalent to pressing the DEFAULT SETUP button
located on the instrument front panel or selecting Recall Default Setup
from the File menu.
Group
Save and Recall
Related Commands
*PSC, *RCL?, RECall:SETUp, *RST, *SAV, SAVe:SETUp
Syntax
FACtory
Arguments
None
Example
FACtory
This command resets the instrument settings to factory defaults:
H
Clears the Event Status Enable Register.
H
Clears the Service Request Enable Register.
H
Sets the Device Event Status Enable Register to 255.
H
Sets the Power On Status Clear Flag to TRUE.
H
Purges all defined aliases.
H
Enables all Command Headers.
H
Sets the macro defined by *DDT to a ”zero--length field.”
H
Clears the pending operation flag and associated operations.
This command does not reset the following:
H
The state of the GPIB (IEEE Std 488.1--1987) interface.
H
The selected GPIB address.
H
Calibration data that affects device specifications.
H
Protected user data.
H
Stored settings.
H
The current password (if you set one).
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 289 --
FASTAcq:STATE
Description
This command sets or queries the state of Fast Acquisitions. This command is equivalent to the FASTACQ button on the front panel.
Group
Acquisition
Syntax 1
FASTAcq:STATE {ON|OFF|<NR1>}
Syntax 2
FASTAcq:STATE?
Arguments
H ON
This enables Fast Acquisitions mode.
H OFF
This disables Fast Acquisitions mode.
H <NR1>
A 0 disables Fast Acquisitions mode; any other value enables Fast
Acquisitions mode.
Example 1
FASTAcq:STATE ON
This command enables the Fast Acquisitions mode.
Example 2
This query might return
:FASTACQ:STATE 1
indicating that Fast Acquisitions mode is currently active.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 290 --
FASTAcq?
Description
This query--only command returns the state of Fast Acquisitions. This
command is equivalent to pressing the FASTACQ button on the front
panel.
Group
Acquisition
Syntax
FASTAcq?
Example
FASTAcq?
This query might return the following string for the current acquisition
parameters:
:FASTACQ:STATE 0
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 291 --
FILESystem:COPy
Description
This command (no query form) copies a named file to a new file. The
new file may be in a totally separate directory than the old file. You can
only copy one file at a time using this command. Wild card characters
are not allowed.
Group
File System
Related Commands
FILESystem:CWD, FILESystem:DELEte
Syntax
FILESystem:COPy {<source file path>,<destination file path>}
Arguments
H <file path>
This is a quoted string that defines the file name and path. If the file
path is within the current working directory, you need only specify the
file name.
Example
FILESystem:COPy ”C:\MYDIR\TEK00001.SET”,
”C:\AnotherDir\copyOfTek001.set”
This command copies the file named TEK00001.SET, located in the
MYDIR directory on the C drive to a file named copyOfTek001.set in
the AnotherDir directory on the C drive.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 292 --
FILESystem:CWD
Description
This command sets or queries the current working directory for FILESystem GPIB commands. The default working directory is ”C:\TekScope”. Anytime that you use this command to change the directory,
the directory that you specify is retained as the current working directory until you either change the directory or you delete the directory. If
you delete the current working directory, the instrument resets current
working directory to the default directory (C:\TekScope) the next time
the instrument is powered on or the next time you execute a file system
command. The current working directory is retained between power
cycles.
This command supports the permutations of file and directory names
that are supported by Microsoft Windows:
H
Relative path names; for example, ”.\Temp”
H
Absolute path names; for example, ”C:\Windows\System”
H
Implied relative path names; for example ”newfile.text” becomes
”C:\TekScope\newfile.txt” if the current working directory is
”C:\TekScope”
Group
File System
Syntax 1
FILESystem:CWD {<new working directory path>}
Syntax 2
Arguments
H
<new working directory path>
This is a quoted string that defines the current working; a directory
name can be up to 128 characters.
Example 1
FILESystem:CWD ”C:\TekScope\images”
This command sets the current working directory to images.
Example 2
FILESystem:CWD?
This query might return:
:FILESYSTEM:CWD ”C:\TekScope\Waveforms”
This indicates that the current working directory is set to Waveforms.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 293 --
FILESystem:DELEte
Description
This command (no query form) deletes a named file. It does not delete
directories. Use the FILESystem:RMDir command to delete a directory.
Group
File System
Related Commands
FILESystem:COPy, FILESystem:CWD
Syntax
FILESystem:DELEte <file path>
Arguments
H <file path>
This is a quoted string that defines the file name and path. If the file
path is within the current working directory, you need only specify the
file name.
Example 1
FILESystem:DELEte ”NOT_MINE.SET”
This command deletes the file named NOT_MINE.SET from the current working directory.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 294 --
FILESystem:DIR?
Description
This query--only command returns a list of quoted strings. Each string
contains the name of a file or directory in the current working directory.
Group
File System
Related Commands
FILESystem:CWD, FILESystem:MKDir
Syntax
FILESystem:DIR?
Arguments
None
Example
FILESystem:DIR?
This query returns a list of files and directories in the current working
directory.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 295 --
FILESystem:MKDir
Description
This command (no query form) creates a new directory.
Group
File System
Related Commands
FILESystem:CWD, FILESystem:DIR?
Syntax
FILESystem:MKDir <directory path>
Arguments
H <directory path>
This is a quoted string that specifies the directory to create
Example 1
FILESystem:MKDir ”C:\NewDirectory”
This command creates the directory named NewDirectory at the
root of the C drive.
Example 2
FILESystem:CWD ”C:\MyDirectory”
FILESystem:MKDir ”MyNewSubDirectory”
These two commands create the directory MyNewSubDirectory within
the existing directory MyDirectory at the root of the C drive. This, of
course, assumes that C:\MyDirectory already existed and was not a
read--only directory.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 296 --
FILESystem:PRInt
Description
This command (no query form) prints a named file to a named port.
This command is the same as the FILESystem:READFile command.
This command is not IEEE 488.2 compliant for the following reasons:
H
The command produces output on the 488.2 bus. Queries, not
commands, are the only message units that should produce output
on the 488.2 bus. Errors may not be recognized if they occur while
data is being output in response to this command. This will be
evident if a command is sent to the instrument before all of the data
generated by this command has been read. In such cases, you
should send a device clear message to the instrument.
H
The command does not use a standard 488.2 output format. The
closest defined format is the indefinite format of ARBITRARY
BLOCK PROGRAM DATA encoding. However, this command
output omits the initial ’#0’ characters needed for that format.
H
Newlines, ASCII value 10, can be included in the output data.
Output on the bus can be terminated by newlines. The output of
this command is only terminated by <EOI>.
Group
File System
Related Commands
FILESystem:CWD, FILESystem:READFile
Syntax
FILESystem:PRInt <filepath>, GPIb
Arguments
H <file path>
This is a quoted string that defines the file name and path. If the file
path is within the current working directory, you need only specify the
file name.
H GPIb
This specifies that the hardcopy is sent out of the GPIB port. GPIb is
the only port allowed for this command.
Example
FILESystem:PRInt ”C:\TEK00000.IBM”,GPIb
This command sends the file named TEK00000.IBM out of the GPIB
port.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 297 --
FILESystem:READFile
Description
This command (no query form) prints a named file to a named port. It
is identical to the FILESystem:PRInt command.
This command is not IEEE 488.2 compliant for the following reasons:
H
The command produces output on the 488.2 bus. Queries, not
commands, are the only message units that should produce output
on the 488.2 bus. Errors may not be recognized if they occur while
data is being output in response to this command. This will be
evident if a command is sent to the instrument before all of the data
generated by this command has been read. In such cases, you
should send a device clear message to the instrument.
H
The command does not use a standard 488.2 output format. The
closest defined format is the indefinite format of ARBITRARY
BLOCK PROGRAM DATA encoding. However, this command
output omits the initial ’#0’ characters needed for that format.
H
Newlines, ASCII value 10, can be included in the output data.
Output on the bus can be terminated by newlines. The output of
this command is only terminated by <EOI>.
Group
File System
Related Commands
FILESystem:CWD, FILESystem:PRInt
Syntax
FILESystem:READFile <filepath>, GPIb
Arguments
H <file path>
This is a quoted string that defines the file name and path. If the file
path is within the current working directory, you need only specify the
file name.
H GPIb
This specifies that the hardcopy is sent out of the GPIB port. GPIb is
the only port allowed for this command.
Example
FILESystem:READFile ”C:\TEK00000.IBM”,GPIb
This command sends the file named TEK00000.IBM out of the GPIB
port.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 298 --
FILESystem:REName
Description
This command (no query form) assigns a new name to an existing file.
Group
File System
Related Command
FILESystem:CWD
Syntax
FILESystem:REName <old file path>,<new file
path>
Arguments
H <old file path>
This is a quoted string that defines the file name and path. If the file
path is within the current working directory, you need only specify the
file name.
H <new file path>
This is a quoted string that defines the file name and path. If the file
path is within the current working directory, you need only specify the
file name.
Example
FILESystem:REName ”C:\TEK00000.SET”,”C:\MYSETTING.SET”
This command gives the file named TEK00000.SET the new name of
MYSETTING.SET. The file remains in the root directory on the C
drive.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 299 --
FILESystem:RMDir
Description
This command (no query form) deletes a named directory. The directory cannot contain any files. If there are files in the directory, they must
first be deleted. The directory must not be a read--only directory.
Group
File System
Related Command
FILESystem:CWD
Syntax
FILESystem:RMDir <directory path>
Arguments
H <directory path>
This is a quoted string that defines the file name and path. If the file
path is within the current working directory, you need only specify the
file name.
Example
FILESystem:RMDir ”C:\OldDirectory”
This command removes the directory named OldDirectory from the
root of the C drive.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 300 --
FILESystem:WRITEFile
Description
This command (no query form) copies the block data from the GPIB
port to a named file.
Group
File System
Related Command
FILESystem:CWD
Syntax
FILESystem:WRITEFile <file path>,<data>
Arguments
H <file path>
This is a quoted string that defines the file name and path. If the file
path is within the current working directory, you need only specify the
file name
H <data>
This data can be either DEFINITE LENGTH or INDEFINITE
LENGTH ARBITRARY BLOCK PROGRAM DATA encoding as
described in IEEE 488.2.
Example 1
FILESystem:WRITEFile ”C:\SomeNewFile.txt”,#221
1.23 2.54 8.22 -1.22<EOI>
This command creates a file named ”SomeNewFile.txt” on the root of
the C drive, containing the string of 21 characters ” 1.23 2.54 8.22
--1.22”. This is an example of using the definite length arbitrary block.
Example 2
FILESystem:WRITEFile ”C:\SomeNewFile.txt”,#0
This is a test<NL+EOI>
This command creates a file named ”SomeNewFile.txt” on the root of
the C drive, containing the string ”This is a test.” This is an example of
using the indefinite length arbitrary block. The newline character
(0x0a) is required.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 301 --
FILESystem:WRITEFile ”C:\SomeNewFile.txt”,#221
1.23 2.54 8.22 -1.22<NL+EOI>
This command creates a file named ”SomeNewFile.txt” on the root of
the C drive, containing the string of 21 characters ” 1.23 2.54 8.22
--1.22”. Because the data argument is indefinite format arbitrary block
program data, it may contain any 8--bit values, including newline characters (hexadecimal 0a). The fact that newline characters are allowed
makes this command deviate from the strictest interpretation of the
IEEE488.2 specification.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 302 --
FILESystem?
Description
This query--only command returns the directory listing of the current
working directory. This query is the same as the FILESystem:DIR?
query.
Group
File System
Related Commands
FILESystem:COPy, FILESystem:CWD, FILESystem:DELEte, FILESystem:DIR?, FILESystem:PRInt, FILESystem:READFile, FILESystem:REName, FILESystem:WRITEFile
Syntax
FILESystem?
Arguments
None.
Example
FILESystem?
This query might return:
:FILESYSTEM:DIR, ”.”,”..”,”myFile.txt”,”myWaveform.wfm”.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 303 --
HARDCopy
Description
This command sends a copy of the screen display to the port specified
by HARDCopy:PORT. This command is equivalent to pressing the
PRINT button on the front panel. When printing to a file, the file format is Windows Bitmap Image (BMP).
The HARDCopy query returns the port and file path.
Group
Hardcopy
Related Commands
*WAI, *CLS?
Syntax 1
HARDCopy STArt
Syntax 2
HARDCopy?
Arguments
H STARt
This initiates a screen copy to a file or the default system printer, as
specified by the :HARDCopy:PORT selection. The default system
printer is set within the Windows operating system. If you need information about how to set the default system printer,. refer to Microsoft
Windows online help.
Note: Use the *WAI command between HARDCopy STARt commands to ensure that the first hardcopy is complete before starting
another.
Example 1
HARDCopy STARt
This command initiates a screen copy to a file or the default system
printer, as specified by the :HARDCopy:PORT selection.
Example 2
HARDCopy?
This query returns the hardcopy file path and the selected port. The
query might return:
:HARDCOPY:FILENAME ”C:\TekScope\Images\hcFILE.BMP”;PORT FILE.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 304 --
HARDCopy:FILEName
Description
This command sets or returns the file that will be sent hardcopy data on
the next HARDCopy command (if the HARDCopy:PORT is set to
FILE).
Group
Hardcopy
Related Commands
HARDCopy
Syntax 1
HARDCopy:FILEName <file path>
Syntax 2
HARDCopy:FILEName?
Argument
H <file path>
This specifies that the hard copy is sent to the named file. <file
path> is a quoted string that defines the file name and path. Input
the file path using the form <drive>:<dir>/<filename>.<drive> and one or more <dir>s are optional. The file
path cannot exceed 128 characters. If you don’t specify the path with
<drive>: and one or more <dir>s, the default location is ”C:\TekScope\Images”. While filename extensions are not required, they are
highly recommended.
Example 1
HARDCopy:FILEName ”TEK.BMP”
This command sets TEK.BMP as the selected file name. The next hardcopy will be sent to this file in the default hardcopy directory, if the
:HARDCopy:PORT selection is FILE.
Example 2
HARDCopy:FILEName?
This query might return :HARDCOPY:FILENAME ”C:\TekScope\Images\TEK.BMP” as the selected file.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 305 --
Example 3
HARDCopy:FILEName ”TEK??.BMP”
This command sets TEK as the selected file name with a numeric, two-digit suffix. The instrument might return
:HARDCOPY:FILENAME ”TEK00.BMP”;”TEK01.BMP”
This indicates TEK00.BMP is the first file and TEK01.BMP is the second file.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 306 --
HARDCopy:IMAGe
Description
This command sets or returns the inksaver mode for hard copy printing.
Group
Hardcopy
Syntax 1
HARDCopy:IMAGe {NORMal|INKSaver|ENHANcedwfm}
Syntax 2
HARDCopy:IMAGe?
Arguments
H NORMal
Preserves the screen background when printing waveforms.
H INKSaver
Changes the screen background to white. This saves ink when printing waveforms.
H ENHANcedwfm
Prints screen images with colors designed to print on a white background.
Example 1
HARDCopy:IMAGe NORMal
This command sets the hardcopy mode to Normal.
Example 2
HARDCopy:IMAGe?
This query might return
:HARDCOPY:IMAGE INKSAVER
This indicates that the inksaver mode is on and the screen background
is white.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 307 --
HARDCopy:LAYout
Description
This command sets or returns the page orientation for hard copy.
Group
Hardcopy
Syntax 1
HARDCopy:LAYout {PORTRait|LANDscape}
Syntax 2
HARDCopy:LAYout?
Arguments
H PORTRait
Orients the screen image vertically on the printed page.
H LANDscape
Orients the screen image horizontally on the printed page.
Example 1
HARDCopy:LAYout LANDscape
This command sets the hardcopy page orientation to Landscape.
Example 2
HARDCopy:LAYout?
This query might return
:HARDCOPY:LAYOUT PORTRAIT
indicating that the hardcopy page orientation is set to portrait.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 308 --
HARDCopy:PALEtte
Description
This command sets or returns the hardcopy color palette.
Group
Hardcopy
Syntax 1
HARDCopy:PALEtte {COLOr|GRAYscale|BLACKANDWhite}
Syntax 2
HARDCopy:PALEtte?
Arguments
H COLOr
This argument sets the hardcopy output to color.
H GRAYscale
This argument sets the hardcopy output to gray scale
H BLACKANDwhite
This argument sets the hardcopy output to black and white.
Example 1
HARDCopy:PALEtte COLOr
This command sets the hardcopy output to Color.
Example 2
HARDCopy:PALEtte?
This argument might return
:HARDCOPY:PALETTE GRAYSCALE
indicating that the output for hardcopy will be in gray scale.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 309 --
HARDCopy:PORT
Description
This command selects or returns whether the hardcopy data will be sent
to a file or printed on the next hardcopy command (for example, the
HARDCopy STARt command). This is equivalent to selecting Print in
the File menu and then either choosing Print to file or specifying the
default printer.
Group
Hardcopy
Related Commands
HARDCopy, HARDCopy:FILEName
Syntax 1
HARDCopy:PORT {FILE|PRINTER}
Syntax 2
HARDCopy:PORT?
Arguments
H FILE
This argument specifies that the hardcopy is stored in the file specified in the HARDCopy:FILEName command.
H PRINTER
This argument specifies that the hardcopy is sent to the printer specified in the Print dialog box.
Example 1
HARDCopy:PORT FILE
This command specifies
That the hardcopy is stored in the file specified in the HARDCopy:FILEName command.
Example 2
HARDCopy:PORT?
This query might return
:HARDCOPY:PORT FILE
This indicates that hardcopies are sent to the specified file.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 310 --
HARDCopy:VIEW
Description
This command sets or returns the area of the screen to be hardcopied.
Group
Hardcopy
Syntax 1
HARDCopy:VIEW {FULLSCREEN|GRAticule|FULLNOmenu}
Syntax 2
HARDCopy:VIEW?
Arguments
H FULLSCREEN
Sets the area to be hardcopied to both the graticule and menu areas of
the screen
H GRAticule
Sets the area to be hardcopied to only the graticule area of the screen.
H FULLNOmenu
Sets the area to be hardcopied to full screen but hides any menus or
toolbars.
Example 1
HARDCopy:VIEW FULLSCREEN
This command sets the hardcopy area to Full Screen.
Example 2
HARDCopy:VIEW?
This query might return
:HARDCOPY:VIEW GRATICULE
indicating that only the graticule area of the screen will be hardcopied.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 311 --
HDR
Description
This command is identical to the HEADer query and is included for
backward compatibility purposes.
Group
Miscellaneous
Related Commands
HEADer, VERBose
Syntax 1
HDR {OFF|ON|<NR1>}
Syntax 2
HDR?
Arguments
H OFF
This sets the Response Header Enable State to false. This causes the
instrument to omit headers on query responses, so that only the argument is returned.
H ON
This sets the Response Header Enable State to true. This causes the
instrument to include headers on applicable query responses. You can
then use the query response as a command.
H <NR1>
A 0 sets the Response Header Enable State to false; any other value
sets this state to true, which causes the instrument to omit headers on
query responses.
Example 1
HDR OFF
This command specifies that the instrument omits headers on query
responses, so that only the argument is returned.
Example 2
HDR?
This query might return :HEADER 1, indicating that the instrument
is including headers on applicable query responses.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 312 --
HEADer
Description
This command sets or queries the Response Header Enable State that
causes the instrument to either include or omit headers on query responses.
Note: This command does not affect IEEE Std 488.2--1987 Common
Commands (those starting with an asterisk); these commands never
return headers. This command does make a corresponding change in
the Response Header Enable State of the opposite interface (physical or
virtual GPIB interface). Refer to Introduction for more information.
Group
Miscellaneous
Related Commands
HDR, VERBose
Syntax 1
HEADer {OFF|ON|<NR1>}
Syntax 2
HEADer?
Arguments
H OFF
This sets the Response Header Enable State to false. This causes the
instrument to omit headers on query responses, so that only the argument is returned.
H ON
This sets the Response Header Enable State to true. This causes the
instrument to include headers on applicable query responses. You can
then use the query response as a command.
H <NR1>
A 0 sets the Response Header Enable State to false; any other value
sets this state to true, which causes the instrument to omit headers on
query responses.
Example 1
HEADer OFF
This command specifies that the instrument omits headers on query
responses, so that only the argument is returned.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 313 --
Example 2
HEADer?
This query might return
:HEADER 1
This indicates that the instrument is including headers on applicable
query responses.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 314 --
HIStogram?
Description
This query--only command returns all histogram parameters; it queries
the state of all histogram parameters that the user can set. This command is equivalent to selecting Waveform Histograms from the Measure menu.
Group
Histogram
Related Commands
MEASUrement:METHod
Syntax 1
HIStogram?
Example 1
HIStogram?
This query might return the histogram parameters as
:HISTOGRAM:BOXPCNT
30.0000,25.1000,70.0000,75.2000;DISPLAY LINEAR;STATE 1;FUNCTION VERTICAL;SIZE
2.0000;SOURCE CH1
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 315 --
HIStogram:Box
Description
This command defines or returns the left, top, right, and bottom boundaries of the histogram box, in source waveform coordinates. This command is equivalent to selecting Waveform Histograms from the Measure menu and then setting Limits for Left, Right, Top, and Bottom in
the appropriate boxes. The command is similar to the HIStogram:BOXPcnt command except that command uses percentage coordinates to define the boundaries of the histogram box.
Note: This command implicitly clears the histogram count and statistics for the histogram and histogram source data when HIStogram:STATE is turned on.
Group
Histogram
Related Commands
HIStogram:BOXPcnt
Syntax 1
HIStogram:Box <NR3>,<NR3>,<NR3>,<NR3>
Syntax 2
HIStogram:Box?
Arguments
H <NR3>
This specifies the left position of the histogram box in source waveform coordinates.
H <NR3>
This specifies the top position of the histogram box in source waveform coordinates.
H <NR3>
This specifies the right position of the histogram box in source waveform coordinates.
H <NR3>
This specifies the bottom position of the histogram box in source waveform coordinates.
Example 1
HIStogram:Box 1E-9, 0.250, 2E-9, 0.500
This command defines the coordinates of the histogram box in source
waveform coordinates.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 316 --
Example 2
HIStogram:Box?
This query might return
:HISTOGRAM:BOX 1.0000E-09, 0.2500, 2.0000E-09,
0.5000
This identifies the coordinates of the histogram box in source waveform
coordinates.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 317 --
HIStogram:BOXPcnt
Description
This command defines or queries the left, top, right, and bottom positions of the histogram box, in percentage coordinates. The upper left
has the value 0,0 and the lower right has the value 100, 100. Any value
outside the range of 0 to 100 is clipped. This command is similar to the
HIStogram:Box command except that this command uses percentage
coordinates to define the boundaries of the histogram box.
Note: This command implicitly clears the histogram count and statistics for the histogram and histogram source data when HIStogram:STATE is turned on.
Group
HIStogram
Related Commands
HIStogram:Box
Syntax 1
HIStogram:BOXPcnt <NR3>, <NR3>, <NR3>, <NR3>
Syntax 2
HIStogram:BOXPcnt?
Arguments
H <NR3>
This specifies the left position of the histogram box in percentage
coordinates. The default value is 30.0.
H <NR3>
This specifies the top position of the histogram box in percentage
coordinates. The default value is 25.1.
H <NR3>
This specifies the right position of the histogram box in percentage
coordinates. The default value is 70.0.
H <NR3>
This specifies the bottom position of the histogram box in percentage
coordinates. The default value is 75.2.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 318 --
Example 1
HIStogram:BOXPcnt 30.0,25.0,70.0,75.0
This command sets the left boundary of the histogram box to 30% of
the graticule (3 divisions from the left edge); the top boundary to 25%
of the graticule (0.25 x 8 = 2.0 divisions from the top edge); the right
boundary to 70% of the graticule (7 divisions from the left edge); and
the bottom boundary to 75% of the graticule (0.75 x 8 = 6.0 divisions
from the top edge).
Example 2
HIStogram:BOXPct?
This query might return :
:HISTOGRAM:BOXPCNT
30.0000,25.1000,70.0000,75.2000.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 319 --
HIStogram:COUNt
Description
This command (no query form) clears the count and statistics for the
histogram and the histogram source data. If the histogram is on, then
counting restarts. This command is equivalent selecting Waveform Histograms from the Measure menu and then clicking the Reset button.
Group
HIStogram
Related Commands
HIStogram:Box, HIStogram:BOXPcnt
Syntax
HIStogram:COUNt RESET
H RESET
This zeros the histogram count.
Example
HIStogram:COUNt RESET
This command clears the count and statistics for the histogram and the
histogram source data.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 320 --
HIStogram:DATa?
Description
This query--only command returns an ASCII comma--separated list of
histogram data numbers. This command returns 200 values for vertical
histograms and 500 values for horizontal histograms.
Note: You must set the histogram state to ON before sending this
query or the system will generate an error indicating: ”Source waveform is not active”.
The Histogram:DATa? query corresponds to the Histogram Data (CSV)
controls included in the oscilloscope user interface. To find these controls, select either Edit > Copy > Setup > Measurements tab or the File
> Save As > Histogram button.
This command returns only histogram data values separated by commas
on a single line. The CSV file created by the user interface actions indicated above, writes out a line for each histogram data point, and contains the time relative to the trigger, a comma, and the histogram value.
Group
Histogram
Related Commands
HIStogram:Box, HIStogram:BOXPcnt, HIStogram:COUNt, HIStogram:DISplay, HIStogram:FUNCtion, HIStogram:MODe, HIStogram:SIZe, HIStogram:SOUrce, HIStogram:STATE.
Syntax
HIStogram:DATa?
Example
HIStogram:DATa?
This query might return
:HISTOGRAM:DATA
0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,
0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,
0,0,0,0,0,0,1245,933,903,1003,838,782,764,697,
687,620,582,566,530,595,557,552,518,524,606,
503,526,470,498,554,534,487,546,548,504,554,
513,566,639,508,643,704,662,769,785,806,922,
960,1153,1336,1478,1960,4515,17598,52184,
67040,50417,12885,4104,2382,1866,1699,1428,
1288,1271,1140,975,1024,894,841,841,678,841,
804,685,713,746,729,644,640,787,768,668,671,
661,745,755,692,882,772,802,862,770,854,799,
969,1102,1080,1040,1272,1329,1394,1760,1428,
2418,3313,4475,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,
0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,
0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 321 --
HIStogram:DISplay
Description
This command sets the scaling of the histogram data display to be the
count of each histogram bin or the log of that count. The default scaling
is Linear.
The query form of this command returns either the histogram display
scaling or the display status ”disabled.”
This command is equivalent to selecting Waveform Histogram from the
Measure menu, and then selecting Linear or Log in the Histogram Scaling group.
Group
HIStogram
Related Commands
HIStogram:MODe, HIStogram:STATE
Syntax 1
HIStogram:DISplay {OFF|LOG|LINEAr}
Syntax 2
HIStogram:DISplay?
Arguments
H <OFF>
Disables the histogram display but allows histogram data to accumulate.
Note: This argument provides for backward compatibility with older
TDS Series instruments; it does not affect a change in the display
scaling of the histogram. When queried, HIStogram:DISplay? will
return OFF if the histogram state or mode has been disabled using the
HIStogram:MODe or HIStogram:STATE commands.
H <LOG>
Sets the histogram display to logarithmic scaling.
H <LINEAr>
Sets the histogram display to linear scaling. This is the default setting.
Example 1
HIStogram:DISplay LOG
This command sets the histogram scaling to be the log count of each
histogram bin.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 322 --
Example 2
HIStogram:DISplay?
This query might return
:HISTOGRAM:DISPLAY LOG
indicating that the current histogram display scaling is the log count of
each histogram bin.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 323 --
HIStogram:FUNCtion
Description
This command either selects the type of histogram to create or returns
the current histogram type. This command is equivalent to selecting
Waveform Histogram from the Measure menu and then choosing either
Horizontal or Vertical from the Histogram Mode group box.
Group
HIStogram
Related Commands
HIStogram:MODe, HIStogram:STATE
Syntax 1
HIStogram:FUNCtion {HORizontal|VERTical}
Syntax 2
HIStogram:FUNCtion?
Arguments
H HORizontal
This displays a horizontally positioned histogram that shows time
distribution.
H VERTical
This displays a vertically positioned histogram that shows a voltage
distribution (or another distribution such as amperes).
Example 1
HIStogram:FUNCtion HORizontal
This command sets the histogram mode to the horizontal display mode.
Example 2
HIStogram:FUNCtion?
This query might return
:HISTOGRAM:FUNCTION VERTICAL
This indicates that the vertical display mode is selected for the histogram.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 324 --
HIStogram:MODe
Description
This command selects the type of histogram to create or disables the
histogram display. The query form either returns the current histogram
type or that histogram display is disabled. This command is equivalent
to selecting Waveform Histogram from the Measure menu and then
choosing from the Histogram Mode group box.
HIStogram:MODe is functionally equivalent to the HIStogram:FUNCTION and HIStogram:STATE commands and is included for backward
compatibility purposes.
Group
HIStogram
Related Commands
HIStogram:FUNCTION, HIStogram:STATE, HIStogram:DISplay
Syntax 1
HIStogram:MODe {HORizontal|VERTical|OFF}
Syntax 2
HIStogram:MODe?
Arguments
H HORizontal
This enables a horizontally positioned histogram that shows time distribution.
H VERTical
This enables a vertically positioned histogram that shows a voltage
distribution (or another distribution such as amperes).
H OFF
This disables collection of the histogram measurement.
Example 1
HIStogram:MODe HORizontal
This command sets the type of histogram created to horizontal, which
displays a horizontally positioned histogram that shows time distribution.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 325 --
Example 2
HIStogram:MODe?
This query might return
:HISTOGRAM:MODE OFF
This indicates that histogram display is disabled.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 326 --
HIStogram:SIZe
Description
This command sets or queries the width or height of the histogram on
the screen. This is equivalent to selecting Waveform Histograms from
the Measure menu and then entering a value in the Histogram Size box.
Group
HIStogram
Related Commands
HIStogram:DISplay
Syntax 1
HIStogram:SIZe <NR3>
Syntax 2
HIStogram:SIZe?
Arguments
H <NR3>
This specifies the histogram size. The value can vary from 0.1 to 8.0
divisions in HORizontal mode and from 0.1 to 10.0 divisions in VERTical mode. Resolution is to the nearest pixel.
Example 1
HIStogram:SIZe 2.0
This command sets the size of the histogram to 2.0 divisions.
Example 2
HIStogram:SIZe?
This query might return
:HISTOGRAM:SIZE 2.0000E+01
This indicates the histogram size is set to 2.0 divisions.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 327 --
HIStogram:SOUrce
Description
This command sets or queries which source will be compared against
the histogram box when the histogram testing is enabled. This is equivalent to selecting Waveform Histograms from the Measure menu and
then choosing the desired waveform source. The waveform need not be
displayed for histograms to run. You might want the channel displays
disabled so you can see a full--screen histogram and not have waveform
data confuse the display.
Group
HIStogram
Related Commands
HIStogram:DISplay,
Syntax 1
HIStogram:SOUrce {CH<x>|MATH<x>|REF<x>}
Syntax 2
HIStogram:SOUrce?
Arguments
H CH<x>
This selects a channel waveform as the source for the histogram. The
x variable can be expressed as an integer ranging from 1 through 4 for
4--channel models and 1 to 2 for 2--channel models.
H MATH<x>
This selects a math waveform as the source for the histogram. The x
variable can be expressed as an integer ranging from 1 through 4 for
4--channel models and 1 to 2 for 2--channel models.
H REF<x>
This selects a reference waveform as the source for the histogram.
The x variable can be expressed as an integer ranging from 1 through
4 for 4--channel models and 1 to 2 for 2--channel models.
Example 1
HIStogram:SOUrce CH1
This command enables the channel 1 waveform to be compared against
the histogram box. The default time base, Main, is used for the histogram display.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 328 --
Example 2
HIStogram:SOUrce?
This query might return
:HISTOGRAM:SOURCE CH1
This indicating that the waveform for channel 1 is the source for the
histogram.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 329 --
HIStogram:STATE
Description
This command sets or queries whether the histogram calculations are
enabled. This is equivalent to selecting Waveform Histograms from the
Measure menu.
Group
HIStogram
Related Commands
HIStogram:MODe, MEASUrement:METHod
Syntax 1
HIStogram:STATE {ON|OFF|NR1}
Syntax 2
HIStogram:STATE?
Arguments
H <ON>
This enables histogram calculations.
H <OFF>
This disables the histogram calculations.
H <NR1>
A 0 disables histogram calculations; any other value enables histogram calculations.
Example 1
HIStogram:STATE ON
This command enables histogram calculations.
Example 2
HIStogram:STATE?
This query might return
:HISTOGRAM:STATE 0
This indicates that histogram calculations are currently disabled.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 330 --
HORizontal:DIVisions?
Description
This query--only command returns the number of graticule divisions
over which the waveform is displayed.
Group
Horizontal
Syntax
HORizontal:DIVisions?
Arguments
None.
Example
HORizontal:DIVisions?
This query might return
:HORIZONTAL:DIVISIONS 10.0000
indicating that the waveform is displayed across ten division.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 331 --
HORizontal:FASTframe:COUNt
Description
This command sets or queries FastFrame frame count. This command is
equivalent to selecting Fast Frame Setup from the Horiz/Acq menu and
entering a value in the Frame Count box. FastFrame captures a series of
triggered acquisitions with minimal intervening time.
Group
Horizontal
Related Commands
HORizontal:RECOrdlength
Syntax 1
HORizontal:FASTframe:COUNt <NR1>
Syntax 2
HORizontal:FASTframe:COUNt?
Arguments
H <NR1>
This indicates the number of frames to acquire.
Example 1
HORIZONTAL:FASTFRAME:COUNT 2
This command sets up FastFrame mode to acquire two frames (segments) of data.
Example 2
HORIZONTAL:FASTFRAME:COUNT?
This query might return
:HORIZONTAL:FASTFRAME:COUNT 4
indicating that FastFrame mode is currently set to acquire 4 frames of
data.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 332 --
HORizontal:FASTframe:LENgth
Description
This command sets or queries the horizontal record length to the number of sample points in each frame. This command is equivalent to selecting FastFrame Setup from the Horiz/Acq menu and entering a value
in the Rec Length box. FastFrame captures a series of triggered acquisitions with minimal intervening time between them.
Group
Horizontal
Syntax 1
HORizontal:FASTframe:LENgth <NR1>
Syntax 2
HORizontal:FASTframe:LENgth?
Argument
H <NR1>
<NR1> represents the supported value for horizontal record length in
Fast Frame mode. In addition, to the allowable record length in normal (single frame) mode, 50 and 250 point record lengths are permitted in Fast Frame mode.
For instruments with standard memory configuration, you can have a
maximum Fast Frame record length of 8M, 4M, or 2M for 1, 2, or 4
channel operation, respectively. For instruments with 3M memory
option, the maximum Fast Frame record lengths are 16M, 8M, or 4M
for 1, 2, or 4 channel operation, respectively
For more information about valid data point ranges, select Specifications from the Help menu; then select the Horizontal & Acquisition
tab.
Example 1
HORIZONTAL:FASTFRAME:LENGTH 5000
This command sets the horizontal record length to 5000 sample points
in each frame.
Example 2
HORIZONTAL:FASTFRAME:LENGTH?
This query might return
:HORIZONTAL:FASTFRAME:LENGTH 25000
This indicates that the FastFrame record length is set to 25000 sample
points in each frame.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 333 --
HORizontal:FASTframe:MULtipleframes:
FRAMESTart:<wfm>
Description
This command sets or queries the start frame number on the specified
waveform for the FastFrame multiple frames feature. Valid waveforms
include CH<x>, MATH<x>, and REF<x>. The value of x can be an
integer ranging from 1 through 4 in four--channel instruments and 1
through 2 in two--channel instruments. The multiple frames feature supports displaying multiple frames in an overlaid manner.
Group
Horizontal
Related Commands
HORizontal:FASTframe:MULtipleframes:NUMFRames:<wfm>
<NR1>,
HORizontal:FASTframe:MULtipleframes:MODe,
HORizontal:FASTframe:COUNt
Syntax 1
HORizontal:FASTframe:MULtipleframes:FRAMESTart:<wfm> <NR1>
Syntax 2
HORizontal:FASTframe:MULtipleframes:FRAMESTart:<wfm>?
Argument
H <NR1>
This specifies the start frame number on the specified waveform.
Example 1
HORIZONTAL:FASTFRAME:MULTIPLEFRAMES:FRAMESTART:CH1 3
This command sets the start frame number to frame 3 on channel 1.
Example 2
HORIZONTAL:FASTFRAME:MULTIPLEFRAMES:FRAMESTART?
This query might return
:HORIZONTAL:FASTFRAME:MULTIFRAMES:FRAMESTART:CH1 3
This indicates that the start frame number is frame 3 for channel 1.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 334 --
HORizontal:FASTframe:MULtipleframes:MODe
Description
This command sets or queries the mode for the FastFrame multiple
frames feature. This feature displays multiple frames in an overlaid
manner.
Group
Horizontal
Related Commands
HORizontal:FASTframe:MULtipleframes:FRAMESTart:<wfm>
<NR1>,
HORizontal:FASTframe:MULtipleframes:NUMFRames:<wfm>
<NR1>,
HORizontal:FASTframe:COUNt
Syntax 1
HORizontal:FASTframe:MULtipleframes:MODe
{OFF|OVERlay}
Syntax 2
HORizontal:FASTframe:MULtipleframes:MODe?
Argument
H OFF
This turns off the multiple frames mode.
H OVERlay
This sets the multiple frames mode to overlay.
Example 1
HORizontal:FASTframe:MULtipleframes:MODe OFF
This command turns off the multiple frames mode.
Example 2
HORizontal:FASTframe:MULtipleframes:MODe?
This query might return:
:HORIZONTAL:FASTFRAME:MULTIPLEFRAMES:MODE OFF
This indicates that the multiple frames mode is off.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 335 --
HORizontal:FASTframe:MULtipleframes:
NUMFRames:<wfm>
Description
This command sets or queries the number of frames on the specified
waveform for the FastFrame multiple frames feature. The multiple
frames feature supports displaying multiple frames in an overlaid manner.
Group
Horizontal
Related Commands
HORizontal:FASTframe:MULtipleframes:FRAMESTart:<wfm>
<NR1>,
HORizontal:FASTframe:MULtipleframes:MODe,
HORizontal:FASTframe:COUNt
Syntax 1
HORizontal:FASTframe:MULtipleframes:NUMFRames:<wfm> <NR1>
Syntax 2
HORizontal:FASTframe:MULtipleframes:NUMFRames:<wfm>?
Argument
H <wfm>
This specifies the waveform source. Valid waveforms include CH<x>,
MATH<x>, and REF<x>. Express the x variable as an integer ranging
from 1 through 4 in four--channel instruments and 1 through 2 in two-channel instruments.
H <NR1>
This represents the number of frames on the specified waveform.
Example 1
HORIZONTAL:FASTFRAME:MULTIPLEFRAMES:NUMFRAMES:CH1 3
This command sets the number of frames to 3 on channel 1.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 336 --
Example 2
HORIZONTAL:FASTFRAME:MULTIPLEFRAMES:NUMFRAMES:CH1?
This query might return:
:HORIZONTAL:FASTFRAME:MULTIPLEFRAMES:NUMFRAMES:CH1 1
This indicates that the number of frames on channel 1 is 3.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 337 --
HORizontal:FASTframe:REF:FRAMe
Description
This command sets or queries the FastFrame reference frame number.
The Reference Frame number is used to calculate time differences for
each frame and displays those differences in the graticule. This command is equivalent to selecting FastFrame Setup in the Horiz/Acq menu
and entering a value in the Time Stamps/Frame box.
Group
Horizontal
Related Commands
HORizontal:FASTframe:REF:SOUrce, HORizontal:FASTframe:TIMEstamp:DELTa:<wfm>?, HORizontal:FASTframe:TIMEstamp:REF?,
HORizontal:FASTframe:TRACk
Syntax 1
HORizontal:FASTframe:REF:FRAMe <NR1>
Syntax 2
HORizontal:FASTframe:REF:FRAMe?
Argument
H <NR1>
This specifies the FastFrame reference frame.
Example 1
HORizontal:FASTframe:REF:FRAMe 2
This command sets the FastFrame reference frame to 2.
Example 2
HORizontal:FASTframe:REF:FRAMe?
This query might return
:HORIZONTAL:FASTFRAME:REF:FRAME 3
indicating that the FastFrame reference frame is currently set to 3.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 338 --
HORizontal:FASTframe:REF:SOUrce
Description
This command sets or queries FastFrame Reference waveform source.
This is equivalent to selecting FastFrame Setup from the Horiz/Acq
menu and choosing the reference source.
Group
Horizontal
Related Commands
HORizontal:FASTframe:REF:FRAMe, HORizontal:FASTframe:TIMEstamp:DELTa:<wfm>?, HORizontal:FASTframe:TIMEstamp:REF?,
HORizontal:FASTframe:TRACk
Syntax 1
HORizontal:FASTframe:REF:SOUrce <wfm>
Syntax 2
HORizontal:FASTframe:REF:SOUrce?
Argument
H <wfm>
This specifies the FastFrame Reference waveform source. Valid waveforms include CH<x>, MATH<x>, and REF<x>. The x variable
can be expressed as an integer ranging from 1 through 4 for 4--channel models and 1 to 2 for 2--channel models.
Example 1
HORizontal:FASTframe:REF:SOUrce CH2
This command sets the horizontal FastFrame waveform reference
source to CH2.
Example 2
HORizontal:FASTframe:REF:SOUrce?
This query might return
:HORIZONTAL:FASTFRAME:REF:SOURCE CH2
This indicates that the FastFrame waveform source is currently set to
CH2.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 339 --
HORizontal:FASTframe:SELECTED:<wfm>
Description
This command sets or returns the FastFrame Selected frame number on
the specified waveform. This is equivalent to selecting FastFrame Setup
from the Horiz/Acq menu, and then choosing the waveform source and
frame. Valid waveforms include CH<x>, MATH<x> and REF<x>. The
x variable can be expressed as an integer ranging from 1 through 4 for
4--channel models and 1 to 2 for 2--channel models.
Group
Horizontal
Related Commands
HORizontal:FASTframe:TRACk, HORizontal:FASTframe:TIMEstamp:DELTa:<wfm>?, HORizontal:FASTframe:TIMEstamp:REF?
Syntax 1
HORizontal:FASTframe:SELECTED:<wfm> <NR1>
Syntax 2
HORizontal:FASTframe:SELECTED?
Argument
H <NR1>
This specifies the selected frame number on the specified waveform.
Example 1
HORIZONTAL:FASTFRAME:SELECTED:CH2 33
This command sets the FastFrame Selected frame number on channel 2
to 33.
Example 2
HORIZONTAL:FASTFRAME:SELECTED:CH4?
This query might return
:HORIZONTAL:FASTFRAME:SELECTED:CH4 25
This indicates that the FastFrame frame number on channel 4 is set to
25.
Example 3
HORIZONTAL:FASTFRAME:SELECTED?
This query might return
:HORIZONTAL:FASTFRAME:SELECTED:CH1 2; CH2 2;
CH3 2; CH4 2; MATH1 2; MATH2 2; MATH3 2; MATH4
2; REF1 8; REF2 8; REF3 8; REF4 8
This indicates all waveforms’ Fastframe selected frame numbers.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 340 --
HORizontal:FASTframe:STATE
Description
This command sets or returns the state of FastFrame acquisition. This is
equivalent to setting FastFrame to On in the FastFrame Setup menu.
FastFrame lets users capture a series of triggered acquisitions with
minimal time between them.
The digitizing oscilloscope in FastFrame mode is ready to accept a continuous burst of triggers 400 ms after the controller sends the ACQuire:STATE RUN command.
Group
Horizontal
Related Commands
ACQuire:STATE RUN
Syntax 1
HORizontal:FASTframe:STATE {ON|OFF|<NR1>}
Syntax 2
HORizontal:FASTframe:STATE?
Arguments
H <ON>
This turns on horizontal FastFrame.
H <OFF>
This turns off horizontal FastFrame.
H <NR1>
A 0 turns off horizontal FastFrame; any other value turns on horizontal FastFrame.
Example 1
HORIZONTAL:FASTFRAME:STATE ON
This command turns on horizontal FastFrame.
Example 2
HORIZONTAL:FASTFRAME:STATE?
This query might return
:HORIZONTAL:FASTFRAME:STATE 0
This indicates that the current state of FastFrame is off.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 341 --
HORizontal:FASTframe:SUMFrame
Description
This command sets or queries the summary frame mode. When ENVelope is selected, the last frame in a FastFrame acquisition is an envelope
of all the prior frames in the acquisition. When AVErage is selected, the
last frame is replaced with a frame that is the computed average of all
the prior frames in the acquisition. For the summary frame control to be
active, the number of frames must be two or greater.
Group
Horizontal
Syntax 1
HORizontal:FASTframe:SUMFrame {NONE|ENVelope|AVErage}
Syntax 2
HORizontal:FASTframe:SUMFrame?
Arguments
H NONE
This turns off the summary mode for FastFrame. This is the default
setting.
H ENVelope
This argument displays the last frame in a FastFrame acquisition as an
envelope of all the prior frames in the acquisition.
H AVErage
This argument displays the last frame in a FastFrame acquisition as a
frame that is the computed average of all the prior frames in the acquisition.
Example 1
HORizontal:FASTframe:SUMframe NONE
This command turns off the summary frame feature.
Example 2
HORizontal:FASTframe:SUMframe?
This query might return
:HORIZONTAL:FASTFRAME:SUMFRAME AVERAGE
This indicates that the summary mode for FastFRame is set to AVERAGE and will display the last frame in the acquisition as the average of
all the prior frames in the acquisition.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 342 --
HORizontal:FASTframe:TIMEStamp:ALL:<wfm>?
Description
This query--only command returns the frame number and time stamp
for each frame between requested frames, inclusive, within the specified waveform. Argument order is unimportant. Valid waveforms include CH<x>, MATH<x> and REF<x>. The x variable can be expressed as an integer ranging from 1 through 4 for 4--channel models
and 1 to 2 for 2--channel models.
The format of the output is as follows:
DD MON YYYY HH:MM:SS.xxx xxx xxx xxx
H
DD MON YYYY is day, month, and year
H
HH:MM:SS is hours, minutes, and seconds
H
.xxx xxx xxx xxx is fractions of a second to picoseconds
Group
Horizontal
Syntax
HORizontal:FASTframe:TIMEStamp:ALL:<wfm>?
<NR1>, <NR1>
Arguments
H <NR1>
This specifies the selected ”from” frame number within the specified
waveform.
H <NR1>
This specifies the selected ”to” frame number within the specified
waveform.
Example
HORizontal:FASTframe:TIMEStamp:ALL:CH2? 4,1
This query might return
:HORIZONTAL:FASTFRAME:TIMESTAMP:ALL:CH1
4,1,”02 Mar 2000 20:10:54.542 037 272 620”
This is the list of time stamps from frame 1 through frame 4 on channel
1.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 343 --
HORizontal:FASTframe:TIMEStamp:BETWeen:<wfm>?
Description
This query--only command returns the relative trigger for the delta time
between the specified frames, within the specified waveform. Valid
waveforms include CH<x>, MATH<x> and REF<x>. The x variable
can be expressed as an integer ranging from 1 through 4 for 4--channel
models and 1 to 2 for 2--channel models.
The format of the delta time output is as follows:
H
HH:MM:SS is hours, minutes, and seconds
H
.xxx xxx xxx xxx is fractions of a second to picoseconds
Group
Horizontal
Syntax
HORizontal:FASTframe:TIMEStamp:BETWeen:<wfm>?
<NR1>, <NR1>
Arguments
H <NR1>
This specifies the selected ”from” frame number within the specified
waveform.
H <NR1>
This specifies the selected ”to” frame number within the specified
waveform.
Example
HORIZONTAL:FASTFRAME:TIMESTAMP:BETWEEN:CH1?
5,2
This query might return
:HORIZONTAL:FASTFRAME:TIMESTAMP:BETWEEN:CH1
5,2,”00:00:00.010 000 540 624”
This is the delta of channel 1’s Time Stamp frame 5 -- Time Stamp
frame 2 (TS[5]--TS[2]).
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 344 --
HORizontal:FASTframe:TIMEStamp:DELTa:<wfm>?
Description
This query--only command returns the relative time between the triggers of the FastFrame Selected and the FastFrame Reference, within the
specified waveform. Valid waveforms include CH<x>, MATH<x>, and
REF<x>. The x variable can be expressed as an integer ranging from 1
through 4 for 4--channel models and 1 to 2 for 2--channel models.
The format of the output is as follows:
HH:MM:SS.xxx xxx xxx xxx
H
HH:MM:SS is hours, minutes, and seconds
H
.xxx xxx xxx xxx is fractions of a second to picoseconds
Group
Horizontal
Syntax
HORizontal:FASTframe:TIMEStamp:DELTa:<wfm>?
Example
HORIZONTAL:FASTRAME:TIMESTAMP:DELTA:CH1?
This query might return
:HORIZONTAL:FASTFRAME:TIMESTAMP:DELTA:CH1
”00:00:00.006 000 306 556”
This is the delta time stamp of FastFrame Selected Frame on channel 1
-- FastFrame Reference Frame (TS[C1 Selected]--TS[Reference]).
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 345 --
HORizontal:FASTframe:TIMEStamp:FRAMe:<wfm>?
Description
This query--only command returns the absolute trigger date and time for
the specified frame and waveform. Valid waveforms include CH<x>,
MATH<x> and REF<x>. The x variable can be expressed as an integer
ranging from 1 through 4 for 4--channel models and 1 to 2 for 2--channel models.
The format of the output is as follows:
DD MON YYYY HH:MM:SS.xxx xxx xxx xxx
H
DD MON YYYY is day, month, and year
H
HH:MM:SS is hours, minutes, and seconds
H
.xxx xxx xxx xxx is fractions of a second to picoseconds
Group
Horizontal
Syntax
HORizontal:FASTframe:TIMEStamp:FRAMe:<wfm>?
<NR1>
Argument
H <NR1>
The frame number for which the timestamp will be returned on the
specified waveform.
Example
HORizontal:FASTframe:TIMEStamp:FRAMe:CH1? 10
This query might return
:HORIZONTAL:FASTFRAME:TIMESTAMP:FRAME:CH1
10,”02 Mar 2000 20:10:54.536 036 928 432”
which is the time stamp of channel 1, frame 10.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 346 --
HORizontal:FASTframe:TIMEStamp:REF?
Description
This query--only command returns the absolute trigger date and time for
FastFrame reference.
The format of the output is as follows:
DD MON YYYY HH:MM:SS.xxx xxx xxx xxx
H
DD MON YYYY is day, month, and year
H
HH:MM:SS is hours, minutes, and seconds
H
.xxx xxx xxx xxx is fractions of a second to picoseconds
Group
Horizontal
Related Commands
HORizontal:FASTframe:REF:FRAMe, HORizontal:FASTframe:REF:SOUrce
Syntax
HORizontal:FASTframe:TIMEStamp:REF?
Example
HORIZONTAL:FASTFRAME:TIMESTAMP:REF?
This query might return
:HORIZONTAL:FASTFRAME:TIMESTAMP:REF ”02 Mar
2000 20:10:54.533 036 838 784”
This is the time stamp of FastFrame Reference.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 347 --
HORizontal:FASTframe:TIMEStamp:
SELECTED:<wfm>?
Description
This query--only command returns the absolute trigger date and time for
the FastFrame Selected, within the specified waveform. Valid waveforms include CH<x>, MATH<x> and REF<x>. The x variable can be
expressed as an integer ranging from 1 through 4 for 4--channel models
and 1 to 2 for 2--channel models.
The format of the output is as follows:
DD MON YYYY HH:MM:SS.xxx xxx xxx xxx
H
DD MON YYYY is day, month, and year
H
HH:MM:SS is hours, minutes, and seconds
H
.xxx xxx xxx xxx is fractions of a second to picoseconds
Group
Horizontal
Related Commands
HORizontal:FASTframe:SELECTED:<wfm>?
Syntax
HORizontal:FASTframe:TIMEStamp:SELECTED:<wfm>?
Example
HORIZONTAL:FASTFRAME:TIMESTAMP:SELECTED:REF1?
This query might return
:HORIZONTAL:FASTFRAME:TIMESTAMP:SELECTED:REF1
”02 MAR 2000 20:10:54:539 037 145 340”
This is the time stamp of FastFrame Selected on reference 1.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 348 --
HORizontal:FASTframe:TRACk
Description
This command sets up or returns the state of FastFrame tracking feature. This command is equivalent to selecting FastFrame Setup from the
Horiz/Acq menu and then clicking the desired Frame Tracking state.
When FastFrame Track is set to ”live”, the channel and math waveforms are locked together. Adjusting a channel waveform also adjusts a
related math waveform. All reference waveforms are also locked together but they are separate from channel and math waveforms.
For example, when you set the Selected Frame Source Ch1 to Frame 3,
then Selected Frame Ch2, Ch3, Ch4, Math1, Math2, Math3 and Math4
are also set to Frame 3.
When you set the Selected Frame Source Ref1 to Frame 2, then Selected Frame Ref2, Ref3 and Ref4 are also set to Frame 2. If the Frame
Tracking is set to Live, changing Selected Frame Ch1 will not affect the
Selected Frame Ref1 frame of the Reference Frame setting.
When FastFrame Track is set to ”all”, the channel, math and reference
waveforms are locked together. Adjusting a channel waveform also
adjusts the related math and reference waveforms.
For example, when you set the Selected Frame Source Ch1 to Frame 3,
then Selected Frame Ch2, Ch3, Ch4, Math1, Math2, Math3, Math4,
Ref1, Ref2, Ref3 and Ref4 are also set to Frame 3.
Group
Horizontal
Related Commands
HORizontal:FASTframe:REF:FRAMe, HORizontal:FASTframe:REF:SOUrce, HORizontal:FASTframe:SELECTED:<wfm>?
Syntax 1
HORizontal:FASTframe:TRACk {LIVE|ALL}
Syntax 2
HORizontal:FASTframe:TRACk?
Arguments
H LIVE
This sets FastFrame Track to Live.
H ALL
This sets FastFrame Track to All.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 349 --
Example 1
HORIZONTAL:FASTFRAME:TRACk LIVE
This command sets FastFrame Track to live.
Example 2
HORIZONTAL:FASTFRAME:TRACK?
This query might return
:HORIZONTAL:FASTFRAME:TRACK ALL
This indicates that all FastFrame Selected Frames and the FastFrame
Reference will be locked together.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 350 --
HORizontal:FASTframe?
Description
This query--only command returns all of the settings for the horizontal
FastFrame commands.
Group
Horizontal
Syntax
HORizontal:FASTframe?
Example
HORizontal:FASTframe?
This query might return
:HORIZONTAL:FASTFRAME:STATE 1;READOUTS 0;SUMFRAME NONE;MULTIPLEFRAMES:MODE OVERLAY;FRAMESTART:CH1 1;CH2 1;CH3 1;CH4 1;MATH1 1;MATH2
1;MATH3 1;MATH4 1;REF1 1;REF2 1;REF3 1;REF4
1;:HORIZONTAL:FASTFRAME:MULTIPLEFRAMES:NUMFRAMES:CH1 2;CH2 2;CH3 2;CH4 2;MATH1 2;MATH2
2;MATH3 2;MATH4 2;REF1 2;REF2 2;REF3 2;REF4
2;:HORIZONTAL:FASTFRAME:LENGTH 500;COUNT 2;SELECTED:CH1 2;CH2 2;CH3 2;CH4 2;MATH1 2;MATH2
2;MATH3 2;MATH4 2;REF1 2;REF2 2;REF3 2;REF4
2;:HORIZONTAL:FASTFRAME:REF:SOURCE CH4;FRAME
1;:HORIZONTAL:FASTFRAME:TRACK ALL
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 351 --
HORizontal[:MAIn]:DELay:MODe
Description
This command sets or queries the time base trigger delay mode. This
command is equivalent to choosing Delay Mode On from the Horiz/
Acq menu.
Group
Horizontal
Related Commands
HORizontal[:MAIn]:DELay:TIMe
Syntax 1
HORizontal[:MAIn]:DELay:MODe [ON|OFF|<NR1>]
Syntax 2
HORizontal[:MAIn]:DELay:MODe?
Arguments
H ON
This enables the time base trigger delay mode.
H OFF
This disables the time base trigger delay mode.
H <NR1>
A 0 disables the time base trigger delay mode, any other value enables
the time base trigger delay mode.
Example 1
HORizontal:DELay:MODe ON
This command enables the time base trigger delay mode.
Example 2
HORizontal:DELay:MODe?
This query might return
:HORIZONTAL:DELAY:MODE 1
This indicates that the time base trigger delay mode is currently enabled.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 352 --
HORizontal[:MAIn]:DELay:POSition
Description
This command sets or queries the time base position when Horizontal
Delay Mode is turned on. This command is equivalent to selecting Horizontal/Acquisition Setup from the Horiz/Acq menu and then entering a
Ref Point value.
Group
Horizontal
Related Commands
HORizontal[:MAIn}:DELay:TIMe
Syntax 1
HORizontal[:MAIn]:DELay:POSition <NR3>
Syntax 2
HORizontal[:MAIn]:DELay:POSition?
Arguments
H <NR3>
This is from 0 to ≈100 and is the percentage of the waveform that is
displayed left of the center graticule.
Note: The upper limit of the waveform position is slightly limited by
a value that is determined from the record length (upper limit = 100 -1/record length).
Example 1
HORizontal:DELay:POSition 5E+1
This command sets the time base trigger delay position to 50 percent.
Example 2
HORizontal:DELay:POSition?
This query might return
:HORIZONTAL:MAIN:DELAY:POSITION 5.0000E+01
This indicates that the time base trigger delay position is currently set to
50 percent.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 353 --
HORizontal[:MAIn]:DELay:TIMe
Description
This command sets or queries the time base trigger delay time. This
command is equivalent to selecting Position/Scale from the Horiz/Acq
menu and choosing a value for Horiz Delay.
Group
Horizontal
Related Commands
HORizontal[:MAIn]:DELay:MODe, HORizontal[:MAIn]:DELay:POSition
Syntax 1
HORizontal[:MAIn]:DELay:TIMe <NR3>
Syntax 2
HORizontal[:MAIn]:DELay:TIMe?
Argument
H <NR3>
This specifies the time base trigger delay time setting, typically represented in seconds.
Example 1
HORizontal:DELay:TIMe 5.0E-3
This command sets the time base trigger delay time to 5 ms.
Example 2
HORizontal:DELay:TIMe?
This query might return
:HORIZONTAL:MAIN:DELAY 5.0000E-05
This indicates that the time delay setting is 5 µs.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 354 --
HORizontal:MAIn:INTERPRatio?
Description
This query--only command returns the Horizontal Main time base interpolation ratio. The ratio is useful for calculating the maximum sampling
rate when users request sampling rates that are faster than the maximum
rate specified by the acquisition hardware.
The query HORizontal:MAIn:SAMPLERate? returns the sampling rate
(real and interpolated). The real maximum sampling rate, as specified
by the acquisition hardware, is:
Max sampling rate =
HORizontal:MAIn;SAMPLERate?/HORizontal:MAIn:INTERPRatio?
The default value is 1.
An interpolation ratio other than 1 means that displayed and retrieved
waveforms contain additional points that are derived through interpolation. At such times, the retrieved waveform data is actually 16--bit data.
You should set the data width accordingly.
Group
Horizontal
Syntax
HORizontal:MAIn:INTERPRatio?
Example
HORIZONTAL:MAIN:INTERPRATIO?
This query might return
:HORIZONTAL:MAIN:INTERPRATIO 10.0
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 355 --
HORizontal[:MAIn]:POSition
This command either positions the waveform horizontally on the display or returns the horizontal position on the display and is identical to
the HORizontal:POSition command. When Horizontal Delay mode is
turned off, this command is equivalent to adjusting the HORIZONTAL
POSITION knob on the front--panel. When Horizontal Delay mode is
turned on, this command is equivalent to selecting Horizontal/Acquisition from the Horiz/Acq menu and then choosing a Horizontal Ref
Point value.
Group
Horizontal
Related Commands
HORizontal[:MAIn]:DELay:MODe
Syntax 1
HORizontal:MAIn:POSition <NR3>
Syntax 2
HORizontal:MAIn:POSition?
Arguments
H <NR3>
This argument can range from 0 to ≈100 and is the percentage of the
waveform that is displayed left of the center graticule.
Note: The upper limit of the waveform position is slightly limited by
a value that is determined from the record length (upper limit = 100 -1/record length).
Example 1
HORizontal:MAIn:POSition 5.000E+01
This command sets the horizontal position of the waveform such that
10 percent of the waveform is to the left of center of the screen.
Example 2
HORizontal:MAIn:POSition?
This query might return
:HORIZONTAL:MAIN:POSITION 5.0000E+01
This indicates that the horizontal position of the waveform on the
screen is currently set to 50 percent.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 356 --
HORizontal:MAIn:SAMPLERate
Description
This command sets the horizontal sample rate to the desired number of
samples per second. The record length is automatically adjusted at the
same time to maintain a constant number of data points in each frame.
The query form of this command returns the current horizontal sample
rate. This command is equivalent to selecting Horizontal/Acquisition
Setup from the Horiz/Acq menu and then entering the desired Sample
Rate.
Group
Horizontal
Related Commands
HORizontal:RESOlution
Syntax 1
HORizontal:MAIn:SAMPLERate <NR3>
Syntax 2
HORizontal:MAIn:SAMPLERate?
Arguments
H <NR3>
This represents the size of the sample rate, which ranges from 5 S/s to
250 GS/s.
Example 1
HORizontal:MAIn:SAMPLERate 125E6
This command sets the sample rate to the sample rate increment that is
closest to 125 MS/s.
Example 2
HORizontal:MAIn:SAMPLERate?
This query might return
:HORIZONTAL:MAIN:SAMPLERATE 2.5000E+09
This indicates that the sample rate is currently set to 2.5 GS/s.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 357 --
HORizontal[:MAIn]:SCAle
Description
This command sets the time per division for the time base or returns its
horizontal scale on the display and is identical to the HORizontal:SCAle command. The specified scale value is rounded to a valid
scale setting. This command is equivalent to selecting Position/Scale
from the Horiz/Acq menu and then choosing a Scale value.
Group
Horizontal
Related Commands
HORizontal:SCAle
Syntax 1
HORizontal:MAIn:SCAle <NR3>
Syntax 2
HORizontal:MAIn:SCAle?
Argument
H <NR3>
This is the time per division. The range is from 200 ps through 40 s.
Example 1
HORizontal:MAIn:SCAle 2E-6
This command sets the main scale to 2µs per division.
Example 2
HORizontal:MAIn:SCAle?
This query might return:
:HORIZONTAL:MAIN:SCALE 2.0000E-06
This indicates that the main scale is currently set to 2 µs per division.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 358 --
HORizontal:MAIn:UNIts
Description
This command sets or returns the units for the horizontal time base. It is
equivalent to setting the HORizontal:MAIn:UNIts:STRing
Group
Horizontal
Related Commands
HORizontal:MAIn:UNIts:STRing
Syntax 1
HORizontal:MAIn:UNIts <STRing>
Syntax 2
HORizontal:MAIn:UNIts?
Arguments
H <STRing>
This is the time base units string.
Example 1
HORizontal:MAIn:UNIts ”lum”
This command sets the time base multiplier to 5.5, the units to lumens
and the time base units offset to 2.9.
Example 2
HORizontal:MAIn:UNIts?
This query might return:
:HORIZONTAL:MAIN:UNITS STRING ”lum”.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 359 --
HORizontal:MAIn:UNIts:STRing
Description
This command sets or returns the units string for the horizontal time
base trigger delay.
Group
Horizontal
Related Commands
HORizontal:MAIn:UNIts
Syntax 1
HORizontal:MAIn:UNIts:STRing <string>
Syntax 2
HORizontal:MAIn:UNIts:STRing?
Argument
H <string>
This is the time base units string.
Example 1
HORizontal:MAIn:UNIts:STRing lum
This command sets the units string for the time base trigger delay to
lumens.
Example 2
HORizontal:MAIn:UNIts:STRing?
This query might return
:HORIZONTAL:MAIN:UNITS:STRING ”lum”
This indicates that the units string for the time base trigger delay is set
to lumens.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 360 --
HORizontal:MAIn?
Description
This query--only command returns the time per division of the time
base. This command is equivalent to selecting Position/Scale from the
Horiz/Acq menu.
Group
Horizontal
Related Commands
HORizontal:SCAle
Syntax
HORizontal:MAIn?
Example
HORizontal:MAIn?
This query might return:
:HORIZONTAL:MAIN:INTERPRATIO 1.0000;SCALE
40.0000E-9;POSITION 50.0000;SAMPLERATE
1.2500E+9;UNITS:STRING ”s”
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 361 --
HORizontal:POSition
Description
This command either positions the waveform horizontally on the display or returns its horizontal position on the display. When Horizontal
Delay Mode is turned off, this command is equivalent to adjusting the
HORIZONTAL POSITION knob on the front panel.
Group
Horizontal
Related Commands
HORizontal[:MAIn]:DELay:MODe
Syntax 1
HORizontal:POSition <NR3>
Syntax 2
HORizontal:POSition?
Argument
H <NR3>
This is from 0 to ≈100 and is the percentage of the waveform that is
displayed left of the center graticule.
Note: The upper limit of the waveform position is slightly limited by
a value that is determined from the record length (upper limit = 100 -1/record length).
Example 1
HORizontal:POSition 10
This command sets the horizontal position of the waveform such that
10% of the waveform is to the left of screen center.
Example 2
HORizontal:POSition?
This query might return:
:HORIZONTAL:POSITION 5.0000E+01
This indicates the horizontal position of the waveform on the screen.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 362 --
HORizontal:RECOrdlength
Description
This command sets the horizontal record length to the number of data
points in each frame. The query form of this command returns the current horizontal record length. This command is equivalent to selecting
Resolution from the Horiz/Acq menu and then entering the desired Rec
Length.
Group
Horizontal
Syntax 1
HORizontal:RECOrdlength <NR1>
Syntax 2
HORizontal:RECOrdlength?
Argument
H <NR1>
This represents the supported values for horizontal record lengths,
which range from 500 through 400K data points. For more information about valid data point ranges, select Specifications from the Help
menu and choose the Horizontal & Acquisition tab.
Example 1
HORizontal:RECOrdlength 50000
This command specifies that 50000 data points will be acquired for
each record.
Example 2
HORizontal:RECOrdlength?
This query might return:
:HORIZONTAL:RECOrdlength 5000
This indicates that the horizontal record length is equal to 5000 data
points.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 363 --
HORizontal:RESOlution
Description
This command sets the horizontal record length to the number of data
points in each frame. The sample rate is automatically adjusted at the
same time to maintain a constant time per division. The query form of
this command returns the current horizontal record length. This command is equivalent to adjusting the RESOLUTION knob on the front
panel.
Group
Horizontal
Syntax 1
HORizontal:RESOlution <NR1>
Syntax 2
HORizontal:RESOlution?
Argument
H <NR1>
This represents the supported values for horizontal record lengths,
which range from 500 through 400K data points. For more information about valid data point ranges, select Specifications from the Help
menu and choose the Horizontal & Acquisition tab.
Example 1
HORizontal:RESOlution 50000
This command specifies that 50000 data points will be acquired for
each record.
Example 2
HORizontal:RESOlution?
This query might return
:HORIZONTAL:RESOLUTION 5000
This indicates that the horizontal record length is equal to 5000 data
points.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 364 --
HORizontal:ROLL
Description
This command sets or queries the Roll Mode status. Use Roll Mode
when you want to view data at very slow sweep speeds. It is useful for
observing data samples on the screen as they occur. This command is
equivalent to selecting Horizontal/Acquisition Setup from the Horiz/
Acq menu, selecting the Acquisition tab, and setting the Roll Mode to
Auto or Off.
Group
Horizontal
Syntax 1
HORizontal:ROLL {AUTO|OFF|ON}
Syntax 2
HORizontal:ROLL?
Arguments
H AUTO
This enables Roll Mode, if the time/division is set appropriately.
H OFF
This disables Roll Mode.
H ON
This enables Roll Mode, if the time/division is set appropriately.
Example 1
HORizontal:ROLL ON
This command enables Roll Mode.
Example 2
HORizontal:RECOrdlength?
This query might return:
:HORIZONTAL:ROLL OFF
This indicates that the Roll Mode is disabled.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 365 --
HORizontal:SCAle
Description
This command sets or queries the time per division for the time base
and is identical to the HORizontal:MAIn:SCAle command. It is provided to maintain program compatibility with some older models of
Tektronix instruments. This command is equivalent to selecting Position/Scale from the Horiz/Acq menu and entering the desired Scale value.
Group
Horizontal
Related Commands
HORizontal:MAIn:SCAle
Syntax 1
HORizontal:SCAle <NR3>
Syntax 2
HORizontal:SCAle?
Argument
H <NR3>
This is the time per division. The range is from 200 ps to 40 s.
Example 1
HORizontal:SCAle 2E-6
This command sets the main scale to 2 µs per division.
Example 2
HORizontal:SCAle?
This query might return
:HORIZONTAL:SCALE 2.0000E-06
This indicates that the time per division is currently set to 2 µs.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 366 --
HORizontal:TRIGger:POSition
Description
This command sets or queries the position of the trigger and is identical
to the HORizontal:MAIn:POSition command. It is provided to maintain
program compatibility with some older models of Tektronix instruments. This command is equivalent to selecting Position/Scale from the
Horiz/Acq menu and entering the desired Position.
Group
Horizontal
Related Commands
HORizontal:MAIn:POSition
Syntax 1
HORizontal:TRIGger:POSition <NR1>
Syntax 2
HORizontal:TRIGger:POSition?
Argument
H <NR1>
This is the amount of pretrigger information in the waveform. The
range is from 0 to 100%.
Example 1
HORizontal:TRIGger:POSition 50
This command sets the pretrigger information in the waveform to 50%.
Example 2
HORizontal:TRIGger:POSition?
This query might return:
:HORIZONTAL:TRIGGER:POSITION 50
This indicates that 50% of the waveform is pretrigger information.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 367 --
HORizontal?
Description
This query--only command returns all settings for the horizontal commands.
Group
HORizontal
Syntax
HORizontal?
Example
HORizontal?
This query might return the following horizontal settings
:HORIZONTAL:DELAY:MODE 0;POSITION 50.0000;TIME
0.00000000000;:HORIZONTAL:MAIN:INTERPRATIO
1.0000;SCALE 40.0000E-9;POSITION 50.0000;SAMPLERATE 1.2500E+9;UNITS:STRING ”s”;:HORIZONTAL:RECORDLENGTH 500;RESOLUTION 500;ROLL
AUTO;FASTFRAME:STATE 1;READOUTS 0;SUMFRAME
NONE;MULTIPLEFRAMES:MODE OVERLAY;FRAMESTART:CH1 1;CH2 1;CH3 1;CH4 1;MATH1 1;MATH2
1;MATH3 1;MATH4 1;REF1 1;REF2 1;REF3 1;REF4
1;:HORIZONTAL:FASTFRAME:MULTIPLEFRAMES:NUMFRAMES:CH1 2;CH2 2;CH3 2;CH4 2;MATH1 2;MATH2
2;MATH3 2;MATH4 2;REF1 2;REF2 2;REF3 2;REF4
2;:HORIZONTAL:FASTFRAME:LENGTH 500;COUNT 2;SELECTED:CH1 2;CH2 2;CH3 2;CH4 2;MATH1 2;MATH2
2;MATH3 2;MATH4 2;REF1 2;REF2 2;REF3 2;REF4
2;:HORIZONTAL:FASTFRAME:REF:SOURCE CH4;FRAME
1;:HORIZONTAL:FASTFRAME:TRACK ALL
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 368 --
ID?
Description
This query--only command returns identifying information about the
instrument and related firmware.
Group
Miscellaneous
Related Commands
*IDN?
Syntax
ID?
Example
ID?
This query might return
:TEK/TDS5404,CF:91.1CT,FV:01.00.912
This indicates the instrument model number, configured format, and
firmware version number.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 369 --
LIMit:Beep
Description
This command causes the instrument to beep when the waveform data
exceeds the limits set in the limit test (LIMit:STATE must be on).
Group
Limit Test
Related Commands
LIMit:STATE
Syntax 1
LIMit:BEEP {OFF|ON|<NR1>}
Syntax 2
LIMit:BEEP?
Arguments
H OFF
This argument disables the beep.
H ON
This argument enables the beep.
H <NR1>
A 0 disables the beep, any other value enables the beep.
Example 1
LIMit:BEEP ON
This command causes a beep when any waveform data exceeds the limits specified in the limit test.
Example 2
LIMit:BEEP?
This query might return:
:LIMIT:BEEP 0
This indicates that the instrument will not beep when waveform data
exceeds the limits specified in the limit test.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 370 --
LIMit:COMpare
Description
This command resets the Limit Test comparison template.
Group
Limit Test
Related Commands
Syntax
LIMit:COMpare {RESet}
Arguments
H RESet
Resets the Limit template to ”None.”
Example
LIMit:COMpare RESet
This command sets the Limit template to None.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 371 --
LIMit:COMpare:CH<x>
Description
This command sets or queries the template against which to compare
the waveform acquired from the channel specified by x. The template
can be a waveform saved in any of the reference locations (REF1
through REF4 for four--channel instruments or REF1 through REF2 for
two--channel instruments) or none.
Group
Limit Test
Related Commands
Syntax 1
LIMit:COMpare:CH<x> {NONe|REF<x>}
Syntax 2
LIMit:COMpare:CH<x>?
Arguments
H NONe
This argument turns off template testing for the channel specified by
CH<x>.
H REF<x>
This argument selects which reference waveform to use as the template against which to compare the waveforms acquired by the specified channel (CH<x>).
Example 1
LIMit:COMpare:CH1 REF1
This command specifies REF1 as the template waveform against which
to compare waveforms acquired using CH1.
Example 2
LIMit:COMpare:CH2?
This query might return:
:LIMIT:COMPARE:CH2 REF4
This indicates that the waveform acquired by CH2 is compared to the
template waveform stored in REF4.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 372 --
LIMit:COMpare:MATH<x>
Description
This command sets or queries the template against which to compare
the math waveform specified by x, which can be 1 through 4. The template can be a waveform saved in any of the reference locations (REF1
through REF4 for four--channel instruments or REF1 through REF2 for
two--channel instruments) or none.
Group
Limit Test
Related Commands
Syntax 1
LIMit:COMpare:MATH<x> {NONe|REF<x>}
Syntax 2
LIMit:COMpare:MATH<x>?
Arguments
H NONe
This argument turns off template testing for the math waveform specified by MATH<x>.
H REF<x>
This argument selects which reference waveform to use as the template against which to compare the math waveform specified by
MATH<x>.
Example 1
LIMit:COMpare:MATH1 REF1
This command specifies REF1 as the template waveform against which
to compare math waveform MATH1.
Example 2
LIMit:COMpare:MATH2?
This query might return:
:LIMIT:COMPARE:MATH2 REF4
This indicates that the MATH2 waveform is compared to the template
waveform stored in REF4.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 373 --
LIMit:COMpare:REF<x>
Description
This command sets or queries the template against which to compare
the reference waveform specified by x, which can be 1 through 4. The
template can be a waveform saved in any of the reference locations
(REF1 through REF4 for four--channel instruments or REF1 through
REF2 for two--channel instruments) or none.
Group
Limit Test
Related Commands
Syntax 1
LIMit:COMpare:REF<x> {NONe|REF<x>}
Syntax 2
LIMit:COMpare:REF<x>?
Arguments
H NONe
This argument turns off template testing for the math waveform specified by MATH<x>.
H REF<x>
This argument selects which reference waveform to use as the template against which to compare the reference waveform specified by
REF<x>.
Example 1
LIMit:COMpare:REF2 REF1
This command specifies REF2 as the template waveform against which
to compare reference waveform REF1.
Example 2
LIMit:COMpare:REF2?
This query might return:
:LIMIT:COMPARE:REF2 REF4
This indicates that the REF4 waveform is compared to the template
waveform stored in REF2.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 374 --
LIMit:EMail
Description
This command sets or queries whether an e--mail is generated when the
source waveform data exceeds the limits specified for the limit test.
Group
Limit Test
Related Commands
Syntax 1
LIMit:EMail {OFF|ON|<NR1>}
Syntax 2
LIMit:EMail?
Arguments
H OFF
This argument disables generating an e--mail when the source waveform exceeds the test limits.
H ON
This argument enables generating an e--mail when the source waveform exceeds the test limits.
H NR1
A 0 disables the e--mail feature so that when the source waveform
data exceeds the limits set by the limit test, an e--mail is not generated;
any other value enables the e--mail feature so that when the source
waveform data exceeds the limits set by the limit test, an e--mail is
generated. For queries, a 0 is returned if the e--mail feature is off; a 1
is returned if the e--mail feature is on.
Example 1
LIMit:EMail 1
This command enables the e--mail feature so that when the source waveform data exceeds the limits set by the limit test, an e--mail is generated.
Example 2
LIMit:EMail?
This query might return:
:LIMIT:EMAIL 0
This indicates that the e--mail feature is disabled and that an e--mail will
not be generated when the source waveform exceeds the limits of the
limit test.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 375 --
LIMit:HARDCopy
Description
This command sets or queries whether a hardcopy operation is executed
on the waveform when any waveform data exceeds the limit set in the
limit test. LIMit:STATE must be set to ON for the hardcopy operation
to execute. The hardcopy operation uses the port and prints in the format and layout specified by the HARDCopy commands.
Group
Limit Test
Related Commands
HARDCopy:FILEName, HARDCopy:PORT, LIMit:STATE
Syntax 1
LIMit:HARDCopy {OFF|ON|<NR1>}
Syntax 2
LIMit:HARDCopy?
Arguments
H OFF
This argument disables the hardcopy operation.
H ON
This argument turns on the hardcopy operation for the waveform
when any waveform data exceeds the limits set by the limit test.
H NR1
A 0 disables the hardcopy operation; any other value turns on the
hardcopy operation for the waveform when any waveform data exceeds the limits set by the limit test. For queries, a 0 is returned if the
hardcopy operation is off; a 1 is returned if the hardcopy operation is
on.
Example 1
LIMit:HARDCopy ON
This command specifies that the hardcopy operation will occur for the
waveform when any waveform data exceeds the limits specified in the
limit test.
Example 2
LIMit:HARDCopy?
This query might return:
:LIMIT:HARDCOPY 0
This indicates that the harcopy operation is disabled.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 376 --
LIMit:HIGHLIGHTHits
Description
This command sets or queries whether violation highlighting occurs
when limit testing is active, and, if the RESET argument is set, clears
the highlighting.
Group
Limit Test
Related Commands
Syntax 1
LIMit:HIGHLIGHTHits {OFF|ON|RESET|<NR1>}
Syntax 2
LIMit:HIGHLIGHTHits?
Arguments
H OFF
This argument disables violation highlighting when limit testing is
active.
H ON
This argument enables violation highlighting when limit testing is
active.
H RESET
This argument clears the violation highlighting.
H NR1
A 0 disables the violation highlighting when limit testing is active;
any other value enables the violation highlighting feature when limit
testing is active. For queries, a 0 is returned if the violation highlighting feature is off; a 1 is returned if the violation highlighting feature is
on.
Example 1
LIMit:HIGHLIGHTHits 1
This command enables the violation highlighting when the limit testing
is active.
Example 2
LIMit:HIGHLIGHTHits?
This query might return:
:LIMIT:HIGHLIGHTHITS 0
This indicates that the violation highlighting feature is disabled.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 377 --
LIMit:LOCk
Description
This command sets or queries whether vertical scaling and positioning
affect both source and template for template comparison pairs.
Group
Limit Test
Related Commands
Syntax 1
LIMit:LOCk {OFF|ON|<NR1>}
Syntax 2
LIMit:LOCk?
Arguments
H OFF
This argument disables the lock feature.
H ON
This argument enables the lock feature.
H NR1
A 0 disables the lock feature; any other value enables the lock feature.
For queries, a 0 is returned if the lock feature is off; a 1 is returned if
the lock feature is on.
Example 1
LIMit:LOCk ON
This command enables the lock feature so that vertical scaling and positioning affect both the source and the template for template comparison
pairs.
Example 2
LIMit:LOCk?
This query might return:
:LIMIT:LOCK 0
This indicates that the lock feature is disabled.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 378 --
LIMit:LOG
Description
This command sets or queries whether a log file is saved when the
source waveform data exceeds the test limits.
Group
Limit Test
Related Commands
Syntax 1
LIMit:LOG {OFF|ON|NR1}
Syntax 2
LIMit:LOG?
Arguments
H OFF
This argument disables saving a log file when the source waveform
exceeds the test limits.
H ON
This argument enables saving a log file when the source waveform
exceeds the test limits.
H NR1
A 0 disables the save log file feature so that when the source waveform data exceeds the limits set by the limit test, a log file is not
saved; any other value enables the save log file feature so that when
the source waveform data exceeds the limits set by the limit test, a log
file is saved. For queries, a 0 is returned if the save log file feature is
off; a 1 is returned if the save log file feature is on.
Example 1
LIMit:LOG 1
This command enables the save lof file feature so that when the source
waveform data exceeds the limits set by the limit test, a lof file is saved.
Example 2
LIMit:LOG?
This query might return:
:LIMIT:LOG 0
This indicates that the save log file feature is disabled and that a log file
will not be saved when the source waveform exceeds the limits of the
limit test.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 379 --
LIMit:SAVEWFM
Description
This command sets or queries whether the source waveform is saved
when the source waveform data exceeds the test limits.
Group
Limit Test
Related Commands
Syntax 1
LIMit:SAVEWFM {OFF|ON|NR1}
Syntax 2
LIMit:SAVEWFM?
Arguments
H OFF
This argument disables saving the source waveform when it exceeds
the test limits.
H ON
This argument enables saving the source waveform when it exceeds
the test limits.
H NR1
A 0 disables the save waveform feature so that when the source waveform data exceeds the limits set by the limit test, the source waveform
is not saved; any other value enables the save waveform feature so
that when the source waveform data exceeds the limits set by the limit
test, the source waveform is saved. For queries, a 0 is returned if the
save waveform feature is off; a 1 is returned if the save waveform
feature is on.
Example 1
LIMit:SAVEWFM 1
This command enables the save waveform feature so that when the
source waveform data exceeds the limits set by the limit test, the source
waveform is saved.
Example 2
LIMit:SAVEWFM?
This query might return:
:LIMIT:SAVEWFM 0
This indicates that the save waveform feature is disabled and that the
source waveform will not be saved when it exceeds the limits of the
limit test.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 380 --
LIMit:SAVWFM:FILEName
Description
This command sets or queries the path where waveforms or log files
will be saved when the waveform data exceeds the limits set by the limit test.
Group
Limit Test
Related Commands
Syntax 1
LIMit:SAVEWFM:FILEName {<string>}
Syntax 2
LIMit:SAVEWFM:FILEName?
Argument
H <string>
This argument is a string containing the path of the waveform to be
saved.
Example 1
LIMit:SAVEWFM:FILEName MyLimitTestWaveform
This command sets the path where a waveform will be saved when it
exceeds the limits of the limit test.
Example 2
LIMit:SAVEWFM:FILEName?
This query might return:
:LIMIT:SAVEWFM:FILENAME ”MyLimitTestWaveform.wfm”
This indicates the path were the waveform will be saved when it exceeds the limits of the limit test.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 381 --
LIMit:SRQ
Description
This command sets or queries whether a Service Request Interrupt
(SRQ) is generated when the waveform data falls outside of the test
limits.
Group
Limit Test
Related Commands
Syntax 1
LIMit:SRQ {OFF|ON|NR1}
Syntax 2
LIMit:SRQ?
Arguments
H OFF
This argument disables generation of an SRQ when the waveform
data falls outside of the limits set by the limit test.
H ON
This argument enables generation of an SRQ when the waveform data
falls outside of the limits set by the limit test. If an SRQ is generated,
the instrument sends the status event ”Limit testing failed.”
H NR1
A 0 disables sending an SRQ when the waveform data falls outside of
the limits set by the limit test; any other value enables generation of
an SRQ when the waveform data falls outside of the limits set by the
limit test. For queries, a 0 is returned if SRQ is off; a 1 is returned if
the SRQ is on.
Example 1
LIMit:SRQ 1
This command specifies that an SRQ will be generated when the waveform data falls outside of the limits set by the limit test. If an SRQ is
generated, an status event of ”Limit testing failed” is output.
Example 2
LIMit:SRQ?
This query might return:
:LIMIT:SRQ 0
This indicates that an SRQ will not be generated when the waveform
data falls outside of the limits set by the limit test.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 382 --
LIMit:STATE
Description
This command sets limit testing on or off or queries whether limit testing is in effect.
Group
Limit Test
Related Commands
Syntax 1
LIMit:STATE {OFF|ON|<NR1>}
Syntax 2
LIMit:STATE?
Arguments
H OFF
This argument disables limit testing.
H ON
This argument turns on limit testing of waveforms.
H NR1
A 0 disables the limit testing operation; any other value turns on limit
testing of waveforms. For queries, a 0 is returned if limit testing is off;
a 1 is returned if the limit testing is on.
Example 1
LIMit:STATE ON
This command specifies that limit testing of waveforms is on.
Example 2
LIMit:STATE?
This query might return:
:LIMIT:STATE 0
This indicates that the limit testing of waveforms is off.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 383 --
LIMit:STOPOnviolation
Description
This command sets or queries whether acquisitions are stopped when
the waveform data exceeds the test limits.
Group
Limit Test
Related Commands
Syntax 1
LIMit:STOPOnviolation {OFF|ON|NR1}
Syntax 2
LIMit:STOPOnviolation?
Arguments
H OFF
This argument disables the stop on violation feature.
H ON
This argument enables the stop on violation feature so that when the
waveform data exceeds the limits set by the limit test, acquisitions are
stopped.
H NR1
A 0 disables the stop on violation feature; any other value enables the
stop on violation feature so that when the waveform data exceeds the
limits set by the limit test, acquisitions are stopped. For queries, a 0 is
returned if the stop on violation feature is off; a 1 is returned if the
stop on violation feature is on.
Example 1
LIMit:STOPOnviolation 1
This command enables the stop on violation feature so that when the
waveform data exceeds the limits set by the limit test, acquisitions are
stopped.
Example 2
LIMit:STOPOnviolation?
This query might return:
:LIMIT:STOPONVIOLATION 0
This indicates that the stop on violation feature is disabled.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 384 --
LIMit:TEMPlate:STORe
Description
This command (no query form) saves the specified source waveform to
the specified reference or file name.
Group
Limit Test
Related Commands
Syntax
LIMit:TEMPLate:STORe <wfm>,{REF<x>|<file
path>}
Arguments
H <wfm>
This argument specifies the waveform that will be saved as the template. The source of the waveform can be CH<x> (where x is 1
through 4 for four channel instruments or 1 through 2 for two channel
instruments), MATH<x>, or Ref<x> (where x is 1 through 4).
H REF<x
This argument specifies a reference location in which the template
waveform will be stored. The reference waveform specified by x,
which can be 1 through 4
H <file path>
This argument specifies a file path where the template waveform will
be stored. This argument is a quoted string.
Example 1
LIMit:TEMPlate:STORe CH2,REF1
This command creates a template reference waveform, REF1, using
CH2 as its source
Example 2
LIMit:TEMPLate:STORe CH1,”template.wfm”
This command creates a template reference waveform, template.wfm,
using CH1 as the source.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 385 --
LIMit:TEMPLate:TOLerance:HORizontal
Description
This command sets or queries the amount, in units of horizontal divisions, by which the source waveform is varied horizontally when creating the destination waveform.
Group
Limit Test
Related Commands
Syntax 1
LIMit:TEMPLate:TOLerance:HORizontal <tolerance>
Syntax 2
LIMit:TEMPLate:TOLerance:HORizontal?
Argument
H <tolerance>
This argument is the amount, in horizontal divisions, by which the
current source waveform is allowed to deviate from the template waveform without exceeding the limits set in the limit test. The range is
0 to 5 divisions. The format is floating point with exponent.
Example 1
LIMit:TEMPLate:TOLerance:HORizontal 1.0
This command specifies that the current waveform is close enough to
the template waveform if it is within ±1.0 horizontal division.
Example 2
LIMit:TEMPLate:TOLerance:HORizontal?
This query might return:
:LIMit:TEMPLate:TOLerance:HORizontal 2.0
This indicates that the current waveform is close enough to the template
waveform if it is within ±2.0 horizontal divisions.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 386 --
LIMit:TEMPLate:TOLerance:VERTical
Description
This command sets or queries the amount, in units of vertical divisions,
by which the source waveform is varied vertically when creating the
destination waveform.
Group
Limit Test
Related Commands
Syntax 1
LIMit:TEMPLate:TOLerance:VERTical <tolerance>
Syntax 2
LIMit:TEMPLate:TOLerance:VERTical?
Argument
H <tolerance>
This argument is the amount, in vertical divisions, by which the current source waveform is allowed to deviate from the template waveform without exceeding the limits set in the limit test. The range is 0
to 5 divisions.
Example 1
LIMit:TEMPLate:TOLerance:VERTical 1.0
This command specifies that the current waveform is close enough to
the template waveform if it is within ±1.0 vertical division.
Example 2
LIMit:TEMPLate:TOLerance:VERTical?
This query might return:
:LIMit:TEMPLate:TOLerance:VERTical 2.0
This indicates that the current waveform is close enough to the template
waveform if it is within ±2.0 vertical divisions.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 387 --
LIMit?
Description
This query--only command returns all settings for the Limit commands.
Group
Limit Test
Related Commands
Syntax
LIMit?
Example
LIMit?
This query might return:
:LIMIT:BEEP 0;COMPARE:CH1 NONE;CH2 NONE;CH3
NONE;CH4 NONE;REF1 NONE;REF2 NONE;REF3
NONE;REF4 NONE;MATH1 NONE;MATH2 NONE;MATH3
NONE;MATH4 NONE;:LIMIT:HARDCOPY 0;STATE 0;TEMPLATE:DESTINATION REF1;SOURCE CH2;TOLERANCE:HORIZONTAL 40.0000E-3;VERTICAL
40.0000E-3;:LIMIT:SRQ 0;STOPONVIOLATION 0;SAVEWFM 0;SAVEWFM:FILENAME ”C:/TekScope/waveforms/”;:LIMIT:LOG 0;EMAIL 0;HIGHLIGHTHITS
1;LOCK 1
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 388 --
LOCk
Description
This command enables or disables all front--panel buttons and knobs,
including the touch screen. There is no front panel equivalent.
Group
Miscellaneous
Related Commands
UNLock
Syntax 1
LOCk {ALL|NONe}
Syntax 2
LOCk?
Arguments
H ALL
This disables all front panel controls.
H NONe
This enables all front panel controls. This is equivalent to the UNLock ALL command.
Note: If the instrument is in the Remote With Lockout State (RWLS),
the LOCk NONe command has no effect. For more information, see
the ANSI/IEEE Std 488.1--1987 Standard Digital Interface for Programmable Instrumentation, section 2.8.3 on RL State Descriptions.
Example 1
LOCk ALL
This command locks the front panel controls.
Example 2
LOCk?
This query might return
:LOCK NONE
This indicates that the front panel controls are enabled by this command.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 389 --
MASK?
Description
This query--only command returns the states of all settable mask parameters
Group
Mask
Syntax
MASK?
Example
MASK?
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 390 --
MASK:AUTOAdjust
Description
This command optimizes signal position within the mask to minimize
hits. It sets a mode so that the MASK:SOURCE waveform is compared
against the mask and is shifted up, down, left, or right to minimize the
hits.
Group
Mask
Syntax
MASK:AUTOAdjust {ON|OFF|<NR1>}
Arguments
H ON
This enables the autoadjust function.
H OFF
This disables the autoadjust function
H <NR1>
A 0 disables the autoadjust function; any other value enables it.
Example
MASK:AUTOAdjust ON
Enables the autoadjust function
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 391 --
MASK:AUTOAdjust:HDELTA
Description
This command sets or returns how far autofit searches horizontally.
Autofit moves the waveform vertically and/or horizontally to reduce the
number of hits within a given mask. If infinite or variable persistence is
enabled, these movements will clear any persisted data. If Autofit
makes frequent adjustments, there can be very little or even no persisted data displayed.
Group
Mask
Syntax
MASK:AUTOAdjust:HDELTA {<NR3>}
Argument
H <NR3>
Is a floating point number which represents a percent of a division.
Example
MASK:AUTOAdjust:HDELTA 0.6
Sets the horizontal autofit search to 0.6 division.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 392 --
MASK:AUTOAdjust:VDELTA
Description
This command sets or returns how far autofit searches vertically.
Autofit moves the waveform vertically and/or horizontally to reduce the
number of hits within a given mask. If infinite or variable persistence is
enabled, these movements will clear any persisted data. If Autofit
makes frequent adjustments, there can be very little or even no persisted data displayed.
Group
Mask
Syntax 1
MASK:AUTOAdjust:VDELTA {<NR3>}
Syntax 2
MASK:AUTOAdjust:VDELTA?
Argument
H <NR3>
Is a floating point number which represents a percent of a division.
Example
MASK:AUTOAdjust:VDELTA 0.6
Sets the vertical autofit search to 0.6 of a division.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 393 --
MASK:AUTOSet:AUTOAdjust
Description
This command sets or returns whether the instrument settings are automatically matched to signal characteristics and specific mask requirements. It controls what happens at the end of a mask autoset. If ON, the
horz/vert auto adjustment is run ONCE to potentially improve the result
of mask autoset.
This command, like all the MASK:AUTOSET commands, affects only
an autoset on a standard mask, not the general oscilloscope autoset
function.
Group
Mask
Syntax 1
MASK:AUTOSet:AUTOAdjust {ON|OFF|<NR1>}
Syntax 2
MASK:AUTOSet:AUTOAdjust?
Arguments
H ON
This enables the autoset:autoadjust function.
H OFF
This disables the autoset:autoadjust function.
H <NR1>
A 0 disables the autoset:autoadjust function; any other value enables
it.
Example
MASK:AUTOSet:AUTOAdjust ON
Enables the autoset autoadjust function
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 394 --
MASK:AUTOSet:HPOS
Description
This command controls whether the autoset algorithm will attempt to
change the horizontal position of the signal while attempting to autoset.
The default is ON.
This command, like all the MASK:AUTOSET commands, affects only
an autoset on a standard mask, not the general oscilloscope autoset
function.
Group
Mask
Syntax
MASK:AUTOSet:HPOS {ON|OFF|<NR1>}
Arguments
H ON
This enables the autoset:hpos function, causing … to occur.
H OFF
This disables the autoset:hpos function, causing … to occur.
H <NR1>
A 0 disables the autoset:hpos function; any other value disables enables it.
Example
MASK:AUTOSet:HPOS ON
Enables the autoset:hpos function
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 395 --
MASK:AUTOSet:HSCAle
Description
This command controls whether the autoset algorithm will attempt to
change the horizontal scale while attempting to autoset.
This command, like all the MASK:AUTOSET commands, affects only
an autoset on a standard mask, not the general oscilloscope autoset
function.
Group
Mask
Syntax
MASK:AUTOSet:HSCAle {ON|OFF|<NR1>}
Arguments
H ON
This enables the autoset:hscale function.
H OFF
This disables the autoset:hscale function.
H <NR1>
A 0 disables the autoset:hscale function; any other value enables it.
Example
MASK:AUTOSet:HSCAle ON
Enables the autoset:hscale function.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 396 --
MASK:AUTOSet:MODe
Description
This command controls whether or not an autoset will be automatically
done after a standard mask is selected. The autoset will never happen if
the standard mask is selected from GPIB, since a ”SET?” sent back to
the scope should not do a mask autoset.
The default value is: manual.
This command, like all the MASK:AUTOSET commands, affects only
an autoset on a standard mask, not the general oscilloscope autoset
function.
Group
Mask
Syntax
MASK:AUTOSet:MODe {MANual|AUTO}
Argument
H MANual
This disables autoset from occurring automatically after a standard
mask is selected.
H AUTO
This enables autoset to automatically occur after a standard mask is
selected.
Example
MASK:AUTOSet:MODe AUTO
Enables autoset to occur automatically after a standard mask is selected.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 397 --
MASK:AUTOSet:OFFSETAdj
Description
This command sets autoset to not enforce the rule that, for pulse standards, require 0V to be in a certain place in the mask. Instead, autoset
will attempt to measure the DC offset in the signal and use scope offset
or position controls to compensate for the DC offset in the signal.
This command, like all the MASK:AUTOSET commands, affects only
an autoset on a standard mask, not the general oscilloscope autoset
function.
Group
Mask
Syntax 1
MASK:AUTOSet:OFFSETAdj {ON|OFF|<NR1>}
Syntax 2
MASK:AUTOSet:OFFSETAdj?
Arguments
H ON
This enables the autoset:offsetadj function.
H OFF
This disables the autoset:offsetadj function.
H <NR1>
A 0 disables the autoset:offsetadj function; any other value enables it.
Example
MASK:AUTOSET:OFFSETADJ ON
Enables the autoset:offsetadj function
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 398 --
MASK:AUTOSet:STANdard
(TDS5000B Series Option SM)
Description
This command selects the standard mask in autoset.
This command, like all the MASK:AUTOSET commands, affects only
an autoset on a standard mask, not the general oscilloscope autoset
function.
Group
Mask
Syntax 1
MASK:AUTOSet:STANdard {G703D1|E1Symmetrical|E1Coax
|DS2RATESymmetrical|DS2RATECoax|E2|RATE32Mbit|E3
|G703DS3|RATE97Mbit|E4_0|E4_1|STM1E_0|STM1E_1|
DS1
|DS1A|DS1C|DS2|DS3|DS4NA|DS4NA_Max|STS1Pulse
|STS1Eye|STS3|STS3_Max|ENET100STP|ENET100UTP
|ENET1250|FC133|FC266|FC531|FC1063|FC1063Draft
|FC2125|FC133E|FC266E|FC531E|FC1063E|FC1063E_N
BT
|FC1063E_NDT|FC1063E_NGT|FC1063E_ABT|FC1063E_A
DT
|FC1063E_AGT|FC1063E_ABR|FC1063E_ADR|FC1063E_A
GR
|FC2125E_NBT|FC2125E_NDT|FC2125E_NGT|FC2125E_A
BT
|FC2125E_ADT|FC2125E_AGT|FC2125E_ABR|FC2125E_A
DR
|FC2125E_AGR|OC1|OC3|OC12|OC48|OC48_FEC|INF2_5
G
|INF2_5GE|ATATXG1|ATATXG2|ATATXG3|ATARXG1|ATAR
XG2
|ATARXG3|FST1|FST2|FST3|FST4|FST5|FST6|HST1|HS
T2
|HST3|HST4|HST5|HST6|FW1394BS400BT1|FW1394BS40
0BT2
|FW1394BS800BT1|FW1394BS800BT2|FW1394BS1600BT1
|FW1394BS1600BT2|FW1394BS400B|FW1394BS800B
|FW1394BS1600B|USERMask|ENET1000BCX_NTP2
|ENET1000BCX_ATP2|ENET1000BCX_ATP3|ENETXAUI_Near
|ENETXAUI_Far|RIO_DRV500M|RIO_DRV750M|RIO_DRV1G
|RIO_DRV1_5G|RIO_DRV2G|RIO_EDRV500M|RIO_EDRV75
0M
|RIO_EDRV1G|RIO_EDRV1_5G|RIO_EDRV2G
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 399 --
|RIO_RCV500M|RIO_RCV750M|RIO_RCV1G|RIO_RCV1_5G
|RIO_RCV2G
|RIO_SERIAL_1G|RIO_SERIAL_2G|RIO_SERIAL_3G
|SFI5_XMITADATA2|SFI5_XMITCDATA2|SFI5_XMITACLK2
|SFI5_XMITCCLK2|SFI5_RCVBDATA2|SFI5_RCVDDATA2
|SFI5_RCVBCLK2|SFI5_RCVDCLK2|SFI5_XMITADATA3
|SFI5_XMITCDATA3|SFI5_XMITACLK3|SFI5_XMITCCLK3
|SFI5_RCVBDATA3|SFI5_RCVDDATA3|SFI5_RCVBCLK3
|SFI5_RCVDCLK3|VSROC192|TFI15_2|TFI5_3
|PCIEXPRESS_Xmit|PCIEXPRESS_Rcv}
Syntax 2
MASK:AUTOSet:STANdard?
Arguments
H G703D1 (ITU-T, G703 (10/98), DS1 Rate,
1.544 Mb/s)
H E1Symmetrical (ITU-T, G703 (10/98), E1
Sym Pair, 2.048 Mb/s)
H E1Coax (ITU-T, G703 (10/98), E1 Coax
Pair, 2.048 Mb/s)
H DS2RATESymmetrical (ITU-T, G703 (10/98),
D2 Rate Sym, 6.312 Mb/s)
H DS2RATECoax (ITU-T, G703 (10/98), D2
Rate Coax, 6.312 Mb/s)
H E2 (ITU-T, G703 (10/98), E2, 8.448 Mb/s)
H RATE32Mbit (ITU-T, G703 (10/98), 32.064
Mb/s)
H E3 (ITU-T, G703 (10/98), E3, 34.368
Mb/s)
H G703DS3 (ITU-T, G703 (10/98))
H RATE97Mbit (ITU-T, G703 (10/98), 97
Mbit, 97.728 Mb/s)
H E4_0 (ITU-T, G703 (10/98), E4 Binary 0)
H E4_1 (ITU-T, G703 (10/98), E4 Binary 1)
H STM1E_0 (ITU-T, G703 (10/98), STM1E
Binary 0)
H STM1E_1 (ITU-T, G703 (10/98), STM1E
Binary 1)
H DS1 (ANSI T1.102-1993 (R1999), DS1,
1.544 Mb/s)
H DS1A (ANSI T1.102-1993 (R1999), DS1A,
2.048 Mb/s)
H DS1C (ANSI T1.102-1993 (R1999), DS1C,
3.152 Mb/s)
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 400 --
H DS2 (ANSI T1.102-1993 (R1999), DS2,
6.312 Mb/s)
H DS3 (ANSI T1.102-1993 (R1999), DS3,
44.736 Mb/s)
H DS4NA (ANSI T1.102-1993 (R1999), DS4NA,
139.26 Mb/s)
H DS4NA_Max (ANSI T1.102-1993 (R1999),
DSNA Max Output, 139.26 Mb/s)
H STS1Pulse (ANSI T1.102-1993 (R1999),
STS-1 Pulse, 51.84 Mb/s)
H STS1Eye (ANSI T1.102-1993 (R1999), STS-1
Eye, 51.84 Mb/s)
H STS3 (ANSI T1.102-1993 (R1999), STS-3,
155.52 Mb/s)
H STS3_Max (ANSI T1.102-1993 (R1999),
STS-3 Max Output, 155.52 Mb/s)
H ENET100STP (IEEE Std 802.3 and ANSI
X3.263-1995, 100 Base-Tx, STP, 125 Mb/s )
H ENET100UTP (IEEE Std 802.3 and ANSI
X3.263-1995, 100 Base-Tx, UTP, 125 Mb/s)
H ENET1250 (IEEE Std 802.3 and ANSI
X3.263-1995, GB Ethernet, 1.25 Gb/s)
H FC133 (ANSI X3.230-1999 NCITS 1235D/Rev
11, Optical, 132.8 Mb/s)
H FC266 (ANSI X3.230-1999 NCITS 1235D/Rev
11, Optical, 265.6 Mb/s)
H FC531 (ANSI X3.230-1999 NCITS 1235D/Rev
11, Optical, 531.2 Mb/s)
H FC1063 (ANSI X3.230-1999 NCITS 1235D/Rev
11, Optical, 1.065 Gb/s)
H FC1063Draft (ANSI X3.230-1999 NCITS
1235D/Rev 11, Optical, Draft Rev 11)
H FC2125 (ANSI X3.230-1999 NCITS 1235D/Rev
11, Optical, 2.125)
H FC133E (ANS1 X3.230-1999 NCITS 1235D/Rev
11, Electrical 132.8 Mb/s)
H FC266E (ANS1 X3.230-1999 NCITS 1235D/Rev
11, Electrical, 132.8 Mb/s)
H FC531E (ANS1 X3.230-1999 NCITS 1235D/Rev
11, Electrical, 531.2 Mb/s)
H FC1063E (ANS1 X3.230-1999 NCITS 1235D/
Rev 11, Electrical, 1.0625 Gb/s)
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 401 --
H FC1063E_NBT (ANS1 X3.230-1999 NCITS
1235D/Rev 11, Norm, Beta, Transm)
H FC1063E_NDT (ANS1 X3.230-1999 NCITS
1235D/Rev 11, Norm, Delta, Transm)
H FC1063E_NGT (ANS1 X3.230-1999 NCITS
1235D/Rev 11, Norm, Gamma, Transm)
H FC1063E_ABT (ANS1 X3.230-1999 NCITS
1235D/Rev 11, Abs, Beta, Transm)
H FC1063E_ADT (ANS1 X3.230-1999 NCITS
1235D/Rev 11, Abs, Beta, Transm)
H FC1063E_AGT (ANS1 X3.230-1999 NCITS
1235D/Rev 11, Abs, Gamma, Transm)
H FC1063E_ABR (ANS1 X3.230-1999 NCITS
1235D/Rev 11, Abs, Beta, Recv)
H FC1063E_ADR (ANS1 X3.230-1999 NCITS
1235D/Rev 11, Abs, Delta, Recv)
H FC1063E_AGR (ANS1 X3.230-1999 NCITS
1235D/Rev 11, Abs, Gamma, Recv)
H FC2125E_NBT (ANS1 X3.230-1999 NCITS
1235D/Rev 11, Norm, Beta, Transm)
H FC2125E_NDT (ANS1 X3.230-1999 NCITS
1235D/Rev 11, Norm, Delta, Transm)
H FC2125E_NGT (ANS1 X3.230-1999 NCITS
1235D/Rev 11, Norm, Gamma, Transm)
H FC2125E_ABT (ANS1 X3.230-1999 NCITS
1235D/Rev 11, Abs, Beta, Transm)
H FC2125E_ADT (ANS1 X3.230-1999 NCITS
1235D/Rev 11, Abs, Delta, Transm)
H FC2125E_AGT (ANS1 X3.230-1999 NCITS
1235D/Rev 11, Abs, Gamma, Transm)
H FC2125E_ABR (ANS1 X3.230-1999 NCITS
1235D/Rev 11, Abs, Beta, Recv)
H FC2125E_ADR (ANS1 X3.230-1999 NCITS
1235D/Rev 11, Abs, Delta, Recv)
H FC2125E_AGR (ANS1 X3.230-1999 NCITS
1235D/Rev 11, Abs, Gamma, Recv)
H OC1 (GR 253-CORE Issue 3 9/21/2000
OC1/STM0, 51.84 Mb/s)
H OC3 (GR 253-CORE Issue 3 9/21/2000
OC1/STM1, 155.52, Mb/s)
H OC12 (GR 253-CORE Issue 3 9/21/2000
OC1/STM4, 622.08 Mb/s)
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 402 --
H OC48 (GR 253-CORE Issue 3 9/21/2000
OC1/STM16, 2.4883 Gb/s
H OC48_FEC (Forward Error Correction CSA8000 mask, 2.666 Gb/s)
H INF2_5G (InfiniBand, IBTA Spec 1.0a, 2.5
Optical, 2.5 Gb/s)
H INF2_5GE (InfiniBand, IBTA Spec 1.0a,
2.5 Electrical, 2.5 Gb/s)
H ATATXG1 (Serial ATA, G1 Tx, 1.5 Gb/s)
H ATATXG2 (Serial ATA, G2 Tx, 3.0 Gb/s)
H ATATXG3 (Serial ATA, G3 Tx)
H ATARXG1 (Serial ATA, G1 Rx 1.5 Gb/s)
H ATARXG2 (Serial ATA, G2, Rx, 3.0 Gb/s)
H ATARXG3 (Serial ATA, G3, Rx)
H FST1 (USB, FS:T1, 12 Mb/s)
H FST2 (USB, FS:T2, 12 Mb/s)
H FST3 (USB, FS:T3, 12 Mb/s)
H FST4 (USB, FS:T4: 12 Mb/s)
H FST5 (USB, FS:T5, 12 Mb/s)
H FST6 (USB, FS:T6, 12 Mb/s)
H HST1 (USB, HS:T1, 480 Mb/s)
H HST2 (USB, HS:T2, 480 Mb/s)
H HST3 (USB, HS:T3, 480 Mb/s)
H HST4 (USB, HS:T4, 480 Mb/s)
H HST5 (USB, HS:T5, 480 Mb/s)
H HST6 (USB, HS:T6, 480 Mb/s)
H FW1394BS400BT1 (IEEE 1394b, S400b T1,
491.5 Mb/s)
H FW1394BS400BT2 (IEEE 1394b, S400b T2,
491.5 Mb/s)
H FW1394BS800BT1 (IEEE 1394b, S800b T1,
983.0 Mb/s)
H FW1394BS800BT2 (IEEE 1394b, S800b T2,
983.0 Mb/s)
H FW1394BS1600BT1 (IEEE 1394b, S1600b T1,
1.966 Gb/s)
H FW1394BS1600BT2 (IEEE 1394b, S1600b T2,
1.966 Gb/s)
H FW1394BS400B (IEEE 1394b, S400 Optical,
491.5 Mb/s)
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 403 --
H FW1394BS800B (IEEE 1394b, S800 Optical,
988.0 Mb/s)
H FW1394BS1600B (IEEE 1394b, S1600 Optical, 1.966 Gb/s)
H USERMask
H ENET1000BCX_NTP2 (1000B-CX Norm, TP2,
1.25 Gb/s)
H ENET1000BCX_ATP2 (1000B-CX Abs, TP2,
1.25 Gb/s)
H ENET1000BCX_ATP3 (1000B-CX Abs, TP3,
1.25 Gb/s)
H ENETXAUI_Near (10 Gigabit Attachment
Unit Interface (XAUI), Near, 3,125 Gb/s)
H ENETXAUI_Far (10 Gigabit Attachment Unit
Interface (XAUI), Far, 3.125 Gb/s)
H RIO_DRV500M (Rapid IO Driver, 500 Mb/s)
H RIO_DRV750M (Rapid IO Driver, 750 Mb/s)
H RIO_DRV1G (Rapid IO Driver, 1 Gb/s)
H RIO_DRV1_5G (Rapid IO Driver, 5 Gb/s)
H RIO_DRV2G (Rapid IO Driver, 2 Gb/s)
H RIO_EDRV500M (Rapid IO Extended Driver,
500 Mb/s)
H RIO_EDRV750M (Rapid IO Extended Driver,
750 Mb/s)
H RIO_EDRV1G (Rapid IO Extended Driver, 1
Gb/s)
H RIO_EDRV1_5G (Rapid IO Extended Driver,
1.5 Gb/s)
H RIO_EDRV2G (Rapid IO Extended Driver, 2
Gb/s)
H RIO_RCV500M (Rapid IO Receiver, 500
Mb/s)
H RIO_RCV750M (Rapid IO Receiver, 750
Mb/s)
H RIO_RCV1G (Rapid IO Receiver, 1 Gb/s)
H RIO_RCV1_5G (Rapid IO Receiver, 1.5
Gb/s)
H RIO_RCV2G (Rapid IO Receiver, 2 Gb/s)
H RIO_SERIAL_1G (Rapid IO Serial, 1.25
Gb/s)
H RIO_SERIAL_2G (Rapid IO Serial, 2.5
Gb/s)
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 404 --
H RIO_SERIAL_3G (Rapid IO Serial, 3.25
Gb/s)
H SFI5_XMITADATA2 (SFI15 Transmit: Test
Point A Data Signal 2, 2.488 Gb/s)
H SFI5_XMITCDATA2 (SFI15 Transmit: Test
Point C Data Signal 2, 2.488 Gb/s)
H SFI5_XMITACLK2 (SFI15 Transmit: Test
Point A Clock Signal 2, 2.488 Gb/s)
H SFI5_XMITCCLK2 (SFI15 Transmit: Test
Point C Clock Signal 2, 2.488 Gb/s)
H SFI5_RCVBDATA2 (SFI15 Receive: Test
Point B Data Signal 2, 2.488 Gb/s)
H SFI5_RCVDDATA2 (SFI15 Receive: Test
Point D Data Signal 2, 2.488 Gb/s)
H SFI5_RCVBCLK2 (SFI15 Receive: Test Point
B Clock Signal 2, 2.488 Gb/s)
H SFI5_RCVDCLK2 (SFI15 Receive: Test Point
D Clock Signal 2, 2.488 Gb/s)
H SFI5_XMITADATA3 (SFI15 Transmit: Test
Point A Data Signal 3, 3.125 Gb/s)
H SFI5_XMITCDATA3 (SFI15 Transmit: Test
Point C Data Signal 3, 3.125 Gb/s)
H SFI5_XMITACLK3 (SFI15 Transmit: Test
Point A Clock Signal 3, 3.125 Gb/s)
H SFI5_XMITCCLK3 (SFI15 Transmit: Test
Point C Clock Signal 3, 3.125 Gb/s)
H SFI5_RCVBDATA3 (SFI15 Receive: Test
Point B Data Signal 3, 3.125 Gb/s)
H SFI5_RCVDDATA3 (SFI15 Receive: Test
Point D Data Signal 3, 3.125 Gb/s)
H SFI5_RCVBCLK3 (SFI15 Receive: Test Point
B Clock Signal 3, 3.125 Gb/s)
H SFI5_RCVDCLK3 (SFI15 Receive: Test Point
D Clock Signal 3, 3.125 Gb/s
H VSROC192 (VSR OC192/STM64, 1.24416 Gb/s)
H TFI15_2 (TFI-5, 2.488 Gb/s)
H TFI5_3 (TFI-5, 3.1104 Gb/s)
H PCIEXPRESS_Xmit (PCI Express Transmitter, 2.5 Gb/s)
H PCIEXPRESS_Rcv (PCI Express Receiver,
2.5 Gb/s)
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 405 --
Example 1
MASK:AUTOSET:STANDARD E1COAX
Selects the E1 Coax standard mask.
Example 2
MASK:AUTOSET:STANDARD?
Might return
:MASK:AUTOSET:STANDARD E1COAX
Indicating that the E1 Coax mask is selected as the current mask standard.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 406 --
MASK:AUTOSet:TRIGger
Description
This command controls if a MASK:AUTOSet affects the trigger level.
Other trigger settings such as type of trigger are not changed by
MASK:AUTOSet. The default is ON.
This command, like all the MASK:AUTOSET commands, affects only
an autoset on a standard mask, not the general oscilloscope autoset
function.
Group
Mask
Syntax
MASK:AUTOSet:TRIGger {ON|OFF|<NR1>}
Arguments
H ON
This enables the autoset:hpos function.
H OFF
This disables the autoset:hpos function.
H <NR1>
A 0 disables the autoset:trigger function; any other value enables it.
Example
MASK:AUTOSet:HPOS ON
Enables the autoset:hpos function
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 407 --
MASK:AUTOSet:VPOS
Description
This command controls whether the autoset algorithm will affect the
vertical position (or offset) of the signal while attempting to autoset.
The default is ON.
This command, like all the MASK:AUTOSET commands, affects only
an autoset on a standard mask, not the general oscilloscope autoset
function.
Group
Mask
Syntax
MASK:AUTOSet:VPOS {ON|OFF|<NR1>}
Arguments
H ON
This enables the autoset:vpos function.
H OFF
This disables the autoset:vpos function.
H <NR1>
A 0 disables the autoset:vpos function; any other value enables it.
Example
MASK:AUTOSet:VPOS ON
Enables the autoset:vpos function
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 408 --
MASK:AUTOSet:VSCAle
Description
This command controls whether the autoset algorithm will affect the
vertical scale while attempting to autoset.
This command, like all the MASK:AUTOSET commands, affects only
an autoset on a standard mask, not the general oscilloscope autoset
function.
Group
Mask
Syntax
MASK:AUTOSet:VSCAle {ON|OFF|<NR1>}
Arguments
H ON
This enables the autoset:vscale function, causing … to occur.
H OFF
This disables the autoset:vscale function, causing … to occur.
H <NR1>
A 0 disables the autoset:vscale function; any other value enables it.
Example
MASK:AUTOSet:VSCAle ON
Enables the autoset:vscale function.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 409 --
MASK:COPy:USER
Description
This command copies the currently displayed mask to the User mask.
Group
Mask
Syntax
MASK:COPy:USER
Example
MASK:COPY:USER
Copies the current mask to the user mask.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 410 --
MASK:COUNt RESET
Description
This command resets to zero the number of hits for all mask segments
on the specified source.
Group
Mask
Syntax
MASK:COUNt RESET
Example
MASK:COUNT RESET
Resets to zero the number of hits for all mask segments on the specified
source.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 411 --
MASK:COUNt:FAILURES?
Description
This command returns the number of pass/fail tests that have failed.
The default is 0. To work pass/fail testing must be enabled.
Group
Mask
Syntax
MASK:COUNt:FAILURES?
Returns
<NR1>
Example
MASK:COUNT:FAILURES?
Might return 0 showing no tests have failed.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 412 --
MASK:COUNt:HITS?
Description
This command returns the number of hits on all mask segments. To
work, hit counting must be turned on.
Group
Mask
Syntax
MASK:COUNt:HITS?
Returns
<NR1>
Example
MASK:COUNT:HITS?
Might return: 0
Showing there were no hits from any source on all mask segments.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 413 --
MASK:COUNt:SEG<m>:HITS?
Description
This command returns the number of hits in mask segment <m>. To
work, hit counting must be turned on.
Group
Mask
Syntax
MASK:COUNt:SEG<m>:HITS?
Argument
H <m>
Is the mask segment number.
Returns
<NR1>
Example
MASK:COUNT:SEG1:HITS?
Might return 0
showing there have been no hits.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 414 --
MASK:COUNt:STATE
Description
Sets or returns the mask hits count state. In other words, it controls
whether or not mask counting is being done. MASK:DISplay must be
ON to enable MASK:COUNt:STATE to count mask violations.
Group
Mask
Syntax
MASK:COUNt:STATE {OFF|ON|<NR1>}
Arguments
H ON
Turns on mask counting.
H OFF
Turns off mask counting. This is the default state.
H <NR1>
A 0 turns off mask hit counting, and other values turn on mask hit
counting.
Example
MASK:COUNT:STATE ON
Turns on mask hit counting
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 415 --
MASK:COUNt:TESTS?
Description
Returns the number of pass/fail tests that have occurred.
Group
Mask
Syntax
MASK:COUNt:TESTS?
Returns
<NR1>
Example
MASK:COUNT:TESTS?
Might return: 50
showing 50 tests have occurred.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 416 --
MASK:COUNt:TOTal?
Description
Returns the sum of all hits in all mask segments. This command is the
same as MASK:COUNT:HITS? And is kept for compatibility with other Tektronix oscilloscopes.
Group
Mask
Syntax
MASK:COUNt:TOTal?
Returns
<NR1>
Example
MASK:COUNT:TOTAL?
Might return 50
Showing 50 hits have occurred.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 417 --
MASK:COUNt:VIOLATIONS?
Description
This command returns the number of test violations that have occurred
in the current pass/fail test. A test violation occurs when any part of a
waveform falls within any mask segment. The default is 0.
Group
Mask
Related Commands
MASK:COUNt:TESTS?, MASK:COUNt:TOTal?,
MASK:COUNt:WAVEFORMS?, MASK:TESt:REPeat
Syntax,
MASK:COUNt:VIOLATIONS?
Returns
<NR1>
Example
MASK:COUNT:VIOLATIONS?
Might return: 50
Showing 50 test violations have occurred.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 418 --
MASK:COUNt:WAVEFORMS?
Description
This command returns the number of waveforms that have been acquired and processed during pass/fail testing.
Group
Mask
Related Commands
MASK:COUNt:TESTS?, MASK:COUNt:TOTal?,
MASK:COUNt:VIOLATIONS?
Syntax
MASK:COUNT:WAVEFORMS?
Returns
<NR1>
Example
MASK:COUNT:WAVEFORMS?
Might return: 1000
Showing 1,000 waveforms have been acquired and processed.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 419 --
MASK:DISplay
Description
Sets or returns whether or not defined masks are displayed on the
screen. This is useful for temporarily turning off user defined masks
without deleting them. It is also useful for removing a standard mask
from the screen, but leaving it as the selected standard. Mask counting,
mask testing, and mask autoset are not available if the mask display is
Off. The default is On.
Group
Mask
Syntax 1
MASK:DISplay {OFF|ON|<NR1>}
Syntax 2
MASK:DISplay?
Arguments
H ON
Shows the masks on the display. This is the default value.
H OFF
Removes the masks from the display
H <NR1>
A 0 removes the masks from the display; any other value shows the
masks on the display.
Example
MASK:DISPLAY ON
Sets the display to show the defined masks
Example 2
MASK:DISPLAY?
Might return 1, indicating that the display shows masks
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 420 --
MASK:FILTer
Description
This command sets or returns whether the selected digital filter will be
run on the waveform data. The filter simulates optical hardware. That
is, it simulates different hardware for each of several different optical
standards.
The digital filter runs on OC1, OC3, OC12, OC48, FC133, FC266,
FC531, FC1063, FC2125Draft, Gigabit Ethernet, Infiniband 2.5Gb,
1394b, 393Mb, 786.4 3Mb, 1.572 Gb
Group
Mask
Related Commands
ACQuire:MODe
Syntax
MASK:FILTer {OFF|ON|<NR1>}
Arguments
H ON
This enables the digital filter.
H OFF
This disables the digital filter.
H <NR1>
A 0 disables the digital filter; any other value enables it.
Example
MASK:FILTER ON
Enables the digital filter.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 421 --
MASK:HIGHLIGHTHits
Description
This command sets or returns whether or not hits in a mask are highlighted in different colors than other waveform data. The default is On.
Group
Mask
Syntax 1
MASK:HIGHLIGHTHits {OFF|ON|<NR1>}
Syntax 2
MASK:HIGHLIGHTHits?
Arguments
H ON
This enables the mask:highlighthits function.
H OFF
This disables the mask:highlighthits function.
H <NR1>
A 0 disables the mask:highlighthits function; any other value enables
it.
Example
MASK:HIGHLIGHTHITS ON
Enables the mask highlighthits function.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 422 --
MASK:INVert
Description
This command controls whether the mask is drawn inverted. It has no
effect if this mask cannot be inverted. The default is Off (Positive).
Group
Mask
Syntax
MASK:INVert {OFF|ON|<NR1>}
Arguments
H ON
Negative
H OFF
Positive
H <NR1>
A 0 disables the mask:invert function; any other value enables it.
Example
MASK:INVERT ON
Enables the mask invert function.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 423 --
MASK:LOCk
Description
This command sets or returns the mask lock to waveform mode. It
locks the mask to the waveform such that changes to the horizontal and/
or vertical scale settings redraws the mask segments in proportion. This
feature allows for expanding horizontal and/or vertical settings to zoom
in on waveforms and masks to visually examine violation areas in more
detail.
Group
Mask
Syntax 1
MASK:LOCk {OFF|ON|<NR1>}
Syntax 2
MASK:LOCk?
Arguments
H ON
turns on mask lock to waveform.
H OFF
turns off mask lock to waveform.
H <NR1>
A 0 turns off mask lock to waveform and any other value turns on
mask lock to waveform.
Example
MASK:LOCK ON
Turns on mask lock to waveform
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 424 --
MASK:MARgin:PERCent
Description
This command sets or queries the mask margin percentage. If you set a
positive mask margin percentage, the polygon expands and the mask
test will be more difficult to pass due to the expanded test area. If you
set a negative mask margin percentage, the polygon shrinks and the
mask test will be easier to pass due to the smaller area.
Group
Mask
Syntax 1
MASK:MARgin:PERCent <NR3>
Syntax 2
MASK:MARgin:PERCent?
Argument
H <NR3>
This values range from –50.0 to +50.0. The default is 5.
Example 1
MASK:MARGIN:PERCENT 25
Sets the mask margin percentage to 25.
Example 2
MASK:MARGIN:PERCENT?
Might return
:MASK:MARGIN:PERCENT 1.00000000000E+001,
indicating that the mask margin is set to 10%.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 425 --
MASK:MARgin:STATE
Description
This command sets or returns the state of the mask margins.
Group
Mask
Syntax
MASK:MARgin:STATE {OFF|ON|<NR1>}
Arguments
H ON
Turns on mask margins.
H OFF
Turns off mask margins. The currently displayed margined mask is
erased and the original mask is displayed.
H <NR1>
A 0 turns off mask margins; any other integer turns on the selected
mask margins.
Example 1
MASK:MARGIN:STATE ON
Turns on mask margins
Example 2
MASK:MARGIN:STATE?
Might return
:MASK:MARGIN:STATE 1
indicating that mask margins are on.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 426 --
MASK:MASKPRE:AMPlitude
Description
This command sets or returns the current mask’s nominal pulse amplitude in volts. The query form of this command returns the nominal
pulse amplitude of the displayed mask. The set form of this command
only affects the current (displayed) mask.
Group
Mask
Related Commands
MASK:MASKPRE:VSCAle
Syntax 1
MASK:MASKPRE:AMPlitude <NR3>
Syntax 2
MASK:MASKPRE:AMPlitude?
Argument
H <NR3>
This is a floating number that sets the nominal pulse amplitude in
volts
Example
MASK:MASKPRE:AMPLITUDE 2.4
Sets the current mask nominal pulse amplitude to 2.4 volts.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 427 --
MASK:MASKPRE:HSCAle
Description
This command sets or returns the nominal timing resolution used to
draw the mask, in time/division. The query form of this command returns the nominal timing resolution of the displayed mask. The set form
of this command only affects the current (displayed) mask.
Group
Mask
Related Commands
MASK:MASKPRE:HTRIGPOS
Syntax 1
MASK:MASKPRE:HSCAle <NR3>
Syntax 2
MASK:MASKPRE:HSCAle?
Argument
H <NR3>
This is a floating point number that sets the mask drawing timing resolution.
Example
MASK:MASKPRE:HSCAle 40e--9
Sets the nominal timing resolution used to draw the mask pulse shape
to 40 nanoseconds per division.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 428 --
MASK:MASKPRE:HTRIGPOS
Description
This command sets or returns the nominal trigger position.(pulse leading edge) used to draw the mask as a fraction of the display width. The
query form of this command returns the nominal trigger position of the
displayed mask. The set form of this command only affects the current
(displayed) mask.
Group
Mask
Related Commands
MASK:MASKPRE:HSCAle?
Syntax 1
MASK:MASKPRE:HTRIGPOS <NR3>
Syntax 2
MASK:MASKPRE:HTRIGPOS?
Argument
H <NR3>
Is a floating point number in the range of 0.0 to 1.0 that sets the trigger points as a fraction of the display width, referenced from the left
edge of the graticule.
0.0 represents the left edge.
Example
MASK:MASKPRE:HTRIGPOS 0.6
Sets the current mask nominal pulse leading edge position to the 6th
horizontal graticule division.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 429 --
MASK:MASKPRE:PATTERNBITS
Description
This command sets or returns the number of bits used for serial trigger
for the User mask standard. For example, DS1 requires six bits,: four
leading zeros, a one, and a trailing zero. The query form of this command returns the serial bit value of the displayed mask. The set form of
this command only affects the current (displayed) mask.
Group
Mask
Related Commands
MASK:MASKPRE:PRESAMPBITS
Syntax 1
MASK:MASKPRE:PATTERNBITS <NR1>
Syntax 2
MASK:MASKPRE:PATTERNBITS?
Argument
H <NR1>
Is an integer that sets the number of bits.
Example
MASK:MASKPRE:PATTERNBITS 6
Sets the current mask number of serial pattern bits to 6.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 430 --
MASK:MASKPRE:PRESAMPBITS
Description
This command sets or returns the number of bits before the (isolated
one) pulse leading edge in the serial trigger pass/fail testing. For example, DS1 has four leading zeros. The query form of this command returns the presample bit value of the displayed mask. The set form of
this command only affects the current (displayed) mask.
Group
Mask
Related Commands
MASK:MASKPRE:PATTERNBITS
Syntax 1
MASK:MASKPRE:PRESAMPBITS <NR1>
Syntax 2
MASK:MASKPRE:PRESAMPBITS?
Argument
H <NR1>
Is an integer that sets the number of bits before the trigger pulse.
Example
MASK:MASKPRE:PRESAMPBITS 4
Sets the current mask number of bits before the trigger pulse to 4.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 431 --
MASK:MASKPRE:RECOrdlength
Description
This command sets or returns the nominal record length for pulse mask
testing. The query form of this command returns the record length value of the displayed mask. The set form of this command only affects
the current (displayed) mask.
Group
Mask
Syntax 1
MASK:MASKPRE:RECOrdlength <NR1>
Syntax 2
MASK:MASKPRE:RECOrdlength?
Argument
H <NR1>
Is an integer number that sets the record length.
Example
MASK:MASKPRE:RECORDLENGTH 500
Sets the current mask record length to 500 points.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 432 --
MASK:MASKPRE:SERIALTRIG
Description
This command sets or returns the type of triggering used in pass/fail
testing of the current mask.
Group
Mask
Related Commands
MASK:MASKPRE:PATTERNBITS, MASK:MASKPRE:PRESAMPBITS
Syntax 1
MASK:MASKPRE:SERIALTRIG
{AMI|HDB3|B3ZS|B6ZS|B8ZS|CMI|NRZ|MLT3|EDGE}
Syntax 2
MASK:MASKPRE:SERIALTRIG?
Argument
H AMI
Alternate Mark Inversion
H HDB3
High--Density Bipolar Three--Bit substitution
H B3ZS
Bipolar 3 Zero Substitution
H B6ZS
Bipolar 6 Zero Substitution
H B8ZS
Bipolar 8 Zero Substitution
H CMI
Coded Mark Inversion
H NRZ
Non--Return to Zero
H MLT3
Multi--Level Transition
Example
MASK:MASKPRE:SERIALTRIG AMI
Sets AMI as the type of triggering used in testing the current mask.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 433 --
MASK:MASKPRE:TRIGTOSAMP
Description
This command sets or returns the time, in seconds, from the (leading
edge) trigger position to the pulse bit sampling position. The query
form of this command returns the time value of the displayed mask.
The set form of this command only affects the current (displayed)
mask.
Group
Mask
Related Commands
MASK:MASKPRE:WIDth
Syntax 1
MASK:MASKPRE:TRIGTOSAMP <NR3>
Syntax 2
MASK:MASKPRE:TRIGTOSAMP?
Argument
H <NR3>
Is the floating point number that sets the time to the pulse bit sampling position.
Example
MASK:MASKPRE:TRIGTOSAMP 162e-9
Sets the current mask time from the (leading edge) trigger position to
the pulse bit sampling position to 162 nanoseconds.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 434 --
MASK:MASKPRE:VOFFSet
Description
This command sets or returns the nominal vertical offset, in volts, used
to vertically offset the input channels. The query form of this command
returns the offset value of the displayed mask. The set form of this
command only affects the current (displayed) mask.
Group
Mask
Related Commands
MASK:MASKPRE:VPOS , MASK:MASKPRE:VSCAle
Syntax 1
MASK:MASKPRE:VOFFSet <NR3>
Syntax 2
MASK:MASKPRE:VOFFSet?
Argument
H <NR3>
Is a floating point number that sets the nominal vertical offset in volts.
Example
MASK:MASKPRE:VOFFSET 0.0
Sets the current mask nominal vertical offset to 0.0 volts.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 435 --
MASK:MASKPRE:VPOS
Description
This command sets or returns the nominal vertical position, in divisions, used to vertically position the input channels. The query form of
this command returns the vertical position value of the displayed mask.
The set form of this command only affects the current (displayed)
mask.
Group
Mask
Related Commands
MASK:MASKPRE:VOFFSet, MASK:MASKPRE:VSCAle
Syntax 1
MASK:MASKPRE:VPOS <NR3>
Syntax 2
MASK:MASKPRE:VPOS?
Argument
H <NR3>
Is a floating point number that sets the nominal vertical position in
divisions.
Example
MASK:MASKPRE:VPOS -0.8
Sets the current mask nominal vertical position to --0.8 divisions.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 436 --
MASK:MASKPRE:VSCAle
Description
This command sets or returns the nominal vertical scale, in volts per
division, used to vertically scale the input channels. The query form of
this command returns the vertical scale value of the displayed mask.
The set form of this command only affects the current (displayed)
mask.
Group
Mask
Related Commands
MASK:MASKPRE:VOFFSet, MASK:MASKPRE:VPOS
Syntax 1
MASK:MASKPRE:VSCAle <NR3>
Syntax 2
MASK:MASKPRE:VSCAle?
Argument
H <NR3>
Is a floating point number that sets the nominal bit width in seconds.
Example
MASK:MASKPRE:VSCALE 200e-3
Sets the current mask nominal vertical scale to 200 millivolts per division
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 437 --
MASK:MASKPRE:WIDth
Description
This command sets or returns the nominal bit width in seconds. The
query form of this command returns the bit width value of the displayed
mask. The set form of this command only affects the current (displayed) mask.
Group
Mask
Related Commands
MASK:MASKPRE:TRIGTOSAMP
Syntax 1
MASK:MASKPRE:WIDth <NR3>
Syntax 2
MASK:MASKPRE:WIDth?
Argument
H <NR3>
Is a floating point number that sets the nominal bit width in seconds.
This is the time of one bit of data where bit width = 1 / ( data rate of
the signal ).
Example
MASK:MASKPRE:WIDTH 648e-9
Sets the current mask nominal bit width to 648 nanoseconds (1.544
Mbits/second).
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 438 --
MASK:POLarity
Description
This command sets or returns the input waveform polarity for the pass/
fail test. It controls whether to test positive pulse, negative pulse, or
both during pass/fail testing. This command only applies when
MASK:TESt:STATE is on.
Group
Mask
Related Commands
MASK:TESt:STATE
Syntax 1
MASK:POLarity {BOTh|NEGAtive|POSITIVe}
Syntax 2
MASK:POLarity?
Arguments
H BOTh
This enables testing for both positive and negative pulses. The oscilloscope tests positive pulses on the mask:source waveform until ½ of
the waveform has been tested. Then the oscilloscope inverts the mask
and performs the remaining tests.
H NEGAtive
This enables testing on negative pulses
H POSITIVe
This enables testing on positive pulses. This is the default.
Example
MASK:POLARITY BOTH
Sets pass/fail to test both positive (normal) and negative (inverted) waveforms.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 439 --
MASK:SEG<m> DELEte
Description
This command deletes the specified mask segment from the Current
mask.
Group
Mask
Syntax
MASK:SEG<m> DELEte
Arguments
H <m>
Is an integer that specifies the mask segment number to delete from
the Current mask.
Example
MASK:SEG3 DELETE
Deletes mask segment three from the Current mask.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 440 --
MASK:SEG<m>:NR_Pt?
Description
This command returns the number of points that make up the specified
mask segment of the Current mask. Each mask point consists of an
X--Y pair of coordinates.
Group
Mask
Syntax
MASK:SEG<m>:NR_Pt?
Arguments
H <m>
Is an integer number that specifies a mask segment number of the
Current mask.
Returns
<NR1> is 0 to 50.
Example
MASK:SEG2:NR_PT?
Might return MASK:SEG2:NR_PT 5
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 441 --
MASK:SEG<m>:POINTS
Description
This command sets or returns the X--Y user coordinates of all points in
the Current mask segment. The set form defines new points in the Current mask, replacing any existing points in the Current mask segment.
In other words, it sets or returns the vertices for a particular segment in
the Current mask.
Group
Mask
Syntax 1
MASK:SEG<m>:POINTS <NR3>, <NR3> [, <NR3>,
<NR3>]
Syntax 2
MASK:SEG<m>:POINTS?
Arguments
H <m>
Is an integer that specifies the Current mask segment number.
H <NR3>
Refers to the coordinates of one of the vertices in the Current mask.
Each pair of numbers is the horizontal and vertical coordinates of a
mask segment vertex. The pairs must be listed in a counterclockwise
order. If the vertical or horizontal scale or position is changed after this
command and then the query form of this command is issued, then the
value returned from the oscilloscope will not be the same. If just one
pair is input then they are ignored and the Current mask segment is
marked as undefined. The default is no points in the Current mask segment.
Example
MASK:SEG2:POINTS –2.3e-9, 44e-3, -2.5e-9,
47e-3, 1.2e-9, 44e-3
Defines the points in Current mask segment 2.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 442 --
MASK:SOUrce
Description
This command sets or reports which source will be compared against
the mask(s) when counting is turned on. In other words, it controls
which trace to use in mask counting. It also affects mask autoset and
how triggering is set up when you select the mask.
Group
Mask
Syntax 1
MASK:SOUrce {CH[1-4]|MATH[1-4]|REF[1-4]}
Syntax 2
MASK:SOUrce?
Arguments
H CH<1-4>
Selects a channel waveform to be compared against the specified
mask. The range for is 1 through 4.
H MATH<1-4>
Selects a math waveform to be compared against the specified mask.
The range for is 1 through 4.
H REF<1-4>
Selects a reference waveform to be compared against the specified
mask. The range is 1 through 4.
Example 1
MASK:SOURCE CH1
Enables CH1 to be compared against the mask. Since a timebase is not
specified, the default, Main, is used.
Example 2
MASK:SOURCE?
Might return
:MASK:SOURCE CH1,MAIN
indicated that the Channel 1 waveform will be compared against the
mask using the Main timebase.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 443 --
MASK:STANdard
(TDS5000B Series Option SM)
Description
This command deletes the existing mask (if any) and sets the selected
standard mask. If MASK:COUNt:STATE is ON, mask counting starts
immediately. The query form of this command returns the current mask
standard.
Note: There are several available mask standards that require a higher
bandwidth than permitted for TDS5000B Series instruments. In such
cases, a warning is posted to the standard event system upon selection
of any of these standards. To ensure that the mask you select is fully
supported by the instrument, always check the event status register
after selecting a mask standard.
The following warning event is posted if the mask exceeds the
instrument bandwidth: 2318,”Consider system bandwidth when
testing at this bit rate.”
Group
Mask
Related Commands
ACQuire:MODe
Syntax 1
MASK:STANdard
{ATARXG1|ATARXG2|ATARXG3|ATATXG1|ATATXG2|
ATATXG3|CLOCKCoax|CLOCKSymmetrical|D1|D2|DS0Contra|DS0Double|
DS0Single|DS0Timing|DS1|DS1A|DS1C|DS2|DS2RATECoax|
DS2RATESymmetrical|DS3|DS4NA|DS4NA_Max|E1Coax|E1Symmetrical|
E2|E3|E4_1|E4_0|ENET1000BCX_ATP2|ENET1000BCX_A
TP3|
ENET1000BCX_NTP2|ENET100FX|ENET100STP|ENET100U
TP|ENET1250|
ENETXAUI_Far|ENETXAUI_Near|FC1063|FC1063Draft|FC1063E|
FC1063E_ABR|FC1063E_ABT|FC1063E_ADR|FC1063E_AD
T|FC1063E_AGR|
FC1063E_AGT|FC1063E_NBT|FC1063E_NDT|FC1063E_NG
T|FC133|
FC133E|FC2125|FC2125E_ABR|FC2125E_ABT|FC2125E_
ADR|FC2125E_ADT|
FC2125E_AGR|FC2125E_AGT|FC2125E_NBT|FC2125E_ND
T|FC2125E_NGT|
FC266|FC266E|FC4250E_ABR|FC4250E_ABT
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 444 --
|FC4250E_ADR|FC4250E_ADT|FC4250E_AGR
|FC4250E_AGT|FC4250E_NBT|FC4250E_NDT
|FC4250E_NGT|FC531|FC531E|FST1|FST2|FST3
|FST4|FST5|FST6|FW1394BS1600B|
FW1394BS1600BT1|FW1394BS1600BT2|FW1394BS400B|F
W1394BS400BT1|
FW1394BS400BT2|FW1394BS800B|FW1394BS800BT1|FW1
394BS800BT2|
G703DS1|G703DS3|HST1|HST2|HST3|HST4|HST5|HST6|
INF2_5G|
INF2_5GE|NONe|OC1|OC12|OC3|OC48|OC48_FEC|PCIEXPRESS_Rcv|
PCIEXPRESS_Xmit|RATE32Mbit|RATE97Mbit|RIO_DRV1G|RIO
_DRV1_5G|
RIO_DRV2G|RIO_DRV500M|RIO_DRV500M|RIO_DRV750M|
RIO_EDRV1G|
RIO_EDRV1_5G|RIO_EDRV2G|RIO_EDRV500M|RIO_EDRV5
00M|
RIO_EDRV750M|RIO_RCV1G|RIO_RCV1_5G|RIO_RCV2G|R
IO_RCV500M|
RIO_RCV500M|RIO_RCV750M|RIO_SERIAL_1G|RIO_SERIAL_2G|RIO_SERIAL_3G|
SFI5_RCVBCLK2|SFI5_RCVBCLK3|SFI5_RCVBDATA2|SFI5_RCVBDATA3|
SFI5_RCVDCLK2|SFI5_RCVDCLK3|SFI5_RCVDDATA2|SFI5_RCVDDATA3|
SFI5_XMITACLK2|SFI5_XMITACLK3|SFI5_XMITADATA2|SFI5_XMITADATA3|
SFI5_XMITCCLK2|SFI5_XMITCCLK3|SFI5_XMITCDATA2|SFI5_XMITCDATA3|
STM0_0|STM0_1|STM0_HDBX|STM1E_1|STM1E_0|STS1Ey
e|STS1Pulse|
STS3|STS3_Max|TFI5_2|TFI5_3|USERMask|VIDEO270|VIDEO360|VSROC192}
Syntax 2
MASK:STANdard?
Arguments
H ATARXG1 (Serial ATA, G1 Rx 1.5 Gb/s)
H ATARXG2 (Serial ATA, G2, Rx, 3.0 Gb/s)
H ATARXG3 (Serial ATA, G3, Rx)
H ATATXG1 (Serial ATA, G1 Tx, 1.5 Gb/s)
H ATATXG2 (Serial ATA, G2 Tx, 3.0 Gb/s)
H ATATXG3 (Serial ATA, G3 Tx)
H CLOCKCoax
H CLOCKSymmetrical
H D1
H D2
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 445 --
H DS0Contra
H DS0Double
H DS0Single
H DS0Timing
H DS1 (ANSI T1.102-1993 (R1999), DS1,
1.544 Mb/s)
H DS1A (ANSI T1.102-1993 (R1999), DS1A,
2.048 Mb/s)
H DS1C (ANSI T1.102-1993 (R1999), DS1C,
3.152 Mb/s)
H DS2 (ANSI T1.102-1993 (R1999), DS2,
6.312 Mb/s)
H DS2RATECoax (ITU-T, G703 (10/98), D2
Rate Coax, 6.312 Mb/s)
H DS2RATESymmetrical (ITU-T, G703 (10/98),
D2 Rate Sym, 6.312 Mb/s)
H DS3 (ANSI T1.102-1993 (R1999), DS3,
44.736 Mb/s)
H DS4NA (ANSI T1.102-1993 (R1999), DS4NA,
139.26 Mb/s)
H DS4NA_Max (ANSI T1.102-1993 (R1999),
DSNA Max Output, 139.26 Mb
H E1Coax (ITU-T, G703 (10/98), E1 Coax
Pair, 2.048 Mb/s)
H E1Symmetrical (ITU-T, G703 (10/98), E1
Sym Pair, 2.048 Mb/s)
H E2 (ITU-T, G703 (10/98), E2, 8.448 Mb/s)
H E3 (ITU-T, G703 (10/98), E3, 34.368
Mb/s)
H E4_0 (ITU-T, G703 (10/98), E4 Binary 0)
H E4_1 (ITU-T, G703 (10/98), E4 Binary 1)
H ENET100FX
H ENET100STP (IEEE Std 802.3 and ANSI
X3.263-1995, 100 Base-Tx, STP, 125 Mb/s )
H ENET100UTP (IEEE Std 802.3 and ANSI
X3.263-1995, 100 Base-Tx, UTP, 125 Mb/s)
H ENET1000BCX_ATP2 (1000B-CX Abs, TP2,
1.25 Gb/s)
H ENET1000BCX_ATP3 (1000B-CX Abs, TP3,
1.25 Gb/s)
H ENET1000BCX_NTP2 (1000B-CX Norm, TP2,
1.25 Gb/s)
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 446 --
H ENET1250 (IEEE Std 802.3 and ANSI
X3.263-1995, GB Ethernet, 1.25 Gb/s)
H ENETXAUI_Far (10 Gigabit Attachment Unit
Interface (XAUI), Far, 3.125 Gb/s)
H ENETXAUI_Near (10 Gigabit Attachment
Unit Interface (XAUI), Near, 3,125 Gb/s)
H FC133 (ANSI X3.230-1999 NCITS 1235D/Rev
11, Optical, 132.8 Mb/s)
H FC133E (ANS1 X3.230-1999 NCITS 1235D/Rev
11, Electrical 132.8 Mb/s)
H FC266 (ANSI X3.230-1999 NCITS 1235D/Rev
11, Optical, 265.6 Mb/s)
H FC266E (ANS1 X3.230-1999 NCITS 1235D/Rev
11, Electrical, 132.8 Mb/s)
H FC531 (ANSI X3.230-1999 NCITS 1235D/Rev
11, Optical, 531.2 Mb/s)
H FC531E (ANS1 X3.230-1999 NCITS 1235D/Rev
11, Electrical, 531.2 Mb/s)
H FC1063 (ANSI X3.230-1999 NCITS 1235D/Rev
11, Optical, 1.065 Gb/s)
H FC1063E (ANS1 X3.230-1999 NCITS 1235D/
Rev 11, Electrical, 1.0625 Gb/s)
H FC1063E_ABT (ANS1 X3.230-1999 NCITS
1235D/Rev 11, Abs, Beta, Transm)
H FC1063E_ADT (ANS1 X3.230-1999 NCITS
1235D/Rev 11, Abs, Beta, Transm)
H FC1063E_AGT (ANS1 X3.230-1999 NCITS
1235D/Rev 11, Abs, Gamma, Transm)
H FC1063E_NBT (ANS1 X3.230-1999 NCITS
1235D/Rev 11, Norm, Beta, Transm)
H FC1063E_NDT (ANS1 X3.230-1999 NCITS
1235D/Rev 11, Norm, Delta, Transm)
H FC1063E_NGT (ANS1 X3.230-1999 NCITS
1235D/Rev 11, Norm, Gamma, Transm)
H FC1063E_ABR (ANS1 X3.230-1999 NCITS
1235D/Rev 11, Abs, Beta, Recv)
H FC1063E_ADR (ANS1 X3.230-1999 NCITS
1235D/Rev 11, Abs, Delta, Recv)
H FC1063E_AGR (ANS1 X3.230-1999 NCITS
1235D/Rev 11, Abs, Gamma, Recv)
H FC1063Draft (ANSI X3.230-1999 NCITS
1235D/Rev 11, Optical, Draft Rev 11)
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 447 --
H FC2125 (ANSI X3.230-1999 NCITS 1235D/Rev
11, Optical, 2.125)
H FC2125E_ABT (ANS1 X3.230-1999 NCITS
1235D/Rev 11, Abs, Beta, Transm)
H FC2125E_ADT (ANS1 X3.230-1999 NCITS
1235D/Rev 11, Abs, Delta, Transm)
H FC2125E_AGT (ANS1 X3.230-1999 NCITS
1235D/Rev 11, Abs, Gamma, Transm)
H FC2125E_NBT (ANS1 X3.230-1999 NCITS
1235D/Rev 11, Norm, Beta, Transm)
H FC2125E_NDT (ANS1 X3.230-1999 NCITS
1235D/Rev 11, Norm, Delta, Transm)
H FC2125E_NGT (ANS1 X3.230-1999 NCITS
1235D/Rev 11, Norm, Gamma, Transm)
H FC2125E_ABR (ANS1 X3.230-1999 NCITS
1235D/Rev 11, Abs, Beta, Recv)
H FC2125E_ADR (ANS1 X3.230-1999 NCITS
1235D/Rev 11, Abs, Delta, Recv)
H FC2125E_AGR (ANS1 X3.230-1999 NCITS
1235D/Rev 11, Abs, Gamma, Recv)
H FC4250E_ABT
H FC4250E_ ADT
H FC4250E_AGT
H FC4250E_NBT
H FC4250E_NDT
H FC4250E_NGT
H FC4250E_ABR
H FC4250E_ADR
H FC4250E_AGR
H FST1 (USB, FS:T1, 12 Mb/s)
H FST2 (USB, FS:T2, 12 Mb/s)
H FST3 (USB, FS:T3, 12 Mb/s)
H FST4 (USB, FS:T4: 12 Mb/s)
H FST5 (USB, FS:T5, 12 Mb/s)
H FST6 (USB, FS:T6, 12 Mb/s)
H FW1394BS400B (IEEE 1394b, S400 Optical, 491.5
Mb/s)
H FW1394BS400BT1 (IEEE 1394b, S400b T1, 491.5
Mb/s)
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 448 --
H FW1394BS400BT2 (IEEE 1394b, S400b T2, 491.5
Mb/s)
H FW1394BS800B (IEEE 1394b, S800 Optical, 988.0
Mb/s)
H FW1394BS800BT1 (IEEE 1394b, S800b T1, 983.0
Mb/s)
H FW1394BS800BT2 (IEEE 1394b, S800b T2, 983.0
Mb/s)
H FW1394BS1600B (IEEE 1394b, S1600 Optical, 1.966
Gb/s)
H FW1394BS1600BT1 (IEEE 1394b, S1600b T1, 1.966
Gb/s)
H FW1394BS1600BT2 (IEEE 1394b, S1600b T2, 1.966
Gb/s)
H G703D1 (ITU-T, G703 (10/98), DS1 Rate,
1.544 Mb/s)
H G703DS3 (ITU-T, G703 (10/98)
H HST1 (USB, HS:T1, 480 Mb/s) G703DS3 (ITU--T,
G703 (10/98)
H HST2 (USB, HS:T2, 480 Mb/s) G703DS3 (ITU--T,
G703 (10/98)
H HST3 (USB, HS:T3, 480 Mb/s)
H HST4 (USB, HS:T4, 480 Mb/s)
H HST5 (USB, HS:T5, 480 Mb/s)
H HST6 (USB, HS:T6, 480 Mb/s)
H INF2_5G (InfiniBand, IBTA Spec 1.0a, 2.5 Optical,
2.5 Gb/s)
H INF2_5GE (InfiniBand, IBTA Spec 1.0a, 2.5 Electrical,
2.5 Gb/s)
H NONe
H OC1 (GR 253--CORE Issue 3 9/21/2000 OC1/STM0,
51.84 Mb/s)
H OC3 (GR 253--CORE Issue 3 9/21/2000 OC1/STM1,
155.52, Mb/s)
H OC12 (GR 253--CORE Issue 3 9/21/2000 OC1/STM4,
622.08 Mb/s)
H OC48 (GR 253--CORE Issue 3 9/21/2000
OC1/STM16, 2.4883 Gb/s
H OC48_FEC (Forward Error Correction -- CSA8000
mask, 2.666 Gb/s)
H PCIEXPRESS_Xmit (PCI Express Transmitter, 2.5
Gb/s)
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 449 --
H PCIEXPRESS_Rcv (PCI Express Receiver, 2.5 Gb/s)
H RATE32Mbit (ITU-T, G703 (10/98), 32.064
Mb/s)
H RATE97Mbit (ITU-T, G703 (10/98), 97
Mbit, 97.728 Mb/s)
H RIO_DRV1G (Rapid IO Driver, 1 Gb/s)
H RIO_DRV1_5G (Rapid IO Driver, 5 Gb/s)
H RIO_DRV2G (Rapid IO Driver, 2 Gb/s)
H RIO_DRV500M (Rapid IO Driver, 500 Mb/s)
H RIO_DRV750M (Rapid IO Driver, 750 Mb/s)
H RIO_EDRV1G (Rapid IO Extended Driver, 1 Gb/s)
H RIO_EDRV1_5G (Rapid IO Extended Driver, 1.5 Gb/s)
H RIO_EDRV2G (Rapid IO Extended Driver, 2 Gb/s)
H RIO_EDRV500M (Rapid IO Extended Driver, 500
Mb/s)
H RIO_EDRV750M (Rapid IO Extended Driver, 750
Mb/s)
H RIO_RCV500M (Rapid IO Receiver, 500 Mb/s)
H RIO_RCV750M (Rapid IO Receiver, 750 Mb/s)
H RIO_RCV1G (Rapid IO Receiver, 1 Gb/s)
H RIO_RCV1_5G (Rapid IO Receiver, 1.5 Gb/s)
H RIO_RCV2G (Rapid IO Receiver, 2 Gb/s)
H RIO_SERIAL_1G (Rapid IO Serial, 1.25 Gb/s)
H RIO_SERIAL_2G (Rapid IO Serial, 2.5 Gb/s)
H RIO_SERIAL_3G (Rapid IO Serial, 3.25 Gb/s)
H SFI5_XMITADATA2 (SFI15 Transmit: Test Point A
Data Signal 2, 2.488 Gb/s)
H SFI5_XMITCDATA2 (SFI15 Transmit: Test Point C
Data Signal 2, 2.488 Gb/s)
H SFI5_XMITACLK2 (SFI15 Transmit: Test Point A
Clock Signal 2, 2.488 Gb/s)
H SFI5_XMITCCLK2 (SFI15 Transmit: Test Point C
Clock Signal 2, 2.488 Gb/s)
H SFI5_RCVBDATA2 (SFI15 Receive: Test Point B Data
Signal 2, 2.488 Gb/s)
H SFI5_RCVDDATA2 (SFI15 Receive: Test Point D Data
Signal 2, 2.488 Gb/s)
H SFI5_RCVBCLK2 (SFI15 Receive: Test Point B Clock
Signal 2, 2.488 Gb/s)
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 450 --
H SFI5_RCVDCLK2 (SFI15 Receive: Test Point D Clock
Signal 2, 2.488 Gb/s)
H SFI5_XMITADATA3 (SFI15 Transmit: Test Point A
Data Signal 3, 3.125 Gb/s)
H SFI5_XMITCDATA3 (SFI15 Transmit: Test Point C
Data Signal 3, 3.125 Gb/s)
H SFI5_XMITACLK3 (SFI15 Transmit: Test Point A
Clock Signal 3, 3.125 Gb/s)
H SFI5_XMITCCLK3 (SFI15 Transmit: Test Point C
Clock Signal 3, 3.125 Gb/s)
H SFI5_RCVBDATA3 (SFI15 Receive: Test Point B Data
Signal 3, 3.125 Gb/s)
H SFI5_RCVDDATA3 (SFI15 Receive: Test Point D Data
Signal 3, 3.125 Gb/s)
H SFI5_RCVBCLK3 (SFI15 Receive: Test Point B Clock
Signal 3, 3.125 Gb/s)
H SFI5_RCVDCLK3 (SFI15 Receive: Test Point D Clock
Signal 3, 3.125 Gb/s
H STM0_0 (ITU-T, G703 (10/98), STM1E
Binary 0)
H STM0_1 (ITU-T, G703 (10/98), STM1E
Binary 1)
H STM0_HDBX
H STS1Eye (ANSI T1.102-1993 (R1999), STS-1
Eye, 51.84 Mb/s)
H STS1Pulse (ANSI T1.102-1993 (R1999),
STS-1 Pulse, 51.84 Mb/s)
H STS3 (ANSI T1.102-1993 (R1999), STS-3,
155.52 Mb/s)
H STS3_Max (ANSI T1.102-1993 (R1999),
STS-3 Max Output, 155.52 Mb/s)
H TFI15_2 (TFI--5, 2.488 Gb/s)
H TFI5_3 (TFI--5, 3.1104 Gb/s)
H USERMask
H VIDEO270
H VIDEO360
H VSROC192 (VSR OC192/STM64, 1.24416 Gb/s)
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 451 --
Example 1
MASK:STANDARD E1COAX
Selects the E1 Coax standard mask.
Example 2
MASK:STANDARD?
Might return
:MASK:STANDARD E1COAX
Indicating that the E1 Coax mask is selected as the current mask standard.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 452 --
MASK:STOPOnviolation
Description
This command sets or returns the stop on violation setting. When enabled, this command stops waveform acquisitions on the first occurrence of a waveform violation. MASK:DISplay must be ON for the
oscilloscope to detect violations. In other words, it controls whether the
pass/fail test stops running when a violation is detected.
Group
Mask
Syntax 1
MASK:STOPOnviolation {OFF|ON|<NR1>}
Syntax 2
MASK:STOPOnviolation?
Arguments
H ON
Stops waveform acquisition on the first occurrence of a mask violation.
H OFF
Turns off mask test stop on violation.
H <NR1>
A 0 is an integer, which turns off stop on violation, and any other value turns on stop on violation.
Example
MASK:STOPONVIOLATION ON
Sets the oscilloscope to stop waveform acquisition on the first occurrence of a waveform violation.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 453 --
MASK:TESt:AUX:COMPLetion
Description
This command sets or returns the test:aux on pass/fail test completion
mode. When enabled, this command causes the oscilloscope to send a
TTL signal out the Aux:Out port when the mask pass/fail status
changes to ‘Failing’. In other words, this command controls whether or
not a TTL signal is sent out the AuxOut port on completion of the pass/
fail test.
Group
Mask
Syntax 1
MASK:TESt:AUX:COMPLetion {OFF|ON|<NR1>}
Syntax 2
MASK:TESt:AUX:COMPLetion?
Arguments
H ON
Turns on the pass/fail mask:test:aux on completion.
H OFF
Turns off the pass/fail mask:test:aux on completion.
H <NR1>
A 0 disables the mask:test:aux:completion function; any other value
enables it.
Example
MASK:TEST:AUX:COMPLETION ON
Turns on the pass/fail test on completion
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 454 --
MASK:TESt:AUX:FAILure
Description
This command sets or returns the test:aux status on pass/fail test failure
mode. When enabled, this command causes the oscilloscope to send a
TTL signal out the AuxOut port when the pass/fail status changes to
‘Failing’. In other words, it sends the signal when a failure occurs during the mask pass/fail test.
Group
Mask
Syntax 1
MASK:TESt:AUX:FAILure {OFF|ON|<NR1>}
Syntax 2
MASK:TESt:AUX:FAILure?
Arguments
H ON
Turns on the pass/fail mask:test:aux on failure.
H OFF
Turns off the pass/fail mask:test:aux on failure. This is the default.
H <NR1>
A 0 disables the mask:test:aux:failure function; any other value enables it.
Example
MASK:TEST:AUX:FAILURE ON
Turns on the pass/fail test on failure
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 455 --
MASK:TESt:BEEP:COMPLetion
Description
This command sets or returns the beep on pass/fail test completion
mode. When enabled, this command causes the oscilloscope to emit a
tone when the mask pass/fail test completes.
Group
Mask
Syntax 1
MASK:TESt:BEEP:COMPLetion {OFF|ON|<NR1>}
Syntax 2
MASK:TESt:BEEP:COMPLetion?
Arguments
H ON
Turns on the pass/fail beep on completion.
H OFF
Turns off the pass/fail beep on completion.
H <NR1>
A 0 turns off the pass/fail beep on completion, any other integer turns
on the pass/fail beep on completion.
Example
MASK:TEST:BEEP:COMPLETION ON
Turns on pas/fail beep on completion
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 456 --
MASK:TESt:BEEP:FAILure
Description
This command sets or returns the beep status on pass/fail test failure
mode. When enabled, this command causes the oscilloscope to emit a
tone when the pass/fail status changes to ‘Failed’. In other words, it
sounds the bell when a failure occurs during the mask pass/fail test.
Group
Mask
Syntax 1
MASK:TESt:BEEP:FAILure {OFF|ON|<NR1>}
Syntax 2
MASK:TESt:BEEP:FAILure?
Arguments
H ON
Turns on the pass/fail beep on failure.
H OFF
Turns off the pass/fail beep on failure. This is the default.
H <NR1>
A 0 turns off the pass/fail beep on failure, and any other integer turns
on the pass/fail beep on failure.
Example
MASK:TEST:BEEP:FAILURE OFF
Turns off the pass/fail beep on failure
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 457 --
MASK:TESt:DELay
Description
This command sets or returns the amount of time, in seconds, to wait
after starting pass/fail testing to evaluate waveforms. This is useful if
the test system requires ‘settling’ time prior to evaluating waveforms.
Group
Mask
Syntax 1
MASK:TESt:DELay <NR3>
Syntax 2
MASK:TESt:DELay?
Argument
H <NR3>
Is a floating point number that specifies the amount of time, in seconds, to delay the start of the pass/fail test.
Example
MASK:TEST:DELAY 1
Delays waveform evaluation by 1 second after the start of pass/fail testing.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 458 --
MASK:TESt:HARDCopy
Description
This command sets or returns the hard copy in pass/fail failure mode.
When enabled, this command causes the oscilloscope to generate a
screen hard copy, using the current oscilloscope hard copy settings, as
soon as the pass/fail status changes to ‘Failing’. In other words, it prints
the screen to the default printer.
Group
Mask
Syntax 1
MASK:TESt:HARDCOPY {OFF|ON|<NR1>}
Syntax 2
MASK:TESt:HARDCOPY?
Arguments
H ON
Turns on generate hard copy on failure.
H OFF
Turns off generate hard copy on failure.
H <NR1>
A 0 turns off generate hard copy on failure, and any other value turns
on generate hard copy on failure.
Example
MASK:TEST:HARDCOPY ON
Turns on generate hard copy on failure.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 459 --
MASK:TESt:LOG:FAILure
Description
This command sets or returns the log status on pass/fail test failure
mode. When enabled, this command causes the oscilloscope to log the
current date and time to a file when the pass/fail status changes to ‘Failing’. The file name is determined from the current date and time. The
user cannot change this name.
Group
Mask
Related Commands
MASK:TESt:SAVEWFM:FILEName
Syntax 1
MASK:TESt:LOG:FAILure {OFF|ON|<NR1>}
Syntax 2
MASK:TESt:LOG:FAILure?
Arguments
H ON
Turns on the pass/fail log on failure.
H OFF
Turns off the pass/fail log on failure. This is the default.
H <NR1>
A 0 turns off the pass/fail log on failure, and any other integer turns
on the pass/fail log on failure.
Example
MASK:TEST:LOG:FAILURE OFF
Turns off the pass/fail log on failure.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 460 --
MASK:TESt:REPeat
Description
This command sets or returns the repeat pass/fail test on completion
mode. When enabled, this command repeats the pass/fail test cycle at
the completion of the previous test cycle.
Group
Mask
Related Commands
MASK:COUNt:VIOLATIONS?
Syntax 1
MASK:TESt:REPeat
{OFF|ON|<NR1>}
Syntax 2
MASK:TESt:REPeat?
Arguments
H ON
Turns on repeat on completion.
H OFF
Turns off repeat on completion
H <NR1>
A 0 turns off repeat on completion, and any other integer turns on
repeat on completion.
Example
MASK:TEST:REPEAT ON
Causes the oscilloscope to continuously repeat the pass/fail test.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 461 --
MASK:TESt:SAMple
Description
This command sets or returns the minimum number of waveform database (WfmDB) points the oscilloscope can acquire before it stops a
single sequence acquisition or stops running a mask test.
Hint: a bigger sample size may allow a greater throughput (more waveforms to get acquired at a time). However, a very large sample size may
slow down the display update. So if you find yourself wanting to speed
up the display rate, consider reducing the sample size.
This command works the same as the ACQuire:NUMSAMples command.
Group
Mask
Syntax 1
MASK:TESt:SAMple {<NR1>}
Syntax 2
MASK:TESt:SAMple?
Arguments
H <NR1>
The number of points to sample.
Example
MASK:TEST:SAMPLE 100000
Sets the oscilloscope to acquire 100,000 WfmDB points.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 462 --
MASK:TESt:SAMple:THReshold
Description
This command sets or returns the minimum number of hits in mask
regions needed to cause the pass/fail status to change from PASSING to
FAILING. This affects the mask test when the oscilloscope is acquiring
in waveform database (WfmDB) mode.
Group
Mask
Syntax 1
MASK:TESt:SAMple:THReshold {<NR1>}
Syntax 2
MASK:TESt:SAMple:THReshold?
Arguments
H <NR1>
The number of hits that can happen when the test fails.
Example
MASK:TEST:SAMPLE:THRESHOLD 100
The test will fail when 100 or more hits happen.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 463 --
MASK:TESt:SAVEWFM
Description
This command sets or returns the save waveform to file on failure setting. When enabled, this command copies waveform data from active
channels to files when the pass/fail test status changes to ‘Failing’.
Note: This oscilloscope saves files only on the first violation that
causes the pass/fail test to fail. To generate a waveform file for every
violation occurrence, set MASK:TESt:REPeat to ON and
MASK:TESt:WAVEform to 1. Use this technique only when the expected number of violations is small and the violation occurs intermittently.
Group
Mask
Syntax 1
MASK:TESt:SAVEWFM {OFF|ON|<NR1>}
Syntax 2
MASK:TESt:SAVEWFM?
Arguments
H ON
Turns on copying all active channel waveforms to files.
H OFF
Turns off copying all active channel waveforms to files.
H <NR1>
A 0 turns off copying all active channel waveforms to files, and any
other integer turns on copying all active channel waveforms to files.
Example
MASK:TEST:SAVEWFM ON
Sets the oscilloscope to save the failing waveform data to files.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 464 --
MASK:TESt:SAVEWFM:FILEName
Description
This command sets or returns the name of the directory and file to use
with the MASK:TESt:SAVEWFM command. It defines the directory
the files will be put in (name comes from date and time).
Group
Mask
Related Commands
MASK:TESt:SAVEWFM, MASK:TESt:LOG:FAILure
Syntax 1
MASK:TESt:SAVEWFM:FILEName <Qstring>
Syntax 2
MASK:TESt:SAVEWFM:FILEName?
Argument
H <Qstring>
Is a string representing the name of the file to save waveform data to
Example
MASK:TEST:SAVEWFM:FILENAME ”TEST”
Sets the file ”TEST” as the file to save waveform data to on failure.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 465 --
MASK:TESt:SRQ:COMPLetion
Description
This command sets or returns an SRQ on pass/fail test completion
mode. When enabled, this command causes the oscilloscope to send a
GPIB SRQ command when the mask pass/fail test completes.
Group
Mask
Syntax 1
MASK:TESt:SRQ:COMPLetion {OFF|ON|<NR1>}
Syntax 2
MASK:TESt:SRQ:COMPLetion?
Arguments
H ON
Turns on the pass/fail SRQ on completion.
H OFF
Turns off the pass/fail SRQ on completion.
H <NR1>
A 0 turns off the pass/fail SR on completion, any other integer turns
on the pass/fail SRQ on completion.
Example
MASK:TEST:SRQ:COMPLETION ON
Turns on pass/fail SRQ on completion
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 466 --
MASK:TESt:SRQ:FAILure
Description
This command sets or returns the SRQ status on pass/fail test failure
mode. When enabled, this command causes the oscilloscope to send a
GPIB SRQ command when the pass/fail status changes to ‘Failing’. In
other words, it sends an SRQ when a failure occurs during the mask
pass/fail test.
Group
Mask
Syntax 1
MASK:TESt:SRQ:FAILure {OFF|ON|<NR1>}
Syntax 2
MASK:TESt:SRQ:FAILure?
Arguments
H ON
Turns on the pass/fail SRQ on failure.
H OFF
Turns off the pass/fail SRQ on failure. This is the default.
H <NR1>
A 0 turns off the pass/fail SRQ on failure, and any other integer turns
on the pass/fail SRQ on failure.
Example
MASK:TEST:SRQ:FAILURE OFF
Turns off the pass/fail SRQ on failure
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 467 --
MASK:TESt:STATE
Description
This command sets or returns the state of mask pass/fail testing. When
enabled, this command resets the pass/fail status information and starts
pass/fail mask testing. This command also generates an ‘Operation
Complete’ message when pass/fail testing completes. Refer to BUSY?
And *OPC commands for information on synchronizing a controller
with pass/fail testing.
Group
Mask
Syntax 1
MASK:TESt:STATE {OFF|ON|<NR1>}
Syntax 2
MASK:TESt:STATE?
Arguments
H ON
Turns on mask pass/fail testing.
H OFF
Turns off mask pass/fail testing.
H <NR1>
A 0 turns off mask pass/fail testing; any other integer turns on mask
pass/fail testing.
Example
MASK:TEST:STATE ON
Turns on mask pass/fail testing.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 468 --
MASK:TESt:STATUS?
Description
This command returns the pass/fail test status. This command returns
one of: OFF, DELAY, PASSING, FAILING, PASSED, FAILED, and
VIOLATION. In other words, it indicates the result of the pass/fail test.
When the violation count exceeds the violation threshold, the status
changes from Passing to Failed.
Group
Mask
Syntax
MASK:TESt:STATUS?
Example
MASK:TESt:STATUS?
Might return: MASK:TEST:STATUS PASSING
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 469 --
MASK:TESt:STOP:FAILure
Description
This command sets or returns the stop status on pass/fail test failure
mode. When enabled, this command causes the oscilloscope to stop
acquiring data when the pass/fail status changes to ‘Failing’. In other
words, it stops when a failure occurs during the mask pass/fail test. Repeat--on--completion mode has no effect.
Group
Mask
Syntax 1
MASK:TESt:STOP:FAILure {OFF|ON|<NR1>}
Syntax 2
MASK:TESt:STOP:FAILure?
Arguments
H ON
Turns on the pass/fail stop on failure.
H OFF
Turns off the pass/fail stop on failure. This is the default.
H <NR1>
A 0 turns off the pass/fail stop on failure, and any other integer turns
on the pass/fail SRQ on failure.
Example
MASK:TEST:STOP:FAILURE OFF
Turns off the pass/fail stop on failure
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 470 --
MASK:TESt:THReshold
Description
This command sets or returns the number of failed tested waveforms
needed in each pass/fail test to cause the pass/fail status to change from
PASSING to FAILING.
Group
Mask
Syntax 1
MASK:TESt:THReshold <NR1>
Syntax 2
MASK:TESt:THReshold?
Argument
H <NR1>
Is an integer that represents the number of tested waveform violations
occurring in each pass/fail test needed to change the pass/fail status to
FAILING.
This means that if the threshold is set to the default of 1 then 1 failure
would cause a test failure. If the threshold is set to 2 then 2 failures
would cause a test failure.
Example
MASK:TEST:THRESHOLD?
Might return: MASK:TEST:THRESHOLD 32
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 471 --
MASK:TESt:WAVEform
Description
This command sets or returns the number of waveforms to test during
pass/fail testing. If Averaging is on, this is the number of averaged waveforms to test during pass/fail testing. In other words, it specifies the
number of waveforms to be acquired in counting the mask hits in the
pass/fail test. The default is 20.
Group
Mask
Syntax 1
MASK:TESt:WAVEform <NR1>
Syntax 2
?
Argument
H <NR1>
Is an integer that sets the number of tested (sampled or averaged) waveforms to test for each pass/fail test.
Example
MASK:TESt:WAVEform?
Might return
:MASK:TEST:WAVEFORM 500
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 472 --
MASK:USER:AMPlitude
Description
This command sets or returns the current mask’s nominal pulse amplitude in volts. The query form of this command returns the nominal
pulse amplitude of the displayed mask. The set form of this command
only affects the User mask, regardless of the current (displayed) mask.
Group
Mask
Related Commands
MASK:USER:VSCAle
Syntax 1
MASK:USER:AMPlitude <NR3>
Syntax 2
MASK:USER:AMPlitude?
Argument
H <NR3>
This is a floating number that sets the nominal pulse amplitude in
volts
Example
MASK:USER:AMPLITUDE 2.4
Sets the User mask nominal pulse amplitude to 2.4 volts.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 473 --
MASK:USER:BITRate
Description
This command sets or returns the bit rate for the user mask.
Group
Mask
Syntax 1
MASK:USER:BITRate <NR1>
Syntax 2
MASK:USER:BITRate?
Argument
H <NR1>
This is a number that sets the bit rate of the user mask in bits per second.
Example 1
MASK:USER:BITRATE 156e6
Sets the bit rate.
Example 2
MASK:USER:BITRATE?
Might return: 1560000
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 474 --
MASK:USER:HSCAle
Description
This command sets or returns the nominal timing resolution used to
draw the mask, in time/division. The query form of this command returns the nominal timing resolution of the displayed mask. The set form
of this command only affects the User mask, regardless of the current
(displayed) mask.
Group
Mask
Related Commands
MASK:USER:HTRIGPOS
Syntax 1
MASK:USER:HSCAle <NR3>
Syntax 2
MASK:USER:HSCAle?
Argument
H <NR3>
This is a floating point number that sets the mask drawing timing resolution.
Example
MASK:USER:HSCALE 40e-9
Sets the nominal timing resolution used to draw the mask pulse shape
to 40 nanoseconds per division.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 475 --
MASK:USER:HTRIGPOS
Description
This command sets or returns the nominal trigger position.(pulse leading edge) used to draw the mask as a fraction of the display width. The
query form of this command returns the nominal trigger position of the
displayed mask. The set form of this command only affects the User
mask, regardless of the current (displayed) mask.
Group
Mask
Related Commands
MASK:USER:HSCAle?
Syntax 1
MASK:USER:HTRIGPOS <NR3>
Syntax 2
MASK:USER:HTRIGPOS?
Argument
H <NR3>
Is a floating point number in the range of 0.0 to 1.0 that sets the trigger points as a fraction of the display width, referenced from the left
edge of the graticule.
0.0 represents the left edge.
Example
MASK:USER:HTRIGPOS 0.6
Sets the User mask nominal pulse leading edge position to the 6th horizontal graticule division.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 476 --
MASK:USER:LABel
Description
This command sets or queries the label assigned to a user mask. This
label is displayed in the upper left--hand corner of the graticule when a
user mask is selected.
Group
Mask
Syntax 1
MASK:USER:LABel <string>
Syntax 2
MASK:USER:LABel?
Arguments
H <string>
This is an alphanumeric character string used to annotate a user mask
label.
Example 1
MASK:USER:LABel ”mikesdata”
This command assigns ”mikesdata” as the user mask label.
Example 2
MASK:USER:LABel?
This query might return MASK:USER:LABel ”mikesdata” as the
user mask label.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 477 --
MASK:USER:PATTERNBITS
Description
This command sets or returns the number of bits used for serial trigger
for the User mask standard. For example, DS1 requires six bits,: four
leading zeros, a one, and a trailing zero. The query form of this command returns the serial bit value of the displayed mask. The set form of
this command only affects the User mask, regardless of the current (displayed) mask.
Group
Mask
Related Commands
MASK:USER:PRESAMPBITS
Syntax 1
MASK:USER:PATTERNBITS <NR1>
Syntax 2
MASK:USER:PATTERNBITS?
Argument
H <NR1>
Is an integer that sets the number of bits.
Example
MASK:USER:PATTERNBITS 6
Sets the User mask number of serial pattern bits to 6.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 478 --
MASK:USER:PRESAMPBITS
Description
This command sets or returns the number of bits before the (isolated
one) pulse leading edge in the serial trigger pass/fail testing. For example, DS1 has four leading zeros. The query form of this command returns the presample bit value of the displayed mask. The set form of
this command only affects the User mask, regardless of the current (displayed) mask.
Group
Mask
Related Commands
MASK:USER:PATTERNBITS
Syntax 1
MASK:USER:PRESAMPBITS <NR1>
Syntax 2
MASK:USER:PRESAMPBITS?
Argument
H <NR1>
Is an integer that sets the number of bits before the trigger pulse.
Example
MASK:USER:PRESAMPBITS 4
Sets the User mask number of bits before the trigger pulse to 4.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 479 --
MASK:USER:RECOrdlength
Description
This command sets or returns the nominal record length for pulse mask
testing. The query form of this command returns the record length value of the displayed mask. The set form of this command only affects
the User mask, regardless of the current (displayed) mask.
Group
Mask
Syntax 1
MASK:USER:RECOrdlength <NR1>
Syntax 2
MASK:USER:RECOrdlength?
Argument
H <NR1>
Is an integer number that sets the record length.
Example
MASK:USER:RECORDLENGTH 500
Sets the User mask record length to 500 points.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 480 --
MASK:USER:SEG<m> DELEte
Description
This command deletes the specified mask segment from the User mask,
whether or not the User mask is the current mask.
Group
Mask
Syntax
MASK:USER:SEG<m> DELEte
Arguments
H <m>
Is an integer that specifies the User mask segment number to delete
from the User mask.
Example
MASK:USER:SEG3 DELETE
Deletes mask segment three from the User mask.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 481 --
MASK:USER:SEG<m>:NR_Pt?
Description
This command returns the number of points that make up the specified
User mask segment. Each mask point consists of an X--Y pair of coordinates.
Group
Mask
Syntax
MASK:USER:SEG<m>:NR_Pt?
Arguments
H <m>
Is an integer number that specifies a User mask segment number.
Returns
<NR1> is 0 to 50.
Example
MASK:USER:SEG<m>:NR_PT?
Might return MASK:USER:SEG2:NR_PT 5
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 482 --
MASK:USER:SEG<m>:POINTS
Description
This command sets or returns the X--Y user coordinates of all points in
the specified User mask segment. The set form defines new points in
the User mask, replacing any existing points in the specified User mask
segment. In other words, it sets or returns the vertices for a particular
segment in the selected mask.
Group
Mask
Syntax 1
MASK:USER:SEG<m>:POINTS <NR3>, <NR3> [, <NR3>,
<NR3>]
Syntax 2
MASK:USER:SEG<m>:POINTS?
Arguments
H <m>
Is an integer that specifies the User mask segment number.
H <NR3>
Refers to the coordinates of one of the vertices in the User mask. Each
pair of numbers is the horizontal and vertical coordinates of a mask
segment vertex. The pairs must be listed in a counterclockwise order. If
the vertical or horizontal scale or position is changed after this command and then the query form of this command is issued, then the value
returned from the oscilloscope will not be the same. If just one pair is
input then they are ignored and the User mask segment is marked as
undefined. The default is not points in the User mask segment.
Example
MASK:USER:SEG2:POINTS –2.3e-9, 44e-3, -2.5e-9,
47e-3, 1.2e-9, 44e-3
Defines the points in User mask segment 2.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 483 --
MASK:USER:TRIGTOSAMP
Description
This command sets or returns the time, in seconds, from the (leading
edge) trigger position to the pulse bit sampling position. The query
form of this command returns the time value of the displayed mask.
The set form of this command only affects the User mask, regardless of
the current (displayed) mask.
Group
Mask
Related Commands
MASK:USER:WIDth
Syntax 1
MASK:USER:TRIGTOSAMP <NR3>
Syntax 2
MASK:USER:TRIGTOSAMP?
Argument
H <NR3>
Is the floating point number that sets the time to the pulse bit sampling position.
Example
MASK:USER:TRIGTOSAMP 162e-9
Sets the User mask time from the (leading edge) trigger position to the
pulse bit sampling position to 162 nanoseconds.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 484 --
MASK:USER:VOFFSet
Description
This command sets or returns the nominal vertical offset, in volts, used
to vertically offset the input channels. The query form of this command
returns the offset value of the displayed mask. The set form of this
command only affects the User mask, regardless of the current (displayed) mask.
Group
Mask
Related Commands
MASK:USER:VPOS, MASK:USER:VSCale
Syntax 1
MASK:USER:VOFFSet <NR3>
Syntax 2
MASK:USER:VOFFSet?
Argument
H <NR3>
Is a floating point number that sets the nominal vertical offset in volts.
Example
MASK:USER:VOFFSET 0.0
Sets the User mask nominal vertical offset to 0.0 volts.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 485 --
MASK:USER:VPOS
Description
This command sets or returns the nominal vertical position, in divisions, used to vertically position the input channels. The query form of
this command returns the vertical position value of the displayed mask.
The set form of this command only affects the User mask, regardless of
the current (displayed) mask.
Group
Mask
Related Commands
MASK:USER:VOFFSet, MASK:USER:VSCAle
Syntax 1
MASK:USER:VPOS <NR3>
Syntax 2
MASK:USER:VPOS?
Argument
H <NR3>
Is a floating point number that sets the nominal vertical position in
divisions.
Example
MASK:USER:VPOS –0.8
Sets the User mask nominal vertical position to –0.8 divisions.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 486 --
MASK:USER:VSCAle
Description
This command sets or returns the nominal vertical scale, in volts per
division, used to vertically scale the input channels. The query form of
this command returns the vertical scale value of the displayed mask.
The set form of this command only affects the User mask, regardless of
the current (displayed) mask.
Group
Mask
Related Commands
MASK:USER:VOFFSet , MASK:USER:VPOS
Syntax 1
MASK:USER:VSCAle <NR3>
Syntax 2
MASK:USER:VSCAle?
Argument
H <NR3>
Is a floating point number that sets the nominal bit width in seconds.
Example
MASK:USER:VSCALE 200e-3
Sets the User mask nominal vertical scale to 200 millivolts per division
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 487 --
MASK:USER:WIDth
Description
This command sets or returns the nominal bit width in seconds. The
query form of this command returns the bit width value of the displayed
mask. The set form of this command only affects the User mask, regardless of the current (displayed) mask.
Group
Mask
Related Commands
MASK:USER:TRIGTOSAMP
Syntax 1
MASK:USER:WIDth <NR3>
Syntax 2
MASK:USER:WIDth?
Argument
H <NR3>
Is a floating point number that sets the nominal bit width in seconds.
This is the time of one bit of data where bit width = 1 / ( data rate of
the signal ).
Example
MASK:USER:WIDTH 648e-9
Sets the User mask nominal bit width to 648 nanoseconds (1.544 Mbits/
second).
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 488 --
MATH<x>:DEFIne
Description
This command allows you to define new waveforms using mathematical expressions. Sending this command is equivalent to selecting Math
Setup from the Math menu, selecting a math waveform (Math 1
through Math 4 for 4--channel models or Math 1 through Math 2 for
2--channel models), and then entering a math expression in the
Math<x> box. The query form of this command returns the math definition for the specified math waveform.
You can specify a math expression from waveforms, measurements and
scalar sources, functions, operands, and numerical constants. You can
define and display up to four math waveforms simultaneously on
4--channel models or up to 2 math waveforms on 2--channel models.
Math expressions can be simple, such as Ch1, which specifies that a
waveform should show the signal source of Channel 1 with no mathematical computation. Math expressions can also be complex, consisting
of 100 plus characters and comprising many sources (including other
math waveforms), functions, and operands. As an example, you can
enter the expression Log(Ch1+Ch2), which specifies that the signals
from channels 1 and 2 are to be algebraically added, and the base 10 log
of the sum is to be shown as the final math waveform.
For more information about constructing mathematical expressions, see
Creating and Using Math Waveforms in the user online help for this
instrument.
Group
Math
Related Commands
MATHVAR:VAR<x>
Syntax 1
MATH<x>:DEFIne <QString>
Syntax 2
MATH<x>:DEFIne?
Argument
H <QString>
This quoted string argument is the mathematical expression that defines the waveform.
Example 1
MATH2:DEFIne ”Ch1+Ch2”
This command adds the Ch 1 waveform and Ch 2 waveform, storing
the results in Math 2.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 489 --
Example 2
MATH2:DEFIne?
This query might return
:MATH1:DEFINE ”CH2*REF2”
as the expression that defines Math 1.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 490 --
MATH<x>:LABel:NAMe
Description
This command sets or returns the label string, which is used for annotating the math waveform on the screen. The math waveform to which
the label is attached is specified by x, which ranges in value from 1
through 4 for four--channel instruments or 1 through 2 for two--channel
instruments. This command is equivalent to selecting Math Setup from
the Math menu and entering a label in the Label box.
Group
Math
Syntax 1
MATH<x>:LABel:NAMe <string>
Syntax 2
MATH<x>:LABel:NAMe?
Argument
H <string>
This specifies the label to annotate the math waveform.
Example 1
MATH2:LABel:NAMe ”Probe point7”
This command assigns ”Probe point7” Math 2.
Example 2
MATH2:LABel:NAMe?
This query might return
:MATH2:LABEL:NAME ”Probe point7”
indicating that Probe point 7 is the label for Math 2.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 491 --
MATH<x>:LABel:XPOS
Description
This command sets or queries the X screen offset at which the label
attached to a math waveform is displayed, relative to the left edge of
the screen. Channels are specified by x, which ranges from 1 through 4
for four--channel instruments or 1 through 2 for two--channel instruments. This command is equivalent to selecting Math Label from the
Math menu and entering a value in the X Position box.
Group
Math
Related Commands
MATH<x>:LABel:YPOS
Syntax 1
MATH<x>:LABel:XPOS <NR1>
Syntax 2
MATH<x>:LABel:XPOS?
Argument
H <NR1>
This is the location (in pixels) where the label for the selected math
waveform is displayed, relative to the left edge of the screen. Arguments should be integers ranging from 0 to 500.
Example 1
MATH2:LABel:XPOS 50
This command moves the waveform label for the MATH2 waveform
(on a four--channel instrurment) so that it begins 50 pixels to the right
of the left edge of the screen.
Example 2
MATH2:LABel:XPOS?
This query might return
:MATH2:LABEL:XPOS 50
indicating that the waveform label for the MATH2 waveform is currently 50 pixels to the right of the left edge of the screen.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 492 --
MATH<x>:LABel:YPOS
Description
This command sets or queries the Y screen offset at which the label
attached to a math waveform is displayed, relative to the top edge of the
screen. The Math waveform is specified by x, which ranges from 1
through 4 for four--channel instruments or 1 through 2 for two--channel
instruments. This command is equivalent to selecting Math Label from
the Math menu and entering a value in the Y Position box.
Group
Math
Related Commands
MATH<x>:LABel:XPOS
Syntax 1
MATH<x>:LABel:YPOS <NR1>
Syntax 2
MATH<x>:LABel:YPOS?
Argument
H <NR1>
This is the location (in pixels) where the label for the selected math
waveform is displayed, relative to the top edge of the screen. Arguments should be integers ranging from 0 to 400.
Example 1
MATH2:LABel:YPOS -25
This command moves the waveform label for the MATH2 waveform to
just beneath (25 pixels below) the top of the screen.
Example 2
MATH2:LABel:YPOS?
This query might return
:MATH2:LABEL:YPOS 0
indicating that the waveform label for the MATH2 waveform is currently located just beneath the top of the screen.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 493 --
MATH<x>:NUMAVg
Description
This command sets or returns the acquisition number at which the averaging algorithm will begin exponential averaging. Prior to that acquisition number, the algorithm uses stable averaging. This has no affect
unless the AVG() function is used in the specified math expression. If
so, it affects all AVG() functions in this math expression. The Math
waveform is specified by x, which ranges from 1 through 4 for four-channel instruments or 1 through 2 for two--channel instruments. This
command is equivalent to selecting Set Math Averages from the Math
menu and then entering an averaging value for the math waveform.
Group
Math
Related Commands
ACQuire:NUMAVg
Syntax 1
MATH<x>:NUMAVg <NR1>
Syntax 2
MATH<x>:NUMAVg?
Argument
H <NR1>
This specifies the number of acquisitions over which exponential averaging is performed.
Example 1
MATH2:NUMAVg 10
This command averages the Math 2 waveform ten times.
Example 2
MATH2:NUMAVg?
This query might return
:MATH2:NUMAVG 10
indicating that ten Math 2 waveforms are averaged before a single acquisition occurs.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 494 --
MATH<x>:SPECTral?
Description
This query--only command returns the current spectral setups for the
specified math waveform. The Math waveform is specified by x, which
ranges from 1 through 4 for four--channel instruments or 1 through 2
for two--channel instruments. This command is equivalent to selecting
Spectral Setup from the Math menu and viewing the current spectral
setup values.
Group
Math
Syntax
MATH<x>:SPECTral?
Example
MATH1:SPECTral?
This query might return the spectral setup values for MATH1 as follows:
:MATH1:SPECTRAL:MAG DB;
PHASE DEGREES;
GATEPOS 0.0000E+00;
GATEWIDTH 1.9996E-06;
REFLEVEL 4.4587+01;
REFLEVELOFFSET2.2360E-01;
SPAN 1.2500E+09;
CENTER 6.2500E+08;
RESBW 1.0002E=06;
WINDOW GAUSSIAN;
SUPPRESS -3.5000E+01;
UNWRAP 0;LOCK 0
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 495 --
MATH<x>:SPECTral:CENTER
Description
This command specifies or returns the center frequency of the spectral
analyzer output data span for the specified math waveform. The Math
waveform is specified by x, which ranges from 1 through 4 for four-channel instruments or 1 through 2 for two--channel instruments. This
command is equivalent to selecting Spectral Setup from the Math menu
and then entering a Center Freq value.
Group
Math
Related Commands
MATH<x>:SPECTral:SPAN
Syntax 1
MATH<x>:SPECTral:CENTER <NR3>
Syntax 2
MATH<x>:SPECTral:CENTER?
Argument
H <NR3>
This is the desired frequency of the spectral analyzer output data span
in hertz.
Example 1
MATH3:SPECTral:CENTER 10.09E6
This command sets the center frequency to the closest value it can attain to 10.09 MHz.
Example 2
MATH2:SPECTral:CENTER?
This query might return
:MATH2:SPECTral:CENTER 10.0900E+06
indicating that the center frequency is currently set at 10.09 MHz.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 496 --
MATH<x>:SPECTral:GATEPOS
Description
This command sets or returns the position of the center of the gate,
which is used as the data input to the spectral analyzer for the specified
math waveform. The math waveform is specified by x, which ranges
from 1 through 4 for four--channel instruments or 1 through 2 for two-channel instruments.This command is equivalent to selecting Spectral
Setup from the Math menu and then entering a Gate Pos value.
Group
Math
Related Commands
MATH<x>:SPECTral:GATEWIDTH
Syntax 1
MATH<x>:SPECTral:GATEPOS <NR3>
Syntax 2
MATH<x>:SPECTral:GATEPOS?
Argument
H <NR3>
This is the gate position. Units are represented in seconds, with respect to trigger position.
Example 1
MATH1:SPECTral:GATEPOS 0
This command specifies the position of the center edge of the gate used
as the data input to the spectral analyzer.
Example 2
MATH2:SPECTral:GATEPOS?
This query might return
:MATH2:SPECTRAL:GATEPOS 0.0000E+00
ndicating that the gate position is set to zero (the trigger position).
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 497 --
MATH<x>:SPECTral:GATEWIDTH
Description
This command sets or returns the gate width input, in seconds, to the
spectral analyzer for the specified math waveform. The math waveform
is specified by x, which ranges from 1 through 4 for four--channel instruments or 1 through 2 for two--channel instruments. This command
is equivalent to selecting Spectral Setup from the Math menu and entering a duration value in the Gate Dur box.
Group
Math
Related Commands
MATH<x>:SPECTral:GATEPOS
Syntax 1
MATH<x>:SPECTral:GATEWIDTH <NR3>
Syntax 2
MATH<x>:SPECTral:GATEWIDTH?
Argument
H <NR3>
This is the time across the 10--division screen in seconds.
Example 1
MATH1:SPECTral:GATEWIDTH 1.0E-3
This command sets the gate width input to the spectral analyzer at 1 ms.
Example 2
MATH3:SPECTral:GATEWIDTH?
This query might return
:MATH3:SPECTRAL:GATEWIDTH 1.0000E-03
indicating that the gate width to the spectral analyzer is set to 1 ms.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 498 --
MATH<x>:SPECTral:LOCk
Description
This command locks menus for two or more math waveforms together
as a group. The query form of this command returns an ON (1) or OFF
(0), indicating whether spectral locking is turned on. This command is
equal to selecting Spectral Setup from the Math menu, choosing the
Control tab and then clicking the Time/Track Frequency Domain Controls button associated with the math waveforms that you want to lock.
However, applying spectral locking functionality from the interface is
limited to locking Math1 and Math2 (on two--channel and four--channel
instruments) or Math 3 and Math4 (on four channel instruments).
MATH<x> Lock Combinations
MATH1
MATH2
MATH3
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
On
Off
On
Off
Off
On
On
On
On
Off
Off
Off
On
On
On
Off
On
On
On
Locked Math Waveforms
None
Math3 and Math4 locked
Math2 and Math3 locked
Math2, Math3 and Math4
locked
Math1 and Math2 locked
Math1 and Math 2 locked,
Math3 and Math4 locked
Math1, Math2 and Math3
locked
Math1, Math2, Math3 and
Math4 locked
Note: Executing MATH4:SPECTral:LOCk via the GPIB interface has
no affect since there is no Math5 to which it can be locked.
Group
Math
Syntax 1
MATH<x>:SPECTral:LOCk {ON|OFF}
Syntax 2
MATH<x>:SPECTral:LOCk?
Arguments
H ON
This turns on the parameter lock for the specified math waveform.
H OFF
This turns off the parameter lock for the specified math waveform.
H <NR1>
A 0 disables the parameter lock for the specified math waveform; any
other value enables the parameter lock.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 499 --
Example 1
MATH1:SPECTral:LOCk ON
This command turns on the parameter lock for Math1, which causes the
parameters for Math1 and Math2 to be locked together.
Example 2
MATH1:SPECTral:LOCk?
This query might return
:MATH1:SPECTRAL:LOCK 0
indicating that the parameter lock for Math1 is turned off.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 500 --
MATH<x>:SPECTral:MAG
Description
This command sets or returns the units of the SpectralMag function in
the math string. The Math waveform is specified by x, which ranges
from 1 through 4 for four--channel instruments or 1 through 2 for two-channel instruments. If you are using the standard math, this command
is equivalent to selecting Magnitude Spectrum from the Math menu and
then selecting the units that you want from the Scale button drop--down
menu. If you are using the Advanced Analysis functions, this command
is equivalent to selecting Spectral Setup from the Math menu, choosing
the Mag tab, and then clicking the desired Scale button.
Group
Math
Related Commands
MATH<x>:SPECTral:PHASE
Syntax 1
MATH<x>:SPECTral:MAG {LINEAR|DB|DBM}
Syntax 2
MATH<x>:SPECTral:MAG?
Arguments
H LINEAR
This sets the SpectralMag units to linear.
H DB
This sets the SpectralMag units to decibels.
H DBM
This sets the SpectralMag units to decibels. It also sets the Ref Level
Offset to a value that is the equivalent of 1mW into 50Ω.
Example 1
MATH2:SPECTral:MAG DB
This command sets the SpectralMag units for Math2 to decibels.
Example 2
MATH2:SPECTral:MAG?
This query might return
:MATH2:SPECTRAL:MAG DB
indicating that the SpectralMag units for Math2 are set to decibels.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 501 --
MATH<x>:SPECTral:PHASE
Description
This command sets or returns the units of a SpectralPhase function in
the math string. The Math waveform is specified by x, which ranges
from 1 through 4 for four--channel instruments or 1 through 2 for two-channel instruments.This command is equal to selecting Spectral Setup
from the Math menu, choosing the Phase tab, and then clicking the desired Scale button.
Group
Math
Related Commands
MATH<x>:SPECTral:MAG
Syntax 1
MATH<x>:SPECTral:PHASE {DEGREES|RADIANS|
GROUPDELAY}
Syntax 2
MATH<x>:SPECTral:PHASE?
Arguments
H DEGREES
This sets the SpectralPhase units to degrees.
H RADIANS
This sets the SpectralPhase units to radians.
H GROUPDELAY
This sets the SpectralPhase units to groupdelay, which commutes the
derivative of unwrapped phase spectrum. Units are expressed in seconds.
Example 1
MATH2:SPECTral:PHASE DEGREES
This command sets the SpectralPhase units for Math2 to degrees.
Example 2
MATH2:SPECTral:PHASE?
This query might return
:MATH2:SPECTRAL:PHASE RADIANS
indicating that the SpectralPhase units for Math2 are set to radians.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 502 --
MATH<x>:SPECTral:REFLevel
Description
This command specifies the vertical position of the output data from the
spectral analyzer on the display screen for the specified math waveform. The numerical value represents the position at the top of the display graticule. The Math waveform is specified by x, which ranges
from 1 through 4 for four--channel instruments or 1 through 2 for two-channel instruments. This command is equal to selecting Spectral Setup
from the Math menu, choosing the Mag tab and then entering a value in
the Reference Level box.
Group
Math
Related Commands
MATH<x>:SPECTral:REFLEVELOffset
Syntax 1
MATH<x>:SPECTral:REFLevel <NR3>
Syntax 2
MATH<x>:SPECTral:REFLevel?
Argument
H <NR3>
This is the position that represents the top of the display screen graticule. The range depends on the units and both the MATH<x>:VERTical:SCAle and MATH<x>:VERTical:POSition settings.
Example 1
MATH1:SPECTral:REFLevel -10
This sets the top of the display screen to be a reference level of --10 dB.
If the vertical scale is LINEAR, then the vertical units will be the same
as the input waveform.
Example 2
MATH1:SPECTral:REFLevel?
This query might return
:MATH1:SPECTRAL:REFLEVEL 2.0000E+01
indicating that the top of the display screen is set to a reference level of
20 dB.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 503 --
MATH<x>:SPECTral:REFLEVELOffset
Description
This command sets or returns the spectral level offset used for calculating the dB value for the specified math waveform. The Math waveform
is specified by x, which ranges from 1 through 4 for four--channel instruments or 1 through 2 for two--channel instruments. Changing the
reference level offset causes the spectral waveform to move vertically,
with respect to zero dB. This command is equal to selecting Spectral
Setup from the Math menu, choosing the Mag tab and then entering a
value in the Reference Level Offset box.
Group
Math
Related Commands
MATH<x>:SPECTral:REFLevel
Syntax 1
MATH<x>:SPECTral:REFLEVELOffset {DBM|<NR3>}
Syntax 2
MATH<x>:SPECTral:REFLEVELOffset?
Arguments
H DBM
This specifies the reference level used for calculation to be equivalent
to 1 mW into 50 Ù (Zero dB will occur at this level).
H <NR3>
This specifies the reference level used for calculation of the decibel
value when the output units are Log.
Example 1
MATH1:SPECTral:REFLEVELOFFset 0.5
This sets the reference level for the Log calculation for decibel to be
0.5. dB = A x Log(y/<NR3>) where A is 10 if the input units are watts
and A is 20 if the input units are otherwise.
Example 2
MATH1:SPECTral:REFLEVELOffset DBM
This sets the decibel reference to be equivalent to 1 mW into 50 Ù. The
reference level numerical value will depend on the input units. If the
units are volts, the value is set to 0.2236 V; if the units are amperes, the
value is set to 40 µA; if the units are watts, the value is set to 0.001 W.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 504 --
Example 3
MATH1:SPECTral:REFLEVELOffset?
This query might return
:MATH1:SPECTRAL:REFLEVELOFFSET 2.23360E-01
indicating that the spectral reference level offset is 223.6 mV.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 505 --
MATH<x>:SPECTral:RESBw
Description
This command sets or returns the resolution bandwidth of the spectral
analyzer for the specified math waveform. The Math waveform is specified by x, which ranges from 1 through 4 for four--channel instruments or 1 through 2 for two--channel instruments. This command is
equivalent to selecting Spectral Setup from the Math menu and then
entering a value in the Res BW box.
Group
Math
Related Commands
MATH<x>:SPECTral:GATEWIDTH, MATH<x>:SPECTral:CENTER,
MATH<x>:SPECTral:SPAN, MATH<x>:SPECTral:WINdow
Syntax 1
MATH<x>:SPECTral:RESBw <NR3>
Syntax 2
MATH<x>:SPECTral:RESBw?
Argument
H <NR3>
This is the desired resolution bandwidth value. Units are represented
in hertz.
Example 1
MATH1:SPECTral:RESBw 250E3
This command sets the resolution bandwidth to the attainable value that
is close to 250 KHz.
Example 2
MATH1:SPECTral:RESBw?
This query might return
:MATH1:SPECTRAL:RESBW 1.0002E+06
indicating the actual resolution bandwidth value obtained from the
spectral analyzer.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 506 --
MATH<x>:SPECTral:SPAN
Description
This command sets the ceiling of the span to a value that is closest to
the specified value. The query form of this command returns the current
span value for specified math waveform. The Math waveform is specified by x, which ranges from 1 through 4 for four--channel instruments
or 1 through 2 for two--channel instruments.This command is equal to
selecting Spectral Setup from the Math menu and then entering a value
in the Freq Span box.
Group
Math
Related Commands
MATH<x>:SPECTral:CENTER
Syntax 1
MATH<x>:SPECTral:SPAN {<NR3>|FULL}
Syntax 2
MATH<x>:SPECTral:SPAN?
Arguments
H <NR3>
This specifies the frequency span of the output data vector from the
spectral analyzer.
H FULL
This sets the top of the span to 1/2 the sample rate and sets the center
frequency to 1/2 the span.
Example 1
MATH1:SPECTral:SPAN FULL
This command sets the top of the span to 1/2 the sample rate and sets
the center frequency to 1/2 the span.
Example 2
MATH1:SPECTral:SPAN 2.56E6
This command sets the top of the span to a value that is closest to 2.56
MHz.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 507 --
Example 3
MATH1:SPECTral:SPAN?
This query might return
:MATH1:SPECTRAL:SPAN 1.2500E+09
indicating the actual span value obtained by the spectral analyzer.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 508 --
MATH<x>:SPECTral:SUPPress
Description
This command sets or returns the phase suppression threshold for the
specified math waveform. The Math waveform is specified by x, which
ranges from 1 through 4 for four--channel instruments or 1 through 2
for two--channel instruments. This command is equal to selecting Spectral Setup from the Math menu, choosing the Phase tab and then entering a value in the Suppression Threshold box.
Group
Math
Related Commands
MATH<x>:SPECTral:UNWRap
Syntax 1
MATH<x>:SPECTral:SUPPress <NR3>
Syntax 2
MATH<x>:SPECTral:SUPPress?
Argument
H <NR3>
This is the level under which all data with magnitudes are displayed
as zero phase.
Example 1
MATH1:SPECTral:SUPPress -62
This command specifies that any magnitude values less than --62 dB
will have their phase output set to zero.
Example 2
MATH1:SPECTral:SUPPress?
This query might return
:MATH1:SPECTRAL:SUPPRESS -3.5000E+01
indicating that the phase suppression threshold is currently set to
--35 dB.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 509 --
MATH<x>:SPECTral:UNWRap
Description
This command sets or returns whether phase unwrap of the spectral
analyzer output data is enabled for the specified math waveform. The
Math waveform is specified by x, which ranges from 1 through 4 for
four--channel instruments or 1 through 2 for two--channel instruments.This command is equal to selecting Spectral Setup from the Math
menu, choosing the Phase tab and then clicking the Unwrap button.
Group
Math
Related Commands
MATH<x>:SPECTral:SUPPress
Syntax 1
MATH<x>:SPECTral:UNWRap <ON|OFF>
Syntax 2
MATH<x>:SPECTral:UNWRap?
Arguments
H ON
This enables phase unwrap.
H OFF
This disables phase wrap.
H <NR1>
A 0 disables phase wrap; any other value enables phase wrap.
Example 1
MATH1:SPECTral:UNWRap ON
This command enables phase wrap of the spectral analyzer output data.
Example 2
MATH1:SPECTral:UNWRap?
This query might return
:MATH1:SPECTRAL:UNWRAP 0
indicating that phase unwrap of the spectral analyzer output data is disabled.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 510 --
MATH<x>:SPECTral:WINdow
Description
This command sets or returns the window function used to multiply the
spectral analyzer input data for the specified math waveform. The Math
waveform is specified by x, which ranges from 1 through 4 for four-channel instruments or 1 through 2 for two--channel instruments. A
spectral window determines what the filter shape of the spectral analyzer will be in the frequency domain. It can be described by a mathematical function that is multiplied point--by--point times the input data to the
spectral analyzer. This command is equal to selecting Spectral Setup
from the Math menu, and choosing from the Window Type drop--down
list.
Following is a list of arguments that specify the window function used
to multiply the spectral analyzer input data. The windows are listed in
the order of their ability to resolve frequencies (resolution bandwidth).
For additional information about spectral windows, see Selecting a
Spectral Window in the online help for this instrument.
Group
Math
Related Commands
MATH<x>:SPECTral:RESBw
Syntax 1
MATH<x>:SPECTral:WINdow {RECTANGULAR|
HAMMING|HANNING|KAISERBESSEL|BLACKMANHARRIS|FLATTOP2|GAUSSIAN|TEKEXPONENTIAL}
Syntax 2
MATH<x>:SPECTral:WINdow?
Arguments
H RECTANGULAR
This type of window function is equivalent to multiplying all gate
data by one.
H HAMMING
This type of window function is based on a cosine series.
H HANNING
This type of window function is based on a cosine series.
H KAISERBESSEL
This type of window function is based on a cosine series.
H BLACKMANHARRIS
This type of window function is based on a cosine series.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 511 --
H GAUSSIAN
This type of window function has the best localization characteristics
in the joint time/frequency plane.
H TEKEXPONENTIAL
This type of window has an exponential nonsymmetrical shape in the
time domain and a triangular shape in the frequency domain.
H FLATTOP2
This type of window function is a cosine series window with a flattened frequency response lobe.
Example 1
MATH2:SPECTral:WINdow HANNING
This command applies a Hanning window to the spectral analyzer input
data.
Example 2
MATH2:SPECTral:WINdow?
This query might return
:MATH2:SPECTRAL:WINDOW TEKEXPONENTIAL
indicating that the window function used to multiply the spectral analyzer input data is the Tek exponential function.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 512 --
MATH<x>:UNITString
Description
This command sets or queries the string to use for units for the math
waveform specified by x, which can be 1 through 4. This command will
override the default unit string with the one that you specify.
Group
Math
Syntax 1
MATH<x>:UNITString <QString>
Syntax 2
MATH<x>:UNITString?
Argument
H <QString>
This quoted string argument is the units to be used for the specified
math waveorm
Example 1
MATH2:UNITString ”deg”
This command specifies that the unit of the Math2 operation will be
called deg.
Example 2
MATH1:UNITString?
This query might return :MATH1:UNITSTRING ”deg” as the unit
for the Math1 operation.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 513 --
MATH<x>:VERTical:POSition
Description
This command sets or queries the vertical position of the specified
Math waveform. The Math waveform is specified by x, which ranges
from 1 through 4 for four--channel instruments or 1 through 2 for two-channel instruments. The position value is usually applied to the signal
before it is digitized. The highest three units/div scale ranges of a given
math are implemented by changing the way the acquired data is displayed. When the instrument is operating in any of these highest three
scale ranges, the position control operates only on the signal after it is
digitized. Note that if a signal that exceeds the range of the digitizer in
one of these three scale ranges is repositioned, the displayed waveform
will contain clipped values on--screen. This command is equivalent to
selecting Position/Scale from the Math menu and then entering a Vert
Pos value or adjusting the front--panel Vertical POSITION knob.
Increasing the position value of a waveform causes the waveform to
move up, and decreasing the position value causes the waveform to
move down. Position adjusts only the display position of a waveform,
whether a channel, math, or reference waveform. The position value
determines the vertical graticule coordinate at which input signal values, equal to the present offset setting for that reference, are displayed.
For example, if the position for Math 3 is set to 2.0 and the offset is set
to 3.0, then the input signals equal to 3.0 are displayed 2.0 divisions
above the center of the screen.
Be aware that autoscaling occurs when a math waveform is first defined
and enabled, or when a math string changes. After the math waveform
is computed for the first time, the instrument determines the min + max
of that waveform data. Then, the instrument sets the math position so
that (min + max)/2 is in the center of the screen. In addition, the instrument sets the math scale so that the range of the min and max cover 6
divisions. This autoscaling process can take up to 1/2 second to complete and will override any vertical scale or position commands for that
math waveform received during this time. You should insert an appropriate pause in your program after defining and enabling a math
waveform before changing its position or scale.
Group
Math, Vertical
Related Commands
CH<x>POSition, REF<x>:VERTical:POSition
Syntax 1
MATH<x>:VERTical:POSition <NR3>
Syntax 2
MATH<x>:VERTical:POSition?
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 514 --
Argument
H <NR3>
This is the desired position in divisions from the center graticule.
Example 1
MATH2:VERTical:POSition 1.3E+00
This command positions the Math 2 input signal 1.3 divisions higher
than a position of 0.
Example 2
MATH1:VERTical:POSition?
This query might return
:MATH1:VERTICAL:POSITION -1.3000E+00
This indicates that the current position of Math 1 is 1.3 divisions below
the center graticule.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 515 --
MATH<x>:VERTical:SCAle
Description
This command sets or queries the vertical scale of the specified math
waveform. The Math waveform is specified by x, which ranges from 1
through 4 for four--channel instruments or 1 through 2 for two--channel
instruments. This command is equivalent to selecting Position/Scale
from the Math menu and then entering a Vert Scale value or adjusting
the front--panel Vertical SCALE knob.
Each waveform has its own vertical scale parameter. For a signal with
constant amplitude, increasing the scale causes the waveform to be displayed smaller. Decreasing the scale causes the waveform to be displayed larger.
Scale affects all waveforms. For reference and math waveforms, the
scale setting controls the display only, graphically scaling these waveforms and having no affect on the acquisition hardware.
Be aware that autoscaling occurs when a math waveform is first defined
and enabled, or when a math string changes. After the math waveform
is computed for the first time, the instrument determines the min + max
of that waveform data. Then, the instrument sets the math position so
that (min + max)/2 is in the center of the screen. In addition, the instrument sets the math scale so that the range of the min and max covers 6
divisions. This autoscaling process can take up to 1/2 second to complete and will override any vertical scale or position commands for that
math waveform received during this time. You should insert an appropriate pause in your program after defining and enabling a math
waveform before changing its position or scale.
Group
Math, Vertical
Related Commands
CH<x>:SCAle, REF<x>:VERTical:SCAle
Syntax 1
MATH<x>:VERTical:SCAle <NR3>
Syntax 2
MATH<x>:VERTical:SCAle?
Argument
H <NR3>
This is the scale, in volts, amps or watts per division. The range is
from 100.0E--36 through 100.0E+36.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 516 --
Example 1
MATH4:VERTical:SCAle 100E-03
This command sets the Math 4 scale to 100 mV per division.
Example 2
CH2:VERTical:SCAle?
This query might return
:MATH2:VERTICAL:SCALE 1.0000E+00
This indicates that the current scale setting of Math 2 is 1 V per division.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 517 --
MATHVAR:VAR<x>
Description
This command sets or queries up to 8 different numerical values you
can use within math expressions. These values can range from --9.9e37
to 9.9e37; the default values are 0.0. <x> specifies the location, 1
through 8, in which you can store values. Stored math variables can be
reference within math expressions as VAR1, VAR2,...VAR8.
For example, the following command defines MATH1 as the product of
Channel 1 and math variable 1: MATH1:DEFINE ”CH1 * VAR1”.
Group
Math
Related Commands
MATH<x>:DEFine
Syntax 1
MATHVAR:VAR<x> <NR3>
Argument
H <NR3>
Specifies the numerical value to be stored in location x <1 through 8>.
Syntax 2
MATHVAR:VAR<x>?
Returns the value of the math variable store in location <x>.
Syntax 3
MATHVAR?
Returns the values of all variables stored in locations 1 through 8.
Example 1
MATHVAR:VAR3 -2.43e-5
Stores the value --2.43e--5 in the 3rd math variable location.
Example 2
MATHVAR:VAR3?
This query might return :MATHVAR:VAR3 24.3000E-6 for the expression stored in location 3.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 518 --
MATH<x>?
Description
This query--only command returns the definition for the math waveform specified by <x>, which ranges from 1 through 4 in four--channel
instruments and 1 through 2 in two--channel instruments.
Group
Math
Related Commands
SELect:<wfm>
Syntax
MATH<x>?
Example
MATH1?
This query might return the following definition of a math waveform:
:MATH1:DEFINE ”Ch1-Ch2”;UNITSTRING ”V”;
NUMAVG 2;VERTICAL:SCALE 112.0000E-3;
POSITION 1.6400;:MATH1:LABEL:NAME ””;XPOS
1.0000;YPOS 600.0000E-3;:MATH1:SPECTRAL:MAG
DB;PHASE DEGREES;GATEPOS 0.0000;GATEWIDTH
4.0000E-6;REFLEVEL 20.0000;REFLEVELOFFSET
223.6000E-3;SPAN 625.0000E+6;CENTER
312.5000E+6;RESBW 500.0000E+3;WINDOW GAUSSIAN;SUPPRESS -200.0000;UNWRAP 0;LOCK 0
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 519 --
MEASUrement:GATing
Description
This command specifies or returns the measurement gating setting. This
command is equivalent to selecting Gating from the Measure menu and
then clicking the desired Measurement Gating setting.
Group
Measurement
Syntax 1
MEASUrement:GATing {ON|OFF|<NR1>|ZOOM|CURSOR}
Syntax 2
MEASUrement:GATing?
Arguments
H ON
This turns on measurement gating.
H OFF
This turns off measurement gating.
H <NR1>
A 0 turns off measurement gating; any other value turns on measurement gating.
H ZOOM<x>
This turns on gating, using the left and right edges of the zoom box.
<x> specifies the zoom window, which ranges from 1 through 4.
H CURSOR
This limits measurements to the portion of the waveform between the
vertical bar cursors, even if they are off screen.
Example 1
MEASUrement:GATing ON
This command turns on measurement gating.
Example 2
MEASUrement:GATing?
This query might return
:MEASUREMENT:GATING CURSOR
indicating that measurements are limited to the portion of the waveform
between the vertical bar cursors.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 520 --
MEASUrement:IMMed?
Description
This query--only command returns all immediate measurement setup
parameters.
Group
Measurement
Syntax
MEASUrement:IMMed?
Example
MEASUrement:IMMed?
This query might return
:MEASUREMENT:IMMED:TYPE AMPLITUDE;
UNITS ”V”;SOURCE1 CH1;SOURCE2 CH1;
SOURCE1:SIGTYPE PULSE;
:MEASUREMENT:IMMED:SOURCE2:SIGTYPE PULSE;
:MEASUREMENT:IMMED:DELAY:EDGE1 RISE;
EDGE2 RISE;DIRECTION FORWARDS;
:MEASUREMENT:IMMED:REFLEVEL:METHOD PERCENT;
ABSOLUTE:HIGH 0.0000;LOW 0.0000;MID1
0.0000;MID2 0.0000;:MEASUREMENT:IMMED:REFLEVEL:PERCENT:HIGH 90.0000;LOW 10.0000;MID1
50.0000;MID2 50.0000;:MEASUREMENT:IMMED:METHOD
HISTOGRAM;NOISE HIGH
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 521 --
MEASUrement:IMMed:DELay?
Description
This query--only command returns information about the immediate
delay measurement. This command is equivalent to selecting Measurement Setup from the Measure menu, choosing the Time tab and then
clicking the Delay button.
Group
Measurement
Syntax
MEASUrement:IMMed:DELay?
Example
MEASUrement:IMMed:DELay?
This query might return
:MEASUREMENT:IMMED:DELAY:EDGE1 RISE;EDGE2
RISE; DIRECTION FORWARDS
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 522 --
MEASUrement:IMMed:DELay:DIREction
Description
This command sets or returns the starting point and direction that determines the delay ”to” edge when taking an immediate delay measurement. Use the MEASUrement:IMMed:SOURCE2 command to specify
the delay ”to” waveform. This command is equivalent to selecting Measurement Setup from the Measure menu, choosing the Time tab, clicking the Delay button to display the delay settings and then clicking the
desired Search Direction setting.
Group
Measurement
Related Commands
MEASUrement:IMMed:SOURCE2
Syntax 1
MEASUrement:IMMed:DELay:DIREction {BACKWards|FORWards}
Syntax 2
MEASUrement:IMMed:DELay:DIREction?
Arguments
H BACKWards
This starts the search at the end of the waveform and looks for the last
rising or falling edge in the waveform.
H FORWards
This starts the search at the beginning of the waveform and looks for
the first rising or falling edge in the waveform.
Example 1
MEASUrement:IMMed:DELay:DIREction FORWards
This command starts searching from the beginning of the waveform
record and looks for the first rising or falling edge.
Example 2
MEASUrement:IMMed:DELay:DIREction?
This query might return
:MEASUREMENT:IMMED:DELAY:DIRECTION BACKWARDS
indicating that searching begins at the end of the waveform record and
looks for the last rising or falling edge.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 523 --
MEASUrement:IMMed:DELay:EDGE[1]
Description
This command sets or queries the slope of the edge that is used for the
delay ”from” waveform when taking an immediate delay measurement.
Use the MEASUrement:IMMed:SOURCE1 command to specify the
waveform. This command is equivalent to selecting Measurement Setup from the Measure menu, choosing the Time tab, clicking the Delay
button to display the delay settings and then clicking the desired Delay
Edge1 setting.
Note: If you do not specify a numerical suffix, the source is assumed
to be SOURCE 1.
Group
Measurement
Related Commands
MEASUrement:IMMed:SOURCE1
Syntax 1
MEASUrement:IMMed:DELay:EDGE[1] {FALL|RISe}
Syntax 2
MEASUrement:IMMed:DELay:EDGE[1]?
Arguments
H FALL
This specifies the falling edge.
H RISe
This specifies the rising edge.
Example 1
MEASUrement:IMMed:DELay:EDGE[1] RISe
This command specifies that the rising edge be used for the immediate
delay measurement.
Example 2
MEASUrement:IMMed:DELay:EDGE[1]?
This query might return
:MEASUREMENT:IMMED:DELAY:EDGE1 FALL
indicating that the falling edge or negative edge of the waveform is
used for the immediate delay measurement.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 524 --
MEASUrement:IMMed:DELay:EDGE2
Description
This command sets or queries the slope of the edge that is used for the
delay ”to” waveform when taking an immediate delay measurement.
Use the MEASUrement:IMMed:SOURCE2 command to specify the
waveform. This command is equivalent to selecting Measurement Setup from the Measure menu, choosing the Time tab, clicking the Delay
button to display the delay settings and then clicking the desired Delay
Edge2 setting.
Group
Measurement
Related Commands
MEASUrement:IMMed:SOURCE2
Syntax 1
MEASUrement:IMMed:DELay:EDGE2 {FALL|RISe}
Syntax 2
MEASUrement:IMMed:DELay:EDGE2?
Arguments
H FALL
This specifies the falling edge.
H RISe
This specifies the rising edge.
Example 1
MEASUrement:IMMed:DELay:EDGE2 RISe
This command specifies that the rising edge be used for the immediate
delay measurement.
Example 2
MEASUrement:IMMed:DELay:EDGE2?
This query might return
:MEASUREMENT:IMMED:DELAY:EDGE2 FALL
indicating that the falling edge or negative edge of the waveform is
used for the immediate delay measurement.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 525 --
MEASUrement:IMMed:NOISe
(TDS5000B Series option SM)
Description
This command sets or queries whether the noise measurement is made
on the high or low level of the waveform. Sending this command is
equivalent to selecting Ref Levs > Eye > Top Level or Base Level in
the Comm tab of the Measurement Setup dialog box. The Eye section is
displayed only if you have an eye--pattern or optical measurement defined.
Group
Measurement
Syntax 1
MEASUrement:IMMed:NOISe {HIGH|LOW}
Syntax 2
MEASUrement:IMMed:NOISe?
Arguments
H HIGH
This argument causes the measurement for noise to be taken at the
high level of the waveform.
H LOW
This argument causes the measurement for noise to be taken at the
low level of the waveform.
Example 1
MEASUrement:IMMed:NOISe
HIGH
This command causes the noise measurement to be made at the high
level of the waveform.
Example 2
MEASUrement:IMMed:NOISe?
This query might return
:MEASUREMENT:IMMED:NOISE LOW
indicating that the noise measurement will be made at the low level of
the waveform
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 526 --
MEASUrement:IMMed:REFLevel:ABSolute:HIGH
Description
This command sets or queries the high reference level, and is the upper
reference level when MEASUrement:IMMed:REFLevel:METHod is
set to Absolute. Note that this command affects the results of rise and
fall measurements.
Group
Measurement
Related Commands
MEASUrement:IMMed:REFLevel:METHod
Syntax 1
MEASUrement:IMMed:REFLevel:ABSolute:HIGH <NR3>
Syntax 2
MEASUrement:IMMed:REFLevel:ABSolute:HIGH?
Arguments
H <NRf>
This is the high reference level, in volts. The default is 0.0 V.
Example 1
MEASUREMENT:IMMed:REFLEVEL:ABSOLUTE:HIGH 1.71
This command sets the high reference level to 1.71 V.
Example 2
MEASUREMENT:IMMED:REFLEVEL:ABSOLUTE:HIGH?
This query might return
:MEASUREMENT:IMMED:REFLEVEL:ABSOLUTE:HIGH
1.7100E+00
indicating that the absolute high reference level is set to 1.71 V.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 527 --
MEASUrement:IMMed:REFLevel:ABSolute:LOW
Description
This command sets or queries the low reference level, and is the zero
percent level when MEASUrement:IMMed:REFLevel:METHod is set
to Absolute. Note that this command affects the results of rise and fall
measurements.
Related Commands
MEASUrement:IMMed:REFLevel:METHod
Group
Measurement
Syntax 1
MEASUrement:IMMed:REFLevel:ABSolute:LOW <NR3>
Syntax 2
MEASUrement:IMMed:REFLevel:ABSolute:LOW?
Arguments
H <NR3>
This is the low reference level, in volts. The default is 0.0 V.
Example 1
MEASUREMENT:IMMED:REFLEVEL:ABSolute:LOW 0.0 V.
This command sets the low reference level to 0.0 V.
Example 2
MEASUREMENT:IMMED:REFLEVEL:ABSolute:LOW?
This query might return
:MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:REFLEVEL:ABSOLUTE:LOW
0.0000E+00
indicating that the absolute low reference level is set to 0.0 V.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 528 --
MEASUrement:IMMed:REFLevel:ABSolute:MID[1]
Description
This command sets or queries the mid reference level, and is the 50%
reference level when MEASUrement:IMMed:REFLevel:METHod is
set to Absolute. Note that this command affects the results of period,
frequency, delay, and all cyclic measurements.
Group
Measurement
Related Commands
MEASUrement:IMMed:REFLevel:METHod
Syntax 1
MEASUrement:IMMed:REFLevel:ABSolute:MID[1]
<NR3>
Syntax 2
MEASUrement:IMMed:REFLevel:ABSolute:MID[1]?
Arguments
H <NR3>
This is the mid reference level, in volts. The default is 0.0 V.
Example 1
MEASUREMENT:IMMED:REFLEVEL:ABSOLUTE:MID[1] .71
This command sets the mid reference level to .71 V.
Example 2
MEASUREMENT:IMMED:REFLEVEL:ABSOLUTE:MID[1]?
This query might return
:MEASUREMENT:IMMED:REFLEVEL:ABSOLUTE:MID
0.7100E+00
indicating that the absolute mid1 reference level is set to .71 V.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 529 --
MEASUrement:IMMed:REFLevel:ABSolute:MID2
Description
This command sets or queries the mid reference level for the ”to” waveform when taking a delay measurement, and is the 50% reference
level when MEASUrement:IMMed:REFLevel:METHod is set to Absolute. Note that this command affects the results of delay measurements.
Group
Measurement
Related Commands
MEASUrement:IMMed:REFLevel:METHod
Syntax 1
MEASUrement:IMMed:REFLevel:ABSolute:MID2 <NR3>
Syntax 2
MEASUrement:IMMed:REFLevel:ABSolute:MID2?
Arguments
H <NR3>
This is the mid2 reference level, in volts. The default is 0.0 V.
Example 1
MEASUREMENT:IMMED:REFLEVEL:ABSOLUTE:MID2 0.5
This command sets the mid reference level for the delay waveform to
0.5 V.
Example 2
MEASUREMENT:IMMED:REFLEVEL:ABSOLUTE:MID2?
This query might return
:MEASUREMENT:IMMED:REFLEVEL:ABSOLUTE:MID2
0.5000E+00
indicating that the absolute mid2 reference level is set to 0.5 V.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 530 --
MEASUrement:IMMed:REFLevel:METhod
Description
This command specifies or queries the reference level units used for
measurement calculations. This command is equivalent to selecting
Reference Levels from the Measure menu and then choosing the desired reference level from the Units group box.
Group
Measurement
Syntax 1
MEASUrement:IMMed:REFLevel:METHod {ABSolute|PERCent}
Syntax 2
MEASUrement:IMMed:REFLevel:METHod?
Arguments
H ABSolute
This specifies that the reference levels are set explicitly using the
MEASUrement:IMMed:REFLevel:ABSolute commands. This method is useful when precise values are required. For instance, when designing to published interface specifications, such as RS--232--C.
H PERCent
This specifies that the reference levels are calculated as a percent relative to HIGH and LOW. The percentages are defined using the MEASUrement:IMMed:REFLevel:PERCent commands.
Example 1
MEASUREMENT:IMMED:REFLEVEL:METHOD ABSOLUTE
This command specifies that explicit user--defined values are used for
the reference levels.
Example 2
MEASUREMENT:IMMED:REFLEVEL:METHOD?
This query might return
:MEASUREMENT:IMMED:REFLEVEL:METHOD PERCENT
indicating that the reference level units used are calculated as a percent
relative to HIGH and LOW.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 531 --
MEASUrement:IMMed:REFLevel:PERCent:HIGH
Description
This command sets or queries the percentage (where 100% is equal to
HIGH) used to calculate the high reference level when MEASUrement:IMMed:REFLevel:METHod is set to Percent. Note that this command affects the results of rise and fall measurements.
Group
Measurement
Related Commands
MEASUrement:IMMed:REFLevel:METHod
Syntax 1
MEASUrement:IMMed:REFLevel:PERCent:HIGH <NR1>
Syntax 2
MEASUrement:IMMed:REFLevel:PERCent:HIGH?
Arguments
H <NR1>
This is the high reference level, ranging from 0 to 100%. The default
high reference level is 90%.
Example 1
MEASUREMENT:IMMED:REFLEVEL:PERCENT:HIGH 95
This command sets the high reference level to 95% of HIGH.
Example 2
MEASUREMENT:IMMED:REFLEVEL:PERCENT:HIGH?
This query might return
:MEASUREMENT:IMMED:REFLEVEL:PERCENT:HIGH 90
indicating that the percentage high reference level is set to 90% of
HIGH.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 532 --
MEASUrement:IMMed:REFLevel:PERCent:LOW
Description
This command sets or queries the percentage (where 100% is equal to
HIGH) used to calculate the low reference level when MEASUrement:IMMed:REFLevel:METHod is set to Percent. Note that this command affects the results of rise and fall measurements. This command is
equivalent to selecting Reference Levels from the Measure menu and
then entering the Percentage Low Ref value.
Group
Measurement
Related Commands
MEASUrement:IMMed:REFLevel:METHod
Syntax 1
MEASUrement:IMMed:REFLevel:PERCent:LOW <NR1>
Syntax 2
MEASUrement:IMMed:REFLevel:PERCent:LOW?
Arguments
H <NR1>
This is the low reference level, ranging from 0 to 100%. The default
low reference level is 10%.
Example 1
MEASUREMENT:IMMED:REFLEVEL:PERCENT:LOW 15
This command sets the low reference level to 15% of HIGH.
Example 2
MEASUREMENT:IMMED:REFLEVEL:PERCENT:LOW?
This query might return
:MEASUREMENT:IMMED:REFLEVEL:PERCENT:LOW 10
indicating that the percentage low reference level is set to 10% of
HIGH.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 533 --
MEASUrement:IMMed:REFLevel:PERCent:MID[1]
Description
This command sets or queries the percentage (where 100% is equal to
HIGH) used to calculate the mid reference level when MEASUrement:IMMed:REFLevel:METHod is set to Percent. Note that this command affects the results of period, frequency, delay, and all cyclic measurements.
Group
Measurement
Related Commands
MEASUrement:IMMed:REFLevel:METHod
Syntax 1
MEASUrement:IMMed:REFLevel:PERCent:MID[1]
<NR1>
Syntax 2
MEASUrement:IMMed:REFLevel:PERCent:MID[1]?
Arguments
H <NR1>
This is the mid reference level, ranging from 0 to 100%. The default
mid reference level is 50%.
Example 1
MEASUREMENT:IMMED:REFLEVEL:PERCENT:MID[1] 60
This command sets the mid reference level to 60% of HIGH.
Example 2
MEASUREMENT:IMMED:REFLEVEL:PERCENT:MID[1]?
This query might return
:MEASUREMENT:IMMED:REFLEVEL:PERCENT:MID 65
Indicating that the percentage mid reference level is set to 65% of
HIGH.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 534 --
MEASUrement:IMMed:REFLevel:PERCent:MID2
Description
This command sets or queries the percentage (where 100% is equal to
HIGH) used to calculate the mid reference level for the second waveform specified when MEASUrement:IMMed:REFLevel:METHod is set
to Percent. Note that this command affects the results of delay measurements.
Group
Measurement
Related Commands
MEASUrement:IMMed:REFLevel:METHod
Syntax 1
MEASUrement:IMMed:REFLevel:PERCent:MID2 <NR1>
Syntax 2
MEASUrement:IMMed:REFLevel:PERCent:MID2?
Arguments
H <NR1>
This is the mid reference level, ranging from 0 to 100%. The default
mid reference level is 50%.
Example 1
MEASUREMENT:IMMED:REFLEVEL:PERCENT:MID2 40
This command sets the mid2 reference level to 40% of HIGH.
Example 2
MEASUREMENT:IMMED:REFLEVEL:PERCENT:MID2?
This query might return
:MEASUREMENT:IMMED:REFLEVEL:PERCENT:MID2 45
Indicating that the percentage mid2 reference level is set to 45% of
HIGH.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 535 --
MEASUrement:IMMed:REFLevel?
Description
This query--only command returns the reference level settings for the
immediate measurement. It returns them in the following order: ABSOLUTE and then PERCENT for individual user measurements.
Group
Measurement
Syntax
MEASUrement:IMMed:REFLevel?
Example
MEASUREMENT:IMMed:REFLEVEL?
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 536 --
MEASUrement:SOURCE<x>:SIGType
(TDS5000B Series option SM)
Description
This command sets or queries the type of input signal used for measurement SOURCE<x>, 1 or 2.
To ensure accurate measurements, use this command to specify the input--signal type for the measurement source.
Group
Measurement
Syntax 1
MEASurement:SOUrce<x>:SIGType {PULse|EYE}
Syntax 2
MEASurement:SOUrce<x>:SIGType?
Arguments
H PULSE
Use this signal type for generic signals that are not associated with
synchronous communications standards.
H EYE
Use this signal type for synchronous--communication signals with
NRZ--like characteristics (nonreturn to zero).
Example 1
MEASurement:SOUrce1:SIGType PULse
This command selects Pulse as the signal type for source 1.
Example 2
MEASurement:SOUrce<x>:SIGType?
This query might return
:MEASUREMENT:SOURCE1:SIGTYPE EYE
indicating that the signal type for source 1 is EYE.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 537 --
MEASUrement:IMMed:SOURCE[1]
Description
This command sets or queries the source for all single channel immediate measurements and specifies the source to measure ”from” when
taking an immediate delay measurement or phase measurement. This
command is equivalent to selecting Measurement Setup from the Measure menu, choosing the Time tab, clicking the Delay button to display
the delay settings and then clicking the desired Source1 (From) setting.
Note: If you do not specify a numerical suffix, the source is assumed
to be SOURCE 1.
Group
Measurement
Related Commands
MEASUrement:IMMed:SOURCE2
Syntax 1
MEASUrement:IMMed:SOURCE[1]
{CH<x>|MATH<y>|REF<x>|HIStogram}
Syntax 2
MEASUrement:IMMed:SOURCE[1]?
Arguments
H CH<x>
This is an input channel waveform. The x variable can be expressed
as an integer ranging from 1 through 4 for 4--channel models and 1 to
2 for 2--channel models.
H MATH<y>
This is a math waveform. The y variable can be expressed as an integer ranging from 1 through 4 for 4--channel models and 1 to 2 for
2--channel models.
H REF<X>
This is a reference waveform. The x variable can be expressed as an
integer ranging from 1 through 4 for 4--channel models and 1 to 2 for
2--channel models.
H HIStogram
This indicates histogram as the object to be measured.
Example 1
MEASUrement:IMMed:SOURCE[1] MATH1
This command specifies Math1 as the immediate measurement source .
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 538 --
Example 2
MEASUrement:IMMed:SOURCE[1]?
This query might return
:MEASUREMENT:IMMED:SOURCE1 CH3
indicating that channel 3 is the immediate measurement source.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 539 --
MEASUrement:IMMed:SOURCE2
Description
This command sets or queries the source to measure ”to” for phase or
delay immediate measurements. This command is equivalent to selecting Measurement Setup from the Measure menu, choosing the Time
tab, clicking the Delay button to display the delay settings and then
clicking the desired Source2 (To) setting.
Tip: Source2 measurements only apply to phase and delay measurement types, which require both a target (Source1) and reference
(Source2) source.
Group
Measurement
Related Commands
MEASUrement:IMMed:SOURCE[1]
Syntax 1
MEASUrement:IMMed:SOURCE2
{CH<x>|MATH<y>|REF<x>|HIStogram}
Syntax 2
MEASUrement:IMMed:SOURCE2?
Arguments
H CH<x>
This is an input channel waveform. The x variable can be expressed
as an integer ranging from 1 through 4 for 4--channel models and 1 to
2 for 2--channel models.
H MATH<y>
This is a math waveform. The y variable can be expressed as an integer ranging from 1 through 4 for 4--channel models and 1 to 2 for
2--channel models.
H REF<X>
This is a reference waveform. The x variable can be expressed as an
integer ranging from 1 through 4 for 4--channel models and 1 to 2 for
2--channel models.
H HIStogram
This indicates histogram as the object to be measured.
Example 1
MEASUrement:IMMed:SOURCE2 REF3
This command sets the waveform in reference memory location 3 as the
delay ”to” source when making delay measurements.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 540 --
Example 2
MEASUrement:IMMed:SOURCE2?
This query might return
:MEASUREMENT:IMMED:SOURCE2 MATH1
indicating that Math1 is the immediate measurement source.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 541 --
MEASurement:IMMed:SOUrce<x>:SIGType
(TDS5000B Series option SM)
Description
This command sets or queries the type of input signal used for measurement SOURCE<x>, 1 or 2.
To ensure accurate measurements, use this command to specify the input--signal type for the measurement source.
Group
Measurement
Syntax 1
MEASurement:IMMed:SOUrce<x>:SIGType
{PULse|EYE}
Syntax 2
MEASurement:IMMed:SOUrce<x>:SIGType?
Arguments
H PULSE
Use this signal type for generic signals that are not associated with
synchronous communications standards.
H EYE
Use this signal type for synchronous--communication signals with
NRZ--like characteristics (nonreturn to zero).
Example 1
MEASurement:IMMed:SOUrce1:SIGType PULse
This command selects Pulse as the signal type for source 1.
Example 2
MEASurement:IMMed:SOUrce<x>:SIGType?
This query might return
:MEASUREMENT:IMMED:SOURCE1:SIGTYPE
indicating that the signal type for source 1 is EYE.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 542 --
EYE
MEASUrement:IMMed:TYPe
Description
This command sets or queries the immediate measurement type.
Group
Measurement
Syntax 1
MEASUrement:IMMed:TYPE {AMPlitude|AREa|
BURst|CARea|CMEan|CRMs|DELay|DISTDUty|
EXTINCTDB|EXTINCTPCT|EXTINCTRATIO|
EYEHeight|EYEWidth|FALL|FREQuency|HIGH|
HITs|LOW|MAXimum|MEAN|MEDian|MINImum|
NCROss|NDUty|NOVershoot|NWIdth|PBASe|
PCROss|PCTCROss|PDUty|PEAKHits|PERIod|
PHAse|PK2Pk|PKPKJitter|PKPKNoise|
POVershoot|PTOT|PWIdth|QFACtor|RISe|
RMS|RMSJitter|PMSNoise|SIGMA1|SIGMA2|
SIGMA3|SIXSigmajit|SNRatio|STDdev|
UNDEFINED|WAVEFORMS}
Syntax 2
MEASUrement:IMMed:TYPe?
Arguments
H AMPlitude
This measures the amplitude of the selected waveform. In other
words, it measures the high value less the low value measured over
the entire waveform or gated region.
Amplitude = High -- Low
H AREa
This measures the voltage over time. The area is over the entire waveform or gated region and is measured in volt--seconds. The area measured above the ground is positive, while the area below ground is
negative.
H BURst
The burst width measures the duration of a burst. The measurement is
made over the entire waveform or gated region.
H CARea
The cycle area measures the voltage over time. In other words, it measures, in volt--seconds, the area over the first cycle in the waveform or
the first cycle in the gated region. The area measured above the common reference point is positive, while the area below the common
reference point is negative.
H CMEan
This measures the arithmetic mean over the first cycle in the waveform or the first cycle in the gated region.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 543 --
H CRMs
This measures the true Root Mean Square voltage over the first cycle
in the waveform or the first cycle in the gated region.
H DELay
This measures the time between the middle reference (default = 50%)
amplitude point of the source waveform and the destination waveform.
H DISTDUty
The duty cycle distortion measures the time between the falling edge
and the rising edge of the eye pattern at the mid reference level.
It is the peak--to--peak time variation of the first eye crossing measured at the mid--reference as a percent of the eye period.
H EXTINCTDB
This (optical waveform (eye diagram) measurement) measures its
extinction ratio. Extinction Ratio (dB) measures the ratio of the average power levels for the logic High to the logic Low of an optical waveform and expresses the result in dB.
This measurement only works for fast acquisition signals or a reference waveform saved in fast acquisition mode.
Extinction dB = 10 X (log 10 (High / Low)
H EXTINCTPCT
This (optical measurement) measures the extinction ratio of the selected optical waveform. Extinction Ratio (%) measures the ratio of
the average power levels for the logic Low (off) to the logic (High)
(on) of an optical waveform and expresses the result in percent.
This measurement only works for fast acquisition signals or a reference waveform saved in fast acquisition mode.
Extinction % = 100.0 x (Low / High)
H EXTINCTRATIO
This (optical measurement) measures the extinction ratio of the selected optical waveform. Extinction Ratio measures the ratio of the
average power levels for the logic High to the logic Low of an optical
waveform and expresses the result without units.
This measurement only works for fast acquisition signals or a reference waveform saved in fast acquisition mode.
Extinction Ratio = (High / Low), ratios greater than 100 or less than 1
generate errors; low must be greater than or equal to 1 microwatt.
H EYEHeight
This measures the vertical opening of an eye diagram in volts.
H EYEWidth
This measures the width of an eye diagram in seconds.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 544 --
H FALL
This measures the time taken for the falling edge of the first pulse in
the waveform or gated region to fall from a high reference value (default is 90%) to a low reference value (default is 10%).
H FREQuency
This measures the first cycle in the waveform or gated region. Frequency is the reciprocal of the period and is measured in hertz (Hz),
where 1 Hz = 1 cycle per second.
H HIGH
This measures the High reference (100% level, sometimes called Topline) of a waveform.
You can also limit the High measurement (normally taken over the
entire waveform record) to a gated region on the waveform.
H HITs
The hits--in--box histogram measurement measures the number of
points in or on the histogram box.
H LOW
This measures the Low reference (0% level, sometimes called Baseline) of a waveform.
H MAXimum
This finds the maximum amplitude. This value is the most positive
peak voltage found. It is measured over the entire waveform or gated
region.
When histogram is selected with the MEASUrement:METHod command, the maximum measurement measures the voltage of the highest
nonzero bin in vertical histograms or the time of the rightmost bin in
horizontal histograms.
H MEAN
This amplitude measurement finds the arithmetic mean over the entire
waveform or gated region.
When histogram is selected with the MEASUrement:METHod command, the mean measurement measures the average of all acquired
points within or on the histogram.
H MEDian
This (histogram measurement) measures the middle point of the histogram box. Half of all acquired points within or on the histogram box
are less than this value and half are greater than this value.
H MINImum
This amplitude measurement finds the minimum amplitude. This value is typically the most negative peak voltage. It is measured over the
entire waveform or gated region.
When histogram is selected with the MEASUrement:METHod command, the minimum measurement measures the lowest nonzero bin in
vertical histograms or the time of the leftmost nonzero bin in the horizontal histograms.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 545 --
H NCROss
This (timing measurement) measures the time from the trigger point
to the first falling edge of the waveform or gated region. The distance
(time) is measured at the middle reference amplitude point of the signal.
H NDUty
The negative duty cycle is the ratio of the negative pulse width to the
signal period, expressed as a percentage. The duty cycle is measured
on the first cycle in the waveform or gated region.
Negative Duty Cycle = (Negative Width) / Period * 100%
H NOVershoot
The negative overshoot amplitude measurement finds the negative
overshoot value over the entire waveform or gated region.
Negative Overshoot = (Low – Minimum) / Amplitude * 100%)
H NWIdth
The negative width measurement is the distance (time) between the
middle reference (default = 50%) amplitude points of a negative
pulse. The measurement is made on the first pulse in the waveform or
gated region.
H PBASe
This measures the base value used in extinction ratio measurements.
H PCROss
This (timing measurement) measures the time from the trigger point
to the first positive edge of the waveform or gated region. The distance (time) is measured at the middle reference amplitude point of
the signal.
H PCTCROss
The crossing percent (optical measurement) measures the location of
the eye crossing point expressed as a percentage of EYEHeight.
Crossing percent = 100 * [(eye--crossing--point – PBASe)/(PTOP –
PBASe)]
H PDUty
The positive duty cycle is the ratio of the positive pulse width to the
signal period, expressed as a percentage. It is measured on the first
cycle in the waveform or gated region.
Positive Duty Cycle = (Positive Width)/Period * 100%
H PEAKHits
This (histogram measurement) measures the number of points in the
largest bin of the histogram.
H PERIod
This timing measurement is the time required to complete the first
cycle in a waveform or gated region. Period is the reciprocal of frequency and is measured in seconds.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 546 --
H PHAse
This measures the phase difference (amount of time a waveform leads
or lags the reference waveform) between two waveforms. The measurement is made between the middle reference points of the two waveforms and is expressed in degrees, where 360° represents one waveform cycle.
H PK2Pk
This peak--to--peak amplitude measurement finds the absolute difference between the maximum and minimum amplitude in the entire
waveform or gated region.
When histogram is selected with the MEASUrement:METHod command, the PK2Pk measurement measures the histogram’s peak to
peak difference.
H PKPKJitter
This measures the variance (minimum and maximum values) in the
time locations of the cross point.
H PKPKNoise
This measures the peak--to--peak noise on a waveform at the mid reference level.
H POVershoot
The positive overshoot amplitude measurement finds the positive
overshoot value over the entire waveform or gated region.
Positive Overshoot = (Maximum – High) / Amplitude * 100%
H PTOT
This measures the top value used in extinction ratio measurements.
H PWIdth
The positive width is the distance (time) between the middle reference
(default = 50%) amplitude points of a positive pulse. The measurement is made on the first pulse in the waveform or gated region.
H QFACtor
This measures the quality factor. The Q factor is a figure of merit for
an eye diagram, which indicates the vertical eye opening relative to
the noise at the low and high logic levels. It is the ratio of the eye size
to noise.
H RISe
This timing measurement finds the rise time of the waveform. The
rise time is the time it takes for the leading edge of the first pulse encountered to rise from a low reference value (default is 10%) to a high
reference value (default is 90%).
H RMS
This amplitude measurement finds the true Root Mean Square voltage
in the entire waveform or gated region.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 547 --
H RMSJitter
This measures the variance in the time locations of the cross point.
The RMS jitter is defined as one standard deviation at the cross point.
H RMSNoise
This measures the Root Mean Square noise amplitude on a waveform
at the mid reference level.
H SIGMA1
This (histogram measurement) measures the percentage of points in
the histogram that are within one standard deviation of the histogram
mean.
H SIGMA2
This (histogram measurement) measures the percentage of points in
the histogram that are within two standard deviations of the histogram
mean.
H SIGMA3
This (histogram measurement) measures the percentage of points in
the histogram that are within three standard deviations of the histogram mean.
H SIXSigmajit
This (histogram measurement) is six * RMSJitter.
H SNRatio
This measures the signal--to--noise ratio. The signal--to--noise ratio is
the amplitude of a noise rejection band centered on the mid level.
H STDdev
This measures the standard deviation (Root Mean Square (RMS)
deviation) of all acquired points within or on the histogram box.
H UNDEFINED
This is the default measurement type, which indicates that no measurement type is specified. Once a measurement type is chosen, it can
be cleared using this argument.
H WAVEFORMS
The waveform count (histogram measurement) measures the number
of waveforms used to calculate the histogram.
Example 1
MEASUrement:IMMed:TYPe FREQuency
This defines the immediate measurement to be a frequency measurement.
Example 2
MEASUrement:IMMed:TYPe?
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 548 --
This query might return
:MEASUREMENT:IMMED:TYPe RMS
indicating that the immediate measurement is the true Root Mean
Square voltage.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 549 --
MEASUrement:IMMed:UNIts?
Description
This query--only command returns the units of the immediate measurement.
Group
Measurement
Syntax
MEASUrement:IMMed:UNIts?
Example
MEASUrement:IMMed:UNIts?
This query might return
:MEASUREMENT:IMMED:UNIts ”s”
indicating that units for the immediate measurement are in seconds.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 550 --
MEASUrement:IMMed:VALue?
Description
This query--only command returns the value of the measurement specified by the MEASUrement:IMMed:TYPe command. The measurement
is immediately taken on the source(s) specified by a MEASUrement:IMMed:SOURCE command.
Note: A change to HORizontal:MAIn:SCALe or CH<x>:SCALe will
not necessarily have taken affect if followed by this command.
Group
Measurement
Related Commands
MEASUrement:IMMed:TYPe, MEASUrement:IMMed:SOURCE,
*ESR?, ALLEV?
Syntax
MEASUrement:IMMed:VALue?
Example
MEASUrement:IMMed:VALue?
This query might return
:MEASUREMENT:IMMED:VALUE 9.9000E+37
If the measurement has an error or warning associated with it, then an
item is added to the error queue. The error can be checked for with the
*ESR? and ALLEV? commands.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 551 --
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:COUNt?
Description
This query--only command returns the number of values accumulated
for this measurement since the last statistical reset. Some values may
have been ignored because they generated an error. Measurements are
specified by x, which ranges from 1 through 8.
Group
Measurement
Syntax
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:COUNt?
Example
MEASUrement:MEAS3:COUNt?
This query might return
:MEASUREMENT:MEAS3:COUNT 3.247000000E+03.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 552 --
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:MAXimum?
Description
This query--only command returns the maximum value found for this
measurement since the last statistical reset. Measurements are specified
by x, which ranges from 1 through 8.
Group
Measurement
Syntax
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:MAXimum?
Example
MEASUrement:MEAS3:MAXimum?
This query might return
:MEASUREMENT:MEAS3:MAXIMUM 4.18E-9.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 553 --
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:MEAN?
Description
This query--only command returns the mean value accumulated for this
measurement since the last statistical reset. Measurements are specified
by x, which ranges from 1 through 8.
Group
Measurement
Syntax
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:MEAN?
Example
MEASUrement:MEAS1:MEAN?
This query might return
:MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:MEAN 514.71E-09.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 554 --
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:MINImum?
Description
This query--only command returns the minimum value found for this
measurement since the last statistical reset. Measurements are specified
by x, which ranges from 1 through 8.
Group
Measurement
Syntax
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:MINImum?
Example
MEASUrement:MEAS1:MINImum?
This query might return
:MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:MINIMUM 1.75E-09.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 555 --
MEASURement:MEAS<x>:NOISe
(TDS5000B Series option SM)
Description
This command sets or queries whether the noise measurement is made
on the high or low level of the waveform. Sending this command is
equivalent to selecting Ref Levs > Eye > Top Level or Base Level in
the Comm tab of the Measurement Setup dialog box. The Eye section is
displayed only if you have an eye--pattern or optical measurement defined. Measurements are specified by x, which ranges from 1 through 8.
Group
Measurement
Syntax 1
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:NOISe {HIGH|LOW}
Syntax 2
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:NOISe?
Argument
H HIGH
This argument causes the measurement for noise to be taken at the
high level of the waveform.
H LOW
This argument causes the measurement for noise to be taken at the
low level of the waveform.
Example 1
MEASUrement:MEAS1:NOISe
HIGH
This command causes the noise measurement to be made at the high
level of the waveform for Measurement 1.
Example 2
MEASUrement:MEAS2:NOISe?
This query might return
:MEASUREMENT:MEAS2:NOISE LOW
indicating that Measurement 2 will measure noise at the low level of
the waveform.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 556 --
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:STDdev?
Description
This query--only command returns the standard deviation of values accumulated for this measurement since the last statistical reset. Measurements are specified by x, which ranges from 1 through 8.
Group
Measurement
Syntax
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:STDdev?
Example
MEASUrement:MEAS1:STDdev?
This query might return
:MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:STDDEV 21.0E-12.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 557 --
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:DELay:DIREction
Description
This command sets or queries the starting point and direction that determines the delay ”to” edge when taking a delay measurement. Use the
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:SOURCE2 command to specify the waveform. This command is equivalent to selecting Time from the Measure
menu, choosing Delay from the drop--down list and then clicking the
desired Search Direction setting. Measurements are specified by x,
which ranges from 1 through 8.
Group
Measurement
Related Commands
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:SOURCE2
Syntax 1
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:DELay:DIREction {BACKWards|FORWards}
Syntax 2
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:DELay:DIREction?
Arguments
H BACKWards
This means that the search starts at the end of the waveform and looks
for the last rising or falling edge in the waveform. Use the MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:DELay:EDGE2 command to specify the slope of the
edge.
H FORWards
This means that the search starts at the beginning of the waveform and
looks for the first rising or falling edge in the waveform. Use the
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:DELay:EDGE2 command to specify the
slope of the edge.
Example 1
MEASUrement:MEAS3:DELay:DIREction BACKWards
This command starts searching from the end of the waveform record.
Example 2
MEASUrement:MEAS3DELay:DIREction?
This query might return
:MEASUREMENT:MEAS3:DELAY:DIRECTION BACKWARDS
indicating that the current search direction is backwards.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 558 --
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:DELay:EDGE[1]
Description
This command sets or queries the slope of the edge that is used for the
delay ”from” waveform when taking a delay measurement. Use the
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:SOURCE[1] command to specify the waveform. This command is equivalent to selecting Time from the Measure menu, choosing Delay from the drop--down list and clicking the
desired Delay Edge1 setting. Measurements are specified by x, which
ranges from 1 through 8.
Group
Measurement
Related Commands
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:SOURCE[1]
Syntax 1
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:DELay:EDGE[1] {FALL|RISe}
Syntax 2
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:DELay:EDGE[1]?
Arguments
H FALL
This specifies the falling edge of the waveform.
H RISe
This specifies the rising edge of the waveform.
Example 1
MEASUrement:MEAS3:DELay:EDGE[1] RISe
This command specifies that the rising edge of the waveform be used
for measurement 3.
Example 2
MEASUrement:MEAS1:DELay:EDGE[1]?
This query might return
:MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:DELAY:EDGE[1] FALL
indicating that the falling edge of the waveform is being used for measurement 1.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 559 --
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:DELay:EDGE2
Description
This command sets or queries the slope of the edge that is used for the
delay ”to” waveform when taking a delay measurement. Use the MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:SOURCE2 command to specify the waveform.
This command is equivalent to selecting Time from the Measure menu,
choosing Delay from the drop--down list and then clicking the desired
Delay Edge2 setting. Measurements are specified by x, which ranges
from 1 through 8.
Group
Measurement
Related Commands
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:SOURCE2
Syntax 1
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:DELay:EDGE2 {FALL|RISe}
Syntax 2
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:DELay:EDGE2?
Arguments
H FALL
This specifies the falling edge of the waveform.
H RISe
This specifies the rising edge of the waveform.
Example 1
MEASUrement:MEAS3:DELay:EDGE2 RISe
This command specifies that the rising edge of the waveform be used
for measurement 3.
Example 2
MEASUrement:MEAS1:DELay:EDGE2?
This query might return
:MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:DELAY:EDGE2 FALL
indicating that the falling edge of the waveform is being used for measurement 1.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 560 --
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:DELay?
Description
This query--only command returns the delay measurement parameters
for the measurement specified by <x>, which ranges from 1 through 8.
Measurement parameters are presented in the following order: Edge1,
Edge2, and Direction. This query command is equivalent to selecting
Time from the Measure menu, choosing Delay and viewing the Delay
Edge and Search Direction settings.
Group
Measurement
Syntax 1
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:DELay?
Example
MEASUrement:MEAS3?
This query might return
:MEASUREMENT:MEAS3:DELAY:EDGE1 RISE;
EDGE2 RISE;DIRECTION FORWARDS.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 561 --
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:REFLevel:ABSolute:HIGH
Description
This command sets or queries the high reference level, and is the upper
reference level when MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:REFLevel:METHod
is set to Absolute. Measurements are specified by x, which ranges from
1 through 8.
Note: This command affects the results of rise and fall measurements
Group
Measurement
Related Commands
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:REFLevel:METHod
Syntax 1
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:REFLevel:ABSolute:HIGH
<NR3>
Syntax 2
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:REFLevel:ABSolute:HIGH?
Arguments
H <NR3>
This is the high reference level, in volts. The default is 0.0 V.
Example 1
MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:REFLEVEL:ABSOLUTE:HIGH 1.71
This command sets the high reference level to 1.71 V.
Example 2
MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:REFLEVEL:ABSOLUTE:HIGH?
This query might return
:MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:REFLEVEL:ABSOLUTE:HIGH
1.7100E+00
indicating that the absolute high reference level is set to 1.71 V.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 562 --
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:REFLevel:ABSolute:LOW
Description
This command sets or queries the low reference level, and is the lower
reference level when MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:REFLevel:METHod
is set to Absolute. Measurements are specified by x, which ranges from
1 through 8.
Note: This command affects the results of rise and fall measurements.
Group
Measurement
Related Commands
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:REFLevel:METHod
Syntax 1
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:REFLevel:ABSolute:LOW
<NR3>
Syntax 2
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:REFLevel:ABSolute:LOW?
Arguments
H <NR3>
This is the low reference level, in volts. The default is 0.0 V.
Example 1
MEASUrement:REFLEVEL:ABSolute:LOW 0.0 V.
This command sets the low reference level to 0.0 V.
Example 2
MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:REFLEVEL:ABSolute:LOW?
This query might return
:MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:REFLEVEL:ABSOLUTE:LOW
0.0000E+00
indicating that the absolute low reference level is set to 0.0 V.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 563 --
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:REFLevel:ABSolute:MID[1]
Description
This command sets or queries the mid reference level, and is the 50%
reference level when MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:REFLevel:METHod
is set to Absolute. Measurements are specified by x, which ranges from
1 through 8.
Note: This command affects the results of period, frequency, delay,
and all cyclic measurements.
Group
Measurement
Related Commands
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:REFLevel:METHod
Syntax 1
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:REFLevel:ABSolute:MID[1]
<NR3>
Syntax 2
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:REFLevel:ABSolute:MID[1]?
Arguments
H <NR3>
This is the mid reference level, in volts. The default is 0.0 V.
Example 1
MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:REFLEVEL:ABSOLUTE:MID[1] .71
This command sets the mid reference level to .71 V.
Example 2
MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:REFLEVEL:ABSOLUTE:MID[1]?
This query might return
:MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:REFLEVEL:ABSOLUTE:MID
0.7100E+00
indicating that the absolute mid1 reference level is set to .71 V.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 564 --
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:REFLevel:ABSolute:MID2
Description
This command sets or queries the mid reference level for the ”to” waveform when taking a delay measurement, and is the 50% reference
level when MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:REFLevel:METHod is set to
Absolute. Measurements are specified by x, which ranges from 1
through 8.
Note: This command affects the results of delay measurements.
Group
Measurement
Related Commands
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:REFLevel:METHod
Syntax 1
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:REFLevel:ABSolute:MID2
<NR3>
Syntax 2
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:REFLevel:ABSolute:MID2?
Arguments
H <NR3>
This is the mid reference level, in volts. The default is 0.0 V.
Example 1
MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:REFLEVEL:ABSOLUTE:MID2 0.5
This command sets the mid reference level for the delay waveform to
0.5 V.
Example 2
MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:REFLEVEL:ABSOLUTE:MID2?
This query might return
:MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:REFLEVEL:ABSOLUTE:MID2
0.5000E+00
indicating that the absolute mid2 reference level is set to 0.5 V.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 565 --
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:REFLevel:METHod
Description
This command specifies or queries the reference level units used for
measurement calculations. This command is equivalent to selecting
Reference Levels from the Measure menu and then choosing the desired reference level from the Units group box. Measurements are specified by x, which ranges from 1 through 8.
Group
Measurement
Syntax 1
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:REFLevel:METHod {ABSolute|PERCent}
Syntax 2
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:REFLevel:METHod?
Arguments
H ABSolute
This specifies that the reference levels are set explicitly using the
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:REFLevel:ABSolute commands. This
method is useful when precise values are required. For instance, when
designing to published interface specifications, such as RS--232--C.
H PERCent
This specifies that the reference levels are calculated as a percent relative to HIGH and LOW. The percentages are defined using the MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:REFLevel:PERCent commands.
Example 1
MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:REFLEVEL:METHOD ABSOLUTE
This command specifies that explicit user--defined values are used for
the reference levels.
Example 2
MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:REFLEVEL:METHOD?
This query might return
:MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:REFLEVEL:METHOD PERCENT
indicating that the reference level units used are calculated as a percent
relative to HIGH and LOW.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 566 --
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:REFLevel:PERCent:HIGH
Description
This command sets or queries the percentage (where 100% is equal to
HIGH) used to calculate the high reference level when MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:REFLevel:METHod is set to Percent. Measurements
are specified by x, which ranges from 1 through 8.
Note: This command affects the results of rise and fall measurements.
Group
Measurement
Related Commands
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:REFLevel:METHod
Syntax 1
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:REFLevel:PERCent:HIGH
<NR3>
Syntax 2
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:REFLevel:PERCent:HIGH?
Arguments
H <NR3>
This is the high reference level, ranging from 0 to 100%. The default
high reference level is 90%.
Example 1
MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:REFLEVEL:PERCENT:HIGH 95
This command sets the high reference level to 95% of HIGH.
Example 2
MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:REFLEVEL:PERCENT:HIGH?
This query might return
:MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:REFLEVEL:PERCENT:HIGH 90
indicating that the percentage high reference level is set to 90% of
HIGH.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 567 --
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:REFLevel:PERCent:LOW
Description
This command sets or queries the percentage (where 100% is equal to
HIGH) used to calculate the low reference level when MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:REFLevel:METHod is set to Percent. This command
is equivalent to selecting Reference Levels from the Measure menu,
and then entering the Percentage Low Ref value. Measurements are
specified by x, which ranges from 1 through 8.
Note: This command affects the results of rise and fall measurements.
Group
Measurement
Related Commands
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:REFLevel:METHod
Syntax 1
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:REFLevel:PERCent:LOW <NR3>
Syntax 2
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:REFLevel:PERCent:LOW?
Arguments
H <NR3>
This is the low reference level, ranging from 0 to 100%. The default
low reference level is 10%.
Example 1
MEASUREMENT:MEAS<x>:REFLEVEL:PERCENT:LOW 15
This command sets the high reference level to 15% of HIGH.
Example 2
MEASUREMENT:MEAS<x>:REFLEVEL:PERCENT:LOW?
This query might return
:MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:REFLEVEL:PERCENT:LOW 10
indicating that the percentage high reference level is set to 10% of
HIGH.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 568 --
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:REFLevel:PERCent:MID[1]
Description
This command sets or queries the percentage (where 100% is equal to
HIGH) used to calculate the mid reference level when MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:REFLevel:METHod is set to Percent. Measurements
are specified by x, which ranges from 1 through 8.
Note: This command affects the results of period, frequency, delay,
and all cyclic measurements.
Group
Measurement
Related Commands
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:REFLevel:METHod
Syntax 1
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:REFLevel:PERCent:MID[1]
<NR3>
Syntax 2
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:REFLevel:PERCent:MID[1]?
Arguments
H <NR3>
This is the mid reference level, ranging from 0 to 100%. The default
mid reference level is 50%.
Example 1
MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:REFLEVEL:PERCENT:MID[1] 60
This command sets the mid reference level to 60% of HIGH.
Example 2
MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:REFLEVEL:PERCENT:MID[1]?
This query might return
:MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:REFLEVEL:PERCENT:MID 65
indicating that the percentage mid reference level is set to 65% of
HIGH.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 569 --
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:REFLevel:PERCent:MID2
Description
This command sets or queries the percentage (where 100% is equal to
HIGH) used to calculate the mid reference level for the second waveform specified when MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:REFLevel:METHod is
set to Percent. Measurements are specified by x, which ranges from 1
through 8.
Note: This command affects the results of delay measurements.
Group
Measurement
Related Commands
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:REFLevel:METHod
Syntax 1
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:REFLevel:PERCent:MID2
<NR3>
Syntax 2
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:REFLevel:PERCent:MID2?
Arguments
H <NR3>
This is the mid reference level, ranging from 0 to 100%. The default
mid reference level is 50%.
Example 1
MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:REFLEVEL:PERCENT:MID2 40
This command sets the mid2 reference level to 40% of HIGH.
Example 2
MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:REFLEVEL:PERCENT:MID2?
This query might return
:MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:REFLEVEL:PERCENT:MID2 45
indicating that the percentage mid2 reference level is set to 45% of
HIGH.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 570 --
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:REFLevel?
Description
This query--only command returns the current reference level parameters. It returns them in the following order: ABSOLUTE and then PERCENT for individual user measurements. Measurements are specified
by x, which ranges from 1 through 8.
Group
Measurement
Syntax
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:REFLevel?
Example
MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:REFLEVEL?
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 571 --
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:SOURCE[1]
Description
This command sets or queries the source for all single channel measurements and specifies the source to measure ”from” when taking a delay
measurement or phase measurement. Measurements are specified by x,
which ranges from 1 through 8. This command is equivalent to selecting Measurement Setup from the Measure menu and then choosing the
desired measurement source.
Group
Measurement
Syntax 1
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:SOURCE[1]
{CH<x>|MATH<y>|REF<x>|HIStogram}
Syntax 2
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:SOURCE[1]?
Arguments
H CH<x>
This is an input channel waveform. The x variable can be expressed
as an integer ranging from 1 through 4 for 4--channel models and 1 to
2 for 2--channel models.
H MATH<y>
This is a math waveform. The y variable can be expressed as an integer ranging from 1 through 4 for 4--channel models and 1 to 2 for
2--channel models.
H REF<x>
This is a reference waveform. The x variable can be expressed as an
integer ranging from 1 through 4 for 4--channel models and 1 to 2 for
2--channel models.
H HIStogram
This is a histogram.
Example 1
MEASUrement:MEAS2:SOURCE[1] MATH1
This command specifies Math 1 as the measurement 2 source.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 572 --
Example 2
MEASUrement:MEAS1:SOURCE[1]?
This query might return
:MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:SOURCE[1] MATH1
indicating that Math1 is the measurement 2 source.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 573 --
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:SOURCE2
Description
This command sets or queries the source for all single channel measurements and specifies the reference source to measure ”to” when taking a
delay measurement or phase measurement. Measurements are specified
by x, which ranges from 1 through 8. This command is equivalent to
selecting Measurement Setup from the Measure menu, selecting a measurement type of either Phase or Delay, and then choosing the desired
measurement source.
Tip: Source2 measurements only apply to phase and delay measurement types, which require both a target (Source1) and reference
(Source2) source.
Group
Measurement
Related Commands
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:TYPe
Syntax 1
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:SOURCE2
{CH<x>|MATH<y>|REF<x>}
Syntax 2
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:SOURCE2?
Arguments
H CH<x>
This is an input channel waveform. The x variable can be expressed
as an integer ranging from 1 through 4 for 4--channel models and 1 to
2 for 2--channel models.
H MATH<y>
This is a math waveform. The y variable can be expressed as an integer ranging from 1 through 4 for 4--channel models and 1 to 2 for
2--channel models.
H REF<x>
This is a reference waveform. The x variable can be expressed as an
integer ranging from 1 through 4 for 4--channel models and 1 to 2 for
2--channel models.
Example 1
MEASUrement:MEAS4:SOURCE2 CH1
This command specifies CH1 as the delay ”to” source when making
delay measurement.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 574 --
Example 2
MEASUrement:MEAS2:SOURCE2?
This query might return
:MEASUREMENT:MEAS2:SOURCE2 MATH1
indicating that Math 1 is the measurement 2 source.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 575 --
MEASurement:MEAS<x>:SOUrce<x>:SIGType
(TDS5000B Series option SM)
Description
This command sets or queries the type of input signal used for the specified measurement slot. MEAS<x> is 1 through 8 for the measurement
slot using SOURCE<x>, 1 or 2.
To ensure accurate measurements, use this command to specify the input--signal type for the measurement source.
Group
Measurement
Syntax 1
MEASurement:MEAS<x>:SOUrce<x>:SIGType
{PULse|EYE}
Syntax 2
MEASurement:MEAS<x>:SOUrce<x>:SIGType?
Arguments
H PULSE
Use this signal type for generic signals that are not associated with
synchronous communications standards.
H EYE
Use this signal type for synchronous--communication signals with
NRZ--like characteristics (nonreturn to zero).
Example 1
MEASurement:MEAS5:SOUrce1:SIGType PULse
This command selects Pulse as the signal type associated with source 1
for measurement slot 5.
Example 2
MEASurement:MEAS<x>:SOUrce<x>:SIGType?
This query might return
:MEASUREMENT:MEAS2:SOURCE1:SIGTYPE
EYE
indicating that the signal type associated with source 1 of measurement
slot 2 is EYE.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 576 --
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:STATE
Description
This command sets or queries whether the specified measurement slot
is computed and displayed. The measurement slot is specified by x,
which ranges from 1 through 8. This command is equivalent to selecting Measurement Setup from the Measure menu and then clicking the
Display button.
For a measurement to display, you must have selected a source waveform and defined the measurement you want to take and display. You
select the measurement using the MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:SOURCE[1] command. You define the measurement
type using the MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:TYPe command.
Group
Measurement
Related Commands
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:SOURCE[1], MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:TYPe
Syntax 1
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:STATE {OFF|ON|<NR1>}
Syntax 2
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:STATE?
Arguments
H OFF
This disables calculation and display of the specified measurement
slot.
H ON
This enables calculation and display of the specified measurement
slot.
H <NR1>
A 0 disables calculation and display of the specified measurement
slot; any other value enables calculation and display of the specified
measurement slot.
Example 1
MEASUrement:MEAS2:STATE ON
This command computes and displays the measurement defined as
measurement 2.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 577 --
Example 2
MEASUrement:MEAS1:STATE?
This query might return
:MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:STATE 0
indicating that measurement defined for measurement slot 1 is disabled.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 578 --
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:TYPe
Description
This command sets or queries the measurement type defined for the
specified measurement slot. The measurement slot is specified by x,
which ranges from 1 through 8. This command is equivalent to selecting Measurement Setup from the Measure menu and then choosing the
desired measurement type.
Group
Measurement
Syntax 1
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:TYPe {AMPlitude|AREa|
BURst|CARea|CMEan|CRMs|DELay|DISTDUty|
EXTINCTDB|EXTINCTPCT|EXTINCTRATIO|EYEHeight|
EYEWidth|FALL|FREQuency|HIGH|HITs|LOW|
MAXimum|MEAN|MEDian|MINImum|NCROss|NDUty|
NOVershoot|NWIdth|PBASe|PCROss|PCTCROss|PDUty|
PEAKHits|PERIod|PHAse|PK2Pk|PKPKJitter|
PKPKNoise|POVershoot|PTOT|PWIdth|QFACtor|
RISe|RMS|RMSJitter|PMSNoise|SIGMA1|SIGMA2|
SIGMA3|SIXSigmajit|SNRatio|STDdev|UNDEFINED|
WAVEFORMS}
Syntax 2
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:TYPe?
Arguments
H AMPlitude
This measures the amplitude of the selected waveform. In other
words, it measures the high value less the low value measured over
the entire waveform or gated region.
Amplitude = High -- Low
H AREa
This measures the voltage over time. The area is over the entire waveform or gated region and is measured in volt--seconds. The area measured above the ground is positive, while the area below ground is
negative.
H BURst
The burst width measures the duration of a burst. The measurement is
made over the entire waveform or gated region.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 579 --
H CARea
The cycle area measures the voltage over time. In other words, it measures, in volt--seconds, the area over the first cycle in the waveform or
the first cycle in the gated region. The area measured above the common reference point is positive, while the area below the common
reference point is negative.
H CMEan
This measures the arithmetic mean over the first cycle in the waveform or the first cycle in the gated region.
H CRMs
This measures the true Root Mean Square voltage over the first cycle
in the waveform or the first cycle in the gated region.
H DELay
This measures the time between the middle reference (default = 50%)
amplitude point of the source waveform and the destination waveform.
H DISTDUty
The duty cycle distortion measures the time between the falling edge
and the rising edge of the eye pattern at the mid reference level.
It is the peak--to--peak time variation of the first eye crossing measured at the mid--reference as a percent of the eye period.
H EXTINCTDB
This (optical waveform (eye diagram) measurement) measures its
extinction ratio. Extinction Ratio (dB) measures the ratio of the average power levels for the logic High to the logic Low of an optical waveform and expresses the result in dB.
This measurement only works for fast acquisition signals or a reference waveform saved in fast acquisition mode.
Extinction dB = 10 X (log 10 (High / Low)
H EXTINCTPCT
This (optical measurement) measures the extinction ratio of the selected optical waveform. Extinction Ratio (%) measures the ratio of
the average power levels for the logic Low (off) to the logic (High)
(on) of an optical waveform and expresses the result in percent.
This measurement only works for fast acquisition signals or a reference waveform saved in fast acquisition mode.
Extinction % = 100.0 x (Low / High)
H EXTINCTRATIO
This (optical measurement) measures the extinction ratio of the selected optical waveform. Extinction Ratio measures the ratio of the
average power levels for the logic High to the logic Low of an optical
waveform and expresses the result without units.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 580 --
This measurement only works for fast acquisition signals or a reference waveform saved in fast acquisition mode.
Extinction Ratio = (High / Low), ratios greater than 100 or less than 1
generate errors; low must be greater than or equal to 1 microwatt.
H EYEHeight
This measures the vertical opening of an eye diagram in volts.
H EYEWidth
This measures the width of an eye diagram in seconds.
H FALL
This measures the time taken for the falling edge of the first pulse in
the waveform or gated region to fall from a high reference value (default is 90%) to a low reference value (default is 10%).
H FREQuency
This measures the first cycle in the waveform or gated region. Frequency is the reciprocal of the period and is measured in hertz (Hz),
where 1 Hz = 1 cycle per second.
H HIGH
This measures the High reference (100% level, sometimes called Topline) of a waveform.
You can also limit the High measurement (normally taken over the
entire waveform record) to a gated region on the waveform.
H HITs
The hits--in--box histogram measurement measures the number of
points in or on the histogram box.
H LOW
This measures the Low reference (0% level, sometimes called Baseline) of a waveform.
H MAXimum
This finds the maximum amplitude. This value is the most positive
peak voltage found. It is measured over the entire waveform or gated
region.
When histogram is selected with the MEASUrement:METHod command, the maximum measurement measures the voltage of the highest
nonzero bin in vertical histograms or the time of the rightmost bin in
horizontal histograms.
H MEAN
This amplitude measurement finds the arithmetic mean over the entire
waveform or gated region.
When histogram is selected with the MEASUrement:METHod command, the mean measurement measures the average of all acquired
points within or on the histogram.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 581 --
H MEDian
This (histogram measurement) measures the middle point of the histogram box. Half of all acquired points within or on the histogram box
are less than this value and half are greater than this value.
H MINImum
This amplitude measurement finds the minimum amplitude. This value is typically the most negative peak voltage. It is measured over the
entire waveform or gated region.
When histogram is selected with the MEASUrement:METHod command, the minimum measurement measures the lowest nonzero bin in
vertical histograms or the time of the leftmost nonzero bin in the horizontal histograms.
H NCROss
This (timing measurement) measures the time from the trigger point
to the first falling edge of the waveform or gated region. The distance
(time) is measured at the middle reference amplitude point of the signal.
H NDUty
The negative duty cycle is the ratio of the negative pulse width to the
signal period, expressed as a percentage. The duty cycle is measured
on the first cycle in the waveform or gated region.
Negative Duty Cycle = (Negative Width) / Period * 100%
H NOVershoot
The negative overshoot amplitude measurement finds the negative
overshoot value over the entire waveform or gated region.
Negative Overshoot = (Low – Minimum) / Amplitude * 100%)
H NWIdth
The negative width measurement is the distance (time) between the
middle reference (default = 50%) amplitude points of a negative
pulse. The measurement is made on the first pulse in the waveform or
gated region.
H PBASe
This measures the base value used in extinction ratio measurements.
H PCROss
This (timing measurement) measures the time from the trigger point
to the first positive edge of the waveform or gated region. The distance (time) is measured at the middle reference amplitude point of
the signal.
H PCTCROss
The crossing percent (optical measurement) measures the location of
the eye crossing point expressed as a percentage of EYEHeight.
Crossing percent = 100 * [(eye--crossing--point – PBASe)/(PTOP –
PBASe)]
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 582 --
H PDUty
The positive duty cycle is the ratio of the positive pulse width to the
signal period, expressed as a percentage. It is measured on the first
cycle in the waveform or gated region.
Positive Duty Cycle = (Positive Width)/Period * 100%
H PEAKHits
This (histogram measurement) measures the number of points in the
largest bin of the histogram.
H PERIod
This timing measurement is the time required to complete the first
cycle in a waveform or gated region. Period is the reciprocal of frequency and is measured in seconds.
H PHAse
This measures the phase difference (amount of time a waveform leads
or lags the reference waveform) between two waveforms. The measurement is made between the middle reference points of the two waveforms and is expressed in degrees, where 360° represents one waveform cycle.
H PK2Pk
This peak--to--peak amplitude measurement finds the absolute difference between the maximum and minimum amplitude in the entire
waveform or gated region.
When histogram is selected with the MEASUrement:METHod command, the PK2Pk measurement measures the histogram’s peak to
peak difference.
H PKPKJitter
This measures the variance (minimum and maximum values) in the
time locations of the cross point.
H PKPKNoise
This measures the peak--to--peak noise on a waveform at the mid reference level.
H POVershoot
The positive overshoot amplitude measurement finds the positive
overshoot value over the entire waveform or gated region.
Positive Overshoot = (Maximum – High) / Amplitude * 100%
H PTOT
This measures the top value used in extinction ratio measurements.
H PWIdth
The positive width is the distance (time) between the middle reference
(default = 50%) amplitude points of a positive pulse. The measurement is made on the first pulse in the waveform or gated region.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 583 --
H QFACtor
This measures the quality factor. The Q factor is a figure of merit for
an eye diagram, which indicates the vertical eye opening relative to
the noise at the low and high logic levels. It is the ratio of the eye size
to noise.
H RISe
This timing measurement finds the rise time of the waveform. The
rise time is the time it takes for the leading edge of the first pulse encountered to rise from a low reference value (default is 10%) to a high
reference value (default is 90%).
H RMS
This amplitude measurement finds the true Root Mean Square voltage
in the entire waveform or gated region.
H RMSJitter
This measures the variance in the time locations of the cross point.
The RMS jitter is defined as one standard deviation at the cross point.
H RMSNoise
This measures the Root Mean Square noise amplitude on a waveform
at the mid reference level.
H SIGMA1
This (histogram measurement) measures the percentage of points in
the histogram that are within one standard deviation of the histogram
mean.
H SIGMA2
This (histogram measurement) measures the percentage of points in
the histogram that are within two standard deviations of the histogram
mean.
H SIGMA3
This (histogram measurement) measures the percentage of points in
the histogram that are within three standard deviations of the histogram mean.
H SIXSigmajit
This (histogram measurement) is six * RMSJitter.
H SNRatio
This measures the signal--to--noise ratio. The signal--to--noise ratio is
the amplitude of a noise rejection band centered on the mid level.
H STDdev
This measures the standard deviation (Root Mean Square (RMS)
deviation) of all acquired points within or on the histogram box.
H UNDEFINED
This is the default measurement type, which indicates that no measurement type is specified. Once a measurement type is chosen, it can
be cleared using this argument.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 584 --
H WAVEFORMS
The waveform count (histogram measurement) measures the number
of waveforms used to calculate the histogram.
Example 1
MEASUrement:MEAS2:TYPe FREQuency
This command defines measurement 2 as a measurement of the frequency of a waveform.
Example 2
MEASUrement:MEAS1:TYPe?
This query might return
:MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:TYPE RMS
indicating that measurement 1 is defined to measure the RMS value of
a waveform.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 585 --
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:UNIts?
Description
This query--only command returns the units associated with the specified measurement. Measurements are specified by x, which ranges from
1 through 8.
Group
Measurement
Related Commands
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:TYPe
Syntax
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:UNIts?
Example
MEASUrement:MEAS1:UNIts?
This query might return
:MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:UNIts %
indicating units for measurement 1 are set to percent.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 586 --
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:VALue?
Description
This query--only command returns the value that has been calculated
for the measurement specified by <x>, which ranges from 1 through 8.
This command is equivalent to selecting Display Statistics from the
Measure menu and then choosing Value from the drop--down list to
display all measurement values on--screen.
Note: This is the displayed value in the onscreen display. If measurement statistics are enabled, a new value is calculated with every waveform. In addition, this value is updated about every 1/3 second. If you
are acquiring a long acquisition record, the instrument may take longer to update.
Group
Measurement
Related Commands
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:UNIts?, *ESR?, ALLEV?
Syntax
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:VALue?
Example
MEASUrement:MEAS1:VALue?
This query might return
:MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:VALue 2.8740E-06
If the measurement has an error or warning associated with it, then an
item is added to the error queue. The error can be checked for with the
*ESR? and ALLEV? commands.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 587 --
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>?
Description
This query--only command returns all measurement parameters for the
displayed measurement specified by x, which can range from 1 through
8. This query command is equivalent to selecting Measurement Setup
from the Measure menu and viewing the Measurements table; then
choosing the Time tab, clicking the Delay button and viewing the Delay
Edge and Search Direction settings.
Group
Measurement
Syntax
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>?
Example
MEASUrement:MEAS1?
This query might return
:MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:STATE 0;TYPE UNDEFINED;UNITS ”V”;SOURCE1 CH1;SOURCE2
CH1;SOURCE1:SIGTYPE PULSE;:MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:SOURCE2:SIGTYPE PULSE;:MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:DELAY:EDGE1 RISE;EDGE2 RISE;
DIRECTION FORWARDS;:MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:REFLEVEL:METHOD PERCENT;ABSOLUTE:HIGH 0.0000;LOW
0.0000;MID1 0.0000;MID2 0.0000;:MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:REFLEVEL:PERCENT:HIGH
90.0000;LOW 10.0000;MID1 50.0000;MID2
50.0000;:MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:METHOD HISTOGRAM;NOISE HIGH.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 588 --
MEASUrement:METHod
Description
This command sets or queries the method used to calculate the 0% and
100% reference level. This command is equivalent to selecting Reference Levels from the Measure menu and then choosing the desired Determine Base, Top From setting.
Group
Measurement
Related Commands
MEASUrement:REFLevel:PERCent:HIGH,
MEASUrement:REFLevel:PERCent:LOW,
MEASUrement:REFLevel:PERCent:MID,
MEASUrement:REFLevel:PERCent:MID2
Syntax 1
MEASUrement:METHod {HIStogram|MEAN|MINMax)
Syntax 2
MEASUrement:METHod?
Arguments
H HIStogram
This sets the high and low reference levels to the most common values either above or below the mid point, depending on whether the
high reference point or the low reference point is being defined. Because the statistical approach ignores short--term aberrations, such as
overshoot or ringing, the histogram method is the best setting for examining pulses.
H MEAN
This sets the high and low reference levels to the mean values using
all values either above or below the midpoint, depending of whether it
is defining the high or low reference level. The selection is best used
for examining eye patterns.
H MINMax
This uses the highest and lowest values of the waveform record. This
selection is best for examining waveforms with no large, flat portions
of a common value, such as sine waves and triangle waves.
Example 1
MEASUrement:METHod HIStogram
This command specifies that the high and low reference levels are set
statistically.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 589 --
Example 2
MEASUrement:METHod?
This query might return
:MEASUREMENT:METHOD MINMAX
indicating that the reference levels are set to MIN and MAX.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 590 --
MEASUrement:NOISe
(TDS5000B Series option SM)
Description
This command sets or queries whether the noise measurement is made
on the high or low level of the waveform. Sending this command is
equivalent to selecting Ref Levs > Eye > Top Level or Base Level in
the Comm tab of the Measurement Setup dialog box. The Eye section is
displayed only if you have an eye--pattern or optical measurement defined.
Group
Measurement
Syntax 1
MEASUrement:NOISe
{HIGH|LOW}
Syntax 2
MEASUrement:NOISe?
Arguments
H HIGH
This argument causes the measurement for noise to be taken at the
high level of the waveform.
H LOW
This argument causes the measurement for noise to be taken at the
low level of the waveform.
Example 1
MEASUrement:NOISe
HIGH
This command causes the noise measurement to be made at the high
level of the waveform.
Example 2
MEASUrement:NOISe?
This query might return
:MEASUREMENT:NOISE LOW
indicating that the noise measurement will be made at the low level of
the waveform.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 591 --
MEASUrement:REFLevel:ABSolute:HIGH
Description
This command sets or queries the high reference level, and is the upper
reference level when MEASUrement:REFLevel:METHod is set to Absolute. This command affects the results of rise and fall measurements
and is equivalent to selecting Reference Levels from the Measure
menu, and then entering the Absolute High Ref value.
Note: this command affects the associated reference level parameter
for all MEASurements:IMMed and the eight periodic measurements.
To change the parameter for individual measurements, use the MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:REFLevel commands.
Group
Measurement
Related Commands
MEASUrement:REFLevel:METHod, MEASUrement:IMMed:TYPe,
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:TYPe
Syntax 1
MEASUrement:REFLevel:ABSolute:HIGH <NR3>
Syntax 2
MEASUrement:REFLevel:ABSolute:HIGH?
Argument
H <NR3>
This is the high reference level, in volts. The default is 0.0 V.
Example 1
MEASUrement:REFLevel:ABSolute:HIGH 1.71
This command sets the high reference level to 1.71 V.
Example 2
MEASUrement:REFLevel:ABSolute:HIGH?
This query might return
:MEASUREMENT:REFLEVEL:ABSOLUTE:HIGH 1.7100E+00
indicating that the absolute high reference level is set to 1.71 V.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 592 --
MEASUrement:REFLevel:ABSolute:LOW
Description
This command sets or queries the low reference level, and is the lower
reference level when MEASUrement:REFLevel:METHod is set to Absolute. This command affects the results of rise and fall measurements
and is equivalent to selecting Reference Levels from the Measure
menu, and then entering the Absolute Low Ref value.
Note: this command affects the associated reference level parameter
for all MEASurements:IMMed and the eight periodic measurements.
To change the parameter for individual measurements, use the MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:REFLevel commands.
Group
Measurement
Related Commands
MEASUrement:REFLevel:METHod, MEASUrement:IMMed:TYPe,
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:TYPe
Syntax 1
MEASUrement:REFLevel:ABSolute:LOW <NR3>
Syntax 2
MEASUrement:REFLevel:ABSolute:LOW?
Argument
H <NR3>
This is the low reference level, in volts. The default is 0.0 V.
Example 1
MEASUrement:REFLevel:ABSolute:LOW 0.0 V.
This command sets the low reference level to 0.0 V.
Example 2
MEASUrement:REFLevel:ABSolute:LOW?
This query might return
:MEASUREMENT:REFLEVEL:ABSOLUTE:LOW 0.0000E+00
indicating that the absolute low reference level is set to 0.0 V.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 593 --
MEASUrement:REFLevel:ABSolute:MID[1]
Description
This command sets or queries the mid reference level, and is the 50%
reference level when MEASUrement:REFLevel:METHod is set to Absolute. This command affects the results of period, frequency, delay,
and all cyclic measurements and is equivalent to selecting Reference
Levels from the Measure menu, and then entering the Absolute Mid
Ref value.
Note: this command affects the associated reference level parameter
for all MEASurements:IMMed and the eight periodic measurements.
To change the parameter for individual measurements, use the MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:REFLevel commands.
Group
Measurement
Related Commands
MEASUrement:REFLevel:METHod
Syntax 1
MEASUrement:REFLevel:ABSolute:MID[1] <NR3>
Syntax 2
MEASUrement:REFLevel:ABSolute:MID[1]?
Argument
H <NR3>
This is the mid reference level, in volts. The default is 0.0 V.
Example 1
MEASUrement:REFLevel:ABSolute:MID[1] .71
This command sets the mid reference level to .71 V.
Example 2
MEASUrement:REFLevel:ABSolute:MID[1]?
This query might return
:MEASUREMENT:REFLEVEL:ABSOLUTE:MID 0.7100E+00
indicating that the absolute mid1 reference level is set to .71 V.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 594 --
MEASUrement:REFLevel:ABSolute:MID2
Description
This command sets or queries the mid reference level for the ”to” waveform when taking a delay measurement, and is the 50% reference
level when MEASUrement:REFLevel:METHod is set to Absolute. This
command affects the results of delay measurements and is equivalent to
selecting Reference Levels from the Measure menu, and then entering
the Absolute Mid2 Ref value.
Note: this command affects the associated reference level parameter
for all MEASurements:IMMed and the eight periodic measurements.
To change the parameter for individual measurements, use the MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:REFLevel commands.
Group
Measurement
Related Commands
MEASUrement:REFLevel:METHod
Syntax 1
MEASUrement:REFLevel:ABSolute:MID2 <NR3>
Syntax 2
MEASUrement:REFLevel:ABSolute:MID2?
Argument
H <NR3>
This is the mid reference level, in volts. The default is 0.0 V.
Example 1
MEASUrement:REFLevel:ABSolute:MID2 0.5
This command sets the mid reference level for the delay waveform to
0.5 V.
Example 2
MEASUrement:REFLevel:ABSolute:MID2?
This query might return
:MEASUREMENT:REFLEVEL:ABSOLUTE:MID2 0.5000E+00
indicating that the absolute mid2 reference level is set to 0.5 V.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 595 --
MEASUrement:REFLevel:METHod
Description
This command specifies or queries the reference level units used for
measurement calculations. This command is equivalent to selecting
Reference Levels from the Measure menu, and then choosing the desired reference level from the Units group box.
Note: this command affects the associated reference level parameter
for all MEASurements:IMMed and the eight periodic measurements.
To change the parameter for individual measurements, use the MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:REFLevel commands.
Group
Measurement
Syntax 1
MEASUrement:REFLevel:METHod {ABSolute|PERCent}
Syntax 2
MEASUrement:REFLevel:METHod?
Arguments
H ABSolute
This specifies that the reference levels are set explicitly using the
MEASUrement:REFLevel:ABSolute commands. This method is useful when precise values are required (for example, when designing to
published interface specifications, such as RS--232--C).
H PERCent
This specifies that the reference levels are calculated as a percent relative to HIGH and LOW. The percentages are defined using the MEASUrement:REFLevel:PERCent commands.
Example 1
MEASUrement:REFLevel:METHod ABSolute
This command specifies that explicit user--defined values are used for
the reference levels.
Example 2
MEASUrement:REFLevel:METHod?
This query might return
:MEASUREMENT:REFLEVEL:METHOD PERCENT
indicating that the reference level units used are calculated as a percent
relative to HIGH and LOW.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 596 --
MEASUrement:REFLevel:PERCent:HIGH
Description
This command sets or queries the percent (where 100% is equal to
HIGH) that is used to calculate the high reference level when MEASUrement:REFLevel:METHod is set to Percent. This command affects
the results of rise and fall measurements and is equivalent to selecting
Reference Levels from the Measure menu, and then entering the Percentage High Ref value.
Note: this command affects the associated reference level parameter
for all MEASurements:IMMed and the eight periodic measurements.
To change the parameter for individual measurements, use the MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:REFLevel commands.
Group
Measurement
Related Commands
MEASUrement:REFLevel:METHod, MEASUrement:IMMed:TYPe,
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:TYPe
Syntax 1
MEASUrement:REFLevel:PERCent:HIGH <NR3>
Syntax 2
MEASUrement:REFLevel:PERCent:HIGH?
Argument
H <NR3>
This is the high reference level, ranging from 0 to 100%. The default
high reference level is 90%.
Example 1
MEASUrement:REFLevel:PERCent:HIGH 95
This command sets the high reference level to 95% of HIGH.
Example 2
MEASUrement:REFLevel:PERCent:HIGH?
This query might return
:MEASUREMENT:REFLEVEL:PERCENT:HIGH 90
indicating that the percentage high reference level is set to 90% of
HIGH.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 597 --
MEASUrement:REFLevel:PERCent:LOW
Description
This command sets or queries the percent (where 100% is equal to
HIGH) that is used to calculate the low reference level when MEASUrement:REFLevel:METHod is set to Percent. This command affects
the results of rise and fall measurements and is equivalent to selecting
Reference Levels from the Measure menu, and then entering the Percentage Low Ref value.
Note: this command affects the associated reference level parameter
for all MEASurements:IMMed and the eight periodic measurements.
To change the parameter for individual measurements, use the MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:REFLevel commands.
Group
Measurement
Related Commands
MEASUrement:REFLevel:METHod, MEASUrement:IMMed:TYPe,
MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:TYPe
Syntax 1
MEASUrement:REFLevel:PERCent:LOW <NR3>
Syntax 2
MEASUrement:REFLevel:PERCent:LOW?
Argument
H <NR3>
This is the low reference level, ranging from 0 to 100%. The default
low reference level is 10%.
Example 1
MEASUrement:REFLevel:PERCent:LOW 15
This command sets the high reference level to 15% of HIGH.
Example 2
MEASUrement:REFLevel:PERCent:LOW?
This query might return
:MEASUREMENT:REFLEVEL:PERCENT:LOW 10
indicating that the percentage high reference level is set to 10% of
HIGH.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 598 --
MEASUrement:REFLevel:PERCent:MID[1]
Description
This command sets or queries the percent (where 100% is equal to
HIGH) that is used to calculate the mid reference level when MEASUrement:REFLevel:METHod is set to Percent. This command affects
the results of period, frequency, delay, and all cyclic measurements and
is equivalent to selecting Reference Levels from the Measure menu
and, then entering the Percentage Mid Ref value.
Note: this command affects the associated reference level parameter
for all MEASurements:IMMed and the eight periodic measurements.
To change the parameter for individual measurements, use the MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:REFLevel commands.
Group
Measurement
Related Commands
MEASUrement:REFLevel:METHod
Syntax 1
MEASUrement:REFLevel:PERCent:MID[1] <NR3>
Syntax 2
MEASUrement:REFLevel:PERCent:MID[1]?
Argument
H <NR3>
This is the mid reference level, ranging from 0 to 100%. The default
mid reference level is 50%.
Example 1
MEASUrement:REFLevel:PERCent:MID[1] 60
This command sets the mid reference level to 60% of HIGH.
Example 2
MEASUrement:REFLevel:PERCent:MID[1]?
This query might return
:MEASUREMENT:REFLEVEL:PERCENT:MID 65
indicating that the percentage mid reference level is set to 65% of
HIGH.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 599 --
MEASUrement:REFLevel:PERCent:MID2
Description
This command sets or queries the percent (where 100% is equal to
HIGH) that is used to calculate the mid reference level for the second
waveform specified when MEASUrement:REFLevel:METHod is set to
Percent. This command affects the results of delay measurements and is
equivalent to selecting Reference Levels from the Measure menu, and
then entering the Percentage Mid2 Ref value.
Note: this command affects the associated reference level parameter
for all MEASurements:IMMed and the eight periodic measurements.
To change the parameter for individual measurements, use the MEASUrement:MEAS<x>:REFLevel commands.
Group
Measurement
Related Commands
MEASUrement:REFLevel:METHod
Syntax 1
MEASUrement:REFLevel:PERCent:MID2 <NR3>
Syntax 2
MEASUrement:REFLevel:PERCent:MID2?
Argument
H <NR3>
This is the mid reference level, ranging from 0 to 100%. The default
mid reference level is 50%.
Example 1
MEASUrement:REFLevel:PERCent:MID2 40
This command sets the mid2 reference level to 40% of HIGH.
Example 2
MEASUrement:REFLevel:PERCent:MID2?
This query might return
:MEASUREMENT:REFLEVEL:PERCENT:MID2 45
indicating that the percentage mid2 reference level is set to 45% of
HIGH.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 600 --
MEASUrement:REFLevel?
Description
This query--only command returns the current reference level parameters. This command is equivalent to selecting Reference Levels from
the Measure menu, and then viewing the current Reference Levels settings.
Group
Measurement
Syntax
MEASUrement:REFLevel?
Example
MEASUrement:REFLevel?
This query might return these reference level settings
:MEASUREMENT:REFLEVEL:METHOD ABSOLUTE;
ABSOLUTE:HIGH 0.0000E+00;LOW 0.0000E+00;
MID1 0.0000E+00;MID2 0.0000E+00;
:MEASUREMENT:REFLEVEL:PERCENT:HIGH
9.0000E+01;LOW 1.0000+01;MID1 5.0000E+01;
MID2 5.0000E+01
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 601 --
MEASUrement:STATIstics:COUNt
Description
This command (no query form) clears existing measurement statistics
from memory. This command is equivalent to selecting Measurement
Setup from the Measure menu, selecting Statistics, and clicking the
Reset button.
Group
Measurement
Related Commands
MEASUrement:STATIstics:MODe
Syntax
MEASUrement:STATIstics:COUNt {RESET}
Argument
H RESET
This clears existing measurement statistics from memory.
Example
MEASUrement:STATIstics:COUNt RESET
This command resets the count of the statistics measurement to zero,
clears the measurement statistics from memory, and restarts the calculation.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 602 --
MEASUrement:STATIstics:MODe
Description
This command controls the operation and display of management statistics. This command is equivalent to selecting Measurement Setup from
the Measure menu, clicking the Statistics button and then choosing the
desired Measurement Format.
Group
Measurement
Related Commands
MEASUrement:STATIstics:WEIghting
Syntax 1
MEASUrement:STATIstics:MODe {OFF|ALL|VALUEMean}
Syntax 2
MEASUrement:STATIstics:MODe?
Arguments
H OFF
This turns all measurements off. This is the default value.
H ALL
This turns on statistics and displays all statistics for each measurement.
H VALUEMean
This turns on statistics and displays the value and the mean (µ) of
each measurement.
Example 1
MEASUrement:STATIstics:MODe OFF
This command turns statistic measurements off.
Example 2
MEASUrement:STATIstics:MODe?
This query might return
:MEASUREMENT:STATISTICS:MODE ALL
indicating that measurement statistics are turned on and all statistics are
being displayed for each measurement.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 603 --
MEASUrement:STATIstics:WEIghting
Description
This command sets or queries the time constant for mean and standard
deviation statistical accumulations. This command is equivalent to selecting Measurement Setup from the Measure menu, clicking the Statistics button and entering the desired Weight n= value.
Group
Measurement
Related Commands
MEASUrement:STATIstics:MODE
Syntax 1
MEASUrement:STATIstics:WEIghting <NR1>
Syntax 2
MEASUrement:STATIstics:WEIghting?
Argument
H <NR1>
This is the time constant for the mean and standard deviation statistical accumulations.
Example 1
MEASUrement:STATIstics:WEIghting 4
This command sets statistical weighting to 4.
Example 2
MEASUrement:STATIstics:WEIghting?
This query might return
:MEASUREMENT:STATISTICS:WEIGHTING 4
indicating that measurement statistics weighting is currently set to 4.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 604 --
MEASUrement?
Description
This query--only command returns all measurement parameters in the
following order: MEAS1, MEAS2, MEAS3, MEAS4, MEAS5,
MEAS6, MEAS7, MEAS8, and IMMED.
Group
Measurement
Syntax
MEASUrement?
Example
MEASUrement?
This query might return
:MEASUREMENT:GATING OFF;IMMED:TYPE UNDEFINED;UNITS ”V”;SOURCE1 CH1;SOURCE2
CH1;SOURCE1:SIGTYPE PULSE;:MEASUREMENT:IMMED:SOURCE2:SIGTYPE PULSE;:MEASUREMENT:IMMED:DELAY:EDGE1 RISE;EDGE2 RISE;DIRECTION
FORWARDS;:MEASUREMENT:IMMED:REFLEVEL:METHOD
PERCENT;ABSOLUTE:HIGH 0.0000;LOW 0.0000;MID1
0.0000;MID2 0.0000;:MEASUREMENT:IMMED:REFLEVEL:PERCENT:HIGH 90.0000;LOW 10.0000;MID1
50.0000;MID2 50.0000;:MEASUREMENT:IMMED:METHOD
HISTOGRAM;NOISE HIGH;:MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:STATE
0;TYPE UNDEFINED;UNITS ”V”;SOURCE1 CH1;SOURCE2
CH1;SOURCE1:SIGTYPE PULSE;:MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:SOURCE2:SIGTYPE PULSE;:MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:DELAY:EDGE1 RISE;EDGE2 RISE;DIRECTION
FORWARDS;:MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:REFLEVEL:METHOD
PERCENT;ABSOLUTE:HIGH 0.0000;LOW 0.0000;MID1
0.0000;MID2 0.0000;:MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:REFLEVEL:PERCENT:HIGH 90.0000;LOW 10.0000;MID1
50.0000;MID2 50.0000;:MEASUREMENT:MEAS1:METHOD
HISTOGRAM;NOISE HIGH;:MEASUREMENT:MEAS2:STATE
0;TYPE UNDEFINED;UNITS ”V”;SOURCE1 CH1;SOURCE2
CH1;SOURCE1:SIGTYPE PULSE;:MEASUREMENT:MEAS2:SOURCE2:SIGTYPE PULSE;:MEASUREMENT:MEAS2:DELAY:EDGE1 RISE;EDGE2 RISE;DIRECTION...
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 605 --
NEWpass
Description
This command (no query form) changes the password that enables access to password protected data. The PASSWord command must be
successfully executed before using this command or an execution error
will be generated.
Group
Miscellaneous
Related Commands
PASSWord, *PUD
Syntax
NEWpass <QString>
Argument
H <Qstring>
This is the new password, which can contain up to 10 characters.
Example
NEWpass ”mypassword”
This command creates a new password (mypassword) for accessing
your protected data.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 606 --
PASSWord
Description
This command (no query form) enables the *PUD and NEWpass set
commands. Sending PASSWord without any arguments disables these
same commands. Once the password is successfully entered, the *PUD
and NEWpass commands are enabled until the instrument is powered
off, or until the FACtory command, the PASSWord command with no
arguments, or the *RST command is issued.
To change the password, you must first enter the valid password with
the PASSWord command and then change to your new password with
the NEWpass command. Remember that the password is case sensitive.
Group
Miscellaneous
Related Commands
NEWpass, *PUD
Syntax
PASSWord <QString>
Argument
H <QString>
This is the password, which can contain up to 10 characters. The factory default password is ”XYZZY” and is always valid.
Example 1
PASSWord ”XYZZY”
This command enables the *PUD and NEWPass set commands.
Example 2
PASSWord
This command disables the *PUD and NEWPass set commands. You
can still use the query version of *PUD.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 607 --
RECAll:MASK
Description
This command (no query form) recalls a stored mask as the User mask.
Group
Mask
Related Commands
SAVe:MASK
Syntax
RECAll:MASK <Qstring>
Arguments
H <Qstring>
Is a quoted string that defines the file name and path from where the
mask will be recalled. Input the file path using the form
<drive>/<dir>/<filename>. <drive> and one or more <dir>s are optional. If you do not specify them, the instrument will read the mask from
the default directory. <filename> stands for a filename of up to 128
characters (use of wildcard characters in filenames is not supported).
Filename extensions are not required but are highly recommended.
The file is stored in ASCII format and is user--editable.
Example
RECAll:MASK ”TEST”
This command recalls the mask stored in the file named TEST as the
User mask.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 608 --
RECAll:SETUp
Description
This command (no query form) returns stored or factory settings to the
instrument from a copy of the settings stored in memory. If factory is
referenced (by specifying ’0’), the factory default values will be restored. This command is equivalent to *RCL and performs the same
function as selecting Recall from the File menu, and then choosing the
Setup button.
Group
Save and Recall
Related Commands
FACtory, *RCL , *RST, *SAV, SAVe:SETUp
Syntax
RECAll:SETUp {FACtory|<NR1>|<file path>}
Arguments
H FACtory
This restores the factory setup.
H <NR1>
This specifies a setup storage location to restore. Setup storage location values range from 0 through 10; using an out of range value
causes an error (222, ”Data out of range”).
H <file path>
The instrument will recall the setup from the <file path> location.
<file path> is a quoted string that defines the file name and path. Input
the file path using the form <drive>:<dir>/<filename>.<drive> and
one or more <dir>s are optional. If you do not specify them, the instrument will read the file from the default directory (C:\TekScope\setups). <filename> stands for a filename of up to 128 characters (use of wildcard characters in filenames is not supported).
Filename extensions are not required, but highly recommended.
Example 1
RECAll:SETUp FACtory
This command recalls (and makes current) the instrument setup to its
factory defaults.
Example 2
RECAll:SETUp 2
This command recalls the instrument setup from setup storage location 2.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 609 --
Example 3
RECAll:SETUp ”TEK00000.SET”
This command recalls the setup from the file TEK00000.SET in the
default directory for setups (C:\TekScope\setups).
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 610 --
RECAll:WAVEform
Description
This command (no query form) recalls a stored waveform to a reference location. This command is equivalent to selecting Recall from the
File menu, and then pressing the Waveform button.
Group
Save and Recall
Related Commands
DELEte:WAVEform, SAVe_WAVEform
Syntax
RECAll:WAVEform {<file path>,REF<x>}
Arguments
H REF<x>
The instrument will recall the waveform from this location in internal
reference memory. Reference memory location values range from 1
through 4.
H <file path>
The instrument will recall the setup from the <file path> location:
<file path> is a quoted string that defines the file name and path. Input
the file path using the form <drive>:<dir>/<filename>.<drive> and
one or more <dir>s are optional. If you do not specify them, the instrument will read the waveform from the default directory (C:\TekScope|Waveforms). <filename> stands for a filename of up to 128
characters (use of wildcard characters in filenames is not supported).
Filename extensions are not required but are highly recommended.
Example
RECAll:WAVEform ”TEK00000.WFM”,REF1
This command recalls the waveform stored in the file named
TEK00000.WFM from the default directory for waveforms (C:\TekScope\Waveforms) to the reference location 1.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 611 --
REF<x>:LABel?
Description
This query--only command returns a branch query containing the waveform label name and the coordinates at which the label (attached to the
displayed waveform of the specified reference) is displayed. The reference waveform is specified by x. The value of x can range from 1
through 4 for four--channel instruments or 1 through 2 for two--channel
instruments. This command is equivalent to selecting Reference Waveforms from the File menu and then choosing Label from the drop--down
list.
Group
Vertical
Related Commands
REF<x>:LABel:NAMe?, REF<x>:LABel:XPOS?,
REF<x>:LABel:YPOS?
Syntax
REF<x>:LABel?
Argument
None
Example
REF1:LABel?
This query might return
:REF1:LABel:NAMe ”Myname”;:XPOS-200;:YPOS 50.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 612 --
REF<x>:LABel:NAMe
Description
This command sets or queries the label of the designated waveform.
The reference waveform is specified by x. The value of x can range
from 1 through 4 for four--channel instruments or 1 through 2 for two-channel instruments. This command is equivalent to selecting Reference Waveforms from the File menu, choosing Label from the drop-down list, selecting the tab associated with the reference for which you
want to create a label, and entering a label in the Label box.
Group
Vertical
Related Commands
REF<x>:LABel
Syntax 1
REF<x>:LABel:NAMe <String>
Syntax 2
REF<x>:LABel:NAMe?
Argument
H <String>
This is the character string that will be used for the reference waveform label name.
Example 1
REF3:LABel:NAMe?
This query might return
:REF3:LABEL:NAME ”Signal2”
indicating that the label name for Reference 3 is currently set to ”Signal2”.
Example 2
REF4:LABel:NAMe ”My Reference”
This command sets the label name of Reference 4 to ”My Reference”.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 613 --
REF<x>:LABel:XPOS
Description
This command sets or queries the X screen offset at which the label
(attached to the displayed waveform of the specified reference) is displayed, relative to the left edge of the screen The reference waveform is
specified by x. The value of x can range from 1 through 4 for four-channel instruments or 1 through 2 for two--channel instruments. This
command is equivalent to selecting Reference Waveforms from the File
menu, choosing Label from the drop--down list, selecting the tab associated with the reference for which you want to position a label, and entering a value in the X Position box.
Group
Vertical
Related Commands
REF<x>:LABel
Syntax 1
REF<x>:LABel:XPOS <NR1>
Syntax 2
REF<x>:LABel:XPOS?
Argument
H <NR1>
This is the location (in pixels) where the waveform label for the selected reference is displayed, relative to the left edge of the screen.
Arguments should be integers ranging from 0 through 500.
Example 1
REF4:LABel:XPOS 10
This command moves the waveform label for the REF3 waveform, so
that it begins 10 pixels to the right of the left edge of the screen.
Example 2
REF2:LABel:XPOS?
This query might return
:REF2:LABEL:XPOS 150
indicating that the x--axis for the REF 2 waveform is currently 150 pixels to the right of the left edge of the screen.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 614 --
REF<x>:LABel:YPOS
Description
This command sets or queries the Y screen offset at which the label
(attached to the displayed waveform of the specified reference) is displayed, relative to the top edge of the screen. The reference waveform
is specified by x. The value of x can range from 1 through 4 for four-channel instruments or 1 through 2 for two--channel instruments. This
command is equivalent to selecting Reference Waveforms from the File
menu, choosing Label from the drop--down list, selecting the tab associated with the reference for which you want to position a label, and entering a value in the Y Position box.
Group
Vertical
Related Commands
REF<x>:LABel
Syntax 1
REF<x>:LABel:YPOS <NR1>
Syntax 2
REF<x>:LABel:YPOS?
Argument
H <NR1>
This is the location (in pixels) where the waveform label for the selected reference is displayed, relative to the top edge of the screen.
Arguments should be integers ranging from 0 to 385.
Example 1
REF3:LABel:YPOS -10
This command moves the waveform label for the REF 3 waveform to
just beneath (10 pixels) the top of the screen.
Example 2
REF2:LABel:YPOS?
This query might return
:REF2:LABEL:YPOS 0
indicating that the waveform label for the REF 2 waveform is currently
located just beneath the top of the screen.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 615 --
REF<x>:HORizontal:POSition
Description
This command sets or queries the horizontal display position of the reference waveform. The reference waveform is specified by x. The value
of x can range from 1 through 4 for four--channel instruments or 1
through 2 for two--channel instruments. This command is equivalent to
selecting Reference Waveforms from the File menu, choosing Reference Setup… from the drop--down list, selecting a reference waveform,
and then entering the horizontal position value using the multipurpose
knob.
Group
Vertical
Syntax 1
REF<x>:HORizontal:POSition <NR3>
Syntax 2
REF<x>:HORizontal:POSition?
Argument
H <NR3>
This argument specifies the horizontal position of the specified reference waveform in percentage of the waveform that is displayed to the
right of the center vertical graticule. The range of this argument is
from 0 through 100.
Example 1
REF2:HORizontal:POSition 0.0
This command positions the start of the Reference 2 waveform at the
center graticule.
Example 2
REF1:HORizontal:POSition?
This query might return
:REF1:HORIZONTAL:POSITION 50
indicating that the Reference 1 waveform is centered on the horizontal
graticule.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 616 --
REF<x>:VERTical:POSition
Description
This command sets or queries the vertical position of a reference waveform The reference waveform is specified by x. The value of x can
range from 1 through 4 for four--channel instruments or 1 through 2 for
two--channel instruments.
This command is equivalent to selecting Reference Waveforms from
the File menu, choosing Reference Setup… from the drop--down list,
selecting a reference waveform, and then entering the Position value
using the multipurpose knob.
Increasing the position value of a waveform causes the waveform to
move up, and decreasing the position value causes the waveform to
move down. Position adjusts only the display position of a waveform.
The position value determines the vertical graticule coordinate at which
signal values are displayed. For example, if the position for Reference 3
is set to 2.0, the signal represented by that reference will be displayed at
2.0 divisions above the center of the screen.
Note: References are static. All position and scale changes are applied
in a post--processing mode.
Group
Vertical
Related Commands
CH<x>:POSition, MATH<x>:POSition
Syntax 1
REF<x>:VERTical:POSition <NR3>
Syntax 2
REF<x>:VERTical:POSition?
Argument
H <NR3>
This is the desired position, in divisions from the center horizontal
graticule. The range is from --5 to 5 divisions.
Example 1
REF2:VERTical:POSition 1.3E+00
This command positions the Reference 2 input signal 1.3 divisions
above the center horizontal graticule.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 617 --
Example 2
REF1:VERTical:POSition?
This query might return
:REF1:VERTICAL:POSITION -1.3000E+00
indicating that the current position of Reference 1 is 1.3 divisions below the center horizontal graticule.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 618 --
REF<x>:VERTical:SCAle
Description
This command sets or queries the vertical scale of a reference waveform. The reference waveform is specified by x. The value of x can
range from 1 through 4 for four--channel instruments or 1 through 2 for
two--channel instruments. This command is equivalent to selecting Reference Waveforms from the File menu, choosing Reference Setup…
from the drop--down list, selecting a reference waveform, and then entering the Scale value using the multipurpose knob.
Each waveform has a vertical scale parameter. For a signal with
constant amplitude, increasing the Scale causes the waveform to be
displayed smaller. Decreasing the scale causes the waveform to be displayed larger.
Scale affects all waveforms, but affects reference and math waveforms
differently from channel waveforms:
H
For reference and math waveforms, this setting controls the display
only, graphically scaling these waveforms and having no affect on
the acquisition hardware.
H
For channel waveforms, this setting controls the vertical size of the
acquisition window as well as the display scale. The range and
resolution of scale values depends on the probe attached and any
other external factors you have specified.
Group
Vertical
Related Commands
CH<x>:SCAle, MATH<x>:VERTical:SCAle
Syntax 1
REF<x>:VERTical:SCAle <NR3>
Syntax 2
REF<x>:VERTical:SCAle?
Argument
H <NR3>
This is the gain in user units per division.
Example 1
REF4:VERTical:SCAle 100E-03
This command sets the Reference 4 scale to 100 mV per division.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 619 --
Example 2
CH2:SCAle?
This query might return
:REF2:VERTICAL:SCALE 1.0000e+00
indicating that the current vertical scale setting for Reference 2 is 1 V
per division.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 620 --
REM
Description
This command (no query form) embeds a comment within GPIB programs as a means of internally documenting the programs. The instrument ignores these embedded comment lines.
Group
Miscellaneous
Related Commands
NEWpass, *PUD
Syntax
REM <QString>
Argument
H <QString>
This is a string that can contain a maximum of 80 characters.
Example
REM ”This is a comment”
The instrument ignores this comment string.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 621 --
ROSc:SOUrce
Description
This command sets or queries the source for the 10 MHz timebase reference. Depending on the command argument that you specify, you can
use an external reference or use the internal crystal oscillator as the
timebase reference.
This command is also useful for synchronizing multiple instruments.
Group
Miscellaneous
Related Commands
ROSc:STATE
Syntax 1
ROSc:SOUrce {INTERnal|EXTernal}
Syntax 2
ROSc:SOUrce?
Arguments
H INTERnal
This specifies the internal 10 MHz crystal oscillator as the timebase
reference.
H EXTernal
This specifies the user--supplied external signal as the timebase reference.
Example 1
ROSc:SOUrce INTERnal
This command specifies the internal 10 MHz crystal oscillator as the
timebase reference.
Example 2
ROSc:SOUrce?
This query might return
:ROSC:SOURCE INTERNAL
indicating that the 10 MHz crystal oscillator is being used as the timebase reference.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 622 --
ROSc:STATE?
Description
This query--only command returns the state of the 10 MHz timebase
reference. This command will return either LOCKED or UNLOCKED.
Group
Miscellaneous
Related Commands
ROSc:SOUrce
Syntax
ROSc:STATE?
Example
ROSc:STATE?
This query might return
:ROSC:STATE LOCKED
indicating that the state of the 10 MHz timebase reference is locked.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 623 --
SAVe:MASK
Description
This command (no query form) saves the User mask to a mass storage
file.
Group
Mask
Related Commands
RECAll:MASK
Syntax
SAVe:MASK <Qstring>
Arguments
H <Qstring>
This is the location to where the mask is stored. <file path> is a quoted
string that defines the file name and path. Input the file path using the
form <drive>/<dir>/<filename>. <drive> and one or more <dir>s are
optional.
The file is stored in ASCII format and is user--editable.
Example
SAVe:MASK ”TEST”
This command saves the User mask to the file TEST in the default directory and on the default drive.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 624 --
SAVe:SETUp
Description
This command (no query form) stores the state of the instrument to a
specified memory location. You can later use the *RCL command to
restore the instrument to this saved state. This is equivalent to selecting
Save As from the File menu, and then pressing the Setup button.
Group
Save and Recall
Related Commands
*RCL, RECAll:SETUp ,*SAV
Syntax
SAVe:SETUp {<file path>|<NR1>}
Arguments
H <file path>
This is the target location for storing the setup file.
<file path> is a quoted string that defines the file name and path. Input
the file path using the form <drive>:<dir>/<filename>. <drive> and
one or more <dir>s are optional. If you do not specify them, the instrument will store the file in the default directory (C:\TekScope\setups). <filename> stands for a filename of up to 128 characters. (Use
of wildcard characters in filenames is not supported.) Filename extensions are not required but are highly recommended. For setups, use
the extension ”.SET”.
H <NR1>
This specifies a location for saving the current front--panel setup. The
front--panel setup value ranges from 1 to 10. Using an out--of--range
value causes an execution error. Any settings that have been stored
previously at this location will be overwritten.
Example 1
SAVe:SETUp 5
This command saves the current instrument setup in memory location
5.
Example 2
SAVe:SETUp ”TEK00000.SET”
This command saves the current instrument setup in the file
TEK00000.SET in the default directory for setups (C:\TekScope\setups).
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 625 --
SAVe:WAVEform
Description
This command (no query form) saves a waveform to one of four reference memory locations or a file. This command is equivalent to selecting Reference Waveforms from the File menu and choosing Save Wfm
from the drop--down list.
Group
Save and Recall
Related Commands
DELEte:WAVEform, RECAll:WAVEform
Syntax
SAVe:WAVEform <wfm>,{<file path>|REF<x>}
Arguments
H <wfm>
This is the waveform that will be saved. Valid waveforms include
CH<x>, MATH<y>, and REF<x>.
H REF<x>
This specifies the location in internal reference memory to where the
waveform is stored.
H <file path>
This is the location to where the waveform is stored.
<file path> is a quoted string that defines the file name and path. Input
the file path using the form <drive>/<dir>/<filename>. <drive> and
one or more <dir>s are optional. If you do not specify them, the instrument will read the waveform from the default directory. <filename> stands for a filename of up to 125 characters, followed by a
period (”.”) and the three--character extension. Internal format waveforms use the .wfm extension for spreadsheet format files or the .dat
extension for MathCad format files. The instrument will generate an
error if you use any other extension for saving a waveform.
Example 1
SAVe:WAVEform MATH2,REF2
This command saves the Math2 waveform in reference memory location2.
Example 2
SAVe:WAVEform MATH1,”TEK0000.WFM”
This command saves the Math1 waveform to the file TEK00000.WFM in
the default directory and on the default drive.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 626 --
SAVe:WAVEform:FILEFormat
Description
This command specifies or returns the file format for saved waveforms.
Waveform header and timing information is included in the resulting
file of non--internal formats. The instrument saves DPO waveforms as a
500 x 200 matrix, with the first row corresponding to the most recently
acquired data. The values specified by DATa:STARt and DATa:STOP
determine the range of waveform data to output. In the event that
DATa:STOP value is greater than the current record length, the current
record length determines the last output value.
This command is equivalent to selecting Save As from the File menu,
clicking the Waveform button, and choosing the desired waveform file
format from the Save as type drop--down list.
Group
Save and Recall
Related Commands
CURVe , DATa, DATa:STARt, DATa:STOP, SAVe:WAVEform,
WFMInpre:NR_FR?, WFMInpre:NR_Pt, WFMOutpre:NR_FR?,
WFMOutpre:NR_Pt?
Syntax 1
SAVe:WAVEform:FILEFormat {INTERNal|MATHCad|MATLab|SPREADSHEETCsv|SPREADSHEETTxt}
Syntax 2
SAVe:WAVEform:FILEFormat?
Arguments
H INTERNal
This specifies that waveforms are saved in an internal format, using a
.wfm filename extension. These files can be recalled as reference waveforms. When this argument is specified, the settings specified via
the DATa:STARt and DATa:STOP commands have no meaning as the
entire waveform is saved.
H MATHCad
This specifies that waveforms are saved in MathCad format, using a
.dat filename extension. When saving in this format, waveform values
are delimited with new lines. MathCad format enables easy import of
waveform data into MathCad or MATLAB.
For FastAcq waveforms, data is imported as a matrix. For these formats, waveform header and timing information is saved in a separate
header file. MathCad format header files use a _hdr.dat extension.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 627 --
H MATLab
This specifies that waveforms are saved in Matlab format, using a .dat
filename extension. When saving in this format, waveform values are
delimited with new lines. MATLAB format enables easy import of
waveform data into MathCad or MATLAB.
For FastAcq waveforms, data is imported as a matrix. For these formats, waveform header and timing information is saved in a separate
header file. MATLAB format header files use a _hdr.dat extension.
H SPREADSHEETCsv
This specifies that waveform data is saved in a format that contains
comma delimited values. These waveform data files are named using
the .csv filename extension. Saving waveforms in CSV format enables spreadsheet programs to import the data.
H SPREADSHEETTxt
This specifies that waveform data is saved in a format that contains
tab delimited values. These waveform data files are named using the
.txt filename extension. Saving waveforms in this format enables
spreadsheet programs to import the data.
Example 1
SAVe:WAVEform:FILEFormat INTERNal
This command specifies that the internal file format is the format used
for saving waveforms.
Example 2
SAVe:WAVEform:FILEFormat?
This query might return
:SAVE:WAVEFORM:FILEFORMAT INTERNAL
indicating that waveforms are saved using the internal format.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 628 --
SELect:<wfm>
Description
This command turns on the display of a specified waveform and also
resets the acquisition. The query returns whether the channel is on or
off but does not indicate whether it is the selected waveform.
Group
Vertical
Syntax 1
SELect:<wfm> {ON|OFF|<NR1>}
Syntax 2
SELect:<wfm>?
Arguments
H ON
This turns on the display of the specified waveform. This waveform
also becomes the selected waveform.
H OFF
This turns off the display of the specified waveform.
H <NR1>
A 0 turns off the display of the specified waveform; any other value
turns on the display of the specified waveform.
Example
SELect:CH2 ON
This command turns the channel 2 waveform display on, and selects
channel 2.
SELect:REF1?
This query might return
:SELECT:REF1
indicating that REF1 is the selected waveform.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 629 --
SELect:CONTRol <wfm>
Description
This command sets or queries the waveform that is selected as the implied recipient of channel--related commands that support legacy--style
programs. The command form also performs the equivalent of a SELECT:<wfm> ON command. This command is equivalent to selecting
Measurement Setup from the Measure menu and either viewing or setting the Source waveform.
Group
Vertical
Syntax 1
SELect:CONTROl (CH<x>|MATH<x>|REF<x>)
Syntax 2
SELect:CONTROl?
Arguments
H CH<x>
This selects the specified channel waveform as the waveform that is
affected by the front--panel controls. The x variable can be expressed
as an integer ranging from 1 through 4 for 4--channel models and 1 to
2 for 2--channel models.
H MATH<x>
This selects the specified math waveform as the waveform that is affected by the front--panel controls. The x variable can be expressed as
an integer ranging from 1 through 4 for 4--channel models and 1 to 2
for 2--channel models.
H REF<x>
This selects the specified reference waveform as the waveform that is
affected by the front--panel controls. The x variable can be expressed
as an integer ranging from 1 through 4 for 4--channel models and 1 to
2 for 2--channel models.
Example 1
SELect:CONTROl CH2
This command resets acquisition displays on channel 2, and causes the
selected waveform to be the implied object of waveform commands.
Example 2
SELect:CONTROl?
This query might return
:SELECT:CONTROL MATH3
indicating that math 3 is the implied object of waveform commands.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 630 --
SELect?
Description
This query--only command returns the selected waveform that is affected by the front--panel controls and the display status (on or off) of
all waveforms. This query command is equivalent to selecting Measurement Setup from the Measure menu and viewing the Source waveform setting.
Group
Vertical
Syntax
SELect?
Example
SELect?
This query might return the waveform and status information as
:SELECT:CH1 1;CH2 0;CH3 0;CH4 0;MATH1 0;
MATH2 0;MATH3 0;MATH4 0;REF1 0;REF2 0;
REF3 0;REF4 0;CONTROL CH1
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 631 --
SETUp:NAMe
Description
This command allows you to create (or query) a name for your saved
setups. The default name for all user setups is ”User.” The default name
for factory setups is ”Factory.”
This command is equivalent to selecting Save As from the File menu,
pressing the Setup button, selecting the desired setup location, clicking
the Keyboard icon, and entering your setup name.
Group
Save and Recall
Related Commands
SAVe:SETUp
Syntax 1
SETUp:NAMe <NR1>,<QString>
Syntax 2
SETUp:NAMe? <NR1>
Arguments
H <NR1>
This specifies a location in which the setup label is stored. Location
values range from 1 through 10.
H <QString>
This is a string containing the setup label.
Example 1
SETUp:NAMe 1, ”My Setup”
This command changes the setup label for internal setup location 1 to
”My Setup”.
Example 2
SETUp:NAMe? 2
This query might return
:SETUP:NAME 2,”My Setup”
indicating that ”My Setup” is the setup label that you defined for internal setup location 2.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 632 --
SET?
Description
This query--only command returns the commands that list the instrument settings, except for configuration information for the calibration
values. You can use these commands to return the instrument to the
state it was in when you made the SET? query. This command is identical to the *LRN? command.
Group
Miscellaneous
Related Commands
HEADer, *LRN?, VERBose
Syntax
SET?
Note: The SET? query always returns command headers, regardless
of the setting of the HEADer command. This is because the returned
commands are intended to be sent back to the instrument as a command string. The VERBose command can still be used to specify
whether the returned headers should be abbreviated or full--length.
Example
SET?
This query might return the following response:
:ACQUIRE:STOPAFTER RUNSTOP;STATE 1;MODE SAMPLE;NUMENV 10;NUMAVG 16;REPET 1;:FASTACQ:STATE
0;:APPLICATION:GPKNOB1:ACTIVE 0;:APPLICATION:GPKNOB2:ACTIVE 0;:APPLICATION:WINDOW:HEIGHT 236;WIDTH 640;:APPLICATION:SCOPEAPP:STATE RUNNING;WINDOW
FULLSCREEN;:APPLICATION:EXTAPP:STATE NOTRUNNING;:AUXOUT:SOURCE ATRIGGER;EDGE FALLING;:CMDBATCH 1;:HEADER 1;:LOCK
NONE;:ROSC:SOURCE INTERNAL;:VERBOSE
1;:ALIAS:STATE 0;:DISPLAY:CLOCK 1;COLOR:PALETTE NORMAL;MATHCOLOR DEFAULT;REFCOLOR DEFAULT;:DISPLAY:FILTER SINX;FORMAT YT;GRATICULE
FULL;INTENSITY:WAVEFORM 75.0000;AUTOBRIGHT
1;SCREENSAVER 1;SCREENSAVERDELAY 28800;:DISPLAY:PERSISTENCE OFF;STYLE VECTORS;TRIGBAR
SHORT;TRIGT 1;VARPERSIST 500.0000E-3;:HARDCOPY:FILENAME ”untitled”;PORT FILE;:DIAG:LEVEL
SUBSYS;:SAVE:WAVEFORM:FILEFORMAT INTERNAL;:TRIGGER:A:MODE AUTO;TYPE EDGE;LEVEL
0.0000;HOLDOFF:BY DEFAULT;TIME
1.5000E-6;:TRIGGER:A:EDGE:SOURCE CH1;COUPLING
DC;SLOPE RISE;...
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 633 --
TEKSecure
Description
This command initializes both waveform and setup memories, overwriting any previously stored data.
TEKSecure deletes all four waveform reference memory slots on the
hard drive, if they exist, and puts all setups in the factory--initialized
state. External setups that are stored on the hard drive are not affected.
Group
Miscellaneous
Syntax
TEKSecure
Example
TEKSecure
This command initializes both waveform and setup memories.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 634 --
TEST
Description
This command (no query form) provides the ability to select and execute an item at any level of the test hierarchy (Test, Area or Subsystem). This command is equivalent to selecting Instrument Diagnostics
from the Utilities menu, choosing a test and then pressing Run.
Note: Turning off both DIAg:CONTROL:HALT and DIAg:CONTROL:LOOP before executing the TEST command is recommended.
Group
Diagnostics
Related Commands
TEST:RESults?, TEST:RESults:VERBose?, TEST:STOP
Syntax
TEST
Argument
H <NR3>
This sets the test ID, which ranges from 0 through 3 characters. If no
test ID is specified, all available diagnostics are executed.
Example 1
TEST ”1”
This command executes all Acquisition tests (Subsystem:Acquisition).
Example 2
TEST ”11”
This command executes all Acquisition Memory tests (Subsystem:Acquisition, Area:Memory)
Example 3
TEST ”113”
This command executes a specific Acquisition Memory test (Subsystem:Acquisition, Area:Memory, Test:Address Lines).
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 635 --
TEST:RESults?
Description
This query--only command returns an abbreviated status about the results of the last TEST execution. This command is equivalent to selecting Instrument Diagnostics from the Utilities menu and then reviewing
the Diagnostic Status.
Group
Diagnostics
Related Commands
TEST, TEST:RESults:VERBose?
Syntax
TEST:RESults?
Example 1
TEST:RESults?
This query might return
:TEST:RESULTS ”135”
indicating the specific failure code of the first test failure.
Example 2
TEST:RESults?
This query might return
:TEST:RESULTS ”PASS”
indicating that the previously executed test passed.
Example 3
TEST:RESults?
This query might return
:TEST:RESULTS ”*****”
indicating that the test was not run.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 636 --
TEST:RESults:VERBose?
Description
This query--only command returns a more explanatory message about
the results of the last TEST execution than the TEST:RESults query.
This command is equivalent to selecting Instrument Diagnostics from
the Utilities menu and then clicking the Error Log button.
Group
Diagnostics
Related Commands
TEST, TEST:RESults?
Syntax
TEST:RESults:VERBose?
Example
TEST:RESults:VERBose?
This query might return
:TEST:RESULTS:VERBOSE DIAG ABORTED, ERROR 15
in A2D-Dmux 1 interconnects”.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 637 --
TEST:STOP
Description
This command (no query form) causes test (or diagnostics) execution to
terminate at the end of the next low--level test. This command is equivalent to selecting Instrument Diagnostics from the Utilities menu and
then clicking Abort.
Group
Diagnostics
Related Commands
DIAg:STOP
Syntax
TEST:STOP
Example
TEST:STOP
This command terminates test (or diagnostics) execution at the end of
the next low--level test.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 638 --
TIME
Description
This command sets or queries the time that the instrument displays.
This command is equivalent to selecting Set Time & Date from the Utilities menu and then setting the fields in the Time group box.
Group
Miscellaneous
Related Commands
DATE
Syntax 1
TIME <Qstring>
Syntax 2
TIME?
Argument
H <QString>
This is a time in the form ”hh:mm:ss” where hh refers to a two--digit
hour number, mm refers to a two--digit minute number from 01 to 60,
and ss refers to a two--digit second number from 01 to 60.
Example 1
TIME ”14:00:00”
This command sets the time to exactly 2:00 p.m.
Example 2
TIME?
This query might return
:TIME ”14:05:17
indicating the current time is set to 2:05 p.m. and 17 seconds.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 639 --
TRIGger
Description
This command forces a trigger event to occur. The query returns the
current trigger parameters for the instrument.
Group
Trigger
Syntax 1
TRIGger FORCe
Syntax 2
TRIGger?
Argument
H FORCe
This creates a trigger event. If TRIGger:STATE is set to READy, the
acquisition will complete. Otherwise, this command will be ignored.
This is equivalent to selecting A Event (Main) Trigger Setup from the
Trig menu and then clicking Force Trigger.
Example 1
TRIGger FORCe
This command forces a trigger event to occur.
Example 2
TRIGger?
This query might return these trigger parameters:
:TRIGGER:A:MODE AUTO;TYPE EDGE;LEVEL
0.0000;HOLDOFF:BY DEFAULT;TIME
1.5000E-6;:TRIGGER:A:EDGE:SOURCE CH1;COUPLING
DC;SLOPE RISE;:TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:CLASS PATTERN;FUNCTION AND;THRESHOLD:CH1 1.2000;CH2
1.2000;CH3 1.2000;CH4 1.2000;:TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:INPUT:CH1 HIGH;CH2 X;CH3 X;:TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:PATTERN:INPUT:CH4 X;:TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:PATTERN:WHEN TRUE;WHEN:LESSLIMIT
5.0000E-9;MORELIMIT 5.0000E-9;:TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:SETHOLD:CLOCK:EDGE RISE;THRESHOLD
1.2000;SOURCE CH2;:TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:SETHOLD:DATA:THRESHOLD 1.2000;SOURCE CH1;:TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:SETHOLD:HOLDTIME 2.0000E-9;SETTIME
3.0000E-9;:TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:STATE:INPUT:CH4
RISE;:TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:STATE:WHEN TRUE;:TRIGGER:A:PULSE:CLASS GLITCH;SOURCE
CH1;GLITCH:WIDTH 2.0000E-9;TRIGIF ACCEPT;PO-
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 640 --
LARITY POSITIVE;:TRIGGER:A:PULSE:WINDOW:TYPE
INSIDE;WHEN OCCURS;WIDTH 2.0000E-9;LOGIC:INPUT:CH1 HIGH;CH2 HIGH;CH3 HIGH;CH4 HIGH;:TRIGGER:A:PULSE:WINDOW:LOGIC:THRESHOLD:CH1
1.2000;CH2 1.2000;CH3 1.2000;CH4 1.2000;:TRIGGER:A:PULSE:WINDOW:THRESHOLD:HIGH 1.2000;LOW
800.0000E-3;:TRIGGER:A:PULSE:RUNT:LOGIC:INPUT:CH1 HIGH;CH2 HIGH;CH3 HIGH;CH4 HIGH;:TRIGGER:A:PULSE:RUNT:LOGIC:THRESHOLD:CH1
1.2000;CH2 1.2000;CH3 1.2000;CH4 1.2000;:TRIGGER:A:PULSE:RUNT:POLARITY POSITIVE;THRESHOLD:HIGH 1.2000;LOW 800.0000E-3;:TRIGGER:A:PULSE:RUNT:WHEN OCCURS;WIDTH
2.0000E-9;:TRIGGER:A:PULSE:TRANSITION:DELTATIME 2.0000E-9;POLARITY POSITIVE;THRESHOLD:HIGH 1.2000;LOW 800.0000E-3;:TRIGGER:A:PULSE:TRANSITION:WHEN
FASTERTHAN;:TRIGGER:A:PULSE:WIDTH:LOWLIMIT
2.0000E-9;HIGHLIMIT 2.0000E-9;WHEN WITHIN;POLARITY POSITIVE;:TRIGGER:A:PULSE:TIMEOUT:POLARITY STAYSHIGH;TIME 2.0000E-9;:TRIGGER:A:VIDEO:CUSTOM:FORMAT INTERLACED;SCAN
RATE1;:TRIGGER:A:VIDEO:FIELD ALLFIELDS;HOLDOFF:FIELD 0.0000;:TRIGGER:A:VIDEO:LINE 1;POLARITY NORMAL;SCAN RATE1;SOURCE CH1;STANDARD
NTSC;:TRIGGER:A:COMMUNICATION:STANDARD CUSTOM;CODE NRZ;BITRATE 1544000;AMI:PULSEFORM
PLUSONE;THRESHOLD:HIGH 0.0000;LOW
0.0000;:TRIGGER:A:COMMUNICATION:CLOCK:POLARITY
RISE;:TRIGGER:A:COMMUNICATION:CMI:PULSEFORM
PLUSONE;:TRIGGER:A:COMMUNICATION:SOURCE
CH1;SOURCE:TYPE DATA;:TRIGGER:B:STATE 0;TYPE
EDGE;LEVEL 0.0000;BY EVENTS;EDGE:SOURCE
CH1;SLOPE RISE;COUPLING DC;:TRIGGER:B:TIME
16.0000E-9;EVENTS:COUNT 2
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 641 --
TRIGger:A
Description
This command sets the A trigger level automatically to 50% of the
range of the minimum and maximum values of the trigger input signal.
The query returns current A trigger parameters. The trigger level is the
voltage threshold through which the trigger source signal must pass to
generate a trigger event. This command is equivalent to pushing the
LEVEL knob on the front panel.
Group
Trigger
Related Commands
TRIGger:A:EDGE?, TRIGger:A:LOGIc?, TRIGger:A:PULSE?
Syntax 1
TRIGger:A SETLevel
Syntax 2
TRIGger:A?
Argument
H SETLevel
This sets the A trigger level to 50% of the range of the minimum and
maximum values of the trigger input signal.
Example 1
TRIGger:A SETLevel
This command sets the A trigger level to 50% of the range of the minimum and maximum values of the trigger input signal.
Example 2
TRIGger:A?
This query might return the following A trigger parameters:
:TRIGGER:A:MODE AUTO;TYPE EDGE;LEVEL
0.0000;HOLDOFF:BY DEFAULT;TIME
1.5000E-6;:TRIGGER:A:EDGE:SOURCE CH1;COUPLING
DC;SLOPE RISE;:TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:CLASS PATTERN;FUNCTION AND;THRESHOLD:CH1 1.2000;CH2
1.2000;CH3 1.2000;CH4 1.2000;:TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:INPUT:CH1 HIGH;CH2 X;CH3 X;:TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:PATTERN:INPUT:CH4 X;:TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:PATTERN:WHEN TRUE;WHEN:LESSLIMIT
5.0000E-9;MORELIMIT 5.0000E-9;:TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:SETHOLD:CLOCK:EDGE RISE;THRESHOLD
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 642 --
1.2000;SOURCE CH2;:TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:SETHOLD:DATA:THRESHOLD 1.2000;SOURCE CH1;:TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:SETHOLD:HOLDTIME 2.0000E-9;SETTIME
3.0000E-9;:TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:STATE:INPUT:CH4
RISE;:TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:STATE:WHEN TRUE;:TRIGGER:A:PULSE:CLASS GLITCH;SOURCE
CH1;GLITCH:WIDTH 2.0000E-9;TRIGIF ACCEPT;POLARITY POSITIVE;:TRIGGER:A:PULSE:WINDOW:TYPE
INSIDE;WHEN OCCURS;WIDTH 2.0000E-9;LOGIC:INPUT:CH1 HIGH;CH2 HIGH;CH3 HIGH;CH4 HIGH;:TRIGGER:A:PULSE:WINDOW:LOGIC:THRESHOLD:CH1
1.2000;CH2 1.2000;CH3 1.2000;CH4 1.2000;:TRIGGER:A:PULSE:WINDOW:THRESHOLD:HIGH 1.2000;LOW
800.0000E-3;:TRIGGER:A:PULSE:RUNT:LOGIC:INPUT:CH1 HIGH;CH2 HIGH;CH3 HIGH;CH4 HIGH;:TRIGGER:A:PULSE:RUNT:LOGIC:THRESHOLD:CH1
1.2000;CH2 1.2000;CH3 1.2000;CH4 1.2000;:TRIGGER:A:PULSE:RUNT:POLARITY POSITIVE;THRESHOLD:HIGH 1.2000;LOW 800.0000E-3;:TRIGGER:A:PULSE:RUNT:WHEN OCCURS;WIDTH
2.0000E-9;:TRIGGER:A:PULSE:TRANSITION:DELTATIME 2.0000E-9;POLARITY POSITIVE;THRESHOLD:HIGH 1.2000;LOW 800.0000E-3;:TRIGGER:A:PULSE:TRANSITION:WHEN
FASTERTHAN;:TRIGGER:A:PULSE:WIDTH:LOWLIMIT
2.0000E-9;HIGHLIMIT 2.0000E-9;WHEN WITHIN;POLARITY POSITIVE;:TRIGGER:A:PULSE:TIMEOUT:POLARITY STAYSHIGH;TIME 2.0000E-9;:TRIGGER:A:VIDEO:CUSTOM:FORMAT INTERLACED;SCAN
RATE1;:TRIGGER:A:VIDEO:FIELD ALLFIELDS;HOLDOFF:FIELD 0.0000;:TRIGGER:A:VIDEO:LINE 1;POLARITY NORMAL;SCAN RATE1;SOURCE CH1;STANDARD
NTSC;:TRIGGER:A:COMMUNICATION:STANDARD CUSTOM;CODE NRZ;BITRATE 1544000;AMI:PULSEFORM
PLUSONE;THRESHOLD:HIGH 0.0000;LOW
0.0000;:TRIGGER:A:COMMUNICATION:CLOCK:POLARITY
RISE;:TRIGGER:A:COMMUNICATION:CMI:PULSEFORM
PLUSONE;:TRIGGER:A:COMMUNICATION:SOURCE
CH1;SOURCE:TYPE DATA
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 643 --
TRIGger:A:COMMunication:AMI...PULSEForm
(Option SM Only)
Description
This entry covers five separate commands, one each for AMI and AMI
subtypes. The commands set or query the AMI pulse form to one of
three possibilities.
Group
Trigger
Syntax 1
TRIGger:A:COMMunication:(AMI|HDB3|B3ZS|
B6ZS|B8ZS):PULSEForm {PLUSOne|MINUSOne|
EYEDiagram}
Syntax 2
TRIGger:A:COMMunication:(AMI|HDB3|B3ZS|B6ZS|B8ZS):PULSEForm?
Arguments
H PLUSOne
Corresponds to the Isolated +1 on the front panel menu.
H MINUSOne
Corresponds to the Isolated --1 on the front panel menu.
H EYEDiagram
Positions the trigger point off screen in order to display the eye.
Example 1
TRIGger:A:COMMunication:AMI:PULSEForm PLUSOne
This commands sets the pulse form to PLUSONE.
Example 2
TRIGger:A:COMMunication:AMI:PULSEForm?
This query might return
:TRIGGER:A:COMMUNICATION:AMI:PULSEFORM PLUSONE
indicating that the AMI PULSFORM is set to PLUSONE.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 644 --
TRIGger:A:COMMunication:AMI...THReshold:HIGH
(Option SM Only)
Description
This command sets or queries the threshold high level.
Group
Trigger
Syntax 1
TRIGger:A:COMMunication:(AMI|HDB3|B3ZS|B6ZS|B8ZS):THReshold:HIGH
<NR3>
Syntax 2
TRIGger:A:COMMunication:(AMI|HDB3|B3ZS|
B6ZS|B8ZS):THReshold:HIGH?
Arguments
H <NR3>
The high threshold parameter expressed in volts.
Example 1
TRIGger:A:COMMUNICATION:AMI:THRESHOLD:HIGH
2.8E-2
This command sets the threshold high level to 2.8E--2.
Example 2
TRIGger:A:COMMUNICATION:AMI:THRESHOLD:HIGH?
This query might return
TRIGGER:A:COMMUNICATION:AMI:THRESHOLD:HIGH
2.8E-2
indicating the threshold high level in volts.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 645 --
TRIGger:A:COMMunication:AMI...THReshold:LOW
(Option SM Only)
Description
This command sets or queries the threshold low level.
Group
Trigger
Syntax 1
TRIGger:A:COMMunication:(AMI|HDB3|B3ZS|B6ZS|B8ZS):THReshold:LOW
<NR3>
Syntax 2
TRIGger:A:COMMunication:(AMI|HDB3|B3ZS|
B6ZS|B8ZS):THReshold:LOW?
Arguments
H <NR3>
The high threshold parameter expressed in volts.
Example 1
TRIGger:A:COMMUNICATION:AMI:THRESHOLD:LOW
2.8E-2
This command sets the threshold low level to 2.8E--2.
Example 2
TRIGger:A:COMMUNICATION:AMI:THRESHOLD:LOW?
This query might return
TRIGGER:A:COMMUNICATION:AMI:THRESHOLD:LOW
2.8E-2
indicating the threshold low level in volts.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 646 --
TRIGger:A:COMMunication:BITRate
(Option SM Only)
Description
This command sets or queries the bit rate.
Group
Trigger
Syntax 1
TRIGger:A:COMMunication:BITRate <NR3>
Syntax 2
TRIGger:A:COMMunication:BITRate?
Arguments
H <NR3>
A non--negative number greater than one and expressed as bits per
second.
Example 1
TRIGger:A:COMMunication:BITRate 1.544e6
This command sets the bit rate to 1.544e6 bits per second.
Example 2
TRIGger:A:COMMunication:BITRate?
This query might return
:TRIGGER:A:COMMUNICATION:BITRATE 1.544e6
indicating a bit rate of 1.544 Mb/s.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 647 --
TRIGger:A:COMMunication:CLOCk:POLarity
(Option SM Only)
Description
This command sets or queries the communication clock polarity
Group
Trigger
Syntax 1
TRIGger:A:COMMunication:CLOCk:POLarity
(RISe|FALL}
Syntax 2
TRIGger:A:COMMunication:CLOCk:POLarity?
Arguments
H RISe
Specifies to trigger on the rising or positive edge of a signal.
H FALL
Specifies to trigger on the falling or negative edge of a signal.
Example 1
TRIGger:A:COMMunication:CLOCk:POLarity RISE
This command sets RISE as the clock polarity.
Example 2
TRIGger:A:COMMunication:CLOCk:POLarity?
This query might return
:TRIGGER:A:COMMUNICATION:CLOCK:POLARITY RISE
indicating that the polarity is to trigger on the rising edge of the clock.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 648 --
TRIGger:A:COMMunication:CMI:PULSEForm
(Option SM Only)
Description
This command sets or queries the CMI pulse form.
Group
Trigger
Syntax 1
TRIGger:A:COMMunication:CMI:PULSEForm
(PLUSOne|MINUSOne|ZERO|EYEDiagram}
Syntax 2
TRIGger:A:COMMunication:CMI:PULSEForm?
Arguments
H PLUSOne
Triggers on a positive mark.
H MINUSOne
Triggers on a negative mark.
H ZERO
Triggers on the bit representing zero.
H EYEDiagram
Positions the trigger point off screen in order to display the eye.
Example 1
TRIGger:A:COMMunication:CMI:PULSEForm PLUSOne
This command sets triggering to occur on a positive mark.
Example 2
TRIGger:A:COMMunication:CMI:PULSEForm?
This query might return
:TRIGGER:A:COMMUNICATION:CMI:PULSEFORM PLUSONE
indicating that the pulse form is PLUSONE.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 649 --
TRIGger:A:COMMunication:CODe
(Option SM Only)
Description
This command sets or queries the signal code that the communications
trigger should expect on the incoming signal.
Group
Trigger
Syntax 1
TRIGger:A:COMMunication:CODe
{AMI|HDB3|B3ZS|B6ZS|B8ZS|CMI|NRZ|MLT3|MANChester}
Syntax 2
TRIGger:A:COMMunication:CODe?
Arguments
H AMI
H HDB3
H B3ZS
H B6ZS
H B8ZS
H CMI
H NRZ
H MLT3
H MANChester
Example 1
TRIGger:A:COMMunication:CODe AMI
This command selects AMI as the line code that the communications
trigger expects on the incoming signal.
Example 2
TRIGger:A:COMMunication:CODe?
This query might return
:TRIGGER:A:COMMUNICATION:CODE AMI
indicating that the code is AMI.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 650 --
TRIGger:A:COMMunication:SOUrce
(Option SM Only)
Description
This command sets or queries the source channel.
Group
Trigger
Syntax 1
TRIGger:A:COMMunication:SOUrce
{CH1|CH2|CH3|CH4}
Syntax 2
TRIGger:A:COMMunication:SOUrce?
Arguments
H CH1
This argument selects CH 1 as the source channel.
H CH2
This argument selects CH 2 as the source channel.
H CH3
This argument selects CH 3 as the source channel.
H CH4
This argument selects CH 4 as the source channel.
Example 1
TRIGger:A:COMM:SOURCE CH1
This command sets channel 1 as the source channel.
Example 2
TRIGger:A:COMMunication:SOUrce?
This query might return
:TRIGGER:A:COMMUNICATION:SOURCE CH1
indicating that the source is channel 1.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 651 --
TRIGger:A:COMMunication:SOUrce:TYPe
(Option SM Only)
Description
This command sets or queries the source type. This command works
only when the Eye Diagram pulseform is selected.
TRIGger:MAIN:COMMunication:SOUrce:TYPe works in an identical
fashion to this command and provides compatibility with previous Tektronix oscilloscopes.
Group
Trigger
Syntax 1
TRIGger:A:COMMunication:SOUrce:TYPe
{DATA|CLOCK}
Syntax 2
TRIGger:A:COMMunication:SOUrce:TYPe?
Arguments
H DATA
The oscilloscope triggers and shifts five unit intervals to form the expected eye pattern.
H CLOCK
The oscilloscope triggers but no shift occurs. The clock type causes
random triggers with respect to the data channel which must be one of
the other three channels.
Example 1
TRIGger:A:COMMunication:SOUrce:TYPe CLOCK
This command sets the source type to clock..
Example 2
TRIGger:A:COMMunication:SOUrce:TYPe?
This query might return
:TRIGGER:A:COMMUNICATION:SOURCE:TYPE DATA
indicating that the source type is data.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 652 --
TRIGger:A:COMMunication:STANdard
(Option SM Only)
Description
This command sets or queries the standard that identifies the code and
bit rate. The bit rate is used to compute the Unit Interval, which is the
inverse of the bit rate. The Unit Interval influences time skew in an Eye
Diagram, where you do post processing on AMI isolated pulses, and
pulse width settings if CMI.
Group
Trigger
Related Commands
MASK:STANdard
Syntax 1
TRIGger:A:COMMunication:STANdard
{ATAG1|ATAG2|ATAG3|DSOContra|
DSODoubleDSOSingle|DSOTiming|
DS1|DS1A|DS1C|DS2|DS2RATESymmetrical|
DS2RATECoax|RATE32Mbit|RATE97Mbit|
DS3|DS4NA|E1|E2|E3|E4|STS1|STS3|STM1E|
FC133|FC266|FC531|1063|FC2125|OC1|OC3|
OC12|OC48|OC48_FEC|STM1E|ENET100|ENET1250|
ENETXAUI|INF2_5G|FST|HST|FW1394BS400B
|FW1394BS1600B |Custom|RIO_500M|RIO_750M|
RIO_1G|RIO_1_5G|RIO_2G|RIO_SERIAL_1G|
RIO_SERIAL_2G|RIO_SERIAL_3G|SFI5_2|
RATE32Mbit|RATE97Mbit|SFI5_3|VSROC192|
TFI5_2|TFI5_3|PCIExpress}
Syntax 2
TRIGger:A:COMMunication:STANdard?
Arguments
The following table shows various standards and their corresponding
parameters.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 653 --
Communication Trigger Standards
Argu -ment
Code
Bit
Rate
Mask
Type
Models
ATAG1
NRZ
1.5
Gb/s
Serial
ATA
ATAG2
NRZ
3.0
Gb/s
Serial
ATA
ATAG3
NRZ
6.0
Gb/s
Serial
ATA
CLOCK
Coax
None
2.048
Mb/s
ITU --T
G.703
All
CLOCKSy
mmetrical
None
2.048
Mb?s
ITU --T
G.703
All
D1
NRZ
270
Mb/s
Vi deo
All
D2
NRZ
143.18
Mb/s
Video
All
AMI
B8ZS
AMI
HDB3
1.544
Mb/s
ANSI
T1.102
All
2.048
Mb/s
ANSI
T1.102
All
AMI
B8ZS
AMI
B6ZS
3.152
Mb/s
ANSI
T2.102
All
6.312
Mb/s
ANSI
T2.102
All
DS2RAT
ECoax
AMI
B8ZS
6.312
Mb/s
ITU --T
G.703
All
DS2RAT
ESymme
tical
AMI
B6ZS
6.312
Mb/s
ITU --T
G.703
All
DS3
AMI
B3ZS
44.736
Mb/s
ANSI
T1.102
All
DS4NA
CMI
139.3
Mb/s
ANSI
T1.102
All
DS0
Contra
DS0
Double
DS0
Single
DS0
Timing
DS1
DS1A
DS1C
DS2
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 654 --
E1
AMI
HDB3
2.048
Mb/s
ITU --T
G.703
All
E2
AMI
HDB3
8.448
Mb/s
ITU --T
G.703
All
E3
AMI
HDB3
34.368
Mb/s
ITU --T
G.703
All
E4
CMI
139.26
ITU --T
G.703
All
ENET100
MLT3
100
Mb/s
Ethernet
All
ENET1250
NRZ
1.25
Gb/s
Ethernet
ENETXAU
NRZ
3.125
Gb/s
Ethernet
FC133
NRZ
132.8
Mb/s
Fibre
Channel
All
FC266
NRZ
265.6
Mb/s
Fibre
Channel
All
FC531
NRZ
531.2
Mb/s
Fibre
Channel
TDS5104B
FC1063
NRZ
1.062.5
Gb/s
Fibre
Channel
FC2125
NRZ
2.125
Gb/s
Fibre
Channel
FC4250
NRZ
4.256
Gb/s
Fibre
Channel
FST
NRZ
12.0
Mb/s
USB
1.1/2.0
All
FW1394
BS400B
NRZ
491.5
Mb/s
IEEE139
4b
TDS5104B
FW1394
BS1600
B
NRZ
1.966
Gb/s
IEEE139
4b
HST
NRZ
480.0
Mb/s
USB
1.1/2.0
INF2_5G
NRZ
2.5
Gb/s
Infiniband
OC1
NRZ
51.84
Mb/s
SONET/
SDH
All
OC3
NRZ
155.52
Mb/s
SONET/
SDH
All
OC12
NRZ
622.08
Mb/s
SONET/
SDH
TDS5104B
OC48_F
EC
NRZ
2.666
Gb/s
PCIEXP
RESS
NRZ
2.5
Gb/s
OC48
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 655 --
TDS5104B
RATE32
Mbit
AMI
32.06
Mb/s
ITU--T
G.703
(10/98)
RATE97
Mbit
AMI
97.73
Mb/s
ITU--T
G.703
(10/98)
STM1E
CMI
155.52
Mb/s
ITU--T
G.703
(10/98)
All
STS1
AMI
B3ZS
51.84
Mb/s
ANSI
T1.102
All
STS3
CMI
155.52
Mb/s
ANSI T1.
All
VIDEO
270
NRZ
270
Mb/s
Video
All
VIDEO
360
NRZ
360
Mb/s
Video
TDS5104B
Custom
AMI
B3ZS
B6ZS
B8ZS
CMI
HDB3
MLT3
NRZ
1.544
Mb/s
All
RIO_500
M
NRZ
500
Mb/s
TDS5104B
RIO_750
M
NRZ
750
Mb/s
RIO_1G
NRZ
1 Gb/s
RIO_1_5
G
NRZ
1 Gb/s
RIO_2G
NRZ
2 Gb/s
RIO_SE
RIAL_1G
NRZ
1.25
Gb/s
RIO_SE
RIAL_2G
NRZ
2.5
Gb/s
RIO_SE
RIAL_3G
NRZ
3.125
Gb/s
SFI5_2
NRZ
2.488
Gb/s
SFI5_3
NRZ
3.125
Gb/s
VSROC
192
NRZ
1.2441
6 Gb/s
TFI5_2
NRZ
2.488
Gb/s
TFI5_3
NRZ
3.1104
Gb/s
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 656 --
Example 1
TRIGger:A:COMMUNICATION:SOURCE:STANDARD E4
This command sets the standard to E4.
Example 2
TRIGger:A:COMMUNICATION:SOURCE:STANDARD?
This query might return
TRIGGER:A:COMMUNICATION:SOURCE:STANDARD DS1
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 657 --
TRIGger:A:EDGE:COUPling
Description
This command sets or queries the type of coupling for the A edge trigger. This command is equivalent to selecting A Event (Main) Trigger
Setup from the Trig menu, selecting Edge Trigger, and choosing from
the Coupling drop--down list.
Group
Trigger
Related Commands
TRIGger:A:EDGE:SOUrce, TRIGger:A:EDGE:SLOpe
Syntax 1
TRIGger:A:EDGE:COUPling
{AC|DC|HFRej|LFRej|NOISErej}
Syntax 2
TRIGger:A:EDGE:COUPling?
Arguments
H AC
This selects AC trigger coupling, which passes the input signals above
60 Hz to the trigger circuitry.
H DC
This selects DC trigger coupling, which passes all input signals to the
trigger circuitry.
H HFRej
This coupling attenuates signals above 50 kHz before passing the signals to the trigger circuitry.
H LFRej
This coupling attenuates signals below 80 kHz before passing the signals to the trigger circuitry.
H NOISErej
This coupling provides stable triggering by increasing the trigger hysteresis. Increased hysteresis reduces the trigger sensitivity to noise but
may require greater trigger signal amplitude.
Example 1
TRIGger:A:EDGE:COUPling DC
This command sets the A edge trigger coupling to DC.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 658 --
Example 2
TRIGger:A:EDGE:COUPling?
This query might return
:TRIGGER:A:EDGE:COUPLING DC
indicating that the A edge trigger coupling is set to DC.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 659 --
TRIGger:A:EDGE:SLOpe
Description
This command sets or queries the slope for the A edge trigger. This
command is equivalent to selecting A Event (Main) Trigger Setup from
the Trig menu and then choosing the desired Slope.
Group
Trigger
Related Commands
TRIGger:A:EDGE:SOUrce, TRIGger:A:EDGE:COUPling
Syntax 1
TRIGger:A:EDGE:SLOpe {RISe|FALL}
Syntax 2
TRIGger:A:EDGE:SLOpe?
Arguments
H RISe
This specifies to trigger on the rising or positive edge of a signal.
H FALL
This specifies to trigger on the falling or negative edge of a signal.
Example 1
TRIGger:A:EDGE:SLOpe?
This query might return
:TRIGGER:A:EDGE:SLOPE FALL
indicating that the A edge trigger slope is negative.
Example 2
TRIGger:A:EDGE:SLOpe RISe
This command sets the A edge trigger slope to positive, which triggers
on the rising edge of the signal.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 660 --
TRIGger:A:EDGE:SOUrce
Description
This command sets or queries the source for the A edge trigger. This
command is equivalent to selecting A Event (Main) Trigger Setup from
the Trig menu and then choosing from the Source drop--down list.
Group
Trigger
Related Commands
TRIGger:A:EDGE:SLOpe, TRIGger:A:EDGE:COUPling
Syntax 1
TRIGger:A:EDGE:SOUrce {AUXiliary|CH<x>|LINE}
Syntax 2
TRIGger:A:EDGE:SOUrce?
Arguments
H AUXiliary
This specifies an external trigger using the Auxiliary Trigger Input
connector located on the rear panel of the instrument.
H CH<x>
This specifies one input channel as the A edge trigger source.
H LINE
This specifies AC line voltage.
Example 1
TRIGger:A:EDGE:SOUrce?
This query might return
:TRIGGER:A:EDGE:SOURCE CH1
indicating that channel 1 is the A edge trigger source.
Example 2
TRIGger:A:EDGE:SOUrce CH1
This command sets channel 1 as the A edge trigger source.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 661 --
TRIGger:A:EDGE?
Description
This query--only command returns the trigger source, coupling, and
slope for the A edge trigger. This command is equivalent to selecting
Edge Setup from the Trig menu and viewing the current setups.
Group
Trigger
Related Commands
TRIGger:A:PULse, TRIGger:A:LOGIc
Syntax
TRIGger:A:EDGE?
Example
TRIGger:A:EDGE?
This query might return
:TRIGGER:A:EDGE:SOURCE CH1;COUPLING DC;
SLOPE RISE
indicating the trigger source, coupling, and slope for the A edge trigger.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 662 --
TRIGger:A:HOLDoff:ACTUal?
Description
This query--only command returns the holdoff time actually used (expressed in seconds) by the A trigger. This command is equivalent to
selecting Holdoff from the Trig menu and then viewing the current Trig
Holdoff value.
Group
Trigger
Related Commands
TRIGger:A:HOLDoff?, TRIGger:A:HOLDoff:BY,
TRIGger:A:HOLDoff:TIMe
Syntax
TRIGger:A:HOLDoff:ACTUal?
Example
TRIGger:A:HOLDoff:ACTUal?
This query might return
:TRIGGER:A:HOLDOFF:ACTUAL 4.0000E-06
showing that the holdoff time is set to 4 µs.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 663 --
TRIGger:A:HOLDoff:BY
Description
This command sets or queries the type of holdoff for the A trigger.
Holdoff types are expressed as either user--specified time (TIMe) or by
an internally calculated minimum time value (DEFAult/AUTO). This
command is equivalent to selecting Holdoff from the Trig menu and
then setting the Holdoff type.
Group
Trigger
Related Commands
TRIGger:A:HOLDoff:TIMe
Syntax 1
TRIGger:A:HOLDoff:BY {TIMe|DEFAult}
Syntax 2
TRIGger:A:HOLDoff:BY {TIMe|RANDOM|AUTO}
Syntax 3
TRIGger:A:HOLDoff:BY?
Arguments
H TIMe
This enables you to set the holdoff time via the TRIGger:A:HOLDoff:TIMe command.
H DEFAult
This automatically calculates a holdoff time to use. This time is typically equivalent to the greater of 1/2 screen (5 divisions) of time or
250 ns. The maximum value is 12 s. For example, if the instrument is
set to 1 ms/division then the default holdoff will be 1 ms/division x 25
divisions = 25 ms.
Example 1
TRIGger:A:HOLDoff:BY?
This query might return
:TRIGGER:A:HOLDOFF:BY TIME
indicating that you will set the holdoff time.
Example 2
TRIGger:A:HOLDoff:BY TIMe
This command sets the holdoff to the ”by time” setting. This enables
you to set the holdoff time.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 664 --
TRIGger:A:HOLDoff:TIMe
Description
This command sets or queries the A trigger holdoff time. This command is equivalent to selecting Holdoff from the Trig menu and then
choosing the desired Trig Holdoff.
Group
Trigger
Related Commands
TRIGger:A:HOLDoff:BY
Syntax 1
TRIGger:A:HOLDoff:TIMe <NR3>
Syntax 2
TRIGger:A:HOLDoff:TIMe?
Argument
H <NR3>
This specifies the holdoff time in seconds. The range is from 250 ns
through 12.0 s.
Example 1
TRIGger:A:HOLDoff:TIME?
This query might return
:TRIGGER:A:HOLDOFFTIME 1.2000E-06
indicating that the A trigger holdoff time is set to 1.2 µs.
Example 2
TRIGger:A:HOLDoff:TIMe 10
This command sets the A trigger holdoff time to 10 s.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 665 --
TRIGger:A:HOLDoff?
Description
This query--only command returns the A trigger holdoff parameters.
These parameters specify the time period during which the trigger circuitry is not looking to generate a trigger event. This command is
equivalent to selecting Holdoff from the Trig menu and then viewing
the current settings.
Group
Trigger
Related Commands
TRIGger:A:HOLDoff:ACTUal?, TRIGger:A:HOLDoff:BY, TRIGger:A:HOLDoff:TIMe
Syntax
TRIGger:A:HOLDoff?
Example
TRIGger:A:HOLDoff?
This query might return
:TRIGGER:A:HOLDOFF:TIME 900.0000E-09;
BY DEFAULT
indicating that the A edge trigger holdoff time is set 900 ns.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 666 --
TRIGger:A:LEVel
Description
This command sets or queries the level for the A trigger. This command
is equivalent to selecting Holdoff from the Trig menu and then viewing
or setting the trigger Level.
Group
Trigger
Syntax 1
TRIGger:A:LEVel {ECL|TTL|<NR3>}
Syntax 2
TRIGger:A:LEVel?
Arguments
H ECL
This specifies the ECL high level.
H TTL
This specifies the TTL high level.
H <NR3>
This specifies the trigger level in user units (usually volts).
Example 1
TRIGger:A:LEVel?
This query might return
:TRIGGER:A:LEVel 1.3000E+00
indicating that the A edge trigger is set to 1.3 V.
Example 2
TRIGger:A:LEVel TTL
This command sets the A edge trigger to TTL high level, which is
1.4 V.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 667 --
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:CLAss
Description
This command sets or queries the class of the Logic Trigger. Used in
conjunction with the TRIGger:A:TYPe command, this command is
equivalent to selecting Logic Pattern, Logic State or Setup/Hold Setup
from the Trig menu.
Group
Trigger
Related Commands
TRIGger:A:TYPe, TRIGger:A:PULse:CLAss
Syntax 1
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:CLAss {PATtern|STATE|SETHold}
Syntax 2
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:CLAss?
Arguments
H PATtern
In four--channel instruments, this argument sets the instrument to trigger when the specified logical combinations of channels 1, 2, 3, and 4
are met. On two--channel instruments, only channel 1 and channel 2
are available.
H STATE
In four--channel instruments, this argument sets the instrument to trigger when the specified conditions of channels 1, 2, and 3 are met after
the channel 4 (clock) condition is met. On two--channel instruments,
only channel 1 and channel 2 (clock) are available.
H SETHold
This argument sets the instrument to trigger on setup and hold violations between a data source and a clock source. Use one channel input
as the clock signal and a second channel input as the data input. The
clocking and data levels are used to determine if a clock or data transition has occurred.
Example 1
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:CLAss?
This query might return
:TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:CLASS PATTERN
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 668 --
Example 2
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:CLAss PATTERN
This command sets the trigger A logic class to PATtern, which causes
the instrument to trigger when the specified logical combinations of
channels 1, 2, 3, and 4 are met.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 669 --
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:FUNCtion
Description
This command sets or queries the logical combination of the input
channels for the A pattern and A state logic triggers. This command is
equivalent to selecting A Event (Main) Trigger Setup from the Trig
menu, selecting Pattern or State for the Trigger Type, and setting or
viewing the Pattern Type.
Group
Trigger
Related Commands
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:PATtern:WHEn, TRIGger:A:LOGIc:INPut:CH<x>,
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:THReshold:CH<x>
Syntax 1
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:FUNCtion {AND|NANd|NOR|OR}
Syntax 2
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:FUNCtion?
Arguments
H AND
This specifies to trigger if all conditions are true.
H NANd
This specifies to trigger if any of the conditions are false.
H NOR
This specifies to trigger if all conditions are false.
H OR
This specifies to trigger if any of the conditions are true.
Example 1
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:FUNCTion?
This query might return
:TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:FUNCTION NAND
which indicates that the instrument will trigger if the AND logic conditions are false.
Example 2
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:FUNCTion AND
This command sets the logical combination of channels to be true when
all conditions are true.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 670 --
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:INPut:CH<x>
Description
This command sets or queries the A logical input for the logic trigger
channel specified by x. The value of x ranges from 1 through 3 for
four--channel instruments. For two--channel instruments x can only be
1. Note that CH4 on four--channel instruments or CH2 on two--channel
instruments cannot be set or queried with this command. For details
about setting this channel, see TRIGger:A:LOGIc:PATtern:INPut:CH4
or TRIGger:A:LOGIc:PATtern:INPut:CH2. This command is equivalent to selecting A Event (Main) Trigger Setup from the Trig menu and
then choosing the desired logical input from the Ch<x> drop--down list,
which is located in the Input Threshold group box.
Group
Trigger
Related Commands
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:PATtern:INPut:CH4, TRIGger:A:LOGIc:PATtern:INPut:CH2
Syntax 1
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:INPut:CH<x> {HIGH|LOW|X}
Syntax 2
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:INPut:CH<x>?
Arguments
H HIGH
This specifies the logic high.
H LOW
This specifies the logic low.
H X
This specifies a ”do not care” state.
Example 1
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:INPut:CH1?
This query might return
:TRIGGER:LOGIC:INPUT:CH1 X
indicating that the setting for the A logic trigger input to channel 1 does
not matter.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 671 --
Example 2
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:INPut:CH2 HIGH
This command sets the A logic trigger input to logic HIGH for channel 2.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 672 --
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:INPut?
Description
On four--channel instruments, this query--only command returns the A
logic trigger input expected for channel 1, 2, and 3. Channel 4 is set or
queried with the command TRIGger:A:LOGIc:PATtern:INPut:CH4.
On two--channel instruments, this query returns the A logic trigger input expected for channel 1. Channel 2 is set or queried with the command TRIGger:A:LOGIc:PATtern:INPut:CH2.
This command is equivalent to selecting A Event (Main) Trigger Setup
and viewing or setting the Input Threshold for channel 1 through 3 for
four--channel instruments or channel 1 for two--channel instruments.
Group
Trigger
Related Commands
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:PATtern:INPut:CH4
Syntax
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:INPut?
Example
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:INPut?
This query might return
:TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:INPUT:CH1 HIGH;CH2 X;CH3 X
indicating that a logic high is expected on channel 1 while channel 2
and channel three are Don’t Care.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 673 --
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:PATtern:INPut:CH2
Description
This command sets or queries the A logic trigger input for channel 2 in
two--channel instruments only. The command specifies the logic value
used when the pattern trigger detects the threshold level. Sending this
command is equivalent to selecting Logic Pattern from the Trig menu
and then choosing the desired logical input from the Ch2 drop--down
list, which is located in the Input Threshold group box.
To set or query the A logic trigger input for a four--channel instrument,
see TRIGger:A:LOGIc:PATtern:INPut:CH4.
Group
Trigger
Related Commands
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:FUNCtion, TRIGger:A:LOGIc:INPut:CH<x>,
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:THReshold:CH<x>
Syntax 1
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:PATtern:INPut:CH2 {HIGH|LOW|X}
Syntax 2
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:PATtern:INPut:CH2?
Arguments
H HIGH
This specifies the logic high.
H LOW
This specifies the logic low.
H X
This specifies a ”do not care” state.
Example 1
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:PATtern:INPut:CH2?
This query might return
:TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:PATTERN:INPUT:CH2 HIGH
indicating that the logic input for channel 2 is logic high.
Example 2
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:PATtern:INPut:CH2 HIGH
This command sets the A logic trigger input to logic high for channel 2
when the logic class is set to PATtern. When the threshold level is detected, HIGH places a 1 on the channel 2 input to the selected function.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 674 --
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:PATtern:INPut:CH4
Description
This command sets or queries the A logic trigger input for channel 4 in
four--channel instruments only. The command specifies the logic value
used when the pattern trigger detects the threshold level. Sending this
command is equivalent to selecting Logic Pattern from the Trig menu
and then choosing the desired logical input from the Ch4 drop--down
list, which is located in the Input Threshold group box.
To set or query the A logic trigger input for a two--channel instrument,
see TRIGger:A:LOGIc:PATtern:INPut:CH2.
Group
Trigger
Related Commands
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:FUNCtion, TRIGger:A:LOGIc:INPut:CH<x>,
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:THReshold:CH<x>
Syntax 1
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:PATtern:INPut:CH4 {HIGH|LOW|X}
Syntax 2
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:PATtern:INPut:CH4?
Arguments
H HIGH
This specifies the logic high.
H LOW
This specifies the logic low.
H X
This specifies a ”do not care” state.
Example 1
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:PATtern:INPut:CH4?
This query might return
:TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:PATTERN:INPUT:CH4 HIGH
indicating that the logic input for channel 4 is logic high.
Example 2
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:PATtern:INPut:CH4 HIGH
This command sets the A logic trigger input to logic high for channel 4
when the logic class is set to PATtern. When the threshold level is detected, HIGH places a 1 on the channel 4 input to the selected function.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 675 --
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:PATtern:WHEn
Description
This command sets or queries the condition for generating an A logic
pattern trigger with respect to the defined input pattern. This command
is equivalent to selecting A Event (Main) Trigger Setup from the Trig
menu, selecting Pattern for Trigger Type, and choosing a trigger condition from the Pattern drop--down list, which is located in the Trigger
When group box.
Group
Trigger
Related Commands
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:FUNCtion, TRIGger:A:LOGIc:INPut, TRIGger:A:LOGIc:THReshold, TRIGger:A:LOGIc:PATtern:WHEn:LESSLimit, TRIGger:A:LOGIc:PATtern:WHEn:MORELimit
Syntax 1
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:PATtern:WHEn {TRUe|FALSe|
LESSThan|MOREThan}
Syntax 2
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:PATtern:WHEn?
Arguments
H TRUe
This argument sets the instrument to trigger when the pattern becomes
true.
H FALSe
This argument sets the instrument to trigger when the pattern becomes
false.
H LESSThan
This argument sets the instrument to trigger if the specific pattern is
true less than the time set by the TRIGger:A:LOGIc:PATtern:WHEn:LESSLimit command.
H MOREThan
This argument sets the instrument to trigger if the specific pattern is
true longer than the specified time set by the TRIGger:A:LOGIc:PATtern:WHEn:MORELimit command.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 676 --
Example 1
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:PATtern:WHEn?
This query might return
:TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:PATTERN:WHEN TRUE
indicating that the A logic pattern will trigger when the pattern becomes
true.
Example 2
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:PATtern:WHEn FALSe
This command specifies to trigger the A logic pattern when the pattern
becomes false.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 677 --
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:PATtern:WHEn:LESSLimit
Description
This command sets or queries the maximum time that the selected pattern may be true and still generate an A logic pattern trigger. This command is equivalent to selecting A Event (Main) Trigger Setup from the
Trig menu, selecting Pattern as the Trigger Type, selecting Less Than
for the Pattern in the Trigger When settings, and entering a maximum
value for Time.
Group
Trigger
Related Commands
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:PATtern:WHEn:MORELimit
Syntax 1
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:PATtern:WHEn:LESSLimit <NR3>
Syntax 2
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:PATtern:WHEn:LESSLimit?
Argument
H <NR3>
This specifies the amount of time to hold the pattern true.
Example 1
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:PATtern:WHEn:LESSLimit?
This query might return
:TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:PATTERN:WHEN:LESSLIMIT
5.0000E-09
indicating that the selected pattern may hold true for up to 5 ns and still
generate an A logic pattern trigger.
Example 2
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:PATtern:WHEn:LESSLimit
10.0E+00
This command sets the maximum time that the selected pattern may
hold true (and generate an A logic pattern trigger) to 10 s.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 678 --
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:PATtern:WHEn:MORELimit
Description
This command sets or queries the minimum time that the selected pattern may be true and still generate an A logic pattern trigger. This command is equivalent to selecting A Event (Main) Trigger Setup from the
Trig menu, selecting Pattern as the Trigger Type, selecting More Than
for the Pattern in the Trigger When settings, and entering a minimum
value for Time.
Group
Trigger
Related Commands
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:PATtern:WHEn:LESSLimit
Syntax 1
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:PATtern:WHEn:MORELimit <NR3>
Syntax 2
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:PATtern:WHEn:MORELimit?
Argument
H <NR3>
This specifies the amount of time to hold the pattern true.
Example 1
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:PATtern:WHEn:MORELimit?
This query might return
:TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:PATTERN:WHEN:MORELIMIT
5.0000E-09
indicating that the selected pattern must hold true for at least 5 ns to
generate an A logic pattern trigger.
Example 2
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:PATtern:WHEn:MORELimit
10.0E+00
This command sets the minimum time that the selected pattern may
hold true (and generate an A logic pattern trigger) to 10 s.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 679 --
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:PATtern?
Description
This query--only command returns the conditions used for generating an
A logic pattern trigger, with respect to the defined input pattern, and
identifies the maximum and minimum time that the selected pattern
may be true and still generate the trigger. This command is equivalent
to selecting Logic Pattern from the Trig menu and then viewing the
current setups.
Group
Trigger
Related Commands
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:PATtern:INPut:CH4,
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:PATtern:WHEn,
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:PATtern:WHEn:LESSLimit,
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:PATtern:WHEn:MORELimit
Syntax
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:PATtern?
Example
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:PATtern?
This query might return
:TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:PATTERN:INPUT:CH4 X;
:TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:PATTERN:WHEN TRUE;
WHEN:LESSLIMIT 5.0000E-9;MORELIMIT 5.0000E-9.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 680 --
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:SETHold:CLOCk:EDGE
Description
This command sets or queries the clock edge polarity for setup and hold
triggering. This is equivalent to selecting Setup/Hold Setup from the
Trig menu and then choosing the desired Clock Edge.
Group
Trigger
Related Commands
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:SETHold:CLOCk:SOUrce, TRIGger:A:LOGIc:SETHold:CLOCk:THReshold
Syntax 1
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:SETHold:CLOCk:EDGE {FALL|RISe}
Syntax 2
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:SETHold:CLOCk:EDGE?
Arguments
H FALL
This specifies polarity as the clock falling edge.
H RISe
This specifies polarity as the clock rising edge.
Example 1
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:SETHold:CLOCk:EDGE?
This query might return
:TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:SETHOLD:CLOCK:EDGE RISE
indicating that polarity is specified as the clock rising edge.
Example 2
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:SETHold:CLOCk:EDGE RISE
This command specifies the polarity as the clock rising edge.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 681 --
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:SETHold:CLOCk:SOUrce
Description
This command sets or queries the clock source for the A logic trigger
setup and hold input. This is equivalent to selecting Setup/Hold Setup
from the Trig menu and choosing the desired channel from the Clock
Source drop--down list.
Group
Trigger
Related Commands
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:SETHold:CLOCk:EDGE,
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:SETHold:CLOCk:THReshold
Syntax 1
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:SETHold:CLOCk:SOUrce CH<x>
Syntax 2
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:SETHold:CLOCk:SOUrce?
Argument
H CH<x>
This specifies the input channel, which ranges from 1 through 4 for
four--channel instruments or 1 through 2 for two channel instruments.
Example 1
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:SETHold:CLOCk:SOUrce?
This query might return
:TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:SETHOLD:CLOCK:SOURCE CH4
indicating that channel 4 is the clock source for the setup and hold input. For the A logic trigger.
Example 2
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:SETHold:CLOCk:SOUrce CH1
This command specifies channel 1 as the A logic setup and hold input.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 682 --
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:SETHold:CLOCk:THReshold
Description
This command sets or queries the clock voltage threshold for the setup
and hold trigger. This command is equivalent to selecting Setup/Hold
Setup from the Trig menu and setting the desired Clock Level.
Group
Trigger
Related Commands
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:SETHold:CLOCk:EDGE, TRIGger:A:LOGIc:SETHold:CLOCk:SOUrce
Syntax 1
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:SETHold:CLOCk:THReshold
{ECL|TTL|<NR3>}
Syntax 2
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:SETHold:CLOCk:THReshold?
Arguments
H ECL
This specifies a preset ECL high level of --1.3 V.
H TTL
This specifies a preset TTL high level of 1.4 V.
H <NR3>
This is the clock level, in volts.
Example 1
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:SETHold:CLOCk:THReshold?
This query might return
:TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:SETHOLD:CLOCK:THRESHOLD
1.2000E+00
indicating that the clock threshold for the setup and hold trigger is
1.2 V.
Example 2
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:SETHold:CLOCk:THReshold TTL
This command specifies the preset TTL value of 1.4 V as the clock
threshold for the setup and hold trigger.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 683 --
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:SETHold:CLOCk?
Description
This query--only command returns the clock edge polarity, voltage
threshold and source input for setup and hold triggering. This command
is equivalent to selecting Setup/Hold Setup from the Trig menu and
then viewing the current clock setups.
Group
Trigger
Related Commands
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:SETHold:DATa?,
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:SETHold:CLOCk:EDGE,
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:SETHold:CLOCk:THReshold,
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:SETHold:CLOCk:SOUrce
Syntax
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:SETHold:CLOCk?
Example
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:SETHold:CLOCk?
This query might return
:TRIGGER:A:LOGIc:SETHold:CLOCk:EDGE RISE;
THRESHOLD 1.4000;SOURCE CH2
indicating the current clock settings for setup and hold triggering.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 684 --
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:SETHold:DATa:SOUrce
Description
This command sets or queries the data source for the setup and hold
trigger. This command is equivalent to selecting Setup/Hold Setup from
the Trig menu and choosing the desired channel from the Data Source
drop--down list.
Group
Trigger
Related Commands
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:SETHold:DATa:THReshold
Syntax 1
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:SETHold:DATa:SOUrce CH<x>
Syntax 2
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:SETHold:DATa:SOUrce?
Argument
H CH<x>
This specifies the input channel, which ranges from 1 through 4 for
four--channel instruments or 1 through 2 for two--channel instruments..
Example 1
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:SETHold:DATa:SOUrce?
This query might return
:TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:SETHOLD:DATA:SOURCE CH2
indicating that channel 2 is the current clock source for the setup and
hold trigger.
Example 2
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:SETHold:DATa:SOUrce CH1
This command sets channel 1 as the clock source for the setup and hold
trigger.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 685 --
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:SETHold:DATa:THReshold
Description
This command sets or queries the data voltage threshold for setup and
hold trigger. This command is equivalent to selecting Setup/Hold Setup
from the Trig menu and then setting the desired Data Level.
Group
Trigger
Related Commands
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:SETHold:DATa:SOUrce
Syntax 1
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:SETHold:DATa:THReshold
{ECL|TTL<NR3>}
Syntax 2
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:SETHold:DATa:THReshold?
Arguments
H ECL
This specifies the preset ECL high level of --1.3 V.
H TTL
This specifies the preset TTL high level of 1.4 V.
H <NR3>
This is the setup and hold data level, in V.
Example 1
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:SETHold:DATa:THReshold?
This query might return
:TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:SETHOLD:DATA:THRESHOLD
1.2000E+00
indicating that 1.2 V is the current data voltage level for the setup and
hold trigger.
Example 2
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:SETHold:DATa:THReshold TTL
This command specifies the preset ECL high level of 1.4 V as the current data voltage level for the setup and hold trigger.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 686 --
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:SETHold:DATa?
Description
This query--only command returns the voltage threshold and data
source for the setup and hold trigger. This command is equivalent to
selecting Setup/Hold Setup from the Trig menu and then viewing the
current data setups.
Group
Trigger
Related Commands
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:SETHold:CLOCk?
Syntax
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:SETHold:DATa?
Example
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:SETHold:DATa?
This query might return
:TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:SETHOLD:DATA:THRESHOLD
1.4000;SOURCE CH1
indicating the current trigger data settings.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 687 --
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:SETHold:HOLDTime
Description
This command sets or queries the hold time for setup and hold violation
triggering. This command is equivalent to selecting Setup/Hold Setup
from the Trig menu and then setting the desired Hold Time.
Group
Trigger
Related Commands
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:SETHold:SETTime
Syntax 1
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:SETHold:HOLDTime <NR3>
Syntax 2
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:SETHold:HOLDTime?
Argument
H <NR3>
This specifies the hold time setting in seconds. Positive values for
hold time occur after the clock edge. Negative values occur before the
clock edge.
Example 1
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:SETHold:HOLDTime?
This query might return
:TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:SETHOLD:HOLDTIME 2.0000E-09
indicating that the current hold time for the setup and hold trigger is 2
ns.
Example 2
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:SETHold:HOLDTime 3.0E-3
This command sets the hold time for the setup and hold trigger to 3 ms.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 688 --
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:SETHold:SETTime
Description
This command sets or queries the setup time for setup and hold violation triggering. This command is equivalent to selecting Setup/Hold
Setup from the Trig menu and then setting the desired Setup Time.
Group
Trigger
Related Commands
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:SETHold:HOLDTime
Syntax 1
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:SETHold:SETTime <NR3>
Syntax 2
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:SETHold:SETTime?
Argument
H <NR3>
This specifies the setup time for setup and hold violation triggering.
Example 1
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:SETHold:SETTime?
This query might return
:TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:SETHOLD:SETTIME 2.0000E-09
indicating that the current setup time for setup and hold trigger is 2 ns.
Example 2
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:SETHold:SETTime 3.0E-6
This command specifies that the current setup time for setup and hold
trigger is 3 µs.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 689 --
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:SETHold?
Description
This query--only command returns the clock edge polarity, voltage
threshold and source input; data voltage threshold and source; and both
setup and hold times for setup and hold violation triggering. This command is equivalent to selecting Setup/Hold Setup from the Trig menu
and then viewing the current setups.
Group
Trigger
Related Commands
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:PATtern?, TRIGger:A:LOGIc:STATE?
Syntax
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:SETHold?
Example
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:SETHold?
This query might return the settings
:TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:SETHOLD:CLOCK:EDGE RISE;
THRESHOLD 1.4000;SOURCE CH2;
:TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:SETHOLD:DATA:THRESHOLD
1.4000;SOURCE CH1;:TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:SETHOLD
:HOLDTIME 2.0000E-9;SETTIME 3.0000E-9
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 690 --
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:STATE:INPut:CH2
Description
This command sets or queries the slope for channel 2 when the logic
class is set to STATE in two--channel instruments. This command is
equivalent to selecting Logic State from the Trig menu and then choosing the desired channel input (NEG or POS) from the Ch2 drop--down
list.
To set or query the slope of the logic state in four--channel instruments,
see TRIGger:A:LOGIc:STATE:INPut:CH4.
Group
Trigger
Related Commands
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:STATE:WHEn
Syntax 1
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:STATE:INPut:CH2 {FALL|RISe}
Syntax 2
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:STATE:INPut:CH2?
Arguments
H FALL
This specifies falling edge.
H RISe
This specifies rising edge.
Example 1
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:STATE:INPut:CH2?
This query might return
:TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:STATE:INPUT:CH2 RISE
indicating that the A logic trigger input for channel 2 is the rising edge.
Example 2
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:STATE:INPut:CH2 RISE
This command specifies that the A logic trigger input for channel 2 is
the rising edge.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 691 --
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:STATE:INPut:CH4
Description
This command sets or queries the slope for channel 4 when the logic
class is set to State in four--channel instruments. This command is
equivalent to selecting Logic State from the Trig menu and then choosing the desired channel input (NEG or POS) from the Ch4 (Clk) drop-down list.
To set or query the slope of the logic state in two--channel instruments,
see TRIGger:A:LOGIc:STATE:INPut:CH2.
Group
Trigger
Related Commands
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:STATE:WHEn
Syntax 1
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:STATE:INPut:CH4 {FALL|RISe}
Syntax 2
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:STATE:INPut:CH4?
Arguments
H FALL
This specifies falling edge.
H RISe
This specifies rising edge.
Example 1
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:STATE:INPut:CH4?
This query might return
:TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:STATE:INPUT:CH4 RISE
indicating that the A logic trigger input for channel 4 is the rising edge.
Example 2
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:STATE:INPut:CH4 RISE
This command specifies that the A logic trigger input for channel 4 is
the rising edge.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 692 --
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:STATE:WHEn
Description
This command sets or queries the condition for generating an A logic
state trigger. This command is equivalent to selecting Logic State from
the Trig menu and choosing the desired condition from the Trigger
When Pattern drop--down list.
Group
Trigger
Related Commands
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:INPut:CH<x>,
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:STATE:INPut:CH4
Syntax 1
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:STATE:WHEn {TRUe|FALSe}
Syntax 2
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:STATE:WHEn?
Arguments
H TRUe
On four--channel instruments, this argument specifies that the trigger
occurs when the clock transition on channel 4 occurs and the pattern
of channels 1--3 are at the desired logic input states. On two--channel
instruments, this specifies that the trigger occurs when the clock transition on channel 2 occurs and the pattern of channel 1 is at the desired logic input state.
H FALSe
On four--channel instruments, this argument specifies that the trigger
occurs when the desired clock transition on channel 4 occurs and the
desired logic input states on channels 1--3 are not found. On two-channel instruments, this specifies that the trigger occurs when the
clock transition on channel 2 occurs and the desired logic input state
on channel 1 is not found.
Example 1
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:STATE:WHEn?
This query might return
:TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:STATE:WHEN FALSE
indicating that the logic condition to trigger upon is false.
Example 2
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:STATE:WHEn TRUE
This command specifies that the logic condition to trigger upon is true.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 693 --
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:STATE?
Description
This query--only command returns the data input and trigger criteria for
the A logic trigger. This command is equivalent to selecting Logic State
from the Trig menu and then viewing the current logic state settings.
Group
Trigger
Related Commands
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:STATE:INPut:CH4,
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:STATE:WHEn
Syntax
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:STATE?
Example
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:STATE?
This query might return
:TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:STATE:INPUT:CH4 RISE;
:TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:STATE:WHEN TRUE
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 694 --
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:THReshold:CH<x>
Description
This command sets or queries the A logic trigger threshold voltage for
the channel, specified by x, which ranges from 1 through 4 for four-channel instruments or 1 through 2 for two--channel instruments. This
command is equivalent to selecting A Event (Main) Trigger Setup from
the Trig menu, choosing a logic trigger type, such as State or Pattern,
and setting the Input Threshold voltage for the desired channel.
Group
Trigger
Related Commands
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:INPut?
Syntax 1
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:THReshold:CH<x> <NR3>
Syntax 2
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:THReshold:CH<x>?
Argument
H <NR3>
This specifies the threshold voltage.
Example 1
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:THReshold:CH3?
This query might return
:TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:THRESHOLD:CH3 1.2000E+00
indicating that the A logic trigger threshold voltage for channel 3 is
1.2 V.
Example 2
TRIGger:A:LOGIcTHReshold:CH2 3.0E-3
This command sets the A logic trigger threshold voltage for channel 2
to 3 mV.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 695 --
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:THReshold?
Description
This query--only command returns the threshold voltage for all channels
in an A logic trigger. This command query is equivalent to selecting A
Event (Main) Trigger Setup from the Trig menu, choosing a logic trigger type, such as State or Pattern, and viewing the current Input Threshold voltage settings.
Group
Trigger
Related Commands
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:THReshold:CH<x>, TRIGger:A:LOGIc:INPut,
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:INPut:CH<x>
Syntax
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:THReshold?
Example
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:THReshold?
This query might return
:TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:THRESHOLD CH1 24.0000E-03;
CH2 1.2000E+00;CH3 1.2000E+00;
CH4 1.2000E+00
indicating the threshold voltages for the channels in an A logic trigger
are as follows: channel 1 = 24 mV; channel 2 = 1.2 V; channel 3 = 1.2
V; channel 4 = 1.2 V.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 696 --
TRIGger:A:LOGIc?
Description
This query--only command returns all of the A logic trigger parameters.
Group
Trigger
Related Commands
TRIGger:A:LOGIc:CLAss
Syntax
TRIGger:A:LOGIc?
Example
TRIGger:A:LOGIc?
This query might return
:TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:CLASS PATTERN;
FUNCTION AND;WHEN TRUE;
THRESHOLD:CH1 1.4000;CH2 1.4000;CH3 1.4000;
CH4 1.4000;:TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:INPUT:CH1 HIGH;
CH2 X;CH3 X;
:TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:PATTERN:INPUT:CH4 X;
:TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:PATTERN:WHEN TRUE;
WHEN:LESSLIMIT 5.0000E-9;
MORELIMIT 5.0000E-9;
:TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:SETHOLD:CLOCK:EDGE RISE;
THRESHOLD 1.4000;SOURCE CH2;
:TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:SETHOLD:DATA:THRESHOLD
1.4000;SOURCE CH1;
:TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:SETHOLD:HOLDTIME2.0000E-9;
SETTIME 3.0000E-9;
:TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:STATE:INPUT:CH4 RISE;
:TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:STATE:WHEN TRUE
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 697 --
TRIGger:A:MODe
Description
This command sets or queries the A trigger mode. This command is
equivalent to selecting Mode from the Trig menu and then choosing the
desired Trigger Mode.
Group
Trigger
Related Commands
TRIGger:A:LEVel
Syntax 1
TRIGger:A:MODe {AUTO|NORMal}
Syntax 2
TRIGger:A:MODe?
Arguments
H AUTO
This generates a trigger if one is not detected within a specified time
period.
H NORMal
This waits for a valid trigger event.
Example 1
TRIGger:A:MODe?
This query might return
:TRIGGER:A:MODE NORMAL
indicating that a valid trigger event must occur before a trigger is generated.
Example 2
TRIGger:A:MODe NORMAL
This command specifies that a valid trigger event must occur before a
trigger is generated.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 698 --
TRIGger:A:PULse:CLAss
Description
This command sets or queries the type of pulse on which to trigger.
This command is equivalent to selecting the setup menu for the pulse
type that you want from the Trig menu: Glitch Setup, Width Setup,
Runt Setup, Timeout Setup, or Transition Setup.
Group
Trigger
Related Commands
TRIGger:A:PULse:GLItch, TRIGger:A:PULse:RUNT,
TRIGger:A:PULse:WIDth, TRIGger:A:PULse:TIMEOut,
TRIGger:A:PULse:TRANsition?, TRIGger:A:TYPe
Syntax 1
TRIGger:A:PULse:CLAss {GLItch|RUNT|WIDth|
TRANsition|TIMEOut|WINdow}
Syntax 2
TRIGger:A:PULse:CLAss?
Arguments
H GLItch
This triggers when a pulse is found that is of the specified polarity and
width. These are set with the commands TRIGger:A:PULse:GLITch:POLarity and TRIGger:A:PULse;GLItch:WIDth.
H RUNT
This triggers when a pulse crosses the first preset voltage threshold
but does not cross the second preset threshold before re--crossing the
first. The thresholds are set with the TRIGger:A:PULse:RUNT:THReshold:LOW and TRIGger:A:PULse:RUNT:THReshold:HIGH commands.
H WIDth
This triggers when a pulse is found that has the specified polarity and
is either inside or outside the limits as specified by TRIGger:A;PULse:WIDth:LOWLimit and TRIGger:A:PULse:WIDth:HIGHLimit. The polarity is selected using the
TRIGger:A:PULse:WIDth:POLarity command.
H TRANsition
This triggers when a pulse crosses both thresholds in the same direction as the specified polarity and the transition time between the two
threshold crossings is greater or less than the specified time delta.
H TIMEOut
This triggers when the pulse train stops in the selected state for longer
than the specified time.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 699 --
H WINdow
This triggers when a pulse is found that meets the conditions set by
the A Event window trigger type, specified by the following commands:
TRIGger:A:PULse:WINdow:THReshold:HIGH
TRIGger:A:PULse:WINdow:THReshold:LOW
TRIGger:A:PULse:WINdow:THReshold:BOTh
TRIGger:A:PULse:WINdow:TYPe
TRIGger:A:PULse:WINdow:WHEn
TRIGger:A:PULse:WINdow:WIDth
Example 1
TRIGger:A:PULse:CLAss?
This query might return
:TRIGGER:A:PULSE:CLASS GLITCH
indicating that a pulse was found that is of the specified polarity and
width.
Example 2
TRIGger:A:PULse:CLAss WIDth
This command specifies a width pulse for the A trigger.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 700 --
TRIGger:A:PULse:GLItch:POLarity
Description
This command sets or queries the polarity for A pulse glitch trigger.
This command is equivalent to selecting Glitch Setup from the Trig
menu and then choosing the desired Polarity.
Group
Trigger
Related Commands
TRIGger:A:LEVel, TRIGger:A:PULse:GLItch:WIDth
Syntax 1
TRIGger:A:PULse:GLItch:POLarity {POSITIVe|NEGative|EITher}
Syntax 2
TRIGger:A:PULse:GLItch:POLarity?
Arguments
H POSITIVe
This specifies that the instrument will only trigger when the polarity
of the glitch is positive.
H NEGative
This specifies that the instrument will only trigger when the polarity
of the glitch is negative.
H EITher
This specifies that the instrument will trigger when the polarity of the
glitch is either positive or negative.
Example 1
TRIGger:A:PULse:GLItch:POLarity?
This query might return
:TRIGGER:A:PULSE:GLITCH:POLARITY POSITIVE
indicating that the polarity of the glitch must be positive for the trigger
to occur.
Example 2
TRIGger:A:PULse:GLItch:POLarity EITHER
This command specifies that the polarity of the glitch can be either positive or negative for the trigger to occur.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 701 --
TRIGger:A:PULse:GLItch:TRIGIF
Description
This command sets or queries the acceptance/rejection of the glitch
pulse trigger, based on width. This command is equivalent to selecting
Glitch Setup from the Trig menu and choosing the desired Trig if Width
setting.
Group
Trigger
Related Commands
TRIGger:A:PULse:GLItch:WIDth
Syntax 1
TRIGger:A:PULse:GLItch:TRIGIF {ACCept|REJect}
Syntax 2
TRIGger:A:PULse:GLItch:TRIGIF?
Arguments
H ACCept
This specifies that the instrument will only trigger on pulses that are
narrower than the specified width, when the trigger type is set to
glitch. The width is specified using the TRIGger:A:PULse:GLItch:WIDth command.
H REJect
This specifies that the instrument will only trigger on pulses that are
wider than the specified width, when the trigger type is set to glitch.
The width is specified using the TRIGger:A:PULse:GLItch:WIDth
command.
Example 1
TRIGger:A:PULse:GLItch:TRIGIF?
This query might return
:TRIGGER:A:PULSE:GLITCH:TRIGIF ACCEPT
indicating that the instrument is set to trigger on pulses that are narrower than the specified width.
Example 2
TRIGger:A:PULse:GLItch:TRIGIF REJect
This command specifies that the instrument triggers on pulses that are
wider than the specified width.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 702 --
TRIGger:A:PULse:GLItch:WIDth
Description
This command sets or queries the width for the A glitch trigger. This
command is equivalent to selecting Glitch Setup from the Trig menu
and then setting the desired Width.
For information about using the width value, refer to the TRIGger:A:PULse:GLItch:TRIGIF command.
Group
Trigger
Related Commands
TRIGger:A:LEVel, TRIGger:A:PULse:GLItch:TRIGIF
Syntax 1
TRIGger:A:PULse:GLItch:WIDth <NR3>
Syntax 2
TRIGger:A:PULse:GLItch:WIDth?
Argument
H <NR3>
This argument specifies the width of the glitch in seconds.
Example 1
TRIGger:A:PULse:GLItch:WIDth?
This query might return
:TRIGGER:A:PULSE:GLITCH:WIDTH 2.0000E-09
indicating that the width of the glitch is currently set at 2 ns.
Example 2
TRIGger:A:PULse:GLItch:WIDth 15E-6
This command sets the width of the glitch to 15 µs.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 703 --
TRIGger:A:PULse:GLItch?
Description
This query--only command returns the current A glitch pulse trigger
parameters. This command query is equivalent to selecting Glitch Setup
from the Trig menu and viewing the current glitch trigger settings.
Group
Trigger
Related Commands
TRIGger:A:PULse:GLItch:POLarity,
TRIGger:A:PULse:GLItch:TRIGIF,
TRIGger:A:PULse:GLItch:WIDth
Syntax
TRIGger:A:PULse:GLItch?
Example
TRIGger:A:PULse:GLItch?
This query might return
:TRIGGER:A:PULSE:GLITCH:WIDTH 2.0000E-09;
FILTER ACCEPT;POLARITY POSITIVE
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 704 --
TRIGger:A:PULse:RUNT:LOGIc:INPUT:CH<x>
Description
This command sets or queries the A runt logic input for the channel
specified by <x>, which can be 1, 2, 3, or 4. This is equivalent to setting the runt logic inputs from the Trigger When section in the Runt
Trigger menu. While all channels can be set or queried, only channels 3
and 4 can be used if the runt source is channel 1 or 2. Similarly, only
channels 1 and 2 can be used if the runt source is channel 3 or 4.
Note: This command is not available in two--channel instruments.
Group
Trigger
Syntax 1
TRIgger:A:PULse:RUNT:LOGIc:INPUT:CH<x>
{HIGH|LOW|X}
Syntax 2
TRIgger:A:PULse:RUNT:LOGIc:INPUT:CH<x>?
Arguments
H HIGH
This argument specifies logic high.
H LOW
This argument specifies logic low.
H X
This argument specifies a don’t care state.
Example 1
TRIgger:A:PULse:RUNT:LOGIc:INPUT:CH2?
This query might return
:TRIGGER:A:PULSE:RUNT:LOGIC:INPUT CH2 LOW
indicating that the runt logic trigger input is set to logic low for channel 2.
Example 2
TRIgger:A:PULse:RUNT:LOGIc:INPUT:CH3 HIGH
This command sets the runt logic trigger input to logic high for channel 3.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 705 --
TRIgger:A:PULse:RUNT:LOGIc:INPUT?
Description
This query--only command returns the current A runt pulse trigger logic
input parameters. This query is equivalent to selecting Runt Setup from
the Trig menu and then viewing the current settings.
Note: This command is not available in two--channel instruments.
Group
Trigger
Syntax
TRIGger:A:PULse:RUNT:LOGIcINPUT?
Example
TRIGger:A:PULse:RUNT:LOGIc:INPUt?
This query might return these parameters:
:TRIGGER:A:PULSE:RUNT:LOGIC:INPUT:CH1 HIGH;
CH2 X; CH3 X; CH4 LOW.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 706 --
TRIGger:A:PULse:RUNT:LOGIc:THReshold:CH<x>
Description
This command sets or queries the A runt logic threshold for the channel
specified by <x>, which can be 1, 2, 3, or 4. This is equivalent to selecting Runt Setup from the Trig menu and setting the runt logic threshold.
While all channels can be set or queried, only channels 3 and 4 can be
used if the runt source is channel 1 or 2. Similarly only channels 1 and
2 can be used if the runt source is channel 3 or 4.
Note: This command is not available in two--channel instruments.
Group
Trigger
Syntax 1
TRIGger:A:PULse:RUNT:LOGIc:THReshold:CH<x>
<NR3>
Syntax 2
TRIGger:A:PULse:RUNT:LOGIc:THReshold:CH<x>?
Argument
H <NR3>
This argument specifies the threshold in volts.
Example 1
TRIGger:A:PULse:RUNT:LOGIc:THReshold:CH1?
This query might return
:TRIGGER:A:PULSE:RUNT:LOGIC:THRESHOLD:CH1
0.5000
indicating that the runt logic trigger threshold is set to 0.5 V for channel 1.
Example 2
TRIGger:A:PULse:RUNT:LOGIc:THReshold:CH3 0.5.
This command sets the runt logic trigger threshold to 0.5 V for channel 3.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 707 --
TRIGger:A:PULse:RUNT:LOGIc?
Description
This query--only command returns the current A runt trigger logic parameters. This query is equivalent to selecting Runt Setup from the Trig
menu and then viewing the current settings.
Note: This command is not available in two--channel instruments.
Group
Trigger
Syntax
TRIGger:A:PULse:RUNT:LOGIc?
Example
TRIGger:A:PULse:RUNT:LOGIc?
This query might return
:TRIGGER:A:PULSE:RUNT:LOGIC:INPUT:CH1 HIGH;
CH2 X; CH3 X; CH4 LOW;
:TRIGGER:A:PULSE:RUNT:LOGIC:THRESHOLD:CH1
1.2000;CH2 1.2000;CH3 1.2000;CH4 1.2000.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 708 --
TRIGger:A:PULse:RUNT:POLarity
Description
This command sets or queries the polarity for the A pulse runt trigger.
This command is equivalent to selecting Runt Setup from the Trig
menu and then choosing the Polarity setting.
Group
Trigger
Related Commands
TRIGger:A:PULse:RUNT:THReshold?
Syntax 1
TRIGger:A:PULse:RUNT:POLarity {POSITIVe|NEGAtive}
Syntax 2
TRIGger:A:PULse:RUNT:POLarity?
Arguments
H POSitive
This indicates that the rising edge crosses the low threshold and the
falling edge re--crosses the low threshold without either edge ever
crossing the high threshold.
H NEGative
This indicates that the falling edge crosses the high threshold and the
rising edge re--crosses the high threshold without either edge ever
crossing the low threshold.
Example 1
TRIGger:A:PULse:RUNT:POLarity?
This query might return
:TRIGGER:A:PULSE:RUNT:POLARITY POSITIVE
indicating that the polarity of the A pulse runt trigger is positive.
Example 2
TRIGger:A:PULse:RUNT:POLarity NEGATIVE
This command specifies that the polarity of the A pulse runt trigger is
negative.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 709 --
TRIGger:A:PULse:RUNT:THReshold:BOTh
Description
This command (no query form) sets the upper and lower switching
thresholds for the A pulse runt trigger. This command is equivalent to
selecting Runt Setup from the Trig menu and then setting the Upper
Level and Lower Level voltages.
Group
Trigger
Related Commands
TRIGger:A:PULse:RUNT:THReshold?
Syntax
TRIGger:A:PULse:RUNT:THReshold:BOTh {TTL|ECL}
Arguments
H TTL
This sets the upper threshold to 1.8 V and the lower threshold to 800
mV, which are the nominal TTL voltage levels.
H ECL
This sets the upper threshold to --1.1 V and the lower threshold to --1.5
V, which are the nominal ECL voltage levels.
Example
TRIGger:A:PULse:RUNT:THReshold:BOTh TTL
This command sets the threshold of the pulse runt trigger to the nominal TTL voltage levels.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 710 --
TRIGger:A:PULse:RUNT:THReshold:HIGH
Description
This command sets or queries the upper limit for the A pulse runt trigger. This command is equivalent to selecting Runt Setup from the Trig
menu and setting the runt trigger Upper Level voltage.
Group
Trigger
Related Commands
TRIGger:A:PULse:RUNT:THReshold?
Syntax 1
TRIGger:A:PULse:RUNT:THReshold:HIGH <NR3>
Syntax 2
TRIGger:A:PULse:RUNT:THReshold:HIGH?
Argument
H <NR3>
This specifies the threshold value, in volts.
Example 1
TRIGger:A:PULse:RUNT:THReshold:HIGH?
This query might return
:TRIGGER:A:PULSE:RUNT:THRESHOLD:HIGH
1.1000E+00
indicating that the upper limit of the pulse runt trigger is currently set to
1.1 V.
Example 2
TRIGger:A:PULse:RUNT:THReshold:HIGH 120E-3
This command sets the upper limit of the pulse runt trigger to 120 mV.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 711 --
TRIGger:A:PULse:RUNT:THReshold:LOW
Description
This command sets or queries the lower limit for the A pulse runt trigger. This command is equivalent to selecting Runt Setup from the Trig
menu and then setting the Lower Level voltage.
Group
Trigger
Related Commands
TRIGger:A:PULse:RUNT:THReshold?
Syntax 1
TRIGger:A:PULse:RUNT:THReshold:LOW <NR3>
Syntax 2
TRIGger:A:PULse:RUNT:THReshold:LOW?
Argument
H <NR3>
This specifies the threshold value in volts.
Example 1
TRIGger:A:PULse:RUNT:THReshold:LOW?
This query might return
:TRIGGER:A:PULSE:RUNT:THRESHOLD:LOW 1.2000E-01
indicating that the lower limit of the pulse runt trigger is set to 120 mV.
Example 2
TRIGger:A:PULse:RUNT:THReshold:LOW 50E-3
This command sets the lower limit of the pulse runt trigger to 50 mV.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 712 --
TRIGger:A:PULse:RUNT:THReshold?
Description
This query--only command returns the upper and lower thresholds for
the A pulse runt trigger. This command query is equivalent to selecting
Runt Setup from the Trig menu and then viewing the Upper Level and
Lower Level settings.
Group
Trigger
Related Commands
TRIGger:A:PULse:RUNT:POLarity,
TRIGger:A:PULse:RUNT:THReshold:BOTh,
TRIGger:A:PULse:RUNT:THReshold:HIGH,
TRIGger:A:PULse:RUNT:THReshold:LOW
Syntax
TRIGger:A:PULse:RUNT:THReshold?
Example
TRIGger:A:PULse:RUNT:THReshold?
This query might return
:TRIGGER:A:PULSE:THRESHOLD:HIGH 2.0000E+00;
LOW 8.0000E-01
indicating that the upper threshold is 2 V and that the lower threshold is
800 mV.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 713 --
TRIGger:A:PULse:RUNT:WHEn
Description
This command sets or queries the type of pulse width the trigger checks
for when it detects a runt. This is equivalent to selecting Runt Setup
from the Trig menu and choosing the desired Trigger When setting
from the drop--down list.
Group
Trigger
Related Commands
TRIGger:A:PULse:RUNT:WIDth
Syntax 1 (Four-- channel instruments)
TRIGger:A:PULse:RUNT:WHEn {LOGIc|OCCurs|WIDERthan}
Syntax 2 (Two-- channel instruments)
TRIGger:A:PULse:RUNT:WHEn {OCCurs|WIDERthan}
Syntax 3
TRIGger:A:PULse:RUNT:WHEn?
Arguments
H LOGIc
This argument specifies a trigger event when a runt occurs and the
AND of the logic channels. This argument is not available for two-channel instruments.
H OCCurs
This argument specifies a trigger event if a runt of any detectable
width occurs.
H WIDERthan
This specifies a trigger event if a runt greater than the specified width
occurs.
Example 1
TRIGger:A:PULse:RUNT:WHEn?
This query might return
:TRIGGER:A:PULSE:RUNT:WHEN OCCURS
indicating that a runt trigger will occur if the instrument detects a runt
of any detectable width.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 714 --
Example 2
TRIGger:A:PULse:RUNT:WHEn WIDERthan
This command sets the runt trigger to occur when the instrument detects a runt in a pulse wider than the specified width.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 715 --
TRIGger:A:PULse:RUNT:WIDth
Description
This command sets or queries the minimum width for an A Pulse Runt
trigger. This command is equivalent to selecting Runt Setup from the
Trig menu and then setting the Width.
Group
Trigger
Related Commands
TRIGger:A:PULse:RUNT:WHEn
Syntax 1
TRIGger:A:PULse:RUNT:WIDth <NR3>
Syntax 2
TRIGger:A:PULse:RUNT:WIDth?
Argument
H <NR3>
This specifies the minimum width, in seconds.
Example 1
TRIGger:A:PULse:RUNT:WIDth?
This query might return
:TRIGGER:A:PULSE:RUNT:WIDTH 2.0000E-09
indicating that the minimum width of a pulse runt trigger is 2 ns.
Example 2
TRIGger:A:PULse:RUNT:WIDth 15E-6
This command sets the minimum width of the pulse runt trigger to
15 µs.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 716 --
TRIGger:A:PULse:RUNT?
Description
This query--only command returns the current A runt trigger parameters. This command query is equivalent to selecting Runt Setup from
the Trig menu and then viewing the current settings.
Group
Trigger
Related Commands
TRIGger:A:PULse:GLItch?, TRIGger:A:PULse:TIMEOut?,
TRIGger:A:PULse:TRANsition?, TRIGger:A:PULse:WIDth?
Syntax
TRIGger:A:PULse:RUNT?
Example
TRIGger:A:PULse:RUNT?
This query might return
:TRIGGER:A:PULSE:RUNT:LOGIC:INPUT:CH1 HIGH;
CH2 X; CH3 X; CH4 LOW;:TRIGGER:A:PULSE:RUNT:LOGIC:THRESHOLD:CH11.2000;
CH2 1.2000;CH3 1.2000;CH4 1.2000;
:TRIGGER:A:PULSE:RUNT:POLARITY POSITIVE
:THRESHOLD:HIGH 1.2000;
LOW 800.0000E-3;:TRIGGER:A:PULSE:RUNT:WHEN OCCURS;WIDTH 2.0000E-9.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 717 --
TRIGger:A:PULse:SOUrce
Description
This command sets or queries the source for the A pulse trigger. This
source parameter applies to all classes of pulse triggers. This command
is equivalent to selecting A Event (Main) Trigger Setup from the Trig
menu, selecting the pulse type (Glitch, Width, Runt, Timeout, or Transition), and then choosing the desired channel from the Source pull-down list.
Group
Trigger
Related Commands
TRIGger:A:EDGE:SOUrce
Syntax 1
TRIGger:A:PULse:SOUrce CH<x>
Syntax 2
TRIGger:A:PULse:SOUrce?
Argument
H CH<x>
This specifies one of the input channels, which range from 1 through
4 for four--channel instruments and 1 through 2 for two--channel instruments.
Example 1
TRIGger:A:PULse:SOUrce?
This query might return
:TRIGGER:A:PULSE:SOURCE CH2
indicating that channel 2 is the source for the A pulse trigger.
Example 2
TRIGger:A:PULse:SOUrce CH4
This command sets channel 4 as the source for the A pulse trigger.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 718 --
TRIGger:A:PULse:TIMEOut:POLarity
Description
This command sets or queries the polarity for the A pulse timeout trigger. This command is equivalent to selecting Timeout Setup from the
Trig menu and setting the desired polarity in the Trigger When box.
Group
Trigger
Related Commands
TRIGger:A:PULse:TIMEOut?
Syntax 1
TRIGger:A:PULse:TIMEOut:POLarity {STAYSHigh|STAYSLow|EITher}
Syntax 2
TRIGger:A:PULse:TIMEOut:POLarity?
Arguments
H STAYSHigh
This indicates that a pulse edge must stay high (positive) for the required time period to permit timeout triggering to occur. This is the
default polarity.
H STAYSLow
This indicates that a pulse edge must stay low (negative) for the required time period to permit timeout triggering to occur.
H EITher
This indicates that the polarity of the timeout trigger can stay either
high or low (positive or negative) for the required time period to permit time out triggering to occur.
Example 1
TRIGger:A:PULse:TIMEOut:POLarity?
This query might return
:TRIGGER:A:PULSE:TIMEOUT:POLARITY EITHER
indicating that the polarity of the A timeout trigger can be either positive or negative.
Example 2
TRIGger:A:PULse:TIMEOut:POLarity STAYSHigh
This command sets the polarity of the A timeout trigger to positive.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 719 --
TRIGger:A:PULse:TIMEOut:TIMe
Description
This command sets or queries the pulse timeout trigger time (measured
in seconds). This command is equivalent to selecting Timeout Setup
from the Trig menu and setting a value for Timer.
Group
Trigger
Related Commands
TRIGger:A:PULse:TIMEOut?
Syntax 1
TRIGger:A:PULse:TIMEOut:TIMe <NR3>
Syntax 2
TRIGger:A:PULse:TIMEOut:TIMe?
Argument
H <NR3>
This argument specifies the timeout period in seconds.
Example 1
TRIGger:A:PULse:TIMEOut:TIMe?
This query might return
:TRIGGER:A:PULSE:TIMEOUT:TIME 2.0000E-9
indicating that the timeout is currently set to 2 ns.
Example 2
TRIGger:A:PULse:TIMEOut:TIMe 3.134E-6
This command sets the timeout to 3.134 µs.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 720 --
TRIGger:A:PULse:TIMEOut?
Description
This query--only command returns the polarity and time--out duration
for the A pulse timeout trigger. This command is equivalent to selecting
Timeout Setup from the Trig menu and viewing the polarity in the Trigger When box and the Timer setting.
Group
Trigger
Related Commands
TRIGger:A:PULse:TIMEOut:POLarity,
TRIGger:A:PULse:TIMEOut:TIMe
Syntax
TRIGger:A:PULse:TIMEOut?
Example
TRIGger:A:PULse:TIMEOut?
This query might return
:TRIGGER:A:PULSE:TIMEOUT:POLARITY STAYSHIGH;TIME 2.0000E-9
indicating that the polarity setting for the A pulse trigger is STAYSHIGH (positive) and the timeout duration is 2 ns.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 721 --
TRIGger:A:PULse:TRANsition:DELTATime
Description
This command sets or queries the delta time used in calculating the
transition value for the transition trigger. This is equivalent to selecting
Transition Setup from the Trig menu and setting the Time.
Group
Trigger
Related Commands
TRIGger:A:PULse:TRANsition:POLarity, TRIGger:A:PULse:TRANsition:THReshold?
Syntax 1
TRIGger:A:PULse:TRANsition:DELTATime <NR3>
Syntax 2
TRIGger:A:PULse:TRANsition:DELTATime?
Argument
H <NR3>
This specifies the delta time, in seconds.
Example 1
TRIGger:A:PULse:TRANsition:DELTATime?
This query might return
:TRIGGER:A:PULSE:TRANSITION:DELTATIME
2.0000E-09
indicating that the delta time of the transition trigger is set to 2 ns.
Example 2
TRIGger:A:PULse:TRANsition:DELTATime 15E-6
This command sets the delta time of the transition trigger to 15 µs.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 722 --
TRIGger:A:PULse:TRANsition:POLarity
Description
This command sets or queries the polarity for the transition trigger. This
command is equivalent to selecting Transition Setup from the Trig
menu and choosing from the Polarity pull--down list.
Group
Trigger
Related Commands
TRIGger:A:PULse:TRANsition:DELTATime
Syntax 1
TRIGger:A:PULse:TRANsition:POLarity {POSITIVe|NEGative|EITher}
Syntax 2
TRIGger:A:PULse:TRANsition:POLarity?
Arguments
H POSITIVe
This indicates that a pulse edge must traverse from the lower (most
negative) to higher (most positive) level for transition triggering to
occur.
H NEGative
This indicates that a pulse edge must traverse from the upper (most
positive) to lower (most negative) level for transition triggering to
occur.
H EITher
This indicates either positive or negative polarity.
Example 1
TRIGger:A:PULse:TRANsition:POLarity?
This query might return
:TRIGGER:A:PULSE:TRANSITION:POLARITY EITHER
indicating that the polarity can be either positive or negative.
Example 2
TRIGger:A:PULse:TRANsition:DeltaTime NEGative
This command sets the transition polarity to negative.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 723 --
TRIGger:A:PULse:TRANsition:THReshold:BOTh
Description
This command (no query form) sets the upper and lower thresholds for
the transition trigger. This command is equivalent to selecting Transition Setup from the Trig menu and setting the desired Upper Level and
Lower Level voltages.
Group
Trigger
Related Commands
TRIGger:A:PULse:TRANsition:THReshold:HIGH,
TRIGger:A:PULse:TRANsition:THReshold:LOW
Syntax 1
TRIGger:A:PULse:TRANsition:THReshold:BOTh
{TTL|ECL}
Arguments
H TTL
This sets the upper threshold to 1.2 V and the lower threshold to 800
mV, which represent the nominal TTL voltage levels.
H ECL
This sets the upper threshold to --1.1 V and the lower threshold to --1.5
V, which represent the nominal ECL voltage levels.
Example 1
TRIGger:A:PULse:TRANsition:THReshold:BOTh TTL
This command sets the thresholds of the transition trigger to the nominal TTL voltage levels.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 724 --
TRIGger:A:PULse:TRANsition:THReshold:HIGH
Description
This command sets or queries the upper (most positive) transition trigger threshold. This command is equivalent to selecting Transition Setup
from the Trig menu and then setting the desired Upper Level voltage.
Group
Trigger
Related Commands
TRIGger:A:PULse:TRANsition:THReshold:LOW
Syntax 1
TRIGger:A:PULse:TRANsition:THReshold:HIGH
<NR3>
Syntax 2
TRIGger:A:PULse:TRANsition:THReshold:HIGH?
Argument
H <NR3>
This specifies the upper threshold, in volts.
Example 1
TRIGger:A:PULse:TRANsition:THReshold:HIGH?
This query might return
:TRIGGER:A:PULSE:TRANSITION:THRESHOLD:HIGH
2.0000E+00
indicating that the upper limit of the pulse transition trigger is 2 V.
Example 2
TRIGger:A:PULse:TRANsition:THReshold:HIGH
120E-3
This command sets the upper limit of the pulse transition trigger to
120 mV.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 725 --
TRIGger:A:PULse:TRANsition:THReshold:LOW
Description
This command sets or queries the lower (most negative) transition trigger threshold. This command is equivalent to selecting Transition Setup
from the Trig menu and setting the desired Lower Level voltage.
Group
Trigger
Related Commands
TRIGger:A:PULse:TRANsition:THReshold:HIGH
Syntax 1
TRIGger:A:PULse:TRANsition:THReshold:LOW <NR3>
Syntax 2
TRIGger:A:PULse:TRANsition:THReshold:LOW?
Argument
H <NR3>
This specifies the lower threshold, in volts.
Example 1
TRIGger:A:PULse:TRANsition:THReshold:LOW?
This query might return
:TRIGGER:A:PULSE:TRANSITION:THRESHOLD:LOW
50.0000E-03
indicating that the lower limit of the transition trigger is 50 mV.
Example 2
TRIGger:A:PULse:TRANsition:THReshold:LOW 20E-3
This command sets the lower limit of the transition trigger to 20 mV.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 726 --
TRIGger:A:PULse:TRANsition:THReshold?
Description
This query--only command returns the upper and lower threshold limits
for the transition time trigger. This command is equivalent to selecting
Transition Setup from the Trig menu and viewing the Upper Level and
Lower Level voltage settings.
Group
Trigger
Related Commands
TRIGger:A:PULse:TRANsition:DELTATime,
TRIGger:A:PULse:TRANsition:POLarity
Syntax
TRIGger:A:PULse:TRANsition:THReshold?
Example
TRIGger:A:PULse:TRANsition:THReshold?
This query might return
:TRIGGER:A:PULSE:TRANSITION:THRESHOLD:HIGH
1.2000;LOW 800.0000E-3
indicating the upper and lower threshold limits for the transition time
trigger.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 727 --
TRIGger:A:PULse:TRANsition:WHEn
Description
This command sets or queries whether to check for a transitioning signal that is faster or slower than the specified delta time. This is equivalent to selecting Transition Setup from the Trig menu and choosing the
Trigger When Transition Time setting.
Group
Trigger
Related Commands
TRIGger:A:PULse:TRANsition:DELTATime, TRIGger:A:PULse:TRANsition:POLarity, TRIGger:A:PULse:TRANsition:THReshold?
Syntax 1
TRIGger:A:PULse:TRANsition:WHEn {FASTERthan|SLOWERthan}
Syntax 2
TRIGger:A:PULse:TRANsition:WHEn?
Arguments
H FASTERthan
This sets the trigger to occur when the transitioning signal is faster
than the set volts/second rate.
H SLOWERthan
This sets the trigger to occur when the transitioning signal is slower
than the set volts/second rate.
Example 1
TRIGger:A:PULse:TRANsition:WHEn?
This query might return
:TRIGGER:A:PULSE:TRANSITION:WHEN FASTERTHAN
indicating that the transition triggers when the transitioning signal is
faster than the set volts/second rate.
Example 2
TRIGger:A:PULse:TRANsition:WHEn SLOWERthan
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 728 --
TRIGger:A:PULse:TRANsition?
Description
This query--only command returns delta time, polarity, and both upper
and lower threshold limits for the transition time trigger. This command
is equivalent to selecting Transition Setup from the Trig menu and then
viewing the current transition settings.
Group
Trigger
Related Commands
TRIGger:A:TYPe, TRIGger:A:PULse:CLAss,
TRIGger:A:PULse:GLItch, TRIGger:A:PULse:RUNT,
TRIGger:A:PULse:TIMEOut, TRIGger:A:PULse:WIDth
Syntax
TRIGger:A:PULse:TRANsition?
Example
TRIGger:A:PULse:TRANsition?
This query might return
:TRIGGER:A:PULSE:TRANSITION:DELTATIME
2.0000E-9;POLARITY POSITIVE;THRESHOLD:HIGH
1.2000;LOW 800.0000E-3;:TRIGGER:A:PULSE:TRANSITION:WHEN SLOWERTHAN
indicating the current transition time trigger settings.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 729 --
TRIGger:A:PULse:WIDth:HIGHLimit
Description
This command sets or queries the upper limit for the width trigger. This
command is equivalent to selecting Width Setup from the Trig menu
and setting the Upper Limit.
Group
Trigger
Related Commands
TRIGger:A:PULse:WIDth?
Syntax 1
TRIGger:A:PULse:WIDth:HIGHLimit <NR3>
Syntax 2
TRIGger:A:PULse:WIDth:HIGHLimit?
Argument
H <NR3>
This specifies the width trigger upper limit in seconds.
Example 1
TRIGger:A:PULse:WIDth:HIGHLimit?
This query might return
:TRIGGER:A:PULSE:WIDTH:HIGHLIMIT 2.0000E-9
indicating that the upper limit of the width trigger is set to 2 ns.
Example 2
TRIGger:A:PULse:WIDth:HIGHLimit 5.0E-6
This command sets the upper limit of the width trigger to 5 µs.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 730 --
TRIGger:A:PULse:WIDth:LOWLimit
Description
This command sets or queries the lower limit for the width trigger. This
command is equivalent to selecting Width Setup from the Trig menu
and setting the pulse Lower Limit.
Group
Trigger
Related Commands
TRIGger:A:PULse:WIDth?
Syntax 1
TRIGger:A:PULse:WIDth:LOWLimit <NR3>
Syntax 2
TRIGger:A:PULse:WIDth:LOWLimit?
Argument
H <NR3>
This specifies the A pulse width trigger lower limit, in seconds.
Example 1
TRIGger:A:PULse:WIDth:LOWLimit?
This query might return
:TRIGGER:A:PULSE:WIDTH:LOWLIMIT 1.0000E-9
indicating that the lower limit of the width trigger is set to 1 ns.
Example 2
TRIGger:A:PULse:WIDth:LOWLimit 2.0E-6
This command sets the lower limit of the width trigger to 2 µs.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 731 --
TRIGger:A:PULse:WIDth:POLarity
Description
This command sets or queries the polarity for the width trigger. This
command is equivalent to selecting Width Setup from the Trig menu
and selecting the Polarity.
Group
Trigger
Related Commands
TRIGger:A:PULse:WIDth?
Syntax 1
TRIGger:A:PULse:WIDth:POLarity {NEGAtive|POSITIVe}
Syntax 2
TRIGger:A:PULse:WIDth:POLarity?
Arguments
H NEGAtive
This specifies a negative pulse.
H POSITIVe
This specifies a positive pulse.
Example 1
TRIGger:A:PULse:WIDth:POLarity?
This query might return
:TRIGGER:A:PULSE:WIDTH:POLARITY POSITIVE
indicating a positive pulse.
Example 2
TRIGger:A:PULse:WIDth:POLarity NEGAtive
This command sets the pulse polarity to negative.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 732 --
TRIGger:A:PULse:WIDth:WHEn
Description
This command sets or queries whether to trigger on a pulse width that
falls outside (or within) the specified range of limits. You can define or
query trigger pulse width upper and lower limits using the TRIGger:A:PULse:WIDth:HIGHLimit and TRIGger:A:PULse:WIDth:LOWLimit commands.
This command is equivalent to selecting Width Setup from the Trig
menu and then choosing from the Trig When drop--down list.
Group
Trigger
Related Commands
TRIGger:A:PULse:WIDth:HIGHLimit, TRIGger:A:PULse:WIDth:LOWLimit
Syntax 1
TRIGger:A:PULse:WIDth:WHEn {OUTside|WIThin}
Syntax 2
TRIGger:A:PULse:WIDth:WHEn?
Arguments
H OUTside
This argument causes a trigger event the duration of the pulse is greater than the high limit or less than the low limit specified. The high and
low limits are specified with the TRIGger:A:PULse:WIDth:HIGHLimit and TRIGger:A:PULse:WIDth:LOWLimit commands respectively.
H WIThin
This argument causes a trigger event when the duration of the pulse is
within the high and low limits. The high and low limits are specified
with the TRIGger:A:PULse:WIDth:HIGHLimit and TRIGger:A:PULse:WIDth:LOWLimit command respectively.
Example 1
TRIGger:A:PULse:WIDth:WHEn?
This query might return
:TRIGGER:A:PULSE:WIDTH:WHEN OUTSIDE
indicating the conditions for generating a width trigger.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 733 --
Example 2
TRIGger:A:PULse:WIDth:WHEn WIThin
This command specifies that the duration of the A pulse will fall within
defined high and low limits.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 734 --
TRIGger:A:PULse:WIDth?
Description
This query--only command returns the width parameters for the A pulse
width trigger. This command is equivalent to selecting Width Setup
from the Trig menu and then viewing the current pulse width trigger
Lower Limit, Upper Limit, Trig When and Polarity settings.
Group
Trigger
Related Commands
TRIGger:A:PULse:WIDth:HIGHLimit,
TRIGger:A:PULse:WIDth:LOWLimit,
TRIGger:A:PULse:WIDth:POLarity,
TRIGger:A:PULse:WIDth:WHEn
Syntax 1
TRIGger:A:PULse:WIDth
Example
TRIGger:A:PULse:WIDth?
This query might return
:TRIGGER:A:PULSE:WIDTH:LOWLIMIT 2.0000E-9;
HIGHLIMIT 2.0000E-9;WHEN WITHIN;
POLARITY POSITIVE
as the current A width trigger parameters.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 735 --
TRIGger:A:PULse:WINdow:LOGIc:INPUT:CH<x>
Description
This command sets or queries the A window logic input for the channel
specified by <x>, which can be 1, 2, 3, or 4. This is equivalent to selecting Window Setup from the Trig menu, selecting Logic in the Trigger
When box, and selecting a logic (H, L, or X) for the channel. While all
channels can be set or queried, only channels 3 and 4 can be used if the
window source is channel 1 or 2. Similarly, only channels 1 and 2 can
be used if the window source is channel 3 or 4.
Note: This command is not available in two--channel instruments.
Group
Trigger
Syntax 1
TRIgger:A:PULse:WINdow:LOGIc:INPUT:CH<x>
{HIGH\LOW\X}
Syntax 2
TRIgger:A:PULse:RUNT:LOGIc:INPUT:CH<x>?
Arguments
H HIGH
This argument specifies logic high.
H LOW
This argument specifies logic low.
H X
This argument specifies a Don’t Care state.
Example 1
TRIgger:A:PULse:WINdow:LOGIc:INPUT:CH2?
This query might return
:TRIGGER:A:PULSE:WINDOW:LOGIC:INPUT CH2 LOW
indicating that the window logic trigger input is set to logic low for
channel 2.
Example 2
TRIgger:A:PULse:WINdow:LOGIc:INPUT:CH3 HIGH
This command sets the window logic trigger input to logic high for
channel 3.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 736 --
TRIGger:A:PULse:WINdow:LOGIc:INPUT?
Description
This query--only command returns the current window trigger logic
input parameters.
Note: This command is not available in two--channel instruments.
Group
Trigger
Syntax
TRIGger:A:PULse:WINdow:LOGIcINPUT?
Example
TRIGger:A:PULse:WINdow:LOGIc:INPUT?
This query might return
:TRIGGER:A:PULSE:WINDOW:LOGIC:INPUT:CH1 HIGH;
CH2 X; CH3 X; CH4 LOW.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 737 --
TRIgger:A:PULse:WINdow:LOGIc:THReshold:CH<x>
Description
This command sets or queries the window logic trigger threshold for
the channel specified by <x>, which can be 1, 2, 3, or 4. This is equivalent to selecting Window Setup from the Trig menu and setting the window logic threshold in the Trigger When box. While all channels can be
set or queried, only channels 3 and 4 can be used if the window source
is channel 1 or 2. Similarly, only channels 1 and 2 can be used if the
window source is channel 3 or 4.
Note: This command is not available in two--channel instruments.
Group
Trigger
Syntax 1
TRIGger:A:PULse:WINdow:LOGIc:THReshold:CH<x>
<NR3>
Syntax 2
TRIGger:A:PULse:WINdow:LOGIc:THReshold:CH<x>?
Argument
H <NR3>
This argument specifies the window logic trigger threshold in volts.
Example 1
TRIGger:A:PULse:WINdow:LOGIc:THReshold:CH1?
This query might return
:TRIGGER:A:PULSE:WINDOW:LOGIC:THRESHOLD:CH1
0.5000
indicating that the window logic trigger threshold is set to 0.5 V for
channel 1.
Example 2
TRIGger:A:PULse:WINdow:LOGIc:THReshold:CH3 0.5
This command sets the window logic trigger threshold to 0.5 V for
channel 3.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 738 --
TRIGger:A:PULse:WINdow:LOGIc?
Description
This query--only command returns the current window trigger logic
parameters.
Note: This command is not available in two--channel instruments.
Group
Trigger
Syntax
TRIGger:A:PULse:WINdow:LOGIc?
Example
TRIGger:A:PULse:WINdow:LOGIc?
This query might return
:TRIGGER:A:PULSE:WINDOW:LOGIC:INPUT:CH1 HIGH;
CH2 X; CH3 X; CH4 LOW;:TRIGGER:A:PULSE:WINDOW:LOGIC:THRESHOLD:CH1 1.2000;CH2 1.2000;CH3
1.2000;CH4 1.2000.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 739 --
TRIGger:A:PULse:WINdow:THReshold:BOTh
Description
This command (no query form) sets the upper and lower switching
thresholds for the window trigger. This command is equivalent to selecting Window Setup from the Trig menu and then setting the Upper
Level and Lower Level voltages.
Group
Trigger
Syntax
TRIGger:A:PULse:WINdow:THReshold:BOTh
{TTL|ECL}
Arguments
H TTL
This argument sets the upper threshold to 2.0 V and the lower threshold to 800 mV, which are the nominal TTL voltage levels.
H ECL
This argument sets the upper threshold to --1.1 V and the lower
threshold to --1.5 V, which are the nominal ECL voltage levels.
Example
TRIGger:A:PULse:WINdow:THReshold:BOTh TTL
This command sets the threshold of the window trigger to the nominal
TTL voltage levels.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 740 --
TRIGger:A:PULse:WINdow:THReshold:HIGH
Description
This command sets or queries the upper limit for the pulse window trigger. This command is equivalent to selecting Window Setup from the
Trig menu and setting the window trigger Upper Level voltage.
Group
Trigger
Syntax 1
TRIGger:A:PULse:WINdow:THReshold:HIGH <NR3>
Syntax 2
TRIGger:A:PULse:WINdow:THReshold:HIGH?
Argument
H <NR3>
This specifies the threshold value in volts.
Example 1
TRIGger:A:PULse:WINdow:THReshold:HIGH?
This query might return
:TRIGGER:A:PULSE:WINDOW:THRESHOLD:HIGH
1.1000E+00
indicating that the upper limit of the window trigger is set to 1.1 V.
Example 2
TRIGger:A:PULse:WINdow:THReshold:HIGH 2.0
This command sets the upper limit of the pulse window trigger to 2 V.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 741 --
TRIGger:A:PULse:WINdow:THReshold:LOW
Description
This command sets or queries the lower limit for the window trigger.
This command is equivalent to selecting Window Setup from the Trig
menu and setting the Lower Level voltage.
Group
Trigger
Syntax 1
TRIGger:A:PULse:WINdow:THReshold:LOW <NR3>
Syntax 2
TRIGger:A:PULse:WINdow:THReshold:LOW?
Argument
H <NR3>
This specifies the threshold value in volts.
Example 1
TRIGger:A:PULse:WINdow:THReshold:LOW?
This query might return
:TRIGGER:A:PULSE:WINDOW:THRESHOLD:LOW
1.2000E-01
indicating that the lower limit of the window trigger is currently set to
120 mV.
Example 2
TRIGger:A:PULse:WINdow:THReshold:LOW 0.8
This command sets the lower threshold of the window trigger to 0.8 V.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 742 --
TRIGger:A:PULse:WINdow:THReshold?
Description
This query--only command returns the upper and lower thresholds for
the window trigger. This command query is equivalent to selecting
Window Setup from the Trig menu and viewing the window trigger
Upper Level and Lower Level settings.
Group
Trigger
Syntax
TRIGger:A:PULse:WINdow:THReshold?
Example
TRIGger:A:PULse:WINdow:THReshold?
This query might return
:TRIGGER:A:PULSE:WINDOW:THRESHOLD:HIGH
1.2000;LOW 800.0000E-3
indicating that the upper threshold is 1.2 V and that the lower threshold
is 800 mV.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 743 --
TRIGger:A:PULse:WINdow:TYPe
Description
This command sets or queries the window trigger type. This command
is equivalent to selecting Window Setup from the Trig menu and selecting Outside Limits or Inside Limits in the Trigger When section.
Group
Trigger
Syntax 1
TRIGger:A:PULse:WINdow:TYPe {INSide|OUTside}
Syntax 2
TRIGger:A:PULse:WINdow:TYPe?
Arguments
H INSide
This argument causes a trigger event to occur when a pulse enters the
window defined by the upper and lower thresholds.
H OUTside
This argument causes a trigger event to occur when a pulse goes outside the window defined by the upper and lower thresholds.
Example 1
TRIGger:A:PULse:WINdow:TYPe?
This query might return
:TRIGGER:A:PULSE:WINDOW:TYPE INSIDE
indicating that the window type is set to inside, which will cause a trigger event when a pulse enters the window defined by the upper and
lower thresholds.
Example 2
TRIGger:A:PULse:WINdow:TYPe OUTside
This command sets the window type to outside.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 744 --
TRIGger:A:PULse:WINdow:WHEn
Description
This command sets or queries the window trigger violation qualification. This command is equivalent to selecting Window Setup from the
Trig menu and selecting Logic, Occurs, or Wider than in the Trigger
When box.
Group
Trigger
Related Commands
Syntax 1
TRIGger:A:PULseWINdow:WHEn {LOGIc|OCCurs|WIDERthan}
Syntax 2
TRIGger:A:PULse:WINdow:WHEn?
Arguments
H LOGIc
This argument specifies a trigger event when a window violation occurs on the AND of the logic channels.
H OCCurs
This argument specifies a trigger event if any detectable window
violation occurs.
H WIDERthan
This specifies a trigger event if a window violation greater than the
specified width occurs.
Example 1
TRIGger:A:PULse:WINdow:WHEn?
This query might return
:TRIGGER:A:PULSE:WINdow:WHEN OCCURS
indicating that a trigger will occur if the instrument detects any window
violation.
Example 2
TRIGger:A:PULse:WINdow:WHEn OCCurs
This command sets the widow violation qualifier to OCCurs, which
causes a trigger to occur when the instrument detects any window
violation.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 745 --
TRIgger:A:PULse:WINdow:WIDTH
Description
This command sets or queries the minimum width for a window violation. This command is equivalent to selecting Window Setup from the
Trig menu, selecting Wider than in the Trigger When box, and setting
the Width.
Group
Trigger
Syntax 1
TRIGger:A:PULse:WINdow:WIDTH <NR3>
Syntax 2
TRIGger:A:PULse:WINdow:WIDTH?
Argument
H <NR3>
This argument specifies the minimum width in seconds.
Example 1
TRIGger:A:PULse:WINdow:WIDTH?
This query might return
:TRIGGER:A:PULSE:WINdow:WIDTH 2.0000E-09
indicating that the minimum width of a valid window violation is 2 ns.
Example 2
TRIGger:A:PULse:WINdow:WIDTH 15E-9
This command sets the minimum width of a valid window violation to
15 ns.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 746 --
TRIGger:A:PULse:WINdow?
Description
This query--only command returns the current window trigger parameters.
Group
Trigger
Syntax
TRIGger:A:PULse:WINdow?
Example
TRIGger:A:PULse:WINdow?
This query might return
:TRIGGER:A:PULSE:WINDOW:TYPE INSIDE;
WHEN OCCURS;WIDTH 2.0000e-9;
LOGIC:INPUT:CH1 HIGH;CH2 X; CH3 X; CH4 LOW;
:TRIGGER:A:PULSE:WINDOW:LOGIC:THRESHOLD:CH1
1.2000;CH2 1.2000;CH3 1.2000;CH4 1.2000;
:TRIGGER:A:PULSE:WINDOW:THRESHOLD:HIGH
1.2000;LOW 800.0000E-3.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 747 --
TRIGger:A:PULse?
Description
This query--only command returns the A pulse trigger parameters.
Group
Trigger
Related Commands
TRIGger:A:EDGE?, TRIGger:A:LOGIc?
Syntax
TRIGger:A:PULse?
Example
TRIGger:A:PULse?
This query might return
:TRIGGER:A:PULSE:CLASS GLITCH;SOURCE CH1;
GLITCH:WIDTH 2.0000E-9;
TRIGIF ACCEPT;POLARITY POSITIVE;
:TRIGGER:A:PULSE:RUNT:POLARITY POSITIVE;
THRESHOLD:HIGH 1.2000;LOW 800.0000E-3;
:TRIGGER:A:PULSE:RUNT:WHEN OCCURS;
WIDTH 2.0000E-9;
:TRIGGER:A:PULSE:TRANSITION:DELTATIME
2.0000E-9;POLARITY POSITIVE;
THRESHOLD:HIGH 1.2000;LOW 800.0000E-3;
:TRIGGER:A:PULSE:TRANSITION:WHEN SLOWERTHAN;
:TRIGGER:A:PULSE:WIDTH:LOWLIMIT 2.0000E-9;
HIGHLIMIT 2.0000E-9;WHEN WITHIN;
POLARITY POSITIVE;:TRIGGER:A:PULSE:TIMEOUT:POLARITY STAYSHIGH;TIME 2.0000E-9
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 748 --
TRIGger:A:TYPe
Description
This command sets or queries the type of A trigger. The five types of
triggers are of Edge, Logic, Pulse, Video, and Communication (Option
SM). Logic and Pulse triggers contain classes. Logic triggers consist of
State and Pattern classes; Pulse triggers consist of Glitch, Runt, Width,
Transition, and Timeout classes. Once you have set the trigger type,
you may also need to identify the associated trigger class. For details on
selecting Logic and Pulse trigger classes, see TRIGger:A:LOGIc:CLAss and TRIGger:A:PULse:CLAss respectively. This command is
similar to selecting A Event (Main) Trigger Setup from the Trig menu
and then selecting the desired Trigger Type.
Group
Trigger
Related Commands
TRIGger:A:EDGE, TRIGger:A:LOGIc:CLAss, TRIGger:A:PULse:CLAss,
Syntax 1
TRIGger:A:TYPe {EDGE|LOGIc|PULse|VIDeo|
COMMunication}
Syntax 2
TRIGger:A:TYPe?
Arguments
H EDGE
This is a normal trigger. A trigger event occurs when a signal passes
through a specified voltage level in a specified direction and is controlled by the TRIGger:A:EDGE commands.
H LOGIc
This specifies that a trigger occurs when specified conditions are met
and is controlled by the TRIGger:A:LOGIc commands.
H PULse
This specifies that a trigger occurs when a specified pulse is found
and is controlled by the TRIGger:A:PULse commands.
H VIDeo
This specifies that the trigger occurs when a video signal is found.
H COMMunication
This specifies that a trigger occurs when a communications signal is
found. Supports AMI, HDB3, B3ZS, B6ZS, B8ZS, CMI, MLT3,
Manchester, and NRZ encoded communications signals. COMMunication is available only if Option SM is installed.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 749 --
Example 1
TRIGger:A:TYPe EDGE
This command sets the A trigger type to EDGE.
Example 2
TRIGger:A:TYPe?
This query might return
:TRIGGER:A:TYPE PULSE
indicating that the A trigger type is a pulse trigger.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 750 --
TRIGger:A:VIDeo:CUSTom:FORMat
Description
This command sets or queries the video trigger format. Use this command only when the video format is set to custom.
Group
Trigger
Related Commands
Syntax 1
TRIGger:A:VIDeo:CUSTom:FORMat {INTERLAced|PROGressive}
Syntax 2
TRIGger:A:VIDeo:CUSTom:FORMat?
Arguments
H INTERLAced
This argument sets the format for interlaced video lines.
H PROGressive
This argument sets the format for progressive video lines.
Example 1
TRIGger:A:VIDeo:CUSTom:FORMat?
This query might return
:TRIGger:A:VIDeo:CUSTom:FORMat INTERLACED
indicating that interlaced is selected as the custom format for the A video trigger.
Example 2
TRIGger:A:VIDeo:CUSTom:FORMat PROGressive
This command sets the custom format for the A video trigger to progressive lines.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 751 --
TRIGger:A:VIDeo:CUSTom:SCAN
Description
This command sets or queries the horizontal line scan rate of the A video trigger. Use this command only when the video format is set to custom. This is equivalent to selecting Video Setup from the Trig menu,
setting Custom for Format, and selecting the Scan Rate from the drop-down menu.
Group
Trigger
Related Commands
Syntax 1
TRIGger:A:VIDeo:CUSTom:SCAN
{RATE1|RATE2|RATE3|RATE4|RATE5}
Syntax 2
TRIGger:A:VIDeo:CUSTom:SCAN?
Arguments
H RATE1
This argument sets the range of the video line scan rate to 15 kHz
through 20 kHz. This is the standard broadcast rate.
H RATE2
This argument sets the range of the video line scan rate to 20 kHz
through 25 kHz.
H RATE3
This argument sets the range of the video line scan rate to 25 kHz
through 35 kHz
H RATE4
This argument sets the range of the video line scan rate to 35 kHz
through 50 kHz
H RATE5
This argument sets the range of the video line scan rate to 50 kHz
through 65 kHz
Example 1
TRIGger:A:VIDeo:CUSTom:SCAN?
This query might return
:TRIGger:A:VIDeo:CUSTom:SCAN RATE2
indicating that the video line rate for the A trigger custom video is set
to Rate 2, which is 20 kHz to 23 kHz.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 752 --
Example 2
TRIGger:A:VIDeo:CUSTom:SCAN RATE1
This command sets the scan rate of the A trigger custom video to Rate
1, which is 15 kHz to 20 kHz (standard broadcast rate).
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 753 --
TRIGger:A:VIDeo:CUSTom?
This query only command returns the custom video parameters for the
A trigger.
Group
Trigger
Syntax
TRIGger:A:VIDeo:CUSTom?
Example 1
TRIGger:A:VIDeo:CUSTom?
This query might return the parameters
:TRIGGER:A:VIDEO:CUSTOM:FORMAT INTERLACED;
SCAN RATE1.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 754 --
TRIGger:A:VIDeo:FIELD
Description
This command sets or queries the video field or line that the trigger
detects.
Group
Trigger
Syntax 1
TRIGger:A:VIDeo:FIELD
{ODD|EVEN|FIELD1|FIELD2|ALLFields|ALLLines|NUMERic}
Syntax 2
TRIGger:A:VIDeo:FIELD?
Arguments
H ODD
This argument sets the instrument to trigger on interlaced video odd
fields.
H EVEN
This argument sets the instrument to trigger on interlaced video even
fields.
H FIELD1
This argument sets the instrument to trigger on interlaced video odd
fields (same as ODD).
H FIELD2
This argument sets the instrument to trigger on interlaced video even
fields (same as EVEN).
H ALLFields
This argument sets the instrument to trigger on all fields.
H ALLLines
This argument sets the instrument to trigger on all video lines.
H NUMERic
This argument sets the instrument to trigger on the video signal line
specified by the TRIGger:A:VIDeo:LINE command.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 755 --
Example 1
TRIGger:A:VIDeo:FIELD?
This query might return
:TRIGGER:A:VIDEO:FIELD ALLFIELDS
indicating that the A video will trigger on all video fields.
Example 2
TRIGger:A:VIDeo:FIELD EVEN
This command sets the A video trigger so that it will trigger on even
fields.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 756 --
TRIGger:A:VIDeo:HOLdoff:FIELD
Description
This command sets or queries the video trigger holdoff in terms of video fields.
Group
Trigger
Syntax 1
TRIGger:A:VIDeo:HOLdoff:FIELD <NR3>
Syntax 2
TRIGger:A:VIDeo:HOLdoff:FIELD?
Argument
H <NR3>
This argument is a real number from 0.0 to 8.5 in increments of 0.5.
The argument sets the number of fields that the instrument waits before re--arming the video trigger.
Example 1
TRIGger:A:VIDeo:HOLdoff:FIELD?
This query might return
:TRIGger:A:VIDeo:HOLdoff:FIELD 5
indicating that the instrument is set to wait 5 video fields before re-arming the trigger.
Example 2
TRIGger:A:VIDeo:HOLdoff:FIELD 4.5
This command sets the instrument to wait 4.5 video fields before re-arming the trigger.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 757 --
TRIGger:A:VIDeo:LINE
Description
This command sets or queries the video line number on which the instrument triggers. This command is equivalent to selecting Video Setup
from the Trig menu, selecting Line # in the Trigger on box, and setting
the line number. Use the TRIGger:A:VIDeo:FIELD command to actually trigger the instrument on the line that you specify with this command.
Group
Trigger
Related Commands
TRIGger:A:VIDeo:FIELD
Syntax 1
TRIGger:A:VIDeo:LINE <NR1>
Syntax 2
TRIGger:A:VIDeo:LINE?
Argument
H <NR1>
This argument is an integer that sets the video line number on which
the instrument triggers. The following table lists the valid choices,
depending on the active video standard.
Video Line Numbering Ranges
Video Standard
Line Number Range
CUSTOM
4–3000
NTSC
1–263 (odd) and 264--525 (even)
PAL
1–625
SECAM
1–625
HD480P60
1–520
HD720P60
1–750
HD1080I50
1–11235
HD1080I60
1–1125
HD1080P24
1–1125
HD1080P25
1–1125
HD1080SF24
1–1125
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 758 --
Example 1
TRIGger:A:VIDeo:LINE?
This query might return
:TRIGger:A:VIDeo:LINE 10
indicating that the instrument is set to trigger on line 10.
Example 2
TRIGger:A:VIDeo:LINE 23
This command sets the instrument to trigger on the line 23.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 759 --
TRIGger:A:VIDeo:POLarity
Description
This command sets or queries the polarity of the A video trigger.
Group
Trigger
Syntax 1
TRIGger:A:VIDeo:POLarity {INVERTed|NORMAl}
Syntax 2
TRIGger:A:VIDeo:POLarity?
Argument
H INVERTed
This argument sets the instrument to trigger on a positive video sync
pulse.
H NORMAl
This argument sets the instrument to trigger on a negative video sync
pulse.
Example 1
TRIGger:A:VIDeo:POLarity?
This query might return
:TRIGger:A:VIDeo:POLARITY INVERTED
indicating that the instrument is set to trigger on a positive video sync
pulse.
Example 2
TRIGger:A:VIDeo:POLarity NORMAl
This command sets the instrument to trigger on a negative video pulse.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 760 --
TRIGger:A:VIDeo:SCAN
Description
This command sets or queries the video trigger horizontal line scan
rate. This command is for compatibility with earlier instruments in the
TDS series. This command is the same as the TRIGger:A:VIDeo:CUSTom:SCAN command.
Group
Trigger
Related Commands
Syntax 1
TRIGger:A:VIDeo:SCAN
{RATE1|RATE2|RATE3|RATE4|RATE5}
Syntax 2
TRIGger:A:VIDeo:SCAN?
Arguments
H RATE1
This argument sets the range of the video line scan rate to 15 kHz
through 20 kHz. This is the standard broadcast rate.
H RATE2
This argument sets the range of the video line scan rate to 20 kHz
through 25 kHz.
H RATE3
This argument sets the range of the video line scan rate to 25 kHz
through 35 kHz.
H RATE4
This argument sets the range of the video line scan rate to 35 kHz
through 50 kHz.
H RATE5
This argument sets the range of the video line scan rate to 50 kHz
through 65 kHz.
Example 1
TRIGger:A:VIDeo:SCAN?
This query might return
:TRIGger:A:VIDeo:SCAN RATE2
indicating that the video line rate for the A trigger is set to Rate 2,
which is 20 kHz to 23 kHz.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 761 --
Example 2
TRIGger:A:VIDeo:SCAN RATE1
This command sets the scan rate of the A video trigger to Rate 1, which
is 15 kHz to 20 kHz (standard broadcast rate).
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 762 --
TRIGger:A:VIDeo:SOUrce
Description
This command sets or queries the source for the A video trigger. This
command is equivalent to selecting Video Setup from the Trig menu
and selecting a channel from the Source drop--down menu.
Group
Trigger
Syntax 1
TRIGger:A:VIDeo:SOUrce {CH<x>}
Syntax 2
TRIGger:A:VIDeo:SOUrce?
Arguments
H CH<x>
This argument specifies one of the input channels of the instrument as
the A video trigger. The value of x ranges from 1 through 4 for four-channel instruments or 1 through 2 for two--channel instruments.
Example 1
TRIGger:A:VIDeo:SOUrce?
This query might return
:TRIGger:A:VIDeo:SOURCE CH2
indicating that the source for the A video trigger is set to Channel 2.
Example 2
TRIGger:A:VIDeo:SOUrce CH1
This command sets the source for A video trigger to Channel 1.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 763 --
TRIGger:A:VIDeo:STANdard
Description
This command sets or queries the video standard.
Group
Trigger
Syntax 1
TRIGger:A:VIDeo:STANdard {CUStom|NTSc|PAL|
SCAM|HD480P60|HD720P60|HD1080I50|HD1080I60|
HD1080P24|HD1080P25|HD1080SF24}
Syntax 2
TRIGger:A:VIDeo:SOUrce?
Arguments
H CUStom
This argument sets the instrument to use custom video horizontal scan
rate parameters that you set with the TRIGger:A:VIDeo:SCAN command.
H NTSc
This argument sets the instrument to trigger on video signals that meet
the NTSC 525/60/2:1 standard (a line rate of 525 lines per frame and
a field rate of 60 Hz).
H PAL
This argument sets the instrument to trigger on video signals that meet
the NTSC 625/50/2:1 standard (a line rate of 625 lines per frame and
a field rate of 50 Hz).
H SECAM
This argument sets the instrument to trigger on video signals that meet
the SECAM standard.
H HD480P60
This argument sets the instrument to trigger on the HDTV 480/60
progressive format.
H HD720P60
This argument sets the instrument to trigger on the HDTV 720/60
progressive format.
H HD1080I50
This argument sets the instrument to trigger on HDTV 1080/50 interlaced format.
H HD1080I60
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 764 --
This argument sets the instrument to trigger on HDTV 1080/60 interlaced format.
H HD1080P24
This argument sets the instrument to trigger on HDTV 1080/24 progressive format.
H HD1080P25
This argument sets the instrument to trigger on HDTV 1080/25 progressive format.
H HD1080SF24
This argument sets the instrument to trigger on HDTV 1080/24 segmented frame format.
Example 1
TRIGger:A:VIDeo:STANdard?
This query might return
:TRIGger:A:VIDeo:SOURCE CH2
indicating that the source for the A video trigger is set to Channel 2.
Example 2
TRIGger:A:VIDeo:STANdard NTSC
This command sets the instrument to trigger on NTSC--standard video
signals.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 765 --
TRIGger:A:VIDeo?
This query only command returns the video parameters for the A trigger.
Group
Trigger
Syntax
TRIGger:A:VIDeo?
Example 1
TRIGger:A:VIDeo?
This query might return
:TRIGGER:A:VIDEO:CUSTOM:FORMAT INTERLACED;
SCAN RATE1;
:TRIGGER:A:VIDEO:FIELD ALLFIELDS;
HOLDOFF:FIELD 1.0000;TIME 20.0000E-3;
:TRIGGER:A:VIDEO:LINE 1;SCAN RATE1;
SOURCE CH1;STANDARD NTSC.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 766 --
TRIGger:B
Description
This command sets the B trigger level to 50% of minimum and maximum. The query form of this command returns the B trigger parameters. This command is similar to selecting B Event (Delayed) Trigger
Setup from the Trig menu and then viewing the current setups.
Group
Trigger
Related Commands
TRIGger:A
Syntax 1
TRIGger:B SETLevel
Syntax 2
TRIGger:B?
Argument
H SETLevel
This sets the B trigger level to 50% of MIN and MAX.
Example 1
TRIGger:B?
This query might return the following B trigger parameters:
:TRIGGER:B:STATE 0;TYPE EDGE;
LEVEL -220.0000E-3;BY TIME;EDGE:SOURCE
CH1;SLOPE RISE;COUPLING DC;
:TRIGGER:B:TIME 16.0000E-9;EVENTS:COUNT 2
Example 2
TRIGger:B SETLevel
This command sets the B trigger level to 50% of MIN and MAX.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 767 --
TRIGger:B:BY
Description
This command selects or returns whether the B trigger occurs after a
specified number of events or a specified period of time after the A
trigger. This is equivalent to selecting B Event (Delayed) Trigger Setup
from the Trig menu, selecting the A→B Seq tab, and then choosing
Trig After Time or Trig on nth event.
Note: The traditional Runs After functionality is now served by the
Horizontal Delay function. For details, see the HORIZontal[:MAIN]:DELay:MODe and HORIZontal[:MAIN]:DELay:TIMe
commands.
Group
Trigger
Related Commands
TRIGger:B:EVENTS:COUNt, TRIGger:B:TIMe, HORIZontal[:MAIN]:DELay:MODe, HORIZontal[:MAIN]:DELay:TIMe
Syntax 1
TRIGger:B:BY {EVENTS|TIMe}
Syntax 2
TRIGger:B:BY?
Arguments
H EVENTS
This sets the B trigger to take place following a set number of trigger
events after the A trigger occurs. The number of events is specified by
TRIGger:B:EVENTS:COUNt.
H TIMe
This sets the B trigger to occur a set time after the A trigger event.
The time period is specified by TRIGger:B:TIMe.
Example 1
TRIGger:B:BY?
This query might return
:TRIGGER:B:BY EVENTS
indicating that the B trigger takes place following a set number of trigger events after the A trigger occurs.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 768 --
Example 2
TRIGger:B:BY TIMe
This command sets the B trigger to occur at a set time after the A trigger event.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 769 --
TRIGger:B:EDGE:COUPling
Description
This command sets or queries the type of coupling for the B trigger.
This command is equivalent to selecting B Event (Delayed) Trigger
Setup from the Trig menu and choosing the setting from the Coupling
drop--down list.
Group
Trigger
Related Commands
TRIGger:B:EDGE?
Syntax 1
TRIGger:B:EDGE:COUPling {DC|ATRIGger|NOISErej}
Syntax 2
TRIGger:B:EDGE:COUPling?
Arguments
H ATRIGger
This sets the B trigger coupling to match the setting on the A trigger.
H DC
This selects DC trigger coupling.
H NOISErej
This selects DC low sensitivity.
Example 1
TRIGger:B:EDGE:COUPling?
This query might return
:TRIGGER:B:EDGE:COUPLING ATRIGGER
for the B trigger coupling.
Example 2
TRIGger:B:EDGE:COUPling DC
This command selects DC for the B trigger coupling.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 770 --
TRIGger:B:EDGE:SLOpe
Description
This command sets or queries the slope for the B trigger. This command is equivalent to selecting B Event (Delayed) Trigger Setup from
the Trig menu and choosing the Slope.
Group
Trigger
Related Commands
TRIGger:B:EDGE?
Syntax 1
TRIGger:B:EDGE:SLOpe {RISe|FALL}
Syntax 2
TRIGger:B:EDGE:SLOpe?
Arguments
H RISe
This argument specifies the trigger on the rising or positive edge of a
signal.
H FALL
This argument specifies the trigger on the falling or negative edge of a
signal.
Example 1
TRIGger:B:EDGE:SLOpe?
This query might return
:TRIGGER:B:EDGE:SLOPE RISE
indicating that the B edge trigger occurs on the rising slope.
Example 2
TRIGger:B:EDGE:SLOpe FALL
This command sets the B edge trigger to occur on the falling slope.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 771 --
TRIGger:B:EDGE:SOUrce
Description
This command sets or queries the source for the B trigger. This command is equivalent to selecting B Event (Delayed) Trigger Setup from
the Trig menu and choosing the desired setting from the Source drop-down list.
Group
Trigger
Related Commands
TRIGger:B:EDGE?
Syntax 1
TRIGger:B:EDGE:SOUrce {AUXiliary|CH<x>}
Syntax 2
TRIGger:B:EDGE:SOUrce?
Arguments
H AUXiliary
This specifies an external trigger (using the Auxiliary Trigger Input
connector, located on the rear panel of the instrument) as the B trigger
source.
H CH<x>
This specifies one of the input channels as the B trigger source. Input
channels are specified by x, which can range from 1 through 4 for
four--channel instruments or 1 through 2 for two--channel instruments.
Example 1
TRIGger:B:EDGE:SOUrce?
This query might return
:TRIGGER:B:EDGE:SOURCE CH1
indicating that the current input source for the B trigger is channel 1.
Example 2
TRIGger:B:EDGE:SOUrce CH4
This command sets channel 4 as the input source for the B trigger.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 772 --
TRIGger:B:EDGE?
Description
This query--only command returns the source, slope, and coupling for B
trigger. This command is equivalent to selecting B Event (Delayed)
Trigger Setup from the Trig menu and viewing the current Source,
Slope, and Coupling settings.
Group
Trigger
Related Commands
TRIGger:B:EDGE:COUPling, TRIGger:B:EDGE:SLOpe,
TRIGger:B:EDGE:SOUrce
Syntax
TRIGger:B:EDGE?
Example
TRIGger:B:EDGE?
This query might return
:TRIGGER:B:EDGE:SOURCE CH1;
SLOPE RISE;COUPLING DC
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 773 --
TRIGger:B:EVENTS:COUNt
Description
This command sets or queries the number of events that must occur
before the B trigger (when TRIG:DELay:BY is set to EVENTS). This
command is equivalent to selecting B Event (Delayed) Trigger Setup
from the Trig menu, selecting the A→B Seq tab, choosing Trig on nth
event, and setting the desired Trig Event value.
Group
Trigger
Related Commands
TRIGger:B:EVENTS?
Syntax 1
TRIGger:B:EVENTS:COUNt <NR1>
Syntax 2
TRIGger:B:EVENTS:COUNt?
Argument
H <NR1>
This is the number of B trigger events, which can range from 1 to
10,000,000.
Example 1
TRIGger:B:EVENTS:COUNt?
This query might return
:TRIGGER:B:EVENTS:COUNT 2
indicating that two events must occur after the A trigger before the B
trigger can occur.
Example 2
TRIGger:B:EVENTS:COUNt 4
This command specifies that the B trigger will occur four trigger events
after the A trigger.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 774 --
TRIGger:B:EVENTS?
Description
This query--only command returns the current B trigger events parameter. This command is equivalent to selecting B Event (Delayed) Trigger
Setup from the Trig menu, selecting the A→B Seq tab, choosing Trig
on nth event, and viewing the Trig Event setting.
Group
Trigger
Related Commands
TRIGger:B:EVENTS:COUNt
Syntax
TRIGger:B:EVENTS?
Example
TRIGger:B:EVENTS?
This query might return
:TRIGGER:B:EVENTS:COUNT 2
indicating that 2 events must occur before the B trigger occurs.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 775 --
TRIGger:B:LEVel
Description
This command sets or queries the level for the B trigger. This command
is equivalent to selecting B Event (Delayed) Trigger Setup from the
Trig menu, selecting the A→B Seq tab and setting the B Trig Level
voltage.
Group
Trigger
Related Commands
TRIGger:A:LEVEL, TRIGger:B, TRIGger:B:EDGE:SOUrce
Syntax 1
TRIGger:B:LEVel {ECL|TTL|<NR3>}
Syntax 2
TRIGger:B:LEVel?
Arguments
H ECL
This specifies a preset ECL level of --1.3 V.
H TTL
This specifies a preset TTL level of 1.4 V.
H <NR3>
This is the B trigger level, in volts.
Example 1
TRIGger:B:LEVel?
This query might return
:TRIGGER:B:LEVEL 173.0000E-03
indicating that the B trigger level is currently set at 173 mV.
Example 2
TRIGger:B:LEVel ECL
This command sets the B trigger level to --1.3 V.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 776 --
TRIGger:B:STATE
Description
This command sets or queries the state of B trigger activity. If the B
trigger state is on, the B trigger is part of the triggering sequence. If the
B trigger state is off, then only the A trigger causes the trigger event.
Group
Trigger
Related Commands
TRIGger:A:MODe
Syntax 1
TRIGger:B:STATE {ON|OFF|<NR1>}
Syntax 2
TRIGger:B:STATE?
Arguments
H ON
This argument indicates that the B trigger is active and in causes trigger events conjunction with the A trigger.
H OFF
This argument indicates that only the A trigger causes trigger events.
H <NR1>
A 0 turns off the B trigger; any other value activates the B trigger.
Example 1
TRIGger:B:STATE?
This query might return
:TRIGGER:B:STATE 0
indicating that the B trigger is inactive and that only the A trigger
causes trigger events.
Example 2
TRIGger:B:STATE ON
This command sets the B trigger to active, making it capable of causing
trigger events.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 777 --
TRIGger:B:TIMe
Description
This command sets or queries B trigger delay time. The B Trigger time
applies only if TRIGger:B:BY is set to TIMe. This command is equivalent to selecting B Event (Delayed) Trigger Setup from the Trig menu,
choosing the A→B Seq tab, and setting Trig Delay.
Group
Trigger
Related Commands
TRIGger:B:BY, TRIGger:B:EVENTS:COUNt
Syntax 1
TRIGger:B:TIMe <NR3>
Syntax 2
TRIGger:B:TIMe?
Argument
H <NR3>
This is the B trigger delay time in seconds.
Example 1
TRIGger:B:TIMe?
This query might return
:TRIGGER:B:TIME 16.0000E-9
indicating that the B trigger time is set to 16 ns.
Example 2
TRIGger:B:TIMe 4E-6
This command sets the B trigger delay time to 4 µs.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 778 --
TRIGger:B:TYPe
Description
This command sets or queries the type of B trigger. This command is
equivalent to selecting B Event (Delayed) Trigger Setup from the Trig
menu and choosing Edge.
Group
Trigger
Related Commands
TRIGger:A:TYPe
Syntax 1
TRIGger:B:TYPe EDGE
Syntax 2
TRIGger:B:TYPe?
Argument
H EDGE
This sets the B trigger type to edge.
Example 1
TRIGger:B:TYPe?
This query will return :TRIGGER:B:TYPE EDGE
Example 2
TRIGger:B:TYPe EDGE
This command sets the B trigger type to edge.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 779 --
TRIGger:STATE?
Description
This query--only command returns the current state of the triggering
system. This command is equivalent to viewing the trigger status LEDs
on the instrument front panel.
Group
Trigger
Related Commands
TRIGger:A:MODe
Syntax
TRIGger:STATE?
Outputs
H ARMed
This indicates that the instrument is acquiring pretrigger information.
All triggers are ignored when TRIGger:STATE is arming.
H AUTO
This indicates that the instrument is in the automatic mode and acquires data even in the absence of a trigger.
H DPO
This indicates that the instrument is in DPO mode.
H PARTial
This indicates that the A trigger has occurred and the instrument is
waiting for the B trigger to occur.
H REAdy
This indicates that all pretrigger information has been acquired and
that the instrument is ready to accept a trigger.
H SAVe
This indicates that the instrument is in save mode and is not acquiring
data.
H TRIGger
This indicates that the instrument triggered and is acquiring the post
trigger information.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 780 --
Example
TRIGger:STATE?
This query might return
:TRIGGER:STATE ARMED
indicating that the pretrigger data is being acquired.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 781 --
UNLock
Description
This command (no query form) unlocks the front panel. The command
is equivalent to LOCk NONe.
Note: If the instrument is in the Remote With Lockout State (RWLS),
the UNLock command has no effect. For more information, see the
ANSI--IEEE Std 488.1--1987 Standard Digital Interface for Programmable Instrumentation, section 2.8.3 on RL State Descriptions.
Group
Miscellaneous
Related Commands
LOCk
Syntax
UNLock ALL
Argument
H ALL
This specifies that all front--panel buttons and knobs are unlocked.
Example
UNLock ALL
This command unlocks all front--panel buttons and knobs.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 782 --
VERBose
Description
This command sets or queries the Verbose state that controls the length
of keywords on query responses. Keywords can be both headers and
arguments.
Note: This command does not affect IEEE Std 488.2--1987 Common
Commands (those starting with an asterisk). However, this command
does make a corresponding change in the Response Header Enable
State of the opposite interface (physical or virtual GPIB interface). Refer to Introduction for more information.
Group
Miscellaneous
Related Commands
HEADer, *LRN?, SET?
Syntax
VERBose {OFF|ON|<NR1>}
Arguments
H OFF
This sets the Verbose state to true, which returns full--length keywords
for applicable setting queries.
H ON
This sets the Verbose state to false, which returns minimum--length
keywords for applicable setting queries.
H <NR1>
A 0 returns minimum--length keywords for applicable setting queries;
any other value returns full--length keywords.
Example 1
VERBose ON
This command enables the Verbose state.
Example 2
VERBOSE?
This query might return
:VERBOSE 0
indicating that the Verbose state is disabled.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 783 --
WFMInpre?
Description
This query--only command returns the waveform formatting specification to be applied to the next incoming CURVe command data.
Group
Waveform Transfer
Related Commands
WFMOutpre?
Syntax
WFMInpre?
Example
WFMInpre?
This query might return the waveform formatting as
:WFMINPRE:BIT_NR 8;BN_FMT RI;BYT_NR 1;
BYT_OR MSB;ENCDG BIN;NR_PT 500;PT_FMT Y;
PT_OFF 0;XINCR 2.0000E-6;XZERO 1.7536E-6;
XUNIT ”s”;YMULT 1.0000E-3;YOFF 0.0000;
YZERO 0.0000;YUNIT ”V”
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 784 --
WFMInpre:BIT_Nr
Description
This command sets or returns the number of bits per binary waveform
point for the waveform, as specified by the DATa:DESTination command. This specification is only meaningful when WFMInpre:ENCdg
is set to BIN.
Group
Waveform Transfer
Related Commands
DATa:DESTination, WFMInpre:ENCdg, WFMInpre:BYT_Nr,
WFMOutpre:BIT_Nr
Syntax 1
WFMInpre:BIT_Nr <NR1>
Syntax 2
WFMInpre:BIT_Nr?
Argument
H <NR1>
This number of bits per data point can be 8, 16 ( RI, RP) or 32 (FP).
Example 1
WFMInpre:BIT_Nr?
This query might return
:WFMINPRE:BIT_NR 8
indicating that incoming RI or RP binary format data uses 8 bits per
waveform point.
Example 2
WFMInpre:BIT_Nr 16
This command sets the number of bits per waveform point to 16, for
incoming RI and RP binary format data.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 785 --
WFMInpre:BN_Fmt
Description
This command sets or queries the format of binary data for incoming
waveforms.
Group
Waveform Transfer
Related Commands
WFMOutpre:BN_Fmt
Syntax 1
WFMInpre:BN_Fmt {RI|RP|FP}
Syntax 2
WFMInput:BN_Fmt?
Arguments
H RI
This specifies signed integer data point representation.
H RP
This specifies positive integer data point representation.
H FP
This specifies single--precision binary floating point representation.
Example 1
WFMInpre:BN_Fmt?
This query might return
:WFMINPRE:BN_FMT RI
indicating that the incoming data is currently interpreted as signed integers.
Example 2
WFMInpre:BN_Fmt FP
This command specifies that incoming data will be interpreted as
single--precision binary floating point numbers.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 786 --
WFMInpre:BYT_Nr
Description
This command sets or returns the binary field data width for the first
ordered waveform, as specified by the DATa:DESTination command.
This specification is only meaningful when WFMInpre:ENCdg is set to
BIN and WFMInpre:BN_Fmt is set to either RI or RP.
Group
Waveform Transfer
Related Commands
DATa:DESTination, WFMInpre:BN_Fmt, WFMInpre:ENCdg,
WFMInpre:BIT_Nr, WFMOutpre:BYT_Nr
Syntax 1
WFMInpre:BYT_Nr <NR1>
Syntax 2
WFMInpre:BYT_Nr?
Argument
H <NR1>
This is the number of bytes per data point and can be 1, 2 (RI, RP) or
4 (FP).
Example 1
WFMInpre:BYT_Nr?
This query might return
:WFMINPRE:BYT_NR 2
indicating that there are 2 bytes per incoming waveform data point.
Example 2
WFMInpre:BYT_Nr 1
This command sets the number of bytes per incoming waveform data
point to 1, which is the default setting.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 787 --
WFMInpre:BYT_Or
Description
This command sets or queries which byte of binary waveform data is
transmitted first for incoming waveform data when data points require
more than one byte. This specification only has meaning when
WFMInpre:ENCdg is set to BIN and WFMInpre:BYT_Nr is greater
than 1.
Group
Waveform Transfer
Related Commands
WFMInpre:ENCdg, WFMInpre:BYT_Nr, WFMOutpre:BYT_Or
Syntax 1
WFMInpre:BYT_Or {LSB|MSB}
Syntax 2
WFMInpre:BYT_Or?
Arguments
H LSB
This specifies that the least significant byte will be transmitted first.
H MSB
This specifies that the most significant byte will be transmitted first.
Example 1
WFMInpre:BYT_Or?
This query might return
:WFMINPRE:BYT_OR LSB
indicating that the least significant incoming CURVe data byte will be
transmitted first.
Example 2
WFMInpre:BYT_Or MSB
This command sets the most significant incoming byte of incoming
waveform data to be transmitted first.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 788 --
WFMInpre:ENCdg
Description
This command sets or queries the type of encoding for incoming waveform data.
Group
Waveform Transfer
Related Commands
WFMOutpre:ENCdg
Syntax 1
WFMInpre:ENCdg {ASC|BIN}
Syntax 2
WFMInpre:ENCdg?
Arguments
H ASC
This specifies that the incoming data is in ASCII format.
H BIN
This specifies that the incoming data is in a binary format whose further interpretation requires knowledge of BYT_NR, BIT_NR,
BN_FMT, and BYT_OR.
Example 1
WFMInpre:ENCdg?
This query might return
:WFMINPRE:ENCDG BIN
indicating that the incoming waveform data is in binary format.
Example 2
WFMInpre:ENCdg ASC
This command sets the format of incoming waveform data to ASCII
format.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 789 --
WFMInpre:NR_FR?
Description
This query--only command returns one frame, indicating the number of
frames in the transmitted waveform record.
Group
Waveform Transfer
Related Commands
CURVe, DATa, DATa:STARt, DATa:STOP, SAVe:WAVEform,
SAVe:WAVEform:FILEFormat, WFMInpre:NR_Pt,
WFMOutpre:NR_FR?, WFMOutpre:NR_Pt?
Syntax
WFMInpre:NR_FR?
Example
WFMInpre:NR_FR?
This query will return
:WFMINPRE:NR_FR 1
indicating that there is 1 data frame in the transmitted waveform record.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 790 --
WFMInpre:NR_Pt
Description
This command sets or returns the number of data points that are in the
transmitted waveform record.
Group
Waveform Transfer
Related Commands
CURVe , DATa, DATa:STARt, DATa:STOP, SAVe:WAVEform,
SAVe:WAVEform:FILEFormat, WFMInpre:NR_FR?,
WFMOutpre:NR_FR?, WFMOutpre:NR_Pt?,
Syntax 1
WFMInpre:NR_Pt <NR1>
Syntax 2
WFMInpre:NR_Pt?
Argument
H <NR1>
If WFMInpre:PT_Fmt is set to Y, this is the number of data points; if
WFMInpre:PT_Fmt is set to ENV, this is the number of min--max
pairs.
Example 1
WFMInpre:NR_Pt?
This query might return
:WFMINPRE:NR_PT 8000
indicating that there are 8000 data points in the transmitted waveform
record.
Example 2
WFMInpre:NR_Pt 5000
This command specifies that 5000 data points will be transmitted.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 791 --
WFMInpre:PT_Fmt
Description
This command sets or queries the point format of the incoming waveform data. Regardless of the argument used, the scale, offset, and so on
are interpreted similarly. When ENV is used, waveform data is interpreted over the min--max pair; when Y is used, it is interpreted over a
single point.
Group
Waveform Transfer
Related Commands
WFMOutpre:PT_Fmt
Syntax 1
WFMInpre:PT_Fmt {ENV|Y}
Syntax 2
WFMInpre:PT_Fmt?
Arguments
H ENV
This specifies that the waveform is transmitted in envelope mide as
maximum and minimum point pairs. Only Y values are explicitly
transmitted. Absolute coordinates are given by:
Xn = XZEro + XINcr (n--PT_Off)
Ynmax = YZEro + YMUlt (ynmax -- YOFf)
Ynmin = YZEro + YMUlt (ynmin -- YOFf)
H Y
This specifies a normal waveform where one ASCII or binary data
point is transmitted for each point in the waveform record. Only Y
values are explicitly transmitted. Absolute coordinates are given by:
Xn = XZEro + XINcr (N--PT_Off)
Yn = YZEro + YMUlt (Yn -- YOFf)
Example 1
WFMInpre:PT_Fmt ENV
This command sets the incoming waveform data point format to enveloped.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 792 --
Example 2
WFMInpre:PT_Fmt?
This query might return
:WFMINPRE:PT_FMT ENV
indicating that the waveform is transmitted as maximum and minimum
point pairs.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 793 --
WFMInpre:PT_Off
Description
This command specifies or returns the trigger point within the waveform record for the reference waveform specified by the DATa:DESTination command.
Group
Waveform Transfer
Related Commands
DATa:DESTination, DATa:STARt, WFMOutpre:PT_Off
Syntax 1
WFMInpre:PT_Off <NR1>
Syntax 2
WFMInpre:PT_Off?
Argument
H <NR1>
This is (record length --1) to record length and is the position of the
data point immediately following the actual trigger. <NR1> is expressed relative to DATa:STARt.
Example 1
WFMInpre:PT_Off 0
This command specifies that the trigger point is the first point in the
waveform record, which is the default.
Example 2
WFMInpre:PT_Off?
This query might return
:WFMINPRE:PT_OFF 0
indicating that the incoming waveform trigger point is the first point in
the waveform record.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 794 --
WFMInpre:WFId
Description
This command (no query form) accepts but ignores the argument. This
command is provided only to allow a waveform extracted from the instrument to be easily imported.
Group
Waveform Transfer
Related Commands
DATa:DESTination, WFMInpre:BN_Fmt, WFMInpre:ENCdg,
WFMOutpre:WFid
Syntax
WFMInpre:WFId <String>
Argument
H <String>
This must be a valid IEEE--488.2 string (but the contents are ignored).
Example
WFMInpre:WFId ”Ch1, DC coupling, 2.000V/div,
400.0ns/div, 500 points, Sample mode”
This is a syntactically correct command.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 795 --
WFMInpre:XINcr
Description
This command sets or queries the horizontal interval between incoming
waveform points in units specified by WFMInpre:XUNit.
Group
Waveform Transfer
Related Commands
WFMInpre:XUNit, WFMOutpre:XINcr
Syntax 1
WFMInpre:XINcr <NR3>
Syntax 2
WFMInpre:XINcr?
Argument
H <NR3>
This is the horizontal interval representation.
Example 1
WFMInpre:XINcr?
This query might return
:WFMINPRE:XINCR 1.0000E-3
indicating that if WFMInpre:XUNit is set to ”s”, there is a 1 ms interval
between incoming waveform points.
Example 2
WFMInpre:XINcr 3E-3
This command sets the interval between Incoming waveform points to
3 ms.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 796 --
WFMInpre:XUNit
Description
This command sets or returns the horizontal units of the incoming waveform.
Group
Waveform Transfer
Related Commands
WFMOutpre:XUNit
Syntax 1
WFMInpre:XUNit <String>
Syntax 2
WFMInpre:XUNit?
Argument
H <String>
This contains a maximum of three alpha characters that represent the
horizontal unit of measure for the incoming waveform.
Example 1
WFMInpre:XUNit?
This query might return
:WFMINPRE:XUNIT ”s”
indicating that the horizontal units for the incoming waveform are seconds.
Example 2
WFMInpre:XUNit ”Hz”
This command specifies that the horizontal units for the incoming waveform are hertz.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 797 --
WFMInpre:XZEro
Description
This command sets or queries the sub--sample time between the trigger
sample (designated by PT_OFF) and the occurrence of the actual trigger on the incoming waveform. This value is used to compute TTOFF
for the incoming waveform, and is expressed in terms of
WFMInpre:XUNit.
Group
Waveform Transfer
Related Commands
WFMInpre:PT_Off, WFMInpre:XINcr, WFMInpre:XUnit,
WFMOutpre:XZEro
Syntax 1
WFMInpre:XZEro <NR3>
Syntax 2
WFMInpre:XZEro?
Argument
H <NR3>
This argument is a floating point value that ranges from -WFMInpre:XINcr to 0.
Example 1
WFMInpre:XZEro?
This query might return
:WFMINPRE:XZEro 7.5000E-6
indicating that the trigger occurs 7.5 µs before the sample designated by
WFMInpre:PT_Off.
Example 2
WFMInpre:XZEro 5.7E-6
This command specifies that the trigger actually occurred 5.7 µs before
the sample designated by WFMInpre:PT_Off.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 798 --
WFMInpre:YMUlt
Description
This command sets or queries the vertical scale factor (in units/digitizing level) for the reference waveform, specified by DATa:DESTination,
upon a CURVe command.
Group
Waveform Transfer
Related Commands
DATa:DESTination, WFMInpre:BYT_Nr, WFMInpre:YUNit
Syntax 1
WFMInpre:YMUlt <NR3>
Syntax 2
WFMInpre:UMUlt?
Argument
H <NR3>
This is the vertical scale factor per digitizing level of the incoming
waveform points.
Example 1
WFMInpre:YMUlt?
This query might return
:WFMINPRE:YMULT 40.0000E-3
indicating that the vertical scale is 40 mV/digitizing level (1V/div).
Example 2
WFMInpre:YMUlt 20E-3
This command specifies that (if WFMInpre:YUNit is ”V” and
WFMInpre:BYT_Nr is 1), the vertical scale is 20 mV/digitizing level
(500 mV/div).
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 799 --
WFMInpre:YOFf
Description
This command sets or queries the vertical position of the incoming waveform in digitizing levels. Variations in this number are analogous to
changing the vertical position of the waveform. For those formats in
which WFMInpre:BYT_Nr is important (all nonfloating point formats),
this command must take the location of the binary point implied by
BYT_NR into consideration.
Group
Waveform Transfer
Related Commands
WFMInpre:BYT_Nr, WFMInpre:YMUlt, WFMOutpre:YOFf
Syntax 1
WFMInpre:YOFf <NR3>
Syntax 2
WFMInpre:YOFf?
Argument
H <NR3>
This is the vertical offset in digitizing levels.
Example 1
WFMInpre:YOFf?
This query might return
:WFMINPRE:YOFF 25
indicating the vertical position of the incoming waveform in digitizing
levels.
Example 2
WFMInpre:YOFf 50
This command specifies that the zero reference point for the incoming
waveform is 50 digitizing levels (2 divisions) above the center of the
data range.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 800 --
WFMInpre:YUNit
Description
This command sets or queries the vertical units of the incoming waveform.
Group
Waveform Transfer
Related Commands
WFMOutpre:YUNit
Syntax 1
WFMInpre:YUNit <String>
Syntax 2
WFMInpre:YUNit?
Argument
H <String>
This contains a maximum of three alpha characters that represent the
vertical unit of measure for the incoming waveform.
Example 1
WFMInpre:YUNit?
This query might return
:WFMINPRE:YUNIT ”s”
indicating the vertical units for the incoming waveform are seconds.
Example 2
WFMInpre:YUNit ”Pa”
This command specifies that the vertical units for the incoming waveform are Pascal.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 801 --
WFMInpre:YZEro
Description
This command sets or queries the offset of the incoming waveform in
units specified by WFMInpre:YUNit. Variations in this number are
analogous to changing the vertical offset of the waveform.
Group
Waveform Transfer
Related Commands
WFMInpre:YUNit, WFMOutpre:YZEro
Syntax 1
WFMInpre:YZEro <NR3>
Syntax 2
WFMInpre:YZEro?
Argument
H <NR3>
This is the offset in YUNits.
Example 1
WFMInpre:YZEro?
This query might return
:WFMINPRE:YZEro 7.5000E-6
indicating that the zero reference for the incoming waveform is 7.5 µV
below the center of the data range (given that WFMInpre:YUNit is set
to V).
Example 2
WFMInpre:YZEro 1.5E+0
This command specifies that the zero reference point for the incoming
waveform is 1.5 V below the center of the data range (given that
WFMInpre:YUNit is set to V).
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 802 --
WFMOutpre?
Description
This query--only command returns the waveform formatting data for
the waveform specified by the DATa:SOUrce command. The preamble
components are considered to be of two types; formatting and interpretation. The formatting components are: ENCdg, BN_Fmt, BYT_Or,
BYT_Nr, BIT_Nr. The interpretation components are derived from the
DATa:SOUrce specified waveform.
Group
Waveform Transfer
Syntax
WFMOutpre?
Example
WFMOutpre:?
This query might return the waveform formatting datat as:
:WFMOUTPRE:BIT_NR 8;BN_FMT RI;BYT_NR 1;
BYT_OR MSB;ENCDG BIN;NR_PT 500;
PT_FMT Y;PT_ORDER LINEAR;PT_OFF 0;
XINCR 8.0000E-9;XZERO 4.8794E-9;
XUNIT ”s”;YMULT -2000.0000E-3;
YOFF -4999.9995E-3;YZERO 0.0000;YUNIT ”V”;
WFID ”Ch1, DC coupling, 2.000V/div, 400.0ns/
div,500 points, Sample mode”
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 803 --
WFMOutpre:BIT_Nr
Description
This command sets and returns the number of bits per waveform point
that outgoing waveforms contain, as specified by the DATa:SOUrce
command. Note that values will be constrained according to the underlying waveform data. This specification is only meaningful when
WFMOutpre:ENCdg is set to BIN and WFMOutpre:BN_Fmt is set to
either RI or RP.
Group
Waveform Transfer
Related Commands
DATa:SOUrce, WFMOutpre:BN_Fmt, WFMOutpre:ENCdg
Syntax 1
WFMOutpre:BIT_Nr <NR1>
Syntax 2
WFMOutpre:BIT_Nr?
Argument
H <NR1>
This number of bits per data point can be 8, 16, 32 or 64.
Example 1
WFMOutpre:BIT_Nr?
This query might return
:WFMOUTPRE:BIT_NR 8
indicating that outgoing RI or RP binary format data uses 8 bits per
waveform point.
Example 2
WFMOutpre:BIT_Nr 16
This command sets the number of bits per waveform point to 16 for
incoming RI and RP binary format data.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 804 --
WFMOutpre:BN_Fmt
Description
This command sets or queries the format of binary data for outgoing
waveforms specified by the DATa:SOUrce command.
Group
Waveform Transfer
Related Commands
DATa:SOUrce
Syntax 1
WFMOutpre:BN_Fmt {RI|RP|FP}
Syntax 2
WFMOutput:BN_Fmt?
Arguments
H RI
This specifies signed integer data point representation.
H RP
This specifies positive integer data point representation.
H FP
This specifies single--precision binary floating point data point representation.
Example 1
WFMOutpre:BN_Fmt?
This query might return
:WFMOUTPRE:BN_FMT RI
indicating that the outgoing waveform data is currently in signed integer format.
Example 2
WFMOutpre:BN_Fmt FP
This command specifies that outgoing waveform data will be in single-precision binary floating point format.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 805 --
WFMOutpre:BYT_Nr
Description
This command sets or returns the binary field data width for the waveform specified by the DATa:SOUrce command. Note that values will be
constrained according to the underlying waveform data. This specification is only meaningful when WFMOutpre:ENCdg is set to BIN, and
WFMOutpre:BN_Fmt is set to either RI or RP.
Group
Waveform Transfer
Related Commands
DATa:SOUrce, WFMOutpre:BN_Fmt, WFMOutpre:ENCdg
Syntax 1
WFMOutpre:BYT_Nr <NR1>
Syntax 2
WFMOutpre:BYT_Nr?
Argument
H <NR1>
This is the number of bytes per data point and can be 1, 2, 4 or 8. A
value of 1 or 2 bytes per waveform point indicates channel data; 4
bytes per waveform point indicate math data; 8 bytes per waveform
point indicate pixel map (DPO) data.
Example 1
WFMOutpre:BYT_Nr?
This query might return
:WFMOUTPRE:BYT_NR 2
indicating that there are 2 bytes per outgoing waveform data point.
Example 2
WFMOutpre:BYT_Nr 1
This command sets the number of bytes per outgoing waveform data
point to 1, which is the default setting.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 806 --
WFMOutpre:BYT_Or
Description
This command sets or queries which byte of binary waveform data is
transmitted first, during a waveform data transfer, when data points
require more than one byte. This specification only has meaning when
WFMOutpre:ENCdg is set to BIN.
Group
Waveform Transfer
Related Commands
WFMOutpre:ENCdg
Syntax 1
WFMOutpre:BYT_Or {LSB|MSB}
Syntax 2
WFMOutpre:BYT_Or?
Arguments
H LSB
This specifies that the least significant byte will be transmitted first.
H MSB
This specifies that the most significant byte will be transmitted first.
Example 1
WFMOutpre:BYT_Or?
This query might return
:WFMOUTPRE:BYT_OR LSB
indicating that the least significant data byte will be transmitted first.
Example 2
WFMOutpre:BYT_Or MSB
This command sets the most significant outgoing byte of waveform
data to be transmitted first.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 807 --
WFMOutpre:ENCdg
Description
This command sets and queries the type of encoding for outgoing waveforms.
Group
Waveform Transfer
Related Commands
DATa:ENCdg, WFMOutpre:BYT_Nr, WFMOutpre:BYT_Or,
WFMOutpre:BIT_Nr, WFMOutpre:BN_Fmt
Syntax 1
WFMOutpre:ENCdg {ASC|BIN}
Syntax 2
WFMOutpre:ENCdg?
Argument
H ASC
This specifies that the outgoing data is to be in ASCII format. Waveforms internally stored as integers will be sent as <NR1> numbers,
while those stored as floating point will be sent as <NR3> numbers.
H BIN
This specifies that outgoing data is to be in a binary format whose
further specification is determined by WFMOutpre:BYT_Nr,
WFMOutpre:BIT_Nr, WFMOutpre:BN_Fmt and
WFMOutpre:BYT_Or.
Example 1
WFMOutpre:ENCdg?
This query might return
:WFMOUTPRE:ENCDG BIN
indicating that outgoing waveform data will be sent in binary format.
Example 2
WFMOutpre:ENCdg ASC
This command specifies that the outgoing waveform data will be sent in
ASCII format.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 808 --
WFMOutpre:NR_FR?
Description
This query--only command returns the number of frames for the
DATa:SOUrce waveform transmitted in response to a CURVe? query.
Group
Waveform Transfer
Related Commands
CURVe , DATa, DATa:STARt, DATa:STOP, SAVe:WAVEform,
SAVe:WAVEform:FILEFormat, WFMInpre:NR_FR?,
WFMInpre:NR_Pt, WFMOutpre:NR_Pt?
Syntax
WFMOutpre:NR_FR?
Example
WFMOutpre:NR_FR?
This query might return
:WFMOUTPRE:NR_FR 500
indicating that there are 500 data frames to be sent.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 809 --
WFMOutpre:NR_Pt?
Description
This query--only command returns the number of points for the
DATa:SOUrce waveform that will be transmitted in response to a
CURVe? query.
Group
Waveform Transfer
Related Commands
CURVe , DATa, DATa:STARt, DATa:STOP, SAVe:WAVEform,
SAVe:WAVEform:FILEFormat, WFMInpre:NR_FR?,
WFMInpre:NR_Pt, WFMOutpre:NR_FR?
Syntax
WFMOutpre:NR_Pt?
Example
WFMOutpre:NR_Pt?
This query might return
:WFMOUTPRE:NR_PT 5000
indicating that there are 5000 data points to be sent.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 810 --
WFMOutpre:PT_Fmt?
Description
This query--only command returns the point format for the waveform
specified by the DATa:SOUrce command. The format specifies a set of
equations describing how the scale factors in the preamble are used to
give meaning to the CURVe data points.
An error is reported if the DATa:SOUrce waveform does not exist.
Group
Waveform Transfer
Related Commands
CURVe?, DATa:SOUrce
Syntax
WFMOutpre:PT_Fmt?
Example
WFMOutpre:PT_Fmt?
This query might return
:WFMOutpre:PT_Fmt ENV
indicating that the waveform data is a series of min--max pairs.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 811 --
WFMOutpre:PT_Off?
Description
This query--only command returns the trigger point relative to
DATa:STARt for the waveform specified by the DATa:SOUrce command.
Note: This returned value is the point immediately following the actual trigger.
Group
Waveform Transfer
Related Commands
DATa:SOUrce, DATa:STARt, WFMOutpre:XZEro
Syntax
WFMOutpre:PT_Off?
Example
WFMOutpre:PT_Off?
This query might return
:WFMOUTPRE:PT_OFF 251
specifying that the trigger actually occurred between points 250 and
251.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 812 --
WFMOutpre:PT_OR?
Description
This query--only command specifies whether the source waveform is
Fast Acquisition. A Fast Acquisition waveform is stored as a 200
(vertical) by 500 (horizontal) point bitmap. Each point represents display intensity for that screen location. Only CURVe? query functions
are allowed on Fast Acquisition waveforms.
When the WFMOutpre:PT_OR query returns Column, this indicates
that the source is a Fast Acquisition waveform (and that each of 500
possible horizontal columns being transmitted contains 200 vertical
points). When the WFMOutpre:PT_OR? query returns Linear, this
indicates that the source is not a Fast Acquisition waveform (and that
each horizontal column being sent contains only one vertical point).
Note that waveform points are transmitted in the following order: top
to bottom, then left to right.
Group
Waveform Transfer
Related Commands
DATa:SOUrce
Syntax
WFMOutpre:PT_OR?
Example 1
WFMOutpre:PT_OR?
This query might return
:WFMOUTPRE:PT_OR COL
specifying that the waveform designated by the DATa:SOUrce waveform is a Fast Acquisition waveform.
Example 2
WFMOutpre:PT_OR?
This query might return
:WFMOUTPRE:PT_OR LINEAR
specifying that the source waveform is a nonFast Acquisition waveform.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 813 --
WFMOutpre:WFId?
Description
This query--only command returns a string describing several aspects of
the acquisition parameters for the waveform specified by the
DATa:SOUrce command.
An error is reported if the DATa:SOUrce waveform does not exist.
Group
Waveform Transfer
Related Commands
DATa:SOUrce
Syntax
WFMOutpre:WFId?
Outputs
<string> comprises the following comma--separated fields documented in the tables below:
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 814 --
Field
Source
Coupling
Vert Scale
Horiz Scale
Record
Length
Acquisition
Mode
Primary
Reference
Offset
Waveform Suffixes
Description
The source identification string as it
appears in the front panel scale factor
readouts.
A string describing the vertical coupling of
the waveform (the Source 1 waveform in
the case of Dual Waveform Math).
A string containing the vertical scale
factor of the unzoomed waveform. The
numeric portion will always be 4 digits.
The examples cover all known internal
units.
A string containing the horizontal scale
factor of the unzoomed waveform. The
numeric portion will always be four digits.
The examples cover all known internal
units.
A string containig the number of
waveform points available in the entire
record. The numeric portion is given as
an integer.
A string describing the mode used to
acquire the waveform.
A string specifying the delta between the
Primary Reference (typically, the A
trigger) and the CURVe? zero reference
location identified by a combination of
PT_Off and XZEro in units of XUNits. For
example, in Trigger After Delay, this
number would be the actual time between
the A and B trigger. In the event that this
number is not meaningful, the string will
be exactly ”0”.
Examples
”Ch1--4”
”Math1--3”
”Ref1--4”
”AC coupling”
”DC coupling”
”GND coupling”
”100.0 mV/div”
”20.00 dB/div”
”45.00 deg/div
”785.4 mrad/div”
”500.0 uVs/div”
”10.00 kV/s/div”
”200.0 mV/div”
”50.00 unk/div”
”100.0 ms/div”
”10.00 kHz/div”
”50.00 c/div”
”500 points”
”500000 points”
”Sample mode”
”Pk Detect mode”
”Hi Res mode”
”Envelope mode”
”Average mode”
”57.2345 ms”
”87.3 Hz”
”0”
Example
WFMOutpre:WFId?
This query might return
:WFMOUTPRE:WFID ”Ch1, DC coupling,100.0mVolts/
div,500.0µs/div,500 points, Hi Res mode”
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 815 --
WFMOutpre:XINcr?
Description
This query--only command returns the horizontal point spacing in units
of WFMOutpre:XUNit for the waveform specified by the
DATa:SOUrce command. This value corresponds to the sampling interval.
An error is reported if the DATa:SOUrce waveform does not exist.
Group
Waveform Transfer
Related Commands
DATa:SOUrce, WFMOutpre:XUNit,
Syntax
WFMOutpre:XINcr?
Example
WFMOutpre:XINcr?
This query might return
:WFMOUTPRE:XINCR 10.0000E-6
indicating that the horizontal sampling interval is 10 µs/point (500
µs/div).
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 816 --
WFMOutpre:XUNit?
Description
This query--only command returns the horizontal units for the waveform specified by the DATa:SOUrce command.
An error is reported if the DATa:SOUrce waveform does not exist.
Group
Waveform Transfer
Related Commands
DATa:SOUrce
Syntax
WFMOutpre:XUNit?
Example
WFMOutpre:XUNit?
This query might return
:WFMOUTPRE:XUNIT ”Hz”
indicating that the horizontal units for the waveform are in hertz.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 817 --
WFMOutpre:XZEro?
Description
This query--only command returns the sub--sample time between the
trigger sample (designated by PT_OFF) and the occurrence of the actual trigger for the waveform specified by the DATa:SOUrce command.
This value is in units of WFMOutpre:XUNit.
An error is reported if the DATa:SOUrce waveform does not exist.
Note: During stopped state operation (i.e., ACQuire:STATE OFF), this
is the only preamble that changes on each acquisition. If a query is run
during steady state operation (that is, all control changes have settled
and triggers are arriving on a regular basis), the XZEro value of the last
stopped state is returned.
Group
Waveform Transfer
Related Commands
DATa:SOUrce, WFMOutpre:XUNit
Syntax
WFMOutpre:XZEro?
Example
WFMOutpre:XZEro?
This query might return
:WFMOUTPRE:XZERO 5.6300E-9
indicating that the trigger actually occurred 5.63 ns before the trigger
sample.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 818 --
WFMOutpre:YMUlt?
Description
This query--only command returns the vertical scale factor per digitizing level in units specified by WFMOutpre:YUNit for the waveform
specified by the DATa:SOUrce command. For those formats in which
WFMOutpre:BYT_Nr is important (all nonfloating point formats),
WFMOutpre:YMUlt? must take the location of the binary point implied
by BYT_NR into consideration.
An error is reported if the DATa:SOUrce waveform does not exist.
Group
Waveform Transfer
Related Commands
DATa:SOUrce
Syntax
WFMOutpre:YMUlt?
Example
WFMOutpre:YMUlt?
This query might return
:WFMOUTPRE:YMULT 4.0000E-3
indicating that the vertical scale for the corresponding waveform is 100
mV/div.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 819 --
WFMOutpre:YOFf?
Description
This query--only command returns the vertical offset in digitized levels
for the waveform specified by the DATa:SOUrce command. For those
formats in which BYT_NR is important (all non--floating point formats), this command must take the location of the binary point implied
by WFMOutpre:BYT_Nr into consideration.
An error is reported if the DATa:SOUrce waveform does not exist.
Group
Waveform Transfer
Related Commands
DATa:SOUrce, WFMOutpre:BYT_Nr
Syntax
WFMOutpre:YOFf?
Example
WFMOutpre:YOFf?
This query might return
:WFMOUTPRE:YOFF -50.0000E+0
indicating that the position indicator for the waveform was 50 digitizing
levels (2 divisions) below center screen.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 820 --
WFMOutpre:YUNit?
Description
This query--only command returns the vertical units for the waveform
specified by the DATa:SOUrce command.
An error is reported if the DATa:SOUrce waveform does not exist.
Group
Waveform Transfer
Related Commands
DATa:SOUrce
Syntax
WFMOutpre:YUNit?
Example
WFMOutpre:YUNit?
This query might return
:WFMOUTPRE:YUNIT ”dB”
indicating that the vertical units for the waveform are measured in decibels.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 821 --
WFMOutpre:YZEro?
Description
This query--only command returns the vertical offset in units specified
by WFMOutpre:YUNit for the waveform specified by the
DATa:SOUrce command.
An error is reported if the DATa:SOUrce waveform does not exist.
Group
Waveform Transfer
Related Commands
DATa:SOUrce, WFMOutpre:YUNit
Syntax
WFMOutpre:YZEro?
Example
WFMOutpre:YUNit?
This query might return
:WFMOUTPRE:YZERO -100.0000E-3
indicating that vertical offset is set to --100 mV.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 822 --
WFMPre:NR_FR?
Description
This query--only command returns the number of frames for the waveform transmitted in response to a CURVE? query.
Group
Waveform Transfer
Related Commands
CURVe , DATa, DATa:STARt, DATa:STOP, SAVe:WAVEform,
SAVe:WAVEform:FILEFormat, WFMInpre:NR_FR?,
WFMInpre:NR_Pt, WFMOutpre:NR_FR?, WFMOutpre:NR_Pt?,
Syntax
WFMpre:NR_FR?
Example
WFMpre:NR_FR?
This query might return
:WFMPRE:NR_FR:10
indicating that you have acquired 10 frames.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 823 --
WAVFrm?
Description
This query--only command returns WFMOutpre? and CURVe? data for
the waveform as specified by the DATA:SOUrce command. This command is equivalent to sending both WFMOutpre? and CURVe?, with
the additional provision that the response to WAVFrm? is guaranteed to
provide a synchronized preamble and curve.
Group
Waveform Transfer
Related Commands
CURVe?, DATa:SOUrce, WFMOutpre?
Syntax
WAVFrm?
Example
WAVFrm?
This query might return the waveform data as:
:WFMOUTPRE:BIT_NR 8;BN_FMT RI;BYT_NR 1;
BYT_OR MSB;ENCDG ASC;NR_PT 500;PT_FMT Y;
PT_ORDER LINEAR;PT_OFF 0;XINCR 400.0000E-12;
XZERO 0.0000;XUNIT ”s”;YMULT 4.0000E-3;
YOFF 0.0000;YZERO 0.0000;YUNIT ”V”;
WFID ”Ch1,DC coupling, 100.0mV/div, 200.0ns/
div, 5000 points,Sampl mode”;
:CURVE51,50,51,48,51,48,50,49,51,49,51,48,51,4
8,51,49,50,49,50,48,49,49,52,49,49,50,50,48,50
,49,49,49,49,49,50,47,49,47,50,48,49,48,50,48,
49,47,49,48,51,48,49,47,50,48,50,47,51,47,49,4
8,48,48,50,46,50,46,48,45,48,47,49,47,49,48,49
,48,49,45,49,47,48,46,48,48,49,45,49,45,47,46,
46,46,49,47,48,46,48,46,48,47,47,46,47,47,48,4
6,48,45,48,46,47,46,47,47,46,45,46,45,47,47,47
,46,46,44,47,45,45,45,46,43,46,45,46,44,46,45,
48,45,45,44,46,45,46,45,45,45,45,43,45,44,46,4
4,47,44,44,44,45,43,44,44,45,44,46,43,46,43,45
,44,45,44,45,41,44,43,45,42,44,43,44,43,44,42,
43,42,44,41,44,41,44,42,43,42,43,42,45,42,43,4
1,42,41,43,42,44,42,43,42,43,40,42,40,42,40,42
,41,43,41,42,41,42,39,41,41,42,42,43,41,42,39,
41,39,41,40,41,40,41,39,41,38,41,39,41,38,42,3
9,41,37,40,38,40,38,39,38,39,38,41,39,39,38,40
,37,38,37,38,38,39,38,40,36,39,37,39,37,39,37,
39,36,40,38,38,35,38,36,38,37,39,37,38,37,38,3
7,37,36,38,35,38,36,37,36,38,36,38,35,39,34,36
,36,36,35,38,35,36,34,37,34,37,35,37,36,37,35,
37,35,36,34,36,33,36,35,36,34,36,33,34,33,34,3
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 824 --
4,34,34,36,33,36,34,36,33,34,33,34,32,34,32,34
,33,33,31,33,32,34,32,33,32,32,31,33,31,31,32,
33,31,32,31,32,30,32,30,32,31,31,30,31,30,31,2
9,31,29,32,31,31,30,30,29,30,29,30,30,31,29,30
,28,30,29,31,28,30,28,30,29,29,27,29,28,29,27,
30,27,30,26,28,28,29,27,28,27,28,27,28,28,28,2
7,28,27,28,26,28,26,28,26,26,25,27,25,28,27,28
,26,25,25,26,25,25,25,25,25,26,25,27,25,25,24,
25,25,26,24,26,24,24,23,25,24,24,22,25,23,24,2
3,24,22,24,22,23,22,25,24,24,21,23,22,22,21,24
,22,22,22,22,21,22,20,23,21,21,20
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 825 --
ZOOm
Description
This command resets the zoom transforms to default values for all
traces or live traces. The ZOOm query returns the current vertical and
horizontal positioning and scaling of the display.
Group
Zoom
Syntax 1
ZOOm {RESET|RESETLive}
Syntax 2
ZOOm?
Arguments
H RESET
This resets the zoom transforms to default values for all traces.
H RESETLive
This resets the zoom transforms to default values for live traces.
Example 1
ZOOm?
This query might return:
:ZOOM:MODE 0;GRATICULE:SIZE 80;SPLIT EIGHTYTWENTY:ZOOM:SCROLL:DIRECTION STOP;
LOCK 0;SPEED 1:ZOOM:ZOOM1:STATE 1;
SCROLLLOCK 1;CH1:HORIZONTAL:POSITION 50.0000;
SCALE 5:ZOOM:ZOOM1:CH1:VERTICAL:POSTION0.0000;
SCALE 1.0000:ZOOM:ZOOM1:CH2:HORIZONTAL:POSITION 50.0000;SCALE 5:ZOOM:ZOOM1:CH2:VERTICAL:POSITION 0.0000;
SCALE 1.0000:ZOOM:ZOOM1:CH3:HORIZONTAL:POSITION 50.0000;
SCALE 5:ZOOM:ZOOM1:CH3:VERTICAL:POSITION
0.0000;
SCALE 1.0000:ZOOM:ZOOM1:CH4:HORIZONTAL:POSITION 50.0000;
SCALE 5:ZOOM:ZOOM1:CH4:VERTICAL:POSITION
0.0000;SCALE 1.0000:ZOOM:ZOOM1:MATH1:HORIZONTAL:POSITION 50.0000;
SCALE 5:ZOOM:ZOOM1:MATH1:VERTICAL:POSITION
0.0000;SCALE 1.0000:ZOOM:ZOOM1:MATH2:HORIZONTAL:POSITION 50.0000;
SCALE 5:ZOOM:ZOOM1:MATH2:VERTICAL:POSITION
0.0000;...
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 826 --
Example 2
ZOOM RESET
This command resets the zoom transforms to default values for all
traces.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 827 --
ZOOm:GRAticule:SIZE
Description
This command sets or queries the size, in percent, of the Zoom (lower)
graticule.
Group
Zoom
Syntax 1
ZOOm:GRAticule:SIZE {50|80|100}
Syntax 2
ZOOm:GRAticule:SIZE?
Arguments
H 50
Set the size of the Zoom graticule to 50 %.
H 80
Set the size of the Zoom graticule to 80 %.
H 100
Set the size of the Zoom graticule to 100 %.
Example 1
ZOOM:GRATICULE:SIZE?
This query might return
:ZOOM:GRATICULE:SIZE 100
Indicating that the zoom graticule size is set to 100%.
Example 2
ZOOM:GRATICULE:SIZE 100
Setting the zoom graticule size to 100%.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 828 --
ZOOm:MODe
Description
This command turns Zoom mode on or off. The Zoom query returns the
current state of Zoom mode. This command is equivalent to pressing
the ZOOM button located on the front panel.
Group
Zoom
Syntax 1
ZOOm:MODe {ON|OFF|<NR1>}
Syntax 2
ZOOm:MODe
Arguments
H ON
This turns on Zoom mode.
H OFF
This turns off Zoom mode.
H <NR1>
A 0 turns off Zoom mode; any other value turns on Zoom mode.
Example 1
ZOOm:MODe?
This query might return
:ZOOM:MODE 1
indicating that Zoom mode is currently turned on.
Example 2
ZOOm:MODe OFF
This command turns off Zoom mode.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 829 --
ZOOm:SCROLL:DIREction
Description
This command sets or returns the direction for automatic scrolling of
zoomed waveforms.
Group
Zoom
Syntax 1
ZOOm:SCROLL:DIREction {FWD|FFWD|REVerse|
FREVerse|STOP}
Syntax 2
ZOOm:SCROLL:DIREction?
Arguments
H FWD
Starts AutoScroll. The Zoom Box moves from left to right.
H FFWD
Starts AutoScroll. Increases the scrolling speed in the forward direction.
H REVerse
Starts AutoScroll. The Zoom Box moves from right to left.
H FREVerse
Starts AutoScroll. Increases the scrolling speed in the reverse direction.
H STOP
Halts AutoScroll.
Example 1
ZOOm:SCROLL:DIREction FWD
Starts AutoScroll. The Zoom Box moves from left to right.
Example 2
ZOOm:SCROLL:DIRECtion?
Returns FWD, FFWD, REVERSE, FREVERSE, or STOP.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 830 --
ZOOm:SCROLL:LOCk
Description
This command sets or returns the state of Scroll Lock, which ”locks”
zoomed waveforms under common control.
Group
Zoom
Syntax 1
ZOOm:SCROLL:LOCk {ON|OFF|NR1}
Syntax 2
ZOOm:SCROLL:LOCk?
Arguments
H ON
Enables Scroll Lock.
H OFF
Disables Scroll Lock.
H <NR1>
A 0 disables Scroll Lock for all zoom windows; any other value enables Scroll Lock for all zoom windows.
Example 1
ZOOm:SCROLL:LOCk ON
Enables Scroll Lock for zoomed waveforms identified as locked.
Example 2
ZOOm:SCROLL:LOCk?
This query might return
:ZOOM:SCROLL:LOCK OFF
indicating that the scroll lock function is disabled.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 831 --
ZOOm:SCROLL:SPEED
Description
This command sets or returns the speed of automatic scrolling.
Group
Zoom
Syntax 1
ZOOm:SCROLL:SPEED <NR1>
Syntax 2
ZOOm:SCROLL:SPEED?
Arguments
H <NR1>
This is a value from 1 to 10.
Example 1
ZOOm:SCROLL:SPEED 2
AutoScroll will move zoomed waveform(s) 2 divisions per update.
Example 2
ZOOm:SCROLL:SPEED?
This query might return
:ZOOM:SCROLL:SPEED 1
indicating that the scroll speed is set to move zoomed waveform(s) 1
division per update.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 832 --
ZOOm:GRAticule:SPLit
Description
This command sets or returns the sizes of the acquisition and zoom
windows when Zoom is selected.
Note: For this command to have an effect on the display, you must
have the zoom mode turned on. Use the ZOOm:MODe command to
turn on the zoom mode. The ZOOm:GRAticule:SPLIT command is
equivalent the selecting Zoom Setup from the Horiz/Acq menu and
selecting a value for the Graticule
Split in the control window.
Group
Zoom
Related Commands
ZOOm:MODe
Syntax 1
ZOOm:GRAticule:SPLit {FIFtyfifty|EIGHtytwenty|FuLl}
Syntax 2
ZOOm:GRAticule:SPLit?
Arguments
H FIFtyfifty
This argument sets half of the available display to the zoomed graticule and half of the available display to the acquisition graticule; this
argument is the default value.
H EIGHtytwenty
This argument sets 80% of the available display to the zoomed graticule and 20% to the acquisition graticule.
H FULl
This argument sets the entire display to the zoomed graticule.
Example 1
ZOOm:GRAticule:SPLit?
This query might return :ZOOM:GRATICULE:SPLIT FIFTYFIFTY, indicating that the display area is divided equally between the
zoomed graticule and the acquisition graticule.
Example 2
ZOOm:GRAticule:SPLit FULl
This command sets the full display area to the zoomed graticule.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 833 --
ZOOm:ZOOM<x>
Description
This command resets the zoom transforms to default values for all
traces of the specified zoom, where x is an integer from 1 to 4 representing the desired zoom window. The ZOOm query returns the current
vertical and horizontal positioning and scaling of the display.
Group
Zoom
Syntax 1
ZOOm:ZOOM<x> {RESET|RESETLive}
Syntax 2
ZOOm:ZOOM<x>?
Arguments
H RESET
Resets the zoom transforms to default values for all traces of the specified zoom.
H RESETLive
Resets the zoom transforms to default values for live traces of the
specified zoom.
Example 1
ZOOm:ZOOM1 RESET
This command resets the zoom transforms for all traces of Zoom1 to
their default values
Example 2
ZOOm:ZOOM1?
This query might return
:ZOOM:ZOOM1:STATE 1;SCROLLLOCK 1;
CH1:HORIZONTAL POSITION 50.0000;SCALE 5;
:ZOOM:ZOOM1:CH1:VERTICAL:POSITION 0.0000;
SCALE 1.0000;
:ZOOM:ZOOM1:CH2:HORIZONTAL:POSTION 50.0000;
SCALE 5;
:ZOOM:ZOOM1:CH2:VERTICAL:POSITION 0.000;
SCALE 1.0000;
:ZOOM:ZOOM1:CH3:HORIZONTAL:POSITION50.000;
SCALE 5;:ZOOM:ZOOM1:CH3:VERTICAL...
indicating the Zoom1 transforms for all traces.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 834 --
ZOOm:ZOOM<x>:<wfm>:HORizontal:POSition
Description
This command sets or queries the horizontal position of the specified
waveform for the specified zoom, where x is an integer from 1 to 4 representing the desired zoom window. The setting of the
ZOOm:ZOOM<x>:SCROLLLOCk command determines the waveforms that are affected.
Group
Zoom
Syntax 1
ZOOm:ZOOM<x>:<wfm>:HORizontal:POSition <NR3>
Syntax 2
ZOOm:ZOOM<x>:<wfm>:HORizontal:POSition?
Argument
H <NR3>
This is a value from 0 to 100.00 and is the percent of the waveform
that is to the left of screen center, when the zoom factor is 1x or greater.
Example 1
ZOOm:ZOOM1:CH1:HORizontal:POSition 50
This command sets the Zoom1 reference pointer at 50% of acquired
waveform.
Example 2
ZOOm:ZOOM1:CH1:HORizontal:POSition?
This query might return
:ZOOM1:CH1:HORIZONTAL:POSITION 50.0000
indicating that the Zoom1 reference pointer for Channel 1 is currently
set at 50% of acquired waveform.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 835 --
ZOOm:ZOOM<x>:<wfm>:HORizontal:SCAle
Description
This command sets or queries the zoom horizontal scale factor of the
specified waveform for the specified zoom, where x is an integer from
1 to 4 representing the desired zoom window.
Group
Zoom
Syntax 1
ZOOm:ZOOM<x>:<wfm>:HORizontal:SCAle <NR3>
Syntax 2
ZOOm:ZOOM<x>:<wfm>:HORizontal:SCAle?
Argument
H <NR3>
This is the amount of expansion in the horizontal direction in 1--2 --5
increments.
Example 1
ZOOm:ZOOM1:CH1:HORizontal:SCAle 5
This command sets the horizontal scale factor of Channel 1 to 5.
Example 2
ZOOm:ZOOM2:CH2:HORizontal:SCAle?
This query might return :ZOOM2:CH2:HORIZONTAL:SCALE 1,
indicating that Channel 2 has a horizontal scale factor of 1.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 836 --
ZOOm:ZOOM<x>:<wfm>:VERTical:POSition
Description
This command sets or queries the vertical position of the specified waveform for the specified zoom, where x is an integer from 1 to 4 representing the desired zoom window. The setting of the
ZOOm:ZOOM<x>:SCROLLLOCk command determines the waveforms that are affected.
Group
Zoom
Syntax 1
ZOOm:ZOOM<x>:<wfm>:VERTical:POSition <NR3>
Syntax 2
ZOOm:ZOOM<x>:<wfm>:VERTical:POSition?
Argument
H <NR3>
This is the vertical position, expressed in divisions.
Example 1
ZOOm:ZOOM1:CH1:VERTical:POSition 2
This command sets the Zoom1 vertical position to 2, which centers the
zoom trace at the second division of the acquired trace.
Example 2
ZOOm:ZOOM1:CH1:VERTical:POSition?
This query might return :ZOOm1:CH1:VERTical:POSition
0.0000, indicating that the Zoom1 trace for Channel 1 is centered at
division 0 of the acquired trace.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 837 --
ZOOm:ZOOM<x>:<wfm>:VERTical:SCAle
Description
This command sets or queries the zoom vertical scale of the specified
waveform for the specified zoom, where x is an integer from 1 to 4 representing the desired zoom window.
Group
Zoom
Syntax 1
ZOOm:ZOOM<x>:<wfm>:VERTical:SCAle <NR3>
Syntax 2
ZOOm:ZOOM<x>:<wfm>:VERTical:SCAle?
Argument
H <NR3>
This is the amount of vertical expansion or compression, which operates on a 1--2--5 sequence (for example, 1, 2, 5, 10, 20, 50, 100…).
Based on the value entered, this command uses the nearest scale factor. Setting the vertical scale to 1 indicates unity (no zoom).
Example 1
ZOOm:ZOOM2:CH2:VERTical:SCAle 5
This command sets the vertical scale of Channel 2 to 5x.
Example 2
ZOOm:ZOOM2:CH2:VERTical:SCAle?
This query might return :ZOOM2:CH2:VERTICAL:SCALE
2.0000, indicating that the vertical scale is 2x.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 838 --
ZOOm:ZOOM<x>:SCROLLLock
Description
This command sets or queries Scroll Lock for the specified zoom,
where x is an integer from 1 to 4 representing the desired zoom window.
Group
Zoom
Syntax 1
ZOOm:ZOOM<x>:SCROLLLock {ON|OFF|1|0|NR1}
Syntax 2
ZOOm:ZOOM<x>:SCROLLLock?
Arguments
H ON {1}
Locks waveforms for the specified zoom window <x>.
H OFF {0}
Unlocks waveforms for the specified zoom window <x>.
H NR1
0 unlocks waveforms for the specified zoom window <x>; any other
value locks waveforms for the specified zoom window <x>.
Example 1
ZOOm:ZOOM1:SCROLLLock ON
This command turns Zoom1 scroll lock on.
Example 2
ZOOm:ZOOM1:SCROLLLock?
This query returns either ON|1 or OFF|0 for Zoom1.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 839 --
ZOOm:ZOOM<x>:STATE
Description
This command sets or queries the specified zoom on or off, where x is
an integer from 1 to 4 representing the desired zoom window.
Default is Zoom1 on, Zoom2 -- 4 off.
Group
Zoom
Syntax 1
ZOOm:ZOOM<x>:STATE {ON|OFF|<NR1>}
Syntax 2
ZOOm:ZOOM<x>:STATE?
Arguments
H ON
Turns Zoom 1--4 on.
H OFF
Turns Zoom 1--4 off.
H <NR1>
A 0 disables the specified zoom; any other value enables the specified
zoom.
Example 1
ZOOm:ZOOM1:STATE ON
This command turns Zoom1 on.
Example 2
ZOOm:ZOOM1:STATE?
This query might return
:ZOOM:ZOOM2:STATE 1
indicating that Zoom2 is on.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 840 --
Status and Events
The instrument provides a status and event reporting system for the
GPIB interfaces. This system informs you of certain significant events
that occur within the instrument.
The instrument status handling system consists of five 8--bit registers
and two queues for each interface. The remaining Status subtopics describe these registers and components. They also explain how the event
handling system operates.
Registers
Overview
The registers in the event handling system fall into two functional
groups:
H
Status Registers contain information about the status of the
instrument. They include the Standard Event Status Register
(SESR)
H
Enable Registers determine whether selected types of events are
reported to the Status Registers and the Event Queue. They include
the Device Event Status Enable Register (DESER), the Event
Status Enable Register (ESER), and the Service Request Enable
Register (SRER).
Status
The Standard Event Status Register (SESR) and the Status Byte Register (SBR) record certain types of events that may occur while the instrument is in use. IEEE Std 488.2--1987 defines these registers.
Each bit in a Status Register records a particular type of event, such as
an execution error or message available. When an event of a given type
occurs, the instrument sets the bit that represents that type of event to a
value of one. (You can disable bits so that they ignore events and remain at zero. See Enable Registers). Reading the status registers tells
you what types of events have occurred.
The Standard Event Status Register (SESR) -- The SESR records
eight types of events that can occur within the instrument. Use the
*ESR? query to read the SESR register. Reading the register clears the
bits of the register so that the register can accumulate information about
new events.
Note: TekVISA applications use SESR bit 6 to respond to any of several events, including some front panel actions.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 841 --
Standard Event Status Register (SESR)
7
PON
6
URQ
5
CME
4
EXE
3
DDE
2
QYE
1
RQC
0
OPC
SESR Bit Functions
Bit
Function
7
(MSB)
PON
Power On. Shows that the oscilloscope
was powered on. On completion, the
diagnostic tests also set this bit.
6
URQ
User Request. Indicates that an
application event has occurred. *See
note.
5
CME
Command Error. Shows that an error
occurred while the oscilloscope was
parsing a command or query.
4
EXE
Execution Error. Shows that an error
occurred while the oscilloscope was
executing a command or query.
3
DDE
Device Error. Shows that a device error
occurred.
2
QYE
Query Error. Shows that either an attempt
was made to read the Output Queue
when no data was present or pending, or
that data in the Output Queue was lost.
1
RQC
Request Control. This is not used.
0
(LSB)
OPC
Operation Complete. Shows that the
operation is complete. This bit is set when
all pending operations complete following
an *OPC command.
The Status Byte Register (SBR) -- Records whether output is available
in the Output Queue, whether the instrument requests service, and
whether the SESR has recorded any events.
Use a Serial Poll or the *STB? query to read the contents of the SBR.
The bits in the SBR are set and cleared depending on the contents of the
SESR, the Event Status Enable Register (ESER), and the Output
Queue. When you use a Serial Poll to obtain the SBR, bit 6 is the RQS
bit. When you use the *STB? query to obtain the SBR, bit 6 is the MSS
bit. Reading the SBR does not clear the bits.
Status Byte Register (SBR)
7
--------
6
RQS
6
MSS
5
ESB
4
MAV
3
--------
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 842 --
2
--------
1
--------
0
--------
SBR Bit Functions
Bit
Function
7 (MSB)
-------------- Not used.
6
RQS
Request Service. Obtained from a serial
poll. Shows that the oscilloscope
requests service from the GPIB
controller.
6
MSS
Master Status Summary. Obtained from
*STB? query. Summarizes the ESB and
MAV bits in the SBR.
5
ESB
Event Status Bit. Shows that status is
enabled and present in the SESR.
4
MAV
Message Available. Shows that output is
available in the Output Queue.
3
-------------- Not used.
2
-------------- Not used.
1–0
-------------- Not used.
Enable
DESER, ESER, and SRER allow you to select which events are reported to the Status Registers and the Event Queue. Each Enable Register acts as a filter to a Status Register (the DESER also acts as a filter to
the Event Queue) and can prevent information from being recorded in
the register or queue.
Each bit in an Enable Register corresponds to a bit in the Status Register it controls. In order for an event to be reported to a bit in the Status
Register, the corresponding bit in the Enable Register must be set to
one. If the bit in the Enable Register is set to zero, the event is not recorded.
Various commands set the bits in the Enable Registers. The Enable
Registers and the commands used to set them are described below.
The Device Event Status Enable Register (DESER) -- This register
controls which types of events are reported to the SESR and the Event
Queue. The bits in the DESER correspond to those in the SESR.
Use the DESE command to enable and disable the bits in the DESER.
Use the DESE? query to read the DESER.
Device Event Status Enable Register (DESER)
7
PON
6
URQ
5
CME
4
EXE
3
DDE
2
QYE
1
RQC
0
OPC
The Event Status Enable Register (ESER) -- This register controls
which types of events are summarized by the Event Status Bit (ESB) in
the SBR. Use the *ESE command to set the bits in the ESER. Use the
*ESE? query to read it.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 843 --
Event Status Enable Register (ESER)
7
PON
6
URQ
5
CME
4
EXE
3
DDE
2
QYE
1
RQC
0
OPC
The Service Request Enable Register (SRER) -- This register controls
which bits in the SBR generate a Service Request and are summarized
by the Master Status Summary (MSS) bit.
Use the *SRE command to set the SRER. Use the *SRE? query to read
the register. The RQS bit remains set to one until either the Status Byte
Register is read with a Serial Poll or the MSS bit changes back to a
zero.
Service Request Enable Register (SRER)
7
6
5
------------ ------------ ESB
4
MAV
3
2
1
0
------------ ------------ ------------ ------------
*PSC Command
The *PSC command controls the Enable Registers contents at power-on. Sending *PSC 1 sets the Enable Registers at power on as follows:
H
DESER 255 (equivalent to a DESe 255 command)
H
ESER 0 (equivalent to an *ESE 0 command)
H
SRER 0 (equivalent to an *SRE 0 command)
Sending *PSC 0 lets the Enable Registers maintain their values in nonvolatile memory through a power cycle.
Note: To enable the PON (Power On) event to generate a Service Request, send *PSC 0, use the DESe and *ESE commands to enable PON
in the DESER and ESER, and use the *SRE command to enable bit 5 in
the SRER. Subsequent power--on cycles will generate a Service Request.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 844 --
Queues
The *PSC command controls the Enable Registers contents at power-on. Sending *PSC 1 sets the Enable Registers at power on as follows:
Output Queue
The instrument stores query responses in the Output Queue and empties
this queue each time it receives a new command or query message after
an <EOM>. The controller must read a query response before it sends
the next command (or query) or it will lose responses to earlier queries.
Caution: When a controller sends a query, an <EOM>, and a second
query, the instrument normally clears the first response and outputs the
second while reporting a Query Error (QYE bit in the ESER) to indicate the lost response. A fast controller, however, may receive a part or
all of the first response as well. To avoid this situation, the controller
should always read the response immediately after sending any terminated query message or send a DCL (Device Clear) before sending the
second query.
Event Queue
The Event Queue stores detailed information on up to 33 events. If
more than 32 events stack up in the Event Queue, the 32nd event is replaced by event code 350, ”Queue Overflow.”
Read the Event Queue with the EVENT? query (which returns only the
event number), with the EVMSG? query (which returns the event number and a text description of the event), or with the ALLEV? query
(which returns all the event numbers along with a description of the
event). Reading an event removes it from the queue.
Before reading an event from the Event Queue, you must use the
*ESR? query to read the summary of the event from the SESR. This
makes the events summarized by the *ESR? read available to the
EVENT? and EVMSG? queries, and empties the SESR.
Reading the SESR erases any events that were summarized by previous
*ESR? reads but not read from the Event Queue. Events that follow an
*ESR? read are put in the Event Queue but are not available until
*ESR? is used again.
Event Handling Sequence
The figure below shows how to use the status and event handling system. In the explanation that follows, numbers in parentheses refer to
numbers in the figure.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 845 --
When an event occurs, a signal is sent to the DESER (1). If that type of
event is enabled in the DESER (that is, if the bit for that event type is
set to 1), the appropriate bit in the SESR is set to one, and the event is
recorded in the Event Queue (2). If the corresponding bit in the ESER
is also enabled (3), then the ESB bit in the SBR is set to one (4).
When output is sent to the Output Queue, the MAV bit in the SBR is set
to one (5).
When a bit in the SBR is set to one and the corresponding bit in the
SRER is enabled (6), the MSS bit in the SBR is set to one and a service
request is generated (7).
Synchronization Methods
Overview
Although most GPIB commands are completed almost immediately
after being received by the instrument, some commands start a process
that requires more time. For example, once a single sequence acquisition command is executed, depending upon the applied signals and trigger settings, it may be a few seconds before the acquisition is
complete. Rather than remain idle while the operation is in process, the
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 846 --
instrument will continue processing other commands. This means that
some operations will not be completed in the order that they were sent.
Sometimes the result of an operation depends on the result of an earlier
operation. A first operation must complete before the next one gets processed. The instrument status and event reporting system provides ways
to do this.
For example, a typical application might involve acquiring a single--sequence waveform and then taking a measurement on the acquired waveform. You could use the following command sequence to do this:
/**
Set
up
conditional
ACQUIRE:STATE
SELECT:CH1
acquisition
**/
OFF
ON
HORIZONTAL:RECORDLENGTH
ACQUIRE:MODE
500
SAMPLE
ACQUIRE:STOPAFTER SEQUENCE
/**
Acquire
ACQUIRE:STATE
waveform data **/
ON
/** Set up the measurement
MEASUREMENT:IMMED:TYPE
Take
amplitude
**/
AMPLITUDE
MEASUREMENT: IMMED:SOURCE
/**
parameters
CH1
measurement
**/
MEASUREMENT: MEAS1:VALUE?
The acquisition of the waveform requires extended processing time. It
may not finish before the instrument takes an amplitude measurement
(see the following figure). This can result in an incorrect amplitude value.
To ensure the instrument completes waveform acquisition before taking
the measurement on the acquired data, you can synchronize the program.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 847 --
You can use four commands to synchronize the operation of the instrument with your application program: *WAI, BUSY?, *OPC, and
*OPC?
*WAI
The *WAI command forces completion of previous commands that
generate an OPC message. No commands after the *WAI are processed
before the OPC message(s) are generated
The same command sequence using the *WAI command for synchronization looks like this:
/*
Set up conditional acquisition
ACQUIRE:STATE
SELECT:CH1
*/
OFF
ON
HORIZONTAL:RECORDLENGTH
ACQUIRE:MODE
500
SAMPLE
ACQUIRE:STOPAFTER SEQUENCE
/*
Acquire
waveform data */
ACQUIRE:STATE
/*
ON
Set up the measurement parameters
MEASUREMENT:IMMED:TYPE
AMPLITUDE
MEASUREMENT:IMMED:SOURCE
/*
*/
CH1
Wait until the acquisition is complete
fore taking the measurement*/
be-
*/
*WAI
/*
Take amplitude measurement
*/
MEASUREMENT:IMMED:VALUE?
The controller can continue to write commands to the input buffer of
the instrument, but the commands will not be processed by the instrument until all OPC operations in process are complete. If the input buff-
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 848 --
er becomes full, the controller will be unable to write more commands
to the buffer. This can cause a time--out.
BUSY?
The BUSY? query allows you to find out whether the instrument is
busy processing a command that has an extended processing time such
as single--sequence acquisition.
The same command sequence, using the BUSY? query for synchronization, l
/*
Set
up
conditional
ACQUIRE:STATE
SELECT:CH1
acquisition
*/
OFF
ON
HORIZONTAL:RECORDLENGTH
ACQUIRE:MODE
500
SAMPLE
ACQUIRE:STOPAFTER SEQUENCE
/*
Acquire
waveform
ACQUIRE:STATE
/*
Set
up
data */
ON
the
measurement
MEASUREMENT:IMMED:TYPE
parameters
AMPLITUDE
MEASUREMENT:IMMED:SOURCE
CH1
/* Wait until the acquisition
before taking the measurement */
While
/*
BUSY?
Take
keep
amplitude
*/
is
complete
looping
measurement
*/
MEASUREMENT:IMMED:VALUE?
This sequence lets you create your own wait loop rather than using the
*WAI command. The BUSY? query helps you avoid time--outs caused
by writing too many commands to the input buffer. The controller is
still tied up though, and the repeated BUSY? query will result in more
bus traffic.
*OPC
If the corresponding status registers are enabled, the *OPC command
sets the OPC bit in the Standard Event Status Register (SESR) when an
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 849 --
operation is complete. You achieve synchronization by using this command with either a serial poll or service request handler.
Serial Poll Method: Enable the OPC bit in the Device Event Status
Enable Register (DESER) and the Event Status Enable Register
(ESER) using the DESE and *ESE commands.
When the operation is complete, the OPC bit in the Standard Event Status Register (SESR) will be enabled and the Event Status Bit (ESB) in
the Status Byte Register will be enabled.
The same command sequence using the *OPC command for synchronization with serial polling looks like this:
/*
Set
up
conditional
ACQUIRE:STATE
SELECT:CH1
acquisition
*/
OFF
ON
HORIZONTAL:RECORDLENGTH
ACQUIRE:MODE
500
SAMPLE
ACQUIRE:STOPAFTER SEQUENCE
/*
Enable
DESE
1
*ESE
1
*SRE
0
/*
the
Acquire
Set
up
registers
waveform data
ACQUIRE:STATE
/*
status
*/
*/
ON
the
measurement
MEASUREMENT:IMMED:TYPE
parameters
*/
AMPLITUDE
MEASUREMENT:IMMED:SOURCE
CH1
/* Wait until the acquisition is complete before taking the measurement.
*/
*OPC
While
/*
serial
Take
poll
amplitude
=
0,
measurement
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 850 --
keep
looping
*/
MEASUREMENT:IMMED:VALUE?
This technique requires less bus traffic than did looping on BUSY?.
Service Request Method: Enable the OPC bit in the Device Event
Status Enable Register (DESER) and the Event Status Enable Register
(ESER) using the DESE and *ESE commands.
You can also enable service requests by setting the ESB bit in the Service Request Enable Register (SRER) using the *SRE command. When
the operation is complete, a Service Request will be generated.
The same command sequence using the *OPC command for synchronization looks like this
/*
Set up conditional acquisition
ACQUIRE:STATE
SELECT:CH1
*/
OFF
ON
HORIZONTAL:RECORDLENGTH
ACQUIRE:MODE
500
SAMPLE
ACQUIRE:STOPAFTER SEQUENCE
/*
Enable the status registers
DESE
1
*ESE
1
*SRE
32
/*
Acquire waveform data */
ACQUIRE:STATE
/*
*/
ON
Set up the measurement parameters
MEASUREMENT:IMMED:TYPE
*/
AMPLITUDE
MEASUREMENT:IMMED:SOURCE
CH1
/* Wait until the acquisition is complete before taking the measurement
*/
*OPC
The program can now do different tasks such
as talk to other devices. The SRQ, when it
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 851 --
comes, interrupts those tasks and returns
trol to this
task.
/*
Take amplitude measurement
con-
*/
MEASUREMENT:IMMED:VALUE?
This technique is more efficient but requires more sophisticated programming.
*OPC?
The *OPC? query places a 1 in the Output Queue once an operation
that generates an OPC message is complete. A time out could
occur if you try to read the output queue before there is any data in it.
The same command sequence using the *OPC? query for synchronization looks like this:
/*
Set
up
conditional
ACQUIRE:STATE
SELECT:CH1
acquisition
*/
OFF
ON
HORIZONTAL:RECORDLENGTH
ACQUIRE:MODE
500
SAMPLE
ACQUIRE:STOPAFTER SEQUENCE
/*
Acquire
waveform data */
ACQUIRE:STATE
/*
Set
up
ON
the
measurement
MEASUREMENT:IMMED:TYPE
parameters
*/
AMPLITUDE
MEASUREMENT:IMMED:SOURCE
CH1
/* Wait until the acquisition is complete before taking the measurement
*/
*OPC?
Wait
/*
for
Take
read
from
amplitude
Output
Queue.
measurement
*/
MEASUREMENT:IMMED:VALUE?
This is the simplest approach. It requires no status handling or loops.
However, you must set the controller time--out for longer than the acquisition operation.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 852 --
Messages
Overview
The information contained in the topic tabs above covers all the programming interface messages the instrument generates in response to
commands and queries.
For most messages, a secondary message from the instrument gives
more detail about the cause of the error or the meaning of the message.
This message is part of the message string and is separated from the
main message by a semicolon.
Each message is the result of an event. Each type of event sets a specific bit in the SESR and is controlled by the equivalent bit in the DESER.
Thus, each message is associated with a specific SESR bit. In the message tables, the associated SESR bit is specified in the table title, with
exceptions noted with the error message text.
No Event
The following table shows the messages when the system has no events
or status to report. These have no associated SESR bit.
No Event Messages
Code
Message
0
No events to report; queue empty
1
No events to report; new events pending *ESR?
Command Error
The following table shows the command error messages generated by
improper syntax. Check that the command is properly formed and that
it follows the rules in the section on command Syntax.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 853 --
Command Error Messages (CME Bit 5)
Code
Message
100
Command error
101
Invalid character
102
Syntax error
103
Invalid separator
104
Data type error
105
GET not allowed
108
Parameter not allowed
109
Missing parameter
110
Command header error
111
Header separator error
112
Program mnemonic too long
113
Undefined header
114
Header suffix out of range
120
Numeric data error
121
Invalid character in number
123
Exponent too large
124
Too many digits
128
Numeric data not allowed
130
Suffix error
131
Invalid suffix
134
Suffix too long
138
Suffix not allowed
140
Character data error
141
Invalid character data
144
Character data too long
148
Character data not allowed
150
String data error
151
Invalid string data
158
String data not allowed
160
Block data error
161
Invalid block data
168
Block data not allowed
170
Command expression error
171
Invalid expression
178
Expression data not allowed
Execution Error
The following table lists the execution errors that are detected during
execution of a command.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 854 --
2209
Measurement error, No second Mid
Ref crossing
2210
Measurement error, No Mid Ref
crossing, second waveform
2211
Measurement error, No backwards
Mid Ref crossing
2212
Measurement error, No negative
crossing
2213
Measurement error, No positive
crossing
2214
Measurement error, No crossing
2215
Measurement error, No crossing,
second waveform
2216
Measurement error, No crossing,
target waveform
2217
Measurement error, Constant
waveform
2218
Measurement error, Unused
2219
Measurement error, No valid edge -No arm sample
2220
Measurement error, No valid edge -No arm cross
2221
Measurement error, No valid edge -No trigger cross
2222
Measurement error, No valid edge -No second cross
2223
Measurement error, Waveform
mismatch
2225
Measurement error, No waveform to
measure
2226
Measurement error, Null Waveform
2227
Measurement error, Positive and
Negative Clipping
2228
Measurement error, Positive
Clipping
2229
Measurement error, Negative
Clipping
2230
Measurement error, High Ref < Low
Ref
2231
Measurement error, no statistics
available
2241
Waveform request is invalid
2243
This meas cannot be performed on
this type of wfm
2244
Source wfm is not active
2248
This ref cannot be activated
2249
Reference deletion error, Waveform
in use for math
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 855 --
2250
Reference error, Waveform
reference file is invalid
2251
Reference error, Waveform
preamble does not match actual
2252
Reference error, Source wfm is not
valid
2253
Reference error, Too many points
received
2254
Reference error, Too few points
received
2259
File too big
2261
Calibration error, wait for the
warmup interval to expire before
invoking SPC
2400
Not enough memory available
2401
This channel cannot be activated
2402
Math/Meas/Histo have circular
definition
2410
Empty math string
2411
Syntax error in math string
2412
Semantic error in math string
2413
Math expression is too complex
2420
Histogram cannot be performed on
this type of wfm
Device Error
The following table lists the device errors that can occur during instrument operation. These errors may indicate that the instrument needs
repair.
Device Error Messages (DDE Bit 3)
Code
Message
300
Device--specific error
310
System error
311
Memory error
312
PUD memory lost
313
Calibration memory lost
314
Save/recall memory lost
315
Configuration memory lost
350
Queue overflow (does not set DDE bit)
System Event
The following table lists the system event messages. These messages
are generated whenever certain system conditions occur.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 856 --
System Event Messages
Code
Message
400
Query event
401
Power on (PON bit 7 set)
402
Operation complete (OPC bit 0 set)
403
User request (URQ bit 6 set)
404
Power fail (DDE bit 3 set)
405
Request control
410
Query INTERRUPTED (QYE bit 2 set)
420
Query UNTERMINATED (QYE bit 2 set)
430
Query DEADLOCKED (QYE bit 2 set)
440
Query UNTERMINATED after indefinite response
(QYE bit 2 set)
Execution Warning
The following table lists warning messages that do not interrupt the
flow of command execution. These notify you that you may get unexpected results.
Execution Warning Messages (EXE Bit 4)
Code
Message
540
Measurement warning
541
Measurement warning, Low signal amplitude
542
Measurement warning, Unstable histogram
543
Measurement warning, Low resolution
544
Measurement warning, Uncertain edge
545
Measurement warning, Invalid in minmax
546
Measurement warning, Need 3 edges
547
Measurement warning, Clipping positive/negative
548
Measurement warning, Clipping positive
549
Measurement warning, Clipping negative
551
FASTAcq mode is active -- deactivate to use math
Internal Warning
The following table shows internal errors that indicate an internal fault
in the instrument.
Internal Warning Messages
Code
Message
600
Internal warning
630
Internal warning, 50 Ω overload
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 857 --
Programming Examples
Overview
Three example programs, which demonstrate methods that you can use
to control the instrument through the General Purpose Interface Bus
(GPIB), are included on your TDS5000B Series Product Software CD.
These example programs are installed as part of the GPIB Programmer
installation, which includes the TDS5000B Series Oscilloscope Programmer Online Guide.
To install the ”GPIB Programmer”, perform the following procedure:
1.
Insert the TDS5000B Series Product Software CD in your CD
drive.
2.
Open the folder named GPIB Programmer.
3.
Double--click Setup.exe.
4.
Follow the Install Wizard directions.
An Examples directory will be created with the following path
name:
C:\Program Files\TekScope\Programmer\Examples
Within the Examples directory are two subdirectories, Source and Programs.
Source contains the source files, written in Microsoft Visual C++ , Version 6.0, which is required to build executable files for each of the following example programs:
H
Meas.c ---- This example program demonstrates how to perform a
periodic amplitude measurement on CH 1 of your instrument.
H
GetWfm.c ---- This example program demonstrates how to acquire
and output the CH 1 waveform in a 500--point RIBANARY format.
The program then queries the instrument to get the waveform
preamble information, formats the binary waveform data as ASCII
values, and, finally, writes out a report of the waveform preamble
and ASCII data points to a file named WFM_DATA.PRN.
H
Tl.c ---- This example program demonstrates how to use a general
talker/listener program to allow the user to send commands and
queries to the instrument and display the responses.
A README file in the Source directory has the latest documentation.
Programs contains compiled, executable files for each of the example
programs in the Source directory (see above).
The programs run on a PC--compatible system equipped with a National Instruments GPIB board and associated drivers.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 858 --
Compiling GPIB Programs
The example GPIB programs make the following assumptions:
H
The GPIB controller board is ”GPIB0” (board 0). If you have more
than one GPIB controller in your workstation, and you want to user
a GPIB controller other than board 0, you must edit the source files
accordingly.
H
The instrument is connected to the GPIB controller (see above) and
is set to address 1 (DEV1). If you want to use another address, then
you must edit the source files accordingly.
Each program requires adding the following source files to the associated VC++ project (which you will create).
H
GPIBERR.C
H
GPIBREAD.C
H
GPIBWAIT.C
H
GPIBWRIT.C
In addition to the above source files, you will also need to add the following files provided by National Instruments:
H
decl--32.h
H
gpib--32.obj
Visual C++
To make an executable for any of the example programs in the Source
directory, perform the following steps:
1.
Install Microsoft Visual C++, Version 6.0.
2.
Install the National Instruments GPIB board and drivers.
3.
Copy the following source files from your National Instruments
GPIB drivers directory to this directory (”Examples\Source”):
H
decl--32.h
H
gpib--32.obj
4.
Create a new ”Win32 Console Application” project in Visual C++
located in this directory (”Examples\Source”). For example, if you
want to build the Talker/Listener application, select this directory
for the location, and enter a suitable name for the project, such as
TL.
5.
Add the following Visual C++ source files to the project:
H
..\GPIBERR.C
H
..\GPIBREAD
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 859 --
6.
H
..\GPIBWAIT.C
H
..\GPIBWRIT.C
Add the following source files provided by National Instruments to
the project:
H
..\decl--32.h
H
..gpib--32.obj
7.
Add the appropriate program main source file to the project (see
Overview for a list of the three source files).
8.
Build and test the project.
9.
To build another of the example projects, repeat steps 4 through 8.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 860 --
Miscellaneous
Character Charts
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 861 --
Reserved Words
Overview
This is a list of reserved words for the TDS5000B Series instruments.
Capital letters identify the required minimum spelling. For the most
robust code, use the full spelling, since spelling rules may change over
time and among instrument models.
*CAL to DIAg
*CAL
*TRG
BETWeen
CONTROL
*CLS
*TST
BIT_Nr
COPy
*DDT
*WAI
BN_Fmt
COUNt
*ESE
A
BOTh
COUPling
*ESR
ABSolute
Box
CURSor
*IDN
ACQuire
BOXPcnt
CURVe
*LRN
ACTUal
BUSY
DATa
*OPC
ALIas
BY
DATe
*OPT
ALL
BYT_Nr
DEFIne
*PSC
ALLev
BYT_Or
DELay
*PUD
AREA
CALibrate
DELEte
*RCL
AUTOBright
CENTER
DELTa
*RST
AUTOSet
CH<x>
DELTATime
*SAV
AUXout
CLAss
DESE
*SDS
B
CLOCk
DESKew
*SRE
BANdwidth
CMDBatch
DESTination
*STB
BELl
COLOr
DIAg
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 862 --
DIR to MAXimum
DIR
FASTAcq
HARDCopy
LABEL
DIREction
FILEName
HBArs
LAST
DISplay
FILESystem
HDELTA
LENgth
DIVisions
FILTer
HDR
LESSLimit
EDGE
FIRST
HEADer
LEVEL
EDGE2
FORMat
HIGH
LOCk
ENCdg
FRAME
HIGHLimit
LOGIc
EVENT
FREQuency
HIStogram
LOOP
EVENTS
FUNCtion
HOLDoff
LOOPS
EVMsg
GAIN
HOLDTime
LOW
EVQty
GATEPOS
HORizontal
LOWLimit
EXECUTE
GATEWIDTH
HPOS<x>
MAG
EXTatten
GATING
ID
MAIn
EXTDBatten
GLItch
IMMed
MATH<x>
EXTUnits
GPIB
INTENSITy
MATHCOLOr
FACtory
GRATicule
INPut
MAXimum
FAILURES
HALT
ITEM
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 863 --
MEAN to SIZe
MEAN
NUMITEMS
PRObestate
RESULT
MEAS<x>
OFFSet
PT_Fmt
RESults
MEASUrement
PAIred
PT_Off
RMDir
METHod
PALETTE
PT_OR
RUNT
MID
PASSword
PULse
SAMPLERate
MID2
PATtern
PUMODE
SAVe
MINimum
PERCent
READFile
SCAle
MKDir
PERSistence
RECAll
SCREENSAVER
MODe
PHASE
RECOrdlength
SCREENSAVERDELAY
MORELimit
POLarity
REF
SELect
NAMe
PORT
REF<x>
SELECTED
NEWpass
POSition
REFCOLOr
SERnumber
NEXT
POSition<x>
REFLevel
SET
NR_Pt
PRInt
REName
SETHold
NUMACq
PRObe
REPEt
SETTime
NUMAVg
PROBECal
RESBw
SETUp
NUMEnv
PROBEFunc
RESistance
SIZe
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 864 --
SLOpe to ZOOm
SLOpe
SUPPress
VALue
XINcr
SOURCE
TERminator
VARPersist
XPOS
SOURCE2
TEST
VBArs
XUNit
SPAN
THReshold
VDELTA
XZEro
SPC
TIMe
VERBose
YMUlt
SPECTral
TIMEOut
VOLtage
YOFf
SPLit
TIMEStamp
<wfm>
YPOS
STARt
TRACk
WAVEform
YUNit
STATE
TRANsition
WAVFrm
YZEro
STATIstics
TRIGBar
WEIghting
ZOOm
STDdev
TRIGger
WFId
STOP
TRIGIF
WFMInpre
STOPAfter
TRIGT
WFMOutpre
STRing
TYPe
WHEn
STYLe
UNIts
WIDth
SUBITEMS
UNLock
WINdow
SUBSYS
UNWRap
WRITEFile
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 865 --
Factory Default Setup Values
Default Setup
The following tables list the default setup values by command group.
The instrument sets these values when you press the front--panel DEFAULT SETUP button or sending the FACtory command. Only those
commands that have values set by the DEFAULT SETUP function are
listed in these tables.
Note: The following commands do not affect the DATa parameters:
TEKSecure, *RST, RECALL:SETUP FACtory. These are the initial
factory default settings for DATa :DATA:DESTINATION
REF1;ENCDG RIBINARY;SOURCE CH1;START 1;STOP
5000;FRAMESTART 1;FRAMESTOP 5000.
Acquisition Default Values
The following table lists the Acquisition factory default setup values.
Command
Default Values
ACQUIRE:MODE
SAMPLE
ACQUIRE:NUMAVG
16
ACQUIRE:NUMENV
10
ACQUIRE:NUMSAMPLES
16000
ACQUIRE:SAMPLINGMODE
IT
ACQUIRE:STATE
1 (ON)
ACQUIRE:STOPAFTER
RUNSTOP
FASTACQ:STATE
0
Alias Default Values
The following table lists the Alias factory default setup values.
Command
Default Values
ALIAS:STATE
0 (OFF)
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 866 --
Cursor Default Values
The following table lists the Cursor factory default setup values.
Command
Default Values
CURSOR:FUNCTION
VBARS
CURSOR:HBARS:POSITION1
300.0000E-3
CURSOR:HBARS:POSITION2
-300.0000E-3
CURSOR:LINESTYLE
SOLID
CURSOR:MODE
INDEPENDENT
CURSOR:PAIRED:POSITION1
-1.6000E-6
CURSOR:PAIRED:POSITION2
1.6000E-6
CURSOR:SCREEN:STYLE
LINES
CURSOR:SOURCE1
CH1
CURSOR:SOURCE2
CH1
CURSOR:STATE
0
CURSOR:VBARS:POSITION1
-1.6000E-6
CURSOR:VBARS:POSITION2
1.6000E-6
CURSOR:VBARS:UNITS
SECONDS
CURSOR:WAVEFORM:POSITION1
-1.6000E-6
CURSOR:WAVEFORM:POSITION2
1.6000E-6
CURSOR:WAVEFORM:SOURCE2
CH1
CURSOR:WAVEFORM:STYLE
LINE_X
CURSOR:WAVEFORM:UNITS
BASE
CURSOR:XY:READOUT
RECTANGULAR
CURSOR:XY:RECTX1
0.0000
CURSOR:XY:RECTX2
0.0000
CURSOR:XY:RECTY1
0.0000
CURSOR:XY:RECTY2
0.0000
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 867 --
Diagnostics Default Values
The following table lists the Diagnostics factory default setup values.
Command
Default Values
DIAG:LEVEL
SUBSYS
Dispaly Default Values
The following table lists the Display factory default setup values.
Command
Default Values
DISPLAY:CLOCK
1
DISPLAY:COLOR:MATHCOLOR
DEFAULT
DISPLAY:COLOR:PALETTE:IMAGEVIEW
TEMPERATURE
DISPLAY:COLOR:PALETTE:RECORDVIEW
NORMAL
DISPLAY:COLOR:PALETTE:USER:CARET
150,50,100
DISPLAY:COLOR:PALETTE:USER:CH1
180,50,100
DISPLAY:COLOR:PALETTE:USER:CH2
300,50,100
DISPLAY:COLOR:PALETTE:USER:CH3
60,50,100
DISPLAY:COLOR:PALETTE:USER:CH4
240,50,100
DISPLAY:COLOR:PALETTE:USER:GRATICULE
165,50,15
DISPLAY:COLOR:PALETTE:USER:HISTOGRAM
320,50,100
DISPLAY:COLOR:PALETTE:USER:MASK
0,25,75
DISPLAY:COLOR:PALETTE:USER:MASKHIGHLIGHT
140,50,100
DISPLAY:COLOR:PALETTE:USER:MATH1
160,50,100
DISPLAY:COLOR:PALETTE:USER:MATH2
40,60,100
DISPLAY:COLOR:PALETTE:USER:MATH3
120,60,100
DISPLAY:COLOR:PALETTE:USER:MATH4
195,50,100
DISPLAY:COLOR:PALETTE:USER:REF1
0,90,0
DISPLAY:COLOR:PALETTE:USER:REF2
0,90,100
DISPLAY:COLOR:PALETTE:USER:REF3
60,90,100
DISPLAY:COLOR:PALETTE:USER:REF4
240,90,100
DISPLAY:COLOR:REFCOLOR
DEFAULT
DISPLAY:CURSORTICK
SHORT
DISPLAY:FILTER
SINX
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 868 --
DISPLAY:FORMAT
YT
DISPLAY:GRATICULE
FULL
DISPLAY:INTENSITY:AUTOBRIGHT
1
DISPLAY:INTENSITY:SCREENSAVER
1
DISPLAY:INTENSITY:SCREENSAVERDELAY
28800
DISPLAY:INTENSITY:WAVEFORM:IMAGEVIEW
75.0000
DISPLAY:INTENSITY:WAVEFORM:RECORDVIEW
75.0000
DISPLAY:PERSISTENCE
OFF
DISPLAY:SCREENTEXT:LABEL1:NAME
””
DISPLAY:SCREENTEXT:LABEL1:XPOS
100
DISPLAY:SCREENTEXT:LABEL1:YPOS
5
DISPLAY:SCREENTEXT:LABEL2:NAME
””
DISPLAY:SCREENTEXT:LABEL2:XPOS
100
DISPLAY:SCREENTEXT:LABEL2:YPOS
20
DISPLAY:SCREENTEXT:LABEL3:NAME
””
DISPLAY:SCREENTEXT:LABEL3:XPOS
100
DISPLAY:SCREENTEXT:LABEL3:YPOS
35
DISPLAY:SCREENTEXT:LABEL4:NAME
””
DISPLAY:SCREENTEXT:LABEL4:XPOS
100
DISPLAY:SCREENTEXT:LABEL4:YPOS
5
DISPLAY:SCREENTEXT:LABEL5:NAME
””
DISPLAY:SCREENTEXT:LABEL5:XPOS
100
DISPLAY:SCREENTEXT:LABEL5:YPOS
65
DISPLAY:SCREENTEXT:LABEL6:NAME
””
DISPLAY:SCREENTEXT:LABEL6:XPOS
100
DISPLAY:SCREENTEXT:LABEL6:YPOS
80
DISPLAY:SCREENTEXT:LABEL7:NAME
””
DISPLAY:SCREENTEXT:LABEL7:XPOS
100
DISPLAY:SCREENTEXT:LABEL7:YPOS
95
DISPLAY:SCREENTEXT:LABEL8:NAME
””
DISPLAY:SCREENTEXT:LABEL8:XPOS
100
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 869 --
DISPLAY:SCREENTEXT:LABEL8:YPOS
110
DISPLAY:SCREENTEXT:STATE
0
DISPLAY:STYLE
VECTORS
DISPLAY:TRIGBAR
SHORT
DISPLAY:TRIGT
1
DISPLAY:VARPERSIST
500.0000E-3
Email Default Values
The following table lists the Email setup values.
Command
Default Values
EMAIL:ATTEMPTS
1
EMAIL:AUTHLOGIN
””
EMAIL:FROM
”TDS5054B_<Instrument Serial Number>”
EMAIL:HOSTWANTED
””
EMAIL:IMAGE
0
EMAIL:LIMIT
0
EMAIL:MASK
0
EMAIL:MAXSIZE
1
EMAIL:MEASUREMENT
0
EMAIL:NUMEMAILS
1
EMAIL:SMTPPORT
25
EMAIL:SMTPSERVER
””
EMAIL:TIMEOUT
30
EMAIL:TO
””
EMAIL:TRIGGER
0
EMAIL:WAVEFORM
0
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 870 --
Hardcopy Default Values
The following table lists the Hardcopy factory default setup values.
Command
Default Values
HARDCopy:FILEName
””
HARDCopy:PORT
FILE
Histogram Default Values
The following table lists the Histogram factory default setup values.
Command
Default Values
HISTOGRAM:BOXPCNT
30.0000,25.1000,70.0000,75.2000
HISTOGRAM:DISPLAY
LINEAR
HISTOGRAM:FUNCTION
HORIZONTAL
HISTOGRAM:SIZE
2.0000
HISTOGRAM:SOURCE
CH1
HISTOGRAM:STATE
0
Horizontal Default Values
The following table lists the Horizontal factory default setup values.
Command
Default Values
HORIZONTAL:DELAY:MODE
0
HORIZONTAL:DELAY:POSITION
50.0000
HORIZONTAL:DELAY:TIME
0.00000000000
HORIZONTAL:FASTFRAME:COUNT
2
HORIZONTAL:FASTFRAME:LENGTH
5000
HORIZONTAL:FASTFRAME:MULTIPLEFRAMES
:FRAMESTART:CH<1-4>
1
HORIZONTAL:FASTFRAME:MULTIPLEFRAMES
:FRAMESTART:MATH<1-4>
1
HORIZONTAL:FASTFRAME:MULTIPLEFRAMES
:FRAMESTART:REF<1-4>
1
HORIZONTAL:FASTFRAME:MULTIPLEFRAMES
:MODE
OFF
HORIZONTAL:FASTFRAME:MULTIPLEFRAMES
:NUMFRAMES:CH1-4>
2
HORIZONTAL:FASTFRAME:MULTIPLEFRAMES
:NUMFRAMES:MATH<1-4>
2
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 871 --
HORIZONTAL:FASTFRAME:MULTIPLEFRAMES
:NUMFRAMES:REF<1-4>
2
HORIZONTAL:FASTFRAME:READOUTS
0
HORIZONTAL:FASTFRAME:REF:FRAME
1
HORIZONTAL:FASTFRAME:REF:SOURCE
CH1
HORIZONTAL:FASTFRAME:SELECTED:CH1
2
HORIZONTAL:FASTFRAME:SELECTED:CH2
2
HORIZONTAL:FASTFRAME:SELECTED:CH3
2
HORIZONTAL:FASTFRAME:SELECTED:CH4
2
HORIZONTAL:FASTFRAME:SELECTED:MATH1
2
HORIZONTAL:FASTFRAME:SELECTED:MATH2
2
HORIZONTAL:FASTFRAME:SELECTED:MATH3
2
HORIZONTAL:FASTFRAME:SELECTED:MATH4
2
HORIZONTAL:FASTFRAME:SELECTED:REF1
2
HORIZONTAL:FASTFRAME:SELECTED:REF2
2
HORIZONTAL:FASTFRAME:SELECTED:REF3
2
HORIZONTAL:FASTFRAME:SELECTED:REF4
2
HORIZONTAL:FASTFRAME:STATE
0
HORIZONTAL:FASTFRAME:SUMFRAME
NONE
HORIZONTAL:FASTFRAME:TRACK
LIVE
HORIZONTAL:MAIN:POSITION
50.0000
HORIZONTAL:MAIN:SAMPLERATE
1.2500E+9
HORIZONTAL:MAIN:SCALE
400.0000E-9
HORIZONTAL:RECORDLENGTH
5000
HORIZONTAL:RESOLUTION
5000
HORIZONTAL:ROLL
AUTO
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 872 --
Limit Test Default Values
The following table lists the Limit Test factory default setup values.
Command
Default Values
LIMIT:BEEP
0
LIMIT:COMPARE:<CH1-4>
NONE
LIMIT:COMPARE:MATH<1-4>
NONE
LIMIT:COMPARE:REF<1-4>
NONE
LIMIT:EMAIL
0
LIMIT:HARDCOPY
0
LIMIT:HIGHLIGHTHITS
1
LIMIT:LOCK
1
LIMIT:LOG
0
LIMIT:SAVEWFM
0
LIMIT:SRQ
0
LIMIT:STATE
0
LIMIT:STOPONVIOLATION
0
LIMIT:TEMPLATE:TOLERANCE:HORIZONTAL
40.0000E-3
LIMIT:TEMPLATE:TOLERANCE:VERTICAL
40.0000E-3
Mask Default Values
The following table lists the Mask factory default setup values.
Command
Default Values
MASK:AUTOADJUST
10
MASK:AUTOADJUST:HDELTA
10
MASK:AUTOADJUST:VDELTA
10
MASK:AUTOSET:AUTOADJUST
1
MASK:AUTOSET:HPOS
1
MASK:AUTOSET:HSCALE
1
MASK:AUTOSET:MODE
MANUAL
MASK:AUTOSET:OFFSETADJ
1
MASK:AUTOSET:STANDARD
NONE
MASK:AUTOSET:TRIGGER
1
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 873 --
MASK:AUTOSET:VPOS
1
MASK:AUTOSET:VSCALE
1
MASK:COUNT:STATE
0
MASK:DISPLAY
1
MASK:FILTER
0
MASK:HIGHLIGHTHITS
1
MASK:INVERT
0
MASK:LOCK
1
MASK:MARGIN:PERCENT
5.0000
MASK:MARGIN:STATE
0
MASK:MASKPRE:AMPLITUDE
100.0000E-3
MASK:MASKPRE:HSCALE
200.0000E-9
MASK:MASKPRE:HTRIGPOS
500.0000E-3
MASK:MASKPRE:PATTERNBITS
1
MASK:MASKPRE:PRESAMPBITS
0
MASK:MASKPRE:RECORDLENGTH
5000
MASK:MASKPRE:TRIGTOSAMP
0.0000
MASK:MASKPRE:VOFFSET
0.0000
MASK:MASKPRE:VPOS
0.0000
MASK:MASKPRE:VSCALE
1.0000E-3
MASK:MASKPRE:WIDTH
0.0000
MASK:POLARITY
POSITIVE
MASK:SOURCE
CH1
MASK:STANDARD
NONE
MASK:STOPONVIOLATION
0
MASK:TEST:BEEP:COMPLETION
0
MASK:TEST:BEEP:FAILURE
0
MASK:TEST:DELAY
0.0000
MASK:TEST:HARDCOPY
0
MASK:TEST:LOG:FAILURE
0
MASK:TEST:REPEAT
0
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 874 --
MASK:TEST:SAMPLE:THRESHOLD
1
MASK:TEST:SAVEWFM
0
MASK:TEST:SAVEWFM:FILENAME
”C:/TekScope/Waveforms/”
MASK:TEST:SRQ:COMPLETION
0
MASK:TEST:SRQ:FAILURE
0
MASK:TEST:STATE
0
MASK:TEST:STOP:FAILURE
0
MASK:TEST:THRESHOLD
1
MASK:TEST:WAVEFORM
20
MASK:USER:AMPLITUDE
100.0000E-3
MASK:USER:BITRATE
1544000
MASK:USER:HSCALE
200.0000E-9
MASK:USER:HTRIGPOS
500.0000E-3
MASK:USER:LABEL
”User Mask”
MASK:USER:PATTERNBITS
1
MASK:USER:PRESAMPBITS
0
MASK:USER:RECORDLENGTH
5000
MASK:USER:TRIGTOSAMP
0.0000
MASK:USER:VOFFSET
0.0000
MASK:USER:VPOS
0.0000
MASK:USER:VSCALE
1.0000E-3
MASK:USER:WIDTH
0.0000
Math Default Values
The following table lists the Math factory default setup values.
Command
Default Values
MATH<1-4>:DEFINE
” ”
MATH<1-4>:LABEL:NAME
””
MATH<1-4>:LABEL:XPOS
1.0000
MATH<1-4>:LABEL:YPOS
<1> 600.0000E-3
<2> 200.0000E-3
<3> -200.0000E-3
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 875 --
<4> -600.0000E-3
MATH<1-4>::NUMAVG
2
MATH<1-4>:SPECTRAL:CENTER
312.5000E+6
MATH<1-4>:SPECTRAL:GATEPOS
0.0000
MATH<1-4>:SPECTRAL:GATEWIDTH
2.0000E-6
MATH<1-4>:SPECTRAL:LOCK
0
MATH<1-4>:SPECTRAL:MAG
DB
MATH<1-4>:SPECTRAL:PHASE
DEGREES
MATH<1-4>:SPECTRAL:REFLEVEL
20.0000
MATH<1-4>:SPECTRAL:REFLEVELOFFSET
223.6000E-3
MATH<1-4>:SPECTRAL:RESBW
1000.0000E+3
MATH<1-4>:SPECTRAL:SPAN
625.0000E+6
MATH<1-4>:SPECTRAL:SUPPRESS
-200.0000
MATH<1-4>:SPECTRAL:UNWRAP
0
MATH<1-4>:SPECTRAL:WINDOW
GAUSSIAN
MATH<1-4>:UNITSTRING
”V”
MATH<1-4>:VERTICAL:POSITION
0.0000
MATH<1-4>:VERTICAL:SCALE
1.0000
MATHVAR:VAR<1-8>
0.0000
Measurement Default Values
The following table lists the Measurement factory default setup values.
Command
Default Values
MEASUREMENT:GATING
OFF
MEASUREMENT:IMMED:DELAY:DIRECTION
FORWARDS
MEASUREMENT:IMMED:DELAY:EDGE1
RISE
MEASUREMENT:IMMED:DELAY:EDGE2
RISE
MEASUREMENT:IMMED:METHOD
HISTOGRAM
MEASUREMENT:IMMED:NOISE
HIGH
MEASUREMENT:IMMED:REFLEVEL:ABSOLUTE:HIGH
0.0000
MEASUREMENT:IMMED:REFLEVEL:ABSOLUTE:LOW
0.0000
MEASUREMENT:IMMED:REFLEVEL:ABSOLUTE:MID1
0.0000
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 876 --
MEASUREMENT:IMMED:REFLEVEL:ABSOLUTE:MID2
0.0000
MEASUREMENT:IMMED:REFLEVEL:METHOD
PERCENT
MEASUREMENT:IMMED:REFLEVEL:PERCENT:HIGH
90.0000
MEASUREMENT:IMMED:REFLEVEL:PERCENT:LOW
10.0000
MEASUREMENT:IMMED:REFLEVEL:PERCENT:MID1
50.0000
MEASUREMENT:IMMED:REFLEVEL:PERCENT:MID2
50.0000
MEASUREMENT:IMMED:SOURCE1
CH1
MEASUREMENT:IMMED:SOURCE1:SIGTYPE
PULSE
MEASUREMENT:IMMED:SOURCE2
CH1
MEASUREMENT:IMMED:SOURCE2:SIGTYPE
PULSE
MEASUREMENT:IMMED:TYPE
UNDEFINED
MEASUREMENT:MEAS<1-8>:DELAY:DIRECTION
FORWARDS
MEASUREMENT:MEAS<1-8>:DELAY:EDGE1
RISE
MEASUREMENT:MEAS<1-8>:DELAY:EDGE2
RISE
MEASUREMENT:MEAS<1-8>:METHOD
HISTOGRAM
MEASUREMENT:MEAS<1-8>:NOISE
HIGH
MEASUREMENT:MEAS<1-8>:REFLEVEL:ABSOLUTE:HIGH
0.0000
MEASUREMENT:MEAS<1-8>:REFLEVEL:ABSOLUTE:LOW
0.0000
MEASUREMENT:MEAS<1-8>:REFLEVEL:ABSOLUTE:MID1
0.0000
MEASUREMENT:MEAS<1-8>:REFLEVEL:ABSOLUTE:MID2
0.0000
MEASUREMENT:MEAS<1-8>:REFLEVEL:METHOD
PERCENT
MEASUREMENT:MEAS<1-8>:REFLEVEL:PERCENT:HIGH9
0.0000
MEASUREMENT:MEAS<1-8>:REFLEVEL:PERCENT:LOW1
0.0000
MEASUREMENT:MEAS<1-8>:REFLEVEL:PERCENT:MID15
0.0000
MEASUREMENT:MEAS<1-8>:REFLEVEL:PERCENT:MID2
50.0000
MEASUREMENT:MEAS<1-8>:SOURCE1
CH1
MEASUREMENT:MEAS<1-8>:SOURCE1:SIGTYPE
PULSE
MEASUREMENT:MEAS<1-8>:SOURCE2
CH1
MEASUREMENT:MEAS<1-8>:SOURCE2:SIGTYPE
PULSE
MEASUREMENT:MEAS<1-8>:STATE
0
MEASUREMENT:MEAS<1-8>:TYPE
UNDEFINED
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 877 --
MEASUREMENT:STATISTICS:MODE
ALL
MEASUREMENT:STATISTICS:WEIGHTING
32
Miscellaneous Default Values
The following table lists the Miscellaneous factory default setup values.
Command
Default Values
ALIAS:STATE
0 (OFF)
AUXOUT:EDGE
FALLING <cannot change>
AUXOUT:SOURCE
ATRIGGER
CMDBATCH
1 (ON)
HEADER
1 (ON)
LOCK
NONE
ROSC:SOURCE
INTERNAL
VERBOSE
1 (ON)
Save and Recall Default Settings
The following table lists the Save and Recall factory default setup values.
Command
Default Values
SAVE:WAVEFORM:FILEFORMAT
INTERNAL
Trigger Default Values
The following table lists the Trigger factory default setup values.
Command
Default Values
TRIGGER:A:COMMUNICATION:AMI:PULSEFORM
PLUSONE
TRIGGER:A:COMMUNICATION:AMI:THRESHOLD:HIGH
0.0000
TRIGGER:A:COMMUNICATION:AMI:THRESHOLD:LOW
0.0000
TRIGGER:A:COMMUNICATION:BITRATE
1544000
TRIGGER:A:COMMUNICATION:CLOCK:POLARITY
RISE
TRIGGER:A:COMMUNICATION:CMI:PULSEFORM
PLUSONE
TRIGGER:A:COMMUNICATION:CODE
NRZ
TRIGGER:A:COMMUNICATION:SOURCE
CH1
TRIGGER:A:COMMUNICATION:SOURCE:TYPE
DATA
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 878 --
TRIGGER:A:COMMUNICATION:STANDARD
CUSTOM
TRIGGER:A:EDGE:COUPLING
DC
TRIGGER:A:EDGE:SLOPE
RISE
TRIGGER:A:EDGE:SOURCE
CH1
TRIGGER:A:HOLDOFF:BY
DEFAULT
TRIGGER:A:HOLDOFF:TIME
1.5000E-6
TRIGGER:A:LEVEL
0.0000
TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:CLASS
PATTERN
TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:FUNCTION
AND
TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:INPUT:CH1
HIGH
TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:INPUT:CH2
X
TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:INPUT:CH3
X
TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:PATTERN:INPUT:CH4
X
TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:PATTERN:WHEN
TRUE
TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:PATTERN:WHEN:LESSLIMIT
5.0000E-9
TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:PATTERN:WHEN:MORELIMIT
5.0000E-9
TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:SETHOLD:CLOCK:EDGE
RISE
TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:SETHOLD:CLOCK:SOURCE
CH2
TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:SETHOLD:CLOCK:THRESHOLD
1.2000
TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:SETHOLD:DATA:SOURCE
CH1
TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:SETHOLD:DATA:THRESHOLD
1.2000
TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:SETHOLD:HOLDTIME
2.0000E-9
TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:SETHOLD:SETTIME
3.0000E-9
TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:STATE:INPUT:CH4
RISE
TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:STATE:WHEN
TRUE
TRIGGER:A:LOGIC:THRESHOLD:<CH1-4>
1.2000
TRIGGER:A:MODE
AUTO
TRIGGER:A:PULSE:CLASS
GLITCH
TRIGGER:A:PULSE:GLITCH:POLARITY
POSITIVE
TRIGGER:A:PULSE:GLITCH:TRIGIF
ACCEPT
TRIGGER:A:PULSE:GLITCH:WIDTH
2.0000E-9
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 879 --
TRIGGER:A:PULSE:RUNT:LOGIC:INPUT:CH<1-4>
HIGH
TRIGGER:A:PULSE:RUNT:LOGIC:THRESHOLD:CH<1-4>
1.2000
TRIGGER:A:PULSE:RUNT:POLARITY
POSITIVE
TRIGGER:A:PULSE:RUNT:THRESHOLD:HIGH
1.2000
TRIGGER:A:PULSE:RUNT:THRESHOLD:LOW
800.0000E-3
TRIGGER:A:PULSE:RUNT:WHEN
OCCURS
TRIGGER:A:PULSE:RUNT:WIDTH
2.0000E-9
TRIGGER:A:PULSE:SOURCE
CH1
TRIGGER:A:PULSE:TIMEOUT:POLARITY
STAYSHIGH
TRIGGER:A:PULSE:TIMEOUT:TIME
2.0000E-9
TRIGGER:A:PULSE:TRANSITION:DELTATIME
2.0000E-9
TRIGGER:A:PULSE:TRANSITION:POLARITY
POSITIVE
TRIGGER:A:PULSE:TRANSITION:THRESHOLD:HIGH
1.2000
TRIGGER:A:PULSE:TRANSITION:THRESHOLD:LOW
800.0000E-3
TRIGGER:A:PULSE:TRANSITION:WHEN
FASTERTHAN
TRIGGER:A:PULSE:WIDTH:HIGHLIMIT
2.0000E-9
TRIGGER:A:PULSE:WIDTH:LOWLIMIT
2.0000E-9
TRIGGER:A:PULSE:WIDTH:POLARITY
POSITIVE
TRIGGER:A:PULSE:WIDTH:WHEN
WITHIN
TRIGGER:A:PULSE:WINDOW:LOGIC:INPUT:CH<1-4>
HIGH
TRIGGER:A:PULSE:WINDOW:LOGIC:THRESHOLD:<CH1-4>
1.2000
TRIGGER:A:PULSE:WINDOW:THRESHOLD:HIGH
1.2000
TRIGGER:A:PULSE:WINDOW:THRESHOLD:LOW
800.0000E-3
TRIGGER:A:PULSE:WINDOW:TYPE
INSIDE
TRIGGER:A:PULSE:WINDOW:WHEN
OCCURS
TRIGGER:A:PULSE:WINDOW:WIDTH
2.0000E-9
TRIGGER:A:TYPE
EDGE
TRIGGER:A:VIDEO:CUSTOM:FORMAT
INTERLACED
TRIGGER:A:VIDEO:CUSTOM:SCAN
RATE1
TRIGGER:A:VIDEO:FIELD
ALLFIELDS
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 880 --
TRIGGER:A:VIDEO:HOLDOFF:FIELD
0.0000
TRIGGER:A:VIDEO:LINE
1
TRIGGER:A:VIDEO:POLARITY
NORMAL
TRIGGER:A:VIDEO:SCAN
RATE1
TRIGGER:A:VIDEO:SOURCE
CH1
TRIGGER:A:VIDEO:STANDARD
NTSC
TRIGGER:B:BY
EVENTS
TRIGGER:B:EDGE:COUPLING
DC
TRIGGER:B:EDGE:SLOPE
RISE
TRIGGER:B:EDGE:SOURCE
CH1
TRIGGER:B:EVENTS:COUNT
2
TRIGGER:B:LEVEL
0.0000
TRIGGER:B:STATE
0
TRIGGER:B:TIME
16.0000E-9
TRIGGER:B:TYPE
EDGE
Vertical Default Values
The following table lists the Vertical factory default setup values.
Command
Default Values
CH<1-4>:BANDWIDTH
500.0000E+6
CH<1-4>:COUPLING
DC
CH<1-4>:DESKEW
0.0000
CH<1-4>:INVERT
0
CH<1-4>:LABEL:NAME
””
CH<1-4>:LABEL:XPOS
1.0000
CH<1-4>:LABEL:YPOS
<1> 2.2000
<2> 1.8000
<3> 1.4000
<4> 1.000
CH<1-4>:OFFSET
0.0000
CH<1-4>:POSITION
0.0000
CH<1-4>:PROBEFUNC:EXTATTEN
1.0000
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 881 --
CH<1-4>:PROBEFUNC:EXTUNITS
”V”
CH<1-4>:SCALE
100.0000E-3
CH<1-4>:TERMINATION
1.0000E+6
DATA:DESTINATION
REF1
DATA:ENCDG
RIBINARY
DATA:FRAMESTART
1
DATA:FRAMESTOP
5000
DATA:SOURCE
CH1
DATA:START
1
DATA:STOP
5000
REF1:LABEL:NAME
””
REF1:LABEL:XPOS
1.0000
REF1:LABEL:YPOS
-1.0000
REF2:LABEL:NAME
””
REF2:LABEL:XPOS
1.0000
REF2:LABEL:YPOS
-1.4000
REF3:LABEL:NAME
””
REF3:LABEL:XPOS
1.0000
REF3:LABEL:YPOS
-1.8000
REF4:LABEL:NAME
””
REF4:LABEL:XPOS
1.0000
REF4:LABEL:YPOS
-2.2000
SELECT:CH1
1
SELECT:CH2
0
SELECT:CH3
0
SELECT:CH4
0
SELECT:CONTROL
CH1
SELECT:MATH<1-4>
0
SELECT:REF<1-4>
0
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 882 --
Waveform Default Values
The following table lists the Waveform factory default setup values.
Command
Default Values
DATA:DESTINATION
REF1
DATA:ENCDG
RIBINARY
DATA:FRAMESTART
1
DATA:FRAMESTOP
5000
DATA:SOURCE
CH1
DATA:START
1
DATA:STOP
5000
Zoom Default Values
The following table lists the Zoom factory default setup values.
Command
Default Values
ZOOM:GRATICULE:SIZE
80
ZOOM:GRATICULE:SPLIT
EIGHTYTWENTY
ZOOM:MODE
0
ZOOM:SCROLL:DIRECTION
STOP
ZOOM:SCROLL:LOCK
0
ZOOM:SCROLL:SPEED
1
ZOOM:ZOOM1:CH<1-4>:HORIZONTAL:POSITION
50.0000
ZOOM:ZOOM1:CH<1-4>:HORIZONTAL:SCALE
5
ZOOM:ZOOM1:CH<1-4>:VERTICAL:POSITION
0.0000
ZOOM:ZOOM1:CH<1-4>:VERTICAL:SCALE
1.0000
ZOOM:ZOOM1:MATH<1-4>:HORIZONTAL:POSITION
50.0000
ZOOM:ZOOM1:MATH<1-4>:HORIZONTAL:SCALE
5
ZOOM:ZOOM1:MATH<1-4>:VERTICAL:POSITION
0.0000
ZOOM:ZOOM1:MATH<1-4>:VERTICAL:SCALE
1.0000
ZOOM:ZOOM1:REF<1-4>:HORIZONTAL:POSITION
50.0000
ZOOM:ZOOM1:REF<1-4>:HORIZONTAL:SCALE
5
ZOOM:ZOOM1:REF<1-4>:VERTICAL:POSITION
0.0000
ZOOM:ZOOM1:REF<1-4>:VERTICAL:SCALE
1.0000
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 883 --
ZOOM:ZOOM1:SCROLLLOCK
1
ZOOM:ZOOM1:STATE
1
ZOOM:ZOOM2:CH<1-4>:HORIZONTAL:POSITION
30.0000
ZOOM:ZOOM2:CH<1-4>:HORIZONTAL:SCALE
5
ZOOM:ZOOM2:CH<1-4>:VERTICAL:POSITION
0.0000
ZOOM:ZOOM2:CH<1-4>:VERTICAL:SCALE
1.0000
ZOOM:ZOOM2:MATH<1-4>:HORIZONTAL:POSITION
30.0000
ZOOM:ZOOM2:MATH<1-4>:HORIZONTAL:SCALE
5
ZOOM:ZOOM2:MATH<1-4>:VERTICAL:POSITION
0.0000
ZOOM:ZOOM2:MATH<1-4>:VERTICAL:SCALE
1.0000
ZOOM:ZOOM2:REF<1-4>:HORIZONTAL:POSITION
30.0000
ZOOM:ZOOM2:REF<1-4>:HORIZONTAL:SCALE
5
ZOOM:ZOOM2:REF<1-4>:VERTICAL:POSITION
0.0000
ZOOM:ZOOM2:REF<1-4>:VERTICAL:SCALE
1.0000
ZOOM:ZOOM2:SCROLLLOCK
1
ZOOM:ZOOM2:STATE
0
ZOOM:ZOOM3:CH<1-4>:HORIZONTAL:POSITION
70.0000
ZOOM:ZOOM3:CH<1-4>:HORIZONTAL:SCALE
5
ZOOM:ZOOM3:CH<1-4>:VERTICAL:POSITION
0.0000
ZOOM:ZOOM3:CH<1-4>:VERTICAL:SCALE
1.0000
ZOOM:ZOOM3:MATH<1-4>:HORIZONTAL:POSITION
70.0000
ZOOM:ZOOM3:MATH<1-4>:HORIZONTAL:SCALE
5
ZOOM:ZOOM3:MATH<1-4>:VERTICAL:POSITION
0.0000
ZOOM:ZOOM3:MATH<1-4>:VERTICAL:SCALE
1.0000
ZOOM:ZOOM3:REF<1-4>:HORIZONTAL:POSITION
70.0000
ZOOM:ZOOM3:REF<1-4>:HORIZONTAL:SCALE
5
ZOOM:ZOOM3:REF<1-4>:VERTICAL:POSITION
0.0000
ZOOM:ZOOM3:REF<1-4>:VERTICAL:SCALE
1.0000
ZOOM:ZOOM3:SCROLLLOCK
1
ZOOM:ZOOM3:STATE
0
ZOOM:ZOOM4:CH<1-4>:HORIZONTAL:POSITION
90.0000
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 884 --
ZOOM:ZOOM4:CH<1-4>:HORIZONTAL:SCALE
5
ZOOM:ZOOM4:CH<1-4>:VERTICAL:POSITION
0.0000
ZOOM:ZOOM4:CH<1-4>:VERTICAL:SCALE
1.0000
ZOOM:ZOOM4:MATH<1-4>:HORIZONTAL:POSITION
90.0000
ZOOM:ZOOM4:MATH<1-4>:HORIZONTAL:SCALE
5
ZOOM:ZOOM4:MATH<1-4>:VERTICAL:POSITION
0.0000
ZOOM:ZOOM4:MATH<1-4>:VERTICAL:SCALE
1.0000
ZOOM:ZOOM4:REF<1-4>:HORIZONTAL:POSITION
90.0000
ZOOM:ZOOM4:REF<1-4>:HORIZONTAL:SCALE
5
ZOOM:ZOOM4:REF<1-4>:VERTICAL:POSITION
0.0000
ZOOM:ZOOM4:REF<1-4>:VERTICAL:SCALE
1.0000
ZOOM:ZOOM4:SCROLLLOCK
1
ZOOM:ZOOM4:STATE
0
GPIB Interface Specifications
Overview
This topic describes details of the GPIB remote interface of the instrument. Normally, you will not need this information to use the instrument, but this information may be useful if you are connecting to controllers with unusual configurations.
GPIB Functions
The following table lists the GPIB interface functions and electrical
function subsets supported by this instrument and a brief description of
each function.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 885 --
GPIB Functions
Interface
Function
Subset
Description
Acceptor
Handshake
AH1
Controller
C0
Device Clear
DC1
Device
Trigger
DT1
Electrical
E2
Listener
L4
Parallel Poll
PP0
Remote/
Local
RL1
Service
Request
SR1
Source
Handshake
SH1
Talker
T5
The instrument can receive multiline
messages across the GPIB from other
devices.
This instrument can be operated as a
device or as a controller.
The instrument can respond to both
the DCL (Device Clear) interface
message and to the Selected Device
Clear (SDC) interface message when
the instrument is listen--addressed.
Device Trigger capability; the
instrument does respond to the GET
(Group Execute Trigger) interface
message.
The instrument uses tri--state buffers,
which are optimal for high--speed data
transfer.
The instrument becomes a listener
when it detects the listen address
being sent over the bus with the ATN
line asserted. The instrument ceases
to be a listener and becomes a talker
when it detects the talk address being
sent over the bus with the ATN line
asserted.
No Parallel Poll capability; the
instrument does not respond to PPC
(Parallel Poll Configure), PPD (Parallel
Poll Disable), PPE (Parallel Poll
Enable), or PPU (Parallel Poll
Unconfigure) interface messages, nor
does it send a status message when
the ATN and EOI lines are asserted
simultaneously.
The instrument can respond to both
the GTL (Go To Local) and LLO (Local
Lock Out) interface messages.
The instrument can assert the SRQ
line to notify the controller in charge
that it requires service.
The instrument can initiate multiline
messages to send across the GPIB to
other devices.
The instrument becomes a talker
when it detects the talk address being
sent over the bus with the ATN line
asserted. The instrument ceases to be
a talker and becomes a listener when
it detects the listen address being sent
over the bus with the ATN line
asserted. The instrument also ceases
to be a talker when it detects the talk
address of another device being sent
over the data lines with ATN asserted.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 886 --
Interface Messages
The following table shows the standard interface messages that the instrument supports.
Standard Interface Messages
Message
GPIB
DCL
Yes
GET
Yes
GTL
Yes
LLO
Yes
PPC
No*
PPD
No*
PPE
No*
PPU
No*
SDC
Yes
SPD
Yes
SPE
Yes
TCT
No*
UNL
Yes
UNT
Yes
Listen Addresses
Yes
Talk Addresses
Yes
*This instrument may be operated as a GPIB
controller or as a device. When Operated in
controller mode, your controller software
should respond to these interface messages.
The instrument will not respond to these
messages when the GPIB port is used as a
device.
TDS5000B Online Programmer Guide
-- 887 --
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement